UTOMATIC

YNAMIC

NCREMENTAL

ONLINEAR

NALYSIS

ADINA User Interface

Command Reference Manual
Volume I: Solids & Structures

ADINA 9.2 October 2016

ADINA R & D, Inc.

ADINA User Interface
Command Reference Manual
Volume I:

Solids & Structures

October 2016

ADINA 9.2

ADINA R & D, Inc.

71 Elton Avenue
Watertown, MA 02472 USA

tel. (617) 926-5199

telefax (617) 926-0238
www.adina.com
Notices

ADINA R & D, Inc. owns both this software program system and its documentation. Both
the program system and the documentation are copyrighted with all rights reserved by ADINA
R & D, Inc.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

ADINA R & D, Inc. makes no warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied that the Program
and its documentation including any modifications and updates are free from errors and
defects. In no event shall ADINA R & D, Inc. become liable to the User or any party for any
loss, including but not limited to, loss of time, money or goodwill, which may arise from the
use of the Program and its documentation including any modifications and updates.

Trademarks

ADINA is a registered trademark of K. J. Bathe / ADINA R & D, Inc.

All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Copyright Notice

ADINA R & D, Inc. 1994 - 2016

October 2016 Printing
Printed in the USA
 Table of contents

Table of contents
Chapter 1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Program execution ................................................................................................ 1-3
1.2 Command syntax ................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Input details .......................................................................................................... 1-6
1.4 Messages ............................................................................................................ 1-10
1.5 File input/output .................................................................................................. 1-11
1.6 The AUI database ................................................................................................ 1-11
1.7 Listings ................................................................................................................ 1-12
1.8 Units .................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.9 Tips for writing batch files ................................................................................... 1-13
1.10 Related documentation ........................................................................................ 1-13

Chapter 2 Quick index .......................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 New commands, parameters and options ............................................................. 2-3
2.2 Quick overview of commands .............................................................................. 2-6

Chapter 3 Input/output .......................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Database operations ............................................................................................. 3-3
3.2 Analysis data files ................................................................................................ 3-9
3.3 External data ........................................................................................................ 3-12
3.4 Auxiliary files ....................................................................................................... 3-32
3.5 Program termination ............................................................................................. 3-40
3.6 Auxiliary commands ............................................................................................ 3-42

Chapter 4 Interface control and editing ............................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Settings ................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.2 Editing ................................................................................................................... 4-9

Chapter 5 Control data .......................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 General .................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2 Analysis details ................................................................................................... 5-24
5.3 Options ................................................................................................................ 5-39
5.4 Solver details ....................................................................................................... 5-57
5.5 Automatic control ................................................................................................ 5-61
5.6 Time-dependence ................................................................................................ 5-71
5.7 Iteration ............................................................................................................... 5-74
5.8 Tolerances ........................................................................................................... 5-82
5.9 Analysis output ................................................................................................... 5-87
5.10 Solution monitoring ........................................................................................... 5-112

ADINA R & D, Inc. v

Table of contents

Chapter 6 Geometry definition ............................................................................................. 6-1

6.1 Coordinate systems .............................................................................................. 6-3
6.2 Points .................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3 Lines .................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.4 Surfaces ............................................................................................................... 6-45
6.5 Volumes ................................................................................................................ 6-62
6.6 Solid models ........................................................................................................ 6-77
6.7 Spatial functions .................................................................................................. 6-90
6.8 Transformations ................................................................................................... 6-97
6.9 Miscellaneous ................................................................................................... 6-107
6.10 ADINA - M ........................................................................................................ 6-114

Chapter 7 Model definition ................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1 Material models .................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Cross-Sections/Layers ...................................................................................... 7-188
7.3 Element properties ............................................................................................. 7-214
7.4 Substructures and cyclic symmetry .................................................................. 7-251
7.5 Contact conditions ............................................................................................ 7-264
7.6 Fracture mechanics ............................................................................................ 7-338
7.7 Boundary conditions ......................................................................................... 7-382
7.8 Loading .............................................................................................................. 7-420
7.9 Initial conditions ................................................................................................ 7-469
7.10 Systems ............................................................................................................. 7-484
7.11 Alignment properties ......................................................................................... 7-520

Chapter 8 Finite element representation ............................................................................. 8-1

8.1 Element groups ..................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2 Mesh generation.................................................................................................. 8-66
8.3 Elements ............................................................................................................. 8-186

Chapter 9 Direct finite element data input ........................................................................... 9-1

9.1 Nodal data ............................................................................................................. 9-3
9.2 Element data ........................................................................................................ 9-21
9.3 Boundary conditions ........................................................................................... 9-66
9.4 Loads ................................................................................................................... 9-76
9.5 Initial conditions .................................................................................................. 9-91
9.6 Contact .............................................................................................................. 9-103
9.7 Fracture .............................................................................................................. 9-107
9.8 Substructures and cyclic symmetry .................................................................. 9-113

Command index ............................................................................................................... Index-1

Appendix 1 - Error messages ................................................................................................ A-1

vi AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition

 Chapter 1

Introduction
 Sec. 1.1 Program execution

1. Introduction

This reference manual provides concise descriptions of the command input requirements for
the ADINA User Interface (AUI). This introduction serves to give some background informa-
tion and indicate the general command syntax including descriptions of the conventions
used.

1.1 Program execution

Commands can be entered in the following modes:

Interactive

(a) AUI is running with the user interface displayed you can enter commands into the user
interface command window.

(b) AUI is running in command mode (using the "-cmd" option) you can enter commands
from standard input.

Batch

(a) AUI is running with the user interface displayed you can read commands from a file by
choosing FileOpen.

(b) Commands can be read from a given file using the aui startup options -s (UNIX versions)
or -b (Windows version).

You can also read commands from a file using the READ command (see Section 3).

1.2 Command syntax

Here is the layout of a typical command reference page:

COMMAND[1] PARAM1 PARAM2[2]...

data1i data2i[3]...

General description of command function.[4]

ADINA R & D, Inc. 1-3

Chap. 1 Introduction

PARAM1 [<default>][6]
Description of parameter PARAM1[5]. {<input choices>}[7]

PARAM2 [<default>]
Description of parameter PARAM2. {<input choices>}

...

data1i [<default>][6]
Description of data line entry data1i (ith row, column 1). {<input choices>}[7]
[5]

data2i [<default>]
Description of data line entry data2i (ith row, column 2). {<input choices>}
...

Auxiliary commands[8]

LIST COMMAND
Brief description of this command.

DELETE COMMAND
Brief description of this command.

Issuing a command allows you to alter the data associated with the command. This data
comprises the values associated with the command parameters and possibly a table, input via
"data lines", associated with the command.

In the above, the command name "COMMAND"[1], given at the top of the reference page,
has the first few characters emphasized to show the minimum number of characters required
to be input to uniquely identify the command. A list of parameters[2] and data lines[3] for the
command then follows. In this list the first few characters in the parameter and data line
names are emphasized to show the minimum number of characters required to uniquely
identify the parameter and data line names.

Following a general outline of the command function[4], a description of the command

parameters and data line entries is given below the relevant keynames[5].

The parameters usually have default values[6] which are assumed if the parameter is not
explicitly specified. The default values are indicated in brackets [ ] a bold value indicates a
default value (number or string) and an italicized string indicates the source of the default
value, which is either (a) a text description of the default, (b) a parameter name from the same

1-4 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 1.2 Command syntax

command, or (c) a combination of command + parameter names, indicating that the default is
taken from the setting of another (different) command parameter.

A parameter for which no default is provided means that there is no default i.e., some choice
must be entered for that parameter.

One important parameter type is that of an entity identifier for which the parameter keyname
"NAME" is normally reserved. If the object identified by NAME has already been defined,
then the other parameter defaults are set to the previous settings for that object. If a new
NAME is given then the defaults, as indicated by the command reference pages herein, are
taken. In the former case, execution of the command redefines the named object.

The choice of parameter values is often discussed within the parameter description, but,
where appropriate, a simple list of choices follows the parameter description[7]. For example,
parameters with simple logical choices will have the list "{YES/NO}" appended to the
description.

When a table is associated with the command, the command includes data input lines. For
some commands, the table is initially empty, but for other commands the table already
includes data lines.

The columns of a data line can be divided into two types: key columns and data columns.
When a data line has key columns, the key value columns always precede the data value
columns. In this case the values of the key columns uniquely identify the data line, and,
therefore, two data lines cannot have the same key column values for such input, the
second input data line overwrites the data associated with the key column values.

You can delete a data line by preceding the key column values with the DELETE prefix. When
a data line does not have key columns, two or more data lines can have the same values but
you cannot use the DELETE prefix to delete data lines without key columns. However, you
can always delete all of the data lines of a table using the @CLEAR or CLEAR keywords.
This is of course especially useful for those tables in which there are no key columns.

For data line input, not all the columns need be specified; the ENTRIES keyword, which can
be input as the first data line following the command line, can be used to select a subset of
the data column entries (see below). Then the values you enter in the subsequent data lines
are associated with the columns indicated by the ENTRIES parameters, the other data
columns taking default values whenever possible. Note, however, that key columns are
required input, and should thus be included in the ENTRIES column list.

Many commands have "auxiliary" commands[8] which are entered with one of the following
prefixes:

ADINA R & D, Inc. 1-5

Chap. 1 Introduction

LIST List object definitions.

DELETE Delete objects from the database.
UPDATE Update command defaults.
RESET Reset command defaults.
COPY Copy objects.
SET Set "currently active" objects.
SHOW Show "currently active" objects.

A LIST prefixed command has several forms:

LIST COMMAND List all object identifiers (names).

LIST COMMAND NAME List definition of object with identifier NAME.

LIST COMMAND FIRST LAST List definitions of a range of objects with integer
label numbers. Parameters FIRST, LAST may
also take the string values FIRST, LAST,
ALL.

A DELETE prefixed command has the following forms:

DELETE COMMAND NAME Delete the object with identifier NAME.

DELETE COMMAND FIRST LAST Delete a set of objects with integer label
numbers in the specified range.

Note that an object may not be deleted if another model entity depends on its existence as
part of its own definition. For example, a geometry line cannot be deleted if it forms a bound-
ing edge of some geometry surface.

1.3 Input details

Command input
Please refer to command AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT in the following discussion
(Section 5.5):
AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT POINT DOF DISPLACEMENT
ALPHA DISPMAX CONTINUE
RPRINT TYPE NODE

When entering commands, only as many characters as necessary to uniquely specify the
command name need be entered. The same rule applies to the parameters and data line entry

1-6 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 1.3 Input details

key names within a command. The minimum number of characters necessary are indicated in
bold.

Note that command / parameter is case insensitive. All commands, parameters, values are
stored in upper case, except for string variables (headings, graph legends, etc.).

Parameter values may be input in any order if the keynames are used, e.g.,

AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT DOF=3 RPRINT=YES DISPMAX=5.0

DISPLACEMENT=4.0 POINT=17
Some or all of the parameters can be excluded if the positional order of the parameters is
observed, e.g.,
AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT 17 3 4.0, ,5.0, ,YES

(the parameters ALPHA and CONTINUE have been omitted by the use of the commas).

A mix of keyname parameters and positional input is allowed, e.g.,

AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT 17 DISPLACEMENT=4.0 DOF=3,,5.0,,

YES
The above uses of the AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT command are all equivalent.
The omitted parameters in each case take the default values.

Data lines
Many commands require data line (tabular) input, e.g., MODAL-DAMPING (see Section 5.3):

MODAL-DAMPING
modei factori

Use the ENTRIES keyword to select only the data columns that you want to enter (the other
data columns will be given default values):

MODAL-DAMPING
ENTRIES MODE FACTOR
1 1.0
2 0.5
3 2.5
4 1.5
DATAEND

Most commands which take this form of input also allow for incremental row generation via the
"STEP inc TO" option where "inc" represents an increment in the generation, i.e., in the above

ADINA R & D, Inc. 1-7

Chap. 1 Introduction

example modei+k, modei+2k, ..., modej-k, are all generated, with the corresponding values for "factor"
linearly interpolated between factori and factorj. When generating integer values, the difference
between the first and last values must be an integer multiple of the STEP increment (i.e.,
modulo((modej-modei),k) = 0). There is a default step increment, which for integer values is
normally 1; in this case "STEP 1 TO" may be input simply as "TO". Here are some examples:

MODAL-DAMPING
1 5.5
TO
3 7.5
@
or

MODAL-DAMPING
1 5.5
STEP 1 TO 3 7.5
DATAEND

Both of these are equivalent to

MODAL-DAMPING
1 5.5
2 6.5
3 7.5
@

Note that data line input may be terminated either by entering the symbol "@" or the string
"DATAEND" data line input will be terminated automatically by input of the next command.

Data line rows can be deleted by preceding the key value by the prefix DELETE. This method
of deletion also supports row "generation" i.e., "DELETE i STEP k TO j" may be used to
delete a range of values.

All the data lines associated with a command may be deleted simultaneously using the
CLEAR or @CLEAR keywords. This is useful when you want to define a table if you do not
know if the table is already defined or not:

TIMEFUNCTION 1
CLEAR

which removes all the currently defined data lines of timefunction 1.

The columns for data line input can be selected by use of the keyword ENTRIES in the first
input data line following the command line, e.g.,

1-8 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 1.3 Input details

COORDINATES POINT
ENTRIES NAME Y Z

which indicates that only global Y and Z coordinates are to be input for geometry points in
the subsequent data lines. The X coordinate assumes the default value 0.0, and thus
subsequent data lines entered describe points in the global Y-Z plane.

Names
AUI names are usually of two types alphanumeric strings of up to 30 characters or integer
label numbers. Integer label numbers are normally greater than or equal to 1.

Integer values
Integers can be input with a maximum of 9 significant digits. For positive values, a preceding
+ sign may, if desired, be input.

Real values
Specification of real values can include a decimal point and/or an exponent. The exponent
must be preceded by the letters E, e, D, or d, e.g.,

2E5
2.0d+05
200000.

all refer to the same real number.

Alphanumeric values
Alphanumeric values must start with a letter (A-Z, a-z) or number (0-9). The only permissible
characters allowed are the letters A-Z, a-z, the digits 0 to 9, the hyphen (-), and the underscore (_).
Lower-case characters in an alphanumeric value are always converted to upper-case by the AUI.

String values
A string should be enclosed by apostrophes ('). Any apostrophe within the string must be
entered twice. Any character can be included in a string. Lower-case characters in a string
value are not converted to upper-case.

Filenames
A filename should be enclosed by apostrophes ('). Filenames can be up to 256 characters
long.

Length of input lines

Input lines to the AUI can each contain up to 256 characters.

Line continuation, line separator, blanks, and commas

If the last non-blank character of a command or data line is a comma (,), then the command or

ADINA R & D, Inc. 1-9

Chap. 1 Introduction

data is continued on the next input line. The total length of an input line and all of its
continuations can be up to 2000 characters.

A slash (/) in an input line can be used to end a command or data input line; more commands
or data can then be entered on the same input line.

A blank, several blanks, <Tab> characters, a comma, or a comma surrounded by blanks act as
delimiters. Commands, parameter keynames and values must be separated by delimiters.

Comments
Comment lines can appear anywhere in the input and are identified by an asterisk (*) in
column 1, e.g.,

* This is a comment line

Parameter substitution
You can define parameters as numeric expressions, and use the parameter values in later
commands. This feature is useful when creating batch files used in structural optimization.
For example:

PARAMETER A `5 + 7`
PARAMETER B `2*$A`
PARAMETER C `3 + $A + 4*$B`
BODY BLOCK DX1=$A DX2=$B DX3=$C

1.4 Messages

Commands will often echo messages confirming their successful completion, or provide other
information. Otherwise you may get error/warning messages with varying levels of severity:

*** INPUT ERROR

You have entered an unacceptable parameter value or data. The command will not
execute with invalid input.

*** WARNING
The command has completed, but has detected a possible inconsistency which may have
to be resolved.

*** ALERT
The command has completed, but has detected a definite modeling inconsistency which
has to be resolved in order to create a valid model.

*** ERROR
The command has not completed.

1-10 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 1.5 File input/output

*** INTERNAL ERROR

The program has determined some conflict in the database, normally indicating a
software bug. You should contact ADINA R & D Inc. if you encounter such a message.
In order to track down the source of the problem it would be most useful if the input
responsible for this condition is made available to the support engineers.

*** MEMORY OVERFLOW

The command has not completed, due to the program running out of memory. Increase
the memory allocation to the program

1.5 File input/output

The AUI uses several files for handling I/O. Here is a brief description of some of them,
together with a suggested filename extension convention:

<file>.in ADINA-IN batch command input.

<file>.idb ADINA-IN permanent database.
<file>.plo ADINA-PLOT batch command input.
<file>.pdb ADINA-PLOT permanent database.
<file>.ses AUI session file (echo of command input).
<file>.ps PostScript snapshot.
<file>.dat Analysis data.
<file>.por Analysis porthole.
<file>.out Analysis printout.

1.6 The AUI database

The AUI uses an internal database to store and retrieve data used during program execution.
The internal database is stored in main memory and, if main memory is not sufficient, a tempo-
rary database file is created to hold the excess data. The internal database can be saved in a
disk file, called a permanent database file, so that it can be retrieved in a future run.

Five commands are used to create, open and save databases. DATABASE NEW creates a
new empty internal database. DATABASE OPEN initializes the internal database using a
specified permanent database file. DATABASE SAVE saves the internal database to disk,
allowing you to specify the name of the database file. DATABASE ATTACH causes the AUI
to use the specified permanent database file as the internal database. DATABASE DETACH
renames the internal database file as a permanent database file. All of these commands are
described in Section 3.1.

The permanent database file is similar to a text file used in a word processing program. Like
the text file, the permanent database file resides on disk and can be retrieved by the program

ADINA R & D, Inc. 1-11

Chap. 1 Introduction

in a future run. The permanent database file can be saved on disk periodically during
program execution to protect against loss of data due to computer failure. During each save
operation, a different permanent database file can be selected so that several versions of the
database are available for retrieval. (This is similar to saving several versions of a text file on
disk when working with a word processing program.) For the differences between DATABASE
OPEN and DATABASE ATTACH, see the command description for DATABASE ATTACH. For
the differences between DATABASE SAVE and DATABASE DETACH, see the command
description for DATABASE DETACH.

1.7 Listings

Many AUI commands generate lists. For example, the ZONELIST command (see The AUI
Command Reference Manual, Volume IV) lists the values of variables. You can also specify
whether listings are to be sent to your terminal or to a disk file (see the FILELIST command).

When the listings are sent to your terminal, you are prompted by

--More--( %)

after each screen of the listing. The number printed before the percent sign represents the
percentage of the file that has been displayed so far. Responses to this prompt are as
follows:

<return> Display another line of the listing.

<space bar> Display another screenful of the listing.
<i><space bar> Display i more lines.
D or d Display the next half-screen (a scroll) of the listing.
<i>D or <i>d Set the number of lines in the scroll to i and display the next scroll.
<i>Z or <i>z Set the number of lines in each screen to i and display the next screen.
<i>S or <i>s Skip i lines and print a screenful of lines.
<i>F or <i>f Skip i screenfuls and print a screenful of lines.
<i>B or <i>b Skip back i screenfuls and print a screenful of lines.
Q or q Stop the listing.
= Print the current line number in the listing.
. Repeat the last prompt response.

In these responses, <i> represents an optional integer argument, defaulting to 1. If you are
familiar with the UNIX operating system, you will recognize that the above options corre-
spond closely to the options of the 'more' command.

1-12 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 1.8 Units

1.8 Units

In model definition no particular unit system is assumed. Any consistent unit system may be
adopted. Certain thermodynamic constants do, however, have a choice of temperature unit
system (Celsius/Centigrade/Kelvin, Fahrenheit/Rankine).

1.9 Tips for writing batch files

Increasing execution speed: The AUI contains features that are useful when you enter
commands using the dialog boxes, but are not useful when you read commands from a batch
file. These features are activated by default. You can deactivate the features to increase the
speed at which batch files are processed, and to reduce the memory requirements of the AUI.
The features are

Undo/redo storage:
Command CONTROL UNDO=-1 turns off storage for undo/redo information.

Automatic model rebuilding:

Command CONTROL AUTOMREBUILD=NO turns off automatic model rebuilding.

Session file creation:

Command FILESESSION NO turns off creation of the session file.

Storage of session file information in the database:

To turn off this feature, use the command CONTROL SESSIONSTORAGE=NO.

Stopping after an error or memory overflow is detected:

Command CONTROL ERRORACTION=SKIP activate a feature that AUI skips the
remaining commands in a batch file after an error or memory overflow is detected.

Summary:
Use the following commands to perform all of the above actions:

FILESESSION NO
CONTROL UNDO=-1 AUTOMREBUILD=NO SESSIONSTORAGE=NO,
ERRORACTION=SKIP

1.10 Related documentation

At the time of printing of this manual, the following documents are available with the ADINA
System:

ADINA R & D, Inc. 1-13

Chap. 1 Introduction

Installation Notes
Describes the installation of the ADINA System on your computer. Depending on the
platform, the appropriate installation notes in pdf format can be printed or downloaded from
http://www.adina.com

ADINA Handbook
Written as a task-oriented desktop reference, the ADINA handbook helps users to quickly
and effectively leverage ADINAs advanced geometric modeling, meshing, and visualization
features.

ADINA User Interface Command Reference Manual

Volume I: ADINA Solids & Structures Model Definition

Volume II: ADINA Thermal Model Definition

Volume III: ADINA CFD & FSI Model Definition

Volume IV: ADINA EM Model Definition

Volume V: Display Processing

These documents describe the AUI command language. You use the AUI command language
to write batch files for the AUI.

ADINA Primer
Tutorial for the ADINA User Interface, presenting a sequence of worked examples which
progressively instruct you how to effectively use the ADINA System.

Theory and Modeling Guide

Volume I: ADINA Solids & Structures

Volume II: ADINA Thermal

Volume III: ADINA CFD & FSI

Volume IV: ADINA EM

Provides a concise summary and guide for the theoretical basis of the analysis programs.
The manuals also provide references to other publications which contain further information,
but the detail contained in the manuals is usually sufficient for effective understanding and
use of the programs.

1-14 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 1.10 Related documentation

ADINA Verification Manual

Presents solutions to problems which verify and demonstrate the usage of the ADINA
System. Input files for these problems are distributed along with the ADINA System pro-
grams.

ADINA-Nastran Interface Manual

Describes the ADINA-AUI Nastran Interface. This guide is available as a pdf file. The
Nastran Case Control Commands, Parameters, and Bulk Data Entries that are supported by
the AUI are documented.

TRANSOR for I-DEAS Users Guide

Describes the interface between the ADINA System and NX I-deas. This guide is available in
html format and is directly accessible from the TRANSOR interface within I-deas. The use of
TRANSOR for I-deas to perform pre-/post-processing and ADINA analysis within the I-deas
environment, is described.

TRANSOR for Femap Users Guide

Describes the interface between the ADINA System and Femap. This guide is available as a
pdf file. The use of TRANSOR for Femap to perform pre-/post-processing and ADINA
analysis within the Femap environment, is described.

ADINA System 9.2 Release Notes

Provides a description of the new and modified features of the ADINA System 9.2.

You will also find the following book useful:

K. J. Bathe, Finite Element Procedures, 2nd ed., Cambridge, MA: Klaus-Jrgen Bathe, 2014
Provides theoretical background to many of the solution techniques used in the ADINA
System.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 1-15

Chap. 1 Introduction

1-16 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
Chapter 2

Quick index
Quick index Chap. 2 Quick index

2.1 New commands, parameters and options

In version 9.2, the following new commands, parameters and options were added to Volume I
of the AUI Command Reference Manual. The commands are listed in page number order.

Command Parameter Option/[Default] Page

MASTER OP2STR 5-6

AUTOMATIC TIME-
STEPPING LSTIME 5-65
FORCE, DISPLACEMENT,
PIPE-INTERNAL-
DISK STORAGE PRESSURES, FDIRECTIONS (Removed) 5-109
PCOINCIDENCE,
POINT BETWEEN PTOLERANCE 6-8
PCOINCIDENCE,
POINT CENTER PTOLERANCE 6-10
PCOINCIDENCE,
POINT NODE PTOLERANCE 6-11
POINT LINE 6-12
POINT EDGE 6-14
LINE EDGE 6-41
BODY REVOLVED NCOINCIDE GROUP 6-149
RATIO, PROGRESSION,
BODY REVOLVED CBIAS 6-149
BODY SWEEP NCOINCIDE GROUP 6-163
RATIO, PROGRESSION,
BODY SWEEP CBIAS 6-163
MATERIAL THREE-
NETWORK GENFAC 7-96
RUBBER-
VISCOELASTIC
BERGSTROM-BOYCE GENFAC 7-142
GPOINT, NCOINCIDE,
RIGIDLINK NCTOLERANCE 7-382
GPOINT, NCOINCIDE,
CONSTRAINT NCTOLERANCE 7-386
GPOINT, NCOINCIDE,
CONSTRAINT-MS NCTOLERANCE 7-394

ADINA R & D, Inc. 2-3

Chap. 2 Quick index Quick index

Command Parameter Option/[Default] Page

SUBDIVIDE EDGE CBIAS 8-85

GFACE MIDNODES PROJECT 8-130
ELDELETE ELEM 8-164
ELDELETE ELSET 8-164
ELDELETE EGROUP 8-164
BLTABLE-2D 8-209
BLTABLE-3D 8-212
NODESET APPEND 9-10
NODE-DELETE 9-18
NODE-RENUMBER 9-19
ELEDGESET APPEND 9-24
ELEMENTSET APPEND 9-26
ELFACESET APPEND 9-29

Updates in version 9.2.1

Command Parameter Option/[Default] Page

ANALYSIS BATHE-DELTA, BATHE- Description change 5-24

DYNAMIC-DIRECT- ALPHA
INTEGRATION
AUTOMATIC TIME- RESPS AUTOMATIC 5-65
STEPPING (Removed)
GFACE PREFSHAPE [QUADRILATERAL] 8-130

Updates in version 9.2.2

Command Parameter Option/[Default] Page

SESSIONOPTION, 4-3
CONTROL SESSIONTABLE, SZNAME
ITERATION PRINTOUT [ALL] 5-74

2-4 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
Quick index Chap. 2 Quick index

Command Parameter Option/[Default] Page

RESULTS-ELEMENT Description change 5-105

CROSS-SECTION SINERTIA, TINERTIA, 7-207
PROPERTIES STINERTIA
STRAIN-FIELD Description change 7-477
IMPERFECTION- [NONE]; Description 7-479
SHAPE OPTION change
Correction: [QUAD- 8-130
GFACE PREFSHAPE DIRECT]
GBODY DEGENERATE Correction: [YES] 8-138
ELDELETE ELEM, elem(i), egroup(i), elset(i) 8-164
ELSET, EGROUP

Updates in version 9.2.3

Command Parameter Option/[Default] Page

KINEMATICS RIGIDLINK-6DOF V89 5-39

RIGIDLINK Description change 7-382

Updates in version 9.2.4

Command Parameter Option/[Default] Page

TMC-ITERATION METHOD, STEP- Description change 5-81

REFORMING, STEP- (correction)
EQUILIBRIUM
CONTACT-CONTROL TENSION-CONSISTENT Correction 7-266
NODE-RENUMBER Description change 9-19

Updates in version 9.2.5

Command Parameter Option/[Default] Page

AUTOMATIC TIME- MAXSUBD Description change 5-65

STEPPING

ADINA R & D, Inc. 2-5

Chap. 2 Quick index Quick index

Command Parameter Option/[Default] Page

LOAD ROTATION REF-FRAME Description change 7-447

(correction)
CSDELETE TWO-D GROUP, Description change 8-171
CONTACTSURFACE (correction)
CSDELETE THREE-D GROUP, Description change 8-172
CONTACTSURFACE (correction)

2-6 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition

2.2 Quick overview of commands
The following is a quick overview of all AUI commands in Volume I of the AUI Reference
Manual and their functions. The commands are presented in the order in which they appear.
Chapter 3: Input/output
Section 3.1: Database operations
DATABASE NEW, creates a new database.
DATABASE OPEN, creates a new database
using the specified permanent data-
base file.
DATABASE WRITE, saves the current
internal database as a permanent
database file.
DATABASE SAVE, saves the current
internal database as a permanent
database file.
DATABASE ATTACH, allows access to the
specified file as an AUI database file.
DATABASE DETACH, creates a permanent
database file by detaching a working
copy of the database file.
Section 3.2: Analysis data files
ADINA, initiates model validation and/or
creates an ADINA data file.
REBUILD-MODEL, forces the AUI to
rebuild the model.
Section 3.3: External data
LOADDXF, loads an AutoCAD DXF file
into the database.
LOADIGES, loads an IGES file into the
database.
LOADOCC, loads an OpenCascade file into
the database.
LOADSOLID, loads Parasolid part into the
database.
LOAD-CLOUD, reads in a point cloud file
(depicting the boundary of an object)
ADINA R & D, Inc.
Chap. 2 Quick index
and writes out an STL file.
LOAD-STL, Loads an STL format file into the
AUI by creating a STL body.
IMPORT-EXTERNAL, loads a n external file
into the database.
IMPORT-STEP, loads a STEP file into the
database.
NASTRAN-ADINA, maps a NASTRAN
data file into the database.
EXPORT NASTRAN, exports an ADINA
model to a NASTRAN file.
EXPORT UNIVERSAL, exports the mesh in
ADINA-AUI to an I-DEAS universal
file format.
Section 3.4: Auxiliary files
READ, reads AUI input commands from the
specified file.
FILEREAD, controls the source of input
commands to the AUI.
FILESESSION, controls the generation and
output of a session file.
FILELIST, controls the format and output of
listings.
FILEECHO, controls the echoing of input
commands.
FILELOG, controls the output of log
messages.
COMMANDFILE, creates a file of commands
to recreate the current model.
RTOFILE, defines the contents of a run-time-
option file.
Section 3.5: Program termination
PAUSE, stops processing commands until a
key is hit.
2-7
Chap. 2 Quick index
END, terminates the program.
Section 3.6: Auxiliary commands
PARAMETER, defines a parameter that can
be substituted in a later command.
EXECUTE, executes a system command
string within the AUI environment.
Chapter 4: Interface control and editing
Section 4.1: Settings
CONTROL, defines certain parameters that
control program behavior.
Section 4.2: Editing
UNDO, cancels the effects of previous com-
mands.
REDO, cancels the effects of previous
UNDO commands.
Chapter 5: Control data
Section 5.1: General
FEPROGRAM, specifies the finite element
analysis program to be used to solve
the problem.
HEADING, specifies a title for the problem
described by the model database.
MASTER, defines the data controlling the
execution of the analysis program
ADINA.
DOF-ACTIVE, used to identify the active
degree of freedom (DOF) of reduced
model.
TMC-CONTROL, controls the performance
of heat transfer analysis with ADINA.
2-8 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
Section 5.2: Analysis details
ANALYSIS DYNAMIC-DIRECT-
INTEGRATION, specifies time integration
parameters for dynamic analysis.
FREQUENCIES, specifies control data for a
frequency solution.
BUCKLING-LOADS, specifies control data
for evaluating static buckling loads and
corresponding mode shapes.
ANALYSIS MODAL-TRANSIENT, pro-
vides control data for a mode superposi -
tion analysis.
ANALYSIS MODAL-PARTICIPATION-
FACTORS, provides control data for a modal
participation factor analysis.
ANALYSIS MODAL-STRESSES,
provides control data for modal stress
calculations.
ANALYSIS SWITCH, sets up control data
for a change in analysis.
Section 5.3: Options
KINEMATICS, defines the kinematic
formulation.
MASS-MATRIX, selects the type of mass
matrix to be used in dynamic analysis.
RAYLEIGH-DAMPING, specifies Rayleigh
Damping coefficients.
MODAL-DAMPING, defines modal damping
factors to be used in mode superposi-
tion analysis.
FAILURE MAXSTRESS, defines a failure
criterion of type MAXSTRESS.
FAILURE MAXSTRAIN, defines a failure
criterion of type MAXSTRAIN.
FAILURE TSAI-HILL, defines a failure
criterion of type TSAI-HILL.
FAILURE TSAI-WU, defines a failure
criterion of type TSAI-WU.
FAILURE HASHIN, defines a failure
criterion of type HASHIN.

FAILURE USERSUPPLIED, defines a failure
criterion of type USERSUPPLIED.
TEMPERATURE-REFERENCE, defines
reference temperatures and temperature
gradients for both initial conditions and
thermal loads.
Section 5.4: Solver details
SOLVER ITERATIVE, defines control data
for the iterative solution of the matrix
system of equilibrium equations.
PPROCESS, specifies the number of the
processors used to split element groups
into sub-groups.
TMC-SOLVER ITERATIVE, defines control
data for the iterative solution of the
matrix system of equilibrium equations
for heat transfer analysis.
Section 5.5: Automatic control
AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT,
defines parameters for an automatic
load-displacement control (LDC)
procedure.
AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING, defines
parameters controlling the automatic
time-stepping procedure.
AUTOMATIC TOTAL-LOAD-APPLICA-
TION, controls the total-load-application
(TLA) procedure.
Section 5.6: Time dependence
TIMESTEP, defines a timestep sequence
which controls the time/loadstep
incrementation during analysis.
TIMEFUNCTION, defines a timefunction,
which may be referenced, e.g., by an
applied load.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
Chap. 2 Quick index
Section 5.7: Iteration
ITERATION, selects the equilibrium iteration
scheme for a nonlinear analysis.
STIFFNESS-STEPS, controls the output
timesteps at which the effective stiffness
matrix is reformed by the program.
EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS, controls the output
timesteps at which equilibrium iterations
are performed.
TMC-ITERATION, selects the equilibrium
iteration scheme to be employed for a
heat transfer analysis.
Section 5.8: Tolerances
TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, specifies
certain geometric tolerances.
TOLERANCES ITERATION, specifies the
convergence criteria and corresponding
tolerances controlling the equilibrium
iteration scheme.
Section 5.9: Analysis output
PRINTOUT, controls the amount of output
printed.
PRINT-STEPS, controls the output
timesteps at which results are printed.
PORTHOLE, controls the saving of input
data and solution results on the port-
hole file.
NODESAVE-STEPS, controls the output
timesteps at which nodal results are
saved in the porthole file.
ELEMSAVE-STEPS, controls the output
timesteps at which element results are
saved on the porthole file.
PRINTNODES, selects nodes for which
solution results shall be printed.
CONTACT-OUTPUT-NODES, select nodes
for output of contact results.
2-9
Chap. 2 Quick index
REACTION-NODES, selects nodes for
printing reaction forces.
RESULT-ELEMENT,Selects the element
results to be saved in the porthole file.
SAVENODES, selects nodes for which
the solution results shall be saved in
the porthole file.
DISK-STORAGE, indicates file storage and
input/output control.
Section 5.10: Solution monitoring
MONITOR, defines solution monitors to
track the change of variables during
simulation.
MONITOR-CONTROL, control settings for
the solution monitoring feature.
DIAGNOSTICS, provide diagnostic informa
tion about solution progress, the mesh,
the analysis settings or results.
ENERGY, specifies the parts for which
energies are to be displayed in the
Energy View tab of the ADINA Struc
tures window.
Chapter 6: Geometry definition
Section 6.1: Coordinate systems
SYSTEM, defines a local coordinate system.
Section 6.2: Points
COORDINATES POINT, defines geometry
point coordinates.
POINT BETWEEN, creates geometry
points between two defined points.
POINT CENTER, creates a geometry
point at the center of the circle that
passes through three defined points.
POINT NODE, creates geometry
points at nodal locations.
POINT LINE, creates geometry points along
2-10 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
a geometry line.
POINT EDGE, creates geometry points along
an edge of a body.
Section 6.3: Lines
LINE STRAIGHT, defines a straight
geometry line between two geometry
points.
LINE ARC, defines a geometry line as a
circular arc, or as an arc with varying
radius.
LINE CIRCLE, defines a circle geometry
line.
LINE CURVILINEAR, defines a geometry
line as a linearly interpolated curve in a
given local coordinate system.
KNOTS, defines a vector of knot values
for NURBS definition.
LINE POLYLINE, defines a geometry line as
a polyline, i.e., a curve controlled by a
series of geometry points.
LINE SECTION, defines a geometry line to
be part of another geometry line.
LINE COMBINED, defines a geometry line
as a combina tion of other geometry
lines.
LINE REVOLVED, defines a geometry line
(a circular arc) by rotating a geometry
point about an axis.
LINE EXTRUDED, defines a geometry line
by displacing a geometry point in a
given direction.
LINE TRANSFORMED, defines a geometry
line to be a geometrical transformation
of another geometry line.
LINE EDGE, converts an edge of a body
into a geometry line.
SPLIT-LINE, creates two geometry lines of
type SECTION by splitting a given
line into two parts connected at some
point on the given line.

LNTHICKNESS, defines line thicknesses
(e.g., for defining axisymmetric shell
thicknesses).
Section 6.4: Surfaces
SURFACE PATCH, defines a geometry
surface to be bounded by edges which
are specified geometry lines.
SURFACE VERTEX, defines a geometry
surface to be bounded by edges which
are specified by their end geometry
points - the vertices of the surface.
SURFACE GRID, defines a geometry
surface as a grid (array) of geometry
points, which control the shape of the
surface.
SURFACE EXTRUDED, defines a geometry
surface by displacing a geometry line in
a given direction.
SURFACE REVOLVED, defines a geometry
surface by rotating a geometry line
about some axis.
SURFACE TRANSFORMED, defines a
geometry surface via a transformation of
another surface.
SFTHICKNESS, defines surface thick-
nesses.
CHECK-SURFACES, checks geometry
surface connections looking for two
adjoining surfaces which are oppositely
oriented, i.e., with opposite surface
normals.
Section 6.5: Volumes
VOLUME PATCH, defines a geometry
volume to be bounded by faces which
are specified geometry surfaces.
VOLUME VERTEX, defines a geometry
volume in terms of the vertices.
VOLUME REVOLVED, defines a geometry
volume by rotating a geometry surface
ADINA R & D, Inc.
Chap. 2 Quick index
about some axis.
VOLUME EXTRUDED, defines a geometry
volume by displacing a geometry
surface in a given direction.
VOLUME SWEEP, defines one or more
geometry volumes by sweeping one or
more geometry surfaces along a line.
VOLUME TRANSFORMED, defines a
geometry volume to be a geometrical
transformation of another volume.
Section 6.6: Solid models
FACE-THICKNESS, defines solid geometry
face thicknesses.
FACELINK, establishes a link, for meshing
purpose, between two faces of distinct
solid models, or between a face of a
solid model and a surface.
SPLIT-EDGE, splits an edge of a body into
two edges by giving a parameter along
the edge.
SPLIT-FACE, splits a face of a body into two
faces by giving two points on the face.
BODY-DISCREP, creates a discrete
boundary represenation for a given
body.
BODY-DEFEATURE, removes small
features from the discrete boundary
represenation of a given body.
BODY-CLEANUP, removes shortbody
edges and/or thin body faces from the
AUI represenation of a given body.
BODY-RESTORE, restores the AUI topo-
logical representation of the body
corresponding to its state before
commands such as BODY-CLEANUP,
REM-EDGE or REM-FACE are executed.
BODY-DSCADAP, adapts (according to the
mesh densities set prior) the surface
triangles that make up the geometry of
an STL body.
2-11
Chap. 2 Quick index
Section 6.7: Spatial functions
LINE-FUNCTION, describes the variation of
a quantity along a line.
SURFACE-FUNCTION, describes the
variation of a quantity over a surface.
VOLUME-FUNCTION, describes the
variation of a quantity within a volume.
Section 6.8: Transformations
TRANSFORMATION COMBINED,
defines a general transformation as an
ordered sequence of existing transfor
mations.
TRANSFORMATION DIRECT, defines a
general 3-D transformation by
directly specifying the transformation
matrix.
TRANSFORMATION POINTS, defines a
rigid-body 3-D transformation by the
specification of 6 geometry points, 3
initial points and 3 targetpoints.
TRANSFORMATION REFLECTION,
defines a 3-D reflection (mirror) transfor
mation.
TRANSFORMATION ROTATION, defines
a 3-D rotation transformation.
TRANSFORMATION SCALE, defines a 3-
D scaling transformation.
TRANSFORMATION TRANSLATION,
defines a 3-D translation transformation.
TRANSFORMATION INVERSE, defines a
3-D geometry transformation as the
inverse of another transformation.
Section 6.9: Miscellaneous
DOMAIN, defines a geometry domain,
which is a collection of geometry
entities.
MEASURE, determines the distance between
two points or the length of an edge or a
2-12 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
line.
GET-EDGE-FACES, lists the body faces
connected to a body edge.
GET-EDGE-POINTS, lists the AUI points
bounding a body edge.
GET-FACE-EDGES, lists the body edges
bounding a body face.
REM-EDGE, removes a body edge by
collapsing one end point onto the other.
REM-FACE, removes a body face by
collapsing one bounding edge onto the
other.
Section 6.10: ADINA - M
BODY BLEND, modifies specified edges of
a body to have a radius blend.
BODY BLOCK, defines a solid geometry or
brickshape.
BODY CHAMFER, applies chamfers to
edges of a solid body.
BODY CONE, defines a cone shape solid
geometry.
BODY CYLINDER, defines a cylinder shape
solid geometry.
BODY DEFEATURE, removes small features
(faces) from a body.
BODY DUPLICATE, defines solid geom
etries by duplicating existing bodies.
BODY HOLLOW, hollows a solid geometry
with thickness THICKNESS.
BODY INTERSECT, modifies an existing
solid body by taking the intersection of
it with other, overlapping body.
BODY LOFTED, creates a sheet body by
lofting through a set of lines or edges
and creates a solid body by lofting
through a set of surfaces, faces, and
sheet bodies.
BODY MERGE, modifies an existing solid
body by joining it with a set of other
solid bodies.

BODY MID-SURFACE, creates sheet
bodies from a thin-walled solid body.
BODY OFFSET, offsets all the faces of a
solid body.
BODY OPTION, provides the options for
ADINA-M bodies.
BODY PARTITION, partition body with a
set of faces of the body.
BODY PIPE, defines a pipe shape solid
geometry.
BODY PRISM, defines a prismatic shape
solid geometry.
BODY PROJECT, projects lines into a face
of the body.
BODY REMOVE-ENTITY, removes redun
dant points or edges from a body.
BODY REVOLVED, creates a body by
revolving face of existing body around
an axis.
BODY SECTION, partition solid body
using sheets.
BODY SEW, sews a set of sheet bodies into
sewn bodies.
BODY SHEET, defines a sheet body by a
set of geometry lines.
BODY SPHERE, defines a sphere shape
solid body.
BODY SUBTRACT, modifies an existing
solid body by removing from it a set of
other solid, overlapping bodies.
BODY SWEEP, creates a body by sweeping
existing face of a body in a given
direction or along a line.
BODY TORUS, defines a torus shape solid
geometry.
BODY TRANSFORMED, defines a solid
geometry by copying or moving an
existing Parasolid body.
SHEET PLANE, defines a planar sheet used
for partition of bodies.
VOLUME BODY, converts a body into a
geometrical volume.
SURFACE FACE, converts a face of a body
into a geometric surface.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
Chap. 2 Quick index
CONVERT-STL, converts a Parasolid body
into an STL body for meshing with
BHEXA.
Chapter 7: Model definition
Section 7.1: Material models
MATERIAL ANAND, defines an Anand
material.
MATERIAL ARRUDA-BOYCE, defines an
Arruda-Boyce material model.
MATERIAL CAM-CLAY, defines a nonlin-
ear Cam-Clay material model.
MATERIAL CONCRETE, defines a nonlin-
ear concrete material model.
MATERIAL CREEP, defines a nonlinear
creep material.
MATERIALCREEP-IRRADIATION,
defines an irradiation creep material.
MATERIAL CREEP-VARIABLE, defines a
nonlinear creep material with variable
creep coefficients.
MATERIAL CURVE-DESCRIPTION,
defines a nonlinear geological material,
with the option of tension cut-off or
cracking.
MATERIAL DF-CONCRETE, defines a
concrete material based on the work of
M.D. Kotsovos et al.
MATERIAL DRUCKER-PRAGER, defines a
nonlinear Drucker-Prager material model
with a hardening cap and tension
cut-off.
MATERIAL EIGHT-CHAIN, defines an
Eight-Chain material.
MATERIAL ELASTIC, defines an isotropic
linear elastic material.
MATERIAL FLUID, defines a linear fluid
material.
MATERIAL GASKET, defines a gasket
material model.
2-13
Chap. 2 Quick index
MATERIAL GURSON-PLASTIC, defines a
nonlinear Gurson plastic material.
MATERIAL HYPERELASTIC, defines a
hyperelastic material, which is incom-
pressible nonlinear elastic, for rubber-
like materials.
MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM, defines a
hyper-foam material model.
MATERIAL MOHR-COULOMB, defines a
nonlinear Mohr-Coulomb material.
MATERIAL MOONEY-RIVLIN, defines a
Mooney-Rivlin material, which is
incompressible nonlinear elastic, for
rubber materials.
MATERIAL MROZ-BILINEAR, defines an
elastic-plastic material with Mroz yield
criteria and bilinear hardening.
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-
CREEP, defines a nonlinear thermo-elastic-
plastic-multilinear and creep material,
with von Mises yield condition and
isotropic, kinematic or mixed strain
hardening.
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-
CREEP-VARIABLE, defines a nonlinear
thermo-elastic-plastic-multilinear creep
material model with variable creep
coefficients.
MATERIAL NONLINEAR-ELASTIC,
defines a nonlinear elastic material.
MATERIAL OGDEN, defines an Ogden
material, which is incompressible
nonlinear elastic, for rubber materials.
MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC, defines an
orthotropic linear elastic material.
MATERIAL PIEZOELECTRIC, defines a
piezoelectric material.
MATERIAL PLASTIC-BILINEAR,
defines a bilinear elastic-plastic material
model with von Mises yield condition.
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP, defines a
2-14 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
nonlinear thermo-elastic-plastic and
creep material, with von Mises yield
condition and isotropic or kinematic
strain hardening.
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE,
defines a nonlinear thermo-elastic-
plastic creep material model with
variable creep coefficients.
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC, defines a
plastic-cyclic material.
MATERIAL PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR,
defines a multilinear elastic-plastic
material model with von Mises yield
condition.
MATERIAL PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC,
defines a nonlinear orthotropic plastic
material.
MATERIAL SMA, defines a shape-memory
alloy material.
MATERIAL SUSSMAN-BATHE,
defines a Sussman-Bathe material
model.
MATERIAL THERMO-ISOTROPIC,
defines a nonlinear isotropic
thermo-elastic material.
MATERIAL THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC,
defines a nonlinear orthotropic
thermo-elastic material.
MATERIAL THERMO-PLASTIC, defines a
nonlinear thermo-plastic material.
MATERIAL THREE-NETWORK, defines a
three-network material.
MATERIAL USER-SUPPLIED, defines a
user-supplied material for use with
ADINA, with options for piezoelec-
tric or consolidation analyses.
MATERIAL VISCOELASTIC, defines a
time and teperature dependent vis-
coelastic material model.
TMC-MATERIAL ISOTROPIC, defines a
constant isotropic conductivity and a
constant specific heat material for TMC
analysis.

TMC-MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC, defines
an orthotropic conductivity and
constant specific heat material for TMC
analysis.
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-K, defines a
material with temperature dependent
conductivity and constant specific heat
for TMC analysis.
TMC-MATERIALTEMPDEP-C-ISOTRO-
PIC, defines a material with temperature
dependent specific heat and constant
isotropic conductivity for TMC
analysis.
TMC-MATERIALTEMPDEP-C-
ORTHOTROPIC, defines a material
with constant, orthotropic, conductiv-
ity and temperature dependent specific
heat for TMC analysis.
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-K, defines a
material with temperature dependent
specific heat and conductivity for TMC
analysis.
TMC-MATERIALTIMEDEP-K, defines a
material with time dependent conduc-
tivity and constant specific heat for
TMC analysis.
TMC-MATERIAL USER-SUPPLIED,
defines a user-supplied material with
options for piezoelectric or consolida-
tion analyses.
CURVE-FITTING, defines a fitting curve for
hyperelastic material models.
VISCOELASTIC CONSTANTS, defines
viscoelastic contants for a viscoelastic
material model.
PHI-MODEL-COMPLETION, contrrols
parameters for phi model completion
phase of potential-based fluid elements.
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC BILINEAR, sets up a
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC definition of type
bilinear.
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC MULTILINEAR, sets
up a PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC definition of
ADINA R & D, Inc.
Chap. 2 Quick index
type multilinear.
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC EXPONENTIAL,
sets up a PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC defini
tion of type exponential.
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC MEMORY-EXPO-
NENTIAL, sets up a PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC
definition of type memory-exponential.
PLCYCL-KINEMATICARMSTRONG-
FREDRICK, sets up a PLCYCL-KINEMATIC
definition of type Armstrong-Fredrick.
PLCYCL-RUPTURE AEPS, sets up a
PLCYCL-RUPTURE definition of type
AEPS (accumulated effective plastic
strain).
RUBBER-TABLE ARRUDA-BOYCE,
defines a rubber-table data set of type
Arruda-Boyce.
RUBBER-TABLE EIGHT-CHAIN,
defines a rubber-table data set of type
Eight-Chain.
RUBBER-TABLE MOONEY-RIVLIN,
defines a rubber-table data set of type
Mooney-Rivlin.
RUBBER-TABLE OGDEN, defines a
rubber-table data set of type Ogden.
RUBBER-TABLE HYPER-FOAM, defines a
rubber-table data set of type hyper-
foam.
RUBBER-TABLE SUSSMAN-BATHE
defines a rubber-table data set of type
Sussman-Bathe.
RUBBER-TABLE TRS, defines a
rubber-table data set of type TRS
(thermorheologically simple).
RUBBER-MULLINS OGDEN-ROXBURGH,
defines a data set of type rubber-
Mullins, subtype Ogden-Roxburgh.
RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC
BERGSGTROM-BOYCE, defines a data set
of type rubber-viscoelastic, subtype
Bergstrom-Boyce.
RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC HOLZAPFEL,
defines a data set of type rubber-
viscoelastic, subtype Holzapfel.
2-15
Chap. 2 Quick index
RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC HOLZAPFEL,
defines a data set of type rubber-
orthotropic, subtype Holzapfel.
COEFFICIENTS-TABLE, defines an
effective stress vs. creep coeffients
table.
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS LUBBY2, defines
the dependency of creep law coeffi-
cients on temperature.
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR,
defines the temperature and depen-
dence of stress creep coefficients.
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-
ONLY, defines the dependency of creep law
coefficients on temperature.
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS USER-SUPPLIED,
Defines a user supplied creep coefficient
dependence function.
CURVATURE-MOMENT, defines a curvature
vs. moment curve.
DFC-CREEP ACI209R-92, defines a a data
set of the creep/shrinkage model
according to the ACI209R-92 rule.
DFC-CREEP ADINA, defines a a data
set of the creep/shrinkage model accord-
ing to the ADINA concrete creep rule.
DFC-CREEP CEB-DIP, defines a a data
set of the creep/shrinkage model
according to the CEB-FIP 1990 rule.
FTABLE, defines a modulus vs. decay
coefficient table for MATERIAL
VISCOELASTIC.
FORCE-STRAIN, defines a force vs. strain
curve.
IRRADIATION-CREEP-TABLE, defines an
irradiation creep table.
MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE, defines a
moment-curvature-force property for
BEAM elements.
MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE, defines a
moment-twist-force property for BEAM
elements.
2-16 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
NEUTRON-DOSE, defines a neutron
fluence.
NEUTRON-TABLE, defines a neutron
fluence table.
PORE-FLUID-PROPERTY, defines proper-
ties of a pore fluid.
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-C, defines a
nonlinear relationship between damping
and velocity.
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-K, defines a
nonlinear relationship between force
and relative displacement.
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-M, defines a
time-dependent mass property.
PROPERTYSET, defines stiffness, mass,
damping, and stress transformation
properties for SPRING elements.
RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE
NONLINEAR-ELASTIC, defines a nonlin-
ear-elastic rigidity property.
RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE
PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR, defines a plastic-
multilinear rigidity property.
RUPTURE MULTILINEAR, defines a
rupture criterion in terms of multilinear
temperature-dependent curves.
RUPTURE THREE-PARAMETER, defines a
three-parameter law rupture criterion.
RUPTURE-CURVE, defines a rupture-strain
vs. stress curve.
SCURVE, defines a stress-strain curve which
can be referenced by a material model.
SSCURVE, defines a stress-strain1-2 curve
which can be referenced by a material
model.
LCURVE, defines a loading-unloading curve
which can be referenced by the gasket
material model.
STRAINRATE-FIT, defines a strainrate-fit
for the curve fitting of strainrate
material parameters.
TWIST-MOMENT, defines a twist vs.
moment curve.

Section 7.2: Cross-sections/layers
CROSS-SECTION BOX, defines a box
cross-section.
CROSS-SECTION I, defines an I-beam
cross-section.
CROSS-SECTION L, defines an L-beam
cross-section.
CROSS-SECTION PIPE, defines a pipe
cross-section.
CROSS-SECTION RECTANGULAR,
defines a rectangular cross-section.
CROSS-SECTION U, defines a U-beam
cross-section.
CROSS-SECTION PROPERTIES, defines a
general cross-section in terms of
principal moments of inertia and areas.
LAYER, defines the control parameters of
each surface layer (for multi-layer shell
elements).
PLY-DATA, defines the layer thickness for a
fiber-matrix composite.
Section 7.3: Element properties
LINE-ELEMDATA TRUSS, assigns data for
TRUSS elements to geometry lines.
EDGE-ELEMDATA TRUSS, assigns data for
TRUSS elements on edges.
SURF-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID, assigns
data for TWODSOLID elements to
geometry surfaces.
FACE-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID, assigns
data for TWODSOLID elements on
faces.
VOL-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID, assigns
data for THREEDSOLIDelements in
geometry volumes.
BODY-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID,
assigns data for THREEDSOLID
elements in bodies.
LINE-ELEMDATA BEAM , assigns data for
BEAM elements to geometry lines.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
Chap. 2 Quick index
EDGE-ELEMDATA BEAM, assigns data for
BEAM elements on edges.
LINE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM, assigns data
for ISOBEAM elements to geometry
lines.
EDGE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM, assigns data
for ISOBEAM elements on edges.
SURF-ELEMDATA PLATE, assigns data for
PLATE elements to geometry surfaces.
FACE-ELEMDATA PLATE, assigns data for
PLATE elements on faces.
SURF-ELEMDATA SHELL, assigns data for
SHELL elements to geometry surfaces.
FACE-ELEMDATA SHELL, assigns data for
SHELL elements on faces.
ELAYER, assigns material to individual
element on diffferent layers for shell
element.
LINE-ELEMDATA PIPE, assigns data for
PIPE elements to geometry lines.
EDGE-ELEMDATA PIPE, assigns data for
PIPE elements on edges.
LINE-ELEMDATA GENERAL, assigns data
for GENERAL elements on lines.
EDGE-ELEMDATA GENERAL, assigns data
for GENERAL elements on edges.
SURF-ELEMDATA GENERAL, assigns data
for GENERAL elements on surfaces.
FACE-ELEMDATA GENERAL, assigns data
for GENERAL elements on faces.
VOL-ELEMDATA GENERAL, assigns data
for GENERAL elements in volumes.
BODY-ELEMDATA GENERAL, assigns
data for GENERAL elements in bodies.
SURF-ELEMDATA FLUID2, assigns data
for FLUID2 elements on surfaces.
FACE-ELEMDATA FLUID2, assigns data
for FLUID2 elements on faces.
VOL-ELEMDATA FLUID3, assigns data for
FLUID3 elements in volumes.
BODY-ELEMDATA FLUID3, assigns data
for FLUID3 elements in bodies.
2-17
Chap. 2 Quick index
MATRIX STIFFNESS, defines a stiffness
matrix for general elements.
MATRIX MASS, defines a mass matrix for
general elements.
MATRIX DAMPING, defines a damping
matrix for general elements.
MATRIX STRESS, defines a stress matrix
for general elements.
MATRIXSET, defines the matrixset for the
current GENERAL element group.
MATRIX USER-SUPPLIED, defines the
element stiffness matrix in a general
element group to be provided by
subroutine CUSERG.
MASSES, assigns concentrated masses to
the nodes on a set of geometry entities.
DAMPERS, assigns concentrated dampers
to the nodes on a set of geometry
entities.
Section 7.4: Substructure and cyclic
symmetry
SUBSTRUCTURE, defines substructures.
REUSE, connects a substructure to the main
structure.
CYCLIC-CONTROL, specifies parameters
that control cyclic symmetry analysis.
CYCLICLOADS, cyclic symmetric part of
loading.
CYCLICBOUNDARY, defines cyclic
symmetric boundarie based on points,
lines, surfaces or nodes.
CYCLICBOUNDARY TWO-D, defines
cyclic symmetric boundaries based on
lines or edges.
CYCLICBOUNDARY THREE-D, defines
cyclic symmetric boundaries based on
surfaces or faces.
AXIS-ROTATION, defines a rotational axis
which can be referenced other com-
mands.
2-18 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EG-SUBSTRUCTURE, creates substructures
in terms of existing element groups.
Section 7.5: Contact conditions
ANALYTICAL-RIGID-TARGET, defines
parameters for analytical rigid target
analysis.
CONTACT-CONTROL, specifies parameters
controlling the behavior of the algo-
rithms used in modeling contact.
CGROUP CONTACT2, defines a contact
group consisting of 2-D or axisymmetric
contact surfaces.
CGROUP CONTACT3, defines a contact
group consisting of 3-D contact
surfaces.
CONTACTBODY, defines a contact body i.e.
a geometry surface in 2D or a geometry
volume in 3D.
CONTACTSURFACE, defines a contact
surface.
CONTACTPOINT, defines a contact point,
i.e., a set of geometry points (in 2-D or 3-
D analysis) which are expected to be in
contact.
DRAWBEAD, defines a drawbead for metal
forming analysis.
COULOMB-FRICTION, specifies variable
Coulomb friction coefficient.
USER-FRICTION, specifies the parameters
used in the calculation of user-supplied
friction for the current contact group.
CS-OFFSET, specifies offset distances for
individual contact-surfaces.
CONTACTPAIR, defines a contact pair, i.e.,
two contact surfaces which are either
initially in contact or are anticipated to
come into contact during analysis.
CONTACT-3-SEARCH, creates 3D contact
surfaces and contact pairs between two
bodies within the given distance range.

GAP-CONDUCTANCE, controls heat
transfer between closely adjacent/
contacting surfaces.
Section 7.6: Fracture mechanics
FRACTURE, defines controlling data for
analysis of fracture mechanics problems.
CRACK-GROWTH, specifies the parameters
that govern control of the growth of a
propagating crack.
CRACK-PROPAGATION, defines the initial
crack front position or the virtual/actual
crack propagation path.
J-LINE POINT, defines a line contour via a
circle centered at a point.
J-LINE RING, defines a line contour via a
ring of elements.
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT CRACK-M, creates the
virtual shifts and crack propagation
surface for a fracture mechanics analysis
in which the CRACK-M commands were
used to create a 3D crack mesh.
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT POINT, defines a virtual
material shift via a circle centered at a
point.
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT LINE, defines a virtual
material shift via the nodes lying on any
of a given set of lines.
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT SURFACE, defines a
virtual material shift via the nodes lying
on any of a given set of surfaces.
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING, defines a virtual
material shift via a number of rings of
elements about the crack front.
CRACK-M DEFINE, defines a crack front.
CRACK-M COMBINE, combines 2 crack
fronts to form a closed crack.
CRACK-M SUBDIVIDE, Subdivides a crack
front.
CRACK-M MESH, meshes the crack front
using mapped meshing.
CRACK-M GBODY, meshes the crack front
ADINA R & D, Inc.
Chap. 2 Quick index
surface body using free-form meshing.
CRACK-M Q-POINT, places higher order
nodes at quarter node or mid positions.
CRACK-SVS, defines a crack when the SVS
method is used.
R-CURVE, defines a resistance curve set
for crack growth analysis.
SINGULAR, defines a set of singular
nodes-vertex nodes whose adjacent
non-vertex nodes are moved to the 1/4
point.
USER-RUPTURE, specifies user-defined
rupture data.
Section 7.7: Boundary conditions
RIGIDLINK, specifies rigid links between
geometry entities.
CONSTRAINT, specifies a constraint
equation which expresses a slave
(dependent) degree of freedom as a
linear combination of a set of master
(independent) degrees of freedom.
CONSTRAINT-MS, similar to the
CONSTRAINT command, but also
allows the specification of multiple slave
entities for a single master entity.
CONSTRAINT-G, defines generalized
constraint equations for ADINA.
FIXITY, defines a fixity boundary condition.
FIXBOUNDARY, assigns fixity conditions to
a set of geometry entities.
ZOOM-BOUNDARY, specifies the boundary
of a zoom model that is inside (internal
to) the coarse model.
ENDRELEASE, defines an endrelease
condition for elements of type BEAM.
FSBOUNDARY, defines a fluid-structure-
interaction (FSI) boundary.
FSBOUNDARY TWO-D, defines an FSI
boundary for 2D analysis.
2-19
Chap. 2 Quick index
FSBOUNDARY THREE-D, defines a fluid-
structure-interaction boundary for 3D
analysis.
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE, defines a free-
surface potential-interface for ADINA.
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE INFINITE,
defines an infinite potential-interface for
ADINA.
BOUNDARY-SURFACE SURFACE-
TENSION, defines a surface tension
boundary for ADINA.
OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT POINT,
enforces the zero-slope-of-skin in the
longitudinal direction for pipe element
nodes.
FREESURFACE, defines a free surface on
the boundary lines (2-D) or surface(3-D)
for potential-based problems.
BCELL, defines a boundary cell using a 4-
node or 3-node cell.
COHESIVE-INTERFACE, defines a cohe-
sive interface.
COHESIVE-PROPERTY, defines a cohe-
sive property.
SPLIT-INTERFACE, defines a mesh split
interface.
Section 7.8: Loading
LOAD ACCELERATION, defines a pre
scribed acceleration load.
LOAD CCHARGE, defines a concentrated
charge load.
LOAD CENTRIFUGAL, defines a centrifu-
gal load.
LOAD CONTACT-SLIP, defines a contact-
slip load.
LOAD CONVECTION, defines a convec
tion load.
LOAD DCHARGE, defines a distributed
charge load.
LOAD DISPLACEMENT, defines a
displacement load.
2-20 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD ELECTROMAGNETIC, defines an
electromagnetic load.
LOAD FORCE, defines a force load.
LOAD HEATFLUX, defines a heatflux load.
LOAD INTERNALHEAT, defines an internal-
heat load.
LOAD LATENT, defines a latent heat load.
LOAD LINE, defines a line load, i.e., a
distributed load in terms of force/unit
length.
LOAD MASS-PROPORTIONAL, defines a
mass proportional load.
LOAD MOMENT, defines a moment load.
LOAD NODAL-HEATFLOW, defines a
nodal-heatflow load.
LOAD NODAL-PHIFLUX, defines a nodal-
phiflux load.
LOAD PHIFLUX, defines a phiflux load.
LOAD PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE,
defines a pipe-internal-pressure load.
LOAD POREFLOW, defines a poreflow
load.
LOAD PORE-PRESSURE, defines a pore-
pressure load.
LOAD PRESSURE, defines a pressure load.
LOAD RADIATION, defines a radiation
load.
LOAD ROTATION, defines a rotation load.
LOAD TEMPERATURE, defines a tempera-
ture load.
LOAD TGRADIENT, defines a temperature
gradient load to specify the temperature
gradient in the thickness direction of a
surface (when applied to shell elements).
LOAD VELOCITY, defines a prescribed
velocity load.
LOAD VOLTAGE, defines a prescribed
voltage load.
REF-FRAME, defines the angular velocity
and angular acceleration of a reference
frame to be used by LOAD ROTATION.
CPROP, defines conveciton properties for
convection loading.

RPROP, defines radiaiton properties for
radiation loading.
LOAD-CASE, used in a linear static analysis
to identify the current load case.
LCOMBINATION, defines a new load case
as a linear combination of previously
defined load cases.
APPLY-LOAD, specifies loads applied to
model geometry.
APPLY INTERNAL-HEAT, prescribes time-
dependent internal heat generation for
elements in a specified element group.
LOAD-OPTION, specifies the effect when
the same type of load is applied multiple
times on the same node.
LOAD-PENETRATION, controls transfer of
applied pressure loads to neighboring
elements when an element dies.
Section 7.9: Initial conditions
INITIAL-CONDITION, defines an initial
condition.
SET-INITCONDITION, assigns initial
conditions to a set of geometry entities.
INITIAL-ROTATION, applies rotational
velocity initial condition.
STRAIN-FIELD, defines an initial strain field.
IMPERFECTION POINTS, specifies
imperfections at points based on pre-
calculated buckling mode shapes.
IMPERFECTION SHAPE, used for initial
shape calculations based on previously
calculated nodal displacements.
INITIAL-MAPPING, loads an initial condi-
tion mapping file and interpolates
variable values at nodes.
THERMAL-MAPPING, interpolates nodal
temperatures and gradients from a given
temperature field contained in a mapping
file.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
Chap. 2 Quick index
Section 7.10: Systems
SKEWSYSTEMS CYLINDRICAL, defines a
skew Cartesian coordinate system in
terms of a cylinder origin and axis
direction.
SKEWSYSTEMS EULERANGLES, defines
a skew Cartesian coordinate system in
terms of Euler angles.
SKEWSYSTEMS NORMAL, defines a
skew Cartesian coordinate system to
be such that one of its directions is
normal to a given line or surface.
SKEWSYSTEMS POINTS, defines a
skew Cartesian coordinat system in
terms of geometry points.
SKEWSYSTEMS SPHERICAL, defines a
skew Cartesian coordinate system in
terms of a sphere origin.
SKEWSYSTEMS VECTORS, defines a
skew Cartesian coordinate system in
terms of direction vectors.
DOF-SYSTEMS POINTS, assigns skew
coordinate systems to geometry points.
DOF-SYSTEMS LINES, assigns skew
coordinate systems to geometry lines.
DOF-SYSTEMS EDGES, assigns skew
coordinate systems to solid geometry
edges.
DOF-SYSTEMS SURFACES, assigns skew
coordinate systems to geometry
surfaces.
DOF-SYSTEMS FACES, assigns skew
coordinate systems to solid geometry
faces.
DOF-SYSTEMS VOLUMES, assigns skew
coordinate systems to geometry
volumes.
DOF-SYSTEMS BODIES, assigns skew
coordinate systems to solid geometry
bodies.
DOF-SYSTEMS NODESETS, assigns skew
coordinate systems to node sets.
2-21
Chap. 2 Quick index
SHELLNODESDOF, specifies the number of
degrees of freedom for shell midsurface
nodes associated with a set of geometry
entities.
AXES CONSTANT, defines an axes-
system in terms of constant direction
vectors.
AXES LINE1, defines an axes-system via
a geometry line.
AXES LINE2, defines an axes-system via
two geometry lines.
AXES NODES, defines an axes-system via
three nodes.
AXES POINT2, defines an axes-system
via two geometry points.
AXES POINT3, defines an axes-system
via three geometry points.
AXES POINT-LINE, defines an axes-
system via a geometry line and a
geometry point.
AXES SURFACE, defines an axes-system
via a geometry surface.
AXES EDGE, defines an axes-system via a
geometry edge.
AXES FACE, defines an axes-system via a
geometry face.
AXES CYLINDRICAL, defines a cylindri-
cal axes system in terms of an origin and
an axis direction.
AXES SPHERICAL, defines a spherical
axes system in terms of an origin.
SET-AXES-MATERIAL, assigns material
axes-system, defined by command
AXES, to a set of geometry entities.
SET-AXES-STRAIN, assigns initial-strain
axes-systems, defined by the command
AXES, to a set of geometry entities.
Section 7.11: Alignment properties
ALIGN-TRANSLATION, defines the
translational alignment data for align
ment elements.
2-22 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ALIGN-DISTANCE, defines the distance
alignment data for alignment elements.
ALIGN-ROTATION, defines the rotational
alignment data for alignment elements.
TRIADSETS, Specifies the initial orienta-
tions of triadsets.
SET-TRIADSET NODES, assigns triadsets
to nodes.
Chapter 8: Finite element representation
Section 8.1: Element groups
EGROUP TRUSS, defines an element group
consisting of truss elements.
EGROUP TWODSOLID, defines an element
group consisting of planar or
axisymmetric elements.
EGROUP THREEDSOLID, defines an
element group consisting of
three-dimensional solid elements.
EGROUP BEAM, defines an element group
consisting of Hermitian beam elements.
EGROUP ISOBEAM, defines an element
group consisting of isoparametric beam
elements.
EGROUP PLATE, defines an element group
consisting of plate elements.
EGROUP SHELL, defines an element group
consisting of shell elements.
EGROUP PIPE, defines an element group
consisting of pipe elements.
EGROUP SPRING, defines an element
group consisting of spring elements.
EGROUP GENERAL, defines an element
group consisting of linear general
elements.
EGROUP FLUID2, defines an element group
consisting of planar or axisymmetric
fluid elements.
EGROUP FLUID3, defines an element group
consisting of 3-D fluid elements.

EGROUP ALIGNMENT, defines an element
group of alignment elements.
EGCONTROL, specifies general control data
for an element group.
BOLT-OPTIONS, defines bolt options for
use with the EGROUP BEAM command.
BOLT-PLANE, defines a bolt-plane.
BOLT-TABLE, specifies the bolt loading
sequence.
ELMOVE, moves elements from one group
to another.
Section 8.2: Mesh generation
TRANSITION-ELEMENT, converts a set of
shell elements along an edge of a face/
surface into shell transition elements.
BLAYER, generates boundary layers on
specified body faces.
COPY-TRIANGULATION, copies face
triangulation for later use by meshing
commands like GFACE or GBODY.
DELETE-TRIANGULATION, deletes face
triangulations created by the COPY-
TRIANGULATION command.
LIST-TRIANGULATION, lists all faces
(body and face labels) which have
triangulation created by the COPY-
TRIANGULATION command.
SUBDIVIDE DEFAULT, defines default
mesh subdivision data.
SUBDIVIDE MODEL, assigns mesh
subdivision data to the entire current
model geometry.
SUBDIVIDE POINT, assigns mesh subdivi-
sion data to geometry points.
SUBDIVIDE LINE, assigns mesh subdivi-
sion data to geometry lines.
SUBDIVIDE SURFACE, assigns mesh
subdivision data to geometry surfaces.
SUBDIVIDE VOLUME, assigns mesh
subdivision data to geometry volumes.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
Chap. 2 Quick index
SUBDIVIDE EDGE, assigns mesh subdivi-
sion data to edges of a solid geometry
body.
SUBDIVIDE FACE, assigns mesh subdivi-
sion data to faces of a solid geometry
body.
SUBDIVIDE BODY, assigns mesh subdivi-
sion data to solid geometry bodies.
POINT-SIZE, specifies the element size at
geometr points.
SIZE-FUNCTION BOUNDS, defines a
mesh size function using the vertices of
the model bounding box.
SIZE-FUNCTION HEX, defines a mesh size
function using the vertices of an input
box.
SIZE-FUNCTION POINT, defines a mesh
size function via a point source.
SIZE-FUNCTION AXIS, defines a mesh size
function via a line source.
SIZE-FUNCTION PLANE, defines a mesh
size function via a planar source.
SIZE-FUNCTION COMBINED, defines a
mesh size function as a combination of
others.
SIZE-LOCATIONS, specifies mesh size at
certain locations (other than geometry
points).
NLTABLE, creates a table with specification
of number of layers across thin sections.
GPOINT, creates a node at a point with the
same coordinates.
GLINE, creates elements along a set of
geometry lines.
GSURFACE, creates elements on a set of
geometry surfaces.
GVOLUME, creates elements on a set of
geometry volumes.
GEDGE, creates elements on a set of solid
geometry edges.
GFACE, creates elements on a set of solid
geometry faces.
2-23
Chap. 2 Quick index
GBODY, creates elements for a solid geom-
etry body.
GHEXA, generates brick element dominant
free-form meshes for a given body.
GADAPT, deletes and remeshes a finite
element mesh.
GBCELL, creates 3D elements from bound-
ary cells.
BCELL, indicates whether all boundary cells
are used to create the 3D mesh.
BHEXA, meshes an STL body with
hexahedral elements only.
ELDELETE, deletes elements generated on
specific geometry for a given element
group.
COPY-MESH-BODY, copies a mesh from
one body to another body via affine
transformation.
CSURFACE, creates a set of contact
elements on a contact surface.
CSDELETE TWO-D, deletes contact
meshes generated on selected 2D
geometry entities.
CSDELETE THREE-D, deletes contact
meshes generated on selected 3D
geometry entities.
GLUEMESH, glues two dissimilar meshes
together.
MESH-DETACH, detaches parts of the
model by splitting any node that is
shared between the parts.
MESH-JOIN, joins parts of the model by
equivalencing coincident nodes.
MESH-SPLIT, splits the mesh about an
interface.
STL ELIM-EDGE, eliminates edges from an
STL body.
STL ELIM-EDGES-ANGLE, eliminates edges
from an STL body based on the angle
between the connected body faces.
Section 8.3: Elements
TRUSS-POINTS, defines axisymmetric truss
2-24 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
elements at geometry points.
PSET-6DOF, defines properties of a 6 DOF
spring.
SPRING-6DOF LINES, defines a 6 DOF
spring between two geometry lines.
SPRING-6DOF NODESETS, defines a 6
DOF spring between two nodesets.
SPRING-6DOF POINTS, defines a 6
DOF spring between two geometry
points.
SPRING NODESETS, defines a set of spring
elements either between two degrees of
freedom on distinct nodesets, or a
grounded degree of freedom on a single
nodeset.
SPRING POINTS, defines spring elements
at points.
SPRING LINES, defines spring elements
between geometry lines.
REBAR- LINE, defines a rebar using lines.
The rebar defined is then referenced in
the EGROUP TRUSS command to model
rebar elements.
TRUSS-LINE, defines TRUSS elements
between lines.
ELTHICKNESS, defines shell element
thickness.
BLTABLE, specifies where boundary layers
should be built off of.
BLTABLE-2D, specifies the two-dimensional
boundary layers that should be gener
ated when the GFACE command is
executed.
BLTABLE-3D, specifies the three-dimen
sional boundary layers that should be
generated when the GBODY command is
executed.
Chapter 9: Direct finite element data input
Section 9.1: Nodal data
COORDINATES NODE, defines coordi-
nates for (current substructure) nodes.

SKEWSYSTEMS NODES, defines a skew
Cartesian coordinate system in terms of
nodes.
DOF-SYSTEM NODES, assigns skew
coordinate systems to nodes in the
current substructure.
MASSES NODES, assigns concentrated
masses to nodes.
DAMPERS NODES, assigns concentrated
dampers to nodes.
SHELLNODESDOF NODES, specifies the
number of degrees of freedom for shell
midsurface nodes.
SHELLDIRECTORVECTOR, defines
director vectors that can be applied via
command SHELLNODESDOF NODES.
NODESET, defines a collection of nodes.
DMIG-DEFINE, defines a direct input matrix.
DMIG-APPLY, assigns a direct input matrix
for stiffness, damping or mass.
RIGIDNODES SHELL, specifies special
constraints for shell midsurface nodes.
NODE-SNAP, moves (snaps) a node to a
point.
NODE-DELETE, deletes nodes that are not
referenced by any other entity in the
database
NODE-RENUMBER, Renumbers nodes that
are not associated with geometry.
Section 9.2: Element data
AXES-NODES, defines an axes-system via
three model nodes.
AXES-INITIALSTRAIN, defines a set of
axes to be used with the definition of
initial strains in element.
AXES-ORTHOTROPIC, defines set of
principal material axes to be used with
orthotropic material model.
ELEDGESET, defines an element edge set
containing edges of 2-D elements.
ELEMENTSET, defines an element set
ADINA R & D, Inc.
Chap. 2 Quick index
containing elements.
ELFACESET, defines an element face set
containing faces of 3-D and shell
elements.
ENODES, defines element nodal connectiv-
ity.
MESH-CONVERT, changes number of
nodes per element.
ENODES-INTERFACE, defines fluid-
structure interface elements.
EDATA, specifies property data associated
with individual elements in a group.
COPY-ELEMENT-NODES, copies all
elements and nodes (in groups) between
database models for two analysis
programs.
DELETE-FE-MODEL, deletes all finite-
element data from the database.
REVOLVE, creates 3D elements by revolving
2D elements about an axis.
SWEEP, creates 3D elements by extruding
2D elements along a vector.
Section 9.3: Boundary conditions
BOUNDARIES, assigns boundary condi-
tions to nodes.
CONSTRAINT-NODE, specifies a constraint
equation between nodal degrees of
freedom.
RIGIDLINK-NODE, specifies a rigid link
between two nodes.
OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT NODE,
used to enforce the zero-slope-of-pipe-
skin condition in the longitudinal
direction at pipe-element nodes.
FSI-FACE, defines FSI boundary using
element face nodes.
Section 9.4: Loads
APPLY CONCENTRATED-LOADS,
Defines concentrated loads applied to
nodes.
2-25
Chap. 2 Quick index
APPLY DISPLACEMENTS, defines
prescribed displacements applied to
nodes.
APPLY ELECTROMAGNETIC-LOADS,
defines electromagnetic loads applied to
nodes.
APPLY PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURES,
defines internal pressures applied to
pipe element nodes.
APPLY TEMPERATURES, defines tempera-
tures applied to nodes.
APPLY TGRADIENTS, defines temperature
gradients applied to shell element
surface nodes.
APPLY USER-SUPPLIED-LOADS, signals
the presence of user-supplied loads.
LOADS-ELEMENT, used to apply loads
onto element edges or faces.
Section 9.5: Initial conditions
INITIAL ACCELERATIONS, assigns initial
accelerations to nodes.
INITIAL DISPLACEMENTS, assigns initial
displacements to nodes.
INITIAL FLEXURALSTRAINS, assigns
initial flexural strains to plate element
nodes.
INITIAL OVALIZATIONS, assigns initial
ovalizations to pipe element nodes.
INITIAL PINTERNALPRESSURES,
assigns initial pipe internal pressures to
pipe element nodes.
INITIAL STRAINS, assigns initial strains to
nodes.
INITIAL SGRADIENTS, assigns initial
strain gradients to shell element
midsurface nodes.
INITIAL TEMPERATURES, assigns initial
temperatures to nodes.
2-26 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
INITIAL TGRADIENTS, assigns initial
temperature gradients to shell element
nodes.
INITIAL VELOCITIES, assigns initial
velocities to nodes.
INITIAL WARPINGS, assigns initial
warpings to pipe element nodes.
IMPERFECTION NODES, specifies
imperfections at nodes based on the
buckling mode shapes, which have been
previously calculated.
Section 9.6: Contact
CONTACT-ELEMSET, defines a contact
surface using element edge or face set.
CONTACT-FACENODES, defines a contact
surface within the current group using
face nodenumbers.
CONTACT-NODES, defines a contact-
surface in terms of nodes, within the
current contact group.
Section 9.7: Fracture
CRACK-PROPAGATION NODES, used to
define the initial crack front position and
the virtual/actual crack propagation path
in terms of nodes.
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT NODE, defines a fixed
virtual-crack-extension material shift via
a set of nodes.
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT ELEMENT, defines a
fixed virtual-crack-extension material
shift via a set of elements.
J-LINE ELEMENT, defines a line contour
connected by a series of element faces.
SINGULAR NODES, defines a set of vertex
nodes whose adjacent non-vertex nodes
are to be moved.
 Chap. 2 Quick index

Section 9.8: Substructures and cyclic

symmetry

REUSE-NODES, defines the nodal connec

tivity between the substructure and the
main structure.
CYCLICBOUNDARIES NODES,
associates cyclicboundaries in terms
of nodes.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 2-27

Chap. 2 Quick index

This page intentionally left blank

2-28 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Chapter 3

Input/Output
DATABASE NEW Sec. 3.1 Database operations

DATABASE NEW SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT

DATABASE NEW creates a new database. The new database is initially empty. Before
creating the new database, you have the option of saving any current internal database to
disk. This option is controlled by parameters SAVE and PERMFILE.

SAVE [UNKNOWN]
Used only when a database has been modified.

YES The program saves the current internal database to disk using the
filename specified by parameter PERMFILE. Then the program
creates a new internal database.

NO The program does not save the current internal database before
creating a new internal database.

UNKNOWN The program asks you if you want to save the database.

PERMFILE [the last permanent database name

previously specified]
Used only when the database has been modified. PERMFILE is the filename of the permanent
database file when saving the current database file to disk. You will be prompted for this
name if you do not enter a value for this parameter and no permanent database name was
previously specified.

PROMPT [UNKNOWN]
Used when saving a permanent database file.

YES You will be prompted Ready to save permanent database file?.

UNKNOWN You will be prompted Permanent database file already exists if

the database file already exists.

NO You will not receive a prompt.

Auxiliary commands

DATABASE CREATE SAVE PERMFILE

DATABASE CREATE has the same effect as DATABASE NEW.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-3

Chap. 3 Input/Output DATABASE OPEN

DATABASE OPEN FILE SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT

DATABASE OPEN creates a new database using the permanent database file specified in this
command. Before creating the new database, the current internal database is optionally
saved to disk. For a database file with Open Cascade parts, an std file is also required.

FILE [the last previously specified

permanent database filename]
The filename of the permanent database file to be opened. If you do not enter a filename and
there is no default value, the program will prompt you for the filename.

SAVE [UNKNOWN]
Used only when a database has been modified.

YES The current internal database is saved to disk using the filename
specified by parameter PERMFILE.

NO The current internal database is not saved before clearing the

current database and opening the specified database.

UNKNOWN The program will ask you if you want to save the database.

PERMFILE [the last previously specified

permanent database filename]
Used only if the database has been modified. PERMFILE is the filename of the permanent
database file when saving the current database file to disk. The program will prompt you if
you do not enter a value for PERMFILE and if no permanent database filename has previ-
ously been specified.

PROMPT [UNKNOWN]
Used when saving a permanent database file.

YES You will be prompted Ready to save permanent database file?.

UNKNOWN You will be prompted Permanent database file already exists, if

the database file already exists.

NO You will not receive a prompt.

Note: It is allowed to open a database created by AUI 7.0, AUI 7.1 or AUI 7.2. However, all
graphics and model display definitions are deleted and reinitialized in the AUI working
copy of the opened database.

3-4 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DATABASE WRITE Sec. 3.1 Database operations

DATABASE WRITE PERMFILE PROMPT

DATABASE WRITE saves the current internal database as a permanent database file. It is
the same as the DATABASE SAVE command except that DATABASE WRITE is available
only when the database has been modified.

PERMFILE [the last previously entered permanent

database filename specified]
Specifies the filename of the permanent database file. The program will prompt you if you do
not enter a value for PERMFILE and if no permanent database filename has previously been
specified.

PROMPT [UNKNOWN]
Used when saving a permanent database file.

YES You will be prompted Ready to save permanent database file?.

UNKNOWN You will be prompted Permanent database file already exists if

the database file already exists.

NO You will not receive a prompt.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-5

Chap. 3 Input/Output DATABASE SAVE

DATABASE SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT

DATABASE SAVE saves the current internal database as a permanent database file. For a
model with Open Cascade parts, an std file is also saved.

PERMFILE [the last previously entered permanent

database filename specified]
Specifies the filename of the permanent database file. The program will prompt you if you do
not enter a value for PERMFILE and if no permanent database filename has previously been
specified.

PROMPT [UNKNOWN]
Used when saving a permanent database file.

YES You will be prompted Ready to save permanent database file?.

UNKNOWN You will be prompted Permanent database file already exists if

the database file already exists.

NO You will not receive a prompt.

3-6 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DATABASE ATTACH Sec. 3.1 Database operations

DATABASE ATTACH FILE

DATABASE ATTACH allows access to the specified file as an AUI database file. Unlike
DATABASE OPEN (described in this section), DATABASE ATTACH does not make a
working copy of the database file prior to opening it. Instead you work directly with the
specified file as you use the AUI, possibly modifying the files contents.

The advantages of DATABASE ATTACH as compared to DATABASE OPEN are: disk

requirements are reduced because the AUI does not create a copy of the database file, and
the CPU time to attach a database is much less than the CPU time required to open it.

The disadvantages of DATABASE ATTACH are: (1) important information can be inadvert-
ently modified or deleted from an attached database file, (2) the attached database cannot
shrink, but can only grow as the AUI is used and (3) an attached database file cannot be
saved, but can only be detached using DATABASE DETACH (described in this section).

Before you can use DATABASE ATTACH, you must first save any current database, and
then use DATABASE NEW (described in this section) to create a new database. You can use
DATABASE ATTACH only if the current database is new and unmodified.

DATABASE ATTACH clears the permanent database filename.

You can attach a database that was created by earlier versions of the AUI. In this case,
however, the AUI deletes and reinitializes all graphics and model display definitions in the
attached database.

Exiting the AUI when a database is attached automatically detaches the database.

FILE
The filename of the permanent database file to be attached. If no filename is entered, the AUI
will prompt you for the filename.

Note: It is allowed to open a database created by AUI 7.0, AUI 7.1 or AUI 7.2. However, all
graphics and model display definitions are deleted and reinitialized in the AUI
working copy of the opened database.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-7

Chap. 3 Input/Output DATABASE DETACH

DATABASE DETACH PERMFILE PROMPT

DATABASE DETACH creates a permanent database file by detaching the working copy of
the database file. Unlike DATABASE SAVE, DATABASE DETACH does not create a new
permanent database file.

The advantages of DATABASE DETACH as compared to DATABASE SAVE are: disk

requirements are reduced because the AUI does not create a copy of the database file, and
the CPU time to detach a database is much less than the CPU time required to save it.

The disadvantage of DATABASE DETACH is: the AUI does not compress the database file
by removing unused records.

After the database is detached, the AUI creates a new empty internal database.

A database can be detached at any time whether or not it was attached using DATABASE
ATTACH.

PERMFILE
The working copy of the database file is renamed to PERMFILE.

PROMPT [UNKNOWN]
Used when saving a permanent database file.

YES You will be prompted Ready to save permanent database file?.

UNKNOWN You will be prompted Permanent database file already exists if

the database file already exists.

NO You will not receive a prompt.

3-8 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ADINA Sec. 3.2 Analysis data files

ADINA OPTIMIZE STARTNODE FILE FIXBOUNDARY

OVERWRITE DUPLICATE

ADINA initiates model validation and, if the model is valid, creates an ADINA input data file,
if requested.

OPTIMIZE [SOLVER]
Equation numbering may be optimized so as to minimize the profile and bandwidth of the
ADINA solution matrices. The node label numbers are not affected by the equation number-
ing. {SOLVER/YES/NO}

SOLVER If the sparse solver is used (see parameter SOLVER in command MASTER),
then equation numbering is not optimized. Otherwise, equation numbering
is optimized.

YES Equation numbering is optimized.

NO Equation numbering is not optimized.

STARTNODE [automatically selected]

Label number of a main structure node, used to initiate the optimized equation numbering
algorithm. If such a node is not given, one will be automatically selected. The starting node
should be a peripheral node on the boundary of the main structure.

FILE
The filename of the ADINA input file to be generated. If no file name is given then only
model validation is performed.

FIXBOUNDARY [YES]
Inactive degrees of freedom, i.e., those which are not connected to any elements and are not
used in constraint equations, may be automatically deleted. {YES/NO/V89}

In earlier versions (8.9 and before), when the master node of a rigid link is attached to an
element, the degrees of freedom on the master node are fixed if they are inactive for the
attached element (e.g., x, y, z rotations are fixed if attached to a 3D solid element). In this
version, all six degrees of freedom are active for a master node of a rigid link. Use
FIXBOUNDARY=V89 to request for version 8.9 behavior.

OVERWRITE [CONTROL PROMPT]

Determines, if the filename given by FILE already exists, whether the command will overwrite its
contents with the currently generated input data. If set to UNKNOWN, a prompt will be given
requesting confirmation for overwriting an existing file. {YES/NO/UNKNOWN}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-9

Chap. 3 Input/Output REBUILD-MODEL

REBUILD-MODEL
Forces the AUI to rebuild the whole model.

3-10 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
REBUILD-MODEL Sec. 3.2 Analysis data files

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-11

Chap. 3 Input/Output LOADDXF

LOADDXF FILE GCOINCIDE GCTOLERANCE

LOADDXF loads an AutoCAD DXF file into the database. The points and lines are con-
verted into AUI geometry entities.

This command supports only up to AutoCAD Release 12 DXF files.

FILE
The DXF file to be loaded in this command. Only a formatted file is accepted.

GCOINCIDE [YES]
Point coincidence checking. If GCOINCIDE is set to YES then point coordinates are checked,
and if within

GCTOLERANCE (max. difference in global coordinates between all previous points)

then no new point number is created at that location, i.e., the previous point label number is
assumed. {YES/NO}

GCTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
Tolerance used to determine point coincidence.

3-12 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOADIGES Sec. 3.3 External data

LOADIGES FILE GCOINCIDE GCTOLERANCE TWOD-XY ADINA-M

LABEL SEWING SEWGAP TOLER1 TOLER2 OPTION1
REVERSE OPTION3 OPTION4 SCALEFACTOR PRECS
PLABEL LLABEL XZERO X-SHIFT Y-SHIFT Z-SHIFT

Loads an IGES file into the database.

FILE
The IGES file to be loaded in this command. Only a formatted and uncompressed file is
accepted.

GCOINCIDE [YES]
Point coincidence checking option. Only valid when ADINA-M = NO.{YES/NO/AUI}

- If set to YES, then only the point coordinates in the current IGES file are checked, and if
within

GCTOLERANCE (max. difference in global coordinates between all previous points)

then no new point is created at that location, i.e. the previous point label number is assumed.
- If set to NO, no points coordinates are checked.
- If set to AUI, all point coordinates are checked.

GCTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
Tolerance used to determine point coincidence. Only valid when ADINA-M = NO.

TWOD-XY [NO]
Indicates whether or not to rotate the IGES geometry model so that the XY plane is trans-
formed into the YZ plane (as used in two-dimensional ADINA, ADINA-T, and ADINA-F
models). {YES/NO}

ADINA-M [NO]
Indicates whether IGES data is to be loaded into ADINA-M. {YES/NO}
Parameters GCOINCIDE, GCTOLERANCE and TWOD-XY are ignored by ADINA-M.

LABEL [(highest current sheet body or solid body label

number) + 1]
Sheet body or solid body label number.

SEWING [NO]
Indicates whether ADINA-M sheet bodies are to be sewn together. {YES/NO}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-13

Chap. 3 Input/Output LOADIGES

SEWGAP [0.01]
ADINA-M sewing body gap ratio. The gap value used to sew the body is SEWGAP * (max.
difference in global coordinate between the maximum and minimum of the IGES body).

TOLER1
This parameter is obsolete.

TOLER2
This parameter is obsolete.

OPTION1
This parameter is obsolete.

REVERSE
This parameter is obsolete.

OPTION3
This parameter is obsolete.

OPTION4
This parameter is obsolete.

SCALEFACTOR [1.0]
ADINA-M scale factor - input IGES coordinate values are to be divided by, i.e. (x-coordinate,
y-coordinate, z-coordinate)/scalefactor.

PRECS
This parameter is obsolete.

PLABEL [(current highest point label number) + 1]

Starting point label.

LLABEL [(current highest line label number) + 1]

Starting line label.

XZERO [NO]
The flag to set the x coordinate to 0. {NO/YES}

X-SHIFT [0.0]
Y-SHIFT [0.0]
Z-SHIFT [0.0]
Shift the IGES geometry by X-SHIFT, Y-SHIFT, and Z-SHIFT in the x, y, and z direction,
respectively. Note that if XZERO=YES, X-SHIFT is ignored. These three parameters are
used only when ADINA-M=NO.

3-14 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOADOCC Sec. 3.3 External data

LOADOCC PARTFILE BODYNAME PCOINCIDE PCTOLERANCE

The LOADOCC command loads an OpenCascade part into the database. The model may be
displayed, meshed, and loads, boundary conditions may be assigned to its faces, edges, and
vertices. For each body within the OpenCascade part, a solid geometry BODY is created which
is used to reference that body.

This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

PARTFILE
The name of a OpenCascade part file.

BODYNAME [(current highest body label number)+1]

This is the label number to be assigned to the first BODY to be created which is used to refer
to the first body in the part file -- other bodies in the part file will automatically be assigned
BODY label numbers incremented from this parameter (i.e. (BODYNAME+1),
(BODYNAME+2), ..., etc.)

PCOINCIDE [NO]
Indicates whether or not the vertices of the part are to be checked for coincidence with
existing geometry point coordinates. {NO/YES}

PCTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
Tolerance used to determine whether two points are coincident.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-15

Chap. 3 Input/Output LOADSOLID

LOADSOLID PARTFILE BODYNAME XORIGIN YORIGIN ZORIGIN

AX AY AZ BX BY BZ PCOINCIDE PCTOLERANCE
MANIFOLD FORMAT OLD-UNIT NEW-UNIT SYSTEM
REPAIR

The LOADSOLID command loads a Parasolid part (or "transmit") file into the database. The
model may be displayed, meshed, and loads, boundary conditions may be assigned to its faces,
edges, and vertices. For each body within the Parasolid file a solid geometry BODY is created
which is used to reference that body.

This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

PARTFILE
The name of a Parasolid part file (i.e. for part file name "abcdef.x_t" you input
PARTFILE=abcdef.

BODYNAME [(current highest body label number)+1]

This is the label number to be assigned to the first BODY to be created which is used to refer
to the first body in the part file -- other bodies in the part file will automatically be assigned
BODY label numbers incremented from this parameter (i.e. (BODYNAME+1),
(BODYNAME+2), ..., etc.)

XORIGIN [0.0]
YORIGIN [0.0]
ZORIGIN [0.0]
The global coordinates of the origin of the model.

AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
A vector (in global coordinates) giving the direction of the X-axis of the model.

BX [0.0]
BY [1.0]
BZ [0.0]
A vector (in global coordinates) which together with vector (AX, AY, AZ) gives the X-Y
plane of the model.

PCOINCIDE [NO]
Indicates whether or not the vertices of the part are to be checked for coincidence with
existing geometry point coordinates. {NO/YES}

3-16 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOADSOLID Sec. 3.3 External data

PCTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
Tolerance used to determine whether two points are coincident.

MANIFOLD [NO]
Indicates whether non-manifold bodies are converted into manifold bodies. {NO/YES}

FORMAT [TEXT]
Parasolid part file format.

TEXT text format.

BINARY binary format.

OLD-UNIT [METER]
The unit of the part in the Parasolid file to be imported.
{METER/CMETER/MMETER/INCH/FOOT}

NEW-UNIT [METER]
The unit of the part after it is imported into ADINA-M.
{METER/CMETER/MMETER/INCH/FOOT}

SYSTEM [0]
If system label is greater than 0 and it is Cartesian coordinate system, replace XORIGIN,
YORIGIN, ZORIGIN, AX, AY, AZ, BX, BY, BZ with the values from the given system.

REPAIR [NO]
Repair the bodies if errors are detected. {NO/YES}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-17

Chap. 3 Input/Output LOAD-CLOUD

LOAD-CLOUD FILE STL-FILE BINARY BYTESWAP OUTLENGTH

elementi

Reads in a point cloud file (depicting the boundary of an object) and writes out an STL file
which can then be loaded into the AUI with the LOAD-STL command. A tetrahedral mesh of the
point cloud is initially built and elements are automatically "sculpted" away from the boundary
going in. This command is used repeatedly until the point cloud mesh corresponds to the
object.

FILE
Name of the point cloud file. Each line of the file contains a point defined by three coordinates
(x, y and z). The point cloud file is assumed to be noise-free and represent accurately (must be
fine enough) the geometry of the object's boundary. The object the point cloud is representing
is assumed to be a single body (not an assembly of bodies).

STL-FILE
If none given, the command will not generate the STL file. It will however save the point cloud
mesh into the AUI (which can then be reloaded if the command is called again). If a STL file
name is given, the command will create the STL file and delete the current point cloud mesh
that's residing in memory.

BINARY [NO]
If set to NO, the output STL file format is supposed to be ASCII.
If set to YES, the output STL file format is supposed to be binary. The byte ordering is
supposed to be "little endian" (the norm for STL binary files). {NO/YES}

BYTESWAP [NO]
If the byte ordering (see BINARY parameter) is "big endian", BYTESWAP should be set to
YES. Because STL files are supposed to be written as "little endian", turning on BYTESWAP
should not be needed in general {NO/YES}

OUTLENGTH [0.0]
Elements of the current point cloud mesh with at least one boundary face bigger (longest side)
than OUTLENGTH are assumed to be outside and are thus removed from the mesh. Because
this process changes the current boundary, a "sculpting" phase follows which automatically
removes elements which are believed to be outside. If set to 0.0 (default), it is not used.

elementi
Elements given are removed from the current point cloud mesh. Because this process changes
the current boundary, a "sculpting" phase follows which automatically removes elements which
are believed to be outside.

3-18 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD-STL Sec. 3.3 External data

LOAD-STL FILE BODY RIDGEANG NCTOLERANCE RIDGETOL

MAXNVARS COTOLERANCE MAXNVARC NMTOLERANCE
RIDGEAN2 BYTESWAP

Loads an STL format file into the AUI by creating a STL body. Once loaded, mesh densities
(MODE = LENGTH) can be applied to the created STL body, its faces and edges (just like for an
ADINA-M body). The command BODY-DSCADAP applies the mesh densities and generates a
discrete representation of the STL body which can then be meshed with the GBODY command.

It is assumed the model contained in the STL file is single-bodied and solid (defines a three-
dimensional volume). If the model is made up of several bodies, the command still loads the
STL file as a single body made up of disconnected parts. To create multiple bodies, the model
should be saved as multiple STL files, one for each body to be created.

Upon completion, if the STL file cannot be loaded, problems are either coming from the
tolerance choice or the STL model itself.

If the number of under connected edges (connected to a single triangle) is greater than 0, the
tolerance (NCTOLERA) may be set too low or the model is not watertight.

If the number of over connected edges (connected to more than two triangles) is greater than
0, the tolerance (NCTOLERA) may be set too high or the model has non-manifold features
(see NMTOLERA parameter).

For the model defined by the stl data to be valid, any edge must be connected to a pair of
faces, each of which uses the edge in opposite direction (there may be more than one pair). In
other words, for each edge bounding a face, there must be another connected face that uses
the edge in opposite direction. If the number of improperly connected edges is greater than 0,
it means that there are edges that do not satisfy this validity requirement.

If the number of non-manifold vertices is greater than 0, make sure the tolerance used for
eliminating non-manifold features (NMTOLERA) is greater than 0 (but always significantly
lower than NCTOLERA). Eliminating non-manifold features is attempted only when the
number of under connected edges is 0.

If NCTOLERA is changed, NMTOLERA must be changed accordingly as it should always be

larger than NCTOLERA.

If changing the tolerance (NCTOLERA) does not resolve all problems, it is likely the STL file
is not valid in representing a conforming triangular mesh.

If the STL file loads properly, it is assumed that the geometry it represents is not self-
intersecting.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-19

Chap. 3 Input/Output LOAD-STL

FILE
Name of file containing the STL data.

BODY [(highest body label number) + 1]

Label of STL body to be created.

RIDGEANG [60 (degrees)]

Controls ridge detection and therefore the creation of body edges. If two adjacent triangles in
the STL file have an angle greater than RIDGEANG, the common edge is assumed to be on a
ridge and will be part of a body edge, potentially separating two body faces.

By setting the RIDGEANG to 180, the created body will have no edges and no vertices (points).

NCTOLERANCE [1.0e-5]
Tolerance used for checking coincidence of facet nodes (vertices of triangle facets).

RIDGETOL [0.0]
Tolerance used to decide whether to discard potential edges on body edges. Given an edge and
its two adjacent triangles in the STL file, if the distance from a vertex to the opposite edge is
smaller than RIDGETOL (relative to its length) for each triangle, then the edge cannot be
considered a ridge. By default, RIDGETOL is set to 0.0, meaning it is disabled. In most cases,
enabling RIDGETOL is not necessary.

MAXNVARS [0.0]
Maximum normal variation used in edge swapping (to improve quality of STL surface mesh prior
to ridge detection). This threshold should remain small enough to maintain the shape of the
original model. By default, MAXNVARS is set to 0.0, meaning it is only enabled on planes.

COTOLERANCE [1.0e-4]
Edges that are smaller than COTOLERANCE (relative to model size) are collapsed.
Faces with large angle such that distance from vertex at large angle to opposite side is smaller
than COTOLERANCE are swapped. This is done to remove small features from the STL surface
mesh prior to ridge detection.
Note: COTOLERANCE should be larger than NCTOLERANCE.

MAXNVARC [90.0]
Maximum normal variation used in edge collapsing (to improve quality of STL surface mesh
prior to ridge detection). If COTOLERANCE is small then MAXNVARC may be large. If
COTOLERANCE is large then MAXNVARC should be small.

NMTOLERANCE [1.0e-3]
If the surface triangles in the STL file represent a non-manifold body (for example, the surface
mesh contacts itself at vertices or edges), it is possible to "break" the surface mesh by duplicat-

3-20 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD-STL Sec. 3.3 External data

ing vertices where the surface mesh contacts itself and pulling them away from each other.
NMTOLERANCE represents how far duplicate vertices should be pulled apart from each other,
relative to the dimensions of the model.

If set to 0.0, it is turned off.

NMTOLERANCE should always be greater than NCTOLERANCE.

RIDGEAN2 [180 (degrees)]

Before the creation of body edges, if a ridge edge (see RIDGEANG description) is not
connected (at either end), it can be extended so as to make sure any edge connects (at either
end) to one or more other ridge edges. New ridge edges will be created only if the adjacent
triangles have an angle greater than RIDGEAN2.
By default, RIDGEAN2 is set to 180, which signifies this extension feature is not activated. If
activated (RIDGEAN2 is not equal to 180), RIDGEAN2 should be smaller than RIDGEANG.

BYTESWAP [NO]
If the STL file is binary and the byte ordering is "big endian" (as opposed to "little endian"
which is the norm for STL binary files), BYTESWAP should be set to YES. {NO/YES}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-21

Chap. 3 Input/Output IMPORT-EXTERNAL

IMPORT-EXTERNAL FORMAT FILENAME

The IMPORT-EXTERNAL command is used to import external files.

FORMAT [ANSYS-CDB]
The format of the file to be imported. {ANSYS-FSI-BC/ANSYS-CDB}

ANSYS-CDB Imports an Ansys (.cdb) database file. Only nodes, elements,

and element-face sets are imported into ADINA, see notes
below.

ANSYS-FSI-BC Imports a text (.txt) file in Ansys SFELIST format. This option
can be used to import element-face sets into ADINA from
Ansys, see notes below.

FILENAME
The name of the file to be imported. When FORMAT=ANSYS-CDB, the file extension must be
(.cdb). When FORMAT=ANSYS-FSI-BC, the file extension must be (.txt).

Notes on FORMAT=ANSYS-CDB

The FORMAT=ANSYS-CDB option is used to import nodes, elements, and element-

face sets into ADINA from an Ansys (.cdb) database file. Since Ansys element
numbers are unique, ADINA automatically sets ELEMENT-LABEL=UNIQUE in the
CONTROL command when a (.cdb) file is imported.
The Ansys (.cdb) file must be exported using Ansys Mechanical APDL (Ansys
Classic). This has a different format to the (.cdb) file exported using Ansys Work-
bench Finite Element Modeler. The Ansys (.cdb) file must have the following control
data at the top of the file.

NUMOFF, NODE
NUMOFF, ELEM
NUMOFF, TYPE

Only the following Ansys element types are supported:

SHELL181
SOLID185
SOLID186
SOLID187
MESH200

3-22 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
IMPORT-EXTERNAL Sec. 3.3 External data

and only the following Ansys commands are supported:

ET
NBLOCK
EBLOCK
SFE

The ITYPE parameter of the Ansys ET command specifies the ADINA element group
number. The ENAME parameter of the ET command specifies the Ansys element
type as shown below.
Element group number Ansys element type

ET, 5, 185

In Ansys Mechanical APDL, the Ansys CMSEL command is used to define the ET
command for each component. In Ansys Workbench Finite Element Modeler,
named selections are used to define the ET command for each component. That is,
a different named selection will create a different ET. For more information on the
Ansys ET command, see the Ansys Mechanical APDL Command Reference manual.

The Ansys NBLOCK command must be written in (3i9,6e20.13) format.

The Ansys EBLOCK command must be written in (19i9) format. Field 2 of the Ansys
EBLOCK command specifies the ET command label (and hence the ADINA element
group number) for that element. Field 9 specifies the number of nodes defining the
element, and Field 11 specifies the element number. For more information on the
EBLOCK command, see Section 3.2.4 in the Ansys Mechanical APDL Programmers
Reference manual.

Element-face sets are imported into ADINA using the Ansys SFE command. FSI
boundaries are defined in Ansys on all boundaries where element-face sets are to be
created in ADINA. These FSI boundaries are then exported to the (.cdb) file in SFE
format. When the (.cdb) file is imported into ADINA, the ADINA program will
automatically create an element-face set for each Ansys FSI boundary. In Ansys
Workbench Finite Element Modeler, each FSI boundary is defined by setting named
selections and show in the (.cdb) file as CMBLOCK. For more information on the
SFE command, see the Ansys Mechanical APDL Command Reference manual.
ADINA interprets the Ansys SFE command as shown below.
Element number Element face

SFE, 1, 3, FSIN, 1, R5.0

2.00000000 2.00000000 2.00000000 2.00000000
Element-face set number

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-23

Chap. 3 Input/Output IMPORT-EXTERNAL

Note that Ansys writes two SFE commands for each element: one for the fluid side
and one for the solid side. ADINA ignores the SFE command where VAL1 through
VAR4=0.0, i.e.

SFE, 1, 3, FSIN, 1, R5.0

2.00000000 2.00000000 2.00000000 2.00000000

SFE, 1, 3, FSIN, 2, R5.0

0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000
ADINA ignores this command

Ansys (.cdb) files can be imported into an existing ADINA database. In this case,
ADINA appends the imported data to the existing model as so:
o All imported node numbers are offset by the maximum node number in the
existing model. That is,

{Imported node number} = {Max node number in existing model} + {Node

number in Ansys (.cdb) file}

o If elements are to be imported into an existing element group, the imported

element numbers are offset by the maximum element number in that element
group. That is,

{Imported element number} = {Max element number in element group} +

{Element number in Ansys (.cdb) file}

o If element-faces are to be imported into an existing element-face set, the

imported element-faces are appended to the element-face set list.

Notes on FORMAT=ANSYS-FSI-BC

The FORMAT=ANSYS-FSI-BC option is used to import element-face sets into

ADINA from Ansys. This is useful if the Ansys nodes and elements have already
been imported into ADINA (using either NASTRAN-ADINA or IMPORT-EXTER-
NAL ANSYS-CDB) and additional element-face sets need to be defined.
FSI boundaries are defined in Ansys on all boundaries where element-face sets are
to be created in ADINA. These FSI boundaries are then exported to a text (.txt) file in
SFELIST format. When the (.txt) file is imported into ADINA, the ADINA program
will automatically create an element-face set for each FSI boundary. For more
information on the Ansys SFELIST command, see the Ansys Mechanical APDL
Command Reference manual. A typical text (.txt) file in SFELIST format, and the
ADINA interpretation of this file, is shown below.

3-24 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
IMPORT-EXTERNAL Sec. 3.3 External data

LIST ELEMENT SURFACE LOAD FSIN FOR ALL SELECTED ELEMENTS

ELEMENT LKEY FACE NODES FLUID SOLID INTERFACE

20 2 230 2.
542
Element number 543 Element-face set number
543
Nodes defining the element face
27 1 540 2.
53
232
232

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-25

Chap. 3 Input/Output IMPORT-STEP

IMPORT-STEP FILE LABEL SEWING SEWGAP SCALEFACTOR

The IMPORT-STEP command loads a STEP file into the database. The model may be dis-
played, meshed, and loads, boundary conditions may be assigned to its faces, edges, and
vertices. For each body within the STEP part, a solid or sheet geometry BODY is created
which is used to reference that body.

This command is only active when ADINA-M with Open Cascade has been licensed.

FILE
The name of a STEP part file.

LABEL [(highest body label number) + 1]

This is the label number to be assigned to the first BODY to be created which is used to refer
to the first body in the part file -- other bodies in the part file will automatically be assigned
BODY label numbers incremented from this parameter (i.e. (BODYNAME+1),
(BODYNAME+2), ..., etc.)

SEWING [NO]
Indicates whether sheet bodies are to be sewn together. {YES/NO}

SEWGAP [0.01]
ADINA-M sewing body gap ratio. The gap value used to sew the body is SEWGAP * (max.
difference in global coordinate between the maximum and minimum of the STEP body).

SCALEFACTOR [1.0]
ADINA-M scale factor - input STEP coordinate values are to be divided by, i.e., (x-coordinate,
y-coordinate, z-coordinate)/scalefactor.

3-26 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
NASTRAN-ADINA Sec. 3.3 External data

NASTRAN-ADINA FILE XY-YZ BEAM SUBCASE BCELL

CONVERT-ELEMENT-TYPE DEFAULT DUPLICATE
SPLIT ELFACESET NODESET BCELL-ID

NASTRAN-ADINA maps a NASTRAN data file into the ADINA-IN database.

FILE
The NASTRAN data filename.

XY-YZ
This parameter is now obsolete. The program will automatically rotate 2D models in the XY
plane to the YZ plane.

BEAM [THREE]
Indicates whether hermitian beam elements are to be considered as having two-dimensional
or three-dimensional action. {TWO/THREE}

SUBCASE [0]
The label number of a subcase defined in the NASTRAN data file. If SUBCASE=0, the first
subcase is used. {0}

BCELL [NO]
Indicates whether boundary cells (see command BCELL) are created from shell elements
according to the property identification number (PID). All elements with the same PID are put
into the same BCELL. {NO/YES/REPLACE}

NO Do not create boundary cells.

YES Create boundary cells. In addition, if the shell elements are attached to 3-D
elements, the program will also create element-face sets (see ELFACESET
command) and node sets (see NODESET command). All shell elements used
for creating these ELFACESETs and NODESETs are not deleted.

REPLACE Create boundary cells. In addition, if the shell elements are attached to 3-D
elements, the program will also create element-face sets (see ELFACESET
command) and node sets (see NODESET command). All shell elements used
for creating these ELFACESETs and NODESETs will be deleted.

CONVERT-ELEMENT-TYPE [NONE]
Specifies whether or not to convert 4-node shell elements to 8-node. {NONE/SHELL}

The parameters RBAR, RBE2, NCTOLERANCE, RBAR-MATERIAL, RBAR-AREA, RBAR-

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-27

Chap. 3 Input/Output NASTRAN-ADINA

DIAMETER, RBAR-THICKNESS, RBE2-MATERIAL, RBE2-AREA, RBE2-DIAMETER, and

RBE2-THICKNESS are now obsolete. The conversion of RBAR and RBE2 elements is now
specified in the NX Nastran bulk data entry NXSTRAT (see parameters EQRBAR and
EQRBE2).

DEFAULT [AUI]
Specifies which default values and convention should be used when a parameter is not
specified. {AUI/NXN}

AUI Use AUI default values and convention.

NXN Use NX Nastran advanced nonlinear analysis (SOL 601/701) default values and
convention. Nodal temperature and displacement loads with different time functions
are added instead of averaged if DEFAULT=NXN.

Note:
The following default values are different between AUI and SOL 601/701 in NX Nastran.

Command Parameter AUI NXN

CGROUP EPST 0.0 1.0E-3
CGROUP CONSISTENT-STIFFNESS DEFAULT OFF
KINEMATICS INCOMPATIBLE-MODES NO NO/YES*

* NO for explicit analysis; YES for implicit analysis.

DUPLICATE [YES]
This flag indicates whether or not to issue an error message when the Nastran file has a
duplicate node or element. {YES/NO}

YES Error message issued.

NO No error message issued. Later entries will override the earlier entries.

SPLIT [PROGRAM]
Indicates whether elements from different bulk entry (e.g., CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA) but
having the same PID are split into different element groups. By default (i.e., PROGRAM),
splitting is done for ADINA and ADINA-T models but not for ADINA-F models.
{PROGRAM/YES/NO}

ELFACESET [BCELL]
Flag to create elfaceset from attached shell elements. {BCELL/NO/YES/REPLACE}

3-28 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
NASTRAN-ADINA Sec. 3.3 External data

BCELL Take the default flag from BCELL parameter

NO No element face set will be created

YES Create element face set and keep the attached shell elements

REPLACE Create element face set then delete the attached shell elements

Note that as long as one of BCELL, ELFACESET or NODESET = REPLACE

the attached shell elements will be deleted.

NODESET [BCELL]
Flag to create node set from attached shell elements. {BCELL/NO/YES/REPLACE}

BCELL Take the default flag from BCELL parameter

NO No node set will be created

YES Create nodeset and keep the attached SHELL element group

REPLACE Create nodeset then delete the attached SHELL element group

Note that as long as one of BCELL, ELFACESET or NODESET = REPLACE

the attached SHELL element will be deleted.

BCELL-ID [INDEX]
Indicates whether the BCELL label and cell IDs are indexed or use the PID and element IDs of
the Nastran shell elements. {INDEX/PID}

INDEX BCELL label and cell IDs are indexed

PID PID is used as BCELL label and element IDs are used as cell IDs

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-29

Chap. 3 Input/Output EXPORT NASTRAN

EXPORT NASTRAN FILE OVERWRITE FORMAT

Exports an ADINA model to a NASTRAN file. By default, the small field format is used.

FILE
Specifies the NASTRAN file name.

OVERWRITE [CONTROL PROMPT]

Determines, if the file name given by FILE already exists, whether the command will overwrite
its contents with the currently generated input data. If set to UNKNOWN, a prompt will be
given requesting comfirmation for overwriting an existing file. {YES/NO/UNKNOWN}

FORMAT [SMALL]
Indicates the format to export the NASTRAN file. {SMALL/LARGE}

3-30 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EXPORT UNIVERSAL Sec. 3.3 External data

EXPORT UNIVERSAL FILE

Exports the mesh in ADINA-AUI to an I-DEAS universal file format.

FILE
Specifies the name of the universal file to be created.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-31

Chap. 3 Input/Output READ

READ FILE REWIND SCANDATA

READ reads AUI input commands from the file specified by parameter FILE until the end of
the file is reached or the READ END command is encountered in the file. After the READ
command is executed, subsequent input is read from the previous command input source
(that is, the input source from which the READ command was entered).

READ commands can be nested (that is, a file processed by the READ command can itself
include a READ command).

FILE
The name of the file from which AUI commands are read (up to 80 characters long). Note that
the name END is not allowed.

REWIND [NO]
If the file pointer is at end-of-file or if the file is not currently open, the read file is rewound
before beginning to read commands regardless of the value of this parameter. {YES/NO}

SCANDATA [ ]
If SCANDATA is specified, the file is scanned until the SCANDATA string (1 - 80 characters)
is found anywhere within an input record. Reading of input data from the file starts at the
beginning of the record that contains the string.

Auxiliary commands

READ END
Terminates reading from file.

3-32 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FILEREAD Sec. 3.4 Auxiliary files

FILEREAD OPTION FILE

FILEREAD controls the source of input commands to the AUI.

OPTION [INTERFACE]

INTERFACE Commands are read from the terminal or window from which
you invoked the AUI.

FILE Commands are read from the file specified by the FILE parameter.

FILE
The filename of the file from which commands are read. Used only if OPTION = FILE.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FILEREAD

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-33

Chap. 3 Input/Output FILESESSION

FILESESSION OPTION FILE

FILESESSION controls the generation and output of a session file. The session file contains
the commands needed to repeat an AUI session.

A session file differs from an echo file in that:

1) You can generate a session file from a user-interface AUI session (this is the primary
use of the session file).
2) A session file contains all command parameters, regardless of whether you entered
them or whether they were default parameters.
3) Changes to data input lines are handled in a different manner.

OPTION [NO]

NO No session file is created.

OVERWRITE A session file is generated and overwrites any existing contents

of the specified file.

APPEND A session file is generated and is appended to any existing

contents of the specified file.

FILE
The filename of the session file.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FILESESSION

3-34 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FILELIST Sec. 3.4 Auxiliary files

FILELIST OPTION FILE LINPAG EJECT

FILELIST controls the format and output of listings.

OPTION [INTERFACE]

INTERFACE Listings are output at the terminal or window from which you
invoked the AUI. Listings are buffered using an interface similar
to UNIX more that allows you to scroll through listings.

FILE Listings are output to the file specified by the FILE parameter.

FILE
The filename of the file to which listings are written. Used only if OPTION = FILE.
This can be the same file used for command echoing or logging.

LINPAG [0]
The maximum number of lines output between list headings. You can suppress list headings
(except for the first list heading) by specifying LINPAG = 0.

EJECT [NO]
Specifies whether page ejects are placed before headings. {YES/NO}

Auxiliary commands

LIST FILELIST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-35

Chap. 3 Input/Output FILEECHO

FILEECHO OPTION FILE

FILEECHO controls the echoing of your input commands.

OPTION [INTERFACE]

NO No echoing of input commands.

INTERFACE Input commands are echoed back to the terminal or window from
which you invoked the AUI.

FILE Input commands are echoed back to the file specified by the FILE
parameter.

FILE
The filename of the file to which input commands are echoed back. Used only if OPTION =
FILE. This can be the same file for logs or listings.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FILEECHO

3-36 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FILELOG Sec. 3.4 Auxiliary files

FILELOG OPTION FILE

FILELOG controls the output of log messages.

OPTION [INTERFACE]

INTERFACE Log messages are written to the terminal or window from which
you invoked the AUI.

FILE Log messages are written to the file specified by the FILE
parameter.

FILE
The filename of the file to which log messages are written. Used only if OPTION = FILE.
This can be the same file used for echoed commands or listings.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FILELOG

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-37

Chap. 3 Input/Output COMMANDFILE

COMMANDFILE FILENAME PROMPT OPTION GRAPHICS

Creates a file containing the commands needed to recreate the model stored in the current
database.

FILENAME
The name of the file to be created. This parameter must be entered.

PROMPT [CONTROL PROMPT]

You will be prompted Ready to write command file? if PROMPT = YES. You will be
prompted The command file already exists if the specified file already exists and PROMPT =
UNKNOWN. You will not be prompted if PROMPT = NO. Note that the default is taken from the
parameter with the same name of the CONTROL command.

OPTION [SESSION]
If OPTION = SESSION, the command file produced is a record of all commands issued when
this database file is in use. The command file contains model modifications and deletions as
well as model additions. Commands in the command file may contain references to other files,
for example, when a porthole file is loaded, the command file contains a LOADPORTHOLE
command.

Currently OPTION must be set to SESSION. This parameter is provided for future develop-
ments of the AUI.

GRAPHICS [NO]
This parameter is used when OPTION = SESSION to control whether graphics commands
such as FRAME, MESHPLOT, VIEW, etc. are written to the command file. If GRAPHICS =
YES, graphics commands are written to the command file, otherwise they are not written.

3-38 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RTOFILE Sec. 3.4 Auxiliary files

RTOFILE PROGRAM

texti

This command defines the contents of a run-time-option (.rto) file. When an ADINA, ADINA-
T or ADINA-F data file (.dat file) is created, a corresponding run-time-option file (.rto file) is
also created.

If the RTOFILE command is not run, or if there are no lines of text in the RTOFILE command,
then no .rto file is created.

PROGRAM [Current FE program]

The finite element program for which the .rto file will be created. {ADINA/ADINA-T/
ADINA-F}

texti
A line of text in the .rto file. This text must be enclosed by single quotes. There can be an
arbitrary number of lines of text in the .rto file.

Allowable input in the .rto file depends on the finite element program.

Auxiliary commands

LIST RTOFILE
DELETERTOFILE

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-39

Chap. 3 Input/Output PAUSE

PAUSE

When the AUI reads the PAUSE command, it stops processing commands until you hit a key.

3-40 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
END Sec. 3.5 Program termination

END SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT IMMEDIATE

END terminates the program. EXIT, QUIT and STOP are equivalent to END.

If the program is reading data from a file specified by the FILEREAD command and the end of
the file is reached, the END command is executed automatically.

SAVE [UNKNOWN]
Used only when a database has been modified.
YES The program saves the current internal database to disk using the filename
specified by parameter PERMFILE. Then the program creates a new
internal database.

NO The program does not save the current internal database before creating a
new internal database.

UNKNOWN The program asks you if you want to save the database.

PERMFILE [the last previously specified permanent

database filename]
PERMFILE is the filename of the permanent database file when saving the current database
file to disk; used only if the database has been modified. The program will prompt you if you
do not enter a value for PERMFILE and if no permanent database filename has previously
been specified.

PROMPT [UNKNOWN]
Used when saving a permanent database file.
YES You will be prompted Ready to save permanent database file?.

UNKNOWN You will be prompted Permanent database file already exists if the
database file already exists.

NO You will not receive a prompt.

IMMEDIATE [NO]
If IMMEDIATE=YES, the program immediately stops execution without saving the database
or prompting you. This option is most useful when writing batch scripts to force the program
to terminate. {YES / NO}

Auxiliary commands
EXIT SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT
QUIT SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT
STOP SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT
EXIT, QUIT and STOP are equivalent to END.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-41

Chap. 3 Input/Output PARAMETER

PARAMETER NAME EXPRESSION

Defines a parameter that can be substituted in a later command. The parameter can either be
an arbitrary string or a numeric expression. If the parameter is a numeric expression, the AUI
evaluates it and stores the resulting number as the value of the parameter.

Parameter definitions and values are not stored in the database.

Parameter substitution is described in the examples at the end of this command.

NAME
The name of the parameter (1 to 30 alphanumeric characters). The name is not case sensitive.
If the parameter is not already defined, a new parameter is created, otherwise the existing
parameter is modified.
Note that the name cannot contain a - (to avoid confusion with minus signs).

EXPRESSION
A string (up to 256 characters long) that contains a numeric expression. The expression
string can contain the following items:

The arithmetic operators +, -, *, /, ** (exponentiation)

Numbers (either real numbers or integers)

The following functions:

ABS(x) absolute value

AINT(x) truncation
ANINT(x) nearest whole number
ACOS(x) arccosine
ASIN(x) arcsine
ATAN(x) arctangent
ATAN2(x,y) arctangent(x/y)
COS(x) cosine
COSH(x) hyperbolic cosine
DIM(x,y) positive difference
EXP(x) exponential
LOG(x) natural logarithm
LOG10(x) common logarithm
MAX(x,y,...) largest value
MIN(x,y,...) smallest value
MOD(x,y) remaindering

3-42 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
PARAMETER Sec. 3.6 Auxiliary commands

SIGN(x,y) transfer of sign

SIN(x) sine
SINH(x) hyperbolic sine
SQRT(x) square root
STEP(x) the unit step function:
0.0 if x 0.0
1.0 if x > 0.0
TAN(x) tangent
TANH(x) hyperbolic tangent

All trigonometric functions operate on or return angles in radians.

Use an initial backslash \ to prevent the string from being interpreted as a numeric expression.

Examples

PARAMETER A '3.0' // A = 3
PARAMETER B '5 + 7' // B = 12
PARAMETER C '6 * // The string can be entered on several
5 ' // command lines as in this example; C = 30
PARAMETER D \My string // The initial backslash signals the start of
// a text string.

Parameter substitution

When the command-line parser finds a token value that starts with a $, the parser finds the
parameter name with that token value and substitutes the parameter value. For example, in
the commands

PARAMETER X1 '2.0/3.0'
PARAMETER X2 'SQRT(5.0)'
PARAMETER X3 'SIN(2.0)'
BODY BLOCK DX1=$X1 DX2=$X2 DX3=$X3

the parser looks for the values of X1, X2 and X3 and substitutes the values (e.g. the charac-
ters '0.666666666666667') for the names (e.g. the characters 'X1'). Hence the above
commands are exactly equivalent to the command

BODY BLOCK DX1=0.666666666666667 DX2=2.23606797749979,

DX3=0.909297426825682

The token values need not be in upper-case:

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-43

Chap. 3 Input/Output PARAMETER

BODY BLOCK DX1=$x1 DX2=$x2 DX3=$x3

Parameter substitution occurs before command execution, so the following is allowed:

PARAMETER A '2.0'
PARAMETER A '$A + 1' // A = 3

Now you may want to put the symbol $ into a string without parameter substitution occuring.
The rule is: if the next character after the $ is a letter [a-z], the command-line parser attempts
parameter substitution. So

PARAMETER A '3.0'
USERTEXT ABC
'The cost is $2000.00'
'The size is $A'
DATAEND

is equivalent to

USERTEXT ABC
'The cost is $2000.00'
'The size is 3'
DATAEND

A convenient way to output the value of a single parameter is with the ECHO command:

PARAMETER X1 '2.0/3.0'
ECHO $X1
ECHO 'The value of X1 is $X1'

You can also use parameter substitution with parameters that are not numeric expressions:

PARAMETER GROUPTYPE \THREEDSOLID

EGROUP $GROUPTYPE

is equivalent to

EGROUP THREEDSOLID

Auxiliary commands

LIST PARAMETER
Lists the values of all parameters.

3-44 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EXECUTE Sec. 3.6 Auxiliary commands

EXECUTE COMMAND

Executes a system command string within the AUI environment.

COMMAND
Any valid command string. If the command string includes spaces, it must be enclosed in
quotes, e.g., EXECUTE 'echo meshing body 1 > c:\working\job.log'.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 3-45

Chap. 3 Input/Output

This page intentionally left blank.

3-46 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Chapter 4

Interface control and editing

CONTROL Sec. 4.1 Settings

CONTROL PLOTUNIT VERBOSE ERRORLIMIT LOGLIMIT UNDO

PROMPT AUTOREPAINT DRAWMATTACH DRAWTEXT
DRAWLINES DRAWFILLS AUTOMREBUILD ZONECOPY
SWEEPCOINCIDE SESSIONSTORAGE DYNAMICTRANSFORM
UPDATETHICKNESS AUTOREGENERATE ERRORACTION
FILEVERSION INITFCHECK SIGDIGIT AUTOZONE PSFILEVERSION
ELEMENT-LABEL SESSIONOPTION SESSIONTABLE SZNAME

CONTROL defines certain parameters that control program behavior. The parameters defined
by the CONTROL command are stored in the database.

PLOTUNIT <not currently active> [PERCENT]

VERBOSE <not currently active> [YES]
ERRORLIMIT <not currently active> [0]
LOGLIMIT <not currently active> [0]

UNDO [20]
The UNDO parameter controls the number of commands that can be undone using the UNDO
command. If UNDO = 0, the UNDO command cannot be used, if UNDO = 1, UNDO can be
used to undo the effects of the previous command, if UNDO = 2, UNDO can be used to
undo the effects of the previous two commands, etc. Setting UNDO = 0 can significantly
speed up the processing of batch files.

PROMPT [UNKNOWN]
Controls the default behavior for prompts which may arise from various commands.

NO No command prompts will be issued - this is useful in batch

mode - eliminating any interaction.

YES Command prompts are always issued.

UNKNOWN Command prompts are issued only when necessary.

AUTOREPAINT [YES]
When AUTOREPAINT = YES, the AUI automatically repaints that area of the graphics
window that is exposed to the removal or motion of overlapping windows or dialogs. You
may want to set AUTOREPAINT to NO to suppress the repainting; in that case, you can use
the REFRESH command whenever you want to repaint the graphics window.

DRAWMATTACH [YES]
When DRAWMATTACH = YES, mesh plot attachments (band plots, load plots, element
vector plots, reaction plots, line contour plots) are drawn. Otherwise, they are not drawn.
One use of this option would be to turn off drawing of mesh plot attachments before moving
the mesh plots with the mouse.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 4-3

Chap. 4 Interface control and editing CONTROL

DRAWTEXT [EXACT]
DRAWLINES [EXACT]
DRAWFILLS [EXACT]
These options control the drawing of text, lines and fills:

EXACT Use the requested colors while drawing.

SATURATED Convert all colors to saturated colors before drawing.

GRAY Convert all colors to gray scales before drawing.

INVERSE Convert all colors to the INVERSE color before drawing (the
INVERSE color is the opposite of the background color).

NO Do not draw.

AUTOMREBUILD [YES]
When you enter a command that alters the geometry or finite element model, the AUI rebuilds
all corresponding data structures so that the model can be re-plotted. This feature can be
deactivated by setting AUTOMREBUILD = NO (in this case, if you want to plot the model,
you must use the ADINA, ADINA-T or ADINA-F commands to rebuild the model before-
hand).

Setting AUTOMREBUILD = NO can significantly speed up the processing of batch files.

ZONECOPY [NO]
Controls whether the commands BANDPLOT, MESHPLOT, ELINEPLOT, EVECTORPLOT,
LCPLOT, REACTIONPLOT, BANDSTYLE, MESHSTYLE, ELINESTYLE, EVECTORSTYLE,
LCSTYLE, REACTIONSTYLE create copies of the input zones. Zone copies are always
created by these commands in AUI 7.0 but not in later versions of the AUI. The preferred
setting of ZONECOPY is NO, but YES may be necessary to read input/session files produced
for/by AUI 7.0. {YES/NO}

SWEEPCOINCIDE [YES]
Controls whether the SURFACE/VOLUME REVOLVED/EXTRUDED geometry definition
commands check for coincident lines and surfaces, as well as for coincident vertices (points).
AUI 7.0 did not attempt to connect adjacent surfaces/volumes, resulting in duplicate lines
and surfaces fro such sweep geometry definition. The default in AUI 7.1 and higher is to
connect adjacent surfaces/volumes whenever possible. However, AUI 7.0 input/session files
which contain such sweep geometry will likely fail, so it may well be necessary to set
SWEEPCOINCIDE=NO to correctly process older input files. {YES/NO}

SESSIONSTORAGE [YES]

4-4 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONTROL Sec. 4.1 Settings

If SESSIONSTORAGE = YES, the subsequent commands are stored in the AUI database. You
can output these commands using the command COMMANDFILE. In the event of a system
crash, you can retrieve these commands by opening the AUI temporary database, and
subsequently issuing the COMMANDFILE command.

If SESSIONSTORAGE = NO, subsequent commands are not stored in the AUI database and
therefore cannot be retrieved. You may wish to set SESSIONSTORAGE = NO before reading
commands from a batch file to eliminate the overhead of storing those commands within the
AUI database.

Note that the storage of commands in the AUI database is independent of the writing of
commands to the session file determined by command FILESESSION.

DYNAMICTRANSFORM [YES]
Controls how the program indicates the transformation when you move, resize or rotate
graphics using the mouse. If DYNAMICTRANSFORM=YES, the program redraws all picked
graphics completely and redraws all other graphics that overlap the picked graphics. If
DYNAMICTRANSFORM=PARTIAL, the program partially redraws all picked graphics and
does not redraw overlapping graphics. If DYNAMICTRANSFORM=NO, the program
indicates the transformation using a bounding box.

UPDATETHICKNESS [YES]
When you change the thickness of geometry surfaces or faces, all elements generated onto
the surfaces or faces are automatically updated with the updated thickness. {YES/NO}

In AUI 7.2 and lower, elements are not automatically updated. Therefore you may need to set
UPDATETHICKNESS=NO so that input files constructed for use with AUI 7.2 and lower work
correctly.

AUTOREGENERATE [NO]
If AUTOREGENERATE=YES, the program regenerates the graphics after you run a command
that changes the model definition. This parameter only applies to commands that are run
from the command-line (or read from a file); it does not apply to dialog box input from the user
interface. Note that the user interface always regenerates the graphics after you use a dialog
box that changes the model definition. {YES/NO}

ERRORACTION [CONTINUE]
Defines AUI action when error is detected. Parameter affects only commands read from a
batch file.

CONTINUE AUI continues to process commands.

SKIP AUI skips the remaining commands up to the next READ END
command, if any.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 4-5

Chap. 4 Interface control and editing CONTROL

Note: For more details see AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. IV - Display processing.

FILEVERSION [V85]
This parameter tells the AUI which algorithms to use during subsequent commands. Use this
flag to request algorithms from previous versions of the AUI. For example, if you constructed
a batch file in AUI 8.3, set FILEVERSION=V83 to specify that the AUI 8.2 algorithms should
be used in processing the file. {V73 / V74 / V75 / V80 / V81 / V82 / V83 /
V84 / V85}.

INITFCHECK [NO]
This parameter tells the AUI whether or not to consider subsequent commands as part of an
initialization file. If INITFCHECK=NO, subsequent commands are not considered part of an
initialization file, if INITFCHECK=YES, subsequent commands are considered part of an
initialization file.

When INITFCHECK=YES, the AUI does not check resultants and aliases for errors. There-
fore resultants and aliases can be included in initialization files when INITFCHECK=YES.
Also the AUI always allows the use of the FEPROGRAM command when
INITFCHECK=YES.

SIGDIGITS [6]
This parameter controls the number of significant digits used in listings. Between 1 and 16
significant digits can be requested.

AUTOZONE [YES]
When AUTOZONE=YES, the AUI automatically creates zones for many common parts of the
model, such as element groups, contact surfaces and geometry bodies. See the description in
the Zones - Introduction section of this manual (Section 6.2.) { YES / NO }

For models with many element groups or geometry bodies, you may want to turn off the
AUTOZONE feature to save storage and CPU time.

PSFILEVERSION [V0]
This parameter gives the Parasolid version number used for saving Parasolid files. For
example, V150 means to save in Parasolid version 15.0 format. V0 means the Parasolid
version used to compile the AUI. { V0 / V80 / V90 / V91 / V100 / V110 /
V111 / V120 / V121 / V130 / V140 / V150 / V160}

ELEMENT-LABEL [REPEAT]
This parameter tells the AUI to create a unique element label or to use repeat element labels.
{UNIQUE/ REPEAT}.

SESSIONOPTION [ALL]
This parameter influences session file writing, as follows:

4-6 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONTROL Sec. 4.1 Settings

ALL Session files save all parameters in each command

MODIFIED Session files save only the modified parameters in each command.

SESSIONTABLE [100]
This parameter influences session file writing, as follows. If a data input table contains less
than SESSIONTABLE lines, then the entire data input table is written to the session file.
Otherwise only the modified lines of the data input table are written to the session file.

SZNAME [TOPDOWN]
Controls the short zone names automatically created by the AUTOZONE feature.

TOPDOWN The short zone names are created starting from the largest unit, e.g.
CG1_CS2 for contact group 1, contact surface 2. TOPDOWN names are
well suited for display by the Model Tree.

BOTTOMUP The short zone names are created starting from the smallest unit, e.g.
CS2_CG1 for contact surface 2 of contact group 1. BOTTOMUP names
correspond to the short zone names in version 9.1 and earlier.

Notes
1) One important use of parameters DRAWTEXT, DRAWLINES, DRAWFILLS is when
making plots in black and white for reports. In this case you might use DRAWTEXT
= INVERSE, DRAWLINES = INVERSE, DRAWFILLS = GRAY.

2) The drawing parameters apply both to graphics as displayed on the screen and to
graphics as produced using SNAPSHOT or MOVIESAVE (see Section 3.3).

3) One use of DRAWFILLS = SATURATED is to speed up shaded color image drawing,

especially using X Window System graphics; all shades of each color are converted
to the same color, resulting in significantly fewer color changes.

4) Example of a session file that will not work unless ZONECOPY = YES:

*
LOADPORTHOLE OPERATIO=CREATE FILE=...
*
MESHPLOT MESHSTYL=DEFAULT ZONENAME=WHOLE_MODEL RESPONSE=DEFAULT,
MODELDEP=DEFAULT VIEW=DEFAULT MESHWIND=DEFAULT PLOTAREA=DEFAULT,
SUBFRAME=DEFAULT ELDEPICT=DEFAULT NODEDEPI=DEFAULT,
BOUNDEPI=DEFAULT GPDEPICT=DEFAULT GLDEPICT=DEFAULT,
GSDEPICT=DEFAULT GVDEPICT=DEFAULT MESHREND=DEFAULT,
MESHANNO=DEFAULT FRONDEPI=DEFAULT CONDEPIC=DEFAULT,
VSDEPICI=DEFAULT CRACKDEP=DEFAULT RESULTCO=DEFAULT
*

ADINA R & D, Inc. 4-7

Chap. 4 Interface control and editing CONTROL

NODEDEPICTIO NAME=MESHPLOT00001 SYMBOLPL=YES SYMBOL=@C[1,5],

SYMBOLCO=GREEN SYMBOLSI=0.150000005960000 UNITSYMB=CM NUMBER=NO,
NUMBERCO=GREEN NUMBERSI=0.250000000000000 UNITNUMB=CM
@STARTMODIFY
@ENDMODIFY
*
MESHPLOT NAME=MESHPLOT00001 MESHSTYL=DEFAULT ZONENAME=MESHPLOT00001,
RESPONSE=MESHPLOT00001 MODELDEP=MESHPLOT00001 VIEW=MESHPLOT00001,
MESHWIND=MESHPLOT00001 PLOTAREA=MESHPLOT00001,
SUBFRAME=MESHPLOT00001 ELDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001,
NODEDEPI=MESHPLOT00001 BOUNDEPI=MESHPLOT00001,
GPDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001 GLDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001,
GSDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001 GVDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001,
MESHREND=MESHPLOT00001 MESHANNO=MESHPLOT00001,
FRONDEPI=MESHPLOT00001 CONDEPIC=MESHPLOT00001,
VSDEPICI=MESHPLOT00001 CRACKDEP=MESHPLOT00001,
RESULTCO=MESHPLOT00001

The second mesh plot requires a zone name MESHPLOT00001; this zone
name is produced by the first MESHPLOT command by a copy. Notice
that the initial mesh plot works regardless of the value of CONTROL ZONECOPY.

5) Example of commands that work unexpectedly unless ZONECOPY = NO:

MESHPLOT ZONE=PART1
ACTIVEZONE
CLEAR
PART1
DATAEND
LINE STRAIGHT 1 1 2
REGENERATE

We expect that the REGENERATE command will draw line 1, as line 1 has been added to
active zone PART1 and the mesh plot contains zone PART1. However the REGENERATE
command will only draw line 1 if CONTROL ZONECOPY = NO.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CONTROL
Lists the values of the parameters set by the CONTROL command.

4-8 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
UNDO Sec. 4.2 Editing

UNDO NUMBER

UNDO cancels the effects of previous commands.

UNDO is possible only if CONTROL UNDO is greater than zero. See Section 4.1 for a
description of the CONTROL command.

The UNDO command can itself be undone by REDO (described in this section).

NUMBER [1]
The number of previous commands to be undone. The maximum possible number of previous
commands that can be undone is set by CONTROL UNDO. However, the actual number of
previous commands that can be undone may be less than this.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 4-9

Chap. 4 Interface control and editing REDO

REDO NUMBER

REDO cancels the effects of previous UNDO commands (described in this section). It can be
used only if the previous command was either UNDO or REDO.

The REDO command can be followed by the UNDO command to cancel the REDO.

NUMBER [1]
The number of previous UNDO commands to be undone.

4-10 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Chapter 5

Control data
FEPROGRAM Sec. 5.1 General

FEPROGRAM PROGRAM

FEPROGRAM specifies the finite element analysis program to be used to solve the problem
described by the model database.

PROGRAM [ADINA]
The finite element analysis program name. The following choices are available:

ADINA For displacement and stress analysis.

ADINA-T For heat transfer analysis.

ADINA-F For fluid flow and heat transfer analysis.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FEPROGRAM
Lists the currently selected finite element analysis program.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-3

Chap. 5 Control data HEADING

HEADING STRING

HEADING specifies a title for the problem described by the model database.

STRING [*** NO HEADING DEFINED ***]

The problem heading, input as a string of up to 80 characters (including blank spaces)
enclosed within apostrophes ().

Auxiliary commands

LIST HEADING
Lists the current problem heading.

5-4 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 5.1 General

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-5

Chap. 5 Control data MASTER

MASTER ANALYSIS MODEX TSTART IDOF OVALIZATION

FLUIDPOTENTIAL CYCLICPARTS IPOSIT REACTIONS
INITIALSTRESS FSINTERACTION IRINT CMASS SHELLNDOF
AUTOMATIC SOLVER CONTACT-ALGORITHM TRELEASE
RESTART-LDC FRACTURE LOAD-CASE LOAD-PENETRATION
MAXSOLMEM MTOTM RECL SINGULARITY-STIFFNESS
STIFFNESS-FACTOR MAP-OUTPUT MAP-FORMAT
NODAL-DEFORMATION-FILE POROUS-COUPLING ZOOM-LABEL
AXIS-CYCLIC PERIODIC VECTOR-SHELL EPSI-FIRST STABILIZE
STABFACTOR RESULTS FEFCORR BOLTSTEP EXTEND-SSCURVE
CONVERT-SSVAL DEGEN TMC-MODEL ENSIGHT-OUTPUT
IRSTEPS INITIALTEMP TEMP-INTERPOLATION ESINTERACTION
OP2GEOM INSITU-DISP OP2ERCS 2DPL-AX OP2STR

MASTER defines the data controlling the execution of the analysis program ADINA.

ANALYSIS [STATIC]
Selects the category of analysis to be performed.

STATIC Static analysis.

DYNAMIC-DIRECT-INTEGRATION Dynamic analysis.
FREQUENCIES Frequency / mode-shape calculation.

BUCKLING-LOADS Linearized buckling load calculation.

MODAL-TRANSIENT Mode superposition for time integration of

modal response.

MODAL-PARTICIPATION-FACTORS Calculation of modal participation factors for

subsequent response spectrum, harmonic, or
random analyses.

MODAL-STRESSES Calculation of modal stresses.

MODEX [EXECUTE]
Selects the execution mode of the analysis. {CHECK/EXECUTE/RESTART/RESULTS}

CHECK ADINA checks the data without executing.

EXECUTE ADINA checks the data and executes.

RESTART ADINA performs a restart, reading data from a previous run, checks the
data and executes.

5-6 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MASTER Sec. 5.1 General

RESULTS ADINA performs result-recovery.

TSTART [0.0]
Solution start time. For a restart run (MODEX = RESTART) TSTART must equal a solution
time at which data was saved from a previous run.

IDOF [000000]
Master degree of freedom code. A six digit integer, where each digit indicates either an
allowed (0) or a deleted (1) degree of freedom. A degree of freedom deleted by this parameter
is deleted from the entire model. The digits correspond to the following degrees of freedom:
Digit 1: X-translation (a-translation for a skew system).
Digit 2: Y-translation (b-translation for a skew system).
Digit 3: Z-translation (c-translation for a skew system).
Digit 4: X-rotation (a-rotation for a skew system).
Digit 5: Y-rotation (b-rotation for a skew system).
Digit 6: Z-rotation (c-rotation for a skew system).

The default is for all degrees of freedom to be active.

Note: The directions of rotational degrees of freedom at a shell element mid-surface node
with a local reference system depend on the orientation of the director vector or
element normal vector, as applicable.

Note: Preceding zeroes may be omitted, i.e., IDOF = 111 is equivalent to IDOF = 000111.

OVALIZATION [NONE]
Pipe element nodes can have additional ovalization and warping degrees of freedom, as
selected by the following options:
NONE All ovalization and warping degrees of freedom are deleted.

IN-PLANE Only the 3 ovalization and 3 warping degrees of freedom corre-

sponding to in-plane loading are admissible.

OUT-OF-PLANE Only the 3 ovalization and 3 warping degrees of freedom corre-

sponding to out-of-plane loading are admissible.

ALL All 6 ovalization and 6 warping degrees of freedom are admissible.

FLUIDPOTENTIAL [AUTOMATIC]
Selects the fluid potential degree of freedom. If there are elements in groups of type FLUID2
or FLUID3 with a potential-based formulation, this degree of freedom is automatically
selected. {AUTOMATIC/YES/NO}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-7

Chap. 5 Control data MASTER

CYCLICPARTS [1]
The number of cyclic symmetric parts of the main structure. If the value is greater than or
equal to 2 then a cyclic symmetric analysis is performed. The maximum number of cyclic
symmetric parts allowed is 999. CYCLICPARTS = 1 indicates no cyclic symmetry.

IPOSIT [STOP]
Specifies the preferred behavior of ADINA when a zero or negative diagonal element is
encountered, i.e. when the system matrix is not positive definite.

STOP ADINA may terminate, see note below.

CONTINUE ADINA continues execution.

Note: The selection IPOSIT = STOP may be overridden by ADINA, as follows:

IPOSIT = STOP

Linear analysis:
ADINA stops if the stiffness matrix is not positive definite, except when
potential-based fluid elements are in use.

Non-linear analysis:
ADINA stops if the stiffness matrix is not positive definite, unless:
- the automatic load-displacement (LDC) option is being used, or
- the automatic time-stepping (ATS) option is being used, or
- the element birth/death option is used, or
- potential-based fluid elements are being used, or
- a contact analysis is being performed.

IPOSIT = CONTINUE

ADINA will always continue execution. If an exact zero pivot is encountered,

ADINA assigns a very large number to the diagonal term, effectively attaching a
very stiff spring to the degree of freedom. If the stiffness matrix is not positive
definite in linear analysis, this usually means that the problem is not well defined
(e.g. insufficient restraint). Use of IPOSIT = CONTINUE in such cases can give
misleading results.

REACTIONS [YES]
Indicates whether reaction forces and moments corresponding to fixed or prescribed degrees
of freedom are evaluated and printed. {NO/YES/SELECTED/SUM-SELECTED}

NO No reaction forces and moments corresponding to fixed or pre-

scribed degrees of freedom are evaluated and printed.

5-8 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MASTER Sec. 5.1 General

YES All reaction forces and moments corresponding to fixed or pre-

scribed degrees of freedom are evaluated and printed.

SELECTED Reaction forces are printed for nodes selected by command REAC-
TION-NODES.

SUM-SELECTED The sum of reaction forces for nodes selected by command REAC-
TION-NODES are printed.

INITIALSTRESS [NO]
Indicates whether the initial strains input are to be interpreted by ADINA as the correspond-
ing initial stresses. This parameter has the same effect as the INITIAL-CONDITION
INITIALSTRESS parameter. {NO/YES/DEFORMATION}

NO Initial strains are not interpreted as initial stresses.

YES Initial strains are interpreted as initial stresses, but stresses do not
result in deformation.

DEFORMATION Initial strains are to be interpreted as initial stress which result

in deformation.

FSINTERACTION [NO]
Determines whether the analysis involves fluid-structure interaction. {YES/NO}

Note: FSINTERACTION = YES is automatically set if FSBOUNDARY is used.

IRINT [DEFAULT]
Frequency of saving ADINA results to restart file.
>0 Restart file overwritten every IRINT timesteps.
<0 Restart file appended every IRINT timesteps.

DEFAULT Number of steps in first time step block (see TIMESTEP ) for explicit
timestepping (see ANALYSIS DYNAMIC-DIRECT-INTEGRATION ).
1 otherwise.

CMASS [NO]
Controls whether the total mass, total volume, moments and products of inertia, centroid, and
center of mass are calculated by ADINA for each element group. {YES/NO}

SHELLNDOF [AUTOMATIC]
Specifies the default number of degrees of freedom to be associated with shell midsurface
nodes. This default may be overridden by SHELLNODESDOF, which specifies the number of
degrees of freedom for shell midsurface nodes.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-9

Chap. 5 Control data MASTER

5 or FIVE Shell midsurface nodes will have 3 translation degrees of freedom

(global or skew) together with two rotation degrees of freedom
corresponding to a local midsurface coordinate system see
SHELLNODESDOF.

6 or SIX Shell midsurface nodes will have 3 translation and 3 rotation degrees
of freedom corresponding to the global or assigned skewsystem.

0 or AUTOMATIC Shell midsurface nodes will have five degrees of freedom, unless
modeling considerations, determined automatically, such as branch
shell structures or direct specification of rotation degrees of freedom
(see SHELLNODESDOF ), require that six degrees of freedom be
employed.

AUTOMATIC [OFF, (FSINTERACTION=NO)]

[ATS, (FSINTERACTION=YES)]
Selects a method of automatic incrementation control during analysis. {OFF/ATS/LDC/
TLA/TLA-S}

OFF No automatic incrementation; user-defined time step sequence is followed.

ATS Automatic time step control is enabled see command

AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING.

LDC Automatic load-displacement control is enabled see command

AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT.

TLA The program ignores any time step and time function specified. Instead, 50 time
steps of size 0.2 are used with a linear ramp time function (100% load at time of
10.0), and following settings are used.
- ATS with an acceleration scheme is used
- maximum number of equilibrium iterations = 30
- line search is used
- limits maximum incremental displacement in each iteration to 5% of largest
model length

TLA-S Total load application with stabilization. In addition to TLA settings, the
following stabilization settings are used.
- stiffness matrix stabilization factor of 1.0e-10 is used
- low-speed dynamics option is used
- contact damping is used

See command AUTOMATIC TOTAL-LOAD-APPLICATION for changing the settings used in

the TLA or TLA-S scheme.

5-10 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MASTER Sec. 5.2 Analysis details

SOLVER [SPARSE]
Selects the type of solution algorithm used to solve the equilibrium equation system.
{SPARSE/3D-ITERATIVE/NONSYM-SP/ITERATIVE/MULTIGRID/SKYLINE}

SPARSE A sparse-matrix solver is used.

3D-ITERATIVE An iterative solver is used for models with relatively large number
of 3-D higher order elements.

NONSYM-SP A nonsymmetric sparse solver is used.

ITERATIVE An iterative solution (incomplete Cholesky preconditioned

conjugate gradient method) is used.

MULTIGRID A multigrid solver is used.

SKYLINE A skyline direct solution algorithm (active column Gauss elimina-

tion) is used. This option is obsolete and should not be used
except for very small problems.

Note: See SOLVER ITERATIVE for input of parameters controlling the operation of the
iterative solver.
The ADINA sparse matrix solver has been proven to yield drastic reductions in
solution times as compared to the skyline solver.

CONTACT-ALGORITHM [CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION]
Selects the default algorithm used for contact groups. See the Theory and Modeling Guide
for further details. {CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION/SEGMENT-METHOD/RIGID-TARGET}

It is recommended to use the CONTACT-CONTROL commands CONTACT-ALGORITHM

parameter instead for this purpose as this parameter may be obsolete in future releases.

TRELEASE [0.0]
When the element death option is utilized, an element will die (i.e., have zero stiffness
contribution) at a given time TDEATH associated with the element. By default (TRELEASE =
0.0) an element dies immediately when the solution time reaches TDEATH. However,
when TRELEASE > 0.0, an element will die over the solution time interval from TDEATH
to (TDEATH + TRELEASE). { 0.0}

RESTART-LDC [NO]
Determines whether or not the load vector is transferred to a restart run.

NO The load vector is not written at the end of an analysis, nor is it read as an

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-11

Chap. 5 Control data MASTER

external load vector in a restart analysis.

YES The load vector is written at the end of an analysis, and it is read as an
external load vector in a restart analysis.

FRACTURE [NO]
Controls whether or not the analysis involves fracture mechanics. {YES/NO}

LOAD-CASE [NO]
Controls whether or not multiple load cases are used in a linear analysis. If LOAD-CASE =
SIMPACK, the SIMPACK interface will be used. {YES/NO/SIMPACK}

LOAD-PENETRATION [NO]
Controls whether or not load penetration is employed in the analysis, whereby distributed
(pressure) load is transferred upon element death. {YES/NO}

MAXSOLMEM
MTOTM
RECL
These parameters are obsolete.

SINGULARITY-STIFFNESS [YES]
Assign drilling stiffness to rotational degrees of freedom with zero stiffness associated
with shell nodes connected to rigid links, beams, or pipes. {NO/YES}

STIFFNESS-FACTOR [1E-4]
Stiffness factor value used when SINGULARITY-STIFFNESS = YES. The actual stiffness
used is obtained by multiplying this factor by the rotational stiffness at the shell nodes.

MAP-OUTPUT [NONE]
Indicates whether the mapping file is written. If the file is written, the frequency follows the
frequency of the porthole file. {NONE/YES/REMESH/NODAL/ZOOM-INITIAL/ZOOM-
ANALYSIS/FSB}

NONE No mapping file output.

YES ADINA will output mapping file.

REMESH AUI read nodal deformation file to recreate geometry for remeshing.

NODAL ADINA will output mapping file only for nodal results. This type of
mapping file can be used as initial conditions for a subsequent analysis
using a different mesh.

5-12 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MASTER Sec. 5.2 Analysis details

ZOOM-INITIAL
ADINA will output mapping file for use by a zoom model.

ZOOM-ANALYSIS
ADINA will perform analysis for a zoom model. A mapping file created in a
previous analysis (with MAP-OUTPUT = ZOOM-INITIAL) is required.
If the boundary of the zoom model coincides with the boundary of the
original model, the ZOOM-BOUNDARY command must also be specified
(see figure at ZOOM-BOUNDARY command).

FSB MASTER command will read previous mapping file and update
FSI-BOUNDARY with deformed coordinate. Note that this option is only
used with FSINTERACTION = YES and the adaptive-mesh option is used
in the ADINA-F model.

MAP-FORMAT
Indicates whether the mapping file is written in text or binary format. {YES/NO}
NO binary file.

YES text file.

NODAL-DEFORMATION-FILE
Specifies the name of the nodal deformation file. If MAP-OUTPUT=REMESH AUI will read
this file. When the program reads the nodal deformation file to recreate geometry for
remeshing, the following actions are taken:
- all elements and their nodes are deleted.
- all volumes and surfaces are deleted.
- all lines which contain nodes are modified such that the line now passes through the
new nodal positions.

Note: MAP-OUTPUT=REMESH is currently restricted only for 2-D problem where the
model uses only AUI native geometry (i.e. lines and surfaces).

POROUS-COUPLING [NO]
Porous-coupling. {NO/YES}

ZOOM-LABEL [1]
Current zoom model label number .

AXIS-CYCLIC [0]
Label number of cyclic symmetry axis defined by axis-rotation command. Default AXIS-
CYCLIC = 0 means use global X axis.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-13

Chap. 5 Control data MASTER

PERIODIC [NO]
Specifies whether periodic loads are to be applied to cyclic parts. {NO/YES}

NO different loads are used for different cyclic parts.

YES the load applied on the first cyclic part is rotated about the cyclic axis and applied to
the other cyclic parts. Unlike basic cyclic symmetry analysis, a periodic symmetry
analysis can be nonlinear. It can also be used with explicit dynamic time integration.

VECTOR-SHELL [GEOMETRY]
Flag for calculation of shell-vector direction

GEOMETRY shell-vector direction from surface/face normal direction

ELEMENT shell-vector direction from element

EPSI-FIRST [NO]
Indicates whether the analysis is first solved with the applied initial strain before loads are
applied. If EPSI-FIRST=YES, then the automatic time stepping (ATS) method can also be used
to scale the initial strains in case the solution fails to converge when the full initial strains are
applied in one step.{NO/YES}

STABILIZE [NO]
The flag to set the option to stabilize the stiffness matrix. {AUTOMATIC/NO/YES}

AUTOMATIC Automatically use stabilization if the ratio of the maximum to minimum

diagonals of the factorized stiffness matrix is too large.
NO Do not use stabilization.

YES Use stabilization.

STABFACTOR [1.0E-10]
The stabilization factor used if STABILIZE when is set to YES or AUTOMATIC.

RESULTS [PORTHOLE]
Specifies the output option for the results. {PORTHOLE/OP2/OP2+PORT/UNV/
UNV+PORT/NEU/NEU+PORT/NEUX/NEUX+PORT}

PORTHOLE ADINA porthole file format

OP2 Nastran .OP2 file format
OP2+PORT Nastran OP2 file and ADINA porthole file formats
UNV I-deas universal file format

5-14 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MASTER Sec. 5.2 Analysis details

UNV+PORT I-deas universal file and ADINA porthole file formats

NEU Femap neutral file format
NEU+PORT Femap neutral file and ADINA porthole file format
NEUX Extended (i.e., includes model geometry) FEMAP neutral file format

NEUX+PORT Extended FEMAP neutral file and ADINA porthole file format

FEFCORR [NO]
Perform fixed-end-force correction for beams. {YES/NO}

BOLTSTEP [1]
The number of steps to iterate for calculation of bolt force.

EXTEND-SSCURVE [YES]
For the multilinear-plastic, multilinear-plastic-creep, and multilinear-plastic-creep-variable
material models specifies whether the stress-strain data is extended.{NO/YES}

NO The stress-strain curve is not extended. The element automatically ruptures

when the accumulated effective plastic strain at any integration point
reaches the effective plastic strain corresponding to the last input point of
the stress-strain curve.

YES The stress-strain curve is automatically extended to a strain value of 100

(infinite strain). The curve is extended by linearly extrapolating the gradient
at the last point. The element does not rupture in this case.

CONVERT-SSVAL [NO]
For the multilinear-plastic, multilinear-plastic-creep, and multilinear-plastic-creep-variable
material models specifies whether the material input data is converted from engineering
stress-strain data to true stress-strain data. {NO/YES}

NO Interpret material input data as true stress-strain data.

YES Interpret material input data as engineering stress-strain data.

DEGEN [YES]
Indicator for spatial isotropy correction of degenerate 8-node 2D elements or 20-node 3D
elements. {YES/NO/UNUSED}

TMC-MODEL [NO]
Specifies whether the model contains thermal properties and the type of thermal-mechanical
coupling analysis. {NO/ONEWAY/ITERATIVE/HEAT/DIRECT}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-15

Chap. 5 Control data MASTER

NO No heat transfer analysis is performed by the program.

ONEWAY The program performs first a heat transfer step to calculate temperatures,
then a stress/displacement (mechanical) step. Note that the heat transfer
step size can be different than the mechanical step size. Also, heat transfer
can be a transient analysis and mechanical analysis can be a static analysis
(or any combination thereof).

ITERATIVE An iterative thermo-mechanical coupling is used. The program iterates

between heat transfer and mechanical solutions. The same step size is used
in both cases. A solution is obtained if both temperature and displace-
ment results converge. Note that the option is available for contact with
friction, or thermo-plastic and rubber materials only.

HEAT The program ignores any structural loads and boundary conditions and
performs a pure heat transter analysis.

DIRECT A direct thermo-mechanical coupling is used.

ENSIGHT-OUTPUT [NO]
Indicates whether an EnSight output file is written and which format is used. If the file is
written, it will be written at end of each time step when the porthole file is written.
{NO/UNFORMATTED/FORMATTED}

NO No EnSight output file is written

UNFORMATTED An unformatted EnSight output file is written

FORMATTED A formatted EnSight output file is written

IRSTEPS [1]
Specifies the number of solution time steps to save in the restart file. If IRSTEPS=1, the
number of steps saved in the restart file is dictated by IRINT. If IRSTEPS>1, the number of
steps saved in the restart file is limited to IRSTEPS. {>0}

INITIALTEMP [NO]
Update temperature for restart run. In a restart run, it possible have initial temperatures equal
to temperatures of the previous run and at the same time, the initial geometry to be updated
for the previously calculated displacements. {NO/YES}

TEMP-INTERPOLATION [NO]
This parameter specifies temperature interpolation. {NO/CORNER}

5-16 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MASTER Sec. 5.2 Analysis details

NO Element integration point temperatures are interpolated using all element

nodes.

CORNER Element integration point temperatures are interpolated using corner nodes
only.

ESINTERACTION [NO]
Determines whether the analysis involves em-structure interaction. {NO/YES}

OP2GEOM [NO]
Specifies whether to include the geometry data blocks (nodal coordinates, element connectiv-
ity) in the OP2 output file when RESULTS=OP2 or OP2+PORT. {NO/YES}

INSITU-DISP [NO]
For a regular analysis (MODEX=EXECUTE), this parameter specifies whether displacements
are stored as in-situ displacements in the restart file. In-situ displacements may be removed in
a restart analysis.

For a restart analysis (MODEX=RESTART), this parameter specifies whether in-situ displace-
ments stored in the restart file are removed, i.e., if INSITU-DISP=YES, the element stresses
resulting from loads in the previous analysis will be present but the displacements will be
zero at the start of the restart analysis.

Hence, for in-situ displacements to be removed in a restart analysis, INSITU-DISP=YES

must be specified in both the regular and restart analysis.{YES/NO}

OP2ERCS [ELEMENT]
Indicates the coordinate system used for the nonlinear stress results of 3D solid elements in
the op2 file. This option is only active when RESULTS=OP2 or OP2+PORT. {ELEMENT/
MATERIAL}

2DPL-AX [YZ-Z]
Flag for the plane and axis for axisymmetric 2D solid elements. If set to YZ-Z, axisymmetric
2D solid elements are defined in the YZ-plane, and axisymmetic about the Z-axis. {YZ-Z/
YZ-Y/XY-X/XY-Y/XZ-Z/XZ-X}

OP2STR [DEFAULT]
Specifies the format of the OP2 stress/strain data blocks.{DEFAULT/LINEAR}

DEFAULT The OP2 stress/strain data blocks are written in linear format for
linear analysis and nonlinear format for nonlinear analysis.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-17

Chap. 5 Control data MASTER

LINEAR The OP2 stress/strain data blocks are written in linear format for
both linear and nonlinear analysis. This option is useful when only
OP2 linear data blocks are supported (e.g., in Fe-Safe).

Auxiliary commands

LIST MASTER

5-18 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DOF-ACTIVE Sec. 5.2 Analysis details

DOF-ACTIVE

nodei dofi

The command is used to identify the active degree of freedom (DOF) of reduced model. It is
only used when LOAD-CASE = SIMPACK in the MASTER command.

nodei
Node label number.

dofi
Type of DOF. If skew systems are used, the directions refer to the skew systems.
{X-TRANSLATION/Y-TRANSLATION/Z-TRANSLATION/R-ROTATION/Y-ROTA-
TION/Z-ROTATION}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-19

Chap. 5 Control data TMC-CONTROL

TMC-CONTROL ANALYSIS TIMESTEP TSTEP-NAME AUTOMATIC

SOLVER HEAT-MATRIX METHOD MAXSUBD ALPHA
TSTART GAMMA TEMP-CUTOFF CUTOFF TEMP-RELAX
HEAT-RELAX RIGIDLINK TEMP-INTERPOLATION SUBCASE

TMC-CONTROL defines parameters that control TMC analysis.

ANALYSIS [STEADY-STATE]
Selects the type of heat transfer analysis to be performed.
{STEADY-STATE/TRANSIENT}

STEADY-STATE Steady-state analysis.

TRANSIENT Time dependent analysis.

TIMESTEP [CURRENT]
Flag to specify the time step for heat transfer analysis. {CURRENT/SPECIFIED}

CURRENT Use the same time step as ADINA.

SPECIFIED Specify the time step using the TSTEP-NAME parameter.

TSTEP-NAME
Specifies the time step for heat transfer analysis. It is used only when TIMESTEP = SPECI-
FIED.

AUTOMATIC [OFF]
Enables automatic incrementation control during analysis. {OFF/ATS}

OFF No automatic incrementation, user-defined timestep sequence is

followed.

ATS Automatic timestep control is enabled, see MAXSUBD parameter

below.

SOLVER [SPARSE]
Selects the type of solution algorithm used to solve the equilibrium equation system.
{SPARSE/ITERATIVE}

SPARSE A sparse-matrix solver is used.

ITERATIVE An iterative solution (incomplete Cholesky preconditioned conjugate

gradient method) is used.

5-20 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TMC-CONTROL Sec. 5.2 Analysis details

Note: See command TMC-SOLVER ITERATIVE for input of parameters controlling the
operation of the iterative solver.

HEAT-MATRIX [CONSISTENT]
Selects the type of heat capacity matrix to be used in transient analysis. {CONSISTENT/
LUMPED}

CONSISTENT Consistent heat capacity matrix.

LUMPED Lumped (diagonalized) heat capacity matrix.

METHOD [BATHE]
Time integration method used in transient analysis. {BACKWARD-EULER / TRAPEZOI-
DAL / ALPHA / BATHE}

BACKWARD-EULER Euler backward integration.

TRAPEZOIDAL Trapezoidal rule.

ALPHA Alpha-family method.

BATHE Bathe composite method.

MAXSUBD [10]
Specifies the maximum permitted subdivision of any given timestep when AUTOMATIC =
ATS, i.e., for a time step of magnitude T, the algorithm will not attempt to subdivide below a
time step of magnitude T/2MAXSUBD.

ALPHA [1.0]
Time integration parameter for METHOD=ALPHA. {0 ALPHA 1.0}

TSTART [DEFAULT]
Start time of the heat transfer solution. DEFAULT indicates a start time that is the start time
for the structural solution. {DEFAULT / TSTART 0.0}

GAMMA [0.5]
Coefficient used for the Bathe time integration method. {0.0 <
GAMMA < 1.0}

TEMP-CUTOFF [NO]
If TEMP-CUTOFF = YES, temperature CUT-OFF will be used. {NO/YES}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-21

Chap. 5 Control data TMC-CONTROL

CUTOFF [1.0D30]
Temperature will be cut-off above CUT-OFF.

TEMP-RELAX [1.0]
Temperature relaxation factor to overcome convergence difficulties.
{0.0 TEMP-RELAX 1.0}

HEAT-RELAX [1.0]
Generated heat relaxation factor to overcome convergence difficulties.
{0.0 HEAT-RELAX 1.0}

RIGIDLINK [NO]
If we have two bodies connected by rigid links, we might want to have the same temperatures
for nodes connected by rigid links with no need to specify temperature constraint equations.
In this case we would specify RIDGIDLINK = YES.
In other cases (for example a 3-D body rotated using rigid links), the temperature cannot be
applied to the master rigid link node (which creates rotations) and therefore temperatures on
the body cannot be constrained to that node. Hence we should have here RIDGIDLINK =
NO.{YES/NO}

TEMP-INTERPOLATION [NO]
This pararmeter specifies temperature interpolation. {NO/CORNER}

NO Temperatures are calculated using all element nodes.

CORNER Temperatures are calculated using corner nodes only.

SUBCASE [DIFFERENT]
Indicates whether structural and thermal results are output in different subcases or the same
subcase. {DIFFERENT/SAME}

5-22 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 5.2 Analysis details

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-23

Chap. 5 Control data ANALYSIS DYNAMIC-DIRECT-INTEGRATION

ANALYSIS DYNAMIC-DIRECT-INTEGRATION
METHOD DELTA ALPHA THETA TIMESTEP NCRSTEP
CRSTEP MASS-SCALE DTMIN1 DTMIN2 GAMMA MIDLOAD
BATHE-DELTA BATHE-ALPHA

ANALYSIS DYNAMIC-DIRECT-INTEGRATION specifies time integration parameters for a

dynamic, direct time-integration, analysis.

METHOD [BATHE]
Selects the method to be used for direct time integration, see Theory and Modeling Guide.
{NEWMARK/CENTRAL-DIFFERENCE/WILSON/BATHE/NOH-BATHE}

NEWMARK Newmark method.

CENTRAL-DIFFERENCE Central difference method (explicit analysis).

WILSON Wilson- method.

BATHE Bathe composite method.

NOH-BATHE Noh-Bathe method (explicit analysis).

Note: For the central-difference method:

- substructures and cyclic symmetry cannot be used;
- a lumped mass matrix is used automatically;
- there are further restrictions on analysis features, material models and element
settings. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for more details.

Note: The Wilson- method cannot be used for nonlinear analysis.

DELTA [0.5]
ALPHA [0.25]
Coefficients for the Newmark method. {DELTA 0.5}{ALPHA > 0.0}
The following choices are often employed:

DELTA = 0.5, ALPHA = 0.25 The constant-average-acceleration scheme

(also termed the trapezoidal rule).

DELTA = 0.5, ALPHA = 0.5 Good for contact-impact problems.

Note: The Newmark method is unconditionally stable in linear analysis, if:

DELTA 0.5, ALPHA 0.25 (DELTA + 0.5)2

5-24 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ANALYSIS DYNAMIC-DIRECT-INTEGRATION Sec. 5.2 Analysis details

THETA [1.4]
Coefficient for the Wilson- method. {1.39 THETA 2.01}

TIMESTEP [TOTALTIME]
Indicates the method of time step selection for explicit analysis (i.e., METHOD = CENTRAL-
DIFFERENCE). {USER/AUTOMATIC/TOTALTIME}

USER User defined timesteps. (See TIMESTEP )

AUTOMATIC ADINA automatically calculates the time step magnitude in explicit

analysis based on stability considerations. The total number of time
steps specified in the TIMESTEP command will be used.

TOTALTIME The magnitude of the timesteps is calculated automatically by the

program. The analysis runs until the total time specified in the
TIMESTEP command is reached. The number of steps specified in the
TIMESTEP command determines how often results are saved to the
porthole file.

NCRSTEP [1]
Defines how often the time step magnitude is updated in explicit analysis (the time step
magnitude is updated every NCRSTEP step(s)). This parameter is not used if
TIMESTEP=USER.
{NCRSTEP = 1, 2, 3, ...}

CRSTEP [0.0]
Factor used to scale the calculated time step in transient explicit analysis. This parameter is
not used if TIMESTEP=USER. {0.0 CRSTEP 4.0}

For the default value CRSTEP = 0.0, CRSTEP will be set to 0.9 always.

MASS-SCALE [1.0]
Specifies the factor to scale the mass (densities) of the entire model (at the beginning of the
analysis) to increase the critical time step size required for stability when the explicit time
integration scheme is used. See caution below. { 1.0}

DTMIN1 [0.0]
The minimum time step size used to determine if mass scaling will be applied to elements (at
the beginning of the analysis) whose critical time step size is smaller than DTMIN1. The
amount of mass scaling is calculated for each element so that the critical time step size is
equal to DTMIN1. See caution below. This parameter is not used if TIMESTEP=USER.
{ 0.0}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-25

Chap. 5 Control data ANALYSIS DYNAMIC-DIRECT-INTEGRATION

DTMIN2 [0.0]
The minimum time step size used to determine if an element will be removed in an explicit time
integration analysis. In explicit time integration, the smaller an element size is, the smaller will
the critical time step size be. If the critical time step size for an element is smaller than
DTMIN2, the element will be removed in the analysis. See caution below. { 0.0}

Notes:
MASS-SCALE, DTMIN1 and DTMIN2 may be used together.
DTMIN1 and DTMIN2 are applied after MASS-SCALE is applied.
If DTMIN1 and DTMIN2 are both used, DTMIN1 should be greater than DTMIN2. If
DTMIN2 DTMIN1 is specified, DTMIN1 will be ignored.

CAUTION:
Specifying MASS-SCALE > 1.0, DTMIN1 > 0.0 or DTMIN2 > 0.0 may change the model
significantly. Hence, extra care should be exercised in examining the results when any of
these parameters are used.

GAMMA [0.5]
Coefficient for the Bathe method, used only in nonlinear analysis. It is recommended to use
the default value of GAMMA (i.e., 0.5).{0.0 < GAMMA < 1.0}

MIDLOAD [TIMEFUNCTION]
indicates the load magnitude used in the mid-step of the Bathe method. {TIMEFUNCTION/
MEAN}

TIMEFUNCTION Mid-step load is calculated based on the time function.

MEAN Mid-step load is calculated as the mean load between time t and time
t + t.

BATHE-DELTA [0.5]
BATHE-ALPHA [0.25]
The Bathe method uses the Newmark time integration scheme in the first sub-step, in which
coefficients BATHE-DELTA, BATHE-ALPHA are the Newmark coefficients. s The default
values of these coefficients correspond to the use of the trapezoidal rule in the first sub-step.
{BATHE-DELTA 0.5}{BATHE-ALPHA > 0.0}

Auxiliary commands

LIST ANALYSIS
Lists the data for the current analysis option.

5-26 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 5.2 Analysis details

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-27

Chap. 5 Control data FREQUENCIES

FREQUENCIES METHOD NEIGEN NMODE IPRINT RIGID-BODY RSHIFT

CUTOFF NITEMM NVECTOR STURM-CHECK ACCELERATE
TOLERANCE STARTTYPE NSTVECT INTERVAL FMIN
FMAX MODALSTRESSES STATIC NSHIFT NSHIFT-BLOCK
AVL-OUT CMS-SUBSPACE NFREQ-CMS

FREQUENCIES specifies control data for a frequency solution to be carried out for the
structure linearized at time TSTART. In order to input data via this command the MASTER
command ANALYSIS parameter should have been previously set to FREQUENCIES,
MODAL-TRANSIENT, MODAL-PARTICIPATION-FACTORS or MODAL-STRESSES.

METHOD [SUBSPACE-ITERATION]
Specifies the method of frequency calculation. {DETERMINANT-SEARCH/
SUBSPACE-ITERATION/INPUT/LANCZOS-ITERATION/CMS/CMS-LANCZOS}

Please consult the Theory and Modeling Guide for a further description of these methods.
The selection METHOD = INPUT will cause ADINA to read frequencies and mode-shapes
from file, e.g., for use in a subsequent mode superposition analysis; all other parameters of
this command are ignored.

If METHOD=CMS or CMS-LANCZOS, the component mode synthesis (CMS) method is used to

obtain approximate frequencies and mode shapes. NFREQ-CMS represents the number of the fixed
interface vibration modes to be obtained in the first phase of CMS. NEIGEN represents the number of
the frequency to be obtained in the second phase of CMS. In addition to the subspace iteration
method, the Lanczos method can be used in the first phase of CMS by the input of METHOD=CMS-
LANCZOS.

If NEIGEN equals to the static constraint modes (number of degrees of freedom specified by the
ACTIVE-DOF command) plus the fixed interface vibration modes specified by NFREQ-CMS, the
combination of these modes are used as the starting vectors of the SUBSPACE method without
iteration. To obtain a better accuracy of this approach, then CMS-SUBSPACE=YES should be input
to continue the SUBSPACE iterations.

NEIGEN [1]
The number of frequencies and corresponding mode shapes to be calculated. The actual
number of frequencies calculated may be reduced whenever the maximum, specified either by
the cut-off frequency (CUTOFF) or the upper bound on the solution interval (FMAX for the
subspace-iteration method), has been exceeded.

NMODE [0]
The number of mode shapes to be printed in the results output file. Frequency results are
always printed. { NEIGEN}

5-28 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FREQUENCIES Sec. 5.2 Analysis details

IPRINT [NO]
Specifies whether or not intermediate solution information is printed. Such information may
be of interest in tracing the solution behavior. {YES/NO}

RIGID-BODY [NO]
Specifies whether or not rigid-body modes are allowed. Should be used when the lowest
frequency may be zero, or any part of the model would be insufficiently supported if all
contact, mesh glueing and generalized constraints are removed. {YES/NO}

RSHIFT [0.0]
The rigid body mode shift to be applied when RIGID-BODY = YES. RSHIFT = 0.0 will result
in a value being automatically determined by the analysis program. { 0.0}

CUTOFF [1.0E8]
The cut-off circular frequency (unit = radians/time). The frequency calculation is stopped if
frequency CUTOFF has been exceeded.

NITEMM [24 or 60]

The maximum number of iterations per eigenpair (frequency, mode shape) allowed during
solution. Default = 60 if METHOD = DETERMINANT; otherwise, default = 24.

NVECTOR [DEFAULT]
The number of iteration vectors to be used simultaneously by the subspace-iteration method.

DEFAULT = max(2NEIGEN, NEIGEN+8) if INTERVAL = NO

= 16 if INTERVAL = YES

STURM-CHECK [NO]
Specifies whether or not a Sturm-sequence check is to be performed to verify that all the
lowest frequencies have been found by the subspace-iteration method. {YES/NO}

ACCELERATE [NO]
Specifies whether or not acceleration schemes (shifting and overrelaxation) are to be em-
ployed during subspace-iteration. Note that if acceleration is applied, then the
Sturm-sequence check is automatically applied.
Furthermore, if NVECTOR < min(2NEIGEN, NEIGEN+8) then acceleration is always used.
{YES/NO}

TOLERANCE [DEFAULT]
The convergence tolerance used by the subspace-iteration and the Lanczos-iteration
methods in the iteration for frequency values.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-29

Chap. 5 Control data FREQUENCIES

DEFAULT = 1.0E-6 if INTERVAL = NO and METHOD = SUBSPACE-ITERATION

= 1.0E-10if INTERVAL = YES and METHOD = SUBSPACE-ITERATION
= 1.0E-9 if METHOD = LANCZOS-ITERATION

STARTTYPE [LANCZOS]
Specifies the method of generating starting vectors for the subspace-iteration method.

STANDARD Standard starting vectors are used.

LANCZOS The Lanczos method is used to generate starting vectors.

NSTVECT [0]
The number of user-provided starting iteration vectors for the subspace-iteration method.
The NSTVECT vectors, read from file, replace the first NSTVECT starting vectors generated
by the analysis program.

INTERVAL [NO]
Specifies whether or not the lowest frequency calculation by the subspace-iteration method
and the Lanczos iteration method is confined to a specified interval (FMIN, FMAX). {YES/
NO}

FMIN [0.0]
If INTERVAL = YES, FMIN gives the lower bound frequency (unit = radians/time) of the
interval in which the subspace-iteration method and the Lanczos iteration method calculates
the lowest frequencies.

FMAX [DEFAULT]
If INTERVAL = YES, FMAX gives the upper bound frequency (unit = radians/time) of the
interval in which the subspace-iteration method and the Lanczos iteration method calculates
the lowest frequencies. DEFAULT = CUTOFF.

MODALSTRESSES [NO]
Indicates whether or not to calculate modal stresses for post-processing. {YES/NO}

STATIC [NO]
Indicates whether or not to perform static analysis load-steps following the frequency/ mode-
shape calculation. {YES/NO}

NSHIFT [AUTO]
Specifies whether to use automatic shifting procedure for the Lanczos-iteration method.
When the number of frequencies (NEIGEN) to be calculated is large, using the automatic
shifting procedure can reduce the computation time significantly. If NSHIFT=AUTO, then the
procedure is used if (NSHIFT-BLOCK * 2) NEIGEN. Currently, this procedure is applicable
for frequency calculations for potential-based fluid only. {AUTO/YES/NO}

5-30 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FREQUENCIES Sec. 5.2 Analysis details

NSHIFT-BLOCK [50]
Specifies the number of frequencies to be calculated for each shift in the Lanczos-iteration
method. {>0}

Note: The parameters NVECTOR, ACCELERATE, STARTTYPE, and NSTVECT are appli-
cable only to the subspace-iteration method. They are ignored by both the determi-
nant-search and Lanczos methods. The parameters TOLERANCE, INTERVAL, FMIN,
FMAX and STURM-CHECK are also ignored by the determinant-search method.

AVL-OUT [NO]
Specifies whether the condensed model is output for the AVL Excite program. This parameter
is only active if METHOD=CMS. Currently, only text output can be requested. {NO/TEXT}

CMS-SUBSPACE [NO]
Specifies whether additional iterations to obtain accurate frequencies and mode shapes are
performed with the Bathe subspace method and using the CMS static constraint modes used
as starting vectors. This parameter is only active if METHOD=CMS. {NO/YES}

NFREQ-CMS [0]
The number of frequencies to be calculated in the fixed interface vibration mode calculation.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FREQUENCIES
Lists the current setting of parameters for a frequency solution if previously enabled via
the command MASTER ANALYSIS = FREQUENCIES.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-31

Chap. 5 Control data BUCKLING-LOADS

BUCKLING-LOADS NEIGEN NMODE IPRINT ITEMM NVECTOR

TOLERANCE S TARTTYPE NSTVECT
MODALSTRESSES METHOD

BUCKLING-LOADS specifies control data for evaluating static buckling loads and correspond-
ing mode shapes based on the linearized state of stress and deformation of the model at time
TSTART+t, following an evaluation of the static response at the same time, i.e., after the first
step of the analysis. In order to input data via this command, the MASTER command ANALY-
SIS parameter should have been previously set to BUCKLING-LOADS.

The restart option may be used to perform a buckling analysis for the linearized system at step
n, where n > 1. The first run solves for the static response after (n-1) steps. The restart run
then enables the buckling analysis to solve for the buckling response linearized at step n.

The solution of the eigenvalue problem required for the determination of critical load factors
employs the subspace-iteration or Lanczos-iteration method (see FREQUENCIES).
The Sturm-sequence check is applied to verify that the lowest required buckling loads have
been evaluated. The acceleration (shifting and over-relaxation) schemes are used if the
subspace-iteration method is chosen.

NEIGEN [1]
The number of lowest positive critical buckling loads (i.e., acting in the direction of the
applied loads for the first solution step), and corresponding mode shapes to be calculated.

NMODE [0]
The number of mode shapes to be printed in the results output file. The critical buckling load
factors are always printed. { NEIGEN}

IPRINT [NO]
Specifies whether or not intermediate solution information is printed. Such information may
be of interest in tracing the solution behavior. {YES/NO}

NITEMM [40]
The maximum number of iterations per eigenpair (frequency, mode shape) allowed during
solution for the subspace-iteration method.

NVECTOR [DEFAULT]
The number of iteration vectors to be used simultaneously for the subspace-iteration method.
{ 0}
DEFAULT = NEIGEN*3 + 18

5-32 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BUCKLING-LOADS Sec. 5.2 Analysis details

TOLERANCE [1.0E-6]
The convergence tolerance used by the subspace-iteration method in the iteration for
frequency values.

STARTTYPE [LANCZOS]
Specifies the method of generating starting vectors for the subspace-iteration method.

STANDARD Standard starting vectors are used.

LANCZOS The Lanczos method is used to generate starting vectors.

NSTVECT [0]
The number of user-provided starting iteration vectors for the subspace-iteration method.
The NSTVECT vectors, read from file, replace the first NSTVECT starting vectors generated
by the analysis program.

MODALSTRESSES [NO]
Indicates whether or not to calculate modal stresses for post-processing. {YES/NO}

METHOD [CLASSICAL]
Buckling analysis method. {CLASSICAL/SECANT}

Auxiliary commands

LIST BUCKLING-LOADS
Lists the current setting of parameters for a buckling analysis if enabled via the command
MASTER ANALYSIS = BUCKLING-LOADS.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-33

Chap. 5 Control data ANALYSIS MODAL-TRANSIENT

ANALYSIS MODAL-TRANSIENT
NMODES ERROR-INTERVAL FREQUENCIES STATIC-CORRECTION
START-TIME END-TIME STEP-INCREMENT NSTEP DTSIZE

ANALYSIS MODAL-TRANSIENT provides control data for a mode superposition analysis.

NMODES [0]
Number of modes for a mode superposition analysis.
Note that when NMODES = 0 by default, the number of modal participation factors calculated
by ADINA is the number of requested modes in the FREQUENCIES command.

ERROR-INTERVAL [0]
Interval of calculating error in external load representation in mode superposition analysis.

0 No external load error calculation.

> 0 Calculate relative error at this interval of timesteps.

FREQUENCIES [YES]
Indicates whether ADINA is to first perform a frequency analysis (in the same run). Other-
wise the frequencies and mode shapes are assumed available, on file, from a previous
analysis. See command FREQUENCIES for control of the frequency/mode-shape calcula-
tions. {YES/NO}

STATIC-CORRECTION [NO]
Determines whether static correction is applied. Static correction is applicable in linear
analysis.{NO/YES}

START-TIME [0.0]
Start time for static correction. If START-TIME= 0.0, START-TIME = TSTART in MASTER
command.

END-TIME [0.0]
End time for static correction. If END-TIME=0.0, the end time of the solution (as specified in
the TIMESTEP command) is used.

STEP-INCREMENT [1]
Step increment for static correction.

NSTEP [0]
Number of time steps used in ANALYSIS SWITCH.

DTSIZE [0.0]
Time step size used in ANALYSIS SWITCH.

.
5-34 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ANALYSIS MODAL-PARTICIPATION-FACTORS Sec. 5.2 Analysis details

ANALYSIS MODAL-PARTICIPATION-FACTORS EXCITATION NMODES

STATIC CORRECTION
FREQUENCIES DUSIZE

Provides control data for a modal participation factor analysis.

EXCITATION [GROUND-MOTION]
Defines the type of excitation load. {GROUND-MOTION/APPLIED-LOAD}

NMODES [0]
Number of modes for a modal participation factor analysis. Note that when NMODES = 0 by
default, the number of modal participation factors calculated by ADINA is the number of
requested modes in the FREQUENCIES command.

STATIC [NO]
Indicates whether static load-step calculations are to be performed. {YES/NO}

CORRECTION [NO]
Indicates whether static-correction calculations are to be performed. Calculations of residual
displacements, accelerations, forces, and stresses will be made to evaluate the contribution to
the response from the remaining modes above NMODES included in a response spectrum
analysis assuming this contribution is static, thus not dynamically amplified. {YES/NO}

FREQUENCIES [YES]
Indicates whether ADINA is to first perform a frequency analysis (in the same run). Other-
wise the frequencies and mode shapes are assumed available, on file, from a previous
analysis. See command FREQUENCIES for control of the frequency/mode-shape calcula-
tions. {YES/NO}

DUSIZE [0.0]
This parameter is used in nonlinear analysis to specify the size of the displacement perturba-
tion used in calculating nonlinear modal stresses. The unit of DUSIZE is length.
If DUSIZE=0.0, then ADINA computes the displacement perturbation factor automati-
cally. If you specify DUSIZE, you should choose DUSIZE so that if the mode shapes are
scaled to be of size DUSIZE, the deformations corresponding to the scaled mode shapes are
small.
When the analysis is not a restart analysis, or if the displacements at restart time TSTART
are zero, it is recommended that you enter DUSIZE. This is because ADINA's automatic
calculation can lead to very small or very large displacement perturbations.
When the analysis is a restart analysis and the displacements at restart time TSTART are
nonzero, ADINA's automatic calculation of DUSIZE is usually quite good, however you can
also enter DUSIZE if desired.
See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 6.2.4 for more information.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-35

Chap. 5 Control data ANALYSIS MODAL-STRESSES

ANALYSIS MODAL-STRESSES FREQUENCIES DUSIZE

ANALYSIS MODAL-STRESSES provides control data for modal stress calculations.

FREQUENCIES [YES]
Indicates whether ADINA is to first perform a frequency analysis (in the same run). Otherwise
the frequencies and mode shapes are assumed available, on file, from a previous analysis.
See command FREQUENCIES for control of the frequency/mode-shape calculations. {YES/
NO}

DUSIZE [0.0]
This parameter is used in nonlinear analysis to specify the size of the displacement perturba-
tion used in calculating nonlinear modal stresses. The unit of DUSIZE is length.

If DUSIZE=0.0, then ADINA computes the displacement perturbation factor automatically.

If you specify DUSIZE, you should choose DUSIZE so that if the mode shapes are scaled to
be of size DUSIZE, the deformations corresponding to the scaled mode shapes are small.

When the analysis is not a restart analysis, or if the displacements at restart time TSTART are
zero, it is recommended that you enter DUSIZE. This is because ADINA's automatic calcula-
tion can lead to very small or very large displacement perturbations.

When the analysis is a restart analysis and the displacements at restart time TSTART are
nonzero, ADINA's automatic calculation of DUSIZE is usually quite good, however you can
also enter DUSIZE if desired.

See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 6.2.4 for more information.

5-36 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ANALYSIS-SWITCH Sec. 5.3 Options

ANALYSIS-SWITCH TSWITCH TO METHOD FREQUENCY

timei toi

ANALYSIS-SWITCH sets up control data for a change in analysis.

INITIAL
IMPL-METHOD
These parameters are obsolete.

TSWITCH [0.0]
The time length after switching from a non-converged static or implicit-dynamic solution.

TO [STATIC]
Specifies the type of analysis to switch to when METHOD=NO-CONVERGENCE. {STATIC/
NEWMARK/BATHE/CDM/NOH-BATHE}

METHOD [TIME]
Specifies the condition for when to switch analysis type. {TIME/NO-CONVERGENCE}

FREQUENCY [NO]
Specifies whether a frequency analysis is performed after a final converged solution is
obtained. {NO/YES}

timei
Solution times to switch the analysis type.

toi
Specifies the type of analysis to switch to at timei when METHOD=TIME.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-37

Chap. 5 Control data

This page intentionally left blank

5-38 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
KINEMATICS Sec. 5.3 Options

KINEMATICS DISPLACEMENTS STRAINS PRESSURE-UPDATE

INCOMPATIBLE-MODES UL-FORMULATION RIGIDLINK-6DOF
BEAM-ALGORITHM KBEAM-EIGENVALUE

KINEMATICS defines the kinematic formulation. An individual element group may select a
different formulation via the appropriate EGROUP command.

DISPLACEMENTS [SMALL]

SMALL Small displacements and rotations are assumed.

LARGE Large displacements and rotations are assumed.

STRAINS [SMALL]

SMALL Small strains are assumed.

LARGE Large strains are assumed.

Note: Large strains are only admissible for element groups of type TWODSOLID,
THREEDSOLID and SHELL with certain material models please refer to the descrip-
tions of the MATERIAL parameter in the commands EGROUP TWODSOLID, EGROUP
THREEDSOLID AND EGROUP SHELL.

PRESSURE-UPDATE [NO]
Specifies whether pressure correction terms are added to the shell stiffness matrix in fre-
quency analysis. Note that this setting cannot be overridden at the element group level.
{NO/YES}

INCOMPATIBLE-MODES [AUTOMATIC]
Specifies whether incompatible modes are included in formulation of 4-node 2D and shell
elements and 8-node 3D elements. The default AUTOMATIC sets INCOMPATIBLE-MODES =
NO . {AUTOMATIC/NO/YES}

UL-FORMULATION [DEFAULT]
Specifies the large strain formulation to be used for 2D solid, 3D solid and shell elements.
{DEFAULT/ULH/ULJ}

DEFAULT ULJ is used if explicit transient analysis or rigid-target contact algorithm of

version 8.3 is used. Otherwise, ULH is used.

ULH Updated Lagrangian Hencky formulation is used.

ULJ Updated Lagrangian Jaumann formulation is used.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-39

Chap. 5 Control data KINEMATICS

RIGIDLINK-6DOF [NO]
This parameter is superceded by the FIXBOUNDARY parameter in the ADINA command.
{NO/V89}

NO The behavior is superceded by by the FIXBOUNDARY parameter in the ADINA

command.

V89 ADINA FIXBOUNDARY=V89 is always used.

BEAM-ALGORITHM [CURRENT]
If BEAM-ALGORITHM=CURRENT, the current algorithms are used for the Hermitian beam
element. If BEAM-ALGORITHM=V87, the algorithms from ADINA version 8.7 are used.
{CURRENT/V87}

KBEAM-EIGENVALUE [NO]
This parameter controls the use of second-order strain terms from classical beam theory in
the stiffness matrix for the Hermitian beam element during frequency or linearized buckling
analysis. {NO/YES}

NO Second-order strain terms are not included

YES Second-order strain terms are included

5-40 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 5.3 Options

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-41

Chap. 5 Control data MASS-MATRIX

MASS-MATRIX TYPE ETA

MASS-MATRIX selects the type of mass matrix to be used in dynamic analysis.

For static analyses, the mass matrix type is used only in evaluating centrifugal and mass-
proportional loads. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

TYPE [CONSISTENT]
Selects the type of mass matrix.

LUMPED Lumped (diagonalized) mass matrix.

CONSISTENT Consistent mass matrix.

Note: The lumped mass matrix is always used in explicit dynamic analysis, and in
substuctures.

Note: The element integration orders specified for element groups do not affect the calcula-
tion of the mass matrix.

ETA [DEFAULT]
Multiplier ( 0.0) for the lumped rotational masses of all BEAM, ISOBEAM, PLATE, SHELL,
and PIPE elements. ETA is applicable only if a dynamic analysis is to be performed with a
lumped mass matrix, see Theory and Modeling Guide.

DEFAULT = 0.0 for implicit dynamic analysis, and for frequency analysis

1.0 for explicit dynamic analysis

Auxiliary commands

LIST MASS-MATRIX
Lists the current mass matrix type.

5-42 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RAYLEIGH-DAMPING Sec. 5.3 Options

RAYLEIGH-DAMPING ALPHA BETA UPDATE

egroupi i i

RAYLEIGH-DAMPING specifies coefficients which define a consistent damping matrix C as a

linear combination of the system mass matrix M and the system stiffness matrix K, i.e.,

C = M + K + C conc + C gen
where

M = Total system mass matrix (lumped or consistent), including any specified

concentrated masses.

K = Stiffness matrix based on the elements in all element groups.

, = Rayleigh damping factors.

Cconc = Damping matrix contribution from concentrated dampers (see DAMPERS ).

Cgen = Damping matrix contribution from GENERAL or SPRING elements.

See the Theory and Modeling Guide for further details on the use of the damping matrix.

Different Rayleigh damping coeffients may be specified for individual element groups. The
default coefficients are given by parameters ALPHA, BETA.

ALPHA [0.0]
The Rayleigh damping factor .

BETA [0.0]
The Rayleigh damping factor .

Note: The specification of Rayleigh damping is ignored for both a frequency analysis and a
mode superposition analysis.

UPDATE [NONE]
Indicates when the damping matrix is updated during analysis. {NONE/STEP/MASS}

NONE The damping matrix is set at the beginning and never updated.

STEP The damping matrix is re-calculated at every time step

.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-43

Chap. 5 Control data RAYLEIGH-DAMPING

MASS The damping matrix is re-calculated when the mass matrix is updated
(e.g. , due to element birth/death or rupture).

egroupi
Label number of an element group.

i [ALPHA]
Raleigh damping factor for element group egroupi.

i [BETA]
Raleigh damping factor for element group egroupi.

Auxiliary commands

LIST RAYLEIGH-DAMPING
Lists the Rayleigh damping factors , .

DELETE RAYLEIGH-DAMPING
Sets the Rayleigh damping factors , to 0.0.

5-44 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MODAL-DAMPING Sec. 5.3 Options

MODAL-DAMPING EGROUP OPTION

modei factori

MODAL-DAMPING defines modal damping factors to be used in mode superposition

analysis. The command MODAL-DAMPING can be used to define a modal damping factor
for global or local use.

EGROUP [0]
The element group label. If EGROUP = 0, then a modal damping factor will be applied
globally or when OPTION = LOCAL, used as default for all other non-applied element groups.

OPTION [GLOBAL]
OPTION, based on the the value of EGROUP, determines whether modal damping factor will
be applied globally or locally. {GLOBAL/LOCAL}

modei
The mode number.

factori
Damping factor for mode modei, representing the fraction of critical damping. For example,
factori = 0.1 gives 10% damping for the mode.

Note: The mode superposition analysis option must be enabled for the data from this
command to be considered. See MASTER.

Note: At least NMODES damping factors should be given, where NMODES is the
number of modes participating in the mode superposition analysis. See
ANALYSIS MODAL-TRANSIENT.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MODAL-DAMPING
Lists the assigned modal damping factors.

DELETE MODAL-DAMPING
Deletes all modal damping factors.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-45

Chap. 5 Control data

This page intentionally left blank.

5-46 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FAILURE MAXSTRESS Sec. 5.3 Options

FAILURE MAXSTRESS NAME SUBTYPE SIGAMT SIGAMC SIGBMT

SIGBMC SIGCMT SIGCMC SIGABM SIGACM
SIGBCM

FAILURE MAXSTRESS defines a failure criterion of maximum stress type for SHELL elements
(EGROUP SHELL) in conjunction with material models: ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC,
THERMO-ISOTROPIC and THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC. See Theory and Modeling Guide for
details.

NAME [(current highest failure label number) + 1]

Label number of the failure criterion to be defined. If the label number of an existing failure
criterion is given, then the previous failure criterion definition is overwritten.

SUBTYPE [STRESS2]
Indicates the stress/strain conditions.

STRESS2 Plane stress.

STRESS3 General 3-D stress.

SIGAMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension stress in material a-direction.

SIGAMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression stress in material a-direction.

SIGBMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension stress in material b-direction.

SIGBMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression stress in material b-direction.

SIGCMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension stress in material c-direction.

SIGCMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression stress in material c-direction.

SIGABM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear stress in the material ab-plane.

SIGACM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear stress in the material ac-plane.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-47

Chap. 5 Control data FAILURE MAXSTRESS

SIGBCM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear stress in the material bc-plane.

Auxiliary Commands

LIST FAILURE FIRRST LAST

DELETEFAILURE FIRST LAST

5-48 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FAILURE MAXSTRAIN Sec. 5.3 Options

FAILURE MAXSTRAIN NAME SUBTYPE EPSAMT EPSAMC EPSBMT

EPSBMC EPSCMT EPSCMC EPSABM EPSACM
EPSBCM

FAILURE MAXSTRAIN defines a failure criterion of maximum strain type for SHELL elements
( EGROUP SHELL ) in conjunction with material models: ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC,
THERMO-ISOTROPIC and THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC. See Theory and Modeling Guide for
details.

NAME [current highest failure label number) + 1]

Label number of the failure criterion to be defined. If the label number of an existing failure
criterion is given, then the previous failure criterion definition is overwritten.

SUBTYPE [STRESS2]
Indicates the stress/strain conditions

STRESS2 Plane stress.

STRESS3 General 3-D stress.

EPSAMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension strain in material a-direction.

EPSAMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression strain in material a-direction.

EPSBMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension strain in material b-direction.

EPSBMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression strain in material b-direction.

EPSCMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension strain in material c-direction.

EPSCMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression strain in material c-direction.

EPSABM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear strain in the material ab-plane.

EPSACM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear strain in the material ac-plane.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-49

Chap. 5 Control data FAILURE MAXSTRAIN

EPSBCM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear strain in the material bc-plane.

Auxiliary Commands

LIST FAILURE FIRST LAST

DELETEFAILURE FIRST LAST

5-50 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FAILURE TSAI-HILL Sec. 5.3 Options

FAILURE TSAI-HILL NAME SUBTYPE SIGAM SIGBM SIGCM

SIGABM SIGACM SIGBCM

FAILURE TSAI-HILL defines a failure criterion of type Tsai-Hilltype for SHELL elements
( EGROUP SHELL ) in conjunction with material models: ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC,
THERMO-ISOTROPIC and THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC. See Theory and Modeling Guide for
details.

NAME [(current highest failure label number) + 1]

Label number of the failure criterion to be defined. If the label number of an existing failure
criterion is given, then the previous failure criterion definition is overwritten.

SUBTYPE [STRESS2]
Indicates the stress/strain conditions.

STRESS2 Plane stress.

STRESS3 General 3-D stress.

SIGAM [0.0]
Maximum allowable stress in material a-direction.

SIGBM [0.0]
Maximum allowable stress in material b-direction.

SIGCM [0.0]
Maximum allowable stress in material c-direction.

SIGABM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear stress in the material ab-plane.

SIGACM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear stress in the material ac-plane.

SIGBCM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear stress in the material bc-plane.

Auxiliary Commands

LIST FAILURE FIRST LAST

DELETEFAILURE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-51

Chap. 5 Control data FAILURE TSAI-WU

FAILURE TSAI-WU NAME SUBTYPE SIGAMT SIGAMC SIGBMT

SIGBMC SIGCMT SIGCMC SIGABM
SIGACM SIGBCM FAB FAC FBC HOFFMAN

FAILURE TSAI-WU defines a failure criterion of type Tsai-Wu type for SHELL elements
( EGROUP SHELL ) in conjunction with material models: ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC,
THERMO-ISOTROPIC and THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC. See Theory and Modeling Guide for
details.

NAME [(current highest failure label number) + 1]

Label number of the failure criterion to be defined. If the label number of an existing failure
criterion is given, then the previous failure criterion definition is overwritten.

SUBTYPE [STRESS2]
Indicates the stress/strain conditions.

STRESS2 Plane stress.

STRESS3 General 3-D stress.

SIGAMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension stress in material a-direction.

SIGAMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression stress in material a-direction.

SIGBMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension stress in material b-direction.

SIGBMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression stress in material b-direction.

SIGCMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension stress in material c-direction.

SIGCMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression stress in material c-direction.

SIGABM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear stress in the material ab-plane.

SIGACM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear stress in the material ac-plane.

5-52 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FAILURE TSAI-WU Sec. 5.3 Options

SIGBCM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear stress in the material bc-plane.

FAB [0.0]
Interaction strength between a- and b- material directions.

FAC [0.0]
Interaction strength between a- and c- material directions.

FBC [0.0]
Interaction strength between b- and c- material directions.

HOFFMAN [YES]
Specifies whether or not the Hoffman convention should be used. {YES/NO}

Auxiliary Commands

LIST FAILURE FIRST LAST

DELETEFAILURE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-53

Chap. 5 Control data FAILURE HASHIN

FAILURE HASHIN NAME SIGAMT SIGAMC SIGBMT SIGBMC

SIGABM SIGTRM

FAILURE HASHIN defines a failure criterion of type Hashin for SHELL elements ( EGROUP
SHELL ) in conjunction with material models: ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC,
THERMO-ISOTROPIC and THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC. See Theory and Modeling Guide for
details.

NAME [(current highest failure label number) + 1]

Label number of the failure criterion to be defined. If the label number of an existing failure
criterion is given, then the previous failure criterion definition is overwritten.

SIGAMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension stress in material a-direction.

SIGAMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression stress in material a-direction.

SIGBMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension stress in material b-direction.

SIGBMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression stress in material b-direction.

SIGABM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear stress in ab-plane.

SIGTRM [0.0]
Maximum allowable transverse stress.

Auxiliary Commands

LIST FAILURE FIRST LAST

DELETEFAILURE FIRST LAST

5-54 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FAILURE USERSUPPLIED Sec. 5.3 Options

FAILURE USERSUPPLIED NAME NSURFACE

coef1k coef2k coef3k coef4k coef5k coef6k (k = 8NSURFACE)

FAILURE USERSUPPLIED defines a user supplied failure criterion for SHELL elements
( EGROUP SHELL ) in conjunction with material models: ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC,
THERMO-ISOTROPIC and THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC. See Theory and Modeling Guide for
details.

NAME [(current highest failure label number) + 1]

Label number of the failure criterion to be defined. If the label number of an existing failure
criterion is given, then the previous failure criterion definition is overwritten.

NSURFACE [1]
The number of failure surfaces. { 4}

coef1k
coef2k
coef3k
coef4k
coef5k
coef6k
For each failure surface 8 data input lines are entered in the following order:

1: 1...6 Coefficients i of the stress condition.

2: F1...F6 Linear terms coefficients Fi of the failure surface

3: F11...F16 Quadratic terms coefficients F1j of the failure surface.

4: F21...F26 Quadratic terms coefficients F2j of the failure surface.

...

8: F61...F66 Quadratic terms coefficients F6j of the failure surface.

Auxiliary Commands

LIST FAILURE FIRST LAST

DELETEFAILURE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-55

Chap. 5 Control data TEMPERATURE-REFERENCE

TEMPERATURE-REFERENCE TINIT TLOAD TGLOAD NCURTL NCURTGL

TEMPERATURE-REFERENCE defines reference temperatures and temperature gradients, for

both initial thermal conditions and thermal loads.

TINIT [0.0]
The initial temperature of a structure, in whatever temperature units you employ. Differing
initial temperatures may be specified by commands INITIAL-CONDITION, SET-
INITCONDITION.

TLOAD [0.0]
The prescribed reference temperature for a thermal load on a structure, in whatever tempera-
ture units you employ. Differing prescribed temperatures may be specified by commands
LOAD TEMPERATURE, APPLY-LOAD.

TGINIT [0.0]
This parameter is obsolete and not used.

TGLOAD [0.0]
The prescribed reference temperature gradient for a thermal load on a shell type structure, in
whatever temperature/length units you employ. Differing prescribed temperature gradients
may be specified by commands LOAD TGRADIENT, APPLY-LOAD.

NCURTL [0]
Timefunction label number for the reference load temperature.

NCURTGL [0]
Timefunction label number for the reference load temperature gradient.

Auxiliary commands

LISTTEMPERATURE-REFERENCE
Lists the reference temperatures and temperature gradients.

5-56 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SOLVER ITERATIVE Sec. 5.4 Solver details

SOLVER ITERATIVE MAX-ITERATIONS EPSIA EPSIB EPSII

SHIFT NVEC

SOLVER ITERATIVE defines control data for the iterative solution of the matrix system of
equilibrium equations.

This command is applicable when the iterative solver is used, i.e., SOLVER=ITERATIVE,
MULTIGRID or 3D-ITERATIVE in the MASTER command.

MAX-ITERATIONS [0]
The maximum number of iterations for the iterative solver to converge. If MAX-ITERA-
TIONS=0, then MAX-ITERATIONS=1000 is used if SOLVER=ITERATIVE or MULTIGRID
and MAX-ITERATIONS=200 if SOLVER=3D-ITERATIVE. {MAX-ITERATIONS 0}

EPSIA [1.0E-6]
EPSIB [1.0E-4]
EPSII [1.0E-8]
Convergence tolerances for the iterative solver, see the Theory and Modeling Guide for
further details. Smaller tolerances than the defaults may be required for contact analysis.

Note: For the 3D-iterative solver, only EPSIB is used in the convergence checking.

SHIFT [1.0]
Factor used to make preconditioning more effective within the iterative solver. Values of
SHIFT > 1.0 make the preconditioning matrix more diagonally dominant. (Not used for the
3D-iterative solver.)

NVEC
<not currently used>

Note: The shift factor SHIFT can be effective with an ill-conditioned stiffness matrix, such as
may be encountered with a shell structure, which is much stiffer in membrane action
than in bending action. A typical value of SHIFT = 1.02 has proved beneficial in this
situation.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SOLVER
Lists the type of SOLVER (all types available as described in the MASTER command,
SOLVER parameter) enabled, and gives the corresponding control parameters, if any.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-57

Chap. 5 Control data PPROCESS

PPROCESS NPROC MINEL MAXEL

This command is obsolete, and is only retained for compatibility with versions 9.0 and
earlier. Please use command EGCONTROL instead.

PPROCESS specifies control data for parallel processing solutions. It allows for the splitting
up of element groups into smaller sub-groups, i.e., the model is partitioned for distributed
solution.

NPROC [0]
Number of processors used. Equivalently, the number of subgroups generated for each
element group. NPROC = 0 indicates single processor solution (equivalent to NPROC = 1), in
which case this command has no effect - EGCONTROL may be used to effect group splitting
in this case.

MINEL [0]
Each element group with MINEL or more elements can be split into subgroups. Element
groups with fewer than MINEL elements are not split. (MINEL = 0 is equivalent to MINEL =
10 NPROC).

MAXEL [999999]
Each element group (with MINEL or more elements) is split into I NPROC subgroups, where
the multiplier I is chosen so that each subgroup contains no more than MAXEL elements.

Auxiliary commands

LIST PPROCESS
Lists the current parallel processing control data.

5-58 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TMC-SOLVER ITERATIVE Sec. 5.4 Solver details

TMC-SOLVER ITERATIVE MAX-ITERATIONS EPSIA EPSIB EPSII SHIFT

TMC-SOLVER ITERATIVE defines control data for the iterative solution of the matrix system
of equilibrium equations for heat transfer analysis. To enable the use of the iterative solver,
TMC-CONTROL SOLVER = ITERATIVE must be specified.

MAX-ITERATIONS [1000]
The maximum permitted number of iterations for the iterative solver to converge.

EPSIA [1.0E-6]
EPSIB [1.0E-4]
EPSII [1.0E-8]
Convergence tolerances for the iterative solver.

SHIFT [1.0]
Factor used to make preconditioning more effective within the iterative solver. Values of
SHIFT > 1.0 make the preconditioning matrix more diagonally dominant.

Auxiliary commands

LIST TMC-SOLVER
Lists the type of TMC-SOLVER (iterative) enabled, and gives the corresponding
control parameters, if any.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-59

Chap. 5 Control data

This page intentionally left blank.

5-60 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT Sec. 5.5 Automatic control

AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT POINT DOF DISPLACEMENT ALPHA

DISPMAX CONTINUE RPRINT TYPE
NODE SUBDIVISIONS TEMPERATURE

AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT defines parameters for the automatic load-displace-

ment control (LDC) procedure, whereby the level of externally applied load is continually
adjusted to solve for the nonlinear equilibrium path of a model until, or beyond, collapse.
The LDC method can be used only for static analysis in which there are no thermal effects or
time-dependent material models (i.e., creep or strain rate dependent materials.)

The automatic load-displacement control procedure is enabled when MASTER AUTOMATIC

= LDC is specified. (See Theory and Modeling Guide for further details on the operation of
the LDC method.)

POINT
The label number of a geometry point at which a displacement for the first solution step is
prescribed. Note that a node will have to be defined at the point location, otherwise an error
message will result whenever the model is validated.

DOF
Indicates which degree of freedom at the requested point or node has the prescribed value
given by parameter DISPLACEMENT. DOF refers to the degree of freedom system (global or
skew) at the point or node. {1/2/3/4/5/6}

1 or X-translation
2 or Y-translation
3 or Z-translation
4 or X-rotation
5 or Y-rotation
6 or Z-rotation

DISPLACEMENT
The prescribed displacement for the degree of freedom DOF at the point or node for the first
solution step. The value input influences the establishment of successive equilibrium
positions using the LDC method. In particular, the sign (positive/negative) of the value often
plays a critical role. (See Theory and Modeling Guide for further details).

ALPHA [3.0]
Factor used to limit the maximum incremental displacement during a solution step. If the
incremented displacements exceed 100 x ALPHA times the displacements in the first time
step, the current time step will be repeated with a reduced load factor.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-61

Chap. 5 Control data AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT

DISPMAX
The maximum (absolute magnitude) of the displacement for degree of freedom DOF at the
point or node which is allowed during analysis. ADINA stops if DISPMAX is exceeded when
the LDC method is employed. {> 0.0}

CONTINUE [NO]
Determines whether or not the solution is terminated when the first critical point on the
equilibrium path is reached. {YES/NO}

RPRINT [NO]
Determines whether or not the reference load vector corresponding to all mechanical loads is
printed during analysis. {YES/NO}

TYPE [POINT]
Selects the type of entity (point or node) indicating the location of the controlling displace-
ment. {POINT/NODE}

NODE
The label number of a node at which a displacement for the first solution step is prescribed.

SUBDIVISIONS [10]
Number of subdivisions

TEMPERATURE [CONSTANT]
Indicates whether temperature loads are treated as constant or time-dependent. The param-
eter is only used if temperatures are applied on the model or if any of the model materials
require temperature input. {CONSTANT/TIME-FUNCTION-DEPENDENT}

CONSTANT Temperaure is constant.

TIME-FUNCTION-DEPENDENT Temperature is time-function-dependent.

Note: The LDC method terminates normally when one of the following conditions is met:

The maximum allowed displacement DISPMAX has been attained.

The first critical point on the equilibrium path has been reached and (CONTINUE = NO).
The requested time step sequence has been completed.
The number of subdivisions has been reached without convergence.

Note: The LDC method cannot be used in conjunction with the following analysis types or
features:

Dynamic analysis

5-62 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 5.5 Automatic control

Linearized buckling analysis

Time-dependent material models (creep, strain rate dependent)
Analysis including temperature effects
User-supplied or pipe internal pressure loading

Auxiliary commands

LISTAUTOMATIC
Lists the settings for automatic incrementation.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-63

Chap. 5 Control data

This page intentionally left blank.

5-64 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING Sec. 5.5 Automatic control

AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING MAXSUBD ACCURACY DISTOL DTMAX RESTORE

RESPS RESFAC DIVFAC LSMASSF METHOD
TSWITCH LSTIME

AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING controls the automatic time-stepping procedure, whereby

timesteps are subdivided in the event of convergence failure within a prescribed number of
equilibrium iterations. See Section 7.2.1 of the Theory and Modeling Guide for further details.

The automatic time-stepping procedure is enabled when MASTER AUTOMATIC = ATS is

specified. When enabled, this procedure will cause ADINA to subdivide the time step when
no iteration convergence is reached in the solution (see commands ITERATION and
TOLERANCES ). This procedure is applicable for nonlinear static and implicit transient
analysis.

MAXSUBD [10]
The maximum subdivision factor that the ATS method can use when subdividing a time step.
That is, if the user-specified time step size is t, the algorithm will not attempt to subdivide
below a time step size of t/MAXSUBD.

ACCURACY
This parameter is obsolete.

DISTOL [0.001]
Maximum allowed displacement difference, used in accuracy checking (i.e., when
ACCURACY = YES).

DTMAX [3.0]
A factor that limits the maximum time step that can be attained during analysis. If the user-
specified time step is t, then the ATS procedure will not use a time step larger than
(DTMAX t). This option can only be used if the ATS setting is to return to the previous
time step before division (RESTORE=YES).{ 1.0}

Note:
1. This option is only used in static analysis. It cannot be used in a dynamic analysis or if
low speed dynamics is used (RESPS=YES).
2. This option is not used if more than one time step block has been specified (see
TIMESTEP ).

RESTORE [AUTOMATIC]
Indicates whether the original time step, attempted before ATS subdivision occurred, will be
used again for the next time step after convergence.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-65

Chap. 5 Control data AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING

NO The ATS method will continue to use the reduced (subdivided)

time step which gave convergence.

YES The ATS method will use the time step which was current prior to
subdivision.

AUTOMATIC The choice of time step restoration is made by ADINA dependent on

other problem characteristics. Currently, RESTORE = YES is the
automatic choice for contact problems.

ORIGINAL The ATS method will use a time step size such that the solution time will
match the original next solution time specified by the user.

In iterative FSI, the program automatically forces RESTORE=ORIGINAL to ensure time

compatibility between the structural and fluid solution.

RESPS [NO]
Indicates whether or not the low-speed dynamics option is to be used. Applicable only for
nonlinear statics analysis. {NO/YES/GROUP}

If RESPS=YES, the global damping and mass factors are specified by the RESFAC and
LSMASSF parameters. If RESPS=GROUP, the global and group damping and mass factors are
specified in the RAYLEIGH-DAMPING command.

RESFAC [1.0E-4]
Low-speed dynamics smoothing factor, used when RESPS = YES.

DIVFAC [2.0]
Specifies the division factor used to calculate time step subincrements.

LSMASSF [1.0]
Low-speed dynamics inertia factor used when RESPS=YES or GROUP. {LSMASSF 0.0}

METHOD [BATHE]
Time integration method for low-speed dynamics. {BATHE/NEWMARK}

BATHE The Bathe method is used.

NEWMARK The Newmark method is used.

TSWITCH [0.0]
Time duration after switching to low speed dynamics. When TSWITCH is the default value,
there is no switching back. If TSWITCH>0, the program turns off the low-speed dynamics

5-66 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING Sec. 5.5 Automatic control

feature after the duration of TSWITCH.

LSTIME [ALL]
Specifies the solution times when low-speed dynamics is to be used.
{ALL/NO-CONVERGENCE}

ALL Low-speed dynamics is to be used for all solution times.

NO-CONVERGENCE The program automatically switches from static to

low-speed dynamics analysis at no convergence.

Auxiliary commands
LISTAUTOMATIC
Lists the settings for automatic incrementation.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-67

Chap. 5 Control data

This page intentionally left blank

5-68 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
AUTOMATIC TOTAL-LOAD-APPLICATION Sec. 5.5 Automatic control

AUTOMATIC TOTAL-LOAD-APPLICATION
NSTEPS MAXITE MAXDISPF STABF LSDAMPF CTDAMPF
LSMASSF METHOD UNLOAD SWITCH TSWITCH

Controls the total-load-application (TLA) procedure. The TLA procedure is used when
AUTOMATIC = TLA or TLA-S is specified in the MASTER command.

The TLA procedure is useful for a nonlinear static analysis where the user does not need to
explicitly specify the time step sequence. The program uses a certain number of time steps (50
by default) and automatically increases or reduces the next incremental load level depending
on how well the solution converges in the current step. In addition, stabilization options are
applied when TLA-S (TLA with stabilization) is selected.

When the TLA procedure is used, the program uses the following:

- 50 time steps of step size 0.2 each are used

- the ATS procedure is used with maximum permitted subdivision for any given step
MAXSUBD = 64 (see AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING command)
- maximum number of equilibrium iterations is 30
- line search is used
- maximum incremental displacement in each iteration is limited to 5% of largest model length

When TLA-S is selected, the program uses the following in addition to all the above TLA
settings:

- stiffness matrix stabilization factor of 1.0e-10 is used

- low-speed dynamics damping factor of 1.0e-4 is used
- contact damping (automatically calculated by the program) is used

The default values used by TLA and TLA-S that may be overridden are specified in the
following parameters.

NSTEPS [50]
Specifies the number of time steps to use for the solution. The step size is automatically
adjusted to obtain a total time of 10.0. {> 0}

MAXITE [30]
Specifies the maximum number of equilibrium iterations allowed to achieve convergence in
any time step (subdivided or accelerated). {1 MAXITE 999}

MAXDISPF [0.05]
Specifies the maximum displacement factor. The maximum incremental displacement allowed in
any iteration is equal to MAXDISPF * (maximum model dimension) { 0.0}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-69

Chap. 5 Control data

The default values used by TLA-S that may be overridden are specified in the following
parameters.

STABF [1.0e-10]
Specifies the stiffness matrix stabilization factor. If STABF = 0.0, then the stiffness matrix
stabilization feature is not used. { 0.0}

LSDAMPF [1.0e-4]
Specifies the low-speed dynamics damping factor. If LSDAMPF = 0.0, then the low-speed
dynamics option is not used. { 0.0}

CTDAMPF [1.0e-3]
Specifies the contact damping factor. The amount of contact damping used in the solution is
equal to CTDAMPF * (damping calculated by the program). If CTDAMPF = 0.0, then contact
damping is not used. { 0.0}

LSMASSF [1.0]
Low-speed dynamics inertia factor. {0.0 LSMASSF 1.0}

METHOD [BATHE]
Time integration method for low-speed dynamics. {NEWMARK/BATHE}

NEWMARK The Newmark method is used.

BATHE The Bathe method is used.

UNLOAD [NO]
Indicates whether unloading is performed after a certain maximum load (which may not be the
full load) where a converged solution is obtained. The option UNLOAD=YES may be useful
for the calculation of residual stresses when the loads are completely removed for a model
that undergoes plastic strains.{YES/NO}

SWITCH [NO]
Option permitting a switch back to TLA. If SWITCH=YES, the program can switch to TLA-S.
{NO/YES}

TSWITCH [0.0]
Time duration after switching. When TSWITCH is the default value, there is no switching
back to TLA. If TSWITCH>0, the program switches back to TLA after the duration of
TSWITCH.

5-70 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TIMESTEP Sec. 5.6 Time dependence

TIMESTEP NAME

nstepi ti

TIMESTEP defines a time step sequence which controls the time/load-step incrementation
during analysis. The sequence is defined as a number of periods for which a given number of
constant time steps is specified. The currently active time step sequence is set to that named
by the TIMESTEP command.

NAME [DEFAULT]
Identifying time step sequence name. If the name of an existing time step sequence is given,
then the previous sequence definition is appended to.

nstepi
Number of steps to be taken in the ith time step sequence period.

ti
{ti > 0}
Constant time step magnitude, in time units, for the ith time step sequence period.

Note: A database is initialized with a time step sequence named DEFAULT which initially
specifies a single time step of magnitude 1.0 time units.

Auxiliary commands

LISTTIMESTEP NAME
Lists a given time step sequence. If no name is specified, then a list of all defined time
step sequence names is given.

DELETETIMESTEP NAME
Deletes a given time step sequence.

SETTIMESTEP NAME
Sets the currently active time step sequence, i.e., that which will be passed to the analysis
program.

SHOW TIMESTEP
Lists the currently active time step sequence.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-71

Chap. 5 Control data TIMEFUNCTION

TIMEFUNCTION NAME IFLIB FPAR1 FPAR2 FPAR3 FPAR4 FPAR5 FPAR6

timei valuei

TIMEFUNCTION defines a timefunction, which may be referenced, e.g., by an applied load.

The timefunction curve is defined as piecewise linear through the data points (timei, valuei),
and may be multiplied by one of a set of modifying functions.

NAME [(current highest TIMEFUNCTION label number) + 1]

Label number of the timefunction to be defined. If the label number of an existing
timefunction is given, then the previous curve definition is overwritten.

IFLIB [1]
Indicator for the library modifying function, which multiplies the input timefunction curve
values.

1 A constant multiplier equal to 1.0, i.e., the input timefunction is unmodified;

f (t ) = f * (t )

2 A sinusoidal multiplier;

f ( t ) = f * ( t ) sin(t + )

3 A short circuit multiplier, type 1;

f (t ) = f * (t ) (a + b exp( t ))
4 A short circuit multiplier, type 2;

0
f (t ) = f * (t ) 2 I (sin(t + ) + exp( t ) sin( ))
4

*
where f (t) is interpolated from the input timefunction curve given by data points
(timei, valuei), and the resulting function f(t) is that used by ADINA.

IFLIB = 3,4 may be used to model the electromagnetic load due to a short circuit current.

FPAR1, ... , FPAR6

Modifying function parameters:

5-72 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TIMEFUNCTION Sec. 5.7 Iteration

IFLIB = 2: [FPAR1 = 0.0, FPAR2 = 0.0]

FPAR1 = Angular frequency, , in degrees/(unit time).
FPAR2 = Phase angle, , in degrees.

IFLIB = 3: [FPAR1 = 0.0, FPAR2 = 0.0, FPAR3 = 1.0]

FPAR1 = Constant a.
FPAR2 = Constant b.
FPAR3 = Constant , in time units.

IFLIB = 4: [FPAR5 = 1.0, FPAR6 = 4 10-7]

FPAR1 = RMS of short circuit current, I.
FPAR2 = Angular frequency, , in degrees/(unit time).
FPAR3 = Phase angle, , in degrees.
FPAR4 = Impedance angle, , in degrees.
FPAR5 = Time constant, , in time units.
FPAR6 = Magnetic permeability, 0. (Volt.second / meter.Ampere).

timei
Time at data point i.

valuei
Value at time timei.

Auxiliary commands

LISTTIMEFUNCTION FIRST LAST

DELETETIMEFUNCTION FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-73

Chap. 5 Control data ITERATION

ITERATION METHOD LINE-SEARCH MAX-ITERATIONS PRINTOUT

PLASTIC-ALGORITHM

ITERATION selects the equilibrium iteration scheme to be employed for a non-linear ADINA
analysis.

METHOD [FULL-NEWTON]
Selects one of the following iteration schemes (see the Theory and Modeling Guide for a
discussion of iteration schemes).

MODIFIED-NEWTON Modified Newton iteration method.

BFGS BFGS (Broyden-Fletcher-Goldfarb-Shanno) matrix update method

with line-searches.

FULL-NEWTON Full Newton iteration method.

LINE-SEARCH [DEFAULT]
Flags the use of line searches within the iteration scheme. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

DEFAULT = NO METHOD = MODIFIED-NEWTON/FULL-NEWTON

YES METHOD = BFGS

MAX-ITERATIONS [15]
Specifies the maximum number of iterations within a time step. ADINA will terminate execu-
tion if this maximum number is reached without achieving convergence, unless one of the
following conditions is satisfied:

(a) The automatic time-stepping method has been enabled ( MASTER AUTOMATIC =
ATS), whereby the time step is subdivided a given number of times to try to reach
convergence.

(b) The load-displacement control method has been enabled ( MASTER AUTOMATIC =
LDC), whereby ADINA will automatically restart from the last step with established
equilibrium, using different constraint conditions. (A maximum of 10 such restarts will
be attempted per step.)

{1 MAX - ITERATIONS 999}

PRINTOUT [ALL]
Controls the printout of incremental energy, norms of unbalanced forces and moments, etc.,
during equilibrium iteration.

5-74 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ITERATION Sec. 5.7 Iteration

NONE No printout.

LAST Printout for last iteration of step.

ALL Printout of intermediate values for each iteration.

Note: For the modified Newton and the BFGS methods of equilibrium iteration,
STIFFNESS-STEPS and EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS may be used to restrict the reformation
of the stiffness matrix and the equilibrium iteration to only be carried out at specific
solution steps. Otherwise, the stiffness matrix reformation and equilibrium iteration
are carried out at every step.

Note: For the full Newton iteration method, equilibrium iteration and stiffness matrix reforma-
tion are always carried out at each solution step, and input to STIFF-
NESS-STEPS, EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS is effectively ignored.

Note: Full Newton iteration, without line-searches, will be used, regardless of the choice
made by this command, for the following situation: the automatic load-displacement
control method (see commands MASTER, AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT )
has been selected.

PLASTIC-ALGORITHM [1]
This flag sets the algorithm used in plasticity.

1 Original algorithm

2 Modified algorithm

The PLASTIC-ALGORITHM flag is used under the following conditions:

Implicit time integration (static or dynamic), and

1) METHOD=FULL-NEWTON (with or without line searches), and

2) 2D solid elements, 3D solid elements or shell elements under the following conditions:

- Large displacement, large strain kinematics

- 2D solid elements: ULJ formulation, material PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC

- 3D solid elements: ULJ formulation, material PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC

- 3D solid elements: ULH formulation, materials MROZ-BILINEAR, PLASTIC-BILINEAR,

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-75

Chap. 5 Control data

PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR

- Shell elements: ULJ formulation, material PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC

- Shell elements: ULH formulation, materials PLASTIC-BILINEAR, PLASTIC-

MULTILINEAR

For a given load step size, convergence is affected by PLASTIC-ALGORITHM. If the

iterations do not converge with PLASTIC-ALGORITHM=1 because the Jacobian determinant
in the elements becomes non-positive, switching to PLASTIC-ALGORITHM=2 can some-
times obtain convergence. Hence PLASTIC-ALGORITHM=2 allows larger load steps than
PLASTIC-ALGORITHM=1, in general.

But if the iterations already converge with PLASTIC-ALGORITHM=1, switching to PLAS-

TIC-ALGORITHM=2 slows down convergence.

The converged solution is not affected by the choice of PLASTIC-ALGORITHM.

The typical use of PLASTIC-ALGORITHM=2 is in metal forming. In metal forming, the metal
being formed is typically very thin and modeled either with shell elements or with thin 3D
elements. PLASTIC-ALGORITHM=2 allows large load steps, and hence fewer load steps, to
obtain the solution.

Auxiliary commands

LIST ITERATION
Lists the current values of the ITERATION command parameters.

5-76 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
STIFFNESS-STEPS Sec. 5.7 Iteration

STIFFNESS-STEPS

blocki firsti lasti incrementi

STIFFNESS-STEPS controls the output timesteps at which the effective stiffness matrix is
reformed by ADINA. This is achieved by specifying a sequence of time step blocks, each of
which determines a given frequency of stiffness matrix reformation over a given range of
timesteps.

blocki
The time step block number. The block number must be in the range 1 blocki 10, i.e., a
maximum of 10 time step blocks can be defined.

firsti
The initial time step number for the time step block blocki. { 1, lasti-1}

lasti
The final time step number for the time step block blocki. { firsti}

incrementi
The time step increment for the time step block blocki. { 1}

For each time step block, ADINA will re-form the effective stiffness matrix for timesteps

firsti, firsti + incrementi, firsti + (2 incrementi), ...

and so on until the resulting time step number is greater than or equal to lasti.

Note that the stiffness matrix will be reformed at time step lasti only if (lasti - firsti) is an
integer multiple of incrementi.

The time step block data is checked to see that each block satisfies

lasti firsti (i = 1, ..., 10)

incrementi 1

and that adjacent blocks do not overlap, i.e.,

firsti lasti (i = 2, ..., 10)

If these input conditions are not satisfied, then an error message will be given and the input
will not be accepted.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-77

Chap. 5 Control data STIFFNESS-STEPS

Furthermore, it is required that the highest value for lasti (for the highest block number) be
greater than or equal to the total number of solution timesteps (see TIMESTEP ). If not, then
it will be set to that value, with no resulting error condition.

Note: Command is only applicable when modified Newton or BFGS iterations method are
used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST STIFFNESS-STEPS
DELETE STIFFNESS-STEPS

5-78 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS Sec. 5.7 Iteration

EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS

blocki firsti lasti incrementi

EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS controls the output timesteps at which equilibrium iterations are

performed when the modified-Newton or BFGS iteration method is used. This is achieved by
specifying a sequence of time step blocks, each of which determines a given frequency of
equilibrium iteration over a given range of timesteps.

blocki
The time step block number. The block number must be in the range 1 blocki 10, i.e., a
maximum of 10 time step blocks can be defined.

firsti
The initial time step number for the time step block blocki. { 1; lasti-1}

lasti
The final time step number for the time step block blocki. { firsti}

incrementi
The time step increment for the time step block blocki. { 1}

For each time step block, ADINA will carry out equilibrium iteration for time steps

firsti, firsti + incrementi, firsti + (2 incrementi), ...

and so on until the resulting time step number is greater than or equal to lasti.

Note that equilibrium iteration will be performed at time step lasti only if (lasti - firsti) is an
integer multiple of incrementi.

The time step block data is checked to see that each block satisfies

lasti firsti (i = 1, ..., 10)

incrementi 1

and that adjacent blocks do not overlap, i.e.,

firsti lasti (i = 2, ..., 10)

If these input conditions are not satisfied, then an error message will be given and the input
will not be accepted.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-79

Chap. 5 Control data EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS

Furthermore, it is required that the highest value for lasti (for the highest block number) be
greater than or equal to the total number of solution timesteps (see TIMESTEP ). If not, then
it will be set to that value, with no resulting error condition.

Auxiliary commands

LIST EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS
DELETE EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS

5-80 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TMC-ITERATION Sec. 5.8 Tolerances

TMC-ITERATION METHOD MAX-ITERATIONS STEP-REFORMING

STEP-EQUILIBRIUM RTOL TMCTOL LINE-SEARCH

TMC-ITERATION selects the equilibrium iteration scheme to be employed for a heat transfer
analysis.

METHOD [FULL-NEWTON]
Selects the iteration scheme. {MODIFIED-NEWTON /FULL-NEWTON}

MODIFIED-NEWTON Modified Newton iteration.

FULL-NEWTON Full Newton iteration.

Note: The FULL-NEWTON iteration scheme is generally more effective when temperature-
dependent material properties are used, or RADIATION elements are present.

MAX-ITERATIONS [15]
The maximum number of iterations within a time step.

STEP-REFORMING [1]
The maximum number of time steps between reforming conductivity, heat capacity,
convection and radiation matrices. This parameter is only applicable for METHOD = MODI-
FIED-NEWTON.

STEP-EQUILIBRIUM [1]
The maximum number of time steps between equilibrium iterations. This parameter is only
applicable for METHOD = MODIFIED-NEWTON.

RTOL [0.001]
RTOL is the temperature convergence tolerance.

TMCTOL [0.0]
TMC is the iteration tolerance. The default for TMCTOL is RTOL: this means that if
TMCTOL= 0.0, TMCTOL=RTOL.

LINE-SEARCH [NO]
Flags the use of line searches within the iteration scheme. {NO/YES}

Auxiliary commands

LIST TMC-ITERATION

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-81

Chap. 5 Control data TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC

TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC COINCIDENCE EPSILON SHELL-ANGLE

BOLT-ANGLE PHI-ANGLE EMF-DMIN
NCTOL-TYPE

TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC specifies certain geometric tolerances used during the construc-
tion of a model.

COINCIDENCE [1.0E-5]
Tolerance used when comparing two locations to see if they are coincident. The default
value is usually sufficient for most models, but may be reduced, e.g, if distinct locations are
extremely close in comparison to the overall dimension of the model.

EPSILON [1.0E-9]
A small value representing zero in many geometry property tests. This value is not normally
required to be changed from the default value.

SHELL-ANGLE [5.0]
A small angular measure, in degrees, used in comparing normal vectors to determine the
number of degrees of freedom to be automatically assigned to a shell midsurface node at
which shell elements meet.

BOLT-ANGLE [0.5]
A small angular measure, in degrees, used in comparing shell element normal vectors to
determine whether any impinging beam-shaft elements give rise to additional constraints
relating the rotational degree of freedom normal to the shell surface to adjacent translational
degrees of freedom. If a shell element normal differs from the average normal at a node by
more than BOLT-ANGLE degrees, no additional bolt constraints will be generated.

PHI-ANGLE [30]
This parameter is obsolete, but retained for backwards compatibility.
Use the PHI-MODEL-COMPLETION command, PHI-ANGLE parameter instead.

EMF-DMIN [0.001]
Specifies minmum distance between two electric conductors. If the distance between two
conducting nodes in the model is less than EMF-DMIN, EMF-DMIN will be used.

NCTOL-TYPE [RELATIVE-LOCAL]
Option to determine the tolerance for node coincidence checking. {RELATIVE-LOCAL/
RELATIVE-GLOBAL/ ABSOLUTE}

A node at (XB,YB,ZB) is close to a geometric location (XA,YA,ZA) if

|XB-XA| COINCIDENCE * XLEN

5-82 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 5.8 Tolerances

|YB-YA| COINCIDENCE * YLEN

|ZB-ZA| COINCIDENCE * ZLEN

where, (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are decided by the following:

RELATIVE-LOCAL (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the
current geometry.

RELATIVE-GLOBAL (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the
model.

ABSOLUTE (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are (1.0, 1.0, 1.0).

Auxiliary commands
LIST TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC
Lists the tolerance data for the model geometry.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-83

Chap. 5 Control data TOLERANCES ITERATION

TOLERANCES ITERATION CONVERGENCE ETOL RTOL RNORM

RMNORM RCTOL DTOL DNORM DMNORM
STOL RCONSM ENLSTH LSLOWER LSUPPER
MAXDISP

TOLERANCES ITERATION specifies the convergence criteria and corresponding tolerances

controlling the equilibrium iteration scheme within the analysis program ADINA.

CONVERGENCE [ENERGY]
Selects the convergence criterion to be used, and thereby which of the other parameters are
considered.

ENERGY Energy convergence (ETOL, STOL).

EF Energy and force (moment) convergence (ETOL, RTOL, RNORM,

RMNORM, STOL).

ED Energy and displacement (translation, rotation) convergence (ETOL,

DTOL, DNORM, DMNORM, STOL).

FORCE Force (moment) convergence (RTOL, RNORM, RMNORM, STOL).

DISPLACEMENT Displacement (translation, rotation) convergence (DTOL, DNORM,

DMNORM, STOL).

In addition, when contact is present, the RCTOL and RCONSM parameters are also used.

ETOL [0.0]
Relative energy tolerance. ETOL=0.0 means ETOL=1.0E-6 when the load-displacement
control method (MASTER AUTOMATIC=LDC) is used and ETOL=1.0E-3 otherwise.

RTOL [0.01]
Relative force and moment tolerance.

RNORM [0.0]
Reference force. RNORM is automatically calculated by the program if RNORM=0.0.

RMNORM [0.0]
Reference moment. RMNORM is automatically calculated by the program if RMNORM=0.0.

RCTOL [0.05]
Relative contact force tolerance.

5-84 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TOLERANCES ITERATION Sec. 5.8 Tolerances

DTOL [0.01]
Relative displacement (translation, rotation) tolerance.

DNORM [0.0]
Reference translation. DNORM is automatically calculated by the program if DNORM=0.0.

DMNORM [0.0]
Reference rotation. DMNORM is automatically calculated by the program if DMNORM=0.0.

STOL [0.5]
Line search convergence tolerance.

RCONSM [0.01]
Reference contact force.

ENLSTH [0.0]
Line search energy threshold. This parameter is only used if line search is activated (e.g.,
when ITERATION LINE-SEARCH=YES is specified). During each equilibrium iteration, if the
unbalanced energy is less than ENLSTH, no line search will be performed. {>= 0.0}

Notes:
1. RNORM and RMNORM cannot both be zero.
2. DNORM and DMNORM cannot both be zero.

LSLOWER [1.0e-3]
Lower bound for line search. {0.0 LSLOWER < 1.0}

LSUPPER [1.0 or 8.0]

Upper bound for line search. If there is contact, the default is 1.0; otherwise, if there is no
contact, the default is 8.0. {LSUPPER 1.0}

MAXDISP [0.0]
Specifies the maximum incremental displacement that is allowed in an iteration. This feature is
generally useful for contact analysis where rigid body motion before the bodies come into
contact may result in excessive displacements.A value of 0.0 means there is no limit on
incremental displacements for dynamic analysis or analysis without contact. For static
analysis with contact, the maximum incremental displacement is 1% of the maximum model
dimension if MAXDISP=0.0. {0.0}

Auxiliary commands

LIST TOLERANCES ITERATION

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-85

Chap. 5 Control data

This page intentionally left blank

5-86 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
PRINTOUT Sec. 5.9 Analysis output

PRINTOUT VOLUME ECHO PRINTDEFAULT INPUT-DATA

OUTPUT DISPLACEMENTS VELOCITIES
ACCELERATIONS IDISP ITEMP ISTRAIN IPIPE
STORAGE LARGE-STRAINS ENERGIES

PRINTOUT controls the output printed by ADINA.

VOLUME [MINIMUM]
Sets the defaults for the remaining parameters of this command.

MAXIMUM The following defaults are set:

ECHO = YES
PRINTDEFAULT = YES
INPUT-DATA = 0
OUTPUT = ALL
DISPLACEMENTS = YES
VELOCITIES = YES
ACCELERATIONS = YES
IDISP = YES
ITEMP = YES
ISTRAIN = YES
IPIPE = YES

MINIMUM The following defaults are set:

ECHO = NO
PRINTDEFAULT = NO
INPUT-DATA = 4
OUTPUT = SELECTED
DISPLACEMENTS = YES
VELOCITIES = YES
ACCELERATIONS = YES
IDISP = NO
ITEMP = NO
ISTRAIN = NO
IPIPE = NO

ECHO [NO]
Determines whether the input data file is echoed at the beginning of the ADINA results file.
{YES/NO}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-87

Chap. 5 Control data PRINTOUT

PRINTDEFAULT [NO]
Printing of individual element results is controlled by the data entry print of the element
data commands. This parameter defines the default action for those elements with that data
entry left undefined.

YES Print element results.

NO No element results printed.

STRAINS Element strains are printed in addition to element stresses (only applicable
to certain material models).

INPUT-DATA [4]
Level of printout of input mesh data.

0 Detailed printing of all generated input data.

1 As for 0, except equation numbers are not printed.
2 As for 0, except nodal data are not printed.
3 As for 0, except equation numbers and nodal data are not printed.
4 No printing of input mesh data.

OUTPUT [SELECTED]

ALL All nodal point solution variables and requested element stresses, via
element data commands, are printed at all solution steps.

SELECTED Results are printed as requested by the parameters of this command in

conjunction with other commands, e.g., PRINT-STEPS, PRINTNODES.

DISPLACEMENTS [YES]
Controls whether or not the program will print displacements (when OUTPUT =
SELECTED). {YES/NO}

VELOCITIES [YES]
Controls whether or not the program will print velocities (when OUTPUT = SELECTED).
{YES/NO}

ACCELERATIONS [YES]
Controls whether or not the program will print accelerations (when OUTPUT = SELECTED).
{YES/NO}

5-88 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
PRINTOUT Sec. 5.9 Analysis output

IDISP [NO]
Controls whether or not initial displacements, velocities and accelerations (as indicated by
parameters DISPLACEMENTS, VELOCITIES, and ACCELERATIONS) are printed out.
{YES/NO}

ITEMP [NO]
Controls whether or not initial temperatures and temperature gradients are printed out.
{YES/NO}

ISTRAIN [NO]
Controls whether or not initial strains, flexural strains and strain gradients are printed out.
{YES/NO}

IPIPE [NO]
Controls whether or not initial pipe internal pressures are printed out. {YES/NO}

STORAGE [NO]
Controls whether or not storage requirements are printed out. {YES/NO}

LARGE-STRAINS [NONE]
Indicates whether or not extended results for element stresses and strains are to be printed
for large strain analyses. {NONE/PRINT}

ENERGIES [NO]
Indicates whether the energies due to the use of low-speed dynamics option (inertia and
damping), contact damping or assigned stiffness to the normal rotational degree of freedom
of shell nodes are printed. {NO/YES}

Auxiliary commands

LIST PRINTOUT

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-89

Chap. 5 Control data PRINT-STEPS

PRINT-STEPS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

blocki firsti lasti incrementi

PRINT-STEPS controls the output time steps at which results are printed by the analysis
program. This is achieved by specifying a sequence of time step blocks, each of which
determines a given frequency of time step output over a given range of time steps.

Note that the results printout can be controlled independently for the main structure and any
substructure reuses.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure label number]

The label number of the substructure to which the time step block data is assigned.

REUSE [current substructure reuse label number]

The label number of the substructure reuse to which the time step block data is assigned.

blocki
The time step block number. The block number must be in the range 1 blocki 10, i.e., a
maximum of 10 time step blocks can be defined for printout control.

firsti
The initial time step number for the time step block blocki. { 1; lasti-1}

lasti
The final time step number for the time step block blocki. { firsti}

incrementi
The time step increment for the time step block blocki. { 1}

For each time step block, the analysis program will print results for time steps

firsti, firsti + incrementi, firsti + (2 incrementi), ...

etc., until the resulting time step number is greater than or equal to lasti.

Note that printout will be given at time step lasti only if (lasti - firsti) is an integer multiple of
incrementi.

The time step block data is checked to see that each block satisfies

lasti firsti (i = 1,...,10)

incrementi 1

5-90 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
PRINT-STEPS Sec. 5.9 Analysis output

and that adjacent blocks do not overlap, i.e.:

firsti last(i-1) (i = 2,...,10)

If these conditions are not satisfied, then an error message will be given and the input will not
be accepted.

Furthermore, it is required that the highest value for lasti (for the highest block number) be
greater than or equal to the total number of solution timesteps (see TIMESTEP ). If not, then
it will be set to that value, with no resulting error condition.

Auxiliary commands

LIST PRINT-STEPS
DELETE PRINT-STEPS

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-91

Chap. 5 Control data PORTHOLE

PORTHOLE VOLUME SAVEDEFAULT FILEUNIT FORMATTED

INPUT-DATA DISPLACEMENTS VELOCITIES ACCELERATIONS
TEMPERATURES MAX-STEPS SHELLVECTORS ELEM-RESULT
RESULTS-ELEMENT REACTION REACT-TOL

PORTHOLE controls the saving, by ADINA, of input data and solution results on the
porthole file for later post-processing by ADINA-PLOT.

VOLUME [MAXIMUM]
Sets defaults for remaining parameters of this command.

MAXIMUM The following defaults are set:

SAVEDEFAULT = YES
INPUT-DATA = 1
DISPLACEMENTS = YES
VELOCITIES = YES
ACCELERATIONS = YES
TEMPERATURES = YES

MINIMUM The following defaults are set:

SAVEDEFAULT = NO
INPUT-DATA = 0
DISPLACEMENTS = NO
VELOCITIES = NO
ACCELERATIONS = NO
TEMPERATURES = NO

SAVEDEFAULT [YES]
Saving of individual element results is controlled by the data entry save of the element data
commands. This parameter defines the default action for those elements with that data entry
left undefined. {YES/NO}

FILEUNIT
This parameter is no longer used.

FORMATTED [NO]
Controls whether the porthole file records are formatted or written in unformatted binary.
{YES/NO}

INPUT-DATA
This parameter is obsolete and should not be used. This parameter is used only in restart
analysis.

5-92 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
PORTHOLE Sec. 5.9 Analysis output

0 Save only the master control information. Note that when INPUT-DATA = 0, the
resulting porthole file cannot be read by ADINA-PLOT.

1 Save all input data on the porthole.

DISPLACEMENTS [YES]
Controls whether or not initial and calculated displacements are saved. {YES/NO}

VELOCITIES [YES]
Controls whether or not initial and calculated velocities are saved. {YES/NO}

ACCELERATIONS [YES]
Controls whether or not initial and calculated accelerations are saved. {YES/NO}

TEMPERATURES [YES]
Controls whether or not temperatures are saved on the porthole file. {YES/NO}

Note: TEMPERATURES is also used to control the saving of pipe internal pressures.

MAX-STEPS [0]
Indicates the maximum number of time-step results saved in each porthole file. MAX-
STEPS=0 means no limit on the number of steps that can be saved on the porthole file, i.e.,
only one porthole file is created.

Notes:
1. If MAX-STEPS > 0, multiple porthole file may be created with filenames jobname_1.por,
jobname_2.por, etc.

2. MAX-STEPS is also used to control the maximum number of time-step results saved in
each universal file.

SHELLVECTORS [NO]
Indicates whether or not shell element node director vectors are to be saved on the porthole
file. Note this only refers to those director vectors calculated in large displacement analysis
during the solution response, the initial shell element node director vectors will still be saved
on the porthole file. These vectors are required to plot shell elements with a top-bottom
depiction, but can require considerable storage for large shell models with many output steps.
When SHELLVECTORS=NORMALS, only the normals of the shell direction vectors are saved
in the porthole file. {YES/NO/NORMALS}

ELEM-RESULT [DEF-GRAD]
Controls whether deformation gradients, stretches or strains are saved in the porthole file for

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-93

Chap. 5 Control data PORTHOLE

2-D and 3-D solid elements with certain material models/kinematic formulations.
{DEF-GRAD/STRETCH}

The following table lists the material models and kinematic formulations affected by this
parameter:

Material model Output when ELEM-RESULT=STRETCH

ARRUDA-BOYCE Green-Lagrange strains

CAM-CLAY(*) Stretches
CREEP (*) Stretches
CREEP-VARIABLE (*) Stretches
DRUCKER-PRAGER (*) Stretches
EIGHT-CHAIN Green-Lagrange strains
GURSON (*) Stretches
HYPER-FOAM Green-Lagrange strains
MOONEY-RIVLIN Green-Lagrange strains
MROZ-BILINEAR (*) Stretches
MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP (*) Stretches
MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE (*) Stretches
PLASTIC-BILINEAR (*) Stretches
PLASTIC-CREEP (*) Stretches
PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE (*) Stretches
PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR (*) Stretches
OGDEN Green-Lagrange strains
USER-SUPPLIED (+) Green-Lagrange strains
USER-SUPPLIED (*) Stretches
THERMO-PLASTIC (*) Stretches
VISCOELASTIC (*) Stretches

* = KINEMATICS DISP=LARGE STRAINS = LARGE

+ = KINEMATICS DISP=LARGE STRAINS = SMALL

When ELEM-RESULT = DEF-GRAD, then all of the material models/kinematic formulations

in the above table output deformation gradients.

RESULTS-ELEMENT [YES]
Specifies whether the option to save selected element results (currently only for 3D solid
elements) is used. See command RESULTS-ELEMENT for details on which results can be
selected. {NO/YES}

5-94 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
PORTHOLE Sec. 5.9 Analysis output

REACTION [RELATIVE]
Indicates whether element results are also saved using the same time step blocks. {RELA-
TIVE/ABSOLUTE/ALL}

RELATIVE Only those reactions with absolute value larger than a relative toler-
ance value are saved onto the porthole file. The relative tolerance value
is given by: {REACT-TOL x Largest Reaction Force in Model}.

ABSOLUTE Only those reactions with absolute value larger than an absolute
tolerance value are saved onto the porthole file. The absolute tolerance
value is given by the REACT-TOL parameter.

ALL All reactions are saved onto the porthole file, including those reactions
on degrees of freedom that are automatically constrained by the
program.

REACT-TOL [1E-9]
Tolerance used by REACTION parameter.

Auxiliary commands

LIST PORTHOLE
Lists the current settings for the PORTHOLE parameters.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-95

Chap. 5 Control data

5-96 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
NODESAVE-STEPS Sec. 5.9 Analysis output

NODESAVE-STEPS ELEMSAVE

blocki firsti lasti incrementi

NODESAVE-STEPS controls the output timesteps at which nodal results are saved on the
porthole file by the analysis program. This is achieved by specifying a sequence of time step
blocks, each of which determines a given frequency of time step output over a given range
of time steps.

ELEMSAVE [NO]
Indicates whether element results are also saved using the same time step blocks. {NO/
COPY/OVERWRITE}

NO Time step blocks for saving element results are specified indepen-
dently in ELEMSAVE-STEPS command.

COPY Time step blocks specified in this command are copied to the
ELEMSAVE-STEPS command if no time step block are specified in that
command.

OVERWRITE Time step blocks specified in this command will overwrite any time step
blocks in the ELEMSAVE-STEPS command.

blocki
The time step block number. The block number must be in the range 1 blocki 10, i.e., a
maximum of 10 time step blocks can be defined for porthole control.

firsti
The initial time step number for the time step block blocki. { 1; last(i-1)}

lasti
The final time step number for the time step block blocki. { firsti}

incrementi
The time step increment for the time step block blocki. { 1}

For each time step block, the analysis program will save nodal results for timesteps

firsti, firsti + incrementi, firsti+(2 incrementi), ...

and so on until the resulting time step number is greater than or equal to lasti.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-97

Chap. 5 Control data NODESAVE-STEPS

Note that nodal results will be saved at time step lasti only if (lasti - firsti) is an integer multiple
of incrementi.

The time step block data is checked to see that each block satisfies

lasti firsti (i = 1,...,10)

incrementi 1

and that adjacent blocks do not overlap, i.e.:

firsti last(i-1) (i = 2,...,10)

If these conditions are not satisfied, then an error message will be given and the input will not
be accepted.

Furthermore, it is required that the highest value for lasti (for the highest block number) be
greater than or equal to the total number of solution timesteps (see TIMESTEP ). If not, then
it will be set to that value, with no resulting error condition.

Auxiliary commands

LIST NODESAVE-STEPS
DELETE NODESAVE-STEPS

5-98 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ELEMSAVE-STEPS Sec. 5.9 Analysis output

ELEMSAVE-STEPS NODESAVE

blocki firsti lasti incrementi

ELEMSAVE-STEPS controls the output timesteps at which element results are saved on the
porthole file by the analysis program. This is achieved by specifying a sequence of time step
blocks, each of which determines a given frequency of time step output over a given range
of timesteps.

NODESAVE [NO]
Indicates whether nodal results are also saved using the same time step blocks. {NO/
COPY/OVERWRITE}

NO Time step blocks for saving nodal results are specified independently
in NODESAVE-STEPS command.

COPY Time step blocks specified in this command are copied to the
NODESAVE-STEPS command if no time step block are specified in that
command.

OVERWRITE Time step blocks specified in this command will overwrite any time step
blocks in the NODESAVE-STEPS command.

blocki
The time step block number. The block number must be in the range 1 blocki 10, i.e., a
maximum of 10 time step blocks can be defined for porthole control.

firsti
The initial time step number for the time step block blocki. Note that firsti must be greater
than or equal to 1.

lasti
The final time step number for the time step block blocki. { 1; last(i-1)}

incrementi
The time step increment for the time step block blocki. { 1}

For each time step block, the analysis program will save element results for timesteps:

firsti, firsti + incrementi, firsti+(2 incrementi), ...

and so on, until the resulting time step number is greater than or equal to lasti.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-99

Chap. 5 Control data ELEMSAVE-STEPS

Note that element results will be saved at time step lasti only if (lasti - firsti)
is an integer multiple of incrementi.

The time step block data is checked to see that each block satisfies:

lasti firsti (i = 1,...,10)

incrementi 1

and that adjacent blocks do not overlap, i.e.:

firsti last(i-1) (i = 2,...,10)

If these conditions are not satisfied, then an error message will be given and the input will not
be accepted.
Furthermore it is required that the highest value for lasti (for the highest block number) be
greater than or equal to the total number of solution timesteps (see TIMESTEP ). If not, then
it will be set to that value, with no resulting error conditions.

Auxiliary commands

LIST ELEMSAVE-STEPS
DELETE ELEMSAVE-STEPS

5-100 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
PRINTNODES Sec. 5.9 Analysis output

PRINTNODES BLOCKS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

blocki firsti lasti incrementi

PRINTNODES POINTS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

pointi

PRINTNODES LINES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

linei

PRINTNODES SURFACES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

surfacei
PRINTNODES VOLUMES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

volumei

PRINTNODES EDGES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE BODY

edgei

PRINTNODES FACES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE BODY

facei
PRINTNODES BODIES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

bodyi

PRINTNODES NODESETS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

nodeseti

PRINTNODES selects nodes for which solution results shall be printed by ADINA. This is
achieved by specifying a sequence of node blocks (sets of node labels) or by reference to a
set of geometry entities to which the nodes are associated, i.e. via mesh generation.

SUBSTRUCTURE [(current substructure label number)]

The label number of the substructure to which the nodal data is assigned.

REUSE [(current substructure reuse label number)]

The label number of the substructure reuse to which the nodal data is assigned.

BODY [(currently active BODY)]

A solid geometry body label number.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-101

Chap. 5 Control data PRINTNODES

blocki
A node block number.

firsti
The initial node number for the node block blocki. { 1; last(i-1)}

lasti
The final node number for the node block blocki. { firsti}

incrementi
The node increment for the node block blocki. { 1}

pointi
A point label number.

linei
A line label number.

surfacei
A surface label number.

volumei
A volume label number.

edgei
An edge label number; an edge of a solid body BODY.

facei
A face label number; a face of a solid body BODY.

bodyi
A body label number.

nodeseti
A node set label number.

Auxilliary Commands

LIST PRINTNODES BLOCKS / POINTS / LINES / SURFACES / VOLUMES / EDGES /

FACES / BODIES.

DELETE PRINTNODES BLOCKS / POINTS / LINES / SURFACES / VOLUMES /

EDGES / FACES / BODIES.

5-102 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONTACT-OUTPUT-NODES Sec. 5.9 Analysis output

CONTACT-OUTPUT-NODES TYPE

namei bodyi

This command is used to select nodes for output of contact results.

TYPE
The type of entity used for selecting nodes where the contact result is to be output.
{NODE/NODESET/POINT/LINE-EDGE/SURFACE-FACE}

Note:
If TYPE = NODE or NODESETor POINT , the second column bodyi is ignored.

When TYPE = LINE-EDGE or SURFACE-FACE, if bodyi = 0, this means that the geometry
is a line or a surface.

namei
Label number of the node for which the contact result is output.

bodyi
Label number of the body for namei.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-103

Chap. 5 Control data REACTION-NODES

REACTION-NODES TYPE

namei bodyi

This command is used with the REACTIONS parameter in the MASTER command to select
the reaction forces to be printed.

TYPE
The type of entity used for selecting nodes where the reaction force is to be printed.
{NODE/NODESET/POINT/LINE-EDGE/SURFACE-FACE}

Note:
If TYPE = NODE or NODESET or POINT , the second column bodyi is ignored.
When TYPE = LINE-EDGE or SURFACE-FACE, if bodyi = 0, this means that the geometry
is a line or a surface.

namei
Label number of the node for which the reaction force is printed.

bodyi
Label number of the body for namei.

5-104 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RESULTS-ELEMENT Sec. 5.9 Analysis output

RESULTS-ELEMENT NAME GROUP LOCATION STRESS STRAIN INELASTIC

THERMAL ENERGY-DENSITY E LECTROMAGNETIC
USER-VARIABLE MISCELLANEOUS

Selects the element results to be saved in the porthole file. Currently, result selection is
applicable only for 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements. Note that when a result selection is not
applicable for a material model, it is ignored, e.g., INELASTIC does not affect result output for
element groups with elastic material.

NAME [(current highest label number) + 1]

Label number of the element result selection.

GROUP [0]
specifies the element group that the result selection applies to. GROUP=0 sets the default
result selection, namely the selection for all groups that are not specified with RESULTS-
ELEMENT commands. Note that the same element group number cannot be specified in more
than one element result selection.

LOCATION [INTEGRATION]
Specifies whether results are saved at the element integration points or corner nodes. Saving
results at corner nodes requires less storage but is less accurate. {INTEGRATION/COR-
NER}

STRESS [ALL]
Specifies which stress results are saved. {NO/BASIC/ALL}

BASIC Save effective stress, ...

ALL Save stress components

STRAIN [NO]
Specifies whether strain results are saved or not. {NO/ALL}

ALL Save strain components or deformation gradient results

INELASTIC [BASIC]
Specifies which inelastic results are saved. {NO/BASIC/ALL}

BASIC Save accumulated effective plastic strain and accumulated effective creep
strain as applicable
ALL Save components of plastic, viscoplastic, transformation, creep, irradiation
strain and plastic flags as applicable

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-105

Chap. 5 Control data RESULTS-ELEMENT

THERMAL [BASIC]
Specifies which thermal results are saved. {NO/BASIC/ALL}

BASIC Save element temperature

ALL Save element temperature, components of thermal strain, heat flux

ENERGY-DENSITY [NO]
Specifies which energy results are saved. {NO/BASIC/ALL}. Currently BASIC does not
save anything, but this may be changed in a future release.

ELECTROMAGNETIC [NO]
Specifies whether electromagnetic results are saved or not. {NO/ALL}

USER-VARIABLE [NO]
Specifies whether user-variable results are saved or not. {NO/ALL}

MISCELLANEOUS [NO]
Specifies whether miscellaneous results are saved or not. The types of miscellaneous results
depend very much on the material model used with the element. {NO/ALL}

5-106 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SAVENODES Sec. 5.9 Analysis output

SAVENODES BLOCKS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

blocki firsti lasti incrementi

SAVENODES POINTS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

pointi

SAVENODES LINES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

linei
SAVENODES SURFACES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

surfacei

SAVENODES VOLUMES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

volumei

SAVENODES EDGES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE BODY

edgei
SAVENODES FACES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE BODY

facei

SAVENODES BODIES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

bodyi

SAVENODES NODESETS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

nodeseti

SAVENODES selects nodes for which solution results shall be saved by the ADINA on the
porthole file. This is achieved by specifying a sequence of node blocks (set of node labels),
or by reference to a set of geometry entities to which the nodes are associated, i.e. via mesh
generation.

SUBSTRUCTURE [(current substructure label number)]

The label number of the substructure to which the nodal data is assigned.

REUSE [(current substructure reuse label number)]

The label number of the substructure reuse to which the nodal data is assigned.

BODY
A solid geometry body label number.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-107

Chap. 5 Control data SAVENODES

blocki
A node block number.

firsti
The initial node number for the node block blocki. { 1; last(i-1)}

lasti
The final node number for the node block blocki. { firsti}

incrementi
The node increment for the node block blocki. { 1}

pointi
A point label number.

linei
A line label number.

surfacei
A surface label number.

volumei
A volume label number.

edgei
An edge label number; an edge of solid body BODY.

facei
A face label number; a face of solid body BODY.

bodyi
A body label number.

nodeseti
A node set label number.

Auxilliary Commands

LIST SAVENODES BLOCKS / POINTS / LINES / SURFACES / VOLUMES / EDGES /

FACES / BODIES.

DELETE SAVENODES BLOCKS / POINTS / LINES / SURFACES / VOLUMES / EDGES

/ FACES / BODIES.

5-108 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DISK-STORAGE Sec. 5.9 Analysis output

DISK-STORAGE GLOBAL-MATRIX TEMPERATURES TGRADIENTS

NSTEPKM LARGE-STRAINS MEMOPT
STIFFNESS-MATRIX MASS-MATRIX DAMPING-MATRIX
NSTEP-HEAT CONDUCT-MATRIX HEATCAP-MATRIX

DISK-STORAGE indicates auxiliary file storage and input/output control for program ADINA.

GLOBAL-MATRIX [NONE]
Indicates whether or not the global, assembled, stiffness, mass, damping, heat conductivity
and heat capacity matrices are to be saved to a file. For non-linear analyses the stiffness
matrix can be saved at a selected time-step via parameter NSTEPKM. For details see Section
11.12 of the Theory and Modeling Guide. {NONE/SAVE/NODE/FULL}

NONE The assembled global system matrices are not saved.

SAVE The global system matrices are written to a file in sparse form.
NODE The global system matrices are written to a file in sparse form as a
node-based direct input matrix required by the AUI; not applicable to
conductance and heat capacity matrices.
FULL The global system matrices are written to a file in full upper triangular
by column heights form.

TEMPERATURES [NONE]
Indicates whether or not nodal temperature data is to be input from a file. Material models
which are temperature dependent require the temperature field to be specified. Prescribed or
initial nodal temperatures may be simply described directly by LOAD TEMPERATURE,
APPLY-LOAD, INITIAL-CONDITION, SET-INITCONDITION, but a more complex tempera-
ture distribution may benefit from being input from file (e.g., created by the heat transfer
analysis program ADINA-T). Note that any nodal temperature data input from file is added to
that already specified directly to the database, if any.

NONE No temperature data is input from file.

READ Temperatures are read from file. The data records of that file must
contain the solution time and the nodal temperatures at that time. The
solution times for this input case must correspond to the times of the
ADINA analysis given by time TSTART (see MASTER) and increments
thereafter determined by the defined time step sequence.
INTERPOLATE Temperatures are read from file, but unlike the case TEMPERATURES =
READ, the solution times need not correspond to the discrete solution
times of the ADINA analysis as given by TSTART and the time step
sequence linear interpolation is performed to give the nodal tempera-
tures at the ADINA solution times.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-109

Chap. 5 Control data DISK-STORAGE

TGRADIENTS [NONE]
This parameter acts in the same manner as parameter TEMPERATURES except that
through-thickness temperature gradients for shell mid-surface nodes are considered. Note
that any nodal temperature gradient data input from file is added to that already specified
directly to the database, if any. {NONE/READ/INTERPOLATE}

NSTEPKM [1]
Indicates the time-step at which a non-linear stiffness matrix is written to file when GLOBAL-
MATRIX = SAVE. The stiffness matrix at the start of the indicated step is stored any
automatic sub-increments are not counted, the time-step sequence specified by command
TIMESTEP is all that is considered by this parameter. Thus, NSTEPKM = 1 corresponds to
saving the initial stiffness matrix, corresponding to time TSTART.

LARGE-STRAINS [NONE]
Indicates whether or not extended results of element stresses and strains are to be saved in a
file for large strain analyses, and, if so, whether the file is formatted or binary. {NONE/
FORMATTED/BINARY}

MEMOPT [AUTOMATIC]
Specifies option to write element group data on disk to reduce memory required by the
program. {AUTOMATIC/EG-OUT}
AUTOMATIC Program automatically decides when element group data is
written on disk.
EG-OUT Element group data is written on disk to reduce memory usage.

STIFFNESS-MATRIX [NONE]
Option to save node-based stiffness matrix. {NONE/SAVE}

MASS-MATRIX [NONE]
Option to save node-based mass matrix. {NONE/SAVE}

DAMPING-MATRIX [NONE]
Option to save node-based damping matrix. {NONE/SAVE}

NSTEP-HEAT [1]
Heat flow step number for which the matrices are written to a disk file.

CONDUCT-MATRIX [NONE]
Option to save node-based conductance matrix. {NONE/SAVE}

HEATCAP-MATRIX [NONE]
Option to save node-based heat capacity matrix. {NONE/SAVE}

5-110 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DISK-STORAGE Sec. 5.9 Analysis output

Auxiliary commands

LIST DISK-STORAGE

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-111

Chap. 5 Control data MONITOR

MONITOR NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE VARIABLE STOPFLAG

STOPVALUE OPERATION SET1

Defines a monitor that can be used to print out the minimum or maximum value of a variable
during solution. In addition, there is an option to stop the program when the variable reaches
a specified value. For element-based variables, only variables in 2D and 3D solid element can
be monitored.

NAME [(current highest monitor label number) + 1]

The monitor label. {>0}

DESCRIPTION
Description of this monitor.

TYPE [NONE]
Type of quantity to be monitored. {NONE/ELAV-MODEL/ELAV-GROUP/NODE-MODEL}

NONE Monitoring is not active

ELAV-MODEL Nodal averaged element quantity whole model
ELAV-GROUP Nodal averaged element quantity element group
NODE-MODEL Nodal quantity whole model

VARIABLE
Name of variable just like post-processing.

For element-based variables, the choices are

STRESS-XX STRESS-XY STRESS-XZ
STRESS-YY STRESS-YZ STRESS-ZZ
STRESS-EFFECTIVE STRESS-PRINCIPAL
STRAIN-XX STRAIN-YY STRAIN-ZZ
STRAIN-XY STRAIN-XZ STRAIN-YZ
STRAIN-PRINCIPAL

For nodal-based variables, the choices are:

DISP-X DISP-Y DISP-Z DISP-MAGNITUDE
ROT-X ROT-Y ROT-Z ROT-MAGNITUDE
VEL-X VEL-Y VEL-Z VEL-MAGNITUDE
VEL-TX VEL-TY VEL-TZ VEL-T-MAGNITUDE
ACC-X ACC-Y ACC-Z ACC-MAGNITUDE
ACC-TX ACC-TY ACC-TZ ACC-T-MAGNITUDE

STOPFLAG [NO]
Whether or not to stop analysis based on monitored value. {NO/YES}

5-112 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MONITOR Sec. 5.10 Solution monitoring

NO No stopping. Variable used for informational use only (printed to .out file)
YES Stop analysis once variable reaches STOPVALUE

STOPVALUE
Value at which to stop analysis, used if STOPFLAG=YES.

OPERATION [AMAX]
Operation for combining data. {AMAX/MAX/MIN}

AMAX Absolute maximum

MAX Maximum
MIN Minimum

SET1 [0]
Additional data to define monitor. Format depends on TYPE. SET1 = element group number if
TYPE= ELAV-GROUP. Otherwise, it is not used.

Note that only the first 8 active monitors will be used.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-113

Chap. 5 Control data MONITOR-CONTROL

MONITOR-CONTROL NSTEP-EXPLICIT

Sets control parameters for solution monitoring.

NSTEP-EXPLICIT [100]
Frequency of solution monitoring in explicit analysis. {1 NSTEP-EXPLICIT 99999}

5-114 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DIAGNOSTICS Sec. 5.10 Solution monitoring

DIAGNOSTICS SOLUTION CONTACT

Provide diagnostic information to the user about the progress of solution, the mesh, the
analysis settings or results.

SOLUTION [NONE]
Diagnostics of solution progress. {NONE/MINIMAL/DETAILED}

NONE No diagnostic checking.

MINIMAL Only critical information is output.

DETAILED Output all detected issues.

Outputs a wide range of information about the progress of solution. Output includes material
points switching from elastic to plastic, contact nodes changing status, loose convergence
tolerances, ATS performance, and matrix ill-conditioning.

CONTACT [NONE]
Diagnostics of contact definitions (at the start of solution){NONE/MINIMAL/DETAILED}

NONE No diagnostic checking.

MINIMAL Only critical information is output.

DETAILED Output all detected issues.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 5-115

Chap. 5 Control data ENERGY

ENERGY PART

egroupi

Specifies the parts for which energies are to be displayed in the Energy View tab of the
ADINA Structures window.

PART [NO]
The parts of the model for which energies are to be displayed.{WHOLE/EG-ALL/EG-
LIST/NO}

WHOLE Displays energies for the whole model only. Energies for individual element
groups and individual contact pairs are not displayed.

EG-ALL Displays energies for the whole model, for all element groups, for all contact
pairs, and for all concentrated masses and dampers.

EG-LIST Displays energies for the whole model, for the element groups listed in
egroup , for all contact pairs, and for all oncentrated masses and dampers.
i

NO No energies are displayed.

egroupi
Specifies the element groups for which energies are to be displayed when PART=EG-LIST.

5-116 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Chapter 6

Geometry definition
SYSTEM Chap. 6 Geometry definition

SYSTEM NAME TYPE MODE XORIGIN YORIGIN ZORIGIN PHI

THETA XSI AX AY AZ BX BY BZ P1 P2 P3 MOVE

SYSTEM defines a local coordinate system. Coordinates of geometry points and nodes,
input via COORDINATES, refer to the current local coordinate system, as defined by the last
preceding use of command SYSTEM. The current system may also be changed via SET
SYSTEM.

NAME [(highest system label number) + 1]

Label number of the local coordinate system. Label number 0 is reserved to identify the
global Cartesian coordinate system, and therefore can be used only with the SET SYSTEM
command you cannot redefine the global system.

ZL ZL
z
r (r, Q, f)
f
(r, Q, z) Q
r

YL YL
XL XL Q

Cylindrical coordinates Spherical coordinates

Relation to the base Relation to the base
local coordinate system: local coordinate system:

XL = z XL = r cosQ sinf
YL = r cosQ YL = r sinQ sinf
ZL = r sinQ ZL = r cosf

TYPE [CARTESIAN]
The type of local coordinate system. Each type has an underlying base Cartesian system
(XL, YL, ZL). See Figure.

CARTESIAN A local Cartesian system, with axes aligned with the

base system (XL, YL, ZL).

CYLINDRICAL A cylindrical local coordinate system with coordinates (r, , z).

SPHERICAL A spherical local coordinate system with coordinates (r, , ).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-3

Chap. 6 Geometry definition SYSTEM

MODE [1]
Selects the method of local coordinate system definition. This controls which parameters
actually define the system other parameters are ignored.

1 System defined by origin and direction vectors (XORIGIN,

YORIGIN, ZORIGIN, AX, AY, AZ, BX, BY, BZ).

2 System defined by origin and Euler angles (XORIGIN,

YORIGIN, ZORIGIN, PHI, THETA, XSI).

3 System defined by three geometry points (P1, P2, P3)

XORIGIN [0.0]
YORIGIN [0.0]
ZORIGIN [0.0]
The global system coordinates of the origin of the local coordinate system.

PHI [0.0]
THETA [0.0]
XSI [0.0]
Euler angles (in degrees) used to define the orientation of the basic system (XL, YL, ZL) with
respect to the global Cartesian coordinate system axes. See Figure. Parameters are used only
when MODE=2.

AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Global system components of a vector along the XL-direction.

BX [0.0]
BY [1.0]
BZ [0.0]
Global system components of a vector in the XL-YL plane.

P1
P2
P3
Label numbers of geometry points which define the local coordinate system. P1 is the origin
of the system, the XL axis is taken from P1 to P2. P3, together with P1, P2, then defines the
XL-YL plane. The YL axis is taken orthogonal to the XL axis and points to the same side as
P3 of the line between P1 and P2. The ZL axis is then defined by the right hand rule, i.e.,
using a cross product of unit vectors along the XL,YL axes.

6-4 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SYSTEM Sec. 6.1 Coordinate systems

MOVE [YES]
If a local coordinate system is redefined, the nodes which refer to this local system would
ordinarily be moved to new global positions, since their coordinates refer to the previous
definition of the local coordinate system. However, when MOVE = NO the nodes can be
made to retain their global position, with their local coordinates modified accordingly. {YES/
NO}

Auxiliary commands

SET SYSTEM NAME [0]

Once a local coordinate system has been defined, it may be selected as being the
currently active system by issuing the command SET SYSTEM. The currently active
system is initially the global Cartesian system.

SHOW SYSTEM
Lists the currently active system.

LIST SYSTEM FIRST LAST

DELETE SYSTEM FIRST LAST

Euler Angles
Z' Z Z'
Y' Y'
PHI THETA
PHI Z''
Y

X, X'
X' THETA
PHI = rotation about X-axis
X''

YL THETA = rotation about Y'-axis

XSI Y'

Z''
XSI

ZL
XSI = rotation about X''-axis

X''=XL

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-5

Chap. 6 Geometry definition COORDINATES POINT

COORDINATES POINT SYSTEM

(ENTRIES NAME X Y Z SYSTEM) (SYSTEM = global Cartesian (0))

(ENTRIES NAME XL YL ZL SYSTEM) (SYSTEM = local Cartesian)
(ENTRIES NAME R THETA XL SYSTEM) (SYSTEM = local cylindrical)
(ENTRIES NAME R THETA PHI SYSTEM) (SYSTEM = local spherical)

ni xi yi zi sysi

COORDINATES POINT defines coordinates for geometry points. The coordinates given refer
to the local system specified by parameter SYSTEM.

SYSTEM [currently active system]

Label number of the required local coordinate system. This specifies the coordinate system
to which any appended data line coordinates refer (and determines which column heading
names are allowed by any ENTRIES data line).

ENTRIES
Defines, as column headings, the input for the subsequent tabular entries. The heading
names depend on the type of local coordinate system specified by parameter SYSTEM.

Note: Less than five entry column headings may be given (e.g., to specify points in a
coordinate plane), with previous values retained for omitted entries, but the
column heading NAME must always be specified.

ni
Label number for the desired geometry point, input under the column heading NAME.

xi [0.0]
yi [0.0]
zi [0.0]
Coordinate values in local coordinate system sysi.

sysi [SYSTEM]
Local coordinate system label number. Note sysi defaults to the system specified by
parameter SYSTEM, which in turn defaults to the currently active coordinate system.

Auxiliary commands

LIST COORDINATES POINT FIRST LAST SYSTEM GLOBAL

Lists the coordinates of geometry points with label numbers in a given range, and
which are defined in terms of a specified local coordinate system. The coordinates may
be listed in terms of the global Cartesian system (GLOBAL = YES). If no range is speci-
fied, only label numbers will be listed.

6-6 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
COORDINATES POINT Sec. 6.2 Points

DELETE COORDINATES POINT FIRST LAST SYSTEM

Deletes all geometry points, and their coordinate data, with label numbers in a given
range. Note that a geometry point will not be deleted if it is referenced by a higher order
geometry entity (e.g. it is the end point of a line), or a node or other model entity is
associated with that point.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-7

Chap. 6 Geometry definition POINT BETWEEN

POINT BETWEEN TYPE P1 P2 OPTION NPOINTS UPOINT PCOINCIDE

PCTOLERANCE

Creates geometry points between P1 and P2.

TYPE [POINT]
Specifies whether P1 and P2 are geometry points or nodes. {POINT/NODE}

POINT P1 and P2 are geometry points.

NODE P1 and P2 are nodes.

P1
P2
Label numbers of the geometry points (if TYPE=POINT) or the nodes (if TYPE=NODE).

OPTION [EQUAL]
pecifies whether the created geometry points are equally spaced between P1 and P2 or at a
specified location between P1 and P2. {EQUAL/PARAMETER}

EQUAL The created geometry points are equally spaced between P1 and P2.

PARAMETER The created geometry point is at the location specified by the parameter
value UPOINT between P1 and P2.

NPOINTS [1]
Number of geometry points to be created. This parameter is only used when OPTION =
EQUAL.

UPOINT [0.5]
A parameter value that specifies the location of the created geometry point between P1 and
P2. The parameter value can range between 0.0 (point P1) to 1.0 (point P2), but cannot be 0.0
or 1.0. This parameter is only used when OPTION = PARAMETER.

PCOINCIDE [YES]
This parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing geometry point
coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new geometry point (with
a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}

PCTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

6-8 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
POINT BETWEEN Sec. 6.2 Points

Example 1
The following commands give the results shown in the figures below.

POINT BETWEEN TYPE=POINT P1=5 P2=11 OPTION= EQUAL NPOINTS=3

P11

P5

Example 2

POINT BETWEEN TYPE=POINT P1=5 P2=11 OPTION=PARAMETER UPOINT=0.25

We note that:

1. In the above examples, the created geometry points are shown in red.

2. The created geometry points are labelled as: [highest existing label + 1].

P11

P5

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-9

Chap. 6 Geometry definition POINT CENTER

POINT CENTER TYPE P1 P2 P3 PCOINCIDE PCTOLERANCE

Creates a geometry point that lies at the center of the circle that passes through P1, P2, P3.

TYPE [POINT]
Specifies whether P1, P2 and P3 are geometry points or nodes. {POINT/NODE}

POINT P1, P2 and P3 are geometry points.

NODE P1, P2 and P3 are nodes.

P1, P2, P3
Label numbers of the geometry points (if TYPE=POINT) or the nodes (if TYPE=NODE) that
define the circle.

PCOINCIDE [YES]
This parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing geometry point
coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new geometry point (with
a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}

PCTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

P5

P11
P3

Example
The following command gives the result shown in the figure below.

POINT CENTER TYPE=POINT P1=3 P2=5 P3=11

We note that:
1. In the above example, the created geometry point is shown in red.
2. The created geometry points are labelled as: [highest existing label + 1].

6-10 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
POINT NODE Sec. 6.2 Points

POINT NODE PCOINCIDE PCTOLERANCE

nodei

Creates geometry points at nodal locations.

PCOINCIDE [YES]
This parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing geometry point
coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new geometry point (with
a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}

PCTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

nodei
Label numbers of the nodes where geometry points are to be created.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-11

Chap. 6 Geometry definition POINT LINE

POINT LINE LINE OPTION NPOINTS UPOINT PCOINCIDE PCTOLERANCE

Creates geometry points along a geometry line.

LINE
Label number of the geometry line.

OPTION [EQUAL]
Specifies whether the created geometry points are equally spaced along the line or at a
specified location. {EQUAL/PARAMETER}

EQUAL The created geometry points are equally spaced along the geometry line.

PARAMETER The created geometry point is at the location specified by the parameter
value UPOINT.

NPOINTS [1]
Number of geometry points to be created. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=EQUAL.

UPOINT [0.5]
A parameter value that specifies the location of the created geometry point. The parameter
value can range between 0.0 (the start point of the geometry line) to 1.0 (the end point of the
geometry line), but cannot be 0.0 or 1.0. This parameter is only used when OPTION = PA-
RAMETER.

PCOINCIDE [YES]
This parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing geometry point
coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new geometry point (with
a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}

PCTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

Example

The following shows the result when OPTION=EQUAL and NPOINTS=1, 2,and 3.

6-12 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
POINT LINE Sec. 6.2 Points

NPOINTS=1 NPOINTS=2 NPOINTS=3

The following shows the result when OPTION=PARAMETER and UPOINT=0.25.

We note that:

1. In the above examples, the created geometry points are shown in red.
2. The created geometry points are labelled as: [highest existing label + 1].

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-13

Chap. 6 Geometry definition POINT EDGE

POINT EDGE BODY EDGE OPTION NPOINTS UPOINT SPLIT PCOINCIDE

PCTOLERANCE

Creates geometry points along an edge of a (ADINA-M Parasolid or Open Cascade) body.

BODY
Label number of the body containing the edge.

EDGE
Label number of the edge.

OPTION [EQUAL]
Specifies whether the geometry points are equally spaced along the edge of the body or at a specified
location. {EQUAL/PARAMETER}

EQUAL The created geometry points are equally spaced along the edge.

PARAMETER The created geometry point is at the location specified by the parameter
value UPOINT.

NPOINTS [1]
Number of geometry points to be created. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=EQUAL.

UPOINT [0.5]
A parameter value that specifies the location of the created geometry point. The parameter
value can range between 0.0 (the start point of the geometry line) to 1.0 (the end point of the
geometry line), but cannot be 0.0 or 1.0. This parameter is only used when OPTION = PA-
RAMETER.

SPLIT [NO]
Specifies whether the edge of the body is split at the geometry points. This parameter is active only
when OPTION=PARAMETER. {NO/YES}

PCOINCIDE [YES]
This parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing geometry point
coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new geometry point (with
a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}

PCTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

6-14 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
POINT EDGE Sec. 6.2 Points

Example

The following shows the result when OPTION=EQUAL and NPOINTS=1, 2,and 3.

NPOINTS=1 NPOINTS=2 NPOINTS=3

The following shows the result when OPTION=PARAMETER and UPOINT=0.25.

We note that:

1. In the above examples, the created geometry points are shown in red.
2. The created geometry points are labelled as: [highest existing label + 1].

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-15

Chap. 6 Geometry definition LINE STRAIGHT

LINE STRAIGHT NAME P1 P2

LINE STRAIGHT defines a straight geometry line between two geometry points.

P2 (u = 1)

P1 (u = 0)

NAME [(current highest geometry line label number) + 1]

Label number of the straight geometry line to be defined.

P1
P2
Label numbers of the geometry points which are the ends of the straight geometry line. The
label numbers P1, P2 must be distinct, but the points may be coincident. A null geometry
line is defined by this command when the end points P1, P2 are coincident, i.e., they have
identical global coordinates. The line has zero length, but may be used in mesh generation,
yielding coincident nodes and zero length element edges.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LINE STRAIGHT FIRST LAST

DELETE LINE STRAIGHT FIRST LAST

COPY LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION NEWNAME PCOINCIDE

PTOLERANCE
Copies line NAME to NEWNAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end-
points of the new line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

MOVE LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE

Moves line NAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end points of the
moved line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

6-16 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE ARC Sec. 6.3 Lines

LINE ARC NAME MODE P1 P2 P3 CENTER RADIUS ANGLE CHORD

PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE MODIFY-LINES DELETE-POINTS

linei

P2 (u = 1)

P3 (Mode = 4, 5, 6)
Chord
P3 (Mode = 2)

Angle Radius
u

P1 (u = 0)

Center

LINE ARC defines a geometry line as a circular arc, or as an arc with varying radius.

NAME [(current highest line label number) + 1]

Label number of the arc geometry line.

MODE [1]
Selects the method of arc geometry line definition. This controls which parameters actually
define the arc, other parameters are ignored. See Figure. {1/2/3/4/5/6/7}

1 Arc defined by start point, end point, and center (P1, P2, CENTER).

2 Arc defined by start point, end point, and intermediate point (P1, P2, P3).

3 Arc defined by start point, center, included angle, and a point defining the
plane of the arc (P1, CENTER, ANGLE, P3).

4 Arc defined by start point, center, chord length, and a point defining the
plane of the arc (P1, CENTER, CHORD, P3).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-17

Chap. 6 Geometry definition LINE ARC

5 Arc defined by start point, end point, radius, and a point defining the
plane of the arc (P1, P2, RADIUS, P3).

6 Arc defined by start point, end point, included angle, and a point defining
the plane of the arc (P1, P2, ANGLE, P3).

7 Arc defined by two co-planar, non-parallel straight or extruded lines and

radius (RADIUS).

P1
Label number of the geometry point at the start of the arc geometry line.

P2
Label number of the geometry point at the end of the arc geometry line.

P3
Label number of a geometry point either through which the arc geometry line passes (MODE
= 2), or, together with the start point and end point or center, defines the plane of the arc
(MODE = 3,4,5,6).

Note: P3 = 0 corresponds to the origin of the currently active local coordinate system.

CENTER
Label number of the geometry point at the center of the arc geometry line.

RADIUS
Radius of the arc geometry line.

ANGLE
Included angle of the arc geometry line.

CHORD
Chord length of the arc geometry line.

PCOINCIDE [YES]
If MODE > 1 then a geometry point will be located at the center or end of the arc. This
parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing geometry point coordi-
nates, and use an existing point (YES), rather than generate a new geometry point (with a
new label) (NO). {YES/NO}

PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

6-18 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE ARC Sec. 6.3 Lines

MODIFY-LINES [YES]
Indicates whether or not lines will be modified in order to connect with the created arc. This
parameter is used only when MODE=7. {YES/NO}

DELETE-POINTS [YES]
Indicates whether or not the original points on lines should be deleted if these points are not
used after lines are modified. This parameter is used only when MODE=7 and MODIFY-
LINES=YES. {YES/NO}

linei
Label number of the lines to define the arc (MODE=7).

Notes:

All MODES

All geometry points referenced by this command P1, P2, P3, CENTER must be distinct.
Thus the arc is open to define a complete (closed) circle, command LINE CIRCLE should be
used.

MODE = 1

The arc defined is circular only if P1 and P2 are equidistant from CENTER otherwise an arc
is defined in which the radius is linearly interpolated across the included angle.

The points P1, P2, and CENTER must not be collinear. The included angle is always chosen
to be less than 180 degrees thus a different mode should be used if a semi-circle or an arc
subtending an angle greater than 180 degrees is required.

No other geometry points are required; the chord length, included angle, and radius (for a
circular arc) are calculated.

MODE = 2

The arc is defined to pass through the intermediate point P3. A point at the center of the arc
is generated. Parameter CENTER may be used to specify the label number of a newly
generated point it defaults to the next highest label number. If so specified, however,
CENTER must not be the label number of an existing geometry point. Furthermore, if
PCOINCIDE = YES and a geometry point already exists at the arc center the coincidence
check is governed by the tolerance value PTOLERANCE then that geometry point will be
taken to be the center of the arc, ignoring any label specified via parameter CENTER.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-19

Chap. 6 Geometry definition LINE ARC

The points P1, P2, and P3 must not be collinear.

MODE = 3

The plane of the arc is defined by the points P1, CENTER, and P3, which must not be col-
linear. Furthermore, ANGLE is measured positive in the direction from P1 to P3.

A point at the end of the arc is generated. Parameter P2 may be used to specify the label
number of a newly generated point it defaults to the next highest label number. If so
specified, however, P2 must not be the label number of an existing geometry point. Further-
more, if PCOINCIDE = YES and a geometry point already exists at the end of the arc the
coincidence check is governed by the tolerance value PTOLERANCE then that geometry
point will be taken to be the end of the arc, ignoring any label specified via parameter P2.

MODE = 4

The plane of the arc is defined by the points P1, CENTER, and P3, which must not be col-
linear. Furthermore, the end point of the arc is taken to be the same side of the line between
the points P1 and CENTER as the point P3.

A point at the end of the arc is generated see MODE = 3.

MODE = 5

The plane of the arc is defined by the points P1, P2 and P3, which must not be collinear. The
center of the arc is taken to be the same side of the line between the points P1 and P2 as the
point P3.

A point at the center of the arc is generated see MODE = 2.

MODE = 6

The plane of the arc is defined by the points P1, P2, and P3, which must not be collinear.
Furthermore, ANGLE is measured positive in the direction from P1 to P3.

A point at the center of the arc is generated see MODE = 2.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LINE ARC FIRST LAST

DELETE LINE ARC FIRST LAST

6-20 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE ARC Sec. 6.3 Lines

COPY LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION NEWNAME PCOINCIDE

PTOLERANCE
Copies line NAME to NEWNAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end-
points of the new line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

MOVE LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE

Moves line NAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end points of the
move line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-21

Chap. 6 Geometry definition LINE CIRCLE

LINECIRCLE NAME MODE P1 P2 P3 CENTER RADIUS PCOINCIDE

PTOLERANCE

LINE CIRCLE defines a circle geometry line.

P3 (Mode = 1,3)
P3 (Mode = 2)

Radius

P1 P2 (Mode = 3)

Center

P2 (Mode = 2)

NAME [(current highest geometry line label number) + 1]

Label number of the circle to be defined.

MODE [1]
Selects the method of circle definition. This controls which parameters actually define the
circle, other parameters are ignored. See Figure.

1 Circle defined by center, starting point, and a point defining the plane of
the circle (CENTER, P1, P3).

2 Circle defined through three points (P1, P2, P3).

3 Circle defined by center, radius, and by two points one defining the
pole direction (which intersects the circle at its starting point), and the
other defining the plane of the circle (CENTER, RADIUS, P2, P3).

6-22 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE CIRCLE Sec. 6.3 Lines

P1
P2
P3
Label numbers of the geometry points which define the circle.

CENTER
Label number of a geometry point at the center of the circle.

RADIUS
The radius of the circle.

PCOINCIDE [YES]
A geometry point will be located at the center (MODE = 2), or the starting point (MODE = 3)
of the circle. This parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing geom-
etry point coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new geometry
point (with a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}

PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

Note: A circle is a closed geometry line, a circular arc may be defined by command LINE
ARC.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LINE CIRCLE FIRST LAST

DELETE LINE CIRCLE FIRST LAST

COPY LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION NEW NAME PCOINCIDE

PTOLERANCE
Copies line NAME to NEWNAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end
points of the new line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

MOVE LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE

Move line name via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end points of the
moved line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-23

Chap. 6 Geometry definition

This page intentionally left blank

6-24 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE CURVILINEAR Sec. 6.3 Lines

LINE CURVILINEAR NAME P1 P2 SYSTEM ANGLE

LINE CURVILINEAR defines a geometry line as an interpolated curve in a given local

coordinate system; coordinates of points on the curve are linearly interpolated between two
geometry points.

P2 ( h21, h22, h23 )

ZL
j
u h i = curvilinear
coordinates

YL
XL
P1 ( h11, h12, h13 )

ZL ZL

P1, P2
P1, P2
R

Q R
YL
YL XL
XL
R,Q constant f R,f constant

P1 = P2, ANGLE = THETA

P1 = P2, ANGLE = PHI

NAME [(current highest geometry line label number) + 1]

Label number of the curvilinear geometry line to be defined.

P1
P2
Label numbers of the geometry points which are the ends of the curvilinear geometry line.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-25

Chap. 6 Geometry definition LINE CURVILINEAR

SYSTEM [current coordinate system]

The label number of a coordinate system in which the curve is to be interpolated.

ANGLE [THETA]
In the case of a spherical coordinate system, if P1 = P2, a circle will be generated by interpo-
lating through 360 in one of the coordinate angles. This parameter selects which angle to
use. See Figure. {THETA/PHI}

Note: The geometry line will be a circle in the case where P1 = P2 with a cylindrical or
spherical coordinate system. In the case of a Cartesian local system (including the
global system) P1 = P2 is not allowed, and the geometry line will be straight.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LINE CURVILINEAR FIRST LAST

DELETE LINE CURVILINEAR FIRST LAST

COPY LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION NEWNAME PCOINCIDE

PTOLERANCE
Copies line NAME to NEWNAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end-
points of the new line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

MOVE LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE

Moves line NAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end points of the
moved line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

6-26 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
KNOTS Sec. 6.3 Lines

KNOTS NAME NKNOTS

i ui

Defines a vector of knot values to be used for non-uniform rational B-spline definition, see
LINE POLYLINE (TYPE=NURBS).

NAME [(current highest knot vector label )+ 1]

Label number of the knot vector.

NKNOTS
The number of input knot values. { 4 }

i
Index of the input knot value. { 1 i NKNOTS }

ui [0.0]
Knot value for index i.

Auxiliary commands

LIST KNOTS FIRST LAST

DELETE KNOTS FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-27

Chap. 6 Geometry definition LINE POLYLINE

LINE POLYLINE NAME TYPE DEGREE KNOTS

pointi tangxi tangyi tangzi (TYPE = BIARC)

pointi weighti (TYPE = NURBS)

pointi (TYPE = SEGMENTED, QBSPLINE,

CBSPLINE, BEZIER, SPINE)

LINE POLYLINE defines a geometry line as a polyline, i.e., a curve controlled by a series of
geometry points.

SEGMENTED

QBSPLINE

CBSPLINE

BIARC

BEZIER

SPLINE

6-28 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE POLYLINE Sec. 6.3 Lines

NAME [(current highest geometry line label number) + 1]

Label number of the polyline geometry line to be defined.

TYPE [SEGMENTED]
Selects the type of curve to be defined.

SEGMENTED The points are connected in sequence by a series of straight line

segments. At least two points must be specified.

QBSPLINE A quadratic B-spline is derived from the control points. Note that
the curve passes through the first and last points but not neces-
sarily through the intervening control points. At least three points
must be specified.

CBSPLINE A cubic B-spline is derived from the control points. Note that the
curve passes through the first and last points but not necessarily
through the intervening control points. At least four points must
be specified.

BIARC Each consecutive pair of points is connected by two circular arcs.

The tangent direction of the curve may be specified at any given
point. The tangent directions are otherwise calculated by the
program. At least three non-collinear points must be specified.
Furthermore, all the control points must lie in the same plane, and
any specified tangent vector must also lie in that plane an error
message is given if either of these conditions is violated.

BEZIER A Bezier curve is derived from the control points. Note that the
curve passes through the first and last points but not necessarily
through the intervening control points. At least three points must
be specified.

NURBS A non-uniform rational B-spline curve is derived from the control

points, weights, and knots.

SPLINE A spline is derivied from the control points. Note that the
curvarture of curve is continous at these points. At least two
points must be specified.

DEGREE
The degree of the B-spline basis functions, must be input for TYPE = NURBS.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-29

Chap. 6 Geometry definition LINE POLYLINE

KNOTS
The label number of the knot vector (see command KNOTS). The total number of knots used
in the spline definition must equal (DEGREE+(number of control points)+1).

pointi
Label number of geometry point used to interpolate/control the desired curve. The data lines
are input in the order of the sequence of points.

tangxi [0.0]
tangyi [0.0]
tangzi [0.0]
Vector specifying, with reference to the global Cartesian coordinate system, the tangent
direction to the curve at point pointi . This vector only influences the shape of the polyline
of type BIARC. Input of tangxi = tangyi = tangzi = 0.0 will result in the program automati-
cally calculating the tangent direction from the slope of the quadratic curve interpolated
through the point and its immediate neighbors in the sequence.

Note: A polyline may be closed be selecting the first and last points in the sequence to refer
to the same geometry point.

Note: For BIARC interpolation a straight line segment may be defined by making the
tangent line at a point pass through its neighbor point.

weighti
The weight at each control point.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LINE POLYLINE FIRST LAST

DELETE LINE POLYLINE FIRST LAST

COPY LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION NEWNAME PCOINCIDE

PTOLERANCE
Copies line NAME to NEWNAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end
points of the new line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

MOVE LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE

Moves line NAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end points of the
moved line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

6-30 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE SECTION Sec. 6.3 Lines

LINE SECTION NAME PARENT USTART UEND PCOINCIDE

PTOLERANCE COUPLED P1 P2

LINE SECTION defines a geometry line to be part of another geometry line.

up = 1

up =
USTART up =
UEND
P1
u P2
(u = 0) (u = 1)
up = 0

NAME [(current highest geometry line label number) + 1]

Label number of the section geometry line to be defined.

PARENT
The line upon which the section line is defined.

USTART [0.0]
The line parameter (0.0 USTART 1.0) indicating the starting position on the line
PARENT.

UEND [1.0]
The line parameter (0.0 UEND 1.0) indicating the end position on the line PARENT.

PCOINCIDE [YES]
This parameter indicates whether or not to check the location of the section line end points
against existing geometry point coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than
generate a new geometry point (with a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}

PTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

COUPLED [YES]
If COUPLED=YES, then the parent line cannot be modified. {YES/NO}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-31

Chap. 6 Geometry definition LINE SECTION

P1 [0]
Label number of the geometry point corresponding to USTART.

P2 [0]
Label number of the geometry point corresponding to UEND.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LINE SECTION FIRST LAST

DELETE LINE SECTION FIRST LAST

COPY LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION NEWNAME PCOINCIDE

PTOLERANCE
Copies line NAME to NEWNAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end
points of the new line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

MOVE LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE

Moves line NAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end points of the
moved line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

6-32 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE COMBINED Sec. 6.3 Lines

LINE COMBINED NAME COUPLED

linei

LINE COMBINED defines a geometry line as a combination of other geometry lines. The
defining or parent lines must form a connected sequence. The combined line may be
closed, by virtue of having connected first and last line subsegments.

(u = 1)
L2 P2

L1 u
(u = 0)
P1 P3
LINE COMBINED L1 // L2

NAME [(current highest geometry line label number) + 1]

Label number of the combined geometry line to be defined.

COUPLED [YES]
If COUPLED=YES, then the parent line cannot be modified. {YES/NO}

linei
Label number of a parent geometry line.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LINE COMBINED FIRST LAST

DELETE LINE COMBINED FIRST LAST

COPY LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION NEWNAME PCOINCIDE

PTOLERANCE
Copies line NAME to NEWNAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end
point of the new line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

MOVE LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE

Moves line NAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end points of the
moved line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-33

Chap. 6 Geometry definition LINE REVOLVED

LINE REVOLVED NAME MODE POINT ANGLE SYSTEM AXIS ALINE

AP1 AP2 X0 Y0 Z0 XA YA ZA PCOINCIDE
PTOLERANCE

LINE REVOLVED defines a geometry line (a circular arc) by rotating a geometry point about
an axis.

AXIS
P2 (u = 1)

ANGLE POINT (u = 0)

NAME [(current highest geometry line label number) + 1]

Label number of the revolved geometry line.

MODE [AXIS]
Selects the method of defining the axis of revolution used to define the geometry line. This
controls which parameters actually define the revolved line, other parameters are ignored.

AXIS The axis of revolution is taken as a given axis of a coordinate

system. (POINT, ANGLE, SYSTEM, AXIS).

LINE The axis of revolution is taken as the straight line between the
end points of a given geometry line (which is not necessarily
straight, but must be open i.e., have non-coincident end points).
(POINT, ANGLE, ALINE).

POINTS The axis of revolution is taken as the straight line between two
given (non-coincident) geometry points. (POINT, ANGLE, AP1,
AP2).

VECTORS The axis of revolution is defined by a position vector and a

direction vector. (POINT, ANGLE, X0, Y0, Z0, XA, YA, ZA).

6-34 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE REVOLVED Sec. 6.3 Lines

POINT
Label number of the initial geometry point to be rotated about the desired axis.

ANGLE
Angle of rotation (in degrees). Note ANGLE must be in the range -360 ANGLE 360
(with ANGLE = 360 or -360 defining a closed line, i.e., a circle). The sign of the angle is
given by considering the right hand rule i.e., if you curl your fingers around the axis of
revolution, with the thumb pointing along the axis, then a positive angle is in the direction of
the curl of the fingers.

SYSTEM [currently active coordinate system]

Label number of a coordinate system. One of the axes of this coordinate system may be used
to define the axis of revolution, via parameter AXIS, when MODE = AXIS.

AXIS [XL]
Selects which of the base axes (XL, YL, ZL) of the local coordinate system, given by param-
eter SYSTEM, is used as the axis of revolution. {XL/YL/ZL}

ALINE
Label number of a geometry line which defines the axis of revolution. The direction of the
axis is taken from the start point of the line to the end point of the line.

AP1, AP2
Label numbers of geometry points which define the axis of revolution. The direction of the
axis is taken from point AP1 to point AP2.

X0 [0.0]
Y0 [0.0]
Z0 [0.0]
Global coordinates of the position vector defining a point on the axis of rotation when MODE
= VECTORS.

XA [1.0]
YA [0.0]
ZA [0.0]
Components (with respect to the global coordinate system) of the axis of rotation when
MODE = VECTORS.

PCOINCIDE [YES]
A geometry point is to be located at the other end of the line from the initial point given by
POINT. This parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing geometry
point coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new geometry point
(with a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-35

Chap. 6 Geometry definition LINE REVOLVED

PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LINE REVOLVED FIRST LAST

DELETE LINE REVOLVED FIRST LAST

COPY LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION NEWNAME PCOINCIDE

PTOLERANCE
Copies line NAME to NEWNAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end
points of the new line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

MOVE LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE

Moves line NAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end points of the
moved line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

6-36 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE EXTRUDED Sec. 6.3 Lines

LINE EXTRUDED NAME POINT DX DY DZ SYSTEM PCOINCIDE

PTOLERANCE

LINE EXTRUDED defines a geometry line by displacing a geometry point in a given direction.

ZL P2 (u = 1)
P2 = POINT+ (DX, DY)

YL
POINT: (u = 0)
XL

NAME [(current highest geometry line label number) + 1]

Label number of the extruded geometry line.

POINT
Label number of the initial geometry point to be displaced.

DX [1.0]
DY [0.0]
DZ [0.0]
Components of displacement vector with reference to the base coordinates (XL, YL, ZL) of
system SYSTEM. Note that this is the actual displacement vector, i.e., it specifies both
magnitude and direction.

SYSTEM [currently active coordinate system]

Label number of a coordinate system which is referenced by the displacement vector (DX,
DY, DZ).

PCOINCIDE [YES]
A geometry point is to be located at the other end of the line from the initial point given by
POINT. This parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing geometry
point coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new geometry point
(with a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}

PTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-37

Chap. 6 Geometry definition LINE EXTRUDED

Auxiliary commands

LIST LINE EXTRUDED FIRST LAST

DELETE LINE EXTRUDED FIRST LAST

COPY LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION NEWNAME PCOINCIDE

PTOLERANCE
Copies line NAME to NEWNAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end
points of the new line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

MOVE LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE

Moves line NAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end points of the
moved line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

6-38 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE TRANSFORMED Sec. 6.3 Lines

LINE TRANSFORMED NAME PARENT TRANSFORMATION

PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE NCOPY MESH
EGROUP NOCOINCIDE NTOLERANCE

linei

LINE TRANSFORMED defines a geometry line to be a geometrical transformation of another

(existing) geometry line. The transformed geometry line is identified by its label number
NAME. If NCOPY is greater than 1, the other newly defined transformed geometry lines are
identified by the current highest geometry line label number + 1.

NAME [(current highest geometry line label number) + 1]

Label number of the transformed geometry line.

PARENT
The existing geometry line.

TRANSFORMATION
Label number of a geometrical transformation, see TRANSFORMATION.

PCOINCIDE [NO]
This parameter indicates whether or not to check the location of the transformed line end
points against existing geometry point coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather
than generate a new geometry point (with a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}

PTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

NCOPY [1]
Parameter defines number of lines to be generated by the transformation - transformation is
repeated NCOPY times.

MESH [NO]
Indicates whether or not the mesh will be also transformed. {YES/NO}

Note that only transformations consisting of a single translation, or a sequence of transla-

tions, or a single rotation are available for mesh transformation. In mesh transformation, all
kinds of meshes lying on the individual current transformation geometry will be transformed.

EGROUP [0]
Specify element group for transformed elements. If EGROUP=0, (current highest egroup label
+ 1) will be used.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-39

Chap. 6 Geometry definition LINE TRANSFORMED

NCOINCIDE [NO]
This parameter indicates whether the locations of new nodes generated are compared with
existing nodes. If NCOINCIDE=YES, then the location of generated generated nodes will be
checked against existing nodes. For each generated node, if it lies within the tolerance
(specified by NTOLERANCE) of an existing node, no new node will be created. {YES/NO}

NTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If NCOINCIDE=YES this parameter provides a tolerance for checking the global coordinates
of a location against existing nodes.

linei
Line label number to be transformed.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LINE TRANSFORMED FIRST LAST

DELETE LINE TRANSFORMED FIRST LAST

COPY LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION NEWNAME PCOINCIDE

PTOLERANCE
Copies line NAME to NEWNAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end
point of the new line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

MOVE LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE

Moves line NAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end points of the
moved line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.

6-40 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE EDGE Sec. 6.3 Lines

LINE EDGE NAME DELETE-BODY NPTS REVERSE LINE-TYPE

edgei bodyi

Converts an edge of a (ADINA-M Parasolid or Open Cascade) body into a geometry line.

NAME [(current highest geometry line label number) + 1]

Label number of the transformed geometry line to be created.

DELETE-BODY [NO]
Indicates whether the body will be deleted after executing this command. {YES/NO}

NPTS [3]
The number of intermediate points used for interpolating the edge that is not straight or not
arcs.

REVERSE [NO]
Reverses the orientation of the line. {NO/YES}

LINE-TYPE [BIARC-SEGMENT]
This parameter specifies the line type when line is created. {BIARC-SEGMENT/SPLINE}

BIARC-SEGMENT If line type is neither straight nor arc, polyline bi-arc is used when
all the control points are co-planar and polyline segmented is used
when the control points are not co-planar.

SPLINE If the line type is neither straight nor arc, polyline spline is used.

edgei
Label number of a geometry edge.

bodyi
Label number of the geometry body corresponding to edgei.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-41

Chap. 6 Geometry definition

This page intentionally left blank

6-42 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SPLIT-LINE Sec. 6.3 Lines

SPLIT-LINE NAME USPLIT LINE1 LINE2 COUPLED

SPLIT-LINE creates two geometry lines of type SECTION by splitting a given line into two
parts connected at some point on the given line, specified via a parameter value along the
line.

P2 (u = 1)

LINE 1

u LINE 2
u = USPLIT

P1 (u = 0)

NAME
Label number of the geometry line to be split. Note that this line is not altered by this
command. Two new lines are created coincident with the line NAME.

USPLIT [0.5]
A parameter value indicating the point along line NAME at which splitting takes place. The
parameter value can range between 0.0 (the starting point of line NAME) to 1.0 (the end
point of line NAME), but cannot be 0.0 or 1.0, i.e., the splitting point on the line must
create two new lines of non-zero length.

LINE1 [(highest line label number) + 1]

The label number of the new line created ranging from the starting point of line NAME (u =
0.0) to the splitting point (u = USPLIT). Note that LINE1 must not have been previously
defined.

LINE2 [(highest line label number) + 2]

The label number of the new line created ranging from the splitting point (u = USPLIT) to the
end point (u = 1.0) of line NAME. Note that LINE2 must not have been previously defined.

COUPLED [YES]
If COUPLED=YES, then the parent line cannot be modified. {YES/NO}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-43

Chap. 6 Geometry definition LNTHICKNESS

LNTHICKNESS

linei thicki dthick1i dthick2i

LNTHICKNESS defines line thicknesses (useful for defining axisymmetric shell thicknesses,
for example).

u
thic
k+

ick2
P1
P2
dthi

dth
ck 1

k+
thic
linei
The line label number.

thicki [0.0]
The line thickness.

dthick1i [0.0]
The deviation of the thickness at the start point of linei.

dthick2i [0.0]
The deviation of the thickness at the end point of linei.

Note: For a constant thickness only the data line entry thicki need be specified. The
thickness may be varied linearly along the line by specifying non-zero deviations
and the ends of the line.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LNTHICKNESS FIRST LAST

DELETE LNTHICKNESS FIRST LAST

6-44 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SURFACE PATCH Sec. 6.4 Surfaces

SURFACE PATCH NAME EDGE1 EDGE2 EDGE3 EDGE4

SURFACE PATCH defines a geometry surface to be bounded by edges which are specified
geometry lines.

P2 EDGE1
P1

EDGE2

v
EDGE4

P3
u
EDGE3
P4

NAME [(current highest geometry surface label number) + 1]

Label number of the geometry surface.

EDGE1 [existing surface edge, if any]

EDGE2
EDGE3
EDGE4
Label numbers of geometry lines comprising edges of the geometry surface. To indicate a
missing edge, either the corresponding parameter is not specified or, equivalently, a zero label
number may be given. See Figure. Note: The edge geometry lines must form a connected
sequence, i.e., their end points must match. Otherwise an error condition results.

At least two edges must be specified. If two adjacent edges are specified, then a unique
connecting edge is searched for to form a triangular surface patch. If two opposite edges
(EDGE1 and EDGE3, or EDGE2 and EDGE4) are specified then the missing two edges are
searched for to form a quadrilateral surface patch, unless the given edges are connected, in
which case a single connecting edge is searched for to yield a triangular surface patch. If
three edges are specified, then a unique connecting edge is searched for, unless the three
edges by virtue of their connection already form a triangular surface patch.
In each case of a missing edge, if no line is found to represent the surface edge, then a
straight line will be created with label number incremented from the current highest line label
number.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-45

Chap. 6 Geometry definition SURFACE PATCH

If more than one line could represent the missing surface edge, then a warning message is
given with no surface created.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SURFACE FIRST LAST

DELETE SURFACE FIRST LAST OPTION

When deleting surfaces, OPTION = ALL will delete any vertex points or edge lines
which have no other dependent geometry; otherwise (OPTION = SURFACE), only the
surface itself will be deleted.

6-46 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SURFACE VERTEX Sec. 6.4 Surfaces

SURFACE VERTEX NAME P1 P2 P3 P4 EDGE1 EDGE2 EDGE3 EDGE4

SURFACE VERTEX defines a geometry surface to be bounded by edges which are specified
by their end geometry points the vertices of the surface. This command is similar to
SURFACE PATCH the underlying surface representation is identical only the method of
definition differs. If no geometry line exists between adjacent geometry points, then the
command will automatically generate straight geometry lines between the appropriate
geometry point pairs.

P2 EDGE1
P1
EDGE2
v
EDGE4

P3
u
EDGE3
P4

EDGE1
P2 P1 (P4)

EDGE2
EDGE3

v u

P3

NAME [(highest geometry surface label number) + 1]

Label number of the geometry surface.

P1, P2, P3, P4

Label numbers of geometry points which are the vertices of the geometry surface. See
Figure. P1, P2, P3 must be specified, and correspond to existing geometry points. A triangu-
lar surface patch is defined by repeating one pair of consecutive points (i.e., P2 = P1, P3 = P2,
P4 = P3, or P1 = P4). Note that P4 defaults to P1, automatically giving a triangular surface
patch if only P1, P2, P3 are specified.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-47

Chap. 6 Geometry definition SURFACE VERTEX

EDGEi [existing surface edges, if any]

Label numbers of the surface edges (i = 1, 2, 3, 4), i.e., geometry lines, input if required see
below. The parameters are related to the surface vertices as follows:

EDGE1 Line from P1 to P2.

EDGE2 Line from P2 to P3.

EDGE3 Line from P3 to P4.

EDGE4 Line from P4 to P1.

If a pair of adjacent vertices is not connected by a geometry line, then a new straight line is
generated between them. The label number of the new edge is given by the appropriate
EDGEi parameter. Note that in this case the parameter must not refer to an existing line. If no
label is given then the highest line label number successively incremented by 1 is used.

If more than one line connects a pair of adjacent vertices, then the choice of line may be made
via the appropriate EDGEi parameter. In this case the parameter must refer to one of the lines
connecting the relevant pair of vertices.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SURFACE FIRST LAST

DELETE SURFACE FIRST LAST OPTION

When deleting surfaces, OPTION = ALL will delete any vertex points or edge lines
which have no other dependent geometry; otherwise (OPTION = SURFACE), only the
surface itself will be deleted.

6-48 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SURFACE GRID Sec. 6.4 Surfaces

SURFACE GRID NAME MPOINT NPOINT TYPE EDGE1 EDGE2 EDGE3

EDGE4

1 1 point1

...

irowi jcoli pointi

...

MPOINT NPOINT pointMN

SURFACE GRID defines a geometry surface as a grid (array) of geometry points, which
control the shape of the surface.

NAME [(current highest geometry surface label number) + 1]

Label number of the geometry surface to be defined.

MPOINT [4]
Number of rows in the array of surface grid control points.

NPOINT [4]
Number of columns in the array of surface grid control points.

TYPE [POLYFACE]
Selects the type of surface to be defined.

POLYFACE The grid of control points is connected by a quadrilateral polygo

nal mesh. MPOINT and NPOINT each have a minimum value of
2 for this surface type.

QBSPLINE A quadratic B-spline surface is derived from the grid of control

points. MPOINT and NPOINT each have a minimum value of 3
for this surface type.

CBSPLINE A cubic B-spline surface is derived from the grid of control

points. MPOINT and NPOINT each have a minimum value of 4
for this surface type.

BEZIER A Bezier surface is derived from the grid of control points.

MPOINT and NPOINT each have a minimum value of 3 for this
surface type.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-49

Chap. 6 Geometry definition SURFACE GRID

EDGEi [existing edge surfaces, if any]

Label numbers of the surface edges (i = 1, 2, 3, 4), i.e., geometry lines, input if required see
below. The parameters are related to the surface control points as follows (see Figure):

EDGE1 Polyline defined by points (i, j): i = MPOINT, j = 1, 2, ..., NPOINT

EDGE2 polyline defined by points (i, j): i = 1, 2, ..., MPOINT, jcol = 1

EDGE3 polyline defined by points (i, j): i = 1, j = 1, 2, ..., NPOINT

EDGE4 polyline defined by points (i, j): i = 1,2,...,MPOINT, jcol = NPOINT

If a set of edge control points does not already define a polyline of the corresponding type
(see note and table below) then a new polyline is generated. The label number of the new
edge is given by the appropriate EDGEi parameter. Note that in this case the parameter must
not refer to an existing line. If no label is given then the highest line label number succes-
sively incremented by 1 is used.

If more than one polyline of the corresponding type is defined by a set of edge control
points, then the choice of polyline is made via the appropriate EDGEi parameter. In this case
the parameter must refer to one of the polylines defined by the relevant set of edge control
points.

(MPOINT,1) EDGE1
(MPOINT,NPOINT)

EDGE2
EDGE4

(1,NPOINT)
(1,1) EDGE3

Surface-grid definition
TYPE=POLYFACE, MPOINT=3, NPOINT=4

6-50 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SURFACE GRID Sec. 6.4 Surfaces

irowi, jcoli
Row and column number, respectively, of the point pointi entry in the array of control
points. The following range of values are allowed:

1 irowi MPOINT
1 jcoli NPOINT

pointi
Label number of geometry point used to interpolate/control the desired surface.

Note: A point label is required input for each entry (irow, jcol) in the array of points;
irow = 1, 2, ..., MPOINT; jcol = 1, 2, ..., NPOINT.

Note: A line of type POLYLINE may be created at each edge of the surface, according to
the following rule:

Surface Grid Type Edge Polyline Type

POLYFACE SEGMENTED
QBSPLINE QBSPLINE
CBSPLINE CBSPLINE
BEZIER BEZIER

Auxiliary commands

LIST SURFACE FIRST LAST

DELETE SURFACE FIRST LAST OPTION

When deleting surfaces, OPTION = ALL will delete any vertex points or edge lines
which have no other dependent geometry; otherwise (OPTION = SURFACE), only the
surface itself will be deleted.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-51

Chap. 6 Geometry definition SURFACE EXTRUDED

SURFACE EXTRUDED NAME LINE DX DY DZ SYSTEM PCOINCIDE

PTOLERANCE NDIV OPTION ELINE

linei

SURFACE EXTRUDED defines a geometry surface by displacing a geometry line in a given

direction.

ZL

v
YL (DX, DY, DZ)
XL

LINE
u

NAME [(current highest geometry surface label number) + 1]

Label number of the extruded geometry surface.

LINE
Label number of the initial geometry line to be displaced, thereby defining the extruded
surface.

DX [1.0]
DY [0.0]
DZ [0.0]
Components of displacement vector with respect to the base coordinates (XL, YL, ZL) of
coordinate system SYSTEM. Note that this is the actual displacement vector, i.e., it specifies
both magnitude and direction.

SYSTEM [currently active coordinate system]

Label number of a coordinate system which is referenced by the displacement vector (DX,
DY, DZ).

6-52 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SURFACE EXTRUDED Sec. 6.4 Surfaces

PCOINCIDE [YES]
Geometry points are to be located at the other end of the surface from the initial line given by
LINE. This parameter indicates whether to check points location against existing geometry
point coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new geometry point
(with a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}

PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

NDIV [DEFAULT]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the surface in the extruded direction. The DEFAULT
number of subdivisions is taken from the parameter NDIV in the command SUBDIVIDE
DEFAULT. This parameter is only used when OPTION=VECTOR.

OPTION [VECTOR]
This parameter offers options to the surface extrusion:

VECTOR surfaces are defined by displacing geometry lines in a given direction.

LINE surfaces are defined by displacing geometry lines along a line.

ELINE
The geometry line label. This parameter is only used when OPTION=LINE

linei
Label numbers of geometry lines. The data line input allows for more than one line to be
extruded.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SURFACE FIRST LAST

DELETE SURFACE FIRST LAST OPTION

When deleting surface, OPTION = ALL will delete any vertex points or edge lines
which have no other dependent geometry; otherwise (OPTION = SURFACE), only the
surface itself will be deleted.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-53

Chap. 6 Geometry definition SURFACE REVOLVED

SURFACE REVOLVED NAME MODE LINE ANGLE SYSTEM AXIS

ALINE AP1 AP2 X0 Y0 Z0 XA YA ZA
PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE NDIV

linei

AXIS

ANGLE

LINE
u
v

SURFACE REVOLVED defines a geometry surface by rotating a geometry line about some axis.

NAME [(current highest geometry surface label number) + 1]

Label number of the revolved geometry surface.

MODE [AXIS]
Selects the method of defining the axis of revolution used to define the geometry surface.
This controls which parameters actually define the revolved surface. Other parameters are
ignored.

AXIS The axis of revolution is taken as a given coordinate axis

of a coordinate system. (LINE, ANGLE, SYSTEM, AXIS).

LINE The axis of revolution is taken as the straight line between the
end points of a given geometry line (which is not necessarily
straight, but must be open, i.e., have non-coincident end points).
(LINE, ANGLE, ALINE).

POINTS The axis of revolution is taken as the straight line between two
given (non-coincident) geometry points. (LINE, ANGLE, AP1, AP2).

VECTORS The axis of revolution is defined by a position vector and a

direction vector. (LINE, ANGLE, X0, Y0, Z0, XA, YA, ZA).

6-54 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SURFACE REVOLVED Sec. 6.4 Surfaces

LINE
Label number of the initial geometry line to be rotated about the axis thereby defining the
revolved surface.

ANGLE
Angle of rotation (in degrees). Note ANGLE must be in the range -360 ANGLE 360.
The sign of the angle is given by considering the right hand rule i.e., if you curl your
fingers around the axis of revolution, with the thumb pointing along the axis, then a positive
angle is in the direction of the curl of the fingers.

SYSTEM [currently active coordinate system]

Label number of a coordinate system. One of the axes of this coordinate system may be used
to define the axis of revolution, via parameter AXIS, when MODE = AXIS.

AXIS [XL]
Selects which of the basic axes (XL, YL, ZL) of the local coordinate system, given by param-
eter SYSTEM, is used as the axis of revolution. {XL/YL/ZL}

ALINE
Label number of a geometry line which defines the axis of revolution. The direction of the
axis is taken from the start point of the line to the end point of the line.

AP1, AP2
Label numbers of geometry points which define the axis of revolution. The direction of the
axis is taken from point AP1 to point AP2.

X0 [0.0]
Y0 [0.0]
Z0 [0.0]
Global coordinates of the position vector defining a point on the axis of rotation when MODE
= VECTORS.

XA [1.0]
YA [0.0]
ZA [0.0]
Components (with respect to the global coordinate system) of the axis of rotation when
MODE = VECTORS.

PCOINCIDE [YES]
Geometry points/lines are to be located at the edges of the surface beside the initial line given
by LINE. This parameter indicates whether to check the edge point location against existing
geometry, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new geometry point (with a
new label) (NO). {YES/NO}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-55

Chap. 6 Geometry definition SURFACE REVOLVED

PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

NDIV [DEFAULT]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the surface in the revolved direction. The DEFAULT
number of subdivisions is taken from the parameter NDIV in the command SUBDIVIDE
DEFAULT.

linei
Label numbers of geometry lines. The data line input allows for more than one line to be
revolved.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SURFACE FIRST LAST

DELETE SURFACE FIRST LAST OPTION

When deleting surface, OPTION = ALL will delete any vertex points or edge lines
which have no other dependent geometry; otherwise (OPTION = SURFACE), only the
surface itself will be deleted.

6-56 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SURFACE TRANSFORMED Sec. 6.4 Surfaces

SURFACE TRANSFORMED NAME PARENT TRANSFORMATION

PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE NCOPY MESH
EGROUP NCOINCIDE NTOLERANCE

surfacei

SURFACE TRANSFORMED defines a geometry surface to be a geometrical transformation of

another existing geometry surface. The transformed geometry surface is identified by its label
number NAME. If NCOPY is greater than 1, the other newly defined transformed geometry
surfaces are identified by the current highest geometry surface label number + 1.

NAME [(current highest geometry surface label number) + 1]

Label number of the geometry surface to be defined.

PARENT
The existing geometry surface.

TRANSFORMATION
Label number of a geometrical transformation, see commands TRANSFORMATION.

PCOINCIDE [NO]
This parameter indicates whether to check the location of the transformed surface vertices
against existing geometry point coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than
generate a new geometry point (with a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}

PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

NCOPY [1]
Parameter defines number of surfaces to be generated by the transformation - transformation
is repeated NCOPY times.

MESH [NO]
Indicates whether or not the mesh will be also transformed. {YES/NO}

Note that only transformations consisting of a single translation, or a sequence of transla-

tions, or a single rotation are available for mesh transformation. In mesh transformation, all
kinds of meshes lying on the individual current transformation geometry will be transformed.

EGROUP [0]
Specify element group for transformed elements. If EGROUP=0, (current highest egroup label
+ 1) will be used.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-57

Chap. 6 Geometry definition SURFACE TRANSFORMED

NCOINCIDE [NO]
This parameter indicates whether the locations of new nodes generated are compared with
existing nodes. If NCOINCIDE=YES, then the location of generated generated nodes will be
checked against existing nodes. For each generated node, if it lies within the tolerance
(specified by NTOLERANCE) of an existing node, no new node will be created. {YES/NO}

NTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If NCOINCIDE=YES this parameter provides a tolerance for checking the global coordinates
of a location against existing nodes.

surfacei
Label numbers of surface to be transformed.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SURFACE FIRST LAST

DELETE SURFACE FIRST LAST OPTION

6-58 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 6.4 Surfaces

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-59

Chap. 6 Geometry definition SFTHICKNESS

SFTHICKNESS

namei thicki dthick1i dthick2i dthick3i dthick4i

SFTHICKNESS defines surface thicknesses. <Not applicable to ADINA-F.>

namei
The surface label number.

thicki [0.0]
The surface thickness.

dthick1i [0.0]
The deviation of thickness for surface surfacei at surface vertex 1.

dthick2i [0.0]
The deviation of thickness for surface surfacei at surface vertex 2.

dthick3i [0.0]
The deviation of thickness for surface surfacei at surface vertex 3.

dthick4i [0.0]
The deviation of thickness for surface surfacei at surface vertex 4.

Note: Input of surface thickness is given as a constant thickness together with deviations
from that value at each of the vertices.

Thus the thickness at vertex1 = thick + dthick1.

To input constant surface thicknesses, only the first two entries on the data line
input need be entered (since the default deviations are zero).

To input varying surface thickness you could enter a constant thickness of 0.0 and
set the deviations to the vertex thicknesses, or use some median thickness with
non-zero deviations.

Note: Thickness is measured in the direction of the normal vector at the vertex,
determined by the right-hand rule in relation to the ordering of the surface vertices.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SFTHICKNESS FIRST LAST

6-60 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CHECK-SURFACES Sec. 6.4 Surfaces

CHECK-SURFACES

CHECK-SURFACES checks geometry surface connections looking for two adjoining surfaces
which are oppositely oriented such that the surface normals would be opposite. Such
conditions would likely be the source of a modeling error when elements of type SHELL are
generated on such surfaces.

The command has no parameters and reports geometry surface pairs which should be more
closely examined and re-oriented if necessary.

P3 P6
P4
n1 v v
u u
v2
v1 S2 n2
S1
P2 u2 P5
u1
P1

Surface Vertices
S1 P1-P2-P3-P4
S2 P2-P3-P6-P5

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-61

Chap. 6 Geometry definition VOLUME PATCH

VOLUME PATCH NAME SHAPE FACE1 FACE2 FACE3

FACE4 FACE5 FACE6

VOLUME PATCH defines a geometry volume to be bounded by faces which are specified
geometry surfaces.

SHAPE = HEX SHAPE = PRISM

FACE 2
FACE 2
P2 P1
P2 P1
FACE 3 FACE 3
FACE 1 FACE 1
P3 P4 P3 P4
P6 CE5 P5 FAC
E5
FA FACE 4 P5

FACE 4
P7 P8
P6
FACE 6

SHAPE = TETRA SHAPE = PYRAMID

FACE 2
P2 P2 P1
FACE 3 FACE 3

FACE 1 FACE 1 P4
P3 P1 P3

FACE 2 FACE 5
FACE 4 FACE 4

P4 P5

NAME [(current highest geometry volume label number) + 1]

Label number of the geometry volume.

6-62 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
VOLUME PATCH Sec. 6.5 Volumes

SHAPE [HEX]
Selects the shape of the volume to be defined. This controls which of the parameters
(geometry surface label numbers) are actually used to define the volume, other parameters are
ignored. The faces of the volume must connect as shown in the Figures.

HEX Hexahedral brick volume (FACE1, FACE2, FACE3, FACE4,

FACE5, FACE6). Note that each face must be a quadrilateral
geometry surface.

PRISM Prismatic volume (FACE1, FACE2, FACE3, FACE4, FACE5). Note

that faces FACE2 and FACE4 must be triangular geometry sur-
faces, whilst faces FACE1, FACE3, and FACE5 must be quadrilat-
eral geometry surfaces.

TETRA Tetrahedral volume (FACE1, FACE2, FACE3, FACE4). Note that

each face must be a triangular geometry surface.

PYRAMID 5-faced volume (FACE1, FACE2, FACE3, FACE4, FACE5). Note

that face FACE1 must be a quadrilateral geometry surface, whilst
faces FACE2, FACE3, FACE4, and FACE5 must be triangular
geometry surfaces.

FACE1
FACE2
FACE3
FACE4
FACE5
FACE6
Label numbers of geometry surfaces comprising the faces of the geometry volume. See
Figure.

Note: The faces must be connected, i.e., the edges of adjacent faces (geometry surfaces)
must coincide (i.e., refer to a common geometry line), otherwise an error condition
results.

Auxiliary commands

LIST VOLUME FIRST LAST

DELETE VOLUME FIRST LAST OPTION

When deleting volume, OPTION = ALL will delete any vertex points, edge lines or
face surfaces which have no other dependent geometry; otherwise (OPTION =
VOLUME), only the volume itself will be deleted.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-63

Chap. 6 Geometry definition VOLUME VERTEX

VOLUME VERTEX NAME SHAPE VERTEX1 VERTEX2 VERTEX3

VERTEX4 VERTEX5 VERTEX6 VERTEX7
VERTEX8

VOLUME VERTEX defines a geometry volume in terms of its vertices. This command is
similar to VOLUME PATCH the underlying volume geometry point representation is
identical, only the method of definition differs. If no geometry line exists between adjacent
geometry points, then the command will automatically generate straight geometry lines
between the appropriate geometry point pairs. If the volume edges do not comprise the
edges of existing geometry surfaces at the faces of the volume, then the command will
automatically generate geometry surfaces at the volume faces with the required edges
(existing or generated).
SHAPE = HEX SHAPE = PRISM

P2 P1
P2 P1

P3 P4 P3 P4
P6 P5
P5

P7 P8
P6

SHAPE = TETRA SHAPE = PYRAMID

P2
P2 P1

P3 P1 P4
P3

P4
P5

6-64 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
VOLUME VERTEX Sec. 6.5 Volumes

NAME [(current highest geometry volume label number) + 1]

Label number of the geometry volume.

SHAPE [HEX]
Selects the shape of the volume to be defined. This controls which of the parameters
(geometry point label numbers) are actually used to define the volume other parameters are
ignored. The vertices of the volume must connect as shown in the Figure.

HEX Hexahedral brick volume.

PRISM Prismatic volume.

TETRA Tetrahedral volume.

PYRAMID 5-faced volume.

VERTEXi (i = 18)
Label numbers of geometry points which are the vertices of the geometry volume. See Figure
for vertex numbering.

Auxiliary commands

LISTVOLUME FIRST LAST

DELETE VOLUME FIRST LAST OPTION

When deleting volumes, OPTION = ALL will delete any vertex points, edge lines or
face surfaces which have no other dependent geometry; otherwise (OPTION =
VOLUME), only the volume itself will be deleted.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-65

Chap. 6 Geometry definition VOLUME REVOLVED

VOLUME REVOLVED NAME MODE SURFACE ANGLE SYSTEM AXIS

ALINE AP1 AP2 X0 Y0 Z0 XA YA ZA
PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE NDIV

surfacei

VOLUME REVOLVED defines one or more geometry volumes by rotating one or more
geometry surfaces about an axis. The first newly defined geometry volume is identified by its
label number NAME. The other newly defined geometry volumes are identified by the
current highest geometry volume label number + 1.

AXIS

ANGLE P2 P1

SURFACE
P3 P4

NAME [(current highest geometry volume label number) + 1]

Label number of the revolved geometry volume.

MODE [AXIS]
Selects the method of defining the axis of revolution used to define the geometry volume.
This controls which parameters actually define the revolved volume. Other parameters are
ignored.
AXIS The axis of revolution is taken as a given coordinate axis of a
coordinate system. (SURFACE, ANGLE, SYSTEM, AXIS).

LINE The axis of revolution is taken as the straight line between the end points
of a given geometry line (which is not necessarily straight, but must be
open i.e., have non-coincident end points). (SURFACE, ANGLE, ALINE).

POINTS The axis of revolution is taken as the straight line between two given
(non-coincident) geometry points. (SURFACE, ANGLE, AP1, AP2).

VECTORS The axis of revolution is defined by a position vector and a direction

vector. (SURFACE, ANGLE, X0, Y0, Z0, XA, YA, ZA).

6-66 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
VOLUME REVOLVED Sec. 6.5 Volumes

SURFACE
Label number of the initial geometry surface to be rotated about the axis, thereby defining the
revolved volume.
ANGLE
Angle of rotation (in degrees). Note ANGLE must be in the range -360 ANGLE 360
(with ANGLE = 360 or -360 defining a closed line, i.e., a circle). The sign of the angle is
given by considering the right hand rule i.e., if you curl your fingers around the axis of
revolution, with the thumb pointing along the axis, then a positive angle is in the direction of
the curl of the fingers.

SYSTEM [currently active coordinate system]

Label number of a coordinate system. One of the axes of this coordinate system may be used
to define the axis of revolution, via parameter AXIS, when MODE = AXIS.

AXIS [XL]
Selects which of the base axes (XL, YL, ZL) of the local coordinate system, given by param-
eter SYSTEM, is used as the axis of revolution. {XL/YL/ZL}

ALINE
Label number of a geometry line which defines the axis of revolution. The direction of the
axis is taken from the start point of the line to the end point of the line.

AP1, AP2
Label numbers of geometry points which define the axis of revolution. The direction of the
axis is taken from point AP1 to point AP2.

X0 [0.0]
Y0 [0.0]
Z0 [0.0]
Global coordinates of the position vector defining a point on the axis of rotation when MODE
= VECTORS.

XA [1.0]
YA [0.0]
ZA [0.0]
Components (with respect to the global coordinate system) of the axis of rotation when
MODE = VECTORS.

PCOINCIDE [YES]
Geometry point are to be located at the other end of the volume from the initial surface given
by SURFACE. This parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing
geometry point coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new
geometry point (with a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-67

Chap. 6 Geometry definition VOLUME REVOLVED

PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

NDIV [DEFAULT]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the surface in the revolved direction. The DEFAULT
number of subdivisions is taken from the parameter NDIV in the command SUBDIVIDE
DEFAULT.

surfacei
Label numbers of geometry surfaces. The data line input allows for more than one surface to
be revolved.

Auxiliary commands

LIST VOLUME FIRST LAST

DELETE VOLUME FIRST LAST OPTION

When deleting volume, OPTION = ALL will delete any vertex points, edge lines or
face surfaces which have no other dependent geometry; otherwise (OPTION =
VOLUME), only the volume itself will be defined.

6-68 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
VOLUME EXTRUDED Sec. 6.5 Volumes

VOLUME EXTRUDED NAME SURFACE OPTION DX DY DZ SYSTEM

PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE NDIV LINE RATIO
PROGRESSION CBIAS

surfacei

VOLUME EXTRUDED defines one or more geometry volumes by displacing geometry

surfaces in a given direction or along a line. Please refer to LINE description below for
limitations.

ZL

YL
XL

P2 P1
( DX, DY, DZ )
SURFACE

P3 P4

NAME [(current highest geometry volume label number) + 1]

Label number of the extruded geometry volume.

SURFACE
Label number of the initial geometry surface to be displaced, thereby defining the extruded
volume.

OPTION [VECTOR]
This parameter defines the type of extrusion. {VECTOR/LINE}

VECTOR volumes are defined by displacing geometry surfaces in a given direction.

LINE volumes are defined by displacing geometry surfaces along a line.

DX [1.0]
DY [0.0]
DZ [0.0]
Components of displacement vector with respect to the base coordinates (XL, YL, ZL) of
coordinate system SYSTEM. Note that this is the actual displacement vector, i.e., it specifies

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-69

Chap. 6 Geometry definition VOLUME EXTRUDED

both magnitude and direction. These parameters are only used when OPTION=VECTOR.

SYSTEM [currently active coordinate system]

Label number of a coordinate system. One of the axes of this coordinate system may be used
to define the axis of revolution, via parameter AXIS, when MODE = AXIS.

PCOINCIDE [YES]
Geometry point are to be located at the other end of the volume from the initial surface given
by SURFACE. This parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing
geometry point coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new
geometry point (with a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}

PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

NDIV [DEFAULT]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the surface in the extruded direction. The DEFAULT
number of subdivisions is taken from the parameter NDIV in the command SUBDIVIDE
DEFAULT. This parameter is only used when OPTION=VECTOR.

LINE
The geometry line label. Only straight lines, extruded lines or combined lines are allowed. If a
combined line is used, the combined line should be either straight or extruded. This parameter
is only used when OPTION=LINE. For lines that do not meet these conditions, the com-
mand VOLUME SWEEP should be used.

RATIO [1.0]
Ratio of lengths of the last to first element edges along the extruded vector. The grading of
element lengths is governed by parameter PROGRESSION. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=VECTOR.

PROGRESSION [GEOMETRIC]
When element lengths are to be graded, the distribution of element lengths can be selected
from the following options. This parameter is only used when OPTION=VECTOR.
{ARITHMETIC/GEOMETRIC}

ARITHMETIC The difference in length of each element edge from its adjacent edges is
constant.

GEOMETRIC The ratio of lengths of adjacent element edges is constant.

6-70 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
VOLUME EXTRUDED Sec. 6.5 Volumes

CBIAS [NO]
Indicates if central bias is used along the extruded vector. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=VECTOR. {NO/YES}

surfacei
Label numbers of geometry surfaces. The data line input allows for more than one surface to
be extruded.

Auxiliary commands

LIST VOLUME FIRST LAST

DELETE VOLUME FIRST LAST OPTION

When deleting volumes, OPTION = ALL will delete any vertex points, edge lines or
face surfaces which have no other dependent geometry; otherwise (OPTION =
VOLUME), only the volume itself will be defined.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-71

Chap. 6 Geometry definition VOLUME SWEEP

VOLUME SWEEP NAME SURFACE LINE DELETE-LINE ALIGNMENT

PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE NPTS

surfacei

Defines one or more geometry volumes by sweeping one or more geometry surfaces along a
line. The first newly defined geometry volume is identified by its label number NAME. The
other newly defined geometry volumes are identified by the current highest geometry volume
label number + 1.

P2 P1
LINE
SURFACE

P3 P4

NAME [(current highest geometry volume label number) + 1]

Label number of the swept geometry volume.

SURFACE
Label number of the initial geometry surface to be displaced, thereby defining the swept
volume.

LINE
The geometry line label. Unlike the command VOLUME EXTRUDED, there is no limitation to
straight lines, extruded lines or combined lines.

DELETE-LINE [YES]
Indicates whether or not the lines are to be deleted after applying the command VOLUME
SWEEP.

ALIGNMENT [NORMAL]
This parameter specifies the direction of the surface during sweeping.

NORMAL Surface normal is at fixed angle to line tangent.

6-72 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
VOLUME SWEEP Sec. 6.5 Volumes

PARALLEL Surface normal always points to the same direction.

PCOINCIDE [YES]
Geometry points are to be located at the other end of the volume from the initial surface given
by SURFACE. This parameter indicates whether to check locations against existing geometry
point coordinates, and use existing points rather than generate new geometry points (with
new labels).

PTOLERANCE [Default given by TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

If PCOINCIDE=YES, then this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

NPTS [3]
The number of intermediate points of non-straight and non-arc lines.

surfacei
Label numbers of geometry surfaces. The data line input allows for more than one surface to
be swept.

Auxiliary commands

LIST VOLUME FIRST LAST

DELETE VOLUME FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-73

Chap. 6 Geometry definition VOLUME TRANSFORMED

VOLUME TRANSFORMED NAME PARENT TRANSFORMATION PCOINCIDE

PTOLERANCE NCOPY MESH EGROUP
NCOINCIDE NTOLERANCE

volumei

The command VOLUME TRANSFORMED defines a geometry volume to be a geometrical

transformation of another existing geometry volume. The transformed geometry volume is
identified by its label number NAME. If NCOPY is greater than 1, the other newly defined
transformed geometry volumes are identified by the current highest geometry volume label
number + 1.

NAME [(current highest geometry volume label number) + 1]

Label number of the transformed geometry volume to be defined.

PARENT
The existing geometry volume.

TRANSFORMATION [(current transformation label number)]

Label number of a geometrical transformation defined by command TRANSFORMATION.

PCOINCIDE [NO]
This parameter indicates whether to check the location of the transformed volume vertex
points against existing geometry points, and use existing points (YES) rather than generate
new geometry points (NO) (with a new label) . {YES/NO}

PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.

NCOPY [1]
Parameter defines number of volumes to be generated by the transformation - transformation
is repeated NCOPY times.

MESH [NO]
Indicates whether or not the mesh will be also transformed. {YES/NO}

Note that only transformations consisting of a single translation, or a sequence of transla-

tions, or a single rotation are available for mesh transformation. In mesh transformation, all
kinds of meshes lying on the individual current transformation geometry will be transformed.

EGROUP [0]
Specify element group for transformed elements. If EGROUP=0, (current highest egroup label

6-74 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
VOLUME TRANSFORMED Sec. 6.5 Volumes

+ 1) will be used.

NCOINCIDE [NO]
This parameter indicates whether the locations of new nodes generated are compared with
existing nodes. If NCOINCIDE=YES, then the location of generated generated nodes will be
checked against existing nodes. For each generated node, if it lies within the tolerance
(specified by NTOLERANCE) of an existing node, no new node will be created. {YES/NO}

NTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If NCOINCIDE=YES this parameter provides a tolerance for checking the global coordinates
of a location against existing nodes.

volumei
Label numbers of volume to be transformed.

Auxiliary commands

LIST VOLUME FIRST LAST

DELETE VOLUME FIRST LAST

Note that no geometry volume is deleted which is referenced by any other model entity,
e.g., as part of the definition of another volume or by virtue of a mesh generation
command (i.e. there are nodes and/or elements associated with the volume).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-75

Chap. 6 Geometry definition

This page intentionally left blank.

6-76 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FACE-THICKNESS Sec. 6.6 Solid models

FACE-THICKNESS BODY

facei thicki

FACE-THICKNESS defines solid geometry face thicknesses.

BODY [currently active solid body]

Solid geometry body label number.

facei
The face label number (for body BODY).

thicki [0.0]
The face thickness (constant).

Auxiliary commands

LIST FACE-THICKNESS FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-77

Chap. 6 Geometry definition FACELINK

FACELINK NAME OPTION BODY1 FACE1 BODY2 FACE2 PCTOLERANCE

WARNING TRANSFORMATION EXDOMAIN

FACELINK establishes a link, for meshing purposes, between two faces of distinct solid bodies, or
between a face of a solid body and a surface. Once the link is established, the program stores the
mesh triangulation of whichever of the two faces/surfaces is meshed first. The meshing of the
corresponding linked face/surface utilizes the same triangulation, thereby resulting in congruent
triangulations and compatible meshes across the linked faces/surfaces.

NAME [(highest face link label number) + 1]

The label number of the face link.

OPTION [TWO]
This parameter offers basic options for creating the facelinks:

ONE Facelinks are created between the faces of a given body and the remaining
adjacent faces and surfaces.

TWO Facelinks are created between two bodies.

ALL Facelinks are created for all the faces and surfaces in the model.

BODY1
The label number of the solid body of which FACE1 is a bounding face. Note: BODY1 = 0
implies that FACE1 is a surface. Only used when OPTION = ONE or TWO.

FACE1
The label number of the first face/surface of the linked pair. Only used when OPTION = ONE.

BODY2
The label number of the solid body of which FACE2 is a bounding face. Note: BODY2 = 0
implies that FACE2 is a surface. Only used when OPTION = ONE or TWO.

FACE2
The label number of the second face/surface of the linked pair. Only used when OPTION =
ONE.

PCTOLERANCE [DEFAULT]
Tolerance used to determine whether two faces match.

DEFAULT Value set by parameter COINCIDENCE of command TOLERANCES

GEOMETRIC

6-78 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FACELINK Sec. 6.6 Solid models

Note: BODY1 cannot equal BODY2, i.e., either two distinct bodies are given or one
solid body face and a surface are given.

Note: When a body is modified, the associated face links will be updated.
When a body is deleted, the associated face links will be deleted.
When a surface is deleted, the associated face link will be deleted

WARNING [YES]
This parameter offers the option to show the warning message when two faces are very close
but cannot be linked. {YES/NO}

TRANSFORMATION [0]
Label number of a geometrical transformation defined by one of the TRANSFORMATION
commands. This parameter is used only when OPTION=TWO and FACE1 and FACE2 are not
equal to 0.

EXDOMAIN [0]
Label number of a geometry domain for which the geometry in this domain will not be used
for FACELINK. This parameter is used only when OPTION=ALL.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FACELINK FIRST LAST

DELETE FACELINK FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-79

Chap. 6 Geometry definition SPLIT-EDGE

SPLIT-EDGE NAME BODY USPLIT

SPLIT-EDGE splits an edge of a body into two edges by giving a parameter along the edge.
This command is not applicable in ADINA-M for Open Cascade.

NAME
Label number of the geometry edge to be split.

BODY [current body label]

Label number of the solid geometry body.

USPLIT [0.5]
A parameter value indicating the point along edge NAME at which splitting takes place. The
parameter value can range between 0.0 (the starting point of edge NAME) to 1.0 (the end
point of edge NAME), but cannot be 0.0 or 1.0, i.e. the splitting point on the edge must
create two new edges of non-zero length.

6-80 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SPLIT-FACE Sec. 6.6 Solid models

SPLIT-FACE NAME BODY P1 P2

SPLIT-FACE splits a face of a body into two faces by giving two points on the face. This
command is not applicable in ADINA-M for Open Cascade.

NAME
Label number of the geometry face to be split.

BODY [current body label]

Label number of the solid geometry body.

P1
Label number of the first geometry point.

P2
Label number of the second geometry point.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-81

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY-DISCREP

BODY-DISCREP NAME

Creates a discrete boundary representation for a given body. The discrete boundary
representation (discrete brep in short) of a body is simply a triangular surface mesh (of the
body) that has the advantage of being modifiable by command BODY-DEFEATURE.

NAME
Body label.

Auxiliary commands

LIST BODY-DISCREP FIRST LAST

DELETE BODY-DISCREP FIRST LAST

6-82 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY-DEFEATURE Sec. 6.6 Solid models

BODY-DEFEATURE NAME SIZE DOMKEEP DOMREMV PREVIEW

OPTION ANGLE SPREAD

After having obtained a discrete boundary representation (discrete brep in short) of a

body with the command BODY-DISCREP, this command enables the modification of the
discrete brep. The actual (geometric) body is never modified. The meshing is limited to 4/
10/11-node tetrahedral elements.

The main purpose of this command is the removal of small features which can be of the
boss type (protrusion) or the cut type (may extend to being a hole). The secondary
purpose is the removal of surface triangles (on the discrete brep) that have either a small
length or height.

NAME
Body label.

SIZE
Any surface triangle on the discrete brep whose shortest length or height is below SIZE
should be eliminated from the discrete brep.

DOMKEEP [0]
Domain (see DOMAIN command) of body faces that should not be modified. More exactly,
the surface triangles on the discrete brep that are classified on a body face in the domain
should not be modified.

DOMREMV [0]
Domain (see DOMAIN command) of body faces that should be removed. More exactly, the
surface triangles on the discrete brep that are classified on a body face in the domain
should be removed. It is recommended to use one domain per feature to remove.

PREVIEW [NO]
Preview flag. {YES/NO}

YES the command flags the surface triangles on the discrete brep that are targeted
for removal to enable their display. It does not actually remove them.

NO the command will remove the surface triangles that are targeted for removal.

OPTION [COARSEN]
Method by which the body faces defined by DOMREMV are removed. {REMESH1/
REMESH2/COARSEN}

REMESH1, REMESH2 the body faces in domain defined by DOMREMV are removed
using a remeshing algorithm. This option should be used only

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-83

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY-DEFEATURE

when the frontier of the domain is convex. It has to be used when

the feature is a hole (whose frontiers should be convex).
With REMESH1, the normals used to remesh the domain come
from the (boundary discrete representation) faces inside the
domain. With REMESH2, the normals used come from the faces
immediately adjacent to the domain.

COARSEN the body faces in the domain defined by DOMREMV are removed
using a coarsening algorithm that is incremental. It cannot be used
when the feature is a hole.

ANGLE [30.0]
This is the angle in degrees used when using the incremental coarsening algorithm. The
larger the angle, the more surface triangles can be removed but the more deformed the
discrete brep will be. When attempting to remove a feature using the COARSEN option, it
is recommended to set the ANGLE to 180.0 so that the feature can be completely removed.
{0.0 ANGLE 180.0}

SPREAD [YES]
Determines whether the removal of surface triangles in the discrete brep extends to other
surfaces triangles outside the feature indicated by DOMREMV. {YES/NO}

NO the command only attempts to remove surface triangles that are below SIZE or that
make up a feature (as indicated by DOMREMV). Other surface triangles will not be
modified.

YES the command may also modify other surface triangles if necessary.

Notes:

If a DOMREMV domain is given, the command will only attempt to remove the surface
triangles associated with the domain. The SIZE parameter is then only used to spread (see
SPREAD parameter).

If no DOMREMV domain is given, the command will attempt to remove all surface triangles
whose dimensions (shortest length or height) are below SIZE.

6-84 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 6.6 Solid models

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-85

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY-CLEANUP

BODY-CLEANUP NAME SIZE DOMKEEP DOMREMV PREVIEW PHASE

The main purpose of this command is the removal of short body edges and/or thin body
faces. The actual (geometric) body is never modified but its AUI representation is.

NAME
Body label.

SIZE
Any body edge whose length is below SIZE should be eliminated. Any body face whose
boundary is reduced to 2 edges (after the elimination of body edges) and whose width is
below SIZE should be eliminated.

DOMKEEP [0]
Domain (see DOMAIN command) of body edges and/or faces that should not be removed.

DOMREMV [0]
Domain (see DOMAIN command) of body edges and/or faces that should be removed.

PREVIEW [NO]
Preview flag. {YES/NO}

YES the command flags the body edges and/or faces that are targeted for removal to
enable their display. It does not actually remove them.

NO the command will remove them.

Notes:
- If a DOMREMV domain is given, the command will only attempt to remove the body
edges and/or faces that are given. The SIZE parameter is not used.
- If no DOMREMV domain is given, the command will attempt to remove body edges and/
or faces whose dimensions are below SIZE.

PHASE [REMOVE]
{SPLITE/SPLITF/REMOVE}

If SPLITE is selected and a domain to remove (DOMREMV) made up of faces given, the
program will, for a given face in the domain, split any edge that is too close (below SIZE) to a
point not bounding the edge itself. Note that: 1) this is only available for Parasolid geometry
and 2) the modification is performed at the Parasolid level (can only be undone using 'undo'
like any adina-m command).

If SPLITF is selected and a domain to remove (DOMREMV) made up of faces given, the

6-86 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY-CLEANUP Sec. 6.6 Solid models

program will split any given face in the domain when there are 2 points (bounding the face)
not connected by an edge that are too close to each other (below SIZE). The face is split by
creating an edge connecting those 2 points.

Note that in both cases: 1) this is only available for Parasolid geometry and 2) the modifica-
tion is performed at the Parasolid level (can only be undone using 'undo' like any adina-m
command).

If REMOVE is selected, short body edges (length below SIZE) are removed and then thin
body faces (width below SIZE) reduced to 2 edges are removed. The actual (geometric) body
is never modified but its AUI representation is. To undo, the command BODY-RESTORE
should be used.

In general, the process of cleaning up a body should be done in 3 steps: edge splitting at the
Parasolid level (PHASE=SPLITE), face splitting at the Parasolid level (PHASE=SPLITF)
and finally edge/face removal at the AUI level (PHASE=REMOVE).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-87

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY-RESTORE

BODY-RESTORE BODY

Restores the AUI topological representation of the body corresponding to the state of the
body before commands such as BODY-CLEANUP, REM-EDGE or REM-FACE are executed
(on that body).

BODY
Body label.

6-88 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY-DSCADAP Sec. 6.6 Solid models

BODY-DSCADAP NAME MAXNVARS MAXNVARC MAXDIST ADAPT

Adapts (according to the mesh densities set prior) the surface triangles that make up the
geometry of an STL body. The output is stored as a discrete representation (see the BODY-
DISCREP command) which can be then meshed with the GBODY command. This command
should only be used in conjunction with the LOAD-STL command.

NAME
Label of body.

MAXNVARS [30.0 (degrees)]

Maximum normal variation used in edge swapping when adapting (improving quality of) the
surface mesh. When locally changing the topology of the surface mesh, the normal variations
(before and after edge swapping) may not exceed MAXNVARS.
Maximum normal variation used in vertex smoothing when adapting (improving quality of) the
surface mesh. When moving vertices of the surface mesh, the normal variations (before and
after vertex smoothing) may not exceed MAXNVARS. {0.0 MAXNVARS 180.0}

MAXNVARC [90.0 (degrees)]

Maximum normal variation used in edge collapsing when adapting (coarsening) the surface
mesh. When locally changing the topology of the surface mesh, the normal variations (before
and after edge collapsing) may not exceed MAXNVARC. {0.0 MAXNVARC 180.0}

MAXDIST [0.0]
Maximum (absolute) distance allowed from new edge to "reference" mesh (STL body) when
performing edge swaps. This distance threshold is used in conjunction with MAXNVARS
during edge swapping. By default, MAXDIST is set to 0.0 and therefore disabled.
{MAXDIST 0.0}

ADAPT [YES]
If set to NO, no adaptation will take place and the STL surface mesh will be stored directly as
a discrete representation bypassing totally the adaptation process.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-89

Chap. 6 Geometry definition LINE-FUNCTION

LINE-FUNCTION NAME TYPE DL1 DL2 DL3 NPOINT

i fvali (i = 1NPOINT)

LINE-FUNCTION describes the variation of a quantity along a line. It may be used, for
instance, to indicate how a load is distributed along some geometry line of the model. Note
that the variation is spatial; variation of a quantity in time is described by TIMEFUNCTION.
This command can be applied to edges.

DL2 DL3
DL2

DL1 DL1
u u
0 1 0 0.5 1

TYPE = LINEAR TYPE = QUADRATIC

TYPE = TABULAR
fval Du = 1/NPOINT
3
i=3
u
1
Du

NAME
Label number of the line-function.

TYPE [LINEAR]
Selects the type of data variation, see Figure. This controls the actual parameters used
other parameters are ignored.

LINEAR A linear variation from value DL1 to DL2.

6-90 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE-FUNCTION Sec. 6.7 Spatial functions

QUADRATIC A quadratic variation from value DL1, through value DL3, to

value DL2.

TABULAR The function values are given at a set of equally spaced points
along the line. The function is linearly interpolated
between the input values.
DL1
Value at the starting point of the line (u = 0 see Figure).

DL2 [DL1]
Value at the end point of the line (u = 1 see Figure).

DL3 [DL1]
Value at the middle point of the line (u = 0.5 see Figure). This value should not be input for
TYPE = LINEAR.

NPOINT [3]
The number of input function values, used when TYPE = TABULAR. The values are as-
signed at equally spaced points along the line, with linear interpolation used to determine
values along the line. The first point corresponds to the starting point of the line (u = 0), and
the last point to the end point of the line (u = 1). Note that NPOINT must be at least 3
(NPOINT = 2 would be equivalent to selecting TYPE = LINEAR).

i
Index of the input function point, which can take a value from 1 to NPOINT.

fvali [1.0]
Value of the function at index point i.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LINE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

DELETE LINE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-91

Chap. 6 Geometry definition SURFACE-FUNCTION

SURFACE-FUNCTION NAME TYPE DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7
DS8 DS9 MPOINT NPOINT

row col fvalij

SURFACE-FUNCTION describes the variation of a quantity across a surface. It may be used,

for instance, to indicate how a load is distributed over some geometry surface of the model.
Note that the variation is spatial; variation of a quantity in time is described by
TIMEFUNCTION.

DS2 DS2
DS5 DS1
DS1
DS6 DS8
(0,1) DS9
DS3 (1,1) (0,1) (1,1)
v DS4 DS7
DS3 DS4
v
(0,0) u (1,0) (0,0) u (1,0)

TYPE = LINEAR TYPE = QUADRATIC

(0,1)
[NPOINT, 1]
(1,1)
[NPOINT, MPOINT]

v
(0,0) (1,0)
[1,1] u [1,MPOINT]
TYPE = TABULAR

6-92 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SURFACE-FUNCTION Sec. 6.7 Spatial functions

NAME
Label number of the surface-function.

TYPE [LINEAR]
Selects the type of data variation see Figure. This controls the actual parameters used.

LINEAR A bilinear variation from surface vertex values DS1, DS2, DS3,
DS4.

QUADRATIC A biquadratic variation from surface vertex values DS1 to DS4,

and mid-side/internal surface point values DS5 to DS9.

TABULAR The function values are given at a grid of regularly spaced points
on the surface. The function is bilinearly interpolated between
the input values.

DS1
Value at the (u = 1, v = 1) vertex point of the surface, see Figure.

DS2 [DS1]
Value at the (u = 0, v = 1) vertex point of the surface, see Figure.

DS3 [DS1]
Value at the (u = 0, v = 0) vertex point of the surface, see Figure.

DS4 [DS1]
Value at the (u = 1, v = 0) vertex point of the surface, see Figure.

DS5 [DS1]
Value at the (u = 0.5, v = 1) mid-side point of the surface, see Figure.

DS6 [DS1]
Value at the (u = 0, v = 0.5) mid-side point of the surface, see Figure.

DS7 [DS1]
Value at the (u = 0.5, v = 0) mid-side point of the surface, see Figure.

DS8 [DS1]
Value at the (u = 1, v = 0.5) mid-side point of the surface, see Figure.

DS9 [DS1]
Value at the (u = 0.5, v = 0.5) internal point of the surface, see Figure.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-93

Chap. 6 Geometry definition SURFACE-FUNCTION

MPOINT [3]
The number of input points in the u-parametric direction of the surface, used when TYPE =
TABULAR. The function values are assigned for a grid of points on the surface, with bilinear
interpolation used to determine values on the surface. MPOINT defines the number of
columns for the input grid.

NPOINT [3]
The number of input points in the v-parametric direction of the surface, used when TYPE =
TABULAR. The function values are assigned for a grid of points on the surface, with bilinear
interpolation used to determine values on the surface. NPOINT defines the number of rows
for the input grid.

row
Row index of the input function point, which can take a value from 1 to NPOINT.
{1 row NPOINT}

col
Column index of the input function point, which can take a value from 1 to MPOINT.
{1 col MPOINT}

fvalij [1.0]
Value of the function at index point (i = row, j = col).

Auxiliary commands

LIST SURFACE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

DELETE SURFACE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

6-94 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
VOLUME-FUNCTION Sec. 6.7 Spatial functions

VOLUME-FUNCTION NAME TYPE DV1 DV2 DV3 DV4 DV5 DV6 DV7
DV8 ... DV27

VOLUME-FUNCTION describes the variation of a quantity within a volume. It may be used,

for instance, to indicate how a load is distributed within some geometry volume of the model.
Note that the variation is spatial; variation of a quantity in time is described by
TIMEFUNCTION.

NAME
Label number of the volume-function.

TYPE [LINEAR]
Selects the type of data variation. This controls the actual parameters used.

LINEAR A trilinear variation from volume vertex values DV1 to DV8.

QUADRATIC A triquadratic variation from volume vertex values DV1 to DV8,

and mid-side/internal volume point values DV9 to DV27.

DV1...DV27 [DVi = DV1 (i = 2...27)]

Values at the vertex, mid-side, and internal points of the volume, see table below.

Auxiliary commands

LIST VOLUME-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

DELETE VOLUME-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-95

Chap. 6 Geometry definition VOLUME FUNCTION

Volume-function parametric locations:

Value u v w
DV1 1 1 1
DV2 0 1 1
DV3 0 0 1
DV4 1 0 1
DV5 1 1 0
DV6 0 1 0
DV7 0 0 0
DV8 1 0 0
DV9 0.5 1 1
DV10 0 0.5 1
DV11 0.5 0 1
DV12 1 0.5 1
DV13 0.5 1 0
DV14 0 0.5 0
DV15 0.5 0 0
DV16 1 0.5 0
DV17 1 1 0.5
DV18 0 1 0.5
DV19 0 0 0.5
DV20 1 0 0.5
DV21 0.5 0.5 0.5
DV22 0.5 1 0.5
DV23 0 0.5 0.5
DV24 0.5 0 0.5
DV25 1 0.5 0.5
DV26 0.5 0.5 1
DV27 0.5 0.5 0

6-96 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TRANSFORMATION COMBINED Sec. 6.8 Transformations

TRANSFORMATION COMBINED NAME

positioni transformi

TRANSFORMATION COMBINED defines a general transformation as an ordered sequence

of existing transformations defined by command TRANSFORMATION. The associated
transformation matrix is calculated by concatenating the matrices of the sequence of transfor-
mations.

NAME [(current highest transformation label number) + 1]

Label number of transformation being defined.

positioni
Index for the transformation, indicating its position in the order of transformation application.
In the concatenation the transformation associated with positioni = 1 is applied first, then
that for positioni = 2, and so on. If a transformation is not defined for a given index then
the identity transformation is assumed. The index may also be used to delete a transforma-
tion from the concatenating sequence.

transformi [0]
Label number of an existing transformation defined by command TRANSFORMATION
(provided that no recursion is implied). A zero value indicates the identity transformation.

Example

TRANSFORMATION TRANSLATION NAME=1 MODE=SYSTEM SYSTEM=1,

DX=1.0
TRANSFORMATION ROTATION NAME=2 MODE=AXIS SYSTEM=1,
AXIS=XL ANGLE=35.0
TRANSFORMATION TRANSLATION NAME=3 MODE=SYSTEM SYSTEM=1,
DX=-1.0
...
TRANSFORMATION COMBINED NAME=4
1 1
2 2
3 3
@
...
TRANSFORMATION COMBINED NAME=5
1 4
2 1
@

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-97

Chap. 6 Geometry definition TRANSFORMATION COMBINED

The last command is equivalent to

TRANSFORMATION COMBINED NAME=5

1 1
2 2
3 3
4 1
@

Auxiliary commands

LIST TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST

DELETE TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST

6-98 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TRANSFORMATION DIRECT Sec. 6.8 Transformations

TRANSFORMATION DIRECT NAME T11 T12 T13 T14 T21 T22 T23
T24 T31 T32 T33 T34

TRANSFORMATION DIRECT defines a general 3-D transformation by directly specifying the

transformation matrix.

NAME [(current highest transformation label number) + 1]

Label number of the transformation.

Tij
Components of the 3-D transformation matrix:

T11 T12 T13 T14

T T T23 T24
21 22

T31 T32 T33 T34

0 0 0 1

Auxiliary commands

LIST TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST

DELETE TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-99

Chap. 6 Geometry definition TRANSFORMATION POINTS

TRANSFORMATION POINTS NAME P1 P2 P3 Q1 Q2 Q3

TRANSFORMATION POINTS defines a rigid-body 3-D transformation by the specification

of 6 geometry points 3 initial points P1, P2, P3, and 3 target points Q1, Q2, Q3.

The transformation is such that point P1 is transformed into point Q1, the direction from P1 to
P2 is transformed into the direction from Q1 to Q2, and the plane defined by the 3 initial
points is transformed into the plane defined by the 3 target points.

NAME [(current highest transformation label number) + 1]

Label number of the transformation.

P1, P2, P3
Label numbers of three non-coincident, non-collinear, initial geometry points.

Q1, Q2, Q3
Label numbers of three target points, which must also be non-coincident and non-collinear.

Auxiliary commands

LIST TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST

DELETE TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST

6-100 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TRANSFORMATION REFLECTION Sec. 6.8 Transformations

TRANSFORMATION REFLECTION NAME MODE SYSTEM PLANE

P1 P2 P3

TRANSFORMATION REFLECTION defines a 3-D reflection (mirror) transformation about a

plane.

NAME [(current highest transformation label number) + 1]

Label number of the transformation.

MODE [SYSTEM]
Selects the method of defining the plane of the transformation. This controls which param-
eters actually define the transformation, other parameters are ignored.

SYSTEM The reflection is defined to be relative to one of the base coordinate planes
of a given local coordinate system. (SYSTEM, PLANE)

POINTS The reflection plane is defined via three (non-collinear) points. (P1, P2, P3)

SYSTEM [currently active coordinate system]

Local coordinate system label number. The reflection is made relative to one of the base
coordinate planes of this system.

PLANE [XY]
Selects a coordinate plane with respect to the base coordinate directions (XL, YL, ZL) of the
coordinate system SYSTEM.

XY XL-YL plane of coordinate system SYSTEM.

XZ XL-ZL plane of coordinate system SYSTEM.

YZ YL-ZL plane of coordinate system SYSTEM.

P1, P2, P3
Label numbers of geometry points which define the plane of reflection for the trans-forma-
tion. The points must be distinct, non-coincident, and non-collinear (in order to define a
plane).

Auxiliary commands

LIST TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST

DELETE TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-101

Chap. 6 Geometry definition TRANSFORMATION ROTATION

TRANSFORMATION ROTATION NAME MODE SYSTEM AXIS LINE

P1 P2 ANGLE X0 Y0 Z0 XA YA ZA

TRANSFORMATION ROTATION defines a 3-D rotation transformation, about an axis.

AXIS

ANGLE

NAME [(current highest transformation label number) + 1]

Label number of the transformation.

MODE [AXIS]
Selects the method of defining the axis of rotation. This controls which parameters actually
define the rotation other parameters are ignored.

AXIS The axis of rotation is taken as one of the basic axes (XL, YL, ZL)
of the local coordinate system given by SYSTEM.
(SYSTEM, AXIS, ANGLE)

LINE The axis of rotation is aligned with the straight line between the
end points of a geometry line. Note that the geometry line is not
necessarily straight. (LINE, ANGLE)

POINTS The axis of rotation is taken to be the straight line between two
geometry points. (P1, P2, ANGLE)

VECTORS The axis of rotation is defined by a position vector (lying on the

axis), and a direction vector. (X0, Y0, Z0, XA, YA, ZA,
ANGLE)

SYSTEM [currently active coordinate system]

Local coordinate system label number. The rotation is relative to one of the base axes of this
coordinate system.

6-102 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TRANSFORMATION ROTATION Sec. 6.8 Transformations

AXIS [XL]
Selects which of the base axes (XL, YL, ZL) of the local coordinate system given by SYSTEM,
is used as the axis of rotation. {XL/YL/ZL}

LINE
Label number of a geometry line. The axis of rotation is given by the straight line between
the starting point and ending point of the geometry line LINE.

P1
P2
Label numbers of two geometry points. The axis of rotation is the straight line between
geometry points P1 and P2.

ANGLE [0.0]
The angle of rotation, measured in degrees.

X0 [0.0]
Y0 [0.0]
Z0 [0.0]
Global components of a position vector indicating a point lying on the axis of rotation.

XA [0.0]
YA [0.0]
ZA [0.0]
Global components of a vector indicating the direction of the axis of rotation.

Auxiliary commands

LIST TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST

DELETE TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-103

Chap. 6 Geometry definition TRANSFORMATION SCALE

TRANSFORMATION SCALE NAME MODE SYSTEM POINT SX SY SZ

TRANSFORMATION SCALE defines a 3-D scaling transformation.

NAME [(current highest transformation label number) + 1]

Label number of the transformation.

MODE
Selects the method of defining the transformation. This controls which parameters actually
define the transformation, other parameters are ignored.

SYSTEM The scaling transformation is defined by scale factors which are relative to
the origin of a given local coordinate system and which scale parallel to
its base axes (XL, YL, ZL). (SYSTEM, SX, SY, SZ)

POINT The scaling transformation is defined with the origin at a given geometry
point, and by scale factors which scale parallel to the global Cartesian
axes. (POINT, SX, SY, SZ)

SYSTEM [currently active coordinate system]

Coordinate system label number. The scaling is relative to this coordinate system.

POINT
Geometry point label number. The origin of the scaling transformation is taken as this point.

SX [1.0]
SY [1.0]
SZ [1.0]
Scaling factors.

Auxiliary commands

LIST TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST

DELETE TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST

6-104 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TRANSFORMATION TRANSLATION Sec. 6.8 Transformations

TRANSFORMATION TRANSLATION NAME MODE SYSTEM

DX DY DZ LINE P1 P2

TRANSFORMATION TRANSLATION defines a 3-D translation transformation.

NAME [(current highest transformation label number) + 1]

Label number of the transformation.

MODE [SYSTEM]
Selects the method of defining the translation. This controls which parameters actually
define the translation, other parameters are ignored.

SYSTEM The translation is defined by increments parallel to the base axes (XL, YL,
ZL) of local coordinate system SYSTEM. (SYSTEM, DX, DY, DZ)

LINE The translation is defined as that which would translate the starting point
of a geometry line to the ending point of the same geometry line. (LINE)

POINTS The translation is defined as that which would translate one geometry
point to another. (P1, P2)

SYSTEM [currently active coordinate system]

Local coordinate system label number. For MODE = SYSTEM the translation is relative to
this coordinate system.

DX [0.0]
DY [0.0]
DZ [0.0]
Translations parallel to the base Cartesian system (XL,YL,ZL) associated with local coordi-
nate system SYSTEM.

LINE
Label number of a geometry line. The translation is that which would translate the starting
point of geometry line LINE to its ending point.

P1
P2
Label numbers of two geometry points. The translation is that which would translate
geometry point P1 to geometry point P2.

Auxiliary commands

LIST TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST

DELETE TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-105

Chap. 6 Geometry definition TRANSFORMATION INVERSE

TRANSFORMATION INVERSE NAME TINVERT

Defines a 3-D geometry transformation as the inverse of another transformation.

NAME [(current highest transformation label number) + 1]

Label number of the transformation to be defined.

TINVERT
Label number of the transformation to be inverted to give the transformation being defined.

Auxiliary commands

LIST TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST

DELETE TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST

6-106 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DOMAIN Sec. 6.9 Miscellaneous

DOMAIN NAME

typei namei bodyi

Defines a geometry domain, which is a collection of geometry entities. A domain may be

referenced, for example, by parameter NCDOMAIN of the mesh generation commands (e.g.
GSURFACE) to restrict nodal coincidence checking to within a set of geometry entities
thereby facilitating partitioning of the finite element model into topologically distinct but
geometrically adjacent regions.

NAME [(current highest domain label number) + 1]

Label number of the domain to be defined.

typei
Geometry entity type for entry i in the list of geometry entities which comprise the domain.
{POINT/LINE/SURFACE/VOLUME/EDGE/FACE/BODY}

namei
Label number of the geometry entity of type typei

bodyi [0]
Label number of a solid body, used to identify the entity when typei = EDGE or FACE.

Auxiliary commands

LIST DOMAIN FIRST LAST

DELETE DOMAIN FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-107

Chap. 6 Geometry definition MEASURE

MEASURE GTYPE P1 P2 P3 BODY EDGE LINE N1 N2 N3

SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE RESPONSE PROGRAM FACE

Measures the distance between 2 points or 2 nodes, the length of an edge or a line, or the
angle formed by 3 points or 3 nodes.

GTYPE [POINTS]
Options for measurement. {POINTS/EDGE/LINE/POINT-ANGLE/NODES/NODE-
ANGLE/FACE/BODY}

POINTS Distance between two points.

EDGE Length of an edge of a body.

LINE Length of a line.

POINT-ANGLE Angle between three points.

NODES Distance between two nodes.

NODE-ANGLE Angle between three nodes.

FACE Area of a face of a body

BODY Volume of a body

P1, P2, P3
Label numbers of existing geometry points. P3 is only used when GTYPE=POINT-ANGLE.

BODY
Body label number.

EDGE
Edge label number.

LINE
Line label number.

N1, N2, N3
Label numbers of existing nodes. N1 and N2 are only used when GTYPE=NODES or NODE-
ANGLE. N3 is only used when GTYPE=NODE-ANGLE.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure label number]

The substructure number of the node in the model. Not applicable to ADINA- T/-F.

6-108 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MEASURE Sec. 6.9 Miscellaneous

REUSE [current reuse label number]

The reuse number of the node in the model. Not applicable to ADINA-T/-F.

RESPONSE [DEFAULT]
Specifies the response for which the node is evaluated.

PROGRAM [current finite element program]

The current finite element program, used only if GTYPE=NODES or NODE-ANGLE.

FACE
Face label number.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-109

Chap. 6 Geometry definition GET-EDGE-FACES

GET-EDGE-FACES NAME BODY

GET-EDGE-POINTS NAME BODY

GET-EDGE-FACES lists the body faces connected to a body edge.

GET-EDGE-POINTS lists theAUI points bounding a body edge.

NAME
Edge label. {1, 2, ...}

BODY
Label of body the edge belongs to. {1, 2, ...}

6-110 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GET-FACE-EDGES Sec. 6.9 Miscellaneous

GET-FACE-EDGES NAME BODY

Lists the body edges bounding a body face.

NAME
Face label. {1, 2, ...}

BODY
Label of body the face belongs to. {1, 2, ...}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-111

Chap. 6 Geometry definition REM-EDGE

REM-EDGE NAME BODY POINT

Removes a body edge by collapsing one end point onto the other. The remaining point is
given as POINT. If POINT is set to 0, the remaining point is chosen by the command.

NAME
Body edge label. {1, 2, ...}

BODY
Label of body the edge belongs to. {1, 2, ...}

POINT
Label of point that will remain. {0, 1, 2, ...}

6-112 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
REM-FACE Sec. 6.9 Miscellaneous

REM-FACE NAME BODY EDGE

Removes a body face (bounded by exactly 2 edges) by collapsing one bounding edge onto
the other. The remaining edge is given as EDGE. If EDGE is set to 0, the remaining edge is
chosen by the command.

NAME
Body face label. {1, 2, ...}

BODY
Label of body the face belongs to. {1, 2, ...}

EDGE
Label of edge that will remain. {0, 1, 2, ...}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-113

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY BLEND

BODY BLEND NAME OPTION R1 R2 EDGE POINT

edgei (OPTION=CONSTANT, LINEAR)

or

facei (OPTION=FACE)

The command BODY BLEND takes an existing solid geometry body and modifies specified
edges to have a radius blend. Two options allow for a constant or variable radius blend.
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

Specified R1 Specified Specified R2

edge edge point

R1

Before blend After blend Before blend After blend

Constant blend Linear blend

OPTION=CONSTANT OPTION=LINEAR

NAME
Label number of the body to be blended. An existing body label number must be specified.

OPTION [CONSTANT]
This parameter offers basic options for blending the edges.

CONSTANT Multiple edges are blended by a constant radius.

LINEAR A single edge of the body is blended by two radii - one at each end
(vertex) of the edge.

FACE Multiple faces are blended by a constant radius.

6-114 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY BLEND Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

R1
The first radius of the blend. R1 must be input with a positive value (no default is assumed).

R2
The second radius of the blend. R2 is only used when OPTION=LINEAR,and must be input
with a non-negative value (no default is assumed).

EDGE
Label number of the edge to be blended. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=LINEAR, in whch case an existing edge label number ust be specified (no default is
assumed).

POINT
Label number of a point at which the blend radius is R1. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=LINEAR, in which case an existing point label number must be specified (no default
is assumed).

edgei
Label numbers of body edges to be blended with (constant) radius R1. This data is only used
when OPTION=CONSTANT.

facei
Label numbers of body faces to be blended with (constant) radius R1. This data is only used
when OPTION=FACE.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-115

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY BLOCK

BODY BLOCK NAME OPTION POSITION ORIENTATION

CX1 CX2 CX3 CENTER SYSTEM AX AY AZ
BX BY BZ DX1 DX2 DX3 P1 P2

The command BODY BLOCK defines a solid geometry block or brick shape. A number of
options allow for the position, orientation, and dimensions of the block shape. The block
body may be used in conjunction with other body shapes to form more complex geometries
using the Boolean operation commands BODY MERGE, BODY SUBTRACT, BODY INTER-
SECT. A body may be meshed directly via the GBODY command (in which case free-form
meshing is necessarily used - there is no intrinsic parametric description of the body to
support mapped meshing).
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

Local coordinate system

P2

z
y x
Center DX3

P1
DX2
DX1

NAME [(highest body label number) + 1]

Label number of the body to be defined.

OPTION [CENTERED]
This parameter offers basic options for defining the block:

CENTERED The block is defined by its center, orientation and dimensions.

DIAGONAL The block is defined by two diagonally opposite geometry points and
its orientation.

6-116 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY BLOCK Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

POSITION [VECTOR]
Specifies how the block center is located. (This parameter is only used when
OPTION=CENTERED).

VECTOR The center of the block is specified by a position vector (CX1,CX2,CX3)

with components in terms of a given coordinate system (SYSTEM).

POINT The center of the block is specified by an existing geometry point

(CENTERED), possibly a vertex of another body.

ORIENTATION [SYSTEM]
Specifies how the edges of the block are aligned:

SYSTEM The block is aligned with the base Cartesian axes of a local coordinate
system (possibly the global coordinate system).

VECTORS The X,Y,Z directions of the block edges are input in terms of two
non-parallel direction vectors (AX,AY,AZ), (BX,BY,BZ). These
vectors are used to form a right-handed system as described below.

CX1 [0.0]
CX2 [0.0]
CX3 [0.0]
The position vector of the center of the block, given in terms of curvilinear components of
the local coordinate system specified by SYSTEM. Note that these parameters are only used
when POSITION=VECTOR and OPTION=CENTERED.

CENTER
The center of the block - the label number of an existing geometry point. This parameter is
only used when POSITION=POINT and OPTION=CENTERED, in which case an existing
geometry point must be specified (no default is assumed).

SYSTEM [0]
Label number of a local coordinate system which may be used to position the center of the
block and/or provide the orientation of the block. The center of the block may be given in
terms of the curvilinear coordinates (CX1,CX2,CX3) of this local system, when
POSITION=VECTOR and OPTION=CENTERED. The local directions of the block are aligned
with the base Cartesian system (XL,YL,ZL) of this system, see command SYSTEM, when
ORIENTATION=SYSTEM. This parameter is only used when POSITION=VECTOR (and
OPTION=CENTERED), or when ORIENTATION=SYSTEM. Note that the default is chosen as
the global Cartesian coordinate system.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-117

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY BLOCK

AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Global Cartesian components of a direction vector specifying the local x-direction of the
block. If OPTION= CENTERED, then the component DX1 will be associated with this
direction. Note that this vector need not be of unit length, and is only used if
ORIENTATION=VECTOR.

BX [0.0]
BY [1.0]
BZ [0.0]
Global Cartesian components of a direction vector, which specifies, in conjunction with
vector (AX,AY,AZ), the local x-y plane of the block orientation. The vector product, or
cross product, of (AX,AY,AZ) with (BX,BY,BZ) gives the local z-direction, and the
y-direction is then given by the right hand rule. If OPTION=CENTERED the components
DX2, DX3 will be associated with the local y-direction and z-directions respectively. Note that
this vector need not be of unit length, and is only used if ORIENTATION=VECTOR.

DX1
DX2
DX3
The dimensions of the block, aligned with the local x, y and z-directions of the block, respec-
tively. These lengths are only used if OPTION=CENTERED, in which case they must be input
with positive values (no defaults are assumed).

P1
P2
Label numbers of two existing geometry points which define the opposite corners of a diagonal
of the block. These parameters are only used when OPTION= DIAGONAL, and in that case two
distinct and non-coincident points must be specified (no defaults are assumed).

6-118 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY CHAMFER Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

BODY CHAMFER NAME R1 R2 OPTION

edgei facei (OPTION=EDGE)

or

facei (OPTION=FACE)

The command BODY CHAMFER applies chamfers to edges or faces of a solid geometry
body.
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

Specified
edge Range 2

Range 1

Specified
face

Before chamfer applied After chamfer applied

NAME
Label number of the body to be chamfered. (No default - an existing body name must be
given.)

R1
The first range (depth) of the chamfer. R1 must be input with a positive value (no default is
assumed).

R2 [R1]
The second range (depth) of the chamfer. If R2 is input, it cannot be negative. If R2 = 0.0,
then it is assumed that R2 = R1.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-119

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY CHAMFER

OPTION [EDGE]
This parameter offers basic options for chamfering the edges or faces:

EDGE Multiple edges are chamfered.

FACE Multiple faces are chamfered.

edgei
Label numbers of edges to be chamfered. This parameters is used only when OPTION=EDGE.

facei
Label numbers of faces to be chamfered with range R1. This data is only used when R2 is not
equal to R1. (OPTION=EDGE)

facei
Label numbers of faces to be chamfered. (OPTION=FACE)

6-120 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY CONE Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

BODY CONE NAME OPTION POSITION ORIENTATION X1

X2 X3 APEX BASE SYSTEM AXIS AX AY AZ
SANGLE RADIUS LENGTH

The command BODY CONE defines a solid geometry cone shape. A number of options allow
for the position, orientation, and dimensions of the cone shape. The cone body may be used
in conjunction with other body shapes to form more complex geometries using the Boolean
operation commands BODY MERGE, BODY SUBTRACT, BODY INTERSECT. A body may be
meshed directly via the GBODY command (in which case free-form meshing is necessarily
used - there is no intrinsic parametric description of the body to support mapped meshing).
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

Axis
Apex

Semi-angle

Length

Base center Radius

NAME [(highest body label number) + 1]

Label number of the body to be defined.

OPTION [APEX]
This parameter offers basic options for defining the cone:

APEX The cone is defined by its apex, semi-angle, orientation, and length.

BASE The cone is defined by its base center, orientation, radius and length.

ENDPOINTS The cone is defined by two end points (APEX, BASE) and its base
radius.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-121

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY CONE

POSITION [VECTOR]
Specifies how the apex or base of the cone is located. (This parameter is only used when
OPTION=APEX or BASE.)

VECTOR The apex or base of the cone is specified by a position vector (X1,X2,X3)
- with components in terms of a given coordinate system (SYSTEM).

POINT The apex or base of the cone is specified by an existing geometry point
(APEX or BASE), possibly a vertex of another body.

ORIENTATION [SYSTEM]
Specifies how the direction of the cone axis is defined. (This parameter is only used when
OPTION=APEX or BASE.)

SYSTEM The cone axis is aligned with one of the base Cartesian axes (AXIS) of
a local coordinate system (SYSTEM) (possibly the global coordinate
system).

VECTOR The cone axis is defined via a direction vector (AX,AY,AZ) in the
global coordinate system.

X1 [0.0]
X2 [0.0]
X3 [0.0]
The position vector of the apex or base of the cone, given in terms of curvilinear components
of the local coordinate system specified by SYSTEM. Note that these parameters are only
used when POSITION=VECTOR, and OPTION=APEX or BASE.

APEX
The label number of an existing geometry point indicating the apex of the cone. This param-
eter is only used when POSITION=POINT and OPTION=APEX, or when
OPTION=ENDPOINTS; in either case an existing geometry point must be specified (no
default is assumed).

BASE
The label number of an existing geometry point indicating the base center of the cone. This
parameter is only used when POSITION=POINT and OPTION=BASE, or when
OPTION=ENDPOINTS; in either case an existing geometry point must be specified (no
default is assumed).

SYSTEM [0]
Label number of a local coordinate system which may be used to position the apex or base of
the cone and/or define the cone axis direction. The apex or base of the cone may be given in

6-122 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY CONE Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

terms of the curvilinear coordinates (X1,X2,X3) of this local system, when

POSITION=VECTOR. For ORIENTATION=SYSTEM the cone axis direction is aligned with
one of the base Cartesian system axes of this system (AXIS), see command SYSTEM . This
parameter is only used when OPTION=APEX or BASE, and when POSITION=
VECTOR or ORIENTATION=SYSTEM. Note that the default is chosen as the global Carte-
sian coordinate system.

AXIS [XL]
Indicates which of the base Cartesian axes of the local coordinate system (SYSTEM) is to be
used for the direction of the cone axis. Note that both positive and negative coordinate
system axial directions may be requested. This parameter is used only when
ORIENTATION=SYSTEM and OPTION=APEX or BASE. {XL/YL/ZL/XL-/YL-/ZL-}

AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Global Cartesian components of a direction vector specifying the orientation of the cone.
Note that this vector need not be of unit length, and is only used if ORIENTATION=VECTOR
for OPTION=APEX or BASE.

SANGLE
Semi-angle of the cone. Note that this parameter is only used when OPTION=APEX.

RADIUS
Radius of the cone. Note that this parameter is only used when OPTION=BASE or END-
POINTS.

LENGTH
Length of the cone. Note that this parameter is only used when OPTION=APEX or BASE.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-123

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY CYLINDER

BODY CYLINDER NAME OPTION POSITION ORIENTATION

CX1 CX2 CX3 CENTER SYSTEM AXIS
AX AY AZ RADIUS LENGTH P1 P2 SHEET

The command BODY CYLINDER defines a solid geometry cylinder shape. A number of
options allow for the position, orientation, and dimensions of the cylinder shape. The
cylinder body may be used in conjunction with other body shapes to form more complex
geometries using the Boolean operation commands BODY MERGE, BODY SUBTRACT,
BODY INTERSECT. A body may be meshed directly via the GBODY command (in which case
free-form meshing is necessarily used - there is no intrinsic parametric description of the
body to support mapped meshing).
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

Radius

P1 Center P2 Axis

Length

NAME [(highest body label number) + 1]

Label number of the body to be defined.

OPTION [CENTERED]
This parameter offers basic options for defining the cylinder:

CENTERED The cylinder is defined by its center, orientation and dimensions.

ENDPOINTS The cylinder is defined by two end points and its radius.

POSITION [VECTOR]
Specifies how the center of the cylinder is located. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=CENTERED.

6-124 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY CYLINDER Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

VECTOR The center of the cylinder is specified by a position vector

(CX1,CX2,CX3) - with components in terms of a given
coordinate system (SYSTEM).

POINT The center of the cylinder is specified by an existing geometry

point (CENTER), possibly a vertex of another body.

ORIENTATION [SYSTEM]
Specifies how the direction of the cylinder axis is defined. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=CENTERED.

SYSTEM The cylinder axis is aligned with one of the base Cartesian axes
(AXIS) of a local coordinate system (SYSTEM) (possibly the
global coordinate system).

VECTOR The cylinder axis is defined via a direction vector (AX,AY,AZ) in

the global coordinate system.

CX1 [0.0]
CX2 [0.0]
CX3 [0.0]
The position vector of the center of the cylinder, given in terms of curvilinear components of
the local coordinate system specified by SYSTEM. Note that these parameters are only used
when POSITION=VECTOR and OPTION=CENTERED.

CENTER
The label number of an existing geometry point indicating the center of the cylinder . This
parameter is only used when POSITION=POINT and OPTION=CENTERED, and in that case
an existing geometry point must be specified (no default is assumed).

SYSTEM [0]
The number of a local coordinate system which may be used to position the center of the
cylinder and/or define the cylinder axis direction. The center of the cylinder may be given in
terms of the curvilinear coordinates (CX1,CX2,CX3) of this local system, when
POSITION=VECTOR. For ORIENTATION= SYSTEM the cylinder axis direction is aligned
with one of the base Cartesian system axes of this system (AXIS), see command SYSTEM.
This parameter is only used when OPTION=CENTERED and POSITION=VECTOR or ORIEN-
TATION= SYSTEM. Note that the default is chosen as the global Cartesian coordinate
system.

AXIS [XL]
Indicates which of the base Cartesian axes of the local coordinate system (SYSTEM) is to be
used for the direction of the cylinder axis. This parameter is used only when
ORIENTATION=SYSTEM and OPTION=CENTERED. {XL/YL/ZL}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-125

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY CYLINDER

AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Global Cartesian components of a direction vector specifying the cylinder axis direction. This
vector is only used when ORIENTATION=VECTOR and OPTION=CENTERED.

RADIUS
The radius of the cylinder, which must be input with a positive value (no default is assumed).

LENGTH
The axial length of the cylinder. This parameter is used only when OPTION=CENTERED, in
which case it must be input with a positive value (no default is assumed).

P1
P2
Label numbers of two existing geometry points which implicitly define the location, orienta-
tion, and length of the cylinder - the only other required data to complete the cylinder
definition is the radius (RADIUS). These parameters are only used when
OPTION=ENDPOINTS, in which case they must be distinct and non-coincident (also, no
defaults are assumed).

SHEET [NO]
Create cylindrical sheet body instead of solid body. This parameter is not used in ADINA-M
for Open Cascade. {NO/YES}

6-126 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY DEFEATURE Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

BODY DEFEATURE NAME METHOD CRITERIA LENGTH AREA

facei

The command BODY DEFEATURE removes small features (faces) from a body. This command
is not applicable in ADINA-M for Open Cascade.

NAME
Label number of the body.

METHOD [AUTOMATIC]
Determines the method by which the small features are removed. {AUTOMATIC/MANUAL}

AUTOMATIC Small features are removed based on the size of the features.

MANUAL Small features are removed based on the given face labels.

CRITERIA [EDGE]
Determines the criteria governing the defeaturing process. {EDGE/FACE/BOTH}

When METHOD=AUTOMATIC, the following criteria can be used:

EDGE Faces with all edge length less than the value given in parameter LENGTH will
be removed.

FACE Faces with face area less than the value given in parameter AREA will be
removed.

BOTH Both edge length and face area will be considered to remove the faces.

LENGTH
When CRITERIA=EDGE or BOTH, this parameter will be used to determine if the faces should
be removed.

AREA
When CRITERIA=FACE or BOTH, this parameter will be used to determine if the
faces should be removed.

facei
Face labels to be removed if METHOD=MANUAL.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-127

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY DUPLICATE

BODY DUPLICATE NAME PARENT NCOPY

bodyi

The command BODY DUPLICATE defines solid geometries by duplicating existing bodies.
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

NAME [(highest body label number) + 1]

Label number of the body to be defined.

PARENT
The label of the body to be duplicated.

NCOPY
Defines the number copies resulting from the duplication.

bodyi
Label number of body to be duplicated.

6-128 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-129

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY HOLLOW

BODY HOLLOW NAME THICKNESS

facei thicknessi

The command BODY HOLLOW hollows a solid geometry body with thickness THICKNESS.
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed. This command is not
applicable in ADINA-M for Open Cascade.

NAME
Label number of the body to be hollowed. An existing body name must be given.

THICKNESS
The thickness of all the faces except the faces listed in the table input.

facei
Label numbers of faces.

thicknessi
Thickness for the given face label number.

Note: If thicknessi = 0.0, then facei is removed.

6-130 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY INTERSECT Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

BODY INTERSECT NAME KEEP-TOOL

bodyi

The command BODY INTERSECT takes an existing solid body (the target) and modifies it
by taking the intersection of it with a set of other (overlapping) solid bodies (tools). This
definition corresponds to a Boolean intersection of several bodies.
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

NAME
Label number of the (target) body to be modified. (No default - an existing body name must
be given.)

KEEP-TOOL [NO]
Indicates whether or not the tools are to be kept after applying the command BODY INTER-
SECT. {NO/YES}

bodyi
Label numbers of other bodies which are to be intersected with the target body. Note that
bodyi cannot be the same as that specified for parameter NAME, and repeated body names
are only counted once. Also, each body must overlap some part of each of the other bodies,
including the target body - i.e. a solid body must result from the intersection operations - an
empty body cannot be defined.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-131

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY LOFTED

BODY LOFTED NAME ENTITY DELETE-ENTITIES

entityi bodyi pointi reversei

Creates a sheet body by lofting through a set of lines or edges, a solid body by lofting
through a set of surfaces, faces, and sheet bodies. This command is not applicable in
ADINA-M for Open Cascade.

NAME [(highest body label number)+1]

Label number of the body to be defined.

ENTITY
The set of entities used in the lofting process. {LINE/EDGE/SURFACE/FACE/SHEET}
LINE To define a sheet body by lofting a set of lines.
EDGE To define a sheet body by lofting a set of edges.
SURFACE To define a solid body by lofting two surfaces.
FACE To define a solid body by lofting two faces.

SHEET To define a solid body by lofting two sheet bodies.

DELETE-ENTITIES [YES]
Indicates whether the entities are to be deleted after applying the command.{YES/NO}

Entities are lines, surfaces or sheets if ENTITY=LINE, SURFACE or SHEET respectively.

This parameter is only used when ENTITY=LINE, SURFACE, or SHEET.

entityi
Label of entities used to create the lofted body. Entity type depends on the ENTITY param-
eter.

bodyi
Label of parent body of edge or face entity when ENTITY = EDGE or FACE. bodyi is not
i
used if ENTITY = LINE, SURFACE or SHEET.

pointi
Point label numbers of the start points on each entity.

reversei [NO]
Indicates whether or not the orientation of the entities needs to be reversed. {NO/YES}
Please note that the normals of the surfaces/faces/sheets must be oriented in the same
direction as the loft direction. Parameter reversal can be used to reverse the direction if
necessary.

6-132 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY MERGE Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

BODY MERGE NAME KEEP-TOOL MERGE-IMPRINT

bodyi

The command BODY MERGE takes an existing solid body (the target) and modifies it by
joining it together with a set of other solid bodies (tools). This definition corresponds to a
Boolean union of several bodies.

This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

NAME
Label number of the (target) body to be modified. (No default - an existing body name must
be given.)

KEEP-TOOL [NO]
Indicates whether or not the tools are to be kept after applying the command BODY MERGE.
{NO/YES}

MERGE-IMPRINT [YES]
Merge all mergeable imprinted edges created by the command.{YES/NO}

bodyi
Label numbers of other bodies which are to be merged with the target body. Note that bodyi
cannot be the same as that specified for parameter NAME, and repeated body names are only
counted once.

Example

1. The MERGE-IMPRINT parameter is useful when generating a coincident mesh across

multiple bodies. For example, consider the two bodies shown in the Figure (a). Generating a
coincident mesh across the two bodies is difficult in this case as the edges are of different
lengths (see the exploded view in Fig. (b)) and the subdivision data has to be duplicated
for both bodies (that is, we must subdivide both Edge 3 of Body 1 and Edge 1 of Body 2). A
better approach would be to first merge the two bodies into one body using BODY MERGE
with MERGE-IMPRINT=NO (Fig. (c)) and then mesh. If we use MERGE-IMPRINT=YES,
the imprinted edge is merged (Fig. (d)). The following command gives the result shown in
Fig. (c).

BODY MERGE NAME=1 KEEP-TOOL=NO MERGE-IMPRINT=NO

2

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-133

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY MERGE

2. Note that the MERGE-IMPRINT option can be used to merge imprinted edges for 3D
bodies as well as for sheet bodies.

E1 E1

E2 B1, F1 E4 E2 B1, F1 E4

E3 E3

E1 E1

E2 B2, F1 E4 E2 B2, F1 E4

E3 E3

(a) Geometry to be meshed (b) Exploded view

E2 E2

E3 B1, F1 E1 E3 E1

B1, F1
E8 E7 E7

E4 B1, F2 E6 E4 E6

E5 E5

(c) MERGE-IMPRINT=NO (d) MERGE-IMPRINT=YES

Generating a coincident mesh across multiple bodies

6-134 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY MID-SURFACE Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

BODY MID-SURFACE NAME BODY SEW THICKNESS DELETE-BODY

REDUNDANT SEWGAP

The command BODY MID-SURFACE creates sheet bodies from a thin-walled solid body.
Each thin wall must have two faces and at least one of the following conditions must be met:
1. Both faces are planar.
2. The two faces are offsets of each other.

This command is not applicable in ADINA-M for Open Cascade.

NAME [(current highest body label number)+1]

Body label number to be created.

BODY
Body label number of the thin-walled body that will be used to create sheet bodies.

SEW [NO]
Indicates whether sheet bodies are to be sewn together.{NO/YES}

THICKNESS
A sheet body will be created if the thickness of the thin wall is less than THICKNESS.

DELETE-BODY [NO]
Indicates whether the thin-walled body is to be deleted when sheet bodies are created. {NO/
YES}

REDUNDANT [KEEP]
Indicates whether the redundant topology is to be removed.{KEEP/REMOVE}

SEWGAP [0.01]
Factor used to determine the sewing gap value. The gap value used to sew the sheet bodies
is SEWGAP*(the largest of the maximum coordinate differences in each global coordinate
direction considering all the sheet bodies that are being sewn together). This parameter is
used only when SEW=YES.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-135

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY OFFSET

BODY OFFSET NAME THICKNESS

facei thicknessi

Offsets all the faces of a solid body by THICKNESS, except those faces listed in the input
table, i.e., except for facei. These faces are offset by thicknessi.

A positive thickness indicates an outward offset (i.e. in the direction of the face normal), a
negative thickness indicates an inward offset, and zero thickness indicates no offset.

This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed. It is supported for both
Parasolid and Open Cascade.

NAME
Label number of the body whose faces are to be offset.

THICKNESS
Offset thickness of all faces, except those faces listed in the input table, i.e. except for facei.

facei
Label numbers of faces that have a different offset thickness.

thicknessi
Offset thickness of facei.

Example

The following command gives the result shown in the figure below.

BODY OFFSET NAME=1 THICKNESS=2

2 0

6-136 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY OFFSET Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

Face 2 (no T =2 Body 1 before

offset applied) BODY OFFSET

T =2
Body 1 after
BODY OFFSET

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-137

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY OPTION

BODY OPTION CHECK

This command provides the options for ADINA-M bodies.

CHECK [YES]
Geometry checking for bodies in ADINA-M commands. {YES/NO}

6-138 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY PARTITION Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

BODY PARTITION NAME EXTEND

facei

The command BODY PARTITION takes an existing solid body and partition it with a set of
faces of the body, resulting in two or more bodies.
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed. This command is not
applicable in ADINA-M for Open Cascade.

Body 2

Face 1

Body 1 Body 1

Body 1 before partition Body 1 and 2 after

partition by face 1

NAME
Label number of the body to be partitioned. (No default - an existing body name must be
given.)

EXTEND [NO]
Indicates whether or not the faces are extended. {NO/YES}

facei
Label numbers of faces used to partition the body. Note that repeated face names will only be
counted once. Also, when EXTEND=YES and more than one face is used to partition the
body, these extended faces should not intersect.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-139

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY PIPE

BODY PIPE NAME OPTION POSITION ORIENTATION

CX1 CX2 CX3 CENTER SYSTEM AXIS AX AY AZ
RADIUS LENGTH P1 P2 THICKNESS

The command BODY PIPE defines a solid geometry pipe shape. A number of options allow
for the position, orientation, and dimensions of the pipe shape. The pipe body may be used
in conjunction with other body shapes to form more complex geometries using the Boolean
operation commands BODY MERGE, BODY SUBTRACT, BODY INTERSECT. A body can be
meshed directly via the GBODY command (in which case free-form meshing is necessarily
used - there is no intrinsic parametric description of the body to support mapped meshing).
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

NAME [(highest body label number)+1]

Radius

P1 Center P2 Axis

Length Thickness

Label number of the body to be defined.

OPTION [CENTERED]
This parameter offers basic options for defining the pipe:

CENTERED The pipe is defined by its center, orientation and dimensions.

ENDPOINTS The pipe is defined by two end points and dimensions.

POSITION [VECTOR]
Specifies how the center of the pipe is located. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=CENTERED.

VECTOR The center of the pipe is specified by a position vector

(CX1,CX2,CX3) - with components in terms of a given
coordinate system (SYSTEM).

POINT The center of the pipe is specified by an existing geometry point

6-140 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY PIPE Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

(CENTER), possibly a vertex of another body.

ORIENTATION [SYSTEM]
Specifies how the direction of the pipe axis is defined. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=CENTERED.

SYSTEM The pipe axis is aligned with one of the base Cartesian axes
(AXIS) of a local coordinate system (SYSTEM), possibly the
global coordinate system.

VECTORS The pipe axis is defined via a direction vector (AX,AY,AZ) in the
global coordinate system.

CX1 [0.0]
CX2 [0.0]
CX3 [0.0]
The position vector of the center of the pipe, given in terms of curvilinear components of the
local coordinate system specified by SYSTEM. Note that these parameters are only used
when POSITION=VECTOR and OPTION=CENTERED.

CENTER
The label number of an existing geometry point indicating the center of the pipe . This
parameter is only used when POSITION=POINT and OPTION=CENTERED, and in that case
an existing geometry point must be specified (no default is assumed).

SYSTEM [0]
Label number of a local coordinate system which may be used to position the center of the
pipe and/or define the pipe axis direction. The center of the pipe can be given in terms of the
curvilinear coordinates (CX1,CX2,CX3) of this local system, when POSITION=VECTOR. For
ORIENTATION= SYSTEM the pipe axis direction is aligned with one of the base Cartesian
system axes of this system (AXIS), see command SYSTEM. This parameter is only used
when OPTION=CENTERED and POSITION=VECTOR or ORIENTATION=SYSTEM. Note
that the default is chosen as the global Cartesian coordinate system.

AXIS [XL]
Indicates which of the base Cartesian axes of the local coordinate system (SYSTEM) is to be
used for the direction of the pipe axis. This parameter is used only when
ORIENTATION=SYSTEM and OPTION=CENTERED. {XL/YL/ZL}

AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Global Cartesian components of a direction vector specifying the pipe axis direction. This
vector is only used when ORIENTATION=VECTOR and OPTION=CENTERED.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-141

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY PIPE

RADIUS
The outer radius of the pipe, which must be input with a positive value (no default is as-
sumed).

LENGTH
The axial length of the pipe. This parameter is used only when OPTION=CENTERED, in
which case it must be input with a positive value (no default is assumed).

P1
P2
Label numbers of two existing geometry points which implicitly define the location, orienta-
tion, and length of the pipe - the only other required data to complete the pipe definition is
the radius and thickness (RADIUS, THICKNESS). P1 and P2 are only used when
OPTION=ENDPOINTS, in which case they must be distinct and non-coincident (also, no
defaults are assumed).

THICKNESS
The thickness of the pipe, which must be input with a positive value less than RADIUS (no
default is assumed).

6-142 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY PRISM Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

BODY PRISM NAME OPTION POSITION ORIENTATION CX1 CX2 CX3

CENTER SYSTEM AXIS POLE AX AY AZ BX BY BZ
RADIUS LENGTH P1 P2 P3 NSIDES SHEET

The command BODY PRISM defines a prismatic solid geometry shape, which is a cylinder
with a regular polygonal cross-section. A number of options allow for the position, orienta-
tion, and dimensions of the prism shape. The prism body may be used in conjunction with
other body shapes to form more complex geometries using the Boolean operation commands
BODY MERGE, BODY SUBTRACT, BODY INTERSECT. A body may be meshed directly via
the GBODY command (in which case free-form meshing is necessarily used - there is no
intrinsic parametric description of the body to support mapped meshing).
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

P3 (the pole)

P1 Center P2

Axis

Radius
Length

NAME [(highest body label number) + 1]

Label number of the body to be defined.

OPTION [CENTERED]
This parameter offers basic options for defining the prism:

CENTERED The prism is defined by its center, orientation, dimensions and

number of sides.

POINTS The prism is defined by two end points, a point giving the pole
direction, its radius and number of sides.

POSITION [VECTOR]
Specifies how the center of the prism is located. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=CENTERED.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-143

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY PRISM

VECTOR The center of the prism is specified by a position vector

(CX1,CX2,CX3) - with components in terms of a given
coordinate system (SYSTEM).

POINT The center of the prism is specified by an existing geometry point

(CENTER), possibly a vertex of another body.

ORIENTATION [SYSTEM]
Specifies how both the axial and pole directions of the prism are defined (the pole direction
passes through a vertex of the polygonal cross-section). (This parameter is only used when
OPTION=CENTERED.

SYSTEM The prism axis is aligned with one of the base Cartesian axes
(AXIS), and the pole with another axis (POLE), of a local coordinate
system (SYSTEM), possibly the global coordinate system.

VECTORS The prism axis and pole directions are defined via direction vectors
(AX,AY,AZ), (BX, BY, BZ) in the global coordinate system.

CX1 [0.0]
CX2 [0.0]
CX3 [0.0]
The position vector of the center of the prism, given in terms of curvilinear components of
the local coordinate system specified by SYSTEM. Note that these parameters are only used
when POSITION=VECTOR and OPTION=CENTERED.

CENTER
The label number of an existing geometry point indicating the center of the prism . This
parameter is only used when POSITION=POINT and OPTION=CENTERED, and in that case
an existing geometry point must be specified (no default is assumed).

SYSTEM [0]
Label number of a local coordinate system which may be used to position the center of the
prism and/or define both the axis and pole directions of the prism. The center of the prism
can be given in terms of the curvilinear coordinates (CX1,CX2,CX3) of this local system,
when POSITION=VECTOR. For ORIENTATION=SYSTEM the prism axis and pole directions
are aligned with two of the base Cartesian system axes of this system (AXIS, POLE), see
command SYSTEM. This parameter is only used when OPTION=CENTERED and
POSITION=VECTOR or ORIENTATION=SYSTEM. Note that the default is chosen as the
global Cartesian coordinate system.

AXIS [XL]
Indicates which of the base Cartesian axes of the local coordinate system (SYSTEM) is to be
used for the direction of the prism axis. This parameter is used only when

6-144 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY PRISM Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

ORIENTATION=SYSTEM and OPTION=CENTERED. {XL/YL/ZL}

POLE [YL]
Indicates which of the base Cartesian axes of the local coordinate system (SYSTEM) is to be
used for the pole direction of the prism. This parameter is used only when
ORIENTATION=SYSTEM and OPTION=CENTERED. {XL/YL/ZL}

AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Global Cartesian components of a direction vector specifying the prism axis direction. Note
that this vector need not be of unit length, and is only used when ORIENTATION=VECTOR
and OPTION=CENTERED.

BX [0.0]
BY [1.0]
BZ [0.0]
Global Cartesian components of a direction vector, which specifies, in conjunction with
vector (AX,AY,AZ), the local axis-pole plane of the block orientation. The vector product, or
cross product, of (AX,AY,AZ) with (BX,BY,BZ) gives the local z-direction, and the pole
direction is then given by the right hand rule. Note that this vector need not be of unit
length, and is only used when ORIENTATION=VECTOR and OPTION=CENTERED.

RADIUS
The radius of the prism, i.e. the distance of the points of the polygonal cross-section from the
prism axis. This value must be input with a positive value (no default is assumed).

LENGTH
The axial length of the prism. This parameter is used only when OPTION=CENTERED, in
which case it must be input with a positive value (no default is assumed).

P1, P2, P3
Label numbers of three non-collinear existing geometry points which implicitly define the
location, orientation, and length of the prism - the only other required data to complete the
prism definition is the radius (RADIUS). The points P1, P2 are taken to lie at the end points
on the axis of the prism, whilst point P3 determines the pole direction of the prism. These
parameters are only used when OPTION=POINTS, in which case they must be distinct,
non-coincident and non-collinear (also, no defaults are assumed).

NSIDES [3]
The number of sides of the polygonal cross-section of the prism. NSIDES must be at least 3.

SHEET [NO]
Create cylindrical sheet body instead of solid body. This parameter is not used in ADINA-M
for Open Cascade. {NO/YES}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-145

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY PROJECT

BODY PROJECT NAME FACE DIRECTION VECTOR P1 P2 DX DY

DZ DELETE-LINE

linei

Projects lines onto a face of the body. This command is not applicable in ADINA-M for Open
Cascade.

NAME
Label number of the body to be projected onto. An existing body name must be given.

FACE
Label number of the face to be projected onto.

DIRECTION [NORMAL]
Specifies the direction of projection. {NORMAL/VECTOR}

NORMAL Lines project to the face in the direction of the face normal.
VECTOR Lines project to the face along the given vector direction.

VECTOR [COMPONENTS]
Specifies how the vector is defined. (This parameter is only used when DIRECTION =
VECTOR.) {COMPONENTS/POINTS}

COMPONENTS The vector is defined by DX, DY, and DZ.

POINTS The vector is defined by two points (P1 and P2).

P1
P2
Label numbers of geometry points to define the projection vector. (These two parameters are
only used when VECTOR=POINTS.)

DX
DY
DZ
Components of vector to define the projection vector. (These three parameters are only used
when VECTOR=COMPONENTS.)

DELETE-LINE [YES]
Indicates whether or not the lines are to be deleted after projection is done. {YES/NO}

linei
Label numbers of geometry lines used to project to the face.

6-146 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY REMOVE-ENTITY Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

BODY REMOVE-ENTITY NAME OPTION

entityi

The command BODY REMOVE-ENTITY removes redundant points or edges from a body.
This command is not applicable in ADINA-M for Open Cascade.

NAME
Label number of the body from which points or edges are to be removed. An existing body
name must be given.

OPTION [POINT]
This parameter specifies the option to remove points or edges. {POINT/EDGE}
POINT Remove points.
EDGE Remove edges.

entityi
Label number of point (OPTION=POINT) or edges (OPTION=EDGE) to be removed.

Note:
When an edge is removed from the body, the associated points are also removed if they are
redundant as well.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-147

Chap. 6 Geometry definition

This page intentionally left blank

6-148 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY REVOLVED Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

BODY REVOLVED NAME MODE BODY FACE ANGLE SYSTEM AXIS

ALINE AP1 AP2 X0 Y0 Z0 XA YA ZA MESH
NODES SUBSTRUCTURE 2D-EGROUP 3D-EGROUP NDIV
NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE DELETE-FACE-ELEMENT
MERGE RATIO PROGRESSION CBIAS

face i body i

Creates a revolved body on an existing body by rotating a face of the body about an axis.

Face 1

Body 1 before revolution Body 1 after revolution

Face 1 is revolved

NAME [(highest body label number) + 1]

Label number of the body to be defined.

MODE [AXIS]
Selects the method of defining the axis of revolution used to create the body. This controls
which parameters actually define the revolved body other parameters are ignored.

AXIS The axis of revolution is taken as a given coordinate axis of a coordinate

system (FACE, ANGLE, SYSTEM, AXIS).

LINE The axis of revolution is taken as the straight line between the end points
of a given geometry line (which is not necessarily straight, but must be
open , i.e., have non-coincident end points) (FACE, ANGLE, ALINE).

POINTS The axis of revolution is taken as the straight line between two given (non-
coincident) geometry points (FACE,ANGLE,AP1,AP2).

VECTORS The axis of revolution is defined by an position vector and a direction

vector (FACE, ANGLE, X0, Y0, Z0, XA, YA, ZA).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-149

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY REVOLVED

BODY [0]
Label number of the body to be revolved.

FACE [0]
Label number of the face to be revolved.

ANGLE
Angle of rotation (in degrees). The sign of the angle is given by the right hand rule i.e., if
you curl your fingers around the axis of revolution, with the thumb pointing along the axis,
then a positive angle is in the direction of the curl of the fingers. {-360 ANGLE 360}

SYSTEM [current active coordinate system]

Label number of a coordinate system. One of the axes of this cartesian coordinate system
may be used to define the axis of revolution, via parameter AXIS, when MODE=AXIS.

AXIS [XL]
Selects which of the basic axes (XL,YL,ZL) of the local cartesian coordinate system, given by
parameter SYSTEM, is used as the axis of revolution {XL/YL/ZL}.

ALINE
Label number of a geometry line which defines the axis of revolution. The direction of the axis
is taken from the start point of the line to the end point of the line.

AP1, AP2
Label numbers of geometry points which define the axis of revolution. The direction of the
axis is taken from point AP1 topoint AP2.

X0, Y0, Z0 [0.0]

Global coordinates of the position vector defining the axis of rotation when
MODE=VECTORS.

XA [1.0]
YA, ZA [0.0]
Components (with respect to the global coordinate system) of the axis of rotation when
MODE=VECTORS.

MESH [NO]
Indicates whether or not the mesh is generated while a swept body is created. If MESH =
YES, 3-D elements can be created if 2-D elements exist on the face.

NODES [0]
The number of nodes per element of the mesh. {0/8/20/27}
For the default 0, the program assigns the number of nodes per element in the resulting 3-D
mesh based on the corresponding number of nodes of the 2-D mesh on the face, as follows:

6-150 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY REVOLVED Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

2-D 3-D
4 8
8 20
9 27

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure label number]

The label number of the substructure (ADINA) in which the elements and nodes are created.

2D-EGROUP [largest element group of the revolved face]

The element group label of the elements on the revolved face.

3D-EGROUP [current group label number]

The element group label of the elements on the revolved body.

NDIV [1]
Number of elements created along the sweeping direction.

NCOINCIDE [BOUNDARIES]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking. {ALL/BOUNDARIES/NO/GROUP}

ALL The global coordinates of all generated nodes are compared against those
of existing nodes of the substructure (ADINA) or model (ADINA-T/-F). If
there is coincidence to within NCTOLERANCE * (max. difference in global
coordinates between all previous nodes of the substructure or model), then
no new node is created at that location, i.e., the previous node label number
is assumed.

BOUNDARIES Coincidence checking is carried out for the nodes generated at vertices,
edges, and faces of the geometry bodies.

NO No nodal coincidence checking is carried out.

GROUP Coincidence checking is carried for the nodes generated with the same
element group.

NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

DELETE-FACE-ELEMENT [ALL]
Indicates whether elements on the 2-D mesh are deleted.

ALL Delete elements on 2-D mesh and also the element group if it does not

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-151

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY REVOLVED

contain any elements.

ELEMENT Delete elements on 2-D mesh but do not delete the element group.

NO Do not delete any elements.

Note:
2-D meshes include meshes of 2-D elements, and also of shell elements. In other words,
whereever 2-D elements are referred to, shell elements can also be used.

MERGE [NO]
Indicates whether the newly created bodies and the existing bodies will be merged.{NO/
YES}.

RATIO [1.0]
Ratio of lengths of the last to the first element edges along the revolved edges. The grading
of element lengths is governed by PROGRESSION.

PROGRESSION [GEOMETRIC]
When element edges are to be graded along the revolved edges (i.e., when RATIO 1.0),
then the distribution of element edge lengths can be selected from the
following.{GEOMETRIC/ARITHMETIC}

GEOMETRIC The ratio of lengths of adjacent element edges is constant.

ARITHMETIC The difference in length of each element edge from its adjacent
edges is constant.

CBIAS [NO]
Indicates whether central biasing is used or not. {NO/YES}

bodyi
Label number of body to be revolved.

facei
Label number of face to be revolved.

6-152 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-153

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY SECTION

BODY SECTION NAME KEEP-SHEET KEEP-IMPRINT OPTION

namei bodyi

The command BODY SECTION partitions an existing solid body using a set of sheets
(defined using SHEET PLANE) or faces of other bodies, resulting in two or more bodies. This
command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed. This command is not applicable
in ADINA-M for Open Cascade.

NAME
Label number of the body to be partitioned. An existing body name must be given.

KEEP-SHEET [NO]
Indicates whether sheets are to be kept after partitioning. This parameter is used only when
OPTION = SHEET. {NO/YES}

KEEP-IMPRINT [NO]
Indicates whether imprinted edges created by the section operation are to be kept. {NO/
YES}

OPTION [SHEET]
Specifies whether sheets or faces are used to partition the body. {SHEET/FACE}

SHEET Use sheets to section the body.

FACE Use faces of bodies to section the body.

namei
Label number of a sheet (OPTION=SHEET) or face (OPTION=FACE).

Note: The following remarks apply to faces also.

- orientation of two adjacent sheets should be the same.
- each sheet (or set of connected sheets) must divide the body into completely
separate bodies;
- each sheet (or set of connected sheets) cannot have its boundary within the body
to be sectioned;
- the sheets cannot intersect;
- three or more sheets cannot meet at a common edge.

bodyi
Label number of a solid body. Used when OPTION=FACE.

6-154 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY SEW Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

BODY SEW NAME SOLID DELETE-BODY HEAL SEWGAP

bodyi

The command BODY SEW sews a set of sheet bodies into a sewn body.

NAME [(highest body label number) + 1]

Label number of the body to be defined.

SOLID [YES]
Indicates whether a solid body is to be created. If SOLID=NO, the created sewn body is a
sheet body.{YES/NO}

DELETE-BODY [YES]
Indicates whether the sheet bodies are deleted after the sewn body is created.{YES/NO}

HEAL [NO]
If the resulting sewn body does not have a complete boundary, then any holes are treated as
wounds which are healed as specified by HEAL. Only used when SOLID=YES. This param-
eter is not used in ADINA-M for Open Cascade.{NO/CAP/EXTEND}

NO Do not heal wounds. Any holes (gaps) will only be closed if they are smaller
than the sewing gap.

CAP Create a face formed by all edges of the hole to cover up (cap) the hole.

EXTEND Faces around the hole are extended until they cover the hole.

SEWGAP [0.01]
Factor used to determine the sewing gap value. The gap value used to sew the body is
SEWGAP * (the largest of the maximum coordinate differences in each global coordinate
direction considering all the bodies that are being sewn together).

bodyi
Label numbers of sheet bodies which are used to create the sewn body.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-155

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY SHEET

BODY SHEET NAME OPTION LINE DELETE-LINE POSITION OFFSET X Y Z

POINT NX NY NZ P1 P2 P3 SYSTEM MERGE-SHEET
MERGE-IMPRINT DELETE-BODY

linei pointi facei bodyi

The command BODY SHEET defines a sheet body or sheet bodies.

NAME [(highest body label number) + 1]

Label number of the body to be defined.

OPTION [LINE]
Selects the method for the planar sheet definition:

POLYGON Sheet defined by a set of co-planar points.

XPLANE Sheet defined by normal vector in X direction.

YPLANE Sheet defined by normal vector in Y direction.

ZPLANE Sheet defined by normal vector in Z direction.

POINT-NORMAL Sheet defined by a point and a normal vector.

THREE-POINT Sheet defined by three points.

LINE Sheet defined by lines.

FACE Sheet defined by the faces of bodies.

LINE
Label number of geometry line comprising the external loop of the sheet body.

DELETE-LINE [YES]
Indicates whether or not the lines are to be deleted after applying the command BODY
SHEET. {YES/NO}

POSITION [VECTOR]
Selects the method to define origin point (only for OPTION=POINT-NORMAL):

VECTOR Origin is defined by a position vector (X,Y,Z).

POINT Origin is defined by an existing geometry point (POINT).

6-156 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY SHEET Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

OFFSET
Defines position of the planar sheet along the normal vector. This parameter is only used
when OPTION= XPLANE, YPLANE, or ZPLANE.

X, Y, Z [0.0,0.0,0.0]
Defines origin of the vector normal to the sheet plane. These parameters are only used when
POSITION=VECTOR and OPTION=POINT-NORMAL.

POINT
Defines geometry point - origin of the planar sheet. This parameter is only used when
POSITION=POINT and OPTION=POINT-NORMAL.

NX,NY,NZ [1.0,0.0,0.0]
Defines vector normal to the planar sheet. These parameters are only used when
OPTION=POINT-NORMAL.

P1,P2,P3
Label numbers of three existing geometry points which define planar sheet. This parameters
are only used when OPTION=THREE-POINT (no defaults are assumed).

SYSTEM [0]
Label number of a local coordinate system. This parameter is used only when
OPTION=XPLANE, YPLANE, ZPLANE, or POINT-NORMAL. Only the Cartesian coordi-
nate system is allowed.

MERGE-SHEET [YES]
Indicates whether or not the sheet bodies are merged when sheet bodies are created. This
parameter is only used when OPTION=FACE. {NO/YES}

MERGE-IMPRINT [NO]
Indicates whether or not the imprinted edges are merged. This parameter is only used when
MERGE-SHEET=YES. {NO/YES}

DELETE-BODY [YES]
Indicates whether or not the bodies are deleted when the faces are converted into sheet
bodies. This parameter is only used when OPTION=FACE. {YES/NO}

linei
Label numbers of geometry lines comprising the internal loops of the sheet body.

pointi
Label numbers of geometry points.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-157

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY SHEET

facei
Label numbers of geometry faces.

bodyi
Label numbers of geometry bodies.

Note: linei is only used when OPTION=LINE

pointi is only used when OPTION=POLYGON
facei and bodyi are used only when OPTION=FACE

6-158 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-159

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY SPHERE

BODY SPHERE NAME POSITION DIMENSION CX1 CX2 CX3

SYSTEM CENTER RADIUS POINT

The command BODY SPHERE defines a solid geometry sphere shape. The sphere body may
be used in conjunction with other body shapes to form more complex geometries using the
Boolean operation commands BODY MERGE, BODY SUBTRACT, BODY INTERSECT. A
body may be meshed directly via the GBODY command (in which case free-form meshing is
necessarily used - there is no intrinsic parametric description of the body to support mapped
meshing).
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

Radius Center Point

NAME [(highest body label number) + 1]

Label number of the body to be defined.

POSITION [VECTOR]
Specifies how the sphere center is located:

VECTOR The center of the sphere is specified by a position vector

(CX1,CX2,CX3) - with components in terms of a given
coordinate system (SYSTEM).

POINT The center of the sphere is specified by an existing geometry

point (CENTER), possibly a vertex of another body.

DIMENSION [RADIUS]
Specifies the size of the sphere:

RADIUS The radius of the sphere is input via parameter RADIUS.

POINT An existing geometry point lying on the surface of the sphere is

used to determine its radius.

6-160 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY SPHERE Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

CX1 [0.0]
CX2 [0.0]
CX3 [0.0]
The position vector of the center of the sphere, given in terms of curvilinear components of
the local coordinate system specified by SYSTEM. Note that these parameters are only used
when POSITION=VECTOR.

SYSTEM [0]
Label number of a local coordinate system which may be used to position the center of the
sphere, in terms of the curvilinear coordinates (CX1,CX2,CX3) of this local system, when
POSITION=VECTOR. This parameter is only used when POSITION=VECTOR. Note that the
default is chosen as the global Cartesian coordinate system.

CENTER
The center of the sphere - the label number of an existing geometry point. This parameter is
only used when POSITION=POINT, and in that case an existing geometry point must be
specified (no default is assumed).

RADIUS
The radius of the sphere, used only when DIMENSION=RADIUS, in which case it must be
input with a positive value (no default is assumed).

POINT
Label number of an existing geometry point which implicitly defines the radius of the sphere
(the point is assumed to be on the surface of the sphere). This parameter is only used when
DIMENSION=POINT, in which case it must be non-coincident with the sphere center (also,
no default is assumed).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-161

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY SUBTRACT

BODY SUBTRACT NAME KEEP-TOOL KEEP-IMPRINT

bodyi

The command BODY SUBTRACT takes an existing solid body (the target) and modifies it
by removing from it a set of other solid bodies (tools). This definition corresponds to a
Boolean subtraction of one or more bodies from a given solid body. E.g. to drill a hole
through a body you could subtract a cylindrical body from it.
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

NAME
Label number of the (target) body to be modified. (No default - an existing body name must
be given.)

KEEP-TOOL [NO]
Indicates whether or not the tools are to be kept after applying the command BODY SUB-
TRACT. {NO/YES}

KEEP-IMPRINT [NO]
Indicates whether or not the imprinted edges created by the Boolean operation are to be
merged with the target body. This parameter is not used in ADINA-M for Open Cascade.
{NO/YES}

bodyi
Label numbers of other bodies which are to be subtracted from the target body. Note that
bodyi cannot be the same as that specified for parameter NAME, and repeated body names
are only counted once. In the case of ADINA-M for Open Cascade, if one bodyi is a sheet
body, then only one bodyi is allowed, except in the case when bodyi and the main BODY are
planar sheet bodies that have the same face normal (see figure below for an example).

body1

body3
body2

BODY

6-162 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY SWEEP Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

BODY SWEEP NAME BODY FACE OPTION DX DY DZ SYSTEM LINE

DELETE-LINE ALIGNMENT MESH NODES SUBSTRUCTURE
2D-EGROUP 3D-EGROUP NDIV NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE
DELETE-FACE-ELEMENT TWIST-ANGLE BODY2 EDGE MERGE
RATIO PROGRESSION CBIAS

bodyi facei

Creates a swept body on an existing body by sweeping a face of the body in a given direc-
tion or along a line.

Line 1

Face 1

Body before sweep Body after sweep

Face 1 is swept along line 1

NAME [(highest body label number) + 1]

Label number of the body to be defined.

BODY [0]
Label number of the body containing face to be swept.

FACE [0]
Label number of the face to be swept.

OPTION [VECTOR]
This parameter offers the options of body sweep.
VECTOR swept body is created by sweeping a geometry face in a given direction.

LINE swept body is created by sweeping a geometry face along a line.

EDGE swept body is created by sweeping a face along an edge of a body.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-163

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY SWEEP

DX [1.0]
DY, DZ [0.0]
Components of displacement vector with reference to coordinate system SYSTEM. Note that
this is the actual displacement vector, i.e. it specifies both magnitude as well as direction.
(This parameter is only used when OPTION=VECTOR)

SYSTEM [current active coordinate system]

Label number of a coordinate system which is referenced by the displacement vector (DX,
DY, DZ). (This parameter is only used when OPTION=VECTOR)

LINE
The geometry line label. (This parameter is only used when OPTION=LINE)

DELETE-LINE [YES]
Indicates whether or not the lines are to be deleted after applying the command BODY
SWEEP. (This parameter is only used when OPTION=LINE). {YES/NO}

ALIGNMENT [NORMAL]
This parameter specifies the direction of the face during sweeping.
NORMAL Face normal is at fixed angle to line (or edge) tangent.

PARALLEL Face normal always points to the same direction.

MESH [NO]
Indicates whether or not the mesh is generated while a swept body is created. If MESH =
YES, 3-D elements can be created if 2-D elements exist on the face.

NODES [0]
The number of nodes per element of the mesh. {0/8/20/27}
For the default 0, the program assigns the number of nodes per element in the resulting 3-D
mesh based on the corresponding number of nodes of the 2-D mesh on the face, as follows:

2-D 3-D
4 8
8 20
9 27

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure label number]

The label number of the substructure (ADINA) in which the elements and nodes are created.

2D-EGROUP [largest element group of the swept face]

The element group label of the elements on the swept face.

6-164 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY SWEEP Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

3D-EGROUP [current group label number]

The element group label of the elements on the swept body.

NDIV [1]
Number of elements created along the sweeping direction.

NCOINCIDE [BOUNDARIES]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking. {ALL/BOUNDARIES/NO/GROUP}

ALL The global coordinates of all generated nodes are compared against those
of existing nodes of the substructure (ADINA) or model (ADINA-T/-F). If
there is coincidence to within NCTOLERANCE * (max. difference in global
coordinates between all previous nodes of the substructure or model), then
no new node is created at that location, i.e., the previous node label number
is assumed.

BOUNDARIES Coincidence checking is carried out for the nodes generated at vertices,
edges, and faces of the geometry bodies.

NO No nodal coincidence checking is carried out.

GROUP Coincidence checking is carried for the nodes generated with the same
element group.

NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

DELETE-FACE-ELEMENT [ALL]
Indicates whether elements on the 2-D mesh are deleted.

ALL Delete elements on 2-D mesh and also the element group if it does not
contain any elements.

ELEMENT Delete elements on 2-D mesh but do not delete the element group.

NO Do not delete any elements.

Note:
2-D meshes include meshes of 2-D elements, and also of shell elements. In other words,
whereever 2-D elements are referred to, shell elements can also be used.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-165

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY SWEEP

TWIST-ANGLE [0.0]
Indicates the twisted angle when the swept body is twisted along the swept line. This
parameter is only used when OPTION=LINE. This parameter is not used in ADINA-M for
Open Cascade.

BODY2
Label number of the body containing the sweeping edge. (This parameter is only used when
OPTION=EDGE)

EDGE
Label number of the sweeping edge. (This parameter is only used when OPTION=EDGE)

MERGE [NO]
Indicates whether the newly created bodies and the existing bodies will be merged.{NO/
YES}.

RATIO [1.0]
Ratio of lengths of the last to the first element edges along the revolved edges. The grading
of element lengths is governed by PROGRESSION.

PROGRESSION [GEOMETRIC]
When element edges are to be graded along the revolved edges (i.e., when RATIO 1.0),
then the distribution of element edge lengths can be selected from the
following.{GEOMETRIC/ARITHMETIC}

GEOMETRIC The ratio of lengths of adjacent element edges is constant.

ARITHMETIC The difference in length of each element edge from its adjacent
edges is constant.

CBIAS [NO]
Indicates whether central biasing is used or not. {NO/YES}

bodyi
Label number of body to be revolved.

facei
Label number of face to be revolved.

6-166 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-167

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY TORUS

BODY TORUS NAME POSITION ORIENTATION CX1 CX2 CX3

CENTER SYSTEM AXIS AX AY AZ RMAJOR RMINOR

BODY TORUS defines a solid geometry torus shape. The torus body may be used in con-
junction with other body shapes to form more complex geometries using the Boolean opera-
tion commands BODY MERGE, BODY SUBTRACT, BODY INTERSECT. A body may be
meshed directly via the GBODY command (in which case free-form meshing is necessarily
used - there is no intrinsic parametric description of the body to support mapped meshing).
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

NAME [(highest body label number) + 1]

Label number of the body to be defined.
Major
radius

Center Top view

Minor
Axis radius

Side view

POSITION [VECTOR]
Specifies how the center of the torus is located:

VECTOR The center of the torus is specified by a position vector (CX1,CX2, CX3) -
with components in terms of a given coordinate system (SYSTEM).

POINT The center of the torus is specified by an existing geometry point

(CENTER), possibly a vertex of another body.

ORIENTATION [SYSTEM]
Specifies how the direction of the major torus axis is defined:

SYSTEM The torus axis is aligned with one of the base Cartesian axes (AXIS) of a
local coordinate system (SYSTEM), possibly the global coordinate system.

6-168 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BODY TORUS Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

VECTOR The torus axis is defined via a direction vector (AX,AY,AZ) in the global
coordinate system.

CX1 [0.0]
CX2 [0.0]
CX3 [0.0]
The position vector of the center of the torus, given in terms of curvilinear components of the
local coordinate system specified by SYSTEM. Note that these parameters are only used
when POSITION=VECTOR.

CENTER
The label number of an existing geometry point indicating the center of the torus. This
parameter is only used when POSITION=POINT, and in that case an existing geometry point
must be specified (no default is assumed).

SYSTEM [0]
Label number of a local coordinate system which may be used to position the center of the
torus and/or define the major torus axis direction. The center of the torus may be given in
terms of the curvilinear coordinates (CX1,CX2,CX3) of this local system, when
POSITION=VECTOR. For ORIENTATION= SYSTEM the torus axis direction is aligned with
one of the base Cartesian system axes of this system (AXIS), see command SYSTEM. This
parameter is only used when POSITION=VECTOR or ORIENTATION=SYSTEM. Note that the
default is chosen as the global Cartesian coordinate system.

AXIS [XL]
Indicates which of the base Cartesian axes of the local coordinate system (SYSTEM) is to be
used for the direction of the major torus axis. This parameter is used only when
ORIENTATION=SYSTEM. {XL/YL/ZL}

AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Global Cartesian components of a direction vector specifying the major torus axis direction.
This vector is only used when ORIENTATION=VECTOR.

RMAJOR
The major radius of the torus, which must be input with a positive value (no default is
assumed).

RMINOR
The minor radius of the torus, which must be input with a positive value (no default is
assumed).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-169

Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY TRANSFORMED

BODY TRANSFORMED NAME OPTION PARENT TRANSFORMATION

NCOPY MESH EGROUP NCOINCIDE
NTOLERANCE

bodyi

The command BODY TRANSFORMED defines a solid geometry by copying or moving an

existing Parasolid body. The transformed body may be used in conjunction with other body
shapes to form more complex geometries using the Boolean operation commands
BODY MERGE, BODY SUBTRACT, BODY INTERSECT. A body may be meshed directly via
the GBODY command (in which case free-form meshing is necessarily used - there is no
intrinsic parametric description of the body to support mapped meshing). The transformed
body is identified by its label number NAME. If NCOPY is greater than 1, the other newly
defined transformed bodies are identified by the current highest body label number + 1.
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

NAME [(highest body label number) + 1]

Label number of the body to be defined.

OPTION [COPY]
This parameter offers two options for defining the body:

COPY The body is defined by coping an existing body.

MOVE The body is defined by moving an existing body.

PARENT
The label of the body to be copied (used only when OPTION=COPY). This parameter must
be entered when copying a body.

TRANSFORMATION
Label number of a geometrical transformation defined by one of the TRANSFORMATION
commands. This parameter must be entered.

NCOPY [1]
Parameter defines number of bodies to be generated by the transformation - transformation is
repeated NCOPY times.

MESH [NO]
Indicates whether or not the mesh will be also transformed. {YES/NO}

Note that only transformations consisting of a single translation, or a sequence of transla-

tions, or a single rotation are available for mesh transformation. In mesh transformation, all

6-170 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

kinds of meshes lying on the individual current transformation geometry will be transformed.

EGROUP [0]
Specify element group for transformed elements. If EGROUP=0, (current highest egroup label
+ 1) will be used.

NCOINCIDE [NO]
This parameter indicates whether the locations of new nodes generated are compared with
existing nodes. If NCOINCIDE=YES, then the location of generated generated nodes will be
checked against existing nodes. For each generated node, if it lies within the tolerance
(specified by NTOLERANCE) of an existing node, no new node will be created. {YES/NO}

NTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If NCOINCIDE=YES this parameter provides a tolerance for checking the global coordinates
of a location against existing nodes.

bodyi
Label numbers of body to be transformed.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-171

Chap. 6 Geometry definition SHEET PLANE

SHEET PLANE NAME OPTION POSITION OFFSET X Y Z

POINT NX NY NZ P1 P2 P3 SYSTEM

positioni pointi

The command SHEET PLANE defines a planar sheet. A number of options allow for the
position, orientation and dimensions of the planar sheet. The planar sheet may be used to
partition a body into one or more bodies using the command BODY SECTION.
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed. This command is not
applicable in ADINA-M for Open Cascade.

NAME [(current highest sheet label number)+1]

The sheet label number.

OPTION [POLYGON]
Selects the method for the planar sheet definition:

POLYGON Sheet defined by a set of co-planar points.

XPLANE Sheet defined by normal vector in X direction.

YPLANE Sheet defined by normal vector in Y direction.

ZPLANE Sheet defined by normal vector in Z direction.

POINT-NORMAL Sheet defined by a point and a normal vector.

THREE-POINT Sheet defined by three points.

POSITION [VECTOR]
Selects the method to define origin point (only for OPTION=POINT-NORMAL):

VECTOR Origin is defined by a position vector (X,Y,Z).

POINT Origin is defined by an existing geometry point (POINT).

OFFSET
Defines position of the planar sheet along the normal vector. This parameter is only used
when OPTION= XPLANE, YPLANE, or ZPLANE.

X [0.0]
Y [0.0]
Z [0.0]
Defines origin of the vector normal to the sheet plane. These parameters are only used when

6-172 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SHEET PLANE Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

POSITION=VECTOR and OPTION=POINT-NORMAL.

POINT
Defines geometry point - origin of the planar sheet. This parameter is only used when
POSITION=POINT and OPTION=POINT-NORMAL.

NX [1.0]
NY [0.0]
NZ [0.0]
Defines vector normal to the planar sheet. These parameters are only used when
OPTION=POINT-NORMAL.

P1
P2
P3
Label numbers of three existing geometry points which define planar sheet. This parameters
are only used when OPTION=THREE-POINT (no defaults are assumed).

SYSTEM [0]
Label number of a local coordinate system. This parameter is used only when
OPTION=XPLANE, YPLANE, ZPLANE, or POINT-NORMAL. Only the Cartesian coordi-
nate system is allowed.

positioni
Position numbers of geometry points.

pointi
Label numbers of geometry points.

Note: positioni and pointi are only used when OPTION=POLYGON.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-173

Chap. 6 Geometry definition VOLUME BODY

VOLUME BODY NAME BODY DELETE-BODY DEG-EDGE NPTS LINE-TYPE

Converts a body into a geometry volume. Only body of the following geometries can be
converted into volume: tetrahedron, hexahedron, prism and pyramid. If more than one body
will be converted into volumes and the bodies are from command LOADSOLID, in order not
to create duplicated surfaces between connected volumes, make sure PCOINCIDE=YES in
command LOADSOLID.

This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.

NAME [(current highest geometry volume label number) + 1]

Label number of the geometry volume.

BODY
Label number of solid geometry body to be converted into a geometry volume.
If BODY=ALL, all the bodies will be converted into volumes.

DELETE-BODY [YES]
Indicates whether or not the body are to be deleted after applying the command VOLUME
BODY. {YES/NO}

DEG-EDGE [0]
That parameter is used to degenerate edge of the body and body is a prism shape. Parameter
can not be used when BODY= ALL.

NPTS [3]
The number of intermediate points of non-straight and non-arc edges.

LINE-TYPE [BIARC-SEGMENT]
This parameter specifies the line type when volume is created. {BIARC-SEGMENT /
SPLINE}

BIARC-SEGMENT If line type is neither straight nor arc, polyline bi-arc is used when
all the control points are co-planar and polyline segmented is used
when the control points are not co-planar.

SPLINE If line type is neither straight nor arc, polyline spline is used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST VOLUME FIRST LAST

DELETE VOLUME FIRST LAST
Note that no geometry volume is deleted which has nodes and/or elements associated
with it.

6-174 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SURFACE FACE Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

SURFACE FACE NAME BODY FACE DELETE-BODY DEG-POINT NPTS

REVERSE LINE-TYPE

Converts a face of a body into a geometry surface.

NAME [(current highest geometry surface label number) + 1]

Label number of the geometry surface to be created.

BODY
Label number of the body that contains the face to be converted. If BODY=ALL, faces of all
sheet bodies will be converted into surfaces.

FACE
Label number of the face to be converted to a surface. If BODY=ALL or the specified body is
a sheet body, then FACE=1 by default. Otherwise, a face label number has to be input.

DELETE-BODY [YES]
Indicates whether the body will be deleted after executing this command. {YES/NO}

DEG-POINT [0]
If the face is a triangle, this parameter indicates which point will be the degenerate vertex of
the created triangular surface. Otherwise, this parameter is ignored. If BODY=ALL is speci-
fied, this parameter is also ignored and the degenerate vertex is set by the program.

NPTS [3]
The number of intermediate points used for interpolating edges that are not straight or not
arcs.

REVERSE [NO]
Reverses the orientation of the surface. {YES/NO}

LINE-TYPE [BIARC-SEGMENT]
This parameter specifies the line type when surface is created. {BIARC-SEGMENT /
SPLINE}

BIARC-SEGMENT If line type is neither straight nor arc, polyline bi-arc is used when
all the control points are co-planar and polyline segmented is used
when the control points are not co-planar.

SPLINE If line type is neither straight nor arc, polyline spline is used.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-175

Chap. 6 Geometry definition SURFACE FACE

Auxiliary commands

LIST SURFACE FIRST LAST

DELETE SURFACE FIRST LAST OPTION

When deleting surfaces, OPTION=ALL will delete any vertex points or edge lines
which have no other dependent geometry; otherwise (OPTION=SURFACE), only the
surface itself will be deleted.

6-176 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONVERT-STL Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M

CONVERT-STL BODY

Takes a Parasolid body and transforms it into a STL body suitable for meshing with the
BHEXA hexahedral mesher.

BODY
Label number of the body to convert into STL body.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 6-177

Chap. 6 Geometry definition

This page intentionally left blank

6-178 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Chapter 7

Model definition
MATERIAL ANAND Chap. 7 Model definition

MATERIAL ANAND NAME E NU DENSITY A1 QDR XSI M SHAT

N H0 A2 S0 ALPHA EPA

Defines an Anand material model. This material model may be used with 2-D (plane strain and
axisymmetric) and 3-D solid elements.

NAME [ (current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

E
Youngs modulus. {>0.0}

NU [0.0]
Poissons ratio. {-1.0 < NU < 0.5}

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density. {0.0}

A1
Pre-exponential factor. {>0.0}

QDR
Activation energy normalized by the universal gas constant. {0.0}

XSI
Stress multiplier. {>0.0}

M
Strain rate sensitivity of stress. {>0.0}

SHAT
Coefficient for the saturation value of the deformation resistance. {>0.0, only
checked if H0>0}

N
Strain rate sensitivity of the deformation resistance. {0.0}

H0
Hardening / softening constant. {0.0}

A2
Strain rate sensitivity of hardening or softening. {>0.0}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-3

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL ANAND

S0
Initial value of deformation resistance. {>0.0}

ALPHA [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion. ALPHA is only considered if thermal loading is
modeled.

EPA [0.0]
Maximum allowable effective plastic strain. This allows for the modeling of material rupture,
where the stresses are set to zero whenever the effective plastic strain is greater than the
rupture strain EPA. If EPA is input as 0.0, the rupture condition is not used.

7-4 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL ARRUDA-BOYCE Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL ARRUDA-BOYCE NAME MU LAMBDA KAPPA DENSITY

FITTING-CURVE VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE TREF
RUBBER-TABLE RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC
RUBBER-MULLINS RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC

Defines an Arruda-Boyce material model, which is a hyperelastic material model for rubber
materials. This material model may be used with 2-D solid, 3-D solid elements and 3D-shell
elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined. If the label number of an existing material is given,
then the previous material definition is overwritten.

MU [0.0]
Initial shear modulus. MU > 0.

LAMBDA
Locking stretch. LAMBDA > 0.

KAPPA [0.0]
Bulk modulus. KAPPA > 0.

DENSITY [0]
Mass density.

FITTING-CURVE [0]
Fitting-curve label. The fitting curve is used to calculate the parameters MU and LAMBDA.
If FITTING-CURVE > 0 is specified, any values specified for MU and LAMBDA will be
ignored.

VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS [0]
Viscoelastic-constants label. This parameter is superseded by the RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC
parameter. However, this parameter is still supported for backwards compatibility.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE [NO]
Specifies the temperature dependence of the material properties. {NO/TRS/FULL}

NO The material properties are not temperature dependent; thermal effects are not
included.

TRS The material properties are not temperature dependent, but the material is assumed
to be TRS (thermorheologically simple). Thermal effects are included.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-5

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL ARRUDA-BOYCE

FULL The material properties are temperature dependent. Parameters MU to KAPPA, and
RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC to RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC of this command are ignored.

The only parameters used when TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL are NAME,

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE, TREF and RUBBER-TABLE.

TREF [0.0]
The material reference temperature, required if TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = TRS or
FULL.

RUBBER-TABLE [0]
The label number of a rubber-table data set. The type of rubber-table depends upon
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE, as follows:

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = NO :
Do not enter a rubber-table.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = TRS :
A rubber-table of type TRS must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of temperatures
and corresponding coefficients of thermal expansion.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL :
A rubber-table of type Arruda-Boyce must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of
temperatures and corresponding material properties.

RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC [0]
If RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC is zero, no viscoelastic effects are included. If RUBBER-VIS-
COELASTIC is non-zero, viscoelastic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC command. This parameter is not used when
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL.

RUBBER-MULLINS [0]
If RUBBER-MULLINS is zero, no Mullins effects are included. If RUBBER-MULLINS is non-
zero, Mullins effects are included, using the data set from the corresponding
RUBBER-MULLINS command. This parameter is not used when TEMPERATURE-DEPEN-
DENCE = FULL.

RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC [0]
If RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC is zero, no orthotropic effects are included. If RUBBER-
ORTHOTROPIC is non-zero, orthotropic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC command. This parameter is not used when
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL.

7-6 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL ARRUDA-BOYCE Sec. 7.1 Material models

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-7

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL CAM-CLAY

MATERIAL CAM-CLAY NAME E NU LAMDA KAPPA GAMMA

PNULL MIU OCR KNULL DENSITY SINITIAL

Defines a nonlinear Cam-Clay material model This material model may be used with 2-D solid
and 3-D solid elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number)+1]

E
Initial Young's modulus E. {> 0.0}

NU [0.0]
Poisson's Ratio. {-1.0 < NU < 0.5}

LAMDA
Isotropic normal consolidation slope. {> 0.0}

KAPPA
Unloading-reloading slope. {> 0.0}

GAMMA
Critical state constant [1]. {> 0.0}

PNULL [0.0]
Initial size of yield surface. { 0.0}

MIU [1.0]
Critical state constant [2]. {> 0.0}

OCR [0.0]
Over-consolidation ratio. { 0.0}

KNULL [0.0]
The coefficient of earth pressure. { 0.0}

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density

SINITIAL
Applied initial conditions : initial stresses SINITIAL=STRESS, initial stiffness
SINITIAL=STIFFNESS. {STRESS/STIFFNESS}

Note: If an initial stiffness is applied, the initial size of the yield surface - PNULL >0.0.

7-8 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL CONCRETE Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL CONCRETE NAME OPTION E0 NU SIGMAT SIGMATP

SIGMAC EPSC SIGMAU EPSU BETA C1 C2
XSI STIFAC SHEFAC ALPHA TREF INDNU GF
DENSITY SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16
SP311 SP321 SP331 SP341 SP351 SP361 SP312
SP322 SP332 SP342 SP352 SP362 SP313 SP323
SP333 SP343 SP353 SP363
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENT

thetai E0i nui alphai sigmati sigmaci epsci sigmaui epsui sigmatpi xsii gfi

Defines a nonlinear concrete material. This material model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D
solid elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

OPTION [KUPFER]
Selects the compression failure envelope input method. OPTION= INPUT requires the
specification of 25 values, BETA and SP11 to SP363, to represent the failure curves.
{KUPFER/SANDIA/INPUT}
OPTION = KUPFER corresponds to:

BETA = 0.75
SP11 = 0.0 SP12 = 0.25 SP13 = 0.5
SP14 = 0.75 SP15 = 1.0 SP16 = 1.2
SP311 = 1.0 SP321 = 1.4 SP331 = 1.7
SP341 = 2.2 SP351 = 2.5 SP361 = 2.8
SP312 = 1.3 SP322 = 1.5 SP332 = 2.0
SP342 = 2.3 SP352 = 2.7 SP362 = 3.2
SP313 = 1.25 SP323 = 1.45 SP333 = 1.95
SP343 = 2.25 SP353 = 2.65 SP363 = 3.15

OPTION = SANDIA corresponds to:

BETA = 0.5
SP11 = 0.0 SP12 = 0.1 SP13 = 0.2
SP14 = 0.3 SP15 = 0.4 SP16 = 1.0
SP311 = 1.0 SP321 = 1.62 SP331 = 2.1
SP341 = 2.5 SP351 = 2.8 SP361 = 4.75
SP312 = 1.2 SP322 = 2.25 SP332 = 2.75
SP342 = 3.01 SP352 = 3.25 SP362 = 4.6
SP313 = 1.2 SP323 = 2.06 SP333 = 2.32
SP343 = 2.55 SP353 = 2.72 SP363 = 3.79

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-9

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL CONCRETE

E0
Tangent modulus at zero strain. {> 0.0}

NU [0.0]
Poissons ratio. {-1.0 < NU < 0.5}

SIGMAT
Uniaxial cut-off tensile stress. {> 0.0}

SIGMATP [0.0]
Post-cracking uniaxial cut-off tensile stress. {0.0 SIGMATP SIGMAT}
If SIGMATP=0, then the program sets SIGMATP=SIGMAT.

SIGMAC
Uniaxial maximum compressive stress. {< 0.0}

EPSC
Uniaxial compressive strain at SIGMAC. {< 0.0; SIGMAC/EPSC E0}

SIGMAU
Uniaxial ultimate compressive stress. {SIGMAC < SIGMAU < 0.0}

EPSU
Uniaxial ultimate compressive strain. {EPSU < EPSC < 0.0}

BETA [0.75 (OPTION=KUPFER)]

[0.5 (OPTION=SANDIA)]
Principal stress ratio used for defining the compression failure envelope.
{0.0 < BETA < 1.0 (OPTION=INPUT)}

C1 [1.4]
C2 [-0.4]
Critical strain constants. {C1 > 0.0; C2 0.0; C1+C2=1.0 is recommended}

XSI [8.0]
Constant used to define the tensile strain corresponding to zero stress in tensile failure.
{ 1.0}

STIFAC [0.0001]
Normal stiffness reduction factor. {0.0 < STIFAC < 1.0}

SHEFAC [0.5]
Shear stiffness reduction factor. {0.0 < SHEFAC < 1.0}

7-10 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL CONCRETE Sec. 7.1 Material models

ALPHA [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion. { 0.0}

TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature for thermal expansion calculation. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

INDNU [CONSTANT]
Selects one of the following options for Poissons ratio:

CONSTANT Poissons ratio remains constant.

VARIABLE Poissons ratio is allowed to vary (see the Theory and Modeling Guide).

GF [0.0]
Fracture energy. { 0.0}

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

SP11 ... SP363

Principal stress ratios used to define the compression failure envelope. They are user input
only when OPTION = INPUT. See the Theory and Modeling Guide. {0.0 SP11 SP12
... SP16; 0.0 < SP311 SP321 ... SP361; 0.0 < SP312 SP322 ...
SP362; 0.0 < SP313 SP323 ... SP363}

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENT [NO]
Indicates whether some material properties are temperature dependent. If YES, then the
variation of some material properties with temperature follows in the command data lines.
{YES/NO}

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

E0i
Tangent modulus at zero strain at temperature thetai.

nui
Poissons ratio at temperature thetai.

alphai
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion at temperature thetai.

sigmati
Uniaxial cut-off tensile stress at temperature thetai.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-11

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL CONCRETE

sigmaci
Uniaxial maximum compressive stress at temperature thetai.

epsci
Uniaxial compressive strain for stress sigmaci, at temperature thetai.

sigmaui
Uniaxial ultimate compressive stress at temperature thetai.

epsui
Uniaxial ultimate compressive strain at temperature thetai.

sigmatpi
Post-cracking uniaxial cut-off tensile stress at temperature thetai.

xsii
Constant for the tensile strain failure at temperature thetai.

gfi
Fracture energy at temperature thetai.

Note: The material properties are automatically stored in order of increasing temperature. If
the same temperature is given several times, the last given values are used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-12 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL CREEP Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL CREEP NAME CREEP-LAW TEMP-UNIT E NU A0 A1

A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 ALPHA TOLIL DENSITY
NRUPT1 NRUPT2 TIME-HARDENING A8 A9 A10
A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

Defines a nonlinear creep material model. This model falls under the category of the more
general thermo-elastic-plastic and creep material model, which requires nodal temperature
input. (A uniform zero nodal temperature is assumed otherwise). This model also assumes
that the effective stress remains below 104(Youngs modulus) during the analysis. It may be
used with truss, 2-D solid, 3-D solid, isobeam, shell and pipe elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

CREEP-LAW [1]
Selects type of the creep law. For details, please refer to the Theory and Modeling
Guide,Section 3.6.3. {1/2/3/LUBBY2/BLACKBURN}

TEMP-UNIT [CELSIUS]
Creep law 3 may refer to temperatures in degrees Celsius (the centigrade scale) or degrees
Kelvin (the absolute scale). {CELSIUS/KELVIN}

E
Youngs modulus. {> 0.0}

NU [0.0]
Poissons ratio. {-1.0 < NU < 0.5}

A0 ... A15 [0.0]

Creep law constants, ai. A8 ... A15 are applicable only when CREEP-LAW = BLACKBURN.

ALPHA [1.0]
Parameter for creep rate equation time integration. The limiting values are:
0.0 Euler forward method (explicit).
1.0 Euler backward method (implicit).
Note: ALPHA = 1.0 must be used with large strain analyses.

TOLIL [1.0E-10]
Solution tolerance for effective stress calculation. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for
further details.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-13

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL CREEP

NRUPT1 [0]
NRUPT2 [0]
Label numbers of rupture criteria, defined by command RUPTURE. Two rupture criteria can
be used simultaneously provided they are not of the same type. A zero value indicates that
no rupture criteria are to be used with the material definition.

TIME-HARDENING [NO]
Indicates whether strain hardening (NO) or time hardening (YES) is used. {YES/NO}

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-14 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL CREEP-IRRADIATION Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL CREEP-IRRADIATION NAME IRRADC NF TEMP-UNIT E NU A1

A2 A3 A4 A5 ALPHA TOLIL DENSITY
NRUPT1 NRUPT2 TIME-HARDENING TREF

Defines a irradiation creep material model with temperature and neutron fluence dependent
properties. This material model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

IRRADC
Label number of the irradiation creep table used. The number refers to a definition made by
the command IRRADIATION_CREEP-TABLE.

NF
Label number of the fast neutron dose rate

TEMP-UNIT [CELSIUS]
Creep law may refer to temperatures in degrees Celsius (the centigrade scale) or degrees
Kelvin (the absolute scale)

CELSIUS Celsius degrees

KELVIN Kelvin degrees

E
Initial Youngs modulus. (E must be > 0.0)

NU [0.0]
Poissons ratio. (-1.0 < NU < 0.5).

A1 ... A5
Creep law constants.

ALPHA [1.0]
Parameter for creep rate equation time integration. The limiting values are:

0.0 Euler forward method (explicit)

1.0 Euler backward method (implicit)

Note: ALPHA = 1.0 must be used with large strain analyses.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-15

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL CREEP-IRRADIATION

TOLIL [1.0E-10]
Solution tolerance for effective stress calculation. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for
further details.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

NRUPT1, NRUPT2

Label numbers of rupture criteria used. The numbers refer to definitions made by the com-
mand RUPTURE. Two rupture criteria can be used at the same time provided their types are
not the same.

TIME-HARDENING [NO]

NO The usual strain hardening method will be used in ADINA.

YES The time hardening method will be used in ADINA.

TREF
The reference temperature for thermal expansion coefficient

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIALCREEP-IRRADIATION FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIALCREEP-IRRADIATION FIRST LAST

7-16 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL CREEP-VARIABLE Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL CREEP-VARIABLE NAME NCOEF TEMP-UNIT E NU ALPHA

TOLIL DENSITY NRUPT1 NRUPT2
TIME-HARDENING CREEP-LAW

Defines a nonlinear creep material model with temperature and/or effective-stress dependent
coefficients, see command CREEP-COEFFICIENTS . This model falls under the category of
the more general thermo-elastic-plastic and creep material model, which requires nodal
temperature input. (A uniform zero nodal temperature is assumed otherwise). It may be used
with truss, 2-D solid, 3-D solid, isobeam, shell and pipe elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

NCOEF
Label number of the creep coefficient dependence function, defined by command
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS.

TEMP-UNIT [CELSIUS]
Indicates the temperature unit for the creep model; degrees Celsius (the centigrade scale) or
degrees Kelvin (the absolute scale). {CELSIUS/KELVIN}

E
Youngs modulus. {> 0.0}

NU [0.0]
Poissons ratio. {-1.0 < NU < 0.5}

ALPHA [1.0]
Parameter for creep rate equation time integration. The limiting values are:

0.0 Euler forward method (explicit).

1.0 Euler backward method (implicit).

Note: ALPHA = 1.0 must be used with large strain analyses.

TOLIL [1.0E-10]
Solution tolerance for effective stress calculation. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for
further details.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-17

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL CREEP-VARIABLE

NRUPT1 [0]
NRUPT2 [0]
Label numbers of rupture criteria, defined by command RUPTURE. Two rupture criteria can be
used simultaneously, provided they are not of the same type. A zero value indicates that no
rupture criteria are to be used with the material definition.

TIME-HARDENING [NO]
Indicates whether strain hardening (NO) or time hardening (YES) is used. {YES/NO}

CREEP-LAW [LAW3]
Specifies creep law to be used. {NONE/LAW3/LUBBY2}

NONE No creep.

LAW3 ec = S T e H

LUBBY2 Lubby2 creep law.

Note: If CREEP-LAW=LAW3, the parameter NCOEF reference a creep-coefficient function

defined by command CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-ONLY or
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR.

If CREEP-LAW=LUBBY2, the parameter NCOEF reference a creep-coefficient

function defined by command CREEP-COEFFICIENTS LUBBY2.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-18 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL CURVE-DESCRIPTION Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL CURVE-DESCRIPTION NAME OPTION GAMMA STIFAC

SHEFAC DENSITY

strainvi kloadi kunloadi gloadi (i = 16)

Defines a nonlinear geological material, with the option of tension cut-off or cracking.
Moduli at 6 volume strain values must be provided. This material model may be used with 2-D
plane strain, axisymmetric and 3-D solid elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

OPTION [NONE]
Selects special options.

NONE No special options.

TENSION-CUT-OFF Tension cut-off is modeled.

CRACKING Material cracking is modeled.

GAMMA [0.0]
The material density used to calculate the in-situ gravity pressure.

STIFAC [0.0]
Normal stiffness reduction factor. {< 1.0}

SHEFAC [0.0]
Shear stiffness reduction factor. {< 1.0}

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

strainvi
Volume strain at data point i.

kloadi
Loading bulk modulus at strain strainvi.

kunloadi
Unloading bulk modulus at strain strainvi.

gloadi
Loading shear modulus at strain strainvi.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-19

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL CURVE-DESCRIPTION

Note:

strainv1 = 0.0

strainvj > strainv(j-1)

kunloadj kloadj; gloadj < 1.5 kloadj

The unloading shear modulus is calculated as

(kunload/kload) gload

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-20 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL DF-CONCRETE Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL DF-CONCRETE NAME FC CONFAC TP SP STIFAC SHEFAC

DENSITY ALPHA TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENT
TREF GF ELEN CVFOPT SHFOPT DFC-CREEP
thetai fci alphai gfi

Defines an experimental data fitted concrete material model based on the work of M. D.
Kotsovos et al., which is a nonlinear concrete material model that allows cracking via the
smeared crack approach. This material model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D solid
elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

FC
Uniaxial cylinder compressive strength of concrete. {>0.0}

CONFAC
Unit conversion factor. It converts FC from the user's stress unit to N/mm2 or MPa. {>0.0}

TP [5.0]
Percentage of FC. It is the amount of tensile hydrostatic stress allowed by the failure surface.
{5.0 TP 10.0}

SP [0.0]
Percentage of FC. It is the amount of additional octahedral shear stress allowed by the failure
surface. {0.0 SP 5.0}

STIFAC [0.0001]
Normal stiffness reduction factor. {0.0 < STIFAC < 1.0}

SHEFAC [0.1]
Shear stiffness reduction factor. {0.0 < SHEFAC < 1.0}

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density. {0.0}

ALPHA [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion. {0.0}

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENT [NO]
Indicates whether some material properties are temperature dependent. If YES, then the
variation of some material properties with temperature follows in the command data lines.
{YES/NO}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-21

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL DF-CONCRETE

TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature for thermal expansion calculation. It applies when TEMPERATURE-
DEPENDENT=YES. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

GF [0.0]
Fracture energy. {0.0}

ELEN [0.0]
Element or characteristic length. {0.0}

CVFOPT [CONFAC]
Option for unit conversion factor for converting FC from users stress unit to MPa.
{CONFAC/MPA/PASCAL/KSI/PSI}

If CVFOPT=CONFAC, then CONFAC must be specified. Otherwise, the AUI ignores CONFAC
and sets conversion factor in the dat file as follows:

MPA: 1.0
PASCAL: 1.0E-6
KSI: 6.894759086775
PSI: 6.894759086775E-3

SHFOPT [SHEFAC]
Option for shear stiffness reduction factor. {SHEFAC/REINFORCED/PLAIN}

If SHFOPT=SHEFAC, then SHEFAC must be specified. Otherwise, the AUI ignores SHEFAC
and sets the shear stiffness reduction factor in the dat file as follows:

REINFORCED: 0.1
PLAIN: 0.001

DFC-CREEP [0]
Reference the data set of the creep/shrinkage model defined in DFC-CREEP ACI209R-92,
DFC-CREEP CEB-FIP, or DFC-CREEP ADINA.

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

fci
Uniaxial cylinder compressive strength at temperature thetai.

alphai
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion at temperature thetai.

7-22 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL DF-CONCRETE Sec. 7.1 Material models

gfi
Fracture energy at temperature thetai.

Note: The material properties are automatically sorted in order of increasing temperature. If
the same temperature is given several times, only the last given values are used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-23

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL DRUCKER-PRAGER

MATERIAL DRUCKER-PRAGER NAME E NU ALPHA KYIELD WCAP DCAP

TCUT ICPOS RCAP DENSITY BETA POTENTIAL

Defines a nonlinear Drucker-Prager material model with a hardening cap and tension cut-off.
This material model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.
NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]
Label number of the material to be defined.
E
Youngs modulus. {> 0.0}
NU [0.0]
Poissons ratio. {0.0 NU < 0.5}
ALPHA [0.0]
Yield function parameter . { 10-5}

KYIELD
Yield function parameter, k. {> 0.0}

WCAP
Cap hardening parameter, W. {< 0.0}
DCAP
Cap hardening parameter, D. {< 0.0}

TCUT [0.0]
Tension cut-off limit. { 0.0}

ICPOS [0.0]
Initial cap position. { 0.0}
RCAP [0.0]
Cap ratio. This is the ratio of the major/minor axes of the elliptical cap. RCAP = 0.0 corre-
sponds to a planar cap. { 0.0}

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

BETA [0.0]
Potential function parameter . { 0.0}
POTENTIAL [NO]
Indicates whether to use or ignore the specified BETA. {YES/NO}
If NO is specified, then BETA = ALPHA.
Auxiliary commands
LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST
DELETEMATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-24 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL EIGHT-CHAIN Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL EIGHT-CHAIN NAME MU LAMBDA KAPPA DENSITY

FITTING-CURVE TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE
TREF RUBBER-TABLE RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC
RUBBER-MULLINS RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC

Defines an Eight-Chain material model, which is a hyperelastic material model for rubber
materials. This material model may be used with 2-D solid, 3-D solid and 3D-shell elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined. If the label number of an existing material is given,
then the previous material definition is overwritten.

MU [0.0]
Initial shear modulus. MU > 0.

LAMBDA
Locking stretch. LAMBDA > 0.

KAPPA [0.0]
Bulk modulus. KAPPA > 0.

DENSITY [0]
Mass density.

FITTING-CURVE [0]
Fitting-curve label. The fitting curve is used to calculate the parameters MU and LAMBDA.
If FITTING-CURVE > 0 is specified, any values specified for MU and LAMBDA will be
ignored.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE [NO]
Specifies the temperature dependence of the material properties. {NO/TRS/FULL}

NO The material properties are not temperature dependent; thermal effects are not
included.

TRS The material properties are not temperature dependent, but the material is assumed
to be TRS (thermorheologically simple). Thermal effects are included.

FULL The material properties are temperature dependent. Parameters MU to KAPPA, and
RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC to RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC of this command are ignored.

The only parameters used when TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL are NAME,

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE, TREF and RUBBER-TABLE.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-25

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL EIGHT-CHAIN

TREF [0.0]
The material reference temperature, required if TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = TRS or
FULL.

RUBBER-TABLE [0]
The label number of a rubber-table data set. The type of rubber-table depends upon
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE, as follows:

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = NO :
Do not enter a rubber-table.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = TRS :
A rubber-table of type TRS must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of temperatures
and corresponding coefficients of thermal expansion.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL :
A rubber-table of type eight-chain must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of
temperatures and corresponding material properties.

RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC [0]
If RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC is zero, no viscoelastic effects are included. If RUBBER-VIS-
COELASTIC is non-zero, viscoelastic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC command. This parameter is not used when
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL.

RUBBER-MULLINS [0]
If RUBBER-MULLINS is zero, no Mullins effects are included. If RUBBER-MULLINS is non-
zero, Mullins effects are included, using the data set from the corresponding
RUBBER-MULLINS command. This parameter is not used when TEMPERATURE-DEPEN-
DENCE = FULL.

RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC [0]
If RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC is zero, no orthotropic effects are included. If RUBBER-
ORTHOTROPIC is non-zero, orthotropic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC command. This parameter is not used when
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-26 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 7.1 Material models

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-27

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL ELASTIC

MATERIAL ELASTIC NAME E NU DENSITY ALPHA

Defines an isotropic linear elastic material. This material model may be used with all elements
except fluid elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

E
Youngs modulus. {> 0.0}

NU [0.0]
Poissons ratio. {-1.0 < NU < 0.5}

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

ALPHA [0.0]
Coefficient of thermal expansion.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-28 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL FLUID Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL FLUID NAME K DENSITY GRAVITY X0 Y0 Z0

Defines a linear fluid material. This material model may be used with 2-D and 3-D fluid
elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

K
Bulk modulus.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

GRAVITY [0.0]
The gravity constant used in calculating free surface effects.

Note: This parameter is used only when MASTER FLUIDPOTENTIAL=YES. To

specify gravity loads when MASTER FLUIDPOTENTIAL=AUTOMATIC use
commands: APPLY-LOAD and
LOAD MASSPROPORTIONAL INTERPRETATION=BODY-FORCE.

X0 [0.0]
Y0 [0.0]
Z0 [0.0]
X's, Ys and Zs datum value for body force potential. See Theory and Modeling Guide.

Note: These parameters are used only when MASTER FLUIDPOTENTIAL=AUTOMATIC

and when there are gravity loads entered using command
LOAD MASSPROPORTIONAL INTERPRETATION=BODY-FORCE.
See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Equation 2.11-35.

Auxiliary Commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-29

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL GASKET

MATERIAL GASKET NAME TREF DENSITY YIELD-CURVE G-G E-G ALPHA-G

LEAKAGE-PRESSURE E-INPLANE NU-INPLANE
ALPHA-INPLANE NPOINTS

lcurvei

Defines a gasket material model. This material model may be used with low-order elements of
2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined. If the label number of an existing material is given,
then the previous material definition is overwritten.

TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature for thermal expansion coefficient.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

YIELD-CURVE [1]
Label of yield (loading) curve. This curve is defined using the LCURVE command.

G-G [0.0]
Transverse shear modulus. {G-G>=0.0}

E-G [0.0]
Tensile Young's modulus in normal direction.{E-G>=0.0}

ALPHA-G [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion in normal direction. {ALPHA-G>=0.0}

LEAKAGE-PRESSURE [0.0]
Leakage pressure.

E-INPLANE [0.0]
Inplane Young's modulus. {E-INPLANE>=0.0}

NU-INPLANE [0.0]
Inplane Poisson's ratio. {NU-INPLANE>=0.0}

ALPHA-INPLANE [0.0]
Inplane mean coefficient of thermal expansion. {ALPHA-INPLANE>=0.0}

7-30 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL GASKET Sec. 7.1 Material models

NPOINTS [2]
The point number on the yield curve which corresponds to the initial yield point. All previ-
ous points are nonlinear elastic loading/unloading data.

lcurvei

Label numbers of loading-unloading curves. The curves are defined using the LCURVE
command.

Note:
All loading-unloading curves must have same number of points (=NPOINT) and their first
point must have Pressure = 0.0 and their last point must coincide with a yield point.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-31

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL GURSON-PLASTIC

MATERIAL GURSON-PLASTIC NAME E NU YIELD Q1 Q2 Q3

F0 N FN SN EN TOL DENSITY
ALPHA TREF FC FF

Command MATERIAL GURSON-PLASTIC defines a Gurson plastic material. This material

model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined. If the label number of an existing material is given,
then the previous material definition is overwritten.

E
Young=s modulus. {> 0.0}

NU [0.0]
Poisson=s ratio. {-1.0 < NU < 0.5}

YIELD
Initial yield stress in simple tension.

Q1 [1.5]
Q2 [1.0]
Q3 [2.25]
Tvergaard parameters.

F0 [0.0]
Initial void volume fraction.

N [0.1]
Stress-strain curve constant.

FN [0.04]
Volume fraction of void nucleating particles.

SN [0.1]
Standard deviation of normal distribution.

EN [0.3]
Mean plastic strain of normal distribution.

TOL [1.0E-7]
Solution tolerance.

7-32 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL GURSON-PLASTIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

ALPHA [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion. ALPHA is only considered if thermal loading is
modeled.

TREF [0.0]
The reference temperature for thermal expansion coefficient. See the Theory and Modeling
Guide.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-33

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL HYPERELASTIC

MATERIAL HYPERELASTIC NAME MODEL TENSION-CURVE

SHEAR-CURVE EQUIBIAXIAL-CURVE
ORDER WEIGHTING CURVE-TYPE
ALPHA1 ALPHA2 ALPHA3 ALPHA4
ALPHA5 ALPHA6 ALPHA7 ALPHA8
ALPHA9 KAPPA DENSITY METHOD
NSINGULAR MAX-SINGV MIN-SINGV ECHO

This material model will not be supported from ADINA version 8.0 onwards, but is retained
for the convenience of users of previous versions.

Defines a hyperelastic material model, which is an incompressible nonlinear elastic material

model for rubber materials.

A least squares curve fitting technique is employed to determine the parameters for a general-
ized Mooney-Rivlin or an Ogden material model from experimental stress versus strain (or
stretch) data. The data can be input for any of three test cases: (i) simple tension, (ii) pure
shear, or (iii) equibiaxial tension. A single test or combination of any two, or all three, can be
supplied. The accuracy of the model curve thus fitted depends on the number of data points,
and the desired approximation order of the model. The total number of data points, from all
three test cases, is subject to a minimum (equal to the input order for an Ogden model, and 2,
5, 9 for a generalized Mooney-Rivlin model of input order 1, 2, 3 respectively). See the
Theory and Modeling Guide for details.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

MODEL [OGDEN]
Specifies which type of material model is to be used.

OGDEN The Ogden constants i are determined, from the input

data curves and i values.

MOONEY-RIVLIN The Mooney-Rivlin constants Ci are determined.

TENSION-CURVE [0]
Indicates the label number of a (stress, strain) data curve, defined by command SCURVE,
which provides data for the simple tension test case. A value of 0 indicates no simple
tension data is supplied. The abscissae may be interpreted as strain or stretch as indicated
by parameter CURVE-TYPE.

SHEAR-CURVE [0]
Indicates the label number of a (stress, strain) data curve, defined by command SCURVE,

7-34 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL HYPERELASTIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

which provides data for the pure shear test case. A value of 0 indicates no pure shear data is
supplied. The abscissae may be interpreted as strain or stretch as indicated by parameter
CURVE-TYPE.

EQUIBIAXIAL-CURVE [0]
Indicates the label number of a (stress, strain) data curve, defined by command SCURVE,
which provides data for the equibiaxial tension test case. A value of 0 indicates no
equibiaxial tension data is supplied. The abscissae may be interpreted as strain or stretch as
indicated by parameter CURVE-TYPE.

ORDER [3]
Approximation order. Allowed values are:

1 ORDER 3 (MODEL = MOONEY-RIVLIN)

1 ORDER 9 (MODEL = OGDEN)

Note: If MODEL=MOONEY-RIVLIN, then the material constants derivied are as follows:

ORDER Constants
1 C1 C2
2 C1 C5
3 C1 C9

WEIGHTING [NO]
Specifies whether or not the least squares fitting scheme utilizes weighted data intervals.
Their use may provide a better fit for data with very irregular spacing of the strain (or stretch)
abscissae. {YES/NO}

CURVE-TYPE [STRAIN]
Indicates the type of input curve data given by parameters TENSION-CURVE, SHEAR-
CURVE, and EQUIBIAXIAL-CURVE. The option is given for the data abscissae to be either
principal (engineering) strain, or principal stretch (= deformed length / undeformed length).
The ordinate values in either case are values of nominal stress (= force / unit undeformed
area).

STRAIN Input principal engineering strain data.

STRETCH Input principal stretch data.

ALPHAi [i (1 i 9)]
Ogden constants i.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-35

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL HYPERELASTIC

KAPPA [determined from the initial shear modulus,

assuming near incompressibility ( =0.499)]
Bulk modulus.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

METHOD [SVD]
Specifies the least squares matrix equation solution method. Use of Gaussian elimination may
well result in model constants which alternate in sign and have very high magnitude. This is
due to the presence of near-singular terms in the least squares system. The singular value
decomposition method attempts to remove these terms during solution, yielding more
reasonable model constants without affecting the overall quality of the least squares fit. The
number of near-singular terms to be removed may be controlled by parameters MAX-SINGV,
MIN-SINGV. Near-singular terms are removed by default until a monotone increasing
solution is obtained for all test cases.

SVD The singular value decomposition method.

GAUSS Standard Gaussian elimination technique.

NSINGULAR [AUTOMATIC]
Indicates whether the number of near-singular terms to be removed in the singular value
decomposition solution method is controlled automatically by the program, or is to be
specified by you via parameters MAX-SINGV, MIN-SINGV. This parameter is only applicable
when METHOD = SVD.

AUTOMATIC The program controls the number of near-singular terms to be

removed by the singular value decomposition solution method.

CUSTOM You indicate the maximum and minimum number of

near-singular terms to be removed.

MAX-SINGV [ORDER (MODEL=OGDEN)]

[2 (ORDER=1, MODEL=MOONEY-RIVLIN)]
[5 (ORDER=2, MODEL=MOONEY-RIVLIN)]
[9 (ORDER=3, MODEL=MOONEY-RIVLIN)]
If NSINGULAR = CUSTOM, this parameter indicates the maximum number of near-singular
terms which are permitted to be removed during the search for a monotone increasing set of
result curves. MAX-SINGV may range from 0 (for which the resulting solution is identical to
that obtained by Gaussian elimination) to the total desired number of model constants, as
indicated by parameter ORDER.

MIN-SINGV [0]
If NSINGULAR = CUSTOM, this parameter indicates the minimum number of near-singular

7-36 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL HYPERELASTIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

terms which will be removed by the singular value decomposition method, i.e., the SVD
algorithm will remove at least MIN-SINGV terms even if a monotone solution set was ob-
tained with fewer terms removed.

ECHO [ALL]
Specifies the level of information reported by the command.

NONE The command behaves silently, except for a completion message.

MODEL The resulting Ogden / Mooney-Rivlin model constants are reported.

ALL As well as model constants, curve fitting statistics and comparison tables
of input and fitted stress values for the input strain/stretch points is
reported.

Note: It is required that the initial shear modulus be positive, i.e.,

i i > 0.0 for an Ogden model.

or

C1 + C2 > 0.0 for a Mooney-Rivlin model.

Note: KAPPA is used in plane strain, axisymmetric and three-dimensional analyses.

Note: For a discussion on the singular value decomposition method and its application to
the least squares curve fitting algorithm, please consult the Theory and Modeling
Guide.

Note: It is unwise to apply this command to a small set of data within a narrow range of
strains (stretches). If possible, some values of strain (stretch) should be input for
compression, and it is recommended that the resulting material behavior always be
checked graphically with the MATERIALSHOW command.

Note: The generalized Mooney-Rivlin parameters C1 through C9 may be evaluated by

this command; the parameters D1, D2 are, however, set to zero by this command.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-37

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM

MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM NAME NPOINTS MU1 MU2 ... MU9

ALPHA1 ALPHA2 ... ALPHA9
BETA1 BETA2 ... BETA9 DENSITY FITTING-CURVE
ISO-VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS
VOL-VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE TREF
RUBBER-TABLE RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC
RUBBER-MULLINS RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC

Defines a hyper-foam material model, which is a hyperelastic material model for rubber
materials. This material model may be used with 2-D solid, 3-D solid and 3D-shell elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined. If the label number of an existing material is given,
then the previous material definition is overwritten.

NPOINTS [1]
This parameter is not used in this version of the AUI.

MUi [1.85 (i=1); -9.2 (i=2); 0.0 (i=3,4,5,...,9)]

ALPHAi [4.5 (i=1); -4.5 (i=2); 0.0 (i=3,4,5,...,9)]
BETAi [9.2 (i=1); 9.2 (i=2); 0.0 (i=3,4,5,...,9)]
Constants i, i, i (i=1,2,3,...,9).

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

FITTING-CURVE [0.0]
Fitting-curve label. The fitting curve is used to calculate the parameters MUi, ALPHAi and
BETAi. If FITTING-CURVE > 0 is specified, any values specified for MUi, ALPHAi and BETAi
will be ignored.

ISO-VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS [0]
Viscoelastic-constants label (isochoric) . This parameter is superseded by the RUBBER-
VISCOELASTIC parameter. However, this parameter is still supported for backwards compat-
ibility.

VOL-VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS [0]
Viscoelastic-constants label (volumetric) . This parameter is superseded by the RUBBER-
VISCOELASTIC parameter. However, this parameter is still supported for backwards compat-
ibility.

7-38 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM Sec. 7.1 Material models

Notes:
1 i * i must be greater than zero.
2 i must be greater than -1/3.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE [NO]
Specifies the temperature dependence of the material properties. {NO/TRS/FULL}

NO The material properties are not temperature dependent; thermal effects are not
included.

TRS The material properties are not temperature dependent, but the material is assumed
to be TRS (thermorheologically simple). Thermal effects are included.

FULL The material properties are temperature dependent. Parameters NPOINTS to

KAPPA, and RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC to RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC of this
command are ignored.

The only parameters used when TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL are NAME,

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE, TREF and RUBBER-TABLE.

TREF [0.0]
The material reference temperature, required if TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = TRS or
FULL.

RUBBER-TABLE [0]
The label number of a rubber-table data set. The type of rubber-table depends upon
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE, as follows:

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = NO :
Do not enter a rubber-table.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = TRS :
A rubber-table of type TRS must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of temperatures
and corresponding coefficients of thermal expansion.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL :
A rubber-table of type Hyper-Foam must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of
temperatures and corresponding material properties.

RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC [0]
If RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC is zero, no viscoelastic effects are included. If RUBBER-VIS-
COELASTIC is non-zero, viscoelastic effects are included, using the data set from the

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-39

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM

corresponding RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC command. This parameter is not used when

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL.

RUBBER-MULLINS [0]
If RUBBER-MULLINS is zero, no Mullins effects are included. If RUBBER-MULLINS is non-
zero, Mullins effects are included, using the data set from the corresponding
RUBBER-MULLINS command. This parameter is not used when TEMPERATURE-DEPEN-
DENCE = FULL.

RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC [0]
If RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC is zero, no orthotropic effects are included. If RUBBER-
ORTHOTROPIC is non-zero, orthotropic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC command. This parameter is not used when
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-40 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM Sec. 7.1 Material models

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-41

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL MOHR-COULOMB

MATERIAL MOHR-COULOMB NAME E NU PHI PSI COH TCUT DENSITY

DILATATION TEMPEFFECTS ECC ALPHA

Defines a nonlinear Mohr-Coulomb material model that may include temperature effects. This
material model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

E
Youngs modulus. {> 0.0}

NU [0.0]
Poissons ratio. {0.0 NU < 0.5}

PHI
Friction angle in degrees. {> 0.0}

PSI [0.0]
Dilatation angle in degrees. {0.0 PSI PHI}

COH [0.0]
Cohesion. { 0.0}

TCUT [1.0E10]
Tension cut-off limit. { 0.0}

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

DILATATION [YES]
Indicates whether to use or ignore the specified dilatation angle. {YES/NO}

TEMPEFFECTS [NO]
Indicates whether or not to apply temperature effects. Note that if temperature effects are
included, then a different potential function will be used (see the Theory and Modeling Guide
for details). {YES/NO}

ECC [0.1]
Eccentricity parameter at the apex of the Mohr-Coulomb yield surface. Applicable only when
temperature effects are included. {0.0 < ECC < 1.0}

7-42 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 7.1 Material models

ALPHA [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion. Applicable only when temperature effects are
included. { 0.0}

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-43

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL MOONEY-RIVLIN

MATERIAL MOONEY-RIVLIN NAME C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 D1 D2

KAPPA DENSITY FITTING-CURVE
VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE TREF
RUBBER-TABLE RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC
RUBBER-MULLINS RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC

Defines a Mooney-Rivlin material model, which is an incompressible nonlinear elastic material

model for rubber materials. This material model may be used with 2-D solid, 3-D solid and 3D-
shell elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

Ci [0.0 (1 i 9)]
Dj [0.0 (1 j 2)]
Generalized Mooney-Rivlin constants Ci, Dj. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for details.

KAPPA [determined from the initial shear modulus,

assuming near incompressibility ( =0.499)]
Bulk modulus.

Note: It is required that the initial shear modulus be positive, i.e.,

C1 + C2 + D1D2 > 0.0

KAPPA is used in plane strain, axisymmetric and three-dimensional analyses.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

FITTING-CURVE [0]
Fitting-curve label. The fitting curve is used to calculate the parameters Ci and Di. If
FITTING-CURVE > 0 is specified, any values specified for Ci and Di will be ignored.

VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS [0]
Viscoelastic-constants label. This parameter is superseded by the RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC
parameter. However, this parameter is still supported for backwards compatibility.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE [NO]
Specifies the temperature dependence of the material properties. {NO/TRS/FULL}

NO The material properties are not temperature dependent; thermal effects are not

7-44 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL MOONEY-RIVLIN Sec. 7.1 Material models

included.

TRS The material properties are not temperature dependent, but the material is assumed
to be TRS (thermorheologically simple). Thermal effects are included.

FULL The material properties are temperature dependent. Parameters C1 to KAPPA, and
RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC to RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC of this command are ignored.

The only parameters used when TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL are NAME,

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE, TREF and RUBBER-TABLE.

TREF [0.0]
The material reference temperature, required if TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = TRS or
FULL.

RUBBER-TABLE [0]
The label number of a rubber-table data set. The type of rubber-table depends upon
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE, as follows:

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = NO :
Do not enter a rubber-table.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = TRS :
A rubber-table of type TRS must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of temperatures
and corresponding coefficients of thermal expansion.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL :
A rubber-table of type Mooney-Rivlin must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of
temperatures and corresponding material properties.

RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC [0]
If RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC is zero, no viscoelastic effects are included. If RUBBER-VIS-
COELASTIC is non-zero, viscoelastic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC command. This parameter is not used when
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL.

RUBBER-MULLINS [0]
If RUBBER-MULLINS is zero, no Mullins effects are included. If RUBBER-MULLINS is non-
zero, Mullins effects are included, using the data set from the corresponding
RUBBER-MULLINS command. This parameter is not used when TEMPERATURE-DEPEN-
DENCE = FULL.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-45

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL MOONEY-RIVLIN

RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC [0]
If RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC is zero, no orthotropic effects are included. If RUBBER-
ORTHOTROPIC is non-zero, orthotropic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC command. This parameter is not used when
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-46 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL MROZ-BILINEAR Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL MROZ-BILINEAR NAME E NU YIELD BOUND ET ETB

EPA DENSITY ALPHA TREF

Defines an elastic-plastic material with the Mroz yield criteria and bilinear hardening. This
material model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

E
Youngs modulus. {> 0.0}

NU [0.0]
Poissons ratio. {-1.0 < NU < 0.5}

YIELD
Initial yield stress in simple tension.

BOUND
Bounding stress.

ET
Strain hardening modulus.

ETB
Hardening modulus of the bounding surface.

EPA [0.0]
The maximum allowable effective plastic strain, which enables the modeling of rupture. The
stresses are set to zero when the effective plastic strain is greater than the rupture strain EPA.
EPA = 0.0 corresponds to no rupture condition.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

ALPHA [0.0]
The mean coefficient of thermal expansion.

TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature for calculation of ALPHA. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-47

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP

MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP
NAME HARDENING CREEP-LAW TEMP-UNIT
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
A13 A14 A15 TREF ALPHA TOLIL DENSITY NRUPT1
NRUPT2 TIME-HARDENING THERMAL-EXPANSION
DEPENDENCY TRANSITION-STRAINRATE BVALUE
thetai Ei nui alphai dcurvei alpha2i alpha3i strainrate-fiti

Defines a nonlinear thermo-elastic-plastic-multilinear and creep material, with von Mises yield
condition and isotropic or kinematic strain hardening. This material model may be used with
truss, 2-D solid, 3-D solid, isobeam, shell and pipe elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

HARDENING [ISOTROPIC]
Selects the type of strain hardening used by the material.

ISOTROPIC Linear isotropic strain hardening.

KINEMATIC Linear kinematic strain hardening.

CREEP-LAW [0]
Indicates type of the creep law. For details of the creep laws, please refer to Section 3.6.3 of
the Theory and Modeling Guide.
{0/1/2/3/LUBBY2/BLACKBURN}

TEMP-UNIT [CELSIUS]
Creep law 3 may refer to temperatures in degrees Celsius (the centigrade scale) or degrees
Kelvin (the absolute scale). {CELSIUS/KELVIN}

A0 ... A15 [0.0]

Creep law constants, ai. A8 ... A15 are applicable only when CREEP-LAW = BLACKBURN.

TREF [0.0]
The reference temperature for thermal expansion calculation. See the Theory and Modeling
Guide.

ALPHA [1.0]
Time integration parameter {0.0 ALPHA 1.0}, used in the integration of the thermo-
plastic and creep rate equations. The limiting values are:

0.0 Euler forward method (explicit).

7-48 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP Sec. 7.1 Material models

1.0 Euler backward method (implicit).

TOLIL [1.0E-10]
Solution tolerance. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

NRUPT1 [0]
NRUPT2 [0]
Label numbers of rupture criteria, defined by command RUPTURE. Two rupture criteria can
be used simultaneously provided that they are not of the same type. A zero value indicates
that no rupture criteria are to be used with the material definition.

TIME-HARDENING [NO]
Indicates whether strain hardening (NO) or time hardening (YES) is used. {YES/NO}

THERMAL-EXPANSION [ISOTROPIC]
Indicates whether the coefficient of thermal expansion is isotropic or orthotropic. {ISOTRO-
PIC/ORTHOTROPIC}

DEPENDENCY [NO]
Flag indicating strain rate dependency. {NO/YES}

Note that DEPENDENCY=YES works only with HARDENING=ISOTROPIC

TRANSITION-STRAINRATE [0.0001]
Transition strain rate 0.

BVALUE [0.0]
Strain rate hardening parameter b.

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

Ei
Youngs Modulus at temperature thetai.

nui
Poissons ratio at temperature thetai.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-49

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP

alphai
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion at temperature thetai. If THERMAL-
EXPANSION=ORTHOTROPIC, then alphai is the coefficient in the a-direction.

dcurvei
Stress vs. strain curve at temperature thetai. This data entry is the label number of a stress-
strain curve defined via the SCURVE command.

When MASTER CONVERT-SSVAL=NO, stressi and straini are interpreted as true stresses and
strains. Stresses and strains entered in the SCURVE command are also intrepreted as true
stresses and strains.

When MASTER CONVERT-SSVAL=YES, stressi and straini are interpreted as engineering

stresses and strains. Stresses and strains entered in the SCURVE command are also
intrepreted as engineering stresses and strains.

Note: The material properties are automatically sorted in order of increasing temperature. If
the same temperature is given several times, only the last given values are used.

alpha2i
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion in the b-direction at temperature thetai. Used only if
THERMAL-EXPANSION=ORTHOTROPIC.

alpha3i
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion in the c-direction at temperature thetai. Used only if
THERMAL-EXPANSION=ORTHOTROPIC.

strainrate-fiti
Strainrate-fit curve at temperature "thetai" describing the strain rate dependence of the yield
stress. The function must have been defined using the STRAINRATE-FIT command.

Note: The material properties are automatically sorted in order of increasing temperature. If
the same temperature is given several times, only the last given values are used.

For more information on the STRAINRATE-FIT, TRANSITION-STRAINRATE and BVALUE

parameters, see the PLASTIC-BILINEAR COMMAND.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-50 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP Sec. 7.1 Material models

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-51

Chap. 7 Model definition

This page intentionally left blank.

7-52 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
NAME HARDENING NCOEF TEMP-UNIT TREF ALPHA TOLIL
DENSITY NRUPT1 NRUPT2 TIME-HARDENING CREEP-LAW

thetai Ei nui alphai dcurvei

Defines a nonlinear thermo-elastic-plastic-multilinear and creep material, with temperature

and/or effective-stress dependent coefficients (see command CREEP-COEFFICIENTS ), von
Mises yield condition, and isotropic or kinematic strain hardening. This material model may
be used with truss, 2-D solid, 3-D solid, isobeam, shell and pipe elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

HARDENING [ISOTROPIC]
Selects the type of strain hardening rule:

ISOTROPIC Linear isotropic strain hardening.

KINEMATIC Linear kinematic strain hardening.

NCOEF
Label number of the creep coefficient dependence function, defined by command
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS.

TEMP-UNIT [CELSIUS]
Indicates the temperature unit for the creep model; degrees Celsius (the centigrade scale) or
degrees Kelvin (the absolute scale). {CELSIUS/KELVIN}

TREF [0.0]
The reference temperature for thermal expansion calculation. See the Theory and Modeling
Guide.

ALPHA [1.0]
Time integration parameter {0.0 ALPHA 1.0}, used in the integration of the thermo-
plastic and creep rate equations. The limiting values are:

0.0 Euler forward method (explicit).

1.0 Euler backward method (implicit).

Note: ALPHA = 1.0 must be used with large strain analyses.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-53

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE

TOLIL [1.0E-10]
Solution tolerance. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for further details.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

NRUPT1 [0]
NRUPT2 [0]
Label numbers of rupture criteria, as defined by command RUPTURE. Two rupture criteria can
be used simultaneously, provided they are not of the same type. A zero value indicates that
no rupture criteria are to be used with the material definition.

TIME-HARDENING [NO]
Indicates whether strain hardening (NO) or time hardening (YES) is used. {YES/NO}

CREEP-LAW [LAW3]
Specifies creep law to be used. {NONE/LAW3/LUBBY2}

NONE No creep.

LAW3 ec = S T e H

LUBBY2 Lubby2 creep law.

Note: If CREEP-LAW=LAW3, the parameter NCOEF reference a creep-coefficient function

defined by command CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-ONLY or
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR.

If CREEP-LAW=LUBBY2, the parameter NCOEF reference a creep-coefficient

function defined by command CREEP-COEFFICIENTS LUBBY2.

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

Ei
Youngs Modulus at temperature thetai.

nui
Poissons ratio at temperature thetai.

alphai
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion at temperature thetai.

7-54 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE Sec. 7.1 Material models

dcurvei
Stress v strain curve at temperature thetai. This data entry is the label number of a stress-
strain curve defined via SCURVE.

When MASTER CONVERT-SSVAL=NO, stressi and straini are interpreted as true stresses and
strains. Stresses and strains entered in the SCURVE command are also intrepreted as true
stresses and strains.

When MASTER CONVERT-SSVAL=YES, stressi and straini are interpreted as engineering

stresses and strains. Stresses and strains entered in the SCURVE command are also
intrepreted as engineering stresses and strains.

Note: The material properties are automatically sorted in order of increasing temperature. If
the same temperature is given several times, only the last given values are used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-55

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL NONLINEAR-ELASTIC

MATERIAL NONLINEAR-ELASTIC NAME DENSITY DCURVE NU MATRIX

straini stressi

Defines a nonlinear elastic material. The model is uniaxial and the stress-strain curve is
defined as piecewise linear through the data points (straini, stressi) which can be entered as
data lines following the command or can be referenced via the DCURVE parameter (see
SCURVE ). For a given strain, the total stress and tangent modulus are interpolated from the
input curve. This material model may be used with truss elements, 2-D solid and 3-D solid
elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

DCURVE [0]
Label number of a stress-strain curve defined by command SCURVE. This defines the stress-
strain data points associated with this material model. If DCURVE is input as 0, then the data
lines following the command define the stress-strain data points. Conversely, if DCURVE is
greater than zero then no data lines are expected.

NU [0.0]
Poisson's ratio. Not applicable to truss element. {-1.0 < NU < 0.5}

MATRIX [TANGENT]
This flag indicates whether the tangent or secant stress-strain matrix is used when the stress-
strain curve enters into a softening region. Not applicable to truss element.{TANGENT/
SECANT}

TANGENT Use tangent stress-strain matrix

SECANT Use secant stress-strain matrix

straini
Strain at data point i.

stress i
Stress at strain straini.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-56 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 7.1 Material models

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-57

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL OGDEN

MATERIAL OGDEN NAME MU1 ALPHA1 MU2 ALPHA2 MU3

ALPHA3 MU4 ALPHA4 MU5 ALPHA5 MU6
ALPHA6 MU7 ALPHA7 MU8 ALPHA8 MU9
ALPHA9 KAPPA DENSITY FITTING-CURVE
VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE TREF
RUBBER-TABLE RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC
RUBBER-MULLINS RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC

Defines an Ogden material model, which is an incompressible nonlinear elastic material model
for rubber materials. This material model may be used with 2-D solid, 3-D and 3D-shell solid
elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

MUi [0.0 (1 i 9)]

ALPHAi [0.0 (1 i 9)]
Ogden constants i, i. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for details. Note that if
ALPHAi = 0.0 and curve fitting is used (i.e., FITTING-CURVE > 0), ALPHAi = i will be
assigned.

Note: It is recommended that the initial shear modulus be positive, i.e., the sum of ii > 0.0
should be greater than zero.

KAPPA [determined from the initial shear modulus,

assuming near incompressibility ( =0.499)]
Bulk modulus. KAPPA is used in plane strain, axisymmetric and three-dimensional analyses.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

FITTING-CURVE [0]
Fitting-curve label. The fitting curve is used to calculate the parameters MUi and ALPHAi.
If FITTING-CURVE > 0 is specified, any values specified for MUi and ALPHAi will be ignored.

VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS [0]
Viscoelastic-constants label. This parameter is superseded by the RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC
parameter. However, this parameter is still supported for backwards compatibility.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE [NO]
Specifies the temperature dependence of the material properties. {NO/TRS/FULL}

7-58 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL OGDEN Sec. 7.1 Material models

NO The material properties are not temperature dependent; thermal effects are not
included.

TRS The material properties are not temperature dependent, but the material is assumed
to be TRS (thermorheologically simple). Thermal effects are included.

FULL The material properties are temperature dependent. Parameters MU1 to KAPPA, and
RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC to RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC of this command are ignored.

The only parameters used when TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL are NAME,

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE, TREF and RUBBER-TABLE.

TREF [0.0]
The material reference temperature, required if TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = TRS or
FULL.

RUBBER-TABLE [0]
The label number of a rubber-table data set. The type of rubber-table depends upon
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE, as follows:

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = NO :
Do not enter a rubber-table.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = TRS :
A rubber-table of type TRS must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of temperatures
and corresponding coefficients of thermal expansion.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL :
A rubber-table of type Ogden must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of
temperatures and corresponding material properties.

RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC [0]
If RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC is zero, no viscoelastic effects are included. If RUBBER-VIS-
COELASTIC is non-zero, viscoelastic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC command. This parameter is not used when
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL.

RUBBER-MULLINS [0]
If RUBBER-MULLINS is zero, no Mullins effects are included. If RUBBER-MULLINS is non-
zero, Mullins effects are included, using the data set from the corresponding
RUBBER-MULLINS command. This parameter is not used when TEMPERATURE-DEPEN-
DENCE = FULL.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-59

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL OGDEN

RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC [0]
If RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC is zero, no orthotropic effects are included. If RUBBER-
ORTHOTROPIC is non-zero, orthotropic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC command. This parameter is not used when
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-60 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC NAME EA EB EC NUAB NUAC NUBC

GAB GAC GBC DENSITY WRINKLE
W-TIME ALPHA1 ALPHA2 ALPHA3

Defines an orthotropic linear elastic material. This material model may be used with 2-D solid,
3-D solid, shell and plate elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

EA
a-direction modulus. {> 0.0}

EB
b-direction modulus. {> 0.0}

EC [0.0]
c-direction modulus. EC=0 is admissible only for PLATE elements ( EGROUP PLATE ).
{ 0.0}

NUAB [0.0]
a-b strain ratio.

NUAC [0.0]
a-c strain ratio.

NUBC [0.0]
b-c strain ratio.

GAB
a-b shear modulus. {> 0.0}

GAC [0.0]
a-c shear modulus. GAC=0 is admissible only for PLATE and 2D solid elements
( EGROUP PLATE and EGROUP TWODSOLID ). { 0.0}

GBC [0.0]
b-c shear modulus. GBC=0 is admissible only for PLATE and 2D solid elements
( EGROUP PLATE and EGROUP TWODSOLID ). { 0.0}

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-61

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC

WRINKLE [NO]
Indicates whether wrinkling is to be modeled (e.g., for fabrics). {YES/NO}

Note: Modeling of wrinkling is only allowed for TWODSOLID plane stress elements.

W-TIME [0.0]
Wrinkling time, i.e., the time at which wrinkling of the material is activated.

ALPHA1 [0.0]
The coefficient. of thermal expansion for the a direction.

ALPHA2 [0.0]
The coefficient. of thermal expansion for the b direction.

ALPHA3 [0.0]
The coefficient. of thermal expansion for the c direction.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-62 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL PIEZOELECTRIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL PIEZOELECTRIC NAME DENSITY OPTION1 OPTION2 C11 C12

C13 C14 C15 C16 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C33
C34 C35 C36 C44 C45 C46 C55 C56 C66 E1 E2 E3
NU12 NU13 NU23 G12 G13 G23 PE11 PE12 PE13
PE21 PE22 PE23 PE31 PE32 PE33 PE41 PE42
PE43 PE51 PE52 PE53 PE61 PE62 PE63 EPS11
EPS12 EPS13 EPS22 EPS23 EPS33

Defines a piezoelectric material. This material model may be used with 2-D and 3-D solid
elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

OPTION1 [STIFFNESS]
Indicates whether elastic constants are input as stiffness values or modulus values.
{STIFFNESS/MODULUS}

OPTION2 [STRESS]
Indicates whether piezoelectric coupling constants are input in stress form or strain form.
{STRESS/STRAIN}

C11 ... C66 [0.0]

Elastic stiffness constants, only used if OPTION1=STIFFNESS. The symmetric stiffness
matrix C has the following form for 3-D elements

C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16

C22 C23 C24 C25 C26

C33 C34 C35 C36

symm. C44 C45 C46
C55 C56

C66

For 2-D elements, entries Ci5 and Ci6 are not used. { 0.0}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-63

Chap. 7 Model definition

E1, E2, E3, NU12, NU13, NU23, G12, G13, G23 [0.0]
Young's modulus, Poisson's ratios and shear moduli of orthotropic material,used only if
OPTION1=MODULUS. For 2D elements, G13 and G23 are not used { 0.0}

PE11 ... PE63 [0.0]

Piezoelectric coupling constants.
If OPTION2=STRESS, these are the entries in the stress-form coupling matrix e,
If OPTION2=STRAIN, these are the entries in the the strain-form coupling matrix d
The e (or d) matrix has the following form

PE11 PE12 PE13

PE21 PE22 P E 2 3

PE31 PE32 PE33

PE41 PE42 PE43
PE51 PE52 PE53

P E 6 1 PE62 P E 6 3

For 2-D elements, only the following are used. { 0.0}

PE11 PE12
PE21 P E 2 2

PE31 PE32

PE41 PE42

EPS11 ... EPS33 [0.0]

Dielectric constants that make up the dielectric matrix with the following form

EPS11 EPS12 EPS13

EPS22 E P S 2 3

s y m m . E P S 3 3

For 2-D elements, EPS13, EPS23, and EPS 33 are not used. { 0.0}

7-64 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL PLASTIC-BILINEAR Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL PLASTIC-BILINEAR
NAME HARDENING E NU YIELD ET EPA STRAINRATEFUNCTION
DENSITY ALPHA TREF DEPENDENCY TRANSITION-STRAINRATE
EP-STRAINRATE BCURVE BVALUE XM-INF XM0 ETA STRAINRATE-FIT

Defines a bilinear elastic-plastic material model with von Mises yield condition. This material
model may be used with truss, 2-D solid, 3-D solid, beam, iso-beam, shell and pipe elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

HARDENING [ISOTROPIC]
Selects the type of strain hardening used by the material. {ISOTROPIC/KINEMATIC/
MIXED}

ISOTROPIC Linear isotropic strain hardening.

KINEMATIC Linear kinematic strain hardening.
MIXED Mixed hardening. See Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 3.4.1

E
Youngs modulus. {> 0.0}

NU [0.0]
Poissons ratio. {-1.0 < NU < 0.5}

YIELD
Initial yield stress in simple tension.

ET [0.0]
Strain hardening modulus.

EPA [0.0]
Maximum allowable effective plastic strain. This allows for the modeling of material rupture,
whereby the stresses are set to zero whenever the effective plastic strain is greater than the
rupture strain EPA. If EPA is input as 0.0, the rupture condition is not used. EPA is not
applicable to beam elements.

STRAINRATEFUNCTION [0]
The parameter is currently not used. Replaced by STRAINRATE-FIT.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-65

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL PLASTIC-BILINEAR

ALPHA [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion. ALPHA is only considered if thermal loading is
modeled.

TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature for calculations of ALPHA. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

Note: The parameters ALPHA, TREF are not applicable to TRUSS elements.

DEPENDENCY [NO]
Flag indicating strain rate dependency. {YES/NO}

TRANSITION-STRAINRATE [0.0001]
Transition strain rate.

EP-STRAINRATE [0.0]
Non-zero plastic strainrate, used only if STRAINRATE-FIT = 0 and BCURVE > 0. This
parameter is obsolete, but kept for backwards compatibility.

BCURVE [0]
Label number of a stress-strain curve defined by command SCURVE. This parameter is
obsolete, but kept for backwards compatibility.

BVALUE [0.0]
Strain rate hardening parameter b.

XM-INF [0.0]
Hardening parameter M , used only for mixed hardening.{0 XM-INF 1}

XM0 [0.0]
Hardening parameter M0 , used only for mixed hardening.{0 XM0 1}

ETA [0.0]
Hardening parameter , used only for mixed hardening. {ETA 0}
If ETA >0, then 0< XM-INF < 1 and 0< XM0 <1.

STRAINRATE-FIT [0]
The label number of a strainrate-fit describing the strain rate dependence of the yield stress.
The function must have been defined using the STRAINRATE-FIT command. A zero value
indicates no strain rate dependence.

7-66 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL PLASTIC-BILINEAR Sec. 7.1 Material models

Notes on the STRAINRATE-FIT, TRANSITION-STRAINRATE, EP-STRAINRATE, BCURVE

and BVALUE parameters:

These parameters are used only if DEPENDENCY=YES.

1) STRAINRATE-FIT = 0 and BCURVE = 0. The strainrate material parameters are TRANSI-

TION-STRAINRATE and BVALUE. No curve-fitting is performed.

2) STRAINRATE-FIT = 0 and BCURVE > 0. The AUI uses the stress-strain curve entered in
BCURVE, and the associated plastic strainrate EP-STRAINRATE, to determine the overstress
ratio at plastic strainrate EP-STRAINRATE.

Then the AUI uses the input material parameter TRANSITION-STRAINRATE and the
overstress ratio in a curve-fitting procedure to determine material parameter BVALUE. Note
that the BCURVE>0 option is obsolete and kept only for backwards compatibility.

3) STRAINRATE-FIT > 0. There are two possibilities, depending upon how many plastic
strainrates are entered in the strainrate-fit.

a) One plastic strainrate (strainrate1) and stress-strain curve (scurve1) in the strainrate-fit.
The AUI determines the overstress ratio at strainrate1 using scurve1. Then the AUI uses the
input material parameter TRANSITION-STRAINRATE and the overstress ratio in a curve-
fitting procedure to determine material parameter BVALUE.

b) More than one plastic strainrate (strainratei) and stress-strain curve (scurvei)in the
strainrate-fit. The AUI determines the overstress ratio at each strainratei using scurvei. Then
the AUI uses these plastic strainrates and overstress ratios in a curve-fitting procedure to
determine both material parameters TRANSITION-STRAINRATE and BVALUE.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-67

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP

MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP NAME HARDENING CREEP-LAW TEMP-UNIT A0

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13
A14 A15 TREF ALPHA TOLIL DENSITY NRUPT1
NRUPT2 TIME-HARDENING DEPENDENCY
TRANSITION-STRAINRATE BVALUE

thetai Ei nui yieldi ETi alphai EPAi strainrate-fiti

Defines a nonlinear thermo-elastic-plastic and creep material, with von Mises yield condition
and isotropic or kinematic strain hardening. This material model may be used with truss, 2-D
solid, 3-D solid, beam, iso-beam, shell and pipe elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

HARDENING [ISOTROPIC]
Selects the type of strain hardening used by the material.

ISOTROPIC Linear isotropic strain hardening.

KINEMATIC Linear kinematic strain hardening.

CREEP-LAW [0]
Indicates type of the creep law. Please refer to the Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 3.6.3
for details of the formulation of these creep laws. {0/1/2/3/LUBBY2/BLACKBURN}

TEMP-UNIT [CELSIUS]
Creep law 3 may refer to temperatures in degrees Celsius (the centigrade scale) or degrees
Kelvin (the absolute scale). {CELSIUS/KELVIN}

A0 ... A15 [0.0]

Creep law constants, ai.

TREF [0.0]
The reference temperature for thermal expansion calculation. See the Theory and Modeling
Guide.

ALPHA [1.0]
Time integration parameter { 0.0 ALPHA 1.0}, used in the integration of the thermo-
plastic and creep rate equations. The limiting values are:

0.0 Euler forward method (explicit).

1.0 Euler backward method (implicit).

7-68 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP Sec. 7.1 Material models

TOLIL [1.0E-10]
Solution tolerance. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

NRUPT1 [0]
NRUPT2 [0]
Label numbers of rupture criteria, defined by command RUPTURE. Two rupture criteria can
be used simultaneously provided that they are not of the same type. A zero value indicates
that no rupture criteria are to be used with the material definition.

TIME-HARDENING [NO]
Indicates whether strain hardening (NO) or time hardening (YES) is used. {YES/NO}

DEPENDENCY [NO]
Flag indicating strain rate dependency. {NO/YES}

Note that DEPENDENCY=YES works only with HARDENING=ISOTROPIC

TRANSITION-STRAINRATE [0.0001]
Transition strain rate.

BVALUE [0.0]
Strain rate hardening parameter b.

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

Ei
Youngs Modulus at temperature thetai.

nui
Poissons ratio at temperature thetai.

yieldi
Yield stress in simple tension at temperature thetai.

ETi
Strain hardening modulus at temperature thetai.

alphai
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion at temperature thetai.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-69

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP

EPAi
Maximum allowable effective plastic strain at temperature thetai enabling the modeling of
rupture. If EPAi = 0.0 the rupture condition is not used at temperature thetai.

strainrate-fiti
Strainrate-fit curve at temperature "thetai" describing the strain rate dependence of the yield
stress. The function must have been defined using the STRAINRATE-FIT command.

Note: The material properties are automatically sorted in order of increasing temperature. If
the same temperature is given several times, only the last given values are used.

For more information on the STRAINRATE-FIT, TRANSITION-STRAINRATE and BVALUE

parameters, see the PLASTIC-BILINEAR COMMAND.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-70 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 7.1 Material models

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-71

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE

MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE NAME HARDENING NCOEF,

TEMP-UNIT TREF ALPHA TOLIL
DENSITY NRUPT1 NRUPT2
TIME-HARDENING CREEP-LAW

thetai Ei nui yieldi ETi alphai EPAi

Defines a nonlinear thermo-elastic-plastic and creep material, with temperature and/or

effective-stress dependent coefficients (see command CREEP-COEFFICIENTS ), von Mises
yield condition, and isotropic or kinematic strain hardening. This material model may be used
with truss, 2-D solid, 3-D solid, beam, iso-beam, shell and pipe elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

HARDENING [ISOTROPIC]
Selects the type of strain hardening rule:

ISOTROPIC Linear isotropic strain hardening.

KINEMATIC Linear kinematic strain hardening.

NCOEF
Label number of the creep coefficient dependence function, defined by command
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS.

TEMP-UNIT [CELSIUS]
Indicates the temperature unit for the creep model; degrees Celsius (the centigrade scale) or
degrees Kelvin (the absolute scale). {CELSIUS/KELVIN}

TREF [0.0]
The reference temperature for thermal expansion calculation. See the Theory and Modeling
Guide.

ALPHA [1.0]
Time integration parameter {0.0 ALPHA 1.0}, used in the integration of the thermo-
plastic and creep rate equations. The limiting values are:

0.0 Euler forward method (explicit).

1.0 Euler backward method (implicit).

Note: ALPHA = 1.0 must be used with large strain analyses.

7-72 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE Sec. 7.1 Material models

TOLIL [1.0E-10]
Solution tolerance. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for further details.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

NRUPT1 [0]
NRUPT2 [0]
Label numbers of rupture criteria, as defined by command RUPTURE. Two rupture criteria can
be used simultaneously, provided they are not of the same type. A zero value indicates that
no rupture criteria are to be used with the material definition.

TIME-HARDENING [NO]
Indicates whether strain hardening (NO) or time hardening (YES) is used. {YES/NO}

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

Ei
Youngs Modulus at temperature thetai.

nui
Poissons ratio at temperature thetai.

yieldi
Yield stress in simple tension at temperature thetai.

ETi
Strain hardening modulus at temperature thetai.

alphai
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion at temperature thetai.

EPAi
Maximum allowable effective plastic strain at temperature thetai enabling the modeling of
rupture. If EPAi = 0.0 the rupture condition is not used at temperature thetai.

Note: The material properties are automatically sorted in order of increasing temperature. If
the same temperature is given several times, only the last given values are used.

CREEP-LAW [LAW3]
Specifies creep law to be used. {NONE/LAW3/LUBBY2}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-73

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE

NONE No creep.

LAW3 ec = S T e H

LUBBY2 Lubby2 creep law.

Note: If CREEP-LAW=LAW3, the parameter NCOEF reference a creep-coefficient function

defined by command CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-ONLY or
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR.

If CREEP-LAW=LUBBY2, the parameter NCOEF reference a creep-coefficient

function defined by command CREEP-COEFFICIENTS LUBBY2.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-74 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIALPLASTIC-CYCLIC NAME E NU DENSITY ALPHA

PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC PLCYCL-KINEMATIC
PLCYCL-RUPTURE BETA MAXITE RTOL

Defines a plastic-cyclic material, that is, a material model used to model cyclic plasticity. This
material model can be used with the truss, beam, shell, 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

E
Youngs modulus. {> 0.0}

NU [0.0]
Poissons ratio. {-1.0 < NU < 0.5}

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

ALPHA [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion. ALPHA is only considered if thermal loading is
modeled.

PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC
The number of a PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC definition. This definition specifies the dependence of
the radius of the yield surface on the plastic strains. This parameter must be specified.

PLCYCL-KINEMATIC [0]
The number of a PLCYCL-KINEMATIC definition. This definition specifies the dependence
of the back stresses on the plastic strains. This parameter can be set to 0 to specify no
kinematic hardening.

PLCYCL-RUPTURE [0]
The number of a PLCYCL-RUPTURE definition. This definition specifies the rupture criterion.
This parameter can be set to 0 to specify no rupture.

BETA [AUTOMATIC]
A factor used in the stress integration (0 BETA 1). If BETA=AUTOMATIC,
ADINA automatically sets BETA based on the time integration method (=1 for static or
implicit dynamics, =0 for explicit dynamics).

MAXITE [100]
The maximum number of stress integration iterations allowed per integration point.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-75

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC

RTOL [1E-12]
A tolerance used to assess convergence of stress integration iterations. This is a relative
tolerance, i.e., dimensionless values are tested against RTOL.

Notes:

1) The simplest material that can be defined using this command is given by a command
sequence such as

PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC 1 BILINEAR YIELD=2E8

MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC 1 E=2.07E11 NU=0.3 DENSITY=7800 PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC=1

This material is perfectly plastic. This material description is equivalent to

MATERIAL PLASTIC-BILINEAR 1 E=2.07E11 NU=0.3 DENSITY=7800 YIELD=2E8

2) The PLASTIC-CYCLIC material can be used to model bilinear isotropic hardening using a
command sequence such as

PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC 1 BILINEAR YIELD=2E8 EP=2.090909E09

MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC 1 E=2.07E11 NU=0.3 DENSITY=7800 PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC=1

and this material description is equivalent to

MATERIAL PLASTIC-BILINEAR 1 E=2.07E11 NU=0.3 DENSITY=7800 YIELD=2E8

ET=2.07E09

3) The plastic-cyclic material can be used to model multilinear isotropic hardening using a
command sequence such as

PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC 1 MULTILINEAR
0 2E8
1E-3 2.5E8
2E-3 2.7E8
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC 1 E=2.07E11 NU=0.3 DENSITY=7800 PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC=1

and this material description is equivalent to

MATERIAL PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR 1 E=2.07E11 NU=0.3

9.6618E-4 2E8
2.2077E-3 2.5E8
3.3043E-3 2.7E8

7-76 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

4) The plastic-cyclic material can be used to model bilinear kinematic hardening using a
command sequence such as

PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC 1 BILINEAR YIELD=2E8

PLCYCL-KINEMATIC 1 ARMSTRONG-FREDRICK
2.090909E9
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC 1 E=2.07E11 NU=0.3 DENSITY=7800 PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC=1,
PLCYCL-KINEMATIC=1

and this material description is equivalent to

MATERIAL PLASTIC-BILINEAR 1 E=2.07E11 NU=0.3 DENSITY=7800 YIELD=2E8

ET=2.07E09,
HARDENING=KINEMATIC

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-77

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR

MATERIAL PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR
NAME HARDENING E NU STRAINRATEFUNCTION DENSITY ALPHA TREF
DCURVE DEPENDENCY TRANSITION-STRAINRATE EP-STRAINRATE
BCURVE BVALUE STRAINRATE-FIT

strain1 stress1 (stress1 = initial yield stress)

...
straini stressi

Defines a multilinear elastic-plastic material model with von Mises yield condition. The
stress-strain curve is defined as piecewise linear through the data points (straini, stressi)
which can be entered as data lines following the command or can be referenced via the
DCURVE parameter (see SCURVE ). This material model may be used with truss, 2-D solid, 3-
D solid, beam, iso-beam, shell and pipe elements.
When MASTER CONVERT-SSVAL=NO, stressi and straini are interpreted as true stresses and
strains. Stresses and strains entered in the SCURVE command are also intrepreted as true
stresses and strains.
When MASTER CONVERT-SSVAL=YES, stressi and straini are interpreted as engineering
stresses and strains. Stresses and strains entered in the SCURVE command are also
intrepreted as engineering stresses and strains.
NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]
Label number of the material to be defined.

HARDENING [ISOTROPIC]
Selects the type of strain hardening used by the material.
ISOTROPIC Linear isotropic strain hardening.
KINEMATIC Linear kinematic strain hardening.
E [0.0]
Youngs modulus. {> 0.0}
NU [0.0]
Poissons ratio. {-1.0 < NU < 0.5}

STRAINRATEFUNCTION [0]
The parameter is currently not used. Replaced by STRAINRATE-FIT.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
ALPHA [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion. ALPHA is only considered if thermal loading is
modeled.
TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature to calculations of ALPHA. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

7-78 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR Sec. 7.1 Material models

Note: Parameters ALPHA, TREF are not applicable to TRUSS elements.

DCURVE [0]
Label number of a stress-strain curve defined by command SCURVE. This defines the stress-
strain data points associated with this material model. If DCURVE is input as 0, then the data
lines following the command define the stress-strain data points. Conversely, if DCURVE is
greater than zero then no data lines are expected.
DEPENDENCY [NO]
Flag indicating strain rate dependency. {YES/NO}
TRANSITION-STRAINRATE [0.0001]
Transition strain rate.

EP-STRAINRATE [0.0]
Non-zero plastic strainrate, used only if STRAINRATE-FIT = 0 and BCURVE > 0. This
parameter is obsolete, but kept for backwards compatibility.

BCURVE [0]
Label number of a stress-strain curve defined by command SCURVE. This parameter is
obsolete, but kept for backwards compatibility.
BVALUE [0.0]
Strain rate hardening parameter b.

strain1
Strain at data point 1. The input value here is overwritten by the calculated initial yield strain
(stress1 / E).

stress1
Stress at strain1, equal to the initial yield stress.
straini
Strain at data point i (i > 1).

stressi
Stress at straini.
Note: The strain-stress data points can be input in any strain order (they will be
automatically sorted in increasing strain order) but all input strains must be greater
than or equal to strain1 = (stress1 / E).
Note: The stress is assumed to be zero when the effective plastic strain is greater than the
maximum input strain value.
Note: The slope of the stress-strain curve (the tangent modulus, ET) must satisfy (for all
points in the nonlinear part of the curve):
0 ET < E for isotropic hardening.
0.0001 E ET < E for kinematic hardening.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-79

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR

STRAINRATE-FIT [0]
The label number of a strainrate-fit describing the strain rate dependence of the yield stress.
The function must have been defined using the STRAINRATE-FIT command. A zero value
indicates no strain rate dependence.

For more information on the STRAINRATE-FIT, TRANSITION-STRAINRATE and BVALUE

parameters, see the PLASTIC-BILINEAR COMMAND.

The stress-strain curve entered in the MATERIAL PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR command

(either entered using the DCURVE parameter or in the data input lines) corresponds to a
plastic strainrate value of 0. Denote this curve as curve s0. Now consider a plot of all stress-
strain curves s0, scurve1, scurve2, ... (in order of increasing plastic strainrate). Curve s0 should
lie below curve scurve1, curve scurve1 should lie below curve scurve2, etc. In particular,
curve s0 should not be the same as curve scurve1.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-80 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC
NAME EA EB EC NUAB NUAC NUBC GAB GAC GBC
YIELDAA YIELDBB YIELDCC YIELDAB YIELDAC YIELDBC
ETAA ETBB ETCC ETAB ETAC ETBC EPLU EPA DENSITY
ALPHAA ALPHAB ALPHAC TREF OPTION METHOD
R0 R45 R90 F G H L M N C E0 NN

Defines a nonlinear orthotropic plastic material. This material model may be used with shell,
2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

EA, EB, EC
a-, b- and c-direction modulus, respectively. {> 0.0}

NUAB [0.0]
a-b strain ratio.

NUAC [0.0]
a-c strain ratio.

NUBC [0.0]
b-c strain ratio.

GAB
a-b shear modulus. {> 0.0}

GAC [0.0]
a-c shear modulus. GAC=0 is admissible only for 2D solid elements ( EGROUP TWODSOLID ). {
0.0}

GBC [0.0]
b-c shear modulus. GBC=0 is admissible only for 2D solid elements ( EGROUP TWODSOLID ).
{ 0.0}

YIELDAA, YIELDBB, YIELDCC

Initial yield stress for a-, b- and c-direction, respectively. See notes at end of command
description.

YIELDAB
Initial yield stress for ab-plane. See notes at end of command description.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-81

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC

YIELDAC [0.0]
Initial yield stress for ac-plane. See notes at end of command description.

YIELDBC [0.0]
Initial yield stress for bc-plane. See notes at end of command description.

ETAA [0.0]
Strain hardening modulus for a-direction. Used only for OPTION = 2.

ETBB [0.0]
Strain hardening modulus for b-direction. Used only for OPTION = 2.

ETCC [0.0]
Strain hardening modulus for c-direction. Used only for OPTION = 2.

ETAB [0.0]
Strain hardening modulus for ab-plane. Used only for OPTION = 2.

ETAC [0.0]
Strain hardening modulus for ac-plane. Used only for OPTION = 2.

ETBC [0.0]
Strain hardening modulus for bc-plane. Used only for OPTION = 2.

EPLU [0.0]
Universal plastic modulus; ratio of effective plastic stress to effective plastic strain (Hill).
Used only for OPTION = 1.

EPA [0.0]
Maximum allowable effective plastic strain. This allows for the modeling of material rupture,
whereby the stresses are set to zero whenever the effective plastic strain is greater than the
rupture strain EPA. If EPA is input as 0.0, the rupture condition is not used.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

ALPHAA [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion for a-direction.

ALPHAB [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion for b-direction.

ALPHAC [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion for c-direction.

7-82 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature for calculation of ALPHAA, ALPHAB and ALPHAC. See the Theory
and Modeling Guide.

OPTION [1]
Indicates method to determine plastic moduli:

1 The universal plastic modulus EPLU is used to determine the plastic moduli. Any
input values for the strain hardening moduli ETAA, ETBB, ETCC, ETAB, ETAC,
ETBC are ignored.

2 The moduli EA, EB, EC, GAB, GAC, GBC are used with the strain hardening
moduli ETAA, ETBB, ETCC, ETAB, ETAC, ETBC to determine the plastic
moduli. Any input value for the universal plastic modulus EPLU is ignored.

3 Constants C, E0 and NN are used to determine the plastic moduli. Any input values
for the strain hardening moduli ETAA, ETBB, ETCC, ETAB, ETAC, ETBC,
EPLU are ignored.

METHOD [1]
Indicates method to determine Hills anisotropy parameters f, g, h, l, m, n:

1 Anisotropy parameters are calculated by AUI based on yield stresses. Any input
values for R0, R45, R90, f, g, h, l, m, n are ignored.

2 Anisotropy parameters are calculated based on Lankford coefficients R0, R45, R90.
Any input values for f, g, h, l, m, n are ignored.

3 Anisotropy parameters are directly defined - f, g, h, l, m, n. Any input values for

R0, R45, R90 are ignored.

R0 [1.0]
Lankford coefficient for 00 to rolling direction.

R45 [1.0]
Lankford coefficient for 450 to rolling direction.

R90 [1.0]
Lankford coefficient for 900 to rolling direction.

F [0.5]
Hill's anisotropy parameter f.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-83

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC

G [0.5]
Hill's anisotropy parameter g.

H [0.5]
Hill's anisotropy parameter h.

L [1.5]
Hill's anisotropy parameter l.

M [1.5]
Hill's anisotropy parameter m.

N [1.5]
Hill's anisotropy parameter n.

C [1.0]
n
Constant C of analytical stress-strain curve = C ( 0 + p ) .

E0 [0.001]
n
Constant 0 of analytical stress-strain curve = C ( 0 + p ) .

NN [0.1]
n
Constant n of analytical stress-strain curve = C ( 0 + p ) .

Note:

The initial yield stresses YIELDAA, ..., YIELDBC are used as follows:

If METHOD = 1, the initial yield stresses are directly used.

If METHOD = 2 or 3, and OPTION = 1 or 2, the initial yield stresses are only used to
calculate the quantity

y = [{(YIELDAA2 + YIELDBB2 + YIELDCC2 )/3 + YIELDAB2 + YIELDAC2 + YIELDBC2}/2]

For other combinations of METHOD and OPTION, the initial yield stresses are not used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-84 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL SMA Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL SMA NAME EM EA NUM NUA ALPHAM ALPHAA

CM CA MS MF AS AF SIGMAR CR
ETMAX TOLIL DENSITY TREF VTM0

Defines a shape-memory alloy (SMA) material. An SMA material may be used with truss, 2-D
solid, 3-D solid and isobeam elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

EM
Elastic modulus for martensite. {> 0}

EA
Elastic modulus for austenite.{> 0}

NUM [0.0]
Poissons ratio for martensite.{0 NUM < 0.5}

NUA [0.0]
Poissions ratio for austenite.{0 NUA < 0.5}

ALPHAM [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion for martensite. { 0.0}

ALPHAA [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion for austenite.{ 0.0}

CM
Slope of the martensite transformation conditions. {> 0}

CA
Slope of the austenite transformation conditions. {> 0}

MS
Transformation temperature at the start of martensite. {real}

MF
Transformation temperature at the end of martensite. {real}

AS
Transformation temperature at the start of austenite. {real}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-85

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL SMA

AF
Transformation temperature at the end of austenite. {real}

SIGMAR [0.0]
Martensite re-orientation yield property at temperature =0. If SIGMAR > 0.0, the martensite
re-orientation calculation is performed.{ 0 . 0 }

CR [0.0]
Slope of the martensite re-orientation yield function.{ 0.0}

ETMAX
Maximum residual transformation strain.{> 0.0}

TOLIL [1.0E-08]
Solution tolerance for effective stress calculation. {> 0.0}

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

TREF [0]
Reference temperature for thermal expansion calculation.

VTM0 [0.0]
Initial twinned martensite fraction.{0.0 VTM0 1.0}

7-86 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL SUSSMAN-BATHE Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL SUSSMAN-BATHE
NAME SSCURVE SSTYPE RELERROR KAPPA DENSITY
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE TREF RUBBER-TABLE
RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC RUBBER-MULLINS RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC

straini stressi

Defines a Sussman-Bathe material model, which is an incompressible nonlinear elastic

material model for rubber materials. This material model can be used with 2-D solid, 3-D solid
and 3D-shell elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

SSCURVE [0]
Label number of a stress-strain curve defined by command SSCURVE. This defines the stress-
strain data points associated with this material model. If SSCURVE is input as 0, then the data
lines following the command define the stress-strain data points. Conversely, if SSCURVE is
greater than zero then no data lines are expected.

SSTYPE [ENGINEERING]
The type of stress-strain data entered, either in the SSCURVE command or in the data input
lines. {ENGINEERING/TRUE/STRETCH}

ENGINEERING engineering strains, engineering stresses

TRUE true strains, true stresses

STRETCH stretches, engineering stresses

RELERROR [0.01]
The relative error used to determine the number of splines. This value must be greater than
0.0.

KAPPA [0.0]
The bulk modulus, used for 3-D, plane strain and axisymmetric elements. If the bulk modulus
is 0.0, then the AUI computes the bulk modulus using a Poissons ratio of 0.499.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-87

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL SUSSMAN-BATHE

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE [NO]
Specifies the temperature dependence of the material properties. {NO/TRS/FULL}

NO The material properties are not temperature dependent; thermal effects are not
included.

TRS The material properties are not temperature dependent, but the material is assumed
to be TRS (thermorheologically simple). Thermal effects are included.

FULL The material properties are temperature dependent. Parameters SSCURVE to KAPPA,
and RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC to RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC of this command are
ignored. No data input lines are expected.

The only parameters used when TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL are NAME,

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE, TREF and RUBBER-TABLE.

TREF [0.0]
The material reference temperature, required if TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = TRS or
FULL.

RUBBER-TABLE [0]
The label number of a rubber-table data set. The type of rubber-table depends upon
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE, as follows:

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = NO :
Do not enter a rubber-table.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = TRS :
A rubber-table of type TRS must be entered. This rubber-table is a
table of temperatures and corresponding coefficients of thermal expansion.

TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL :
A rubber-table of type Sussman-Bathe must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of
temperatures and corresponding material properties.

RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC [0]
If RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC is zero, no viscoelastic effects are included.
If RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC is non-zero, viscoelastic effects are included, using the data set
from the corresponding RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC command.
This parameter is not used when TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL.

RUBBER-MULLINS [0]
If RUBBER-MULLINS is zero, no Mullins effects are included.

7-88 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL SUSSMAN-BATHE Sec. 7.1 Material models

If RUBBER-MULLINS is nonzero, Mullins effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-MULLINS command.
This parameter is not used when TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL.

RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC [0]
If RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC is zero, no orthotropic effects are included.
If RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC is non-zero, orthotropic effects are included, using the data set
from the corresponding RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC command.
This parameter is not used when TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL.

straini, stressi
The strain and stress at data point i. The strain and stress are interpreted according to the
SSTYPE parameter.

The (strain,stress) data points are assumed to correspond to a uniaxial tension/compression

conditions.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIALFIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-89

Chap. 7 Model definition

This page intentionally left blank.

7-90 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL THERMO-ISOTROPIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIALTHERMO-ISOTROPIC NAME TREF DENSITY

thetai Ei nui alphai

Defines a nonlinear isotropic thermo-elastic material model which considers the variation of
material properties with temperature. Linear interpolation is performed to determine values at
intermediate temperatures. This material model may be used with truss, 2-D solid, 3-D solid,
isobeam, shell and pipe elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

TREF [0.0]
The reference temperature for expansion coefficient calculation. See the Theory and Model-
ing Guide.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

Ei
Youngs Modulus at temperature thetai.

nui
Poissons ratio at temperature thetai.

alphai
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion at temperature thetai.

Note: The material properties are automatically sorted in order of increasing

temperature. If the same temperature is given several times, only the last given
value is used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-91

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC

MATERIALTHERMO-ORTHOTROPIC NAME TREF DENSITY

thetai Eai Ebi Eci nuabi nuaci nubci Gabi Gaci Gbci alphaai alphabi alphaci

Defines a nonlinear orthotropic thermo-elastic material model which considers the variation of
material properties with temperature. Linear interpolation is performed to determine values at
intermediate temperatures. This material model may be used with shell, 2-D solid and 3-D
solid elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

TREF [0.0]
The reference temperature for thermal expansion calculation. See the Theory and Modeling
Guide.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

Eai
a-direction modulus at temperature thetai.

Ebi
b-direction modulus at temperature thetai.

Eci
c-direction modulus at temperature thetai.

nuabi
a-b strain ratio at temperature thetai.

nuaci
a-c strain ratio at temperature thetai.

nubci
b-c strain ratio at temperature thetai.

Gabi
a-b shear modulus at temperature thetai.

7-92 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

Gaci
a-c shear modulus at temperature thetai.

Gbci
b-c shear modulus at temperature thetai.

alphaai
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion in a-direction at temperature thetai.

alphabi
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion in b-direction at temperature thetai.

alphaci
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion in c-direction at temperature thetai.

Note: The material properties are automatically sorted in order of increasing

temperature. If the same temperature is given several times, only the last given
values are used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-93

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL THERMO-PLASTIC

MATERIALTHERMO-PLASTIC NAME HARDENING TREF TOLIL DENSITY

DEPENDENCY TRANSITION-STRAINRATE BVALUE

thetai Ei nui yieldi ETi alphai EPAi strainrate-fiti

Defines a nonlinear thermo-plastic material. This material model may be used with truss, 2-D
solid, 3-D solid, isobeam, shell and pipe elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

HARDENING [ISOTROPIC]
Selects the type of strain hardening used by the material.

ISOTROPIC Linear isotropic strain hardening.

KINEMATIC Linear kinematic strain hardening.

TREF [0.0]
The reference temperature for thermal expansion calculation. See the Theory and Modeling
Guide.

TOLIL [1.0E-10]
Solution tolerance. See Theory and Modeling Guide.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

DEPENDENCY [NO]
Flag indicating strain rate dependency. {NO/YES}

Note that DEPENDENCY=YES works only with HARDENING=ISOTROPIC

TRANSITION-STRAINRATE [0.0001]
Transition strain rate.

BVALUE [0.0]
Strain rate hardening parameter b.

7-94 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL THERMO-PLASTIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

Ei
Youngs Modulus at temperature thetai.

nui
Poissons ratio at temperature thetai.

yieldi
Yield stress in simple tension at temperature thetai.

ETi
Strain hardening modulus at temperature thetai.

alphai
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion at temperature thetai.

EPAi
Maximum allowable effective plastic strain at temperature thetai enabling the modeling of
rupture. If EPAi = 0.0 the rupture condition is not used at temperature thetai.

strainrate-fiti
Strainrate-fit curve at temperature "thetai" describing the strain rate dependence of the yield
stress. The function must have been defined using the STRAINRATE-FIT command.

Note: The material properties are automatically sorted in order of increasing

temperature. If the same temperature is given several times, only the last given
values are used.

For more information on the STRAINRATE-FIT, TRANSITION-STRAINRATE and BVALUE

parameters, see the PLASTIC-BILINEAR COMMAND.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-95

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL THREE-NETWORK

MATERIALTHREE-NETWORK
NAME LAMBDL KAPPA PD MUA FRA MA MUBI MUBF BETAB
FRB MB MUC QI2C TEMPHAT TREF TEMPN
THERMAL-EXPANSION TEMPUNIT MAXITE RTOL DENSITY GENFAC

thetai alphai (THERMAL-EXPANSION = YES)

Defines a three-network material model, which is an incompressible nonlinear material model

for materials such as ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene (UMHWPE). This material
model can be used with 3-D solid elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

LAMBDL
Locking stretch of all 3 networks.{ 1.0}

KAPPA
Bulk modulus.

PD
Pressure dependence of flow for networks A and B.

MUA
Shear modulus of network A.

FRA
Flow resistance of network A.

MA
Stress exponent of network A.

MUBI
Initial shear modulus of network B.

MUBF
Final shear modulus of network B.

BETAB
Evolution rate of shear modulus of network B.

FRB
Flow resistance of network B.

7-96 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL THREE-NETWORK Sec. 7.1 Material models

MB
Stress exponent of network B.

MUC
Shear modulus of network C.

QI2C
Relative contribution of I2 on network C.

TEMPHAT [0.0]
Stiffness response to change in temperature. If TEMPHAT = 0.0, then the shear moduli are
independent of the temperature.

TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature. This option is only used when TEMPHAT 0.0, or when thermal
expansion effects are included.

TEMPN [0.0]
Temperature response exponent. If TEMPN = 0.0, then the flow rate is independent of
temperature.

THERMAL-EXPANSION [NO]
Specifies if the effects of thermal expansion are to be included. {NO/YES}

NO Thermal expansion effects are not included.

YES Thermal expansion effects are included. The coefficients of thermal expan
sion are entered in the data input lines of this command.

TEMPUNIT [CELSIUS]
The unit for temperatures. {CELSIUS/FAHRENHEIT/KELVIN/RANKINE}

MAXITE [100]
The maximum number of stress integration iterations allowed per integration point.

RTOL [1.0E-12]
A tolerance used to assess convergence of stress integration iterations. This is a relative
tolerance, i.e., dimensionless values are tested against RTOL.

DENSITY
Material density.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-97

Chap. 7 Model definition

GENFAC [0.0]
The heat generation factor (fraction of internally dissipated energy converted to heat). If
GENFAC=0.0, no heat is generated from the dissipated energy. {0.0 GENFAC 1.0}.

thetai
Temperature at data point i, used for THERMAL-EXPANSION = YES.

alphai
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion at temperature thetai, used for THERMAL-EXPAN-
SION = YES.

Notes:

1) The unit for TREF, TEMPHAT and thetai is specified by parameter TEMPUNIT. All
temperatures input or computed by ADINA are assumed to have this unit. Parameter
TEMPSHIFT, which converts relative temperature scales to absolute scales, is then taken as

TEMPUNIT TEMPSHIFT
CELSIUS 273.15
FAHRENHEIT 459.67
KELVIN 0.0
RANKINE 0.0

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

7-98 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL USER-SUPPLIED Sec. 7.1 Material models

MATERIAL USER-SUPPLIED NAME INTEG NSUBD TREF DENSITY

LENGTH1 LENGTH2 OPTION NCTI NSCP NCTD
CTI1 ... CTI99 SCP1 ... SCP99 LENGTH3 LENGTH4
AUTOLEN NONSYM DENSITY

tempi alphai ctd1i ctd2i ... CtdNCTDi

Defines a user-supplied material for use with ADINA, with options for piezoelectric or
consolidation analyses (requiring interaction with ADINA-T). This material model may be
used with 1-D truss, 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

INTEG [FORWARD]
Stress integration scheme. {FORWARD/BACKWARD}

FORWARD Forward integration scheme.

BACKWARD Backward integration scheme.

NSUBD [10]
Number of subdivisions of strain increments used in the integration of stresses. If INTEG =
BACKWARD, NSUBD = 1 is always used regardless of this input. { > 0 }

TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature for thermal expansion calculation. See the Theory and Modeling
Guide.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

LENGTH1 [60]
Length of working real array for storing/retrieving history dependent variables. See the
Theory and Modeling Guide for details.

LENGTH2 [2]
Length of working integer array for storing/retrieving history dependent variables. See
Theory and Modeling Guide for details.

OPTION [NONE]
Special analysis options. {NONE/PIEZOELECTRIC/CONSOLIDATION/LINEAR}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-99

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL USER-SUPPLIED

NONE - No special analysis option

PIEZOELECTRIC - Piezoelectric analysis (involving interaction with ADINA-T)

CONSOLIDATION - Consolidation analysis.

LINEAR - Linear material model option

NCTI
Number of active material property constants. {0 NCTI 99}

NSCP
Number of active solution control parameters. {0 NSCP 99}

NCTD [0]
Number of active temperature dependent material properties. {0 NCTD 98}

CTI1 ... CTI99 [0.0]

User defined material constants.

SCP1 ... SCP99 [0.0]

User defined solution control parameters.

LENGTH3 [0]
Number of parameters from the real working array to write to porthole file.
{0 LENGTH3 LENGTH1}

LENGTH4 [0]
Number of parameters from the integer working array to write to porthole file.
{0 LENGTH4 LENGTH2}

AUTOLEN [0]
Flag for setting the size of working and output arrays LENGTH1 - LENGTH4. {0 / 1}

0 Manually set via LENGTH1 - LENGTH4 variables

1 Automatically set by call to user coded material subroutine with KEY=0

NONSYM [NO]
Flag for symmetry of stiffness matrix generated by this user-supplied material. {NO/YES}

Note: Nonsymmetric stiffness matrix can only be activated when a non-symmetric solver is
selected.

7-100 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL USER-SUPPLIED Sec. 7.1 Material models

DENSITY [1.0]
Mass density. { 0.0}

tempi
Temperature at data point i.

alphai
Mean coefficient of the thermal expansion at temperature tempi.

ctdJi
value of temperature-dependent material property J at temperature tempi.

Note: The material properties are automatically sorted in order of increasing temperature.
If the same temperature is given several times, only the last given values are used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-101

Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL VISCOELASTIC

MATERIAL VISCOELASTIC NAME NSUBD TREF C1 C2 ALPHA

G-FUNCTION K-FUNCTION DENSITY
SHIFT THERMAL-EXPANSION TALPHA

thetai alphai alpha2i alpha3i

Defines a viscoelastic material with time dependent and temperature dependent material
properties. This material model may be used with truss, 2-D solid, 3-D solid and shell ele-
ments.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined. If the label number of an existing material is given,
the existing material definition is overwritten.

NSUBD [10]
Number of subdivisions of strain increments used in the integration of stresses.

TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature used by the WLF (Williams-Landell-Ferry) equation for temperature-
time shift calculation.

C1 [0.0]
C2 [0.0]
Material constants used by the WLF (Williams-Landell-Ferry) equation or the Arrhenius
equation for temperature-time shift calculation.

ALPHA [0.0]
Constant mean coefficient of thermal expansion. If no temperature table is defined, alpha is
assumed constant.

G-FUNCTION
Label number of a table, defined by command FTABLE, containing a series of shear moduli
and decay coefficients to represent the shear modulus relaxation function.

K-FUNCTION
Label number of a table, defined by command FTABLE, containing a series of bulk moduli
and decay coefficients to represent the bulk modulus relaxation function.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.

SHIFT [WLF]
Specifies the time-temperature superposition law. {WLF/ARRHENIUS}

7-102 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL VISCOELASTIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

WLF Williams-Landell-Ferry equation

ARRHENIUS Arrhenius equation

THERMAL-EXPANSION [ISOTROPIC]
Indicates whether the coefficient of thermal expansion is isotropic or orthotropic. {ISOTRO-
PIC/ORTHOTROPIC}

The data lines thetai, alphai , alpha2i , and alpha3i are used only when the coefficient of
thermal expansion is temperature-dependent.

TALPHA [0.0]
The reference temperature for thermal expansion calculation.

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

alphai
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion at temperature thetai.

alpha2i
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion in the b-direction at temperature thetai. Used only if
THERMAL-EXPANSION=ORTHOTROPIC.

alpha3i
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion in the c-direction at temperature thetai. Used only if
THERMAL-EXPANSION=ORTHOTROPIC.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-103

Chap. 7 Model definition TMC-MATERIAL ISOTROPIC

TMC-MATERIAL ISOTROPIC NAME K C JOULE-HEAT ELECTRIC-K DENSITY

Defines a constant, isotropic, conductivity and constant specific heat material.

This command is used in ADINA thermal coupling for TRUSS, 2D/3D Solid, BEAM,
ISOBEAM, PIPE elements only.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

K [0.0]
Thermal conductivity. { 0.0}

C [0.0]
Heat capacity per unit mass. { 0.0}

JOULE-HEAT [NO]
Indicates whether this material is used for Joule heat analysis. { YES/NO }

ELECTRIC-K [0.0]
Constant electrical conductivity (in chosen units, e.g., Siemens/m).
{ 0.0 }

DENSITY [1.0]
Mass density. { 0.0}

Auxiliary commands

LIST TMC-MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE TMC-MATERIALFIRST LAST

7-104 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TMC-MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

TMC-MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC NAME KA KB KC C JOULE-HEAT EKA

EKB EKC DENSITY

Defines a constant, orthotropic, thermal conductivity and constant specific heat material.

This command is used in ADINA thermal coupling for TRUSS, 2D/3D Solid, BEAM,
ISOBEAM, PIPE elements only.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

KA [0.0]
Thermal conductivity in a-direction. { 0.0}

KB [0.0]
Thermal conductivity in b-direction. { 0.0}

KC [0.0]
Thermal conductivity in c-direction. { 0.0}

C [0.0]
Heat capacity per unit volume. { 0.0}

JOULE-HEAT [NO]
Indicates whether this material is used for Joule heat analysis. {YES/NO}

EKA [0.0]
EKB [0.0]
EKC [0.0]
Electrical conductivity in the a-, b- and c-directions. (units: electrical conductance/length,
e.g., Siemens/m) { 0.0}

DENSITY [1.0]
Mass density. { 0.0}

Auxiliary commands

LIST TMC-MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE TMC-MATERIALFIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-105

Chap. 7 Model definition TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-K

TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-K NAME C JOULE-HEAT DENSITY

thetai ki electric-ki

Defines a material with temperature dependent thermal conductivity and constant specific
heat.

This command is used in ADINA thermal coupling for TRUSS, 2D/3D Solid, BEAM,
ISOBEAM, PIPE elements only.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

C [0.0]
Heat capacity per unit volume. { 0.0}

JOULE-HEAT [NO]
Indicates whether this material is used for Joule heat analysis. { YES/NO }

DENSITY [1.0]
Mass density. { 0.0}

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

ki
Thermal conductivity at temperature thetai.

electric-ki
Electrical conductivity at temperature thetai.

Note: The input data is automatically sorted in order of increasing temperature. If the same
temperature is given several times, only the last given value is used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST TMC-MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE TMC-MATERIALFIRST LAST

7-106 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ISOTROPIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ISOTROPIC NAME K DENSITY

thetai ci

Defines a material with temperature dependent specific heat and constant, isotropic, thermal
conductivity.

This command is used in ADINA thermal coupling for TRUSS, 2D/3D Solid, BEAM,
ISOBEAM, PIPE elements only.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

K [0.0]
Thermal conductivity. { 0.0}

DENSITY [1.0]
Mass density. { 0.0}

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

ci
Heat capacity per unit volume at temperature thetai.

Note: The input data is automatically sorted in order of increasing temperature. If the same
temperature is given several times, only the last given value is used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST TMC-MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE TMC-MATERIALFIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-107

Chap. 7 Model definition TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ORTHOTROPIC

TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ORTHOTROPIC NAME KA KB KC

CONDUCTIVITY DENSITY

thetai ci kai kbi kci

Defines a material with temperature dependent specific heat and constant, orthotropic thermal
conductivity.

This command is used in ADINA thermal coupling for TRUSS, 2D/3D Solid, BEAM,
ISOBEAM, PIPE elements only.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

KA [0.0]
Thermal conductivity in a-direction. { 0.0}

KB [0.0]
Thermal conductivity in b-direction. { 0.0}

KC [0.0]
Thermal conductivity in c-direction. {0.0}

CONDUCTIVITY [CONSTANT]
Flags whether conductivity is constant or input in table. {CONSTANT/TABLE}

DENSITY [1.0]
Mass density. { 0.0}

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

ci
Heat capacity per unit volume at temperature thetai.

kai [value of parameter KA]

Thermal conductivity in a-direction { 0.0}

kbi [value of parameter KB]

Thermal conductivity in b-direction { 0.0}

7-108 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ORTHOTROPIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

kci [value of parameter KC]

Thermal conductivity in c-direction { 0.0}

Note: The input data is automatically sorted in order of increasing temperature. If the same
temperature is given several times, only the last given value is used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST TMC-MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE TMC-MATERIALFIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-109

Chap. 7 Model definition TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-K

TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-K NAME JOULE-HEAT DENSITY

thetai ki ci electric-ki

Defines a material with temperature dependent specific heat and thermal conductivity.

This command is used in ADINA thermal coupling for TRUSS, 2D/3D Solid, BEAM,
ISOBEAM, PIPE elements only.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

JOULE-HEAT [NO]
Indicates whether this material is used for Joule heat analysis. { YES/NO }

DENSITY [1.0]
Mass density. { 0.0}

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

ki
Thermal conductivity at temperature thetai.

ci
Heat capacity per unit mass at temperature thetai.

electric-ki
Electrical conductivity at temperature thetai.

Note: The input data is automatically sorted in order of increasing temperature. If the same
temperature is given several times, only the last given value is used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST TMC-MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE TMC-MATERIALFIRST LAST

7-110 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TMC-MATERIAL TIMEDEP-K Sec. 7.1 Material models

TMC-MATERIAL TIMEDEP-K NAME C DENSITY

timei ki

Defines a material with time dependent thermal conductivity and constant specific heat.

This command is used in ADINA thermal coupling for TRUSS, 2D/3D Solid, BEAM,
ISOBEAM, PIPE elements only.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

C [0.0]
Heat capacity per unit volume. { 0.0}

DENSITY [1.0]
Mass density. { 0.0}

timei
Time at data point i.

ki
Conductivity at timei.

Note: The input data is automatically sorted in order of increasing time. If the same time is
given several times, only the last given value is used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST TMC-MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE TMC-MATERIALFIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-111

Chap. 7 Model definition TMC-MATERIAL USER-SUPPLIED

TMC-MATERIALUSER-SUPPLIED NAME CTI1 CTI2 CTI3 CTI4 CTI5 CTI6 CTI7

CTI8 CTI9 CTI10 CTI11 CTI12
PIEZOELECTRIC CONSOLIDATION DENSITY

thetai ctd1i ctd2i ctd3i ctd4i ctd5i ctd6i ... cdt12i

Defines a user-supplied material with options for piezoelectric or consolidation analyses.

NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]

Label number of the material to be defined.

CTI1 ... CTI12

User defined material constants.

PIEZOELECTRIC [NO]
Perform piezoelectric analysis. {YES / NO}

CONSOLIDATION [NO]
Perform consolidation analysis. {YES / NO}

DENSITY [1.0]
Mass density. { 0.0}

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

ctdji
Value of temperature-dependent material property j at temperature thetai.

Note: The input data is sorted in order of increasing temperature. If the same temperature
is given several times, only the last given value is used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST TMC-MATERIAL FIRST LAST

DELETE TMC-MATERIALFIRST LAST

7-112 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 7.1 Material models

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-113

Chap. 7 Model definition CURVE-FITTING

CURVE-FITTING NAME ORDER TENSION-CURVE SHEAR-CURVE

EQUIBIAXIAL-CURVE WEIGHTING CURVE-TYPE
METHOD NSINGULAR MAX-SINGV MIN-SINGV ECHO

Defines a fitting curve for hyperelastic material models.

A least squares curve fitting technique is employed to determine the parameters for a
Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Arruda-Boyce, eight-chain or hyper-foam material model from experi-
mental stress versus strain (or stretch) data. The data can be input for any of three test cases:
(i) simple tension,
(ii) pure shear, or
(iii) equibiaxial tension.

A single test or combination of any two, or all three, can be supplied. The accuracy of the
model curve thus fitted depends on the number of data points, and the desired approximation
order of the model.

The total number of data points, from all three test cases, is subject to a minimum, as follows:
2,5,9 for a Mooney-Rivlin model of input order 1, 2, 3 respectively;
the input order for the Ogden material;
2 for the Arruda-Boyce and eight-chain materials; and
the input order for the hyper-foam material.

NAME [(current highest curve-fitting label number) + 1]

Label number of the curve-fitting to be defined. If the label number of an existing curve-fitting
is given, then the previous curve-fitting definition is overwritten. This curve number can be
assigned to the Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Arruda-Boyce, eight-chain or hyper-foam material
model where material constants for the model are evaluated form the input curves (see Notes
at the end of this command).

ORDER [3]
Approximation order. Allowed values are:
Mooney-Rivlin material: 1 to 3
Ogden material: 1 to 9
Arruda-Boyce and eight-chain materials: 2
Hyper-foam material: 1 to 9

TENSION-CURVE [0]
Indicates the label number of a (stress, strain) data curve, which provides data for the simple
tension test case. This data curve is defined by command SSCURVE. A value of 0 indicates
no simple tension data is supplied. The abscissae may be interpreted as strain or stretch as

7-114 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CURVE-FITTING Sec. 7.1 Material models

indicated by parameter CURVE-TYPE.

SHEAR-CURVE [0]
Similar to TENSION-CURVE, except that this curve provides data for the pure shear test case.

EQUIBIAXIAL-CURVE [0]
Similar to TENSION-CURVE, except that this curve provides data for the equilbiaxial tension
test case.

WEIGHTING [NO]
Specifies whether the least squares fitting scheme utilises weighted data intervals or not ---
their use may provide a better fit for data with very irregular spacing of the strain (or stretch)
abscissae. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for further details. Input values are YES or
NO.

CURVE-TYPE [STRAIN]
Indicates the type of input curve data given by parameters TENSION-CURVE, SHEAR-
CURVE, and EQUIBIAXIAL-CURVE. The option is given for the data abscissae to be either
principal (engineering) strain, or principal stretch (= deformed length /undeformed length).
The ordinate values in either case are values of nominal stress (= force / unit undeformed
area). {STRAIN/STRETCH}

STRAIN -input principal engineering strain data

STRETCH - input principal stretch data

METHOD [SVD]
Specifies the least squares matrix equation solution method. Use of Gaussian elimination may
well result in model constants which alternate in sign and have very high magnitude. This is
due to the presence of near-singular terms in the least squares system. The "singular value
decomposition" method attempts to remove these terms during solution, yielding more
reasonable model constants without affecting the overall quality of the least squares fit. The
number of near-singular terms to be removed may be controlled by parameters MAX-SINGV,
MIN-SINGV. Near-singular terms are removed by default until a monotone increasing
solution is obtained for all test cases.

This parameter is only used for the Mooney-Rivlin and Ogden material models.

SVD - The singular value decomposition method

GAUSS - Standard Gaussian elimination technique

NSINGULAR [AUTOMATIC]
Indicates whether the number of near-singular terms to be removed in the singular value
decomposition solution method is controlled automatically by the program, or is to be

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-115

Chap. 7 Model definition CURVE-FITTING

user-specified via parameters MAX-SINGV, MIN-SINGV. This parameter is only applicable

when METHOD=SVD.

AUTOMATIC - the program controls the number of near-singular terms to be removed

by the singular value decomposition solution method.
CUSTOM - the user indicates the maximum and minimum number of near-singular
terms to be removed.

MAX-SINGV [0]
If NSINGULAR=CUSTOM, this parameter indicates the maximum number of near-singular
terms which are permitted to be removed during the search for a monotone increasing set of
result curves.

MAX-SINGV may range from 0 (for which the resulting solution is identical to that obtained
by Gaussian elimination) to the total desired number of model constants, as indicated by
parameter ORDER.

This parameter is only applicable when METHOD=SVD.

MIN-SINGV [0]
If NSINGULAR=CUSTOM, this parameter indicates the minimum number of near-singular
terms which will be removed by the singular value decomposition method, i.e. the SVD
algorithm will remove at least MIN-SINGV terms even if a monotone solution set was
obtained with fewer terms removed.

This parameter is only applicable when METHOD=SVD.

ECHO [ALL]
Specifies the level of information reported by the command:

NONE - the command behaves silently, except for a completion message

MODEL - the resulting material model constants are reported
ALL - as well as model constants, curve fitting statistics and comparison tables
of input and fitted stress values for the input strain/stretch points is
reported.

Notes:

1 For a discussion on the singular value decomposition method and its application to the
least squares curve fitting algorithm, please consult the Theory and Modeling Guide.

2 It is unwise to apply this command to a small set of data within a narrow range of strains/
stretches. If possible, some values of strain/stretch should be input for compression, and

7-116 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CURVE-FITTING Sec. 7.1 Material models

it is recommended that the resulting curve-fitting behavior always be checked with the
MATERIALSHOW command.

3 The respective constants for each material model calculated from the input data curves
are as follows (see Section 3.8.5 of the Theory and Modeling Guide Volume I for more details):

Mooney-Rivlin:
ORDER Constants
1 C1, C2
2 C1 - C5
3 C1 - C9

Ogden: The constants i and i are calculated from i = 1 to ORDER.

Arruda-Boyce and eight-chain: ORDER = 2 only, with constants MU and LAMBDA.

Hyper-foam: The constants i, i and i are calculated from i = 1 to ORDER.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-117

Chap. 7 Model definition CURVE-FITTING

This page intentionally left blank.

7-118 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS Sec. 7.1 Material models

VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS NAME NPOINTS BETA1 BETA2 BETA3 BETA4

BETA5 TAU1 TAU2 TAU3 TAU4 TAU5 ETA1 ETA2
ETA3 ETA4 ETA5

Defines viscoelastic contants for a viscoelastic material model.

NAME [(current highest viscoelastic-constants label

number) + 1]
Label number of the viscoelastic-contants to be defined. If the label number of an existing
viscoelastic-contants is given, then the previous definition is overwritten.

NPOINTS [2]
Number of constants. {1<=NPOINTS<=5}

BETA1 [1.0]
BETA2 [1.0]
BETA3 [0.0]
BETA4 [0.0]
BETA5 [0.0]
Free energy factors. {BETA>=0.0}

TAU1 [30.0]
TAU2 [20.0]
TAU3 [0.0]
TAU4 [0.0]
TAU5 [0.0]
Relaxation time. {TAU>0.0}

ETA1 [4.002676E6]
ETA2 [4.002676E6]
ETA3 [0.0]
ETA4 [0.0]
ETA5 [0.0]
{ETA>=0.0}

Auxiliary commands

LIST VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS FIRST LAST

DELETE VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-119

Chap. 7 Model definition PHI-MODEL-COMPLETION

PHI-MODEL-COMPLETION CLOSE-TOL XTOL YTOL ZTOL

CLOSE-NODE PHI-ANGLE NORMAL-ANGLE

This command controls certain parameters used during the phi model completion phase of
constructing the data file. The phi model completion phase is performed only when there are
potential-based fluid elements in the model.

CLOSE-TOL [AUTOMATIC]
This parameter controls which tolerances are used during when searching for structural
nodes coincident with potential-based fluid nodes.

AUTOMATIC The tolerances from the TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC command are

used. The coincidence checks are the same as are used during mesh
generation.

CUSTOM The tolerances XTOL, YTOL, ZTOL of this command are used.

XTOL [0.0]
YTOL [0.0]
ZTOL [0.0]
Tolerances used for coincident node checking during phi model completion, used only when
CLOSE-TOL = CUSTOM. Note that XTOL, YTOL, ZTOL are absolute tolerances. To be
specific, a structural node with coordinates (XS,YS,ZS) are coincident with a fluid node with
coordinates (XF,YF,ZF) when

XF-XTOL XS XF+XTOL
YF-YTOL YS YF+YTOL
ZF-ZTOL ZS ZF+ZTOL

CLOSE-NODE [CLOSEST]
This parameter controls which node is taken if two or more nodes are coincident.

HIGHEST The node with the highest number is taken.

CLOSEST The closest node is taken.

PHI-ANGLE [30]
This parameter, in degrees, is used in constructing the boundary conditions for a node on a
free surface that is adjacent to the structure. When the angle between two adjacent faces of
the structural boundary is greater than PHI-ANGLE, the AUI treats the intersection of the
faces as a sharp corner. When the angle between two adjacent faces of the structural bound-
ary is less than or equal to PHI-ANGLE, the AUI considers the faces to approximate smooth
boundary.

NORMAL-ANGLE [80]
This parameter, in degrees, is the maximum angle between the unmodified and modified free
normals on a fluid free surface.

7-120 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC BILINEAR Sec. 7.1 Material models

PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC BILINEAR NAME YIELD EP

Sets up a PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC definition of type bilinear. This definition can be used in the
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC command.

NAME [(current highest plcycl-isotropic label number) + 1]

Label number of the plcycl-isotropic definition. If the label number of an existing plcycl-
isotropic data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.
YIELD
Yield stress (radius of yield surface).
EP [0.0]
Hardening modulus, giving the change in yield stress with respect to the accumulated
effective plastic strain.

Auxiliary commands
LIST PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC FIRST LAST
DELETE PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-121

Chap. 7 Model definition PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC MULTILINEAR

PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC MULTILINEAR NAME

aepsi stress-radiusi

Sets up a PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC definition of type multilinear. This definition can be used in

the MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC command.

NAME [(current highest plcycl-isotropic label number) + 1]

Label number of the plcycl-isotropic definition. If the label number of an existing plcycl-
isotropic data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.

aepsi
Accumulated effective plastic strain, interpreted as a logarithmic strain in large strain analy-
sis.

stress-radiusi
Associated radius of yield surface (yield stress).
During the analysis, if the accumulated effective plastic strain exceeds the largest value of
aepsi, then ADINA issues an error message and either stops or cuts back the time step (if the
ATS method is used).
Auxiliary commands

LIST PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC FIRST LAST

DELETE PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC FIRST LAST

7-122 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC EXPONENTIAL Sec. 7.1 Material models

PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC EXPONENTIAL NAME YIELD Q B

Sets up a PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC definition of type exponential. This definition can be used in

the MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC command.

NAME [(current highest plcycl-isotropic label number) + 1]

Label number of the plcycl-isotropic definition. If the label number of an existing plcycl-
isotropic data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.

YIELD
Yield stress (radius of yield surface). This parameter must be entered.

Q [0.0]
B [0.0]
Parameters giving the change in yield stress with respect to the accumulated effective plastic
strain, see the Theory and Modeling Guide. If Q is positive, the material cyclically hardens,
if Q is negative, the material cyclically softens. Q and B default to 0.0.

Auxiliary commands

LIST PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC FIRST LAST

DELETE PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-123

Chap. 7 Model definition PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC MEMORY-EXPONENTIAL

PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC MEMORY- EXPONENTIAL NAME YIELD Q0 QM MU B ETA

Sets up a PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC definition of type memory-exponential. This definition can be

used in the MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC command.

The strain memory surface algorithm of Lemaitre and Chaboche is used, see the Theory and
Modeling Guide.

NAME [(current highest plcycl-isotropic label number) + 1]

Label number of the plcycl-isotropic definition. If the label number of an existing plcycl-
isotropic data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.

YIELD
Yield stress (radius of yield surface). This parameter must be entered.

Q0 [0.0]
QM [0.0]
MU [0.0]
B [0.0]
ETA [0.5]
Parameters giving the change in yield surface radius with respect to the accumulated effective
plastic strain and the strain memory, see the Theory and Modeling Guide. All of these
parameters, except for ETA, default to 0.0; ETA defaults to 0.5.

Auxiliary commands

LIST PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC FIRST LAST

DELETE PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC FIRST LAST

7-124 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
PLCYCL-KINEMATIC ARMSTRONG-FREDRICK Sec. 7.1 Material models

PLCYCL-KINEMATIC ARMSTRONG-FREDRICK NAME

hi zetai

Sets up a PLCYCL-KINEMATIC definition of type Armstrong-Fredrick. This definition can be

used in the MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC command.

NAME [(current highest plcycl-kinematic label number) + 1]

Label number of the plcycl-kinematic definition. If the label number of an existing plcycl-
kinematic data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.

hi
Linear kinematic hardening constant.

zetai [0.0]
Nonlinear kinematic hardening constant. It is allowed to set zetai=0.0.

Note:

When zetai=0.0, then hi is equal to the plastic hardening modulus Ep.

It is allowed to enter several values of hi and zetai, each with a different value of zetai.

Auxiliary commands
LIST PLCYCL-KINEMATIC FIRST LAST
DELETE PLCYCL-KINEMATIC FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-125

Chap. 7 Model definition PLCYCL-RUPTURE AEPS

PLCYCL-RUPTURE AEPS NAME VALUE

Sets up a PLCYCL-RUPTURE definition of type AEPS (accumulated effective plastic strain).

This definition can be used in the MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC command.

NAME [(current highest plcycl-rupture label number) + 1]

Label number of the plcycl-rupture definition. If the label number of an existing plcycl-rupture
data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.

VALUE
The value of accumulated effective plastic strain at which the material ruptures. It is allowed
to enter nothing for this value, then the material will not rupture.
Auxiliary commands

LIST PLCYCL-RUPTURE FIRST LAST

DELETE PLCYCL-RUPTURE FIRST LAST

7-126 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RUBBER-TABLE ARRUDA-BOYCE Sec. 7.1 Material models

RUBBER-TABLE ARRUDA-BOYCE NAME

thetai alphai mui lambdai kappai fitting-curvei rubber-viscoelastici

rubber-mullinsi rubber-orthotropici

Defines a rubber-table data set of type Arruda-Boyce. This data set can be used to describe
the temperature dependence of the Arruda-Boyce material constants in the MATERIAL
ARRUDA-BOYCE command.

NAME [(current highest rubber-table label number) + 1]

Label number of the rubber-table data set to define. If the label number of an existing rubber-
table data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.

thetai
The temperature corresponding to the material properties entered in this data input line.

alphai [0.0]
The coefficient of thermal expansion.

mui [0.0]
lambdai [0.0]
kappai [0.0]
The material properties.

fittting-curvei [0]
If fittting-curvei is zero, no fitting curve is used.
If fittting-curvei is nonzero, curve-fitting data from the CURVE-FITTING command is used to
compute the material properties, and mui , lambdai are ignored.

rubber-viscoelastici [0]
If rubber-viscoelastici is zero, no viscoelastic effects are included.
If rubber-viscoelastici is non-zero, viscoelastic effects are included, using the data set from
the corresponding RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC command.

rubber-mullinsi [0]
If rubber-mullinsi is zero, no Mullins effects are included.
If rubber-mullinsi is non-zero, Mullins effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-MULLINS command.

rubber-orthotropici [0]
If rubber-orthotropici is zero, no orthotropic effects are included.
If rubber-orthotropici is non-zero, orthotropic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC command.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-127

Chap. 7 Model definition RUBBER-TABLE ARRUDA-BOYCE

Auxiliary commands

LIST RUBBER-TABLE FIRST LAST

DELETE RUBBER-TABLE FIRST LAST

7-128 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RUBBER-TABLE EIGHT-CHAIN Sec. 7.1 Material models

RUBBER-TABLE EIGHT-CHAIN NAME

thetai alphai mui lambdai kappai fitting-curvei rubber-viscoelastici

rubber-mullinsi rubber-orthotropici

Defines a rubber-table data set of type Eight-Chain. This data set can be used to describe the
temperature dependence of the Eight-Chain material constants in the MATERIAL EIGHT-
CHAIN command.

NAME [(current highest rubber-table label number) + 1]

Label number of the rubber-table data set to define. If the label number of an existing rubber-
table data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.

thetai
The temperature corresponding to the material properties entered in this data input line.

alphai [0.0]
The coefficient of thermal expansion.

mui [0.0]
lambdai [0.0]
kappai [0.0]
The material properties.

fittting-curvei [0]
If fittting-curvei is zero, no fitting curve is used.
If fittting-curvei is nonzero, curve-fitting data from the CURVE-FITTING command is used to
compute the material properties, and mui , lambdai are ignored.

rubber-viscoelastici [0]
If rubber-viscoelastici is zero, no viscoelastic effects are included.
If rubber-viscoelastici is non-zero, viscoelastic effects are included, using the data set from
the corresponding RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC command.

rubber-mullinsi [0]
If rubber-mullinsi is zero, no Mullins effects are included.
If rubber-mullinsi is non-zero, Mullins effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-MULLINS command.

rubber-orthotropici [0]
If rubber-orthotropici is zero, no orthotropic effects are included.
If rubber-orthotropici is non-zero, orthotropic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC command.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-129

Chap. 7 Model definition RUBBER-TABLE EIGHT-CHAIN

Auxiliary commands

LIST RUBBER-TABLE FIRST LAST

DELETE RUBBER-TABLE FIRST LAST

7-130 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RUBBER-TABLE MOONEY-RIVLIN Sec. 7.1 Material models

RUBBER-TABLE MOONEY-RIVLIN NAME

thetai alphai c1i c2i c3i c4i c5i c6i c7i c8i c9i d1i d2i kappai fitting-curvei
rubber-viscoelastici rubber-mullinsi rubber-orthotropici

Defines a rubber-table data set of type Mooney-Rivlin. This data set can be used to describe
the temperature dependence of the Mooney-Rivlin material constants in the MATERIAL
MOONEY-RIVLIN command.

NAME [(current highest rubber-table label number) + 1]

Label number of the rubber-table data set to define. If the label number of an existing rubber-
table data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.

thetai
The temperature corresponding to the material properties entered in this data input line.

alphai [0.0]
The coefficient of thermal expansion.

c1i ... c9i [0.0]

d1i ... d2i [0.0]
kappai [0.0]
The material properties.

fitting-curvei [0]
If fitting-curvei is zero, no fitting curve is used.
If fitting-curvei is nonzero, curve-fitting data from the CURVE-FITTING command is used to
compute the material properties, and c1i to d2i are ignored.

rubber-viscoelastici [0]
If rubber-viscoelastici is zero, no viscoelastic effects are included.
If rubber-viscoelastici is non-zero, viscoelastic effects are included, using the data set from
the corresponding RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC command.

rubber-mullinsi [0]
If rubber-mullinsi is zero, no Mullins effects are included.
If rubber-mullinsi is non-zero, Mullins effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-MULLINS command.

rubber-orthotropici [0]
If rubber-orthotropici is zero, no orthotropic effects are included.
If rubber-orthotropici is non-zero, orthotropic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC command.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-131

Chap. 7 Model definition RUBBER-TABLE MOONEY RIVLIN

Auxiliary commands

LIST RUBBER-TABLE FIRST LAST

DELETE RUBBER-TABLE FIRST LAST

7-132 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RUBBER-TABLE OGDEN Sec. 7.1 Material models

RUBBER-TABLE OGDEN NAME

thetai alphai mu1i alpha1i mu2i alpha2i mu3i alpha3i mu4i alpha4i
mu5i alpha5i mu6i alpha6i mu7i alpha7i mu8i alpha8i mu9i alpha9i
kappai fitting-curvei rubber-viscoelastici rubber-mullinsi rubber-orthotropici

Defines a rubber-table data set of type Ogden. This data set can be used to describe the
temperature dependence of the Ogden material constants in the MATERIAL OGDEN com-
mand.

NAME [(current highest rubber-table label number) + 1]

Label number of the rubber-table data set to define. If the label number of an existing rubber-
table data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.

thetai
The temperature corresponding to the material properties entered in this data input line.

alphai [0.0]
The coefficient of thermal expansion.

mu1i ... mu9i [0.0]

alpha1i ... alpha9i [0.0]
kappai [0.0]
The material properties.

fittting-curvei [0]
If fittting-curvei is zero, no fitting curve is used.
If fittting-curvei is nonzero, curve-fitting data from the CURVE-FITTING command is used to
compute the material properties, and mu1i to alpha9i are ignored.

rubber-viscoelastici [0]
If rubber-viscoelastici is zero, no viscoelastic effects are included.
If rubber-viscoelastici is non-zero, viscoelastic effects are included, using the data set from
the corresponding RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC command.

rubber-mullinsi [0]
If rubber-mullinsi is zero, no Mullins effects are included.
If rubber-mullinsi is non-zero, Mullins effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-MULLINS command.

rubber-orthotropici [0]
If rubber-orthotropici is zero, no orthotropic effects are included.
If rubber-orthotropici is non-zero, orthotropic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC command.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-133

Chap. 7 Model definition RUBBER-TABLE OGDEN

Auxiliary commands

LIST RUBBER-TABLE FIRST LAST

DELETE RUBBER-TABLE FIRST LAST

7-134 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RUBBER-TABLE HYPER-FOAM Sec. 7.1 Material models

RUBBER-TABLE HYPER-FOAM NAME

thetai alphai mu1i alpha1i beta1i mu2i alpha2i beta2i mu3i alpha3i beta3i
mu4i alpha4i beta4i mu5i alpha5i beta5i mu6i alpha6i beta6i
mu7i alpha7i beta7i mu8i alpha8i beta8i mu9i alpha9i beta9i
fitting-curvei rubber-viscoelastici rubber-mullinsi rubber-orthotropici

Defines a rubber-table data set of type hyper-foam. This data set can be used to describe the
temperature dependence of the hyper-foam material constants in the MATERIAL HYPER-
FOAM command.

NAME [(current highest rubber-table label number) + 1]

Label number of the rubber-table data set to define. If the label number of an existing rubber-
table data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.

thetai
The temperature corresponding to the material properties entered in this data input line.

alphai [0.0]
The coefficient of thermal expansion.

mu1i ... betai [0.0]

The material properties.

fittting-curvei [0]
If fittting-curvei is zero, no fitting curve is used.
If fittting-curvei is nonzero, curve-fitting data from the CURVE-FITTING command is used to
compute the material properties, and mu1i to alpha9i are ignored.

rubber-viscoelastici [0]
If rubber-viscoelastici is zero, no viscoelastic effects are included.
If rubber-viscoelastici is non-zero, viscoelastic effects are included, using the data set from
the corresponding RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC command.

rubber-mullinsi [0]
If rubber-mullinsi is zero, no Mullins effects are included.
If rubber-mullinsi is non-zero, Mullins effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-MULLINS command.

rubber-orthotropici [0]
If rubber-orthotropici is zero, no orthotropic effects are included.
If rubber-orthotropici is non-zero, orthotropic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC command.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-135

Chap. 7 Model definition RUBBER-TABLE HYPER-FOAM

Auxiliary commands

LIST RUBBER-TABLE FIRST LAST

DELETE RUBBER-TABLE FIRST LAST

7-136 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RUBBER-TABLE SUSSMAN-BATHE Sec. 7.1 Material models

RUBBER-TABLE SUSSMAN-BATHE NAME

thetai alphai sscurvei sstypei relerrori kappai rubber-viscoelastici

rubber-mullinsi rubber-orthotropici

Defines a rubber-table data set of type Sussman-Bathe. This data set can be used to describe
the temperature dependence of the Sussman-Bathe material model in the MATERIAL
SUSSMAN-BATHE command.

NAME [(current highest rubber-table label number) + 1]

Label number of the rubber-table data set to define. If the label number of an existing rubber-
table data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.

thetai
The temperature corresponding to the material properties entered in this data input line.

alphai [0.0]
The coefficient of thermal expansion.

sscurvei
The uniaxial tension/compression stress-strain curve for this temperature, defined by the
SSCURVE command.

sstypei [ENGINEERING]
The interpretation of the stress-strain data. {ENGINEERING/TRUE/STRETCH}

ENGINEERING engineering strains, engineering stresses

TRUE true strains, true stresses

STRETCH stretches, engineering stresses

relerrori [0.01]
The relative error, used to determine the number of splines for this
temperature. relerrori cannot equal 0.0.

kappai [0.0]
The bulk modulus, used for 3-D, plane strain and axisymmetric elements.
If kappai = 0.0, then the AUI computes the bulk modulus based on a Poissons ratio of 0.499.

rubber-viscoelastici [0]
If rubber-viscoelastici is zero, no viscoelastic effects are included.
If rubber-viscoelastici is non-zero, viscoelastic effects are included, using the data set from
the corresponding RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC command.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-137

Chap. 7 Model definition RUBBER-TABLE SUSSMAN-BATHE

rubber-mullinsi [0]
If rubber-mullinsi is zero, no Mullins effects are included.
If rubber-mullinsi is non-zero, Mullins effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-MULLINS command.

rubber-orthotropici [0]
If rubber-orthotropici is zero, no orthotropic effects are included.
If rubber-orthotropici is non-zero, orthotropic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC command.

7-138 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RUBBER-TABLE TRS Sec. 7.1 Material models

RUBBER-TABLE TRS NAME

thetai alphai

This data set can be used to specify the coefficients of thermal expansion for the MATERIAL
MOONEY-RIVLIN, MATERIAL OGDEN, MATERIAL ARRUDA-BOYCE, MATERIAL EIGHT-
CHAIN and MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM materials, when the TRS temperature dependence
option is used.

NAME [(current highest rubber-table label number) + 1]

Label number of the rubber-table data set to define. If the label number of an existing rubber-
table data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.

thetai
The temperature corresponding to the material properties entered in this data input line.

alphai [0.0]
The coefficient of thermal expansion.

Auxiliary commands

LIST RUBBER-TABLE FIRST LAST

DELETE RUBBER-TABLE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-139

Chap. 7 Model definition RUBBER-TABLE TRS

This page intentionally left blank.

7-140 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RUBBER-MULLINS OGDEN-ROXBURGH Sec. 7.1 Material models

RUBBER-MULLINS OGDEN-ROXBURGH NAME R M GENERATION_FACTOR

Defines a data set of type rubber-Mullins, subtype Ogden-Roxburgh. This data set can be
referenced by the MATERIAL MOONEY-RIVLIN, MATERIAL OGDEN, MATERIAL
ARRUDA-BOYCE, MATERIAL EIGHT-CHAIN and MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM commands to
add the Mullins effect to any of these materials.

NAME [current highest rubber-mullins label number + 1]

Label number of the rubber-Mullins data set to define. If the label number of an existing
rubber-Mullins data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.

R [0.0]
M [0.0]
The material constants of the Ogden-Roxburgh model for the Mullins effect, see the ADINA
Theory and Modeling Guide.

GENERATION_FACTOR [0.0]
The fraction of energy dissipated by the Mullins effect model that is considered as heat
generation. For example, if GENERATION_FACTOR = 1.0, then all energy dissipated by the
Mullins effect model is considered as heat generation. Heat generation can cause heating in
a TMC (thermo-mechanical coupling) analysis.

Auxiliary commands:

LIST RUBBER-MULLINS FIRST LAST

DELETE RUBBER-MULLINS FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-141

Chap. 7 Model definition RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC BERGSTROM-BOYCE

RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC BERGSTROM-BOYCE
NAME RATIOBA C1B C2B MMB EOFFSET MAXITE RTOL GENFAC

Defines a data set of type rubber-viscoelastic, subtype Bergstrom-Boyce. This data set can
be referenced by the MATERIAL MOONEY-RIVLIN, MATERIAL OGDEN, MATERIAL
ARRUDA-BOYCE, MATERIAL EIGHT-CHAIN and MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM commands to
add the viscoelastic effect to any of these materials.

See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide for the meanings of the material parameters.

NAME [current highest rubber-viscoelastic label number + 1]

Label number of the rubber-viscoelastic data set to define. If the label number of an existing
rubber-viscoelastic data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.

RATIOBA
Ratio of the stiffness of network B relative to that of network A.

C1B
Viscous deformation rate constant for network B.

C2B
Chain stretch exponential for network B.

MMB
Stress exponential for network B.

EOFFSET
Small offset value.

MAXITE [100]
The maximum number of stress integration iterations allowed per integration point.

RTOL [1.0E-12]
A tolerance used to assess convergence of stress integration iterations. This is a relative
tolerance, i.e., dimensionless values are tested against RTOL.

GENFAC [0.0]
The heat generation factor (fraction of internally dissipated energy converted to heat). If
GENFAC=0.0, no heat is generated from the dissipated energy. {0.0 GENFAC 1.0}.

7-142 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC HOLZAPFEL Sec. 7.1 Material models

RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC HOLZAPFEL NAME SHIFT C1 C2

betai taui generation_factori usagei

Defines a data set of type rubber-viscoelastic, subtype Holzapfel. This data set can be
referenced by the MATERIAL MOONEY-RIVLIN, MATERIAL OGDEN, MATERIAL
ARRUDA-BOYCE, MATERIAL EIGHT-CHAIN and MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM commands to
add the viscoelastic effect to any of these materials.

See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide for the meanings of the material parameters.

NAME [current highest rubber-viscoelastic label number + 1]

Label number of the rubber-viscoelastic data set to define. If the label number of an existing
rubber-viscoelastic data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.

SHIFT [NONE]
Specifies the time-temperature superposition shift law. {NONE/WLF/ARRHENIUS}

NONE Time-temperature superposition is not used.

WLF The WLF (Williams-Landel-Ferry) shift function is used for the time-
temperature superposition.

ARRHENIUS The Arrhenius shift function is used for the time-temperature superposi-
tion.

C1 [0.0]
C2 [0.0]
The material constants for the WLF or Arrhenius shift functions.

betai [0.0]
Beta for chain (i) of the viscoelastic model.

taui [0.0]
Tau for chain (i) of the viscoelastic model. Tau must be greater than 0.

generation_factori [0.0]
The heat generation factor (fraction of dissipation energy convered into heat generation). If
generation_factori = 0, the dissipation is not calculated and there is no heat generation.

usagei [DEVIATORIC]
The usage of the chain. {COMBINED/DEVIATORIC/VOLUMETRIC/AORTHO/BORTHO/
CORTHO}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-143

Chap. 7 Model definition RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC HOLZAPFEL

COMBINED The chain is based on the total strain energy.

DEVIATORIC The chain is based on the deviatoric strain energy.

VOLUMETRIC The chain is based on the volumetric strain energy.

AORTHO The chain is based on the A direction orthotropic strain energy.

BORTHO The chain is based on the B direction orthotropic strain energy.

CORTHO The chain is based on the C direction orthotropic strain energy

(not supported in this version)

Auxiliary commands

LIST RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC FIRST LAST

DELETE RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC FIRST LAST

7-144 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC HOLZAPFEL Sec. 7.1 Material models

RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC HOLZAPFEL NAME BETAA BETAB K1 K2

COMPRESSION

Defines a data set of type rubber-orthotropic, subtype Holzapfel. This data set can be
referenced by the MATERIAL MOONEY-RIVLIN, MATERIAL OGDEN, MATERIAL
ARRUDA-BOYCE, MATERIAL EIGHT-CHAIN and MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM commands to
add the orthotropic effect to any of these materials.

See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide for the meanings of the material parameters.

NAME [current highest rubber-orthotropic label number + 1]

Label number of the rubber-orthotropic data set to define. If the label number of an existing
rubber-orthotropic data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.

BETAA [0.0]
The angle (in degrees) between the material a axis and the fiber A direction na.

BETAB [0.0]
The angle (in degrees) between the material b axis and the fiber B direction nb. This parameter
is not used if DIRECTION = AHOOP.

K1 [0.0]
K2 [0.0]
The material constants of the orthotropic strain energy function.

COMPRESSION [NO]
If COMPRESSION = NO, then material fibers in compression do not contribute to the
orthotropic strain energy (no strain energy in compression). If COMPRESSION = YES, then
material fibers in compression contribute to the orthotropic strain energy.

DIRECTION [AB]
If DIRECTION = AB, then the fiber directions are na and nb. If DIRECTION = AHOOP, then the
fiber directions are na and x (the hoop direction). AHOOP is allowed only for axisymmetric
elements.

Auxiliary commands

LIST RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC FIRST LAST

DELETE RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-145

Chap. 7 Model definition RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC HOLZAPFEL

This page intentionally left blank.

7-146 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
COEFFICIENTS-TABLE Sec. 7.1 Material models

COEFFICIENTS-TABLE NAME

sigmai a0i a1i a2i a3i a4i a5i a6i a7i

Defines an effective-stress v creep-coefficients table, which can be referenced by command

CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR to define the temperature and/or effective-stress
dependence of creep material models with variable coefficients, see commands
MATERIAL CREEP-VARIABLE, MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE,
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE.
See the Theory and Modeling Guide for further details.

NAME [(current highest COEFFICIENTS-TABLE label number) + 1]

Label number of the stress v creep-coefficient table to be defined.

sigmai
Stress at data point i.

a0i
Creep law coefficient a0 at stress sigmai.

a1i
Creep law coefficient a1 at stress sigmai.

a2i
Creep law coefficient a2 at stress sigmai.

a3i
Creep law coefficient a3 at stress sigmai.

a4i
Creep law coefficient a4 at stress sigmai.

a5i
Creep law coefficient a5 at stress sigmai.

a6i
Creep law coefficient a6 at stress sigmai.

a7i
Creep law coefficient a7 at stress sigmai.

Auxiliary commands

LIST COEFFICIENTS-TABLE FIRST LAST

DELETE COEFFICIENTS-TABLE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-147

Chap. 7 Model definition CREEP-COEFFICIENTS LUBBY2

CREEP-COEFFICIENTS LUBBY2 NAME

thetai a0i a1i a2i a3i a4i a5i

Defines the dependency of creep law coefficients on temperature. This creep coefficient
function is referenced by the NCOEF parameter in the commands:
MATERIAL CREEP-VARIABLE, MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE,
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
if CREEP-LAW=LUBBY2 is specified in those commands.

NAME [(current highest creep-coefficient

function label number) + 1]
Label number of the creep-coefficient function to be defined.

thetai
Temperature at data point "i".

a0i [0.0]
Creep law coefficient a0 at "thetai".

a1i [0.0]
Creep law coefficient a1 at "thetai".

a2i [0.0]
Creep law coefficient a2 at "thetai".

a3i [1.21e8]
Creep law coefficient a3 at "thetai". { 0.0}

a4i [188000]
Creep law coefficient a4 at "thetai". { 0.0}

a5i [251000]
Creep law coefficient a5 at "thetai". { 0.0}

Auxiliary commands:

LIST CREEP-COEFFICIENTS LUBBY2 FIRST LAST

DELETE CREEP-COEFFICIENTS LUBBY2 FIRST LAST

7-148 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR Sec. 7.1 Material models

CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR NAME

thetai ccurvei

Defines the temperature and/or effective-stress dependence of creep material models with
variable coefficients, see commands
MATERIAL CREEP-VARIABLE, MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE,
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE, and COEFFICIENTS-TABLE.

NAME [(current highest creep-coefficient

function label number) + 1]
Label number of the creep-coefficient function to be defined.

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

ccurvei
Stress vs. creep-coefficient table at temperature thetai, see command
COEFFICIENTS-TABLE.

Auxiliary commands

LISTCREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR FIRST LAST

DELETE CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-149

Chap. 7 Model definition CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-ONLY

CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-ONLY NAME

thetai a0i a1i a2i a3i a4i a5i a6i a7i

Defines the dependency of creep law coefficients on temperature. This creep coefficient
function is referenced by the NCOEF parameter in the commands:
MATERIAL CREEP-VARIABLE, MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE,
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
if CREEP-LAW=LAW3 is specified in those commands.

NAME [(current highest creep-coefficient

function label number) + 1]
Label number of the creep-coefficient function to be defined.

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

a0i
Creep law coefficient a0 at "thetai".

a1i
Creep law coefficient a1 at "thetai".

a2i
Creep law coefficient a2 at "thetai".

a3i
Creep law coefficient a3 at "thetai".

a4i
Creep law coefficient a4 at "thetai".

a5i
Creep law coefficient a5 at "thetai".

a6i
Creep law coefficient a6 at "thetai".

a7i
Creep law coefficient a7 at "thetai".

7-150 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-ONLY Sec. 7.1 Material models

Auxiliary commands:

LIST CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-ONLY FIRST LAST

DELETE CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-ONLY FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-151

Chap. 7 Model definition CREEP-COEFFICIENTS USER-SUPPLIED

CREEP-COEFFICIENTS USER-SUPPLIED NAME

Defines the temperature and/or effective-stress dependence of creep material models with
variable coefficients, see commands:
MATERIAL CREEP-VARIABLE, MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE,
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE.
The dependence is defined via a user-supplied function, see the Theory and Modeling Guide
for further details.

NAME [(current highest creep-coefficient

function label number) + 1]
Label number of the creep-coefficient function to be defined.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CREEP-COEFFICIENTS USER-SUPPLIED FIRST LAST

DELETE CREEP-COEFFICIENTS USER-SUPPLIED FIRST LAST

7-152 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CURVATURE-MOMENT Sec. 7.1 Material models

CURVATURE-MOMENT NAME

curvaturei momenti

Defines a curvature v moment curve which can be referenced by the command

MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE . The curve is defined as piecewise linear through the data
points (curvaturei, momenti).

NAME [(current highest CURVATURE-MOMENT

label number) + 1]
Label number of the curvature v moment curve to be defined.

curvaturei
Curvature at data point i.

momenti
Moment at curvaturei.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CURVATURE-MOMENT FIRST LAST

DELETE CURVATURE-MOMENT FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-153

Chap. 7 Model definition DFC-CREEP ACI209R-92

DFC-CREEP ACI209R-92
NAME EFFECT UNIT FC28 TYPE CURING HUMIDITY VS SLUMP
AGGREGATE AIR CEMENT WEIGHT TS T0

Defines a data set of the creep/shrinkage model according to the ACI209R-92 rule. This data
set can be referenced by the MATERIAL DF-CONCRETE command to add the creep/
shrinkage effect to the DF-CONCRETE material.

NAME [(current highest DFC-CREEP label number) + 1]

Label number.

EFFECT [CREEP]
Creep, shrinkage or both effects can be included in the analysis. {CREEP/SHRINKAGE/
BOTH}

UNIT [SI]
SI or in-lb units to be used in the model input.

FC28
Mean 28 day strength, in MPa or psi. {> 0.}

TYPE [I]
Cement type, either I or III.

CURING [MOIST]
Curing condition, either moist or steam curing.

HUMIDITY
Relative humidity of the environment, in %. {> 0.}

VS
Volume-surface ratio, in mm or inches. {> 0.}

SLUMP
Concrete slump, in mm or inches. {> 0.}

AGGREGATE
Ratio of fine aggregate to total aggregate, in %. {> 0.}

AIR
Air content in %. {> 0.}

7-154 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DFC-CREEP ACI209R-92 Sec. 7.1 Material models

CEMENT
Cement content, in kg/m3 or lb/yd3. {> 0.}

WEIGHT
Unit weight of concrete, in kg/m3 or lb/ft3.{> 0.}

TS
Concrete age at the beginning of shrinkage, in days.

T0
Concrete age at loading, in days.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-155

Chap. 7 Model definition DFC-CREEP ADINA

DFC-CREEP ADINA NAME A1 ... A15 A22 ... A31 TS T0

Defines a data set of the creep/shrinkage model according to the ADINA concrete creep rule.
This data set can be referenced by the MATERIAL DF-CONCRETE command to add the
creep/shrinkage effect to the DF-CONCRETE material.

NAME [(current highest DFC-CREEP label number) + 1]

Label number.

A1...A15, A22...A31 [0.0]

Concrete creep and shrinkage constants (A16 to A21 are set to zero by the program).

TS
Concrete age at the beginning of shrinkage, in days.

T0
Concrete age at loading, in days.

7-156 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DFC-CREEP CEB-FIP Sec. 7.1 Material models

DFC-CREEP CEB-FIP NAME EFFECT FC28 TYPE HUMIDITY AC U TS T0

Defines a data set of the creep/shrinkage model according to the CEB-FIP 1990 rule. This data
set can be referenced by the MATERIAL DF-CONCRETE command to add the creep/
shrinkage effect to the DF-CONCRETE material.

NAME [(current highest DFC-CREEP label number) + 1]

Label number.

EFFECT [CREEP]
Creep, shrinkage or both effects can be included in the analysis. {CREEP/SHRINKAGE/
BOTH}

FC28
Mean 28 day strength, in MPa {> 0.}

TYPE [SL]
Cement type, either SL(slow hardening), N(normal), R(rapid), RS(rapid hardening and high
strength). {SL/N/R/RS}

HUMIDITY
Relative humidity of the environment, in %. {> 0.}

AC
Cross sectional area, in mm {> 0.}
.
U
Perimeter of the member in contact with the atmosphere, in mm. {> 0.}

TS
Concrete age at the beginning of shrinkage, in days.

T0
Concrete age at loading, in days.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-157

Chap. 7 Model definition FTABLE

FTABLE NAME F0 OPTION WEIGHTING W1 W2 TAU

modulusi decayi (OPTION=DIRECT)

modulusi timei (OPTION=TEST)

Defines a series of modulus and decay coefficients to represent a modulus relaxation function
used by command MATERIAL VISCOELASTIC.
F0 is 0th term of modulus and the corresponding decay coefficient is zero.
If OPTION=TEST, input data are interpreted as the modulus response vs. time. The program
will convert time history curve into a Prony-Dirichlet series representation.

NAME [(current highest FTABLE label number) + 1]

Label number of the modulus-decay function to be defined. If the label number of an existing
function is given, existing function definition is overwritten.

F0 [0.0]
The 0th term of modulus representation. Used only when OPTION=DIRECT

OPTION [DIRECT]

DIRECT Table data are input in Prony series

TEST Table data are input in pairs of modulus vs. time

WEIGHTING [NO]
Specifies if least squares fitting scheme is used to smooth moduli terms. Used only if
OPTION=TEST. {NO/YES}

W1 [0.0]
Weighting parameter 1. Active only if WEIGHTING=YES.

W2 [0.0]
Weighting parameter 2. Active only if WEIGHTING=YES.

TAU [0.0]
Relaxation parameter for calculating decayi.

modulusi
Modulus at term "i", or modulus corresponding to time "i"

7-158 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FTABLE Sec. 7.1 Material models

decayi
Decay coefficient at term "i"

timei
Time corresponding to modulusi.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FTABLE FIRST LAST

DELETE FTABLE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-159

Chap. 7 Model definition FORCE-STRAIN

FORCE-STRAIN NAME

straini forcei

Defines a force-strain curve which can be referenced by the command

RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE.
The curve is defined as piecewise linear through the data points (straini, forcei).

NAME [(current highest FORCE-STRAIN label number) + 1]

Label number of the force-strain curve to be defined.

straini
Axial strain at data point i.

forcei
Axial force at straini.

Note: The force is assumed to be zero when the effective plastic axial strain exceeds the
maximum effective plastic axial strain on the yield curve (force vs. plastic-strain)
obtained from the above force v total-strain curve.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FORCE-STRAIN FIRST LAST

DELETE FORCE-STRAIN FIRST LAST

7-160 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
IRRADIATION_CREEP-TABLE Sec. 7.1 Material models

IRRADIATION_CREEP-TABLE NAME

temperaturei neutron-tablei

Defines the dependency of irradiation creep variables on temperature and fast neutron
fluence.

NAME [(current highest irradiation_creep-table label number)

+ 1]
Label number of the irradiation creep table to be defined.

temperaturei
Temperature at data point i.

neutron-tablei
Neutron fluence table at temperature thetai.

Auxiliary commands

LIST IRRADIATION_CREEP-TABLE FIRST LAST

DELETE IRRADIATION_CREEP-TABLE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-161

Chap. 7 Model definition IRRADIATION_CREEP-TABLE

This page intentionally left blank.

7-162 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE Sec. 7.1 Material models

MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE NAME

forcei curvature-momenti

Defines a moment-curvature curve which can be referenced by the command

RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE .

NAME [(current highest MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE

label number) + 1]
Label number of the curvature v moment curve to be defined.

forcei
Axial force at data point i.

curvature-momenti
Label number of the curvature-moment at forcei. (See CURVATURE-MOMENT ).

Note: For plasticity models, the curves defined by the input data are transformed to yield
curves which are linearly interpolated to obtain the yield curve corresponding to
the current axial force.

Note: The bending moment is assumed to be zero when the effective plastic curvature
exceeds the maximum effective plastic curvature reached by the interpolated yield
curves.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE FIRST LAST

DELETE MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-163

Chap. 7 Model definition MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE

MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE NAME

forcei twist-momenti

Defines a moment-twist curve which can be referenced by the command

RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE.

NAME [(current highest MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE

label number) + 1]
Label number of the moment-twist curve to be defined.

forcei
Axial force at data point i.

twist-momenti
Label number of the twist-moment at forcei. (See TWIST-MOMENT ).

Note: For plasticity models, the curves defined by the input data are transformed to yield
curves which are linearly interpolated to obtain the yield curve corresponding to
the current axial force.

Note: The bending moment is assumed to be zero when the effective plastic twist exceeds
the maximum effective plastic twist reached by the interpolated yield curves.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE FIRST LAST

DELETE MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE FIRST LAST

7-164 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
NEUTRON-DOSE Sec. 7.1 Material models

NEUTRON-DOSE NAME

timei neutron-fluencei

Defines a neutron fluence as a function of time. The command defines a time dependent total
neutron fluence for the irradiation creep material model.

The time range input should cover the entire time interval required in the solution.

NAME [(current highest neutron dose label number) + 1]

Label number of neutron dose to be defined. If the label number of an existing neutron dose
is given, then the previous definition is overwritten.

timei
Time at data point i.

neutron-fluencei
Neutron fluence at timei.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-165

Chap. 7 Model definition NEUTRON-TABLE

NEUTRON-TABLE NAME

neutron-fluencei irradiation-straini Ei alphai

Defines a neutron fluence table which can be referenced by an irradiation creep table.

NAME [(current highest NEUTRON-TABLE label number) + 1]

Label number of the neutron fluence table to be defined.

neutron-fluencei
Neutron-fluence at data point i.

irradiation-straini
Irradiation-strain at neutron-fluencei .

Ei
Youngs modulus at neutron-fluencei .

alphai
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion at neutron-fluencei .

Auxiliary commands:

LIST NEUTRON-TABLE FIRST LAST

DELETE NEUTRON-TABLE FIRST LAST

7-166 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
PORE-FLUID-PROPERTY Sec. 7.1 Material models

PORE-FLUID-PROPERTY MATERIAL PX PY PZ COMPRESS FLUIDBULK

POROSITY

Defines pore fluid properties.

MATERIAL
Label number of the material (must be existing).

PX [1.0E-9]
PY [1.0E-9]
PZ [1.0E-9]
Permeability in X, Y and Z directions. Must be positive.

COMPRESS [NO]
Indicates whether the fluid is compressible. {NO/YES}

FLUIDBULK [2.1E9]
Bulk modulus of the pore fluid. Used only when COMPRESS = YES. {>0.0}

POROSITY [0.75]
Porosity of the porous solid material. Used only when COMPRESS = YES. {>0.0}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-167

Chap. 7 Model definition PROPERTY NONLINEAR-C

PROPERTY NONLINEAR-C NAME XC XN

Defines a nonlinear relationship between the damping force and the relative velocity of the
nonlinear spring element. The relationship is of the form,

N
FD = C U

NAME [(current highest property label number) + 1]

Label number of the property to be defined.

XC
Constant C in the definition of function FD, see above.

XN
Exponent N in the definition of function FD, see above.

Auxiliary Commands

LIST PROPERTY NONLINEAR-C FIRST LAST

DELETE PROPERTY NONLINEAR-C FIRST LAST

7-168 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-K Sec. 7.1 Material models

PROPERTY NONLINEAR-K NAME RUPTURE

relative-displacementi forcei

Defines a nonlinear relationship between relative-displacement and force from which the
stiffness and force of a nonlinear spring element are obtained.

NAME [(current highest property label number) + 1]

Label number of the property to be defined.

RUPTURE [NO]
Indicates whether a spring ruptures if the relative displacement exceeds the limiting values of
the input relative-displacements. If YES then the force is assumed zero beyond the minimum,
maximum values of the relative-displacement. {YES/NO}

relative-displacementi
Relative displacement (between spring nodes) at data point i.

forcei
Spring force at relative-displacementi.

Auxiliary Commands

LIST PROPERTY NONLINEAR-K FIRST LAST

DELETE PROPERTY NONLINEAR-K FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-169

Chap. 7 Model definition PROPERTY NONLINEAR-M

PROPERTY NONLINEAR-M NAME

timei massi

Defines the time-dependent total mass for nonlinear spring elements. The input time range
should cover that of the entire analysis.

NAME [(current highest property label number) + 1]

Label number of the property to be defined.

timei
Time at data point i.

massi
Spring mass at timei.

Auxiliary Commands

LIST PROPERTY NONLINEAR-M FIRST LAST

DELETE PROPERTY NONLINEAR-M FIRST LAST

7-170 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
PROPERTYSET Sec. 7.1 Material models

PROPERTYSET NAME K M C S NONLINEAR NK NM NC

Defines stiffness, mass, damping, and stress transformation properties for SPRING elements
in a set termed a propertyset.

See the Theory and Modeling Guide for further details on the resulting spring element
stiffness, mass, damping, and stress transformation matrices evaluated from these constants.

NAME [(current highest property label number) + 1]

Label number of the propertyset to be defined.

K
Linear spring element stiffness. {> 0.0}

M [0.0]
Total mass of linear spring element. The corresponding mass matrix is lumped or consistent
according to the MASS-MATRIX command.

C [0.0]
Linear spring element damping coefficient.

S [0.0]
Stress transformation constant for a linear spring element. This constant is used to form a
stress transformation matrix, which when multiplied by the element nodal displacements gives
a stress value.

NONLINEAR [NO]
Indicates whether a nonlinear spring propertyset is to be defined. {YES/NO}

NK [0]
Label number of a nonlinear stiffness property (see PROPERTY NONLINEAR-K ). For
NONLINEAR = YES a value must be supplied.

NM [0]
Label number of a nonlinear mass property (see PROPERTY NONLINEAR-M ).

NC [0]
Label number of a nonlinear damping property (see PROPERTY NONLINEAR-C ).

Note: If skew degree-of-freedom systems are applied at the nodes of a spring element
then ADINA will make any necessary transformation to account for the skew
system directions.

Note: For a grounded spring, with one nodal degree of freedom specified, the total mass

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-171

Chap. 7 Model definition PROPERTYSET

of the element is lumped at the spring node degree of freedom.

Note: Stress calculations are carried out for spring elements only when RESULTS =
STRESSES is set by the EGROUP SPRING command.

Auxiliary commands

LIST PROPERTYSET FIRST LAST

DELETE PROPERTYSET FIRST LAST

7-172 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE NONLINEAR-ELASTIC Sec. 7.1 Material models

RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE NONLINEAR-ELASTIC
NAME RIGIDITY-AXIAL MOMENT-R
MOMENT-S MOMENT-T DENSITY
MASS-AREA MASS-RINERTIA
MASS-SINERTIA MASS-TINERTIA ALPHA

Defines a nonlinear-elastic rigidity for BEAM elements.

NAME [(current highest RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE

label number) + 1]
Label number of the rigidity to be defined.

RIGIDITY-AXIAL
Axial rigidity.

MOMENT-R [0]
Label number of a curve defined by MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE giving the torsional moment
of inertia as a nonlinear elastic function of the twist per unit length.

MOMENT-S [0]
Label number of a curve defined by MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE giving the bending
moment of inertia about the s-axis of a beam element as a nonlinear elastic function of the
corresponding curvature.

MOMENT-T [0]
Label number of a curve defined by MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE giving the bending
moment of inertia about the t-axis of a beam element as a nonlinear elastic function of the
corresponding curvature.

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density (in units of mass/length3 ). Used in the calculation of the mass matrix.

MASS-AREA
Cross-sectional area (in units of length2 ). Used only in the calculation of the mass matrix.

MASS-RINERTIA
Unused.

MASS-SINERTIA
Second moment of area for bending about the s-axis of a beam element (in units of length4 ).
Used only in the calculation of the mass matrix.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-173

Chap. 7 Model definition RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE NONLINEAR-ELASTIC

MASS-TINERTIA
Second moment of area for bending about the t-axis of a beam element (in units of length4 ).
Used only in the calculation of the mass matrix.

ALPHA
Thermal expansion coefficient.

Auxiliary commands

LIST RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE FIRST LAST

DELETE RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE FIRST LAST

7-174 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR Sec. 7.1 Material models

RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR
NAME HARDENING BETA FORCE-
AXIAL MOMENT-R MOMENT-S
MOMENT-T AXIAL-CYCLIC-FACTOR
BENDING-CYCLIC-FACTOR
TORSION-CYCLIC-FACTOR DENSITY
MASS-AREA MASS-RINERTIA
MASS-SINERTIA MASS-TINERTIA
ACURVE-TYPE TCURVE-TYPE
BCURVE-TYPE ALPHA

Defines a plastic-multilinear rigidity for BEAM elements.

NAME [(current highest RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE

label number) + 1]
Label number of the rigidity to be defined.

HARDENING [ISOTROPIC]
Selects the type of strain hardening rule:

ISOTROPIC Linear isotropic strain hardening.

KINEMATIC Linear kinematic strain hardening.

MIXED Linear mixed strain hardening.

BETA
Factor used in mixed hardening to determine the amounts of kinematic and isotropic harden-
ing. BETA = 0 results in purely kinematic hardening while BETA = 1 results in purely
isotropic hardening. {0.0 < BETA < 1.0}

FORCE-AXIAL [0]
Label number of a curve defined by FORCE-STRAIN giving the axial force as a multilinear
plastic function of the axial strain.

MOMENT-R [0]
Label number of a curve defined by MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE giving the torsional moment
of inertia as a multilinear function of the twist per unit length.

MOMENT-S [0]
Label number of a curve defined by MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE giving the bending
moment of inertia about the s-axis of a beam element as a multilinear function of the corre-
sponding curvature.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-175

Chap. 7 Model definition RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR

MOMENT-T [0]
Label number of a curve defined by MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE giving the bending
moment of inertia about the t-axis of a beam element as a multilinear function of the corre-
sponding curvature.

AXIAL-CYCLIC-FACTOR [1.0]
Ratio of the initial elastic axial rigidity and the elastic axial rigitity after first yield. { 1.0}

BENDING-CYCLIC-FACTOR [1.0]
Ratio of the initial elastic bending rigidity and the elastic bending rigidity after first yield.
{ 1.0}

TORSIONAL-CYCLIC-FACTOR [1.0]
Ratio of the initial elastic torsional rigidity and the elastic torsional rigidity after first yield.
{ 1.0}

DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density (in units of mass/length3 ). Used in the calculation of the mass matrix.

MASS-AREA
Cross-sectional area (in units of length2 ). Used only in the calculation of the mass matrix.

MASS-RINERTIA
Unused.

MASS-SINERTIA
Second moment of area for bending about the s-axis of a beam element (in units of length4 ).
Used only in the calculation of the mass matrix.

MASS-TINERTIA
Second moment of area for bending about the t-axis of a beam element (in units of length4 ).
Used only in the calculation of the mass matrix.

ACURVE-TYPE [SYMMETRIC]
Indicates whether the axial force-strain curve is symmetric or not.
{SYMMETRIC/UNSYMMETRIC}

TCURVE-TYPE [SYMMETRIC]
Indicates whether the torsional moment-twist curves are symmetric or not.
{SYMMETRIC/UNSYMMETRIC}

7-176 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR Sec. 7.1 Material models

BCURVE-TYPE [SYMMETRIC]
Indicates whether the bending moment-curvature curves are symmetric or not.
{SYMMETRIC/UNSYMMETRIC}

ALPHA
Thermal expansion coefficient.

Note: For the curves input via FORCE-AXIAL, MOMENT-R, MOMENT-S, and
MOMENT-T, the first data point corresponds to the yield point, all data points must
have positive coordinates for symmetric curves, and the slope (hardening modulus)
of any curve segment cannot be greater than the elastic modulus of the curve.

Note: Softening is not modeled.

Auxiliary commands

LIST RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE FIRST LAST

DELETE RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-177

Chap. 7 Model definition RUPTURE MULTILINEAR

RUPTURE MULTILINEAR NAME COMPRESS TRIAXIALITY

thetai rupture-curvei

Defines a rupture criterion in terms of a multilinear relationship between temperature and

creep rupture strain v. effective stress curves - see the Theory and Modeling Guide for
details. The rupture criterion may be referenced by any of the creep material models, e.g. see
command MATERIAL CREEP.

NAME [(current highest rupture criterion

label number) + 1]
Label number of the rupture criterion to be defined.

COMPRESS [YES]
Indicates whether creep rupture can occure in compression. {YES/NO}

TRIAXIALITY [YES]
Indicates whether triaxiality factor is used. {YES/NO}

thetai
Temperature at data point i.

rupture-curvei
Creep rupture-strain vs. effective stress curve at temperature thetai, defined by command
RUPTURE-CURVE.

Auxiliary commands

LIST RUPTURE MULTILINEAR FIRST LAST

DELETE RUPTURE MULTILINEAR FIRST LAST

7-178 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RUPTURE THREE-PARAMETER Sec. 7.1 Material models

RUPTURE THREE-PARAMETER NAME ALPHA BETA SIGMA

Defines a rupture criterion in terms of the first three stress invariants -- see the Theory and
Modeling Guide for details. The rupture criterion may be referenced by any of the creep
material models, e.g. see command MATERIAL CREEP.

NAME [(current highest rupture criterion

label number) + 1]
Label number of the rupture criterion to be defined.

ALPHA [0.0]
First coefficient of the three-parameter rupture law.

BETA [0.0]
Second coefficient of the three-parameter rupture law.

SIGMA [0.0]
Effective stress at rupture for the three-parameter rupture law.

Auxiliary commands

LIST RUPTURE THREE-PARAMETER FIRST LAST

DELETE RUPTURE THREE-PARAMETER FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-179

Chap. 7 Model definition RUPTURE-CURVE

RUPTURE-CURVE NAME

straini stressi

Defines a creep rupture strain v. effective stress curve which may be referenced by command
RUPTURE to define a rupture criterion for a creep material model. See the Theory and
Modeling Guide for further details.

NAME [(current highest RUPTURE-CURVE

label number) + 1]
Label number of the creep rupture strain vs. effective stress curve to be defined.

straini
Creep rupture strain at data point i.

stress i
Stress at creep rupture strain straini.

Auxiliary commands

LIST RUPTURE-CURVE FIRST LAST

DELETE RUPTURE-CURVE FIRST LAST

7-180 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SCURVE Sec. 7.1 Material models

SCURVE NAME

straini stressi

Defines a stress-strain curve which can be referenced by a material model. The stress-strain
curve is defined as piecewise linear through the data points (straini, stressi).

NAME [(current highest SCURVE label number) + 1]

Label number of the stress-strain curve to be defined.

straini
Strain at data point i.

stressi
Stress at strain straini.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SCURVE FIRST LAST

DELETE SCURVE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-181

Chap. 7 Model definition SSCURVE

SSCURVE NAME CONSTANT-NU NU

straini stressi strain2i

Defines a stress-strain curve which can be referenced by a material model. The stress-strain
curve is defined as piecewise linear through the data points (straini , stressi ).
This command is currrenlty used only for hyperelastic curve fitting.

NAME [(current highest SSCURVE label number) + 1]

Label number of the stress-strain curve to be defined. If the label number of an existing curve
is given, then the previous curve definition is overwritten.

CONSTANT-NU [NO]
Flag indicate constant nu is used or not {YES/NO}
This parameter is only used when this curve is referenced by the hyper-foam material model.

NU
Specifies the Poissons ratio when CONSTANT-NU=YES.
This parameter is only used with the hyper-foam material model.
Note that NU must be in one of the ranges:

-1 < NU < 0.0, 0.0 < NU < 0.5

straini
Strain at data point "i".

stress i
Stress at data point "i".

strain2i
Lateral strain at data point "i".
strain2i is only used if CONSTANT-NU=NO is specified and this curve is used for a hyper-
foam material model.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SSCURVE FIRST LAST

DELETE SSCURVE FIRST LAST

7-182 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SSCURVE Sec. 7.1 Material models

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-183

Chap. 7 Model definition LCURVE

LCURVE NAME

closurei pressurei

Defines a loading-unloading curve which can be referenced by the gasket material model. The
loading-unloading curve is defined as piecewise linear through the data points (pressurei ,
closurei ).

NAME [(current highest LCURVE label number) + 1 ]

Label number of the loading-unloading curve to be defined. If the label number of an existing
curve is given, then the previous curve definition is overwritten.

closurei
Closure at data point "i".

pressurei
Pressure at data point "i".

Note: First point must have pressure =0.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LCURVE FIRST LAST

DELETELCURVE FIRST LAST

7-184 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 7.1 Material models

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-185

Chap. 7 Model definition STRAINRATE-FIT

STRAINRATE-FIT NAME

strainratei scurvei

Defines a strainrate-fit. The strainrate-fit can be specified in the MATERIAL PLASTIC-

BILINEAR and MATERIAL PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR commands, for the curve fitting of the
material properties of the rate-dependent plasticity material model.

NAME [(current highest strainrate-fit label number) + 1]

Label number of the strain-rate fit to be defined. If the label number of an existing strainrate-fit
is given, then the previous strainrate-fit definition is overwritten.

strainratei
The plastic strainrate associated with scurvei. The plastic strainrate must be greater than 0.0.

scurvei
The stress-strain curve, specified by the SCURVE command, for strainratei.

7-186 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TWIST-MOMENT Sec. 7.2 Cross-sections / layers

TWIST-MOMENT NAME

twisti momenti

Defines a twist v moment curve which can be referenced by the MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE

command. The curve is defined as piecewise linear through the data points (twisti, momenti).

NAME [(current highest TWIST-MOMENT label number) + 1]

Label number of the twist v moment curve to be defined.

twisti
Twist per unit length at data point i.

momenti
Moment at twisti.

Auxiliary commands

LIST TWIST-MOMENT FIRST LAST

DELETE TWIST-MOMENT FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-187

Chap. 7 Model definition CROSS-SECTION BOX

CROSS-SECTION BOX NAME WIDTH HEIGHT THICK1 THICK2 SC TC

TORFAC SSHEARF TSHEARF NWIDTH NHEIGHT
NTHICK1 NTHICK2 ASSUMPTIONS WAGNER
TORFORMULA

CROSS-SECTION BOX defines a box cross-section which can be used to describe the cross-
sectional characteristics of a Hermitian BEAM element.

THICK1 THICK1

THICK2

HEIGHT
s

centroid

THICK2

WIDTH

NAME [(current highest cross-section label number) + 1]

Label number of the cross-section to be defined.

WIDTH, HEIGHT, THICK1, THICK2

The dimensions of the box cross-section. See Figure.

SC [0.0]
TC [0.0]
Parameters used to increase the moments of inertia using the parallel axes theorem, see the
Theory and Modeling Guide. The centroid of the beam cross-section is not affected by the
choice of SC, TC.

7-188 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CROSS-SECTION BOX Sec. 7.2 Cross-sections / layers

TORFAC [1.0]
The torsional rigidity of the cross-section, corresponding to St. Venant torsion with free
warping, is multiplied by the factor TORFAC. (See Theory and Modeling Guide for details).

SSHEARF [0.0 (no s-direction shear effect)]

TSHEARF [0.0 (no t-direction shear effect)]
The shear areas corresponding to the beam s and t directions are calculated as the total
cross-sectional area multiplied by the factors SSHEARF, TSHEARF, respectively.

NWIDTH [0]
Number of integration points along the WIDTH direction. {0/1/3/5/7}

NHEIGHT [0]
Number of integration points along the HEIGHT direction. {0/1/3/5/7}

NTHICK1 [0]
Number of integration points through the THICK1 direction. {0/1/3/5/7}

NTHICK2 [0]
Number of integration points through the THICK2 direction. {0/1/3/5/7}

ASSUMPTIONS [CURRENT]
This parameter applies only when this cross-section is used with the standard Hermitian
beam element. If ASSUMPTIONS = V89, the 8.9 program version assumptions are used; if
ASSUMPTIONS = CURRENT, the current program version assumptions are used. ASSUMP-
TIONS = V90 is exactly the same as CURRENT. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
{CURRENT/V89/V90}

WAGNER [DEFAULT]
If WAGNER=YES, the Wagner effect is included in large displacement analysis; if WAGNER =
NO, the Wagner effect is not included in large displacement analysis. If WAGNER =
DEFAULT, the Wagner effect is included in large displacement analysis, unless the standard
beam element is used with ASSUMPTIONS = V89. {DEFAULT/YES}

TORFORMULA [DEFAULT]
If TORFORMULA = F1, formula F1 is used to calculate the torsional rigidity; if
TORFORMULA = FW, formala FW is used to calculate the torsional rigidity; if
TORFORMULA = DEFAULT, then FW is used unless the standard beam element is used
with ASSUMPTIONS = V89. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for the definitions of
formulas F1, FW. {DEFAULT/F1/FW}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-189

Chap. 7 Model definition CROSS-SECTION BOX

Notes for SC, TC, TORFAC, SSHEARF, TSHEARF: The parameters SC, TC, TORFAC,
SSHEARF, TSHEARF are only applicable to elastic Hermitian BEAM elements.

Notes for NWIDTH to NTHICK2:These parameters are used for the numerical integration in
the beam cross-section. Numerical integration is used when a nonlinear material is selected.
Newton-Cotes integration is used. 0 means that ADINA automatically chooses the number of
integration points. Other possible choices are 1, 3, 5, 7.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CROSS-SECTION FIRST LAST

DELETE CROSS-SECTION FIRST LAST

7-190 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 7.2 Cross-sections / layers

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-191

Chap. 7 Model definition CROSS-SECTION I

CROSS-SECTION I NAME WIDTH1 HEIGHT WIDTH2 THICK1 THICK2

THICK3 SC TC TORFAC SSHEARF TSHEARF NFLANGE1
NWEB NFLANGE2 NTHICK1 NTHICK2 NTHICK3
ASSUMPTIONS WAGNER TORFORMULA STANDARD

CROSS-SECTION I defines an I cross-section which can be used to describe the cross-

sectional characteristics of a Hermitian BEAM element.

WIDTH2

THICK3

THICK2

HEIGHT
t

centroid
s

THICK1

WIDTH1

NAME [(current highest cross-section label number) + 1]

Label number of the cross-section to be defined.

WIDTH1
HEIGHT
WIDTH2
THICK1
THICK2
THICK3
The dimensions of the I cross-section. See Figure.

7-192 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CROSS-SECTION I Sec. 7.2 Cross-sections / layers

SC [0.0]
TC [0.0]
Parameters used to increase the moments of inertia using the parallel axes theorem, see the
Theory and Modeling Guide. The centroid of the beam cross-section is not affected
by the choice of SC, TC.

TORFAC [1.0]
The torsional rigidity of the cross-section, corresponding to St. Venant torsion with free
warping, is multiplied by the factor TORFAC. (See Theory and Modeling Guide for details).

SSHEARF [0.0 (no s-direction shear effect)]

TSHEARF [0.0 (no t-direction shear effect)]
The shear areas corresponding to the beam s and t directions are calculated as the total
cross-sectional area multiplied by the factors SSHEARF, TSHEARF, respectively.

NFLANGE1 [0]
Number of integration points along the length of the bottom flange (in the WIDTH1 direc-
tion). {0/1/3/5/7}

NWEB [0]
Number of integration points along the length of the web. {0/1/3/5/7}

NFLANGE2 [0]
Number of integration points along the length of the bottom flange (in the WIDTH2 direc-
tion). {0/1/3/5/7}

NTHICK1 [0]
Number of integration points through the thickness of the bottom flange (in the THICK1
direction). {0/1/3/5/7}

NTHICK2 [0]
Number of integration points through the thickness of the web (in the THICK2 direction).
{0/1/3/5/7}

NTHICK3 [0]
Number of integration points through the thickness of the top flange (in the THICK3 direc-
tion).{0/1/3/5/7}

ASSUMPTIONS [CURRENT]
This parameter applies only when this cross-section is used with the standard Hermitian
beam element. If ASSUMPTIONS = V89, the 8.9 program version assumptions are used; if

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-193

Chap. 7 Model definition CROSS-SECTION I

ASSUMPTIONS = CURRENT, the current program version assumptions are used. See the
Theory and Modeling Guide. {CURRENT/V89}

WAGNER [DEFAULT]
If WAGNER=YES, the Wagner effect is included in large displacement analysis; if WAGNER =
NO, the Wagner effect is not included in large displacement analysis. If WAGNER =
DEFAULT, the Wagner effect is included in large displacement analysis, unless the standard
beam element is used with ASSUMPTIONS = V89. {DEFAULT/YES}

TORFORMULA [DEFAULT]
If TORFORMULA = F1, formula F1 is used to calculate the torsional rigidity; if
TORFORMULA = F2, formula F2 is used to calculate the torsional rigidity; if TORFORMULA
= FW, formula FW is used to calculate the torsional rigidity; if TORFORMULA = DEFAULT,
then FW is used unless the standard beam element is used with ASSUMPTIONS = V89. See
the Theory and Modeling Guide for the definitions of formulas F1, F2, FW.
{DEFAULT/F1/F2/FW}

STANDARD [NO]
If STANDARD = YES, this cross-section can be used in conjunction either with the standard
beam element or the warping beam element; if STANDARD = NO, this cross-section can be
used only with the warping beam element. {NO/YES}

Notes for SC, TC, TORFAC, SSHEARF, TSHEARF: The parameters SC, TC, TORFAC,
SSHEARF, TSHEARF are only applicable to elastic Hermitian BEAM elements.

Notes for NFLANGE1 to NTHICK3: These parameters are used for the numerical integration
in the beam cross-section. Numerical integration is used when a nonlinear material is selected.
Newton-Cotes integration is used. 0 means that ADINA automatically chooses the number of
integration points. Other possible choices are 1, 3, 5, 7.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CROSS-SECTION FIRST LAST

DELETE CROSS-SECTION FIRST LAST

7-194 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 7.2 Cross-sections / layers

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-195

Chap. 7 Model definition CROSS-SECTION L

CROSS-SECTION L NAME WIDTH HEIGHT THICK1 THICK2 SC TC

TORFAC SSHEARF TSHEARF NLEG1 NLEG2 NTHICK1
NTHICK2 ASSUMPTIONS WAGNER TORFORMULA
STANDARD

CROSS-SECTION L defines an L cross-section which can be used to describe the cross-

sectional characteristics of an Hermitian BEAM element.

THICK1

HEIGHT
t

centroid

s
THICK2

NAME [(current highest cross-section label number) + 1]

Label number of the cross-section to be defined.

WIDTH1
HEIGHT
THICK1
THICK2
The dimensions of the L cross-section. See Figure.

SC [0.0]
TC [0.0]
Parameters used to increase the moments of inertia using the parallel axes theorem, see the
Theory and Modeling Guide. The centroid of the beam cross-section is not affected
by the choice of SC, TC.

7-196 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CROSS-SECTION L Sec. 7.2 Cross-sections / layers

TORFAC [1.0]
The torsional rigidity of the cross-section, corresponding to St. Venant torsion with free
warping, is multiplied by the factor TORFAC. (See Theory and Modeling Guide for details).

SSHEARF [0.0 (no s-direction shear effect)]

TSHEARF [0.0 (no t-direction shear effect)]
The shear areas corresponding to the beam s and t directions are calculated as the total
cross-sectional area multiplied by the factors SSHEARF, TSHEARF, respectively.

NLEG1 [0]
Number of integration points along the length of the vertical leg (in the HEIGHT direction).
{0/1/3/5/7}

NLEG2 [0]
Number of integration points along the length of the horizontal leg (in the WIDTH direction).
{0/1/3/5/7}

NTHICK1 [0]
Number of integration points through the thickness of the vertical leg (in the THICK1
direction). {0/1/3/5/7}

NTHICK2 [0]
Number of integration points through the thickness of the horizontal leg (in the THICK2
direction). {0/1/3/5/7}

ASSUMPTIONS [CURRENT]
This parameter applies only when this cross-section is used with the standard Hermitian
beam element. If ASSUMPTIONS = V89, the 8.9 program version assumptions are used; if
ASSUMPTIONS = CURRENT, the current program version assumptions are used. See the
Theory and Modeling Guide. {CURRENT/V89}

WAGNER [DEFAULT]
If WAGNER=YES, the Wagner effect is included in large displacement analysis; if WAGNER =
NO, the Wagner effect is not included in large displacement analysis. If WAGNER =
DEFAULT, the Wagner effect is included in large displacement analysis, unless the standard
beam element is used with ASSUMPTIONS = V89. {DEFAULT/YES}

TORFORMULA [DEFAULT]
If TORFORMULA = F1, formula F1 is used to calculate the torsional rigidity; if
TORFORMULA = F2, formula F2 is used to calculate the torsional rigidity; if TORFORMULA
= FW, formula FW is used to calculate the torsional rigidity; if TORFORMULA = DEFAULT,

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-197

Chap. 7 Model definition CROSS-SECTION L

then FW is used unless the standard beam element is used with ASSUMPTIONS = V89. See
the Theory and Modeling Guide for the definitions of formulas F1, F2, FW.
{DEFAULT/F1/F2/FW}

STANDARD [NO]
If STANDARD = YES, this cross-section can be used in conjunction either with the standard
beam element or the warping beam element; if STANDARD = NO, this cross-section can be
used only with the warping beam element. {NO/YES}

Notes for SC, TC, TORFAC, SSHEARF, TSHEARF: The parameters SC, TC, TORFAC,
SSHEARF, TSHEARF are only applicable to elastic Hermitian BEAM elements.

Notes for NLEG1 to NTHICK2: These parameters are used for the numerical integration in the
beam cross-section. Numerical integration is used when a nonlinear material is selected.
Newton-Cotes integration is used. 0 means that ADINA automatically chooses the number of
integration points. Other possible choices are 1, 3, 5, 7.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CROSS-SECTION FIRST LAST

DELETE CROSS-SECTION FIRST LAST

7-198 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 7.2 Cross-sections / layers

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-199

Chap. 7 Model definition CROSS-SECTION PIPE

CROSS-SECTION PIPE NAME DIAMETER THICKNESS SC TC

TORFAC SSHEARF TSHEARF SOLID

CROSS-SECTION PIPE defines a pipe cross-section which can be used to describe the cross-
sectional characteristics of a BEAM or PIPE element.

NAME [(current highest cross-section label number) + 1]

Label number of the cross-section to be defined.

S
ES
N
K
IC
TH
t

centroid

DIAMETER

DIAMETER
THICKNESS
The diameter and thickness dimensions, respectively, of the pipe cross-section. See Figure.

SC [0.0]
TC [0.0]
Parameters used to increase the moments of inertia using the parallel axes theorem, see the
Theory and Modeling Guide. The centroid of the beam cross-section is not affected
by the choice of SC, TC.

7-200 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CROSS-SECTION PIPE Sec. 7.2 Cross-sections / layers

TORFAC [1.0]
The torsional rigidity of the cross-section, corresponding to St. Venant torsion with free
warping, is multiplied by the factor TORFAC. (See Theory and Modeling Guide for details).

SSHEARF [0.0 (no s-direction shear effect)]

TSHEARF [0.0 (no t-direction shear effect)]
The shear areas corresponding to the beam s and t directions are calculated as the total
cross-sectional area multiplied by the factors SSHEARF, TSHEARF, respectively.

SOLID [NO]
Indicates whether the cross section is solid, i.e. not hollow. If SOLID=YES, THICKNESS
input is ignored and the thickness is set to half the diameter value. {YES/NO}

Notes for SC, TC, TORFAC, SSHEARF, TSHEARF: The parameters SC, TC, TORFAC,
SSHEARF, TSHEARF are only applicable to elastic Hermitian BEAM elements.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CROSS-SECTION FIRST LAST

DELETE CROSS-SECTION FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-201

Chap. 7 Model definition CROSS-SECTION RECTANGULAR

CROSS-SECTION RECTANGULAR NAME WIDTH HEIGHT SC TC

TORFAC SSHEARF TSHEARF
ISHEAR SQUARE

CROSS-SECTION RECTANGULAR defines a rectangular cross-section which can be used to

describe the cross-sectional characteristics of a BEAM or ISOBEAM element.

HEIGHT
s

centroid

WIDTH

NAME [(current highest cross-section label number) + 1]

Label number of the cross-section to be defined.

WIDTH
HEIGHT
The width and height dimensions, respectively, of the rectangular cross-section. See Figure.

SC [0.0]
TC [0.0]
Parameters used to increase the moments of inertia using the parallel axes theorem, see the
Theory and Modeling Guide. The centroid of the beam cross-section is not affected
by the choice of SC, TC.

7-202 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CROSS-SECTION RECTANGULAR Sec. 7.2 Cross-sections / layers

TORFAC [1.0]
The torsional rigidity of the cross-section, corresponding to St. Venant torsion with free
warping, is multiplied by the factor TORFAC. (See Theory and Modeling Guide for details).

SSHEARF [0.0 (no s-direction shear effect)]

TSHEARF [0.0 (no t-direction shear effect)]
The shear areas corresponding to the beam s and t directions are calculated as the total
cross-sectional area multiplied by the factors SSHEARF, TSHEARF, respectively.

ISHEAR [NO]
Indicates whether transverse shear effects are to be included. {YES/NO}

SQUARE [NO]
Indicates whether the cross section shape is square. If SQUARE=YES, HEIGHT input is
ignored and the height is set equal to the width.{YES/NO}

Notes for SC, TC, TORFAC, SSHEARF, TSHEARF: The parameters SC, TC, TORFAC,
SSHEARF, TSHEARF are only applicable to elastic Hermitian BEAM elements.

Note for ISHEAR: The parameter ISHEAR is applicable only to plastic Hermitian BEAM
elements.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CROSS-SECTION FIRST LAST

DELETE CROSS-SECTION FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-203

Chap. 7 Model definition CROSS-SECTION U

CROSS-SECTION U NAME WIDTH HEIGHT THICK1 THICK2 SC TC

TORFAC SSHEARF TSHEARF NFLANGE NWEB
NTHICK1 NTHICK2 ASSUMPTIONS WAGNER
TORFORMULA STANDARD

CROSS-SECTION U defines a U cross-section which can be used to describe the cross-

sectional characteristics of an Hermitian BEAM element.
THICK2

t
centroid
s
HEIGHT

THICK1

WIDTH

NAME [(current highest cross-section label number) + 1]

Label number of the cross-section to be defined.

WIDTH
HEIGHT
THICK1
THICK2
The dimensions of the U cross-section. See Figure.

SC [0.0]
TC [0.0]
Parameters used to increase the moments of inertia using the parallel axes theorem, see the

7-204 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CROSS-SECTION U Sec. 7.2 Cross-sections / layers

Theory and Modeling Guide. The centroid of the beam cross-section is not affected
by the choice of SC, TC.

TORFAC [1.0]
The torsional rigidity of the cross-section, corresponding to St. Venant torsion with free
warping, is multiplied by the factor TORFAC. (See Theory and Modeling Guide for details).

SSHEARF [0.0 (no s-direction shear effect)]

TSHEARF [0.0 (no t-direction shear effect)]
The shear areas corresponding to the beam s and t directions are calculated as the total
cross-sectional area multiplied by the factors SSHEARF, TSHEARF, respectively.

NFLANGE [0]
Number of integration points along the length of the flanges (in the WIDTH direction). {0/
1/3/5/7}

NWEB [0]
Number of integration points along the length of the web (in the HEIGHT direction). {0/1/
3/5/7}

NTHICK1 [0]
Number of integration points through the thickness of the web (in the THICK1 direction).
{0/1/3/5/7}

NTHICK2 [0]
Number of integration points through the thickness of each flange (in the THICK2 direction).
{0/1/3/5/7}

ASSUMPTIONS [CURRENT]
This parameter applies only when this cross-section is used with the standard Hermitian
beam element. If ASSUMPTIONS = V89, the 8.9 program version assumptions are used; if
ASSUMPTIONS = CURRENT, the current program version assumptions are used. See the
Theory and Modeling Guide. {CURRENT/V89}

WAGNER [DEFAULT]
If WAGNER=YES, the Wagner effect is included in large displacement analysis; if WAGNER =
NO, the Wagner effect is not included in large displacement analysis. If WAGNER =
DEFAULT, the Wagner effect is included in large displacement analysis, unless the standard
beam element is used with ASSUMPTIONS = V89. {DEFAULT/YES}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-205

Chap. 7 Model definition

TORFORMULA [DEFAULT]
If TORFORMULA = F1, formula F1 is used to calculate the torsional rigidity; if
TORFORMULA = F2, formula F2 is used to calculate the torsional rigidity; if TORFORMULA
= FW, formula FW is used to calculate the torsional rigidity; if TORFORMULA = DEFAULT,
then FW is used unless the standard beam element is used with ASSUMPTIONS = V89. See
the Theory and Modeling Guide for the definitions of formulas F1, F2, FW.
{DEFAULT/F1/F2/FW}

STANDARD [NO]
If STANDARD = YES, this cross-section can be used in conjunction either with the standard
beam element or the warping beam element; if STANDARD = NO, this cross-section can be
used only with the warping beam element. {NO/YES}

Notes for SC, TC, TORFAC, SSHEARF, TSHEARF: The parameters SC, TC, TORFAC,
SSHEARF, TSHEARF are only applicable to elastic Hermitian BEAM elements.

Notes for NFLANGE to NTHICK2: These parameters are used for the numerical integration in
the beam cross-section. Numerical integration is used when a nonlinear material is selected.
Newton-Cotes integration is used. 0 means that ADINA automatically chooses the number of
integration points. Other possible choices are 1, 3, 5, 7.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CROSS-SECTION FIRST LAST

DELETE CROSS-SECTION FIRST LAST

7-206 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CROSS-SECTION PROPERTIES Sec. 7.2 Cross-sections / layers

CROSS-SECTION PROPERTIES NAME RINERTIA SINERTIA TINERTIA AREA

SAREA TAREA CTOFFSET CSOFFSET STINERTIA
SRINERTIA TRINERTIA WINERTIA WRINERTIA
DRINERTIA RRINERTIA

CROSS-SECTION PROPERTIES defines a general cross-section in terms of geometric

properties. This cross-section definition can be used to describe the cross-sectional charac-
teristics of an elastic Hermitian BEAM element. Please see the Theory and Modeling Guide,
Section 2.4.6.

NAME [(current highest cross-section label number) + 1]

Label number of the cross-section to be defined.

RINERTIA
St. Venant torsional constant.

SINERTIA
Area moment of inertia Iss about the cross-section s-axis.

TINERTIA
Area moment of inertia Itt about the cross-section t-axis.

AREA
Cross-sectional area.

SAREA [0.0]
TAREA [0.0]
Effective shear areas in the s and t-directions. These are actual shear areas, with units of
length squared.

CTOFFSET [0.0]
t-coordinate of the shear center of the cross-section with respect to the centroid of the cross-
section (zero if section is symmetric about the s-axis).

CSOFFSET [0.0]
s-coordinate of the shear center of the cross-section with respect to the centroid of the cross-
section(zero if section is symmetric about the t-axis).

STINERTIA [0.0]
Product of inertia term Ist causing coupling between bending about the s-axis and bending
about the t-axis (zero if section is symmetric about either s- or t-axis).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-207

Chap. 7 Model definition CROSS-SECTION PROPERTIES

SRINERTIA [0.0]
Wagner effect constant A25, includes coupling between twist and bending about the t-axis.

TRINERTIA [0.0]
Wagner effect constant A35, includes coupling between twist and bending about the s-axis.

WINERTIA [0.0]
Warping constant.{0}

WRINERTIA [0.0]
Wagner effect constant A45, includes coupling between twist and warping.

DRINERTIA [0.0]
Wagner effect constant A55 , includes nonlinear twist effect. {0}

RRINERTIA [0.0]
Wagner effect constant A15, includes coupling between twist and axial deformations. {0}

Notes:

1. Parameters CSOFFSET, CTOFFSET, STINERTIA are ignored in the standard beam, for
versions 8.9 and earlier. However, these parameters are included in the standard beam for
version 9.0.

2. The definitions of terms SRINERTIA, TRINERTIA, WRINERTIA, DRINERTIA have

changed slightly between versions 8.9 and 9.0. In addition, term RRINERTIA is added in
version 9.0. Please see the Theory and Modeling Guide for the definitions of these
terms.

Therefore, input data set up for versions 8.9 and earlier may need to be modified for use
in versions 9.0 and later.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CROSS-SECTION FIRST LAST

DELETE CROSS-SECTION FIRST LAST

7-208 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CROSS-SECTION PROPERTIES Sec. 7.2 Cross-sections / layers

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-209

Chap. 7 Model definition LAYER

LAYER SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP PLY-DATA

namei materiali tinti pthicki maxesi phii iaxesi phiii printi savei intloci
failurei plydatai tdeathi

LAYER defines the control parameters for each surface layer for use by multi-layer shell
elements.

layer 3

layer 2

layer 1
thickness

midsurface

midsurface
node

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure label number]

Label number of the substructure.

GROUP [current element group]

The label number of the element group.

PLY-DATA [NO]
This flag determines whether ply data defined by the PLY-DATA command are used to
calculate layer thicknesses. {YES/NO}

YES The thickness of each layer are calculated using ply-datai.

7-210 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LAYER Sec. 7.2 Cross-sections / layers

NO The thickness of each layer are calculated using pthicki.

namei
Layer label number. {1 namei NLAYER, NLAYER = total number of layers, see EGROUP
SHELL}

materiali [1]
Material label number used for layer namei.

tinti [2]
Integration order for the through-thickness direction (local t-direction) in layer namei.

2 tinti 6 Gauss formulas.

-7 tinti -3 Closed Newton-Cotes formulas.

pthicki [(1./NLAYER) 100]

Percentage of element thickness assigned to this layer. (NLAYER is the total number of
layers, see EGROUP SHELL).

maxesi [0]
Material axes for orthotropic model, for layer namei. <not currently used>

phii [0.0]
Offset angle for orthotropic model, for layer namei.

iaxesi [0]
Initial strain axes, for layer namei. <not currently used>

phiii [0.0]
Offset angle for initial strains, for layer namei.

printi [DEFAULT]
This parameter controls the printing of element results for the layer namei. {YES / NO /
STRAINS / DEFAULT}

YES Print the element results for layer namei.

NO No results are printed for layer namei.

STRAINS Strains are printed in addition to the stresses for layer namei.

DEFAULT Layer printing is governed by element data commands.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-211

Chap. 7 Model definition LAYER

savei [DEFAULT]
This parameter controls the saving of element results for the layer namei. {YES / NO /
DEFAULT}

YES Save the element results on the porthole file for layer namei.

NO No saving of results for layer namei.

DEFAULT Layer saving is governed by element data commands.

intloci [DEFAULT]
This parameter controls the printing of integration point coordinates for the layer namei.
{YES / NO / DEFAULT}

YES Print integration point (global) coordinates for layer namei.

NO No printing of integration point data for layer namei.

DEFAULT Printout of integration point data is governed by element data

commands.

failurei [0]
The label number of failure criterion. (See FAILURE ). A zero value indicates no failure
criterion for layer namei.

plydatai
The label number of the command PLY-DATA, from which the layer thickness is calculated. If
the parameter PLY-DATA = NO, or number of layers is equal 1, this parameter will be ignored.

tdeathi
Time of death of the layer namei.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LAYER FIRST LAST

DELETELAYER FIRST LAST

7-212 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
PLY-DATA Sec. 7.2 Cross-sections / layers

PLY-DATA NAME WEIGHT DENSITY FRACTION

Command PLY-DATA defines the layer thickness for a fiber-matrix composite. It is used in
definition of shell elements by the LAYER command.

NAME [(current highest ply-data label number) + 1]

Label number of the ply-data to be defined. If the label number of an existing ply-data is
given, then the previous ply-data definition is overwritten.

WEIGHT
Weight per unit surface of the fiber.

DENSITY
Density of the fiber.

FRACTION
Fiber volume fraction of the fiber-matrix compound.

Auxiliary commands

LIST PLY-DATA FIRST LAST

DELETE PLY-DATA FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-213

Chap. 7 Model definition LINE-ELEMDATA TRUSS

LINE-ELEMDATA TRUSS

linei materiali areai printi savei tbirthi tdeathi gapwidthi intloci epsini

EDGE-ELEMDATA TRUSS BODY

edgei materiali areai printi savei tbirthi tdeathi gapwidthi intloci epsini

LINE-ELEMDATA TRUSS assigns data for TRUSS elements to geometry lines.

EDGE-ELEMDATA TRUSS assigns data for TRUSS elements to solid geometry edges.

BODY [current active BODY]

The geometry body label number.

linei
Line label number.

edgei
Edge label number (for BODY).

materiali [0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the line/ edge
will take the default material for the host element group.

areai [0]
Cross-sectional area for each TRUSS element on the line/edge.

printi [DEFAULT]

YES Print results for TRUSS elements on line/edge.

NO No results are printed for TRUSS elements on the line/edge.

DEFAULT Element printing is governed by PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT.

savei [DEFAULT]

YES Save results for TRUSS elements on line/edge.

NO No saving of results for TRUSS elements on the line/edge.

7-214 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE-ELEMDATA TRUSS Sec. 7.3 Element properties

DEFAULT Saving of element results is governed by PORTHOLE

SAVEDEFAULT.

tbirthi [0.0]
The time of element birth.

tdeathi [0.0]
The time of element death.

gapwidthi [0.0]
Gap width for each TRUSS element on the line/edge. A zero value indicates no gap.

intloci [NO]
Indicates whether to print element integration point coordinates (global) in the undeformed
configuration. {YES/NO}

epsini [0.0]
Initial strain for each TRUSS element on the line/edge.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LINE-ELEMDATA TRUSS FIRST LAST

DELETE LINE-ELEMDATA TRUSS FIRST LAST

LIST EDGE-ELEMDATA TRUSS FIRST LAST

DELETE EDGE-ELEMDATA TRUSS FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-215

Chap. 7 Model definition SURF-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID

SURF-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID

surfacei materiali betai printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci gammai

FACE-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID BODY

facei materiali betai printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci gammai

SURF-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID assigns data for TWODSOLID elements to geometry

surfaces.

FACE-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID assigns data for TWODSOLID elements to solid geometry

faces.

BODY [current active BODY]

The geometry body label number.

surfacei
Surface label number.

facei
Face label number (for BODY).

materiali [0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the surface/
face will take the default material for the host element group.

betai [0.0]
Material angle, in degrees, for each TWODSOLID element on the surface/face. Used in
conjunction with orthotropic material types.

printi [DEFAULT]

YES Print results as requested by EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No results are printed for TWODSOLID elements on the surface/face.

STRAINS In addition to stresses, strains are printed.

DEFAULT Printout is governed by PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT.

7-216 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SURF-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID Sec. 7.3 Element properties

savei [DEFAULT]

YES Save, on the porthole file, element results as requested by EGROUP

RESULTS.

NO No saving of results for TWODSOLID elements on the surface/face.

DEFAULT Saving of element results is governed by PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT.

tbirthi [0.0]
The time of element birth.

tdeathi [0.0]
The time of element death.

intloci [NO]
Specifies whether element integration point (global) coordinates, in the undeformed configu-
ration are printed. {YES/NO}

gammai [0.0]
Initial strain angle, in degrees, used in conjunction with any definition of element initial
strains.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SURF-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID FIRST LAST

DELETE SURF-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID FIRST LAST

LIST FACE-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID FIRST LAST

DELETE FACE-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-217

Chap. 7 Model definition VOL-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID

VOL-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID

volumei materiali maxesi printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci maxesii ngeomi

BODY-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID

bodyi materiali maxesi printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intlocii maxesii ngeomi

VOL-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID assigns data for THREEDSOLID elements to geometry

volumes.

BODY-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID assigns data for THREEDSOLID elements to solid

geometry bodies.

volumei
Volume label number.

bodyi
Body label number.

materiali [0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated in the volume/
body will take the default material for the host element group.

maxesi [0]
Material axes set for each THREEDSOLID element in the volume/body. Used in conjunction
with orthotropic material types.

printi [DEFAULT]

YES Print element results as requested by EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No results are printed for THREEDSOLID elements in the

volume/body.

STRAINS Strains as well as stresses are printed for THREEDSOLID

elements in the volume/body.

DEFAULT Element printing is governed by PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT.

7-218 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
VOL-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID Sec. 7.3 Element properties

savei [DEFAULT]

YES Save, on the porthole file, element results as requested by

EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No saving of results for THREEDSOLID elements in the volume/

body.

DEFAULT Saving of element results is governed by command

PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT.

tbirthi [0.0]
The time of element birth.

tdeathi [0.0]
The time of element death.

intloci [NO]
Determines whether or not element integration point (global) coordinates in the undeformed
configuration are printed. {YES/NO}

maxesii [0]
Initial strain axes set for each THREEDSOLID element in the volume/body. Used in conjunc-
tion with element initial strains.

ngeomi
This parameter is obsolete.

Auxiliary commands

LIST VOL-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID FIRST LAST

DELETE VOL-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID FIRST LAST

LIST BODY-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID FIRST LAST

DELETE BODY-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-219

Chap. 7 Model definition LINE-ELEMDATA BEAM

LINE-ELEMDATA BEAM

linei materiali sectioni endreleasei printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci epsini,
moment-ri moment-si moment-ti rigid-starti rigid-endi

EDGE-ELEMDATA BEAM BODY

edgei materiali sectioni endreleasei printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci epsini,
moment-ri moment-si moment-ti rigid-starti rigid-endi

LINE-ELEMDATA BEAM assigns data for BEAM elements to geometry lines.

EDGE-ELEMDATA BEAM assigns data for BEAM elements to solid geometry edges.

BODY [current active BODY]

Body label number

linei
Line label number.

edgei
Edge label number.

materiali [0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the line/edge
will take the default material for the host element group.

sectioni [0]
Cross-section label number for each BEAM element on the line/edge. See CROSS-SECTION.

endreleasei [0]
End-release condition label number for each BEAM element on the line/edge. See
ENDRELEASE.

printi [DEFAULT]

YES Print element results as requested by EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No results are printed for BEAM elements on the line/edge.

DEFAULT Element printing is governed by PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT.

7-220 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE-ELEMDATA BEAM Sec. 7.3 Element properties

savei [DEFAULT]

YES Save, on the porthole file, element results as requested by

EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No saving of results for BEAM elements on the line/edge.

DEFAULT Saving of element results is governed by command

PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT.

tbirthi [0.0]
The time of element birth.

tdeathi [0.0]
The time of element death.

intloci [NO]
Indicates whether to print element integration point (global) coordinates in the undeformed
configuration. {YES/NO}

epsini [0.0]
Initial axial strain for each BEAM element on the line/edge, or initial force if BEAM
OPTION=BOLT is used.

moment-ri
moment-si
moment-ti
<not currently active>

rigid-starti [0.0]
Length of the rigid end-zone connected to the start-point (at u=0.0) of the geometry line/
edge. Note that this zone can span at most one element meshed onto the line.

rigid-endi [0.0]
Length of the rigid end-zone connected to the end-point (at u=1.0) of the geometry line/edge.
Note that this zone can span at most one element meshed onto the line.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LINE-ELEMDATA BEAM FIRST LAST

DELETE LINE-ELEMDATA BEAM FIRST LAST

LIST EDGE-ELEMDATA BEAM FIRST LAST

DELETE EDGE-ELEMDATA BEAM FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-221

Chap. 7 Model definition LINE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM

LINE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM

linei materiali sectioni printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci epaxli ephoopi

EDGE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM BODY

edgei materiali sectioni printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci epaxli ephoopi

LINE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM assigns data for ISOBEAM elements to geometry lines.

EDGE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM assigns data for ISOBEAM elements to solid geometry edges.

BODY [current active BODY]

Body label number

linei
Line label number.

edgei
Edge label number (for BODY).

materiali [0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the line/edge
will take the default material for the host element group.

sectioni [0]
Cross-section label number for each ISOBEAM element on the line/edge. See CROSS-SEC-
TION.

printi [DEFAULT]

YES Print element results as requested by EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No results are printed for ISOBEAM elements on the line/edge.

DEFAULT Element printing is governed by PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT.

savei [DEFAULT]

YES Save, on the porthole file, element results as requested by

EGROUP RESULTS.

7-222 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM Sec. 7.3 Element properties

NO No saving of results for ISOBEAM elements on the line/edge.

DEFAULT Saving of element results is governed by command

PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT.

tbirthi [0.0]
The time of element birth.

tdeathi [0.0]
The time of element death.

intloci [NO]
Indicates whether to print element integration point (global) coordinates in the undeformed
configuration. {YES/NO}

epaxli [0.0]
Initial axial strain for each ISOBEAM element on the line/edge.

ephoopi [0.0]
Initial hoop strain for each ISOBEAM element on the line/edge.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LINE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM FIRST LAST

DELETE LINE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM FIRST LAST

LIST EDGE-ELEMDATA ISBEAM FIRST LAST

DELETE EDGE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-223

Chap. 7 Model definition SURF-ELEMDATA PLATE

SURF-ELEMDATA PLATE

surfacei materiali betai printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci gammai, eps11i eps22i
eps12i flex11i flex22i flex12i

FACE-ELEMDATA PLATE BODY

facei materiali betai printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci gammai, eps11i eps22i
eps12i flex11i flex22i flex12i

SURF-ELEMDATA PLATE assigns data for PLATE elements to geometry surfaces.

FACE-ELEMDATA PLATE assigns data for PLATE elements to solid geometry faces.

BODY [current active BODY]

Body label number

surfacei
Surface label number.

facei
Face label number (for BODY).

materiali [0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the surface/
facve will take the default material for the host element group.

betai [0.0]
Material angle, in degrees, for each PLATE element on the surface/face. Used in conjunction
with orthotropic material types.

printi [DEFAULT]

YES Print element results as requested by EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No results are printed for PLATE elements on the surface/face.

DEFAULT Printout is governed by PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT.

savei [DEFAULT]

YES Save, on the porthole file, element results as requested by

EGROUP RESULTS.

7-224 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SURF-ELEMDATA PLATE Sec. 7.3 Element properties

NO No saving of results for PLATE elements on the surface/face.

DEFAULT Saving of element results is governed by command

PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT.

tbirthi [0.0]
The time of element birth.

tdeathi [0.0]
The time of element death.

intloci [NO]
Specifies whether or not element integration point (global) coordinates, in the undeformed
configuration, together with direction cosines of stress reference axes are printed. {YES/NO}

gammai [0.0]
Initial strain angle, in degrees, used in conjunction with any definition of element initial
strains.

eps11i [0.0]
eps22i [0.0]
eps12i [0.0]
Initial membrane strain components in the element, assumed constant within the element.

flex11i [0.0]
flex22i [0.0]
flex12i [0.0]
Initial flexural strain components in the element, assumed constant within the element.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SURF-ELEMDATA PLATE FIRST LAST

DELETE SURF-ELEMDATA PLATE FIRST LAST

LIST FACE-ELEMDATA PLATE FIRST LAST

DELETE FACE-ELEMDATA PLATE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-225

Chap. 7 Model definition SURF-ELEMDATA SHELL

SURF-ELEMDATA SHELL

surfacei materiali betai printi savei tbirthi tdeathi ithsi intloci gammai,
eps11i, eps22i eps12i eps13i eps23i geps11i geps22i geps12i geps13i, geps23i

FACE-ELEMDATA SHELL BODY

facei materiali betai printi savei tbirthi tdeathi ithsi intloci gammai eps11i,
eps22i eps12i eps13i eps23i geps11i geps22i geps12i geps13i geps23i

SURF-ELEMDATA SHELL assigns data for SHELL elements to geometry surfaces.

FACE-ELEMDATA SHELL assigns data for SHELL elements to solid geometry faces.

BODY [current active BODY]

Body label number

surfacei
Surface label number.

facei
Face label number (for BODY).

materiali [0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the surface/
face will take the default material for the host element group.

betai [0.0]
Material angle, in degrees, for each SHELL element on the surface/face. Used in conjunction
with orthotropic material types.

printi [DEFAULT]

YES Print results as requested by EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No results are printed for SHELL elements on the surface/face.

STRAINS In addition to stresses, strains are printed.

DEFAULT Printout is governed by PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT.

7-226 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SURF-ELEMDATA SHELL Sec. 7.3 Element properties

savei [DEFAULT]

YES Save, on the porthole file, element results as requested

by EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No saving of results for SHELL elements on the surface/face.

DEFAULT Saving of element results is governed by command

PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT.

tbirthi [0.0]
The time of element birth.

tdeathi [0.0]
The time of element death.

ithsi [NO]
Specifies whether or not the thick shell assumption is made for transverse shear behavior of
SHELL elements on the surface/face. {YES/NO}

intloci [NO]
Specifies whether or not element integration point (global) coordinates, in the undeformed
configuration, together with direction cosines of stress reference axes are printed. {YES/NO}

gammai [0.0]
Initial strain angle, in degrees, used in conjunction with any definition of element initial
strains.

epsjki (jk = 11, 22, 12, 13, 23) [0.0]

Initial strain components in the element, assumed constant within the element.

gepsjki (jk = 11, 22, 12, 13, 23) [0.0]

Initial strain gradient components in the element, assumed constant within the element.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SURF-ELEMDATA SHELL FIRST LAST

DELETE SURF-ELEMDATA SHELL FIRST LAST

LIST FACE-ELEMDATA SHELL FIRST LAST

DELETE FACE-ELEMDATA SHELL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-227

Chap. 7 Model definition ELAYER

ELAYER GROUP

elementi layeri materiali

ELAYER assigns material to individual elements on different layers for shell elements.

GROUP [Current element group]

The label number of the element group.

elementi
The element label number.

layeri
The layer label number.

materiali [1]
The material label number.

Auxiliary commands

LIST ELAYER GROUP

DELETE ELAYER GROUP

7-228 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ELAYER Sec. 7.3 Element properties

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-229

Chap. 7 Model definition LINE-ELEMDATA PIPE

LINE-ELEMDATA PIPE

linei materiali sectioni printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci epsini

EDGE-ELEMDATA PIPE BODY

edgei materiali sectioni printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci epsini

LINE-ELEMDATA PIPE assigns data for PIPE elements on geometry lines.

EDGE-ELEMDATA PIPE assigns data for PIPE elements on solid geometry edges.

BODY [current active BODY]

Body label number.

linei
Line label number.

edgei
Edge label number (for BODY).

materiali [0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the line/edge
will take the default material for the host element group.

sectioni [0]
Cross-section label number for each PIPE element on the line/edge. See CROSS- SECTION.

printi [DEFAULT]

YES Print element results as requested by EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No results are printed for PIPE elements on the line/edge.

DEFAULT Element printing is governed by PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT.

savei [DEFAULT]

YES Save, on the porthole file, element results as requested by

EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No saving of results for PIPE elements on the line/edge.

7-230 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE-ELEMDATA PIPE Sec. 7.3 Element properties

DEFAULT Saving of element results is governed by command

PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT.

tbirthi [0.0]
The time of element birth.

tdeathi [0.0]
The time of element death.

intloci [NO]
Indicates whether to print element integration point (global) coordinates in the undeformed
configuration. {YES/NO}

epsini [0.0]
Initial axial strain for each PIPE element on the line/edge.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LINE-ELEMDATA PIPE FIRST LAST

DELETE LINE-ELEMDATA PIPE FIRST LAST

LIST EDGE-ELEMDATA PIPE FIRST LAST

DELETE EDGE-ELEMDATA PIPE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-231

Chap. 7 Model definition LINE-ELEMDATA GENERAL

LINE-ELEMDATA GENERAL

linei mseti printi savei tbirthi tdeathi

EDGE-ELEMDATA GENERAL BODY

edgei mseti printi savei tbirthi tdeathi

SURF-ELEMDATA GENERAL

surfacei mseti printi savei tbirthi tdeathi

FACE-ELEMDATA GENERAL BODY

facei mseti printi savei tbirthi tdeathi

VOL-ELEMDATA GENERAL

volumei mseti printi savei tbirthi tdeathi

BODY-ELEMDATA GENERAL

bodyi mseti printi savei tbirthi tdeathi

LINE-ELEMDATA GENERAL assigns data for GENERAL elements on lines.

EDGE-ELEMDATA GENERAL assigns data for GENERAL elements to solid geometry edges.

SURF-ELEMDATA GENERAL assigns data for GENERAL elements to geometry surfaces

FACE-ELEMDATA GENERAL assigns data for GENERAL elements to solid geometry faces.

VOL-ELEMDATA GENERAL assigns data for GENERAL elements to geometry volumes.

BODY-ELEMDATA GENERAL assigns data for GENERAL elements to solid geometry bodies.

BODY [currently active BODY]

Body label number.

linei
Line label number.

7-232 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LINE-ELEMDATA GENERAL Sec. 7.3 Element properties

edgei
Edge label number (for BODY).

surfacei
Surface label number.

facei
Face label number (for BODY).

volumei
Volume label number.

bodyi
Body label number.

mseti [0]
Matrixset label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the geometry
will take the default matrixset for the host element group.

printi [DEFAULT]

YES Print element results as requested by EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No results are printed for GENERAL elements on the geometry.

DEFAULT Element printing is governed by PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT.

savei [DEFAULT]

YES Save, on the porthole file, element results as requested by

EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No saving of results for GENERAL elements on the geometry.

DEFAULT Saving of element results is governed by command

PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT.

tbirthi [0.0]
Element birth time.

tdeathi [0.0]
Element death time.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-233

Chap. 7 Model definition LINE-ELEMDATA GENERAL

Note: tbirthi < tdeathi, or tbirthi = tdeathi = 0.0

Auxiliary commands

LIST LINE-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST

DELETE LINE-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST

LIST EDGE-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST

DELETE EDGE-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST

LIST SURF-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST

DELETE SURF-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST

LIST FACE-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST

DELETE FACE-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST

LIST VOL-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST

DELETE VOL-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST

LIST BODY-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST

DELETE BODY-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST

7-234 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SURF-ELEMDATA FLUID2 Sec. 7.3 Element properties

SURF-ELEMDATA FLUID2

surfacei materiali printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci

FACE-ELEMDATA FLUID2 BODY

facei materiali printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci

SURF-ELEMDATA FLUID2 assigns data for FLUID2 elements on surfaces.

FACE-ELEMDATA FLUID2 assigns data for FLUID2 elements on solid geometry faces.

BODY [currently active BODY]

Body label number.

surfacei
Surface label number.

facei
Face label number (for BODY).

materiali [0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the surface/
face will take the default material for the host element group.

printi [DEFAULT]

YES Print element results as requested by EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No results are printed for FLUID2 elements on the surface/face.

DEFAULT Element printing is governed by PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT.

savei [DEFAULT]

YES Save, on the porthole file, element results as requested by

EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No saving of results for FLUID2 elements on the surface/face.

DEFAULT Saving of element results is governed by command

PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-235

Chap. 7 Model definition SURF-ELEMDATA FLUID2

tbirthi [0.0]
The time of element birth.

tdeathi [0.0]
The time of element death.

intloci [NO]
Indicates whether to print element integration point (global) coordinates in the undeformed
configuration. {YES/NO}

Auxiliary commands

LIST SURF-ELEMDATA FLUID2 FIRST LAST

DELETE SURF-ELEMDATA FLUID2 FIRST LAST

LIST FACE-ELEMDATA FLUID2 FIRST LAST

DELETE FACE-ELEMDATA FLUID2 FIRST LAST

7-236 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
VOL-ELEMDATA FLUID3 Sec. 7.3 Element properties

VOL-ELEMDATAFLUID3

volumei materiali printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci ngeomi

BODY-ELEMDATAFLUID3

bodyi materiali printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci ngeomi

VOL-ELEMDATA FLUID3 assigns data for FLUID3 elements in volumes.

BODY-ELEMDATA FLUID3 assigns data for FLUID3 elements in solid geometry bodies.

volumei
Volume label number.

bodyi
Body label number.

materiali [0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the volume/
body will take the default material for the host element group.

printi [DEFAULT]

YES Print element results as requested by EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No results are printed for FLUID3 elements on the volume/body.

DEFAULT Element printing is governed by PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT.

savei [DEFAULT]

YES Save, on the porthole file, element results as requested by

EGROUP RESULTS.

NO No saving of results for FLUID3 elements on the volume/body.

DEFAULT Saving of element results is governed by command

PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-237

Chap. 7 Model definition VOL-ELEMDATA FLUID3

tbirthi [0.0]
The time of element birth.

tdeathi [0.0]
The time of element death.

intloci [NO]
Indicates whether to print element integration point (global) coordinates in the undeformed
configuration. {YES/NO}

ngeomi
This parameter is obsolete.

Auxiliary commands

LIST VOL-ELEMDATAFLUID3 FIRST LAST

DELETE VOL-ELEMDATAFLUID3 FIRST LAST

LIST BODY-ELEMDATAFLUID3 FIRST LAST

DELETE BODY-ELEMDATAFLUID3 FIRST LAST

7-238 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATRIX STIFFNESS Sec. 7.3 Element properties

MATRIX STIFFNESS NAME ND

rowi ... kij ... (j = i, i + 1, ..., ND)

Defines a stiffness matrix for use by GENERAL elements. It may be referenced by

MATRIXSET.

NAME [(current highest matrix label number) + 1]

Label number of the matrix to be defined.

ND [1]
The total number of rows entered in this matrix, equal to the number of nodes in the general
element multiplied by the number of active degrees of freedom per node.
{1 ND 600}

rowi
Row index number for matrix.

k ij [0.0]
Entries in the stiffness matrix (kij = entry for row i, column j).

Note: Only the upper-diagonal part of the stiffness matrix is entered by this command.
Thus, for rowi, only the first (ND - i + 1) entries are used - the rest are ignored due
to symmetry.

Auxiliary Commands

LIST MATRIX FIRST LAST

DELETE MATRIX FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-239

Chap. 7 Model definition MATRIX MASS

MATRIX MASS NAME ND

rowi ... mij ... (j = i, (i + 1), ..., ND)

Defines a mass matrix for use by GENERAL elements. It may be referenced by MATRIXSET.

NAME [(current highest matrix label number) + 1]

Label number of the matrix to be defined.

ND [1]
The total number of rows entered in this matrix, equal to the number of nodes in the general
element multiplied by the number of active degrees of freedom per node.
{1 ND 600}

rowi
Row index number for matrix.

mij [0.0]
Entries in the mass matrix (mij = entry for row i, column j).

Note: For a consistent mass matrix, only the upper-diagonal part of the mass matrix is
entered by this command. Thus, for rowi, only the first (ND - i + 1) entries are
used. When the mass matrix is lumped, only the diagonal term, mij, should be
entered - the rest are ignored due to symmetry.

Auxiliary Commands

LIST MATRIX FIRST LAST

DELETE MATRIX FIRST LAST

7-240 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATRIX DAMPING Sec. 7.3 Element properties

MATRIX DAMPING NAME ND

rowi ... cij ... (j = i, (i + 1), ..., ND)

Defines a damping matrix for use by GENERAL elements. It may be referenced by

MATRIXSET.

NAME [(current highest matrix label number) + 1]

Label number of the matrix to be defined.

ND [1]
The total number of rows entered in this matrix, equal to the number of nodes in the general
element multiplied by the number of active degrees of freedom per node.
{1 ND 600}

rowi
Row index number for matrix.

cij [0.0]
Entries in the damping matrix (cij = entry for row i, column j).

Note: Only the upper-diagonal part of the damping matrix is entered by this command.
Thus, for rowi only the first (ND - i + 1) entries are used, the rest are ignored due
to symmetry.

Auxiliary Commands

LIST MATRIX FIRST LAST

DELETE MATRIX FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-241

Chap. 7 Model definition MATRIX STRESS

MATRIX STRESS NAME NS ND

rowi ... sij ... (i=1NS; j=1ND)

Defines a stress matrix for use by GENERAL elements. It may be referenced by MATRIXSET.

NAME [(current highest matrix label number) + 1]

Label number of the matrix to be defined.

NS [1]
The total number rows in the matrix, equal to the number of stress components.
{1 NS 60}

ND [1]
The number of nodes in the general element multiplied by the number of active degrees of
freedom per node. {1 ND 600}

rowi
Row index number.

s ij [0.0]
Entries in the stress-transformation matrix (sij = entry for row i, column j).

Note: The full matrix should be entered - no symmetry is assumed.

Auxiliary Commands

LIST MATRIX FIRST LAST

DELETE MATRIX FIRST LAST

7-242 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATRIXSET Sec. 7.3 Element properties

MATRIXSET NAME STIFFNESS MASS DAMPING STRESS

Defines a matrixset of stiffness, mass, damping and stress-transformation label numbers for
general elements. One stiffness, one mass, one damping and one stress-transformation label
number are grouped into a matrix set, which can be associated with the elements of an
EGROUP GENERAL element group through its MATRIXSET parameter.

NAME [(current highest matrix label number) + 1]

Label number of the matrixset to be defined.

STIFFNESS [0]
Label number of stiffness matrix defined by MATRIX STIFFNESS.

MASS [0]
Label number of mass matrix defined by MATRIX MASS.

DAMPING [0]
Label number of damping matrix defined by MATRIX DAMPING.

STRESS [0]
Label number of stress-transformation matrix defined by MATRIX STRESS.

Auxiliary commands

LIST MATRIXSET FIRST LAST

DELETE MATRIXSET FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-243

Chap. 7 Model definition MATRIX USER-SUPPLIED

MATRIX USER-SUPPLIED NAME ELEMENT-SUBTYPE ELNDOF

MATERIAL NUIPT NUIT1 NUIT2 NUIT3

Command MATRIX USER-SUPPLIED defines the element stiffness matrix and nodal force
vector in a general element group, to be provided in the ADINA subroutine CUSERG. The
material constants, variables and solution control parameters required in subroutine CUSERG
can be input via parameter MATERIAL. The element subtype must be input to predetermine
the sizes of arrays RE (element nodal forces) and AS (element stiffness) in CUSERG. If some
element results, e.g. stresses and strains, are to be displayed by ADINA-PLOT, the integra-
tion scheme locations need to be provided through parameters NUIPT, NUIT1, NUIT2 and
NUIT3.

NAME [(current highest matrix label number) + 1]

Label number of the matrix to be defined. If the label of an existing matrix is given, then the
previous matrix definition is overwritten.

ELEMENT-SUBTYPE
Element subtype indicator for assembling the general element stiffness. This parameter must
be entered. {TWODSOLID/THREEDSOLID/BEAM/SHELL}

ELNDOF [subtype dependent]

This parameter is not used. However, note that the number of active degrees of freedom per
node for a user-supplied element is set by the IDOF parameter of the MASTER command.

MATERIAL
The label number of MATERIAL USER-SUPPLIED, in which material constants/variables and
solution control parameters to be used in the calculations of element stiffness matrices and
force vectors are entered. The material constants/variables can be temperature-independent
or temperature-dependent.

NUIPT [NUIT1 NUIT2 NUIT3]

Number of user-provided interior points used to assemble the element stiffness matrix and to
display the element results at these locations.

NUIT1 [1]
NUIT2 [1]
NUIT3 [1]
Integration orders in the first, second and third local directions of general elements (less than
or equal to 6).

7-244 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MASSES Sec. 7.3 Element properties

MASSES POINTS

pointi mass1i mass2i mass3i mass4i mass5i mass6i

MASSES LINES

linei mass1i mass2i mass3i mass4i mass5i mass6i

MASSES SURFACES

surfacei mass1i mass2i mass3i mass4i mass5i mass6i

MASSES VOLUMES

volumei mass1i mass2i mass3i mass4i mass5i mass6i

MASSES NODESETS

nodeseti mass1i mass2i mass3i mass4i mass5i mass6i

MASSES EDGES BODY

edgei mass1i mass2i mass3i mass4i mass5i mass6i

MASSES FACES BODY

facei mass1i mass2i mass3i mass4i mass5i mass6i

MASSES POINTS assigns concentrated masses to the nodes at a set of geometry points.

MASSES LINES assigns concentrated masses to the nodes on a set of geometry lines.

MASSES VOLUMES assigns concentrated masses to the nodes in a set of geometry vol-
umes.

MASSES NODESETS assigns concentrated masses to the nodes in a node set.

MASSES EDGES assigns concentrated masses to the nodes on solid geometry edges.

MASSES FACES assigns concentrated masses to the nodes on solid geometry faces.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-245

Chap. 7 Model definition MASSES

BODY [currently active BODY]

Body label number.

pointi
Label number of a geometry point. All nodes coincident with this geometry point are as-
signed a value equal to the specified concentrated mass divided by the number of nodes.

linei
Label number of a geometry line. All nodes on this line are assigned a value equal to the
specified concentrated mass divided by the number of nodes.

surfacei
Label number of a geometry surface. All nodes on this surface are assigned a value equal to
the specified concentrated mass divided by the number of nodes.

volumei
Label number of a geometry volume. All nodes in this volume are assigned a value equal to
the specified concentrated mass divided by the number of nodes.

nodeseti
Label number of a node set. All nodes in this node set are assigned a value equal to the
specified concentrated mass divided by the number of nodes.

edgei
Label number of a solid geometry edge (for BODY). All nodes of this entity are assigned a
value equal to the specified concentrated mass divided by the number of nodes.

facei
Label number of a solid geometry face (for BODY). All nodes of this entity are assigned a
value equal to the specified concentrated mass divided by the number of nodes.

mass1i [0.0]
Mass assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal x-translation degree-of-freedom (global or
skew).

mass2i [0.0]
Mass assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal y-translation degree-of-freedom (global
or skew).

mass3i [0.0]
Mass assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal z-translation degree-of-freedom (global or
skew).

7-246 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MASSES Sec. 7.3 Element properties

mass4i [0.0]
Mass moment of inertia assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal x-rotation degree-of-
freedom (global or skew).

mass5i [0.0]
Mass moment of inertia assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal y-rotation degree-of-
freedom (global or skew).

mass6i [0.0]
Mass moment of inertia assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal z-rotation degree-of-
freedom (global or skew).

Auxiliary commands

LIST MASSES POINTS FIRST LAST

DELETE MASSES POINTS FIRST LAST

LIST MASSES LINES FIRST LAST

DELETE MASSES LINES FIRST LAST

LIST MASSES SURFACES FIRST LAST

DELETE MASSES SURFACES FIRST LAST

LIST MASSES VOLUMES FIRST LAST

DELETE MASSES VOLUMES FIRST LAST

LIST MASSES NODESETS FIRST LAST

DELETE MASSES NODESETS FIRST LAST

LIST MASSES EDGES FIRST LAST

DELETE MASSES EDGES FIRST LAST

LIST MASSES FACES FIRST LAST

DELETE MASSES FACES FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-247

Chap. 7 Model definition DAMPERS

DAMPERS POINTS

pointi damp1i damp2i damp3i damp4i damp5i damp6i

DAMPERS LINES

linei damp1i damp2i damp3i damp4i damp5i damp6i

DAMPERS SURFACES

surfacei damp1i damp2i damp3i damp4i damp5i damp6i

DAMPERS VOLUMES

volumei damp1i damp2i damp3i damp4i damp5i damp6i

DAMPERS NODESETS

nodeseti mass1i mass2i mass3i mass4i mass5i mass6i

DAMPERS EDGES BODY

edgei damp1i damp2i damp3i damp4i damp5i damp6i

DAMPERS FACES BODY

facei damp1i damp2i damp3i damp4i damp5i damp6i

DAMPERS POINTS assigns concentrated dampers to the nodes at a set of geometry points.

DAMPERS LINES assigns concentrated dampers to the nodes on a set of geometry lines.

DAMPERS SURFACES assigns concentrated dampers to the nodes on a set of geometry

surfaces.

DAMPERS VOLUMES assigns concentrated dampers to the nodes on a set of geometry

volumes.

DAMPERS NODESETS assigns concentrated dampers to the nodes in a node set.

DAMPERS EDGES assigns concentrated dampers to the nodes on solid geometry edges.

7-248 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DAMPERS Sec. 7.3 Element properties

DAMPERS FACES assigns concentrated dampers to the nodes on a set of solid geometry
faces.

BODY [currently active BODY]

Body label number.

pointi
Label number of a geometry point. All nodes coincident with this geometry point are as-
signed a value equal to the specified concentrated damper divided by the number of nodes.

linei
Label number of a geometry line. All nodes on this line are assigned a value equal to the
specified concentrated damper divided by the number of nodes.

surfacei
Label number of a geometry surface. All nodes on this surface are assigned a value equal to
the specified concentrated damper divided by the number of nodes.

volumei
Label number of a geometry volume. All nodes in this volume are assigned a value equal to
the specified concentrated damper divided by the number of nodes.

nodeseti
Label number of a node set. All nodes in this node set are assigned a value equal to the
specified concentrated damper divided by the number of nodes.

edgei
Label number of a geometry edge (for BODY). All nodes on this entity are assigned a value
equal to the specified concentrated damper divided by the number of nodes.

facei
Label number of a geometry face (for BODY). All nodes on this entity are assigned a value
equal to the specified concentrated damper divided by the number of nodes.

damp1i [0.0]
Damper assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal x-translation degree-of-freedom (global
or skew).

damp2i [0.0]
Damper assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal y-translation degree-of-freedom (global
or skew).

damp3i [0.0]
Damper assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal z-translation degree-of-freedom (global

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-249

Chap. 7 Model definition DAMPERS

or skew).

damp4i [0.0]
Rotational damper assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal x-rotation degree-of-freedom
(global or skew).

damp5i [0.0]
Rotational damper assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal y-rotation degree-of-freedom
(global or skew).

damp6i [0.0]
Rotational damper assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal z-rotation degree-of-freedom
(global or skew).

Auxiliary commands

LIST DAMPERS POINTS FIRST LAST

DELETE DAMPERS POINTS FIRST LAST

LIST DAMPERS LINES FIRST LAST

DELETE DAMPERS LINES FIRST LAST

LIST DAMPERS SURFACES FIRST LAST

DELETE DAMPERS SURFACES FIRST LAST

LIST DAMPERS VOLUMES FIRST LAST

DELETE DAMPERS VOLUMES FIRST LAST

LIST DAMPERS NODESETS FIRST LAST

DELETE DAMPERS NODESETS FIRST LAST

LIST DAMPERS EDGES FIRST LAST

DELETE DAMPERS EDGES FIRST LAST

LIST DAMPERS FACES FIRST LAST

DELETE DAMPERS FACES FIRST LAST

7-250 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SUBSTRUCTURE Sec. 7.4 Substructure and cyclic symmetry

SUBSTRUCTURE NAME

The model can consist of a main structure and one or more substructures. This command
sets the current substructure.

Substructuring cannot be used with

- multiple time step blocks
- explicit time integration

- rigid link constraint equations in substructure nodes, or between substructure nodes and
the main structure nodes
- potential-based fluid elements
- user-supplied elements, user-supplied loading

- temperature loading and other loading restrictions (see ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide,
Section 11.1.3)
- FSI/TMC analysis
- cyclic symmetry structures
- mapping options
- consistent mass damping
- 3D-iterative solver, multigrid solver, iterative solver
- load penetration
- pressure-update (load stiffening effect of shells)

- frequency analysis, mode-superposition analysis, response analysis, response spectrum

analysis, harmonic analysis and random vibration analysis

- linearized buckling analysis

NAME [(current highest substructure label number) + 1]

Label number of the current substructure.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SUBSTRUCTURE FIRST LAST

DELETE SUBSTRUCTURE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-251

Chap. 7 Model definition REUSE

REUSE NAME LOAD-REUSE CONNECT TRANSFORM

slavenamei masternamei typei sbodyi mbodyi connecti transformationi

Connects the current substructure to the main structure. As the command name implies, each
substructure can be used several times and the command REUSE therefore defines the reuse
identifying number for the current substructure.

Input data provided to the following commands refers only to the current reuse number of the
current substructure: PRINT-STEPS, SET-INITCONDITION, APPLY-LOAD

NAME [(highest reuse label number) + 1]

The label number of the reuse.

LOAD-REUSE [SAME]
Loading indicator for the reuse.

SAME Same loading as for the previous (i.e. NAME-1) reuse of the
current substructure.

DIFFERENT Loading for this reuse of the current substructure is specified by

subsequent uses of command APPLY-LOAD.

CONNECT [PARAMETRIC]
Default setting for how nodes on substructure are to be connected to nodes on main structure
when connection is between geometry lines or surfaces. {PARAMETRIC/MATCHING}

Note: When connection is between geometry edges, faces or nodesets,

CONNECT=MATCHING is always used.

Note: When connection is between lines or surfaces and CONNECT=PARAMETRIC, connec-

tion between main structure and substructure is constructed between nodes at the corre-
sponding parametric order on each entity. Parametric order is in the increasing u-parameter
direction for lines, increasing u- then v-parameter for surfaces.

TRANSFORM [0]
Default coordinate transformation system to match nodes for connecting substructure to
main structure. When connection is between geometry edges, faces or nodesets, TRANS-
FORM is always applicable. When connection is between geometry lines or surfaces, TRANS-
FORM is only applicable if CONNECT=MATCHING. Transformation is defined from the main
structure to the substructure.

slavenamei
The label number of the substructure boundary entity (point, line, surface, edge, face, node or

7-252 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
REUSE Sec. 7.4 Substructure and cyclic symmetry

nodeset) for the ith term of the reuse.

masternamei
The label number of the main structure connection entity (point, line, surface, edge, face,
node or nodeset) for the ith term of the reuse.

typei
The type of entity. {POINT/LINE(EDGE)/SURFACE(FACE)/NODE/NODESET}

Note: A connection between main structure and substructure is constructed between nodes
at the corresponding parametric order on each entity. Parametric order is in the in-
creasing u-parameter direction for lines, increasing u- then v-parameter for surfaces. In
this case the number of nodes on the slave and master geometry entity must be the same.

sbodyi [0]
Body label number of slave geometry edge (typei=LINE) or face (typei=SURFACE). For
geometry line or surface, sbodyi=0 must be specified. For other entities, sbodyi is ignored.

mbodyi [0]
Body label number of master geometry edge (typei=LINE) or face (typei=SURFACE). For
geometry line or surface, mbodyi=0 must be specified. For other entities, mbodyi is ignored.

connecti [from parameter CONNECT]

Indicates how nodes on substructure are to be connected to nodes on main structure when
connection is between geometry line or surface. {PARAMETRIC/MATCHING}

transformi [from parameter TRANSFORMATION]

Specifies a coordinate transformation system to match nodes for connecting a substructure
to the main structure. When connection is between geometry edges, faces or nodesets,
transformi is always applicable. When connection is between geometry lines or surfaces,
transformi is only applicable if connecti=MATCHING. Transformation is defined from the main
structure to the substructure.

Auxiliary commands

LIST REUSE FIRST LAST

DELETE REUSE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-253

Chap. 7 Model definition CYCLIC-CONTROL

CYCLIC-CONTROL CYCLICPARTS AXIS-CYCLIC PERIODIC LOW-HARMONIC

HIGH-HARMONIC FREQ-HARMONIC FREQ-HALF
BOUND-ELEMENT

Specifies parameters that control cyclic symmetry analysis.

CYCLICPARTS [1]
The number of cyclic symmetric parts of the main structure. If the value is greater than or
equal to 2 then a cyclic symmetric analysis is performed. The maximum number of cyclic
symmetric parts allowed is 999. CYCLICPARTS = 1 indicates no cyclic symmetry.

AXIS-CYCLIC [0]
Label number of cyclic symmetry axis defined by axis-rotation command. Default AXIS-
CYCLIC = 0 means use global X axis.

PERIODIC [NO]
Specifies whether the cyclic models are also under periodic symmetry. {NO/YES}

NO No periodic symmetry analysis. A full cyclic symmetry analysis will be performed.

Different loads are used for different cyclic parts.

YES Periodic symmetry analysis. Only the 0 harmonic will be analyzed. Unlike basic cyclic
symmetry analysis, a periodic symmetry analysis can be nonlinear. It can also be
used with explicit dynamic time integration. The load applied on the first cyclic part
is rotated about the cyclic axis and applied to the other cyclic parts.

LOW-HARMONIC [0]
Gives the lowest harmonic to use in cyclic symmetry frequency analysis.
{0 LOW-HARMONIC N/2} where N is the number of cyclic parts.

HIGH-HARMONIC [DEFAULT]
Gives the highest harmonic to use in cyclic symmetry frequency analysis.
{0 HIGH-HARMONIC N/2} where N is the number of cyclic parts.
HIGH-HARMONIC = DEFAULT sets the value to N/2.

FREQ-HARMONIC [0]
Gives the number of frequencies to calculate per harmonic. { 0}

FREQ-HALF [NO]
This flag which tells the program to only calculate one of every two complex frequency
pairs.{NO/YES}

7-254 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CYCLIC-CONTROL Sec. 7.4 Substructure and cyclic symmetry

BOUND-ELEMENT [SINGLE]
Specifies whether structural elements lying completely on the cyclic boundary are defined
once or twice. Applies to beam, isobeam, plate and shell elements. {SINGLE/DOUBLE}

SINGLE Structural elements completely on the cyclic boundary will only be defined once
by the user. The elements may be defined on either the master or the slave cyclic
boundaries, but not both. Some elements can be defined on the slave boundary
and others on the master.

DOUBLE Structural elements completely on the cyclic boundary will be define twice by the
user, once on each cyclic boundary. ADINA will handle the stiffness/mass matrix
modifications required for proper solution.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-255

Chap. 7 Model definition

This page intentionally left blank.

7-256 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CYCLICLOADS Sec. 7.4 Substructure and cyclic symmetry

CYCLICLOADS NAME

A cyclic symmetry analysis can be performed by defining the finite element discretization of
the fundamental part of the geometrically cyclic symmetric structure. This fundamental part is
rotated M times about a cyclic axis to represent the complete structure. CYCLICLOADS
indicates that the loads subsequently defined are to be on a particular one of these M parts.

NAME
Label number of the cyclic part to be loaded.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CYCLICLOADS FIRST LAST

DELETE CYCLICLOADS FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-257

Chap. 7 Model definition CYCLICBOUNDARY

CYCLICBOUNDARY POINTS / LINES / SURFACES / NODES / NODESET

slavenamei masternamei

CYCLICBOUNDARY is used to associate cyclic boundaries (defined by points, lines,

surfaces, nodes, or nodesets) with each other. The command specifies the cyclic boundaries
of the fundamental part of a cyclicaly symmetric structure termed the master cyclic boundary
and the slave cyclic boundary. When the nodes on the master cyclic boundary are rotated
360/M (where M is the number of cyclic parts) degrees counter clockwise about the cyclic
symmetry axis, they should coincide with the nodes on the slave cyclic boundary.

slavenamei
The label number of the slave entity (point, line, surface, node, or nodeset) for the ith term
of the cyclic boundary.

masternamei
The label number of the master entity (point, line, surface, node, or nodeset) for the ith term
of the cyclic boundary.

Slave cyclic
boundary

o Fundamental
360 cyclic part
M

Cyclic
symmetry axis Master cyclic
(Default: X axis) boundary

Note: When cyclic boundaries are based on geometric entities, the number of nodes on both
the master and slave geometries must be the same. The cyclic boundaries are not restricted to
straight lines and flat surfaces.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CYCLICBOUNDARY POINTS / LINES / SURFACES / NODES / NODESET

DELETE CYCLICBOUNDARY POINTS / LINES / SURFACES / NODES / NODESET
MASTER ... AXIS-CYCLIC PERIODIC

7-258 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CYCLICBOUNDARY TWO-D Sec. 7.4 Substructure and cyclic symmetry

CYCLICBOUNDARY TWO-D

slavenamei sbody masternamei mbody

CYCLICBOUNDARY TWO-D is used to associate cyclic boundaries with each other (defined
by lines or edges).The command specifies the cyclic boundary nodes of the fundamental part
of a cyclically symmetric structure. The cyclic boundaries of the fundamental part consist of
two sets of lines or edges, namely, the cyclic boundary 1 (master cyclic boundary) and the
cyclic boundary 2 (slave cyclic boundary).

Slave cyclic
boundary

o Fundamental
360 cyclic part
M

Cyclic
symmetry axis Master cyclic
(Default: X axis) boundary

slavenamei
The label number of the geometry slave entity (line or edge) for the ith independent term
of the cyclic boundary.

sbody
Geometry body label of slave edge.

masternamei
The label number of the geometry master entity (line or edge) for the ith independent term
of the cyclic boundary.

mbody
Geometry body label of master edge.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CYCLICBOUNDARY TWO-D

DELETE CYCLICBOUNDARY TWO-D
MASTER ... AXIS-CYCLIC PERIODIC

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-259

Chap. 7 Model definition CYCLICBOUNDARY THREE-D

CYCLICBOUNDARY THREE-D

slavenamei sbody masternamei mbody

Command CYCLICBOUNDARY THREE-D is used to associate cyclic boundaries with each

other (defined by surfaces or faces).The command specifies the cyclic boundary nodes of the
fundamental part of a cyclically symmetric structure. The cyclic boundaries of the fundamen-
tal part consist of two sets of surfaces or faces, namely, the cyclic boundary 1 (master cyclic
boundary) and the cyclic boundary 2 (slave cyclic boundary).

Slave cyclic
boundary

o Fundamental
360 cyclic part
M

Cyclic
symmetry axis Master cyclic
(Default: X axis) boundary

slavenamei
The label number of the geometry slave entity (line or edge) for the ith independent term
of the cyclic boundary.

sbody
Geometry body label of slave edge.

masternamei
The label number of the geometry master entity (line or edge) for the ith independent term
of the cyclic boundary.

mbody
Geometry body label of master edge.

Auxiliary commands
LIST CYCLICBOUNDARY THREE-D
DELETE CYCLICBOUNDARY THREE-D
MASTER ... AXIS-CYCLIC PERIODIC

7-260 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
AXIS-ROTATION Sec. 7.4 Substructure and cyclic symmetry

AXIS-ROTATION NAME MODE SYSTEM AXIS ALINE AP1 AP2 X0 Y0 Z0

XA YA ZA

Defines a rotational axis which can be referenced by other commands.

NAME [(current highest axis label number) + 1]

Label number of the axis.

MODE [AXIS]
Selects the method used to define the axis. The parameters (parenthesized) used to define the
axis depends on the method selected.

AXIS - The rotational axis is defined by a coordinate axis of a coordinate system.

(SYSTEM, AXIS)

LINE - The rotational axis is defined by a straight line between the end points of a
geometry line (which is not necessarily straight, but must be open - i.e.,
have non-coincident end points). (ALINE)

POINTS - The rotational axis is defined by a straight line between two non-coincident
geometry points. (AP1, AP2)

VECTOR - The rotational axis is defined by the coordinate position and direction of a
vector. (X0, Y0, Z0, XA, YA, ZA)

SYSTEM [current active coordinate system]

Label number of a coordinate system. One of the axes of this coordinate system may be used
to define the rotational axis, via parameter AXIS, when MODE = AXIS.

AXIS [XL]
Selects the axis of the coordinate system, given by parameter SYSTEM, to be used as the axis
of rotation. {XL/YL/ZL}

ALINE
Label number of the geometry line used to define the rotational axis. The direction of the axis
is taken from the start point of the line to the end point of the line.

AP1, AP2
Label numbers of the geometry points used to define the rotational axis. The direction of the
axis is taken from point AP1 to point AP2.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-261

Chap. 7 Model definition AXIS-ROTATION

X0, Y0, Z0 [0.0, 0.0, 0.0]

The coordinates (in global coordinates) of the starting position of the vector that defines the
rotational axis.

XA, YA, ZA [1.0, 0.0, 0.0]

The direction (in global coordinates) of the vector that defines the rotational axis.

Auxiliary commands

LIST AXIS-ROTATION FIRST LAST

DELETEAXIS-ROTATION FIRST LAST

7-262 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EG-SUBSTRUCTURE Sec. 7.4 Substructure and cyclic symmetry

EG-SUBSTRUCTURE NEG

substructurei egi

Creates substructures as sets of existing element groups.

NEG [1]
The maximum number of element groups to be allocated to one substructure.

substructurei
Label number of a new substructure.

egi
Label number of element group in main structure.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-263

Chap. 7 Model definition ANALYTICAL-RIGID-TARGET

ANALYTICAL-RIGID-TARGET ANALYTICAL X0 Y0 Z0 RADIUS GTYPE GNAME

Command ANALYTICAL-RIGID-TARGET defines parameters for analytical rigid target

contact analysis.

Note:
This command is only available for node-to-node contact (i.e., NODETONODE=YES in the
CGROUP CONTACT... command).

ANALYTICAL [NONE]
Analytical rigid target type:

NONE Analytical rigid target is not used.

PLANE Infinite plane.

SPHERE Sphere (3D), or circle (2D).

CYLINDER Infinite cylinder.

X0 [0.0]
Y0 [0.0]
Z0 [0.0]
Global cartesian component of:

- initial plane normal verctor inside the target body (ANALYTICAL=PLANE).

- initial cylinder axis verctor (ANALYTICAL=CYLINDER).

RADIUS [0.0]
Radius of sphere (ANALYTICAL=SPHERE) or cylinder (ANALYTICAL=CYLINDER).

GTYPE [POINT]
Geometry type for reference node: node or point. {NODE/POINT}

GNAME
Label number of reference node or point. An existing label number must be specified.

Auxiliary commands

LIST ANALYTICAL-RIGID-TARGET

7-264 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONTACT-CONTROL Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

CONTACT-CONTROL CONTACT -ALGORITHM XCONT-ALGORITHM

DISPLACEMENT NSUPPRESS DAMPING DAMP-NORMAL
DAMP-TANGENTIAL TENSION-CONSISTENT CSTYPE
FRICTION-ALGORITHM POSTIMPACT RT-SUBD
SEGMENT-INNER-ITERATION RT-ALGORITHM ORIENTATION
PRESSURE-CONTROL CRITICAL-PRESSURE
TIME-PENETRATION TIME-EVACUATION 3D-SEARCH
TRACT-CALC TRACT-ANGLE TRACT-QUADRATIC

Specifies certain parameters controlling the behavior of the algorithms used in modeling
contact. For further details, please consult the Theory and Modeling Guide.

CONTACT-ALGORITHM [CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION]
Selects the default algorithm used to solve contact problems in implicit analysis.
{CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION / SEGMENT-METHOD / RIGID-TARGET}

XCONT-ALGORITHM [DEFAULT]
Selects the default algorithm used to solve contact problems in explicit analysis. XCONT-
ALGORITHM=DEFAULT means that the kinematic constraint contact algorithm is used for
the central difference method and the penalty algorithm is used the for Noh-Bathe method.
{DEFAULT / KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT / PENALTY / EXPLICIT-RIGID-
TARGET}

DISPLACEMENT [LARGE]
Specifies the default displacement formulation used for contact analysis. A different formula-
tion may be selected for each individual contact group via the CGROUP command. {LARGE/
SMALL}

LARGE Large displacement is assumed for contact where the contact search is per-
formed in each iteration to generate new contact constraints.

SMALL Small displacement is assumed for contact. The contact constraints are gener-
ated once in the beginning of the analysis and kept constant throughout the
analysis.

NSUPPRESS [0]
Indicates the number of iterations for which previous target segments are stored for contactor
nodes -- in order to suppress oscillation between adjacent segments. Such oscillation can
occur when a contactor node approaches the junction between two adjacent target segments.
Use of NSUPPRESS > 0 allows for such oscillation to be detected and eliminated.
NSUPPRESS = 0 (the default) indicates that no such checking and associated storage is
required. { 0}

For NSUPPRESS >0, ADINA stores all target segments that have previously (during equilib-

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-265

Chap. 7 Model definition CONTACT-CONTROL

rium iterations) come into contact with a contactor node. To limit the amount of memory
required, NSUPPRESS is limited to a maximum value of 99.

Notes:
1 NSUPPRESS has no effect if the node-to-node contact algorithm is used.
2 NSUPPRESS should be less than the maximum number of equilibrium iterations.

DAMPING [NO]
Indicates whether damping stabilization is applied for contact analysis. This feature is
generally useful when rigid body motion exists in a model. {NO/INITIAL/CONSTANT}

INITIAL Damping is applied at the first time step only. The specified damping
coefficients are applied and ramped down to zero by the end of the first time
step.

CONSTANT The specified damping coefficients are applied at all time steps.

DAMP-NORMAL [0.0]
Specified the normal damping coefficient. { 0.0 }

DAMP-TANGENTIAL [0.0]
Specified the tangential damping coefficient. { 0.0 }

TENSION-CONSISTENT [NO]
Specifies whether to allow tensile consistent contact forces on second-order elements.
{YES/NO}

CSTYPE [NEW]
Selects the type of contact segment to use. {OLD/NEW}
OLD Use the old contact segment.
NEW Use the new contact segment.

FRICTION-ALGORITHM [CURRENT]
Selects which friction algorithm is used in the solution. {V83/CURRENT}

POSTIMPACT [DEFAULT]
Indicates whether the post-impact correction of velocities and accelerations is performed
along with the displacement constraint in dynamic contact problems. {DEFAULT/NO/YES/MOD}

DEFAULT Set to YES when XCONTACT-ALGORITHM = KINEMATIC-CON

STRAINT for the Noh-Bathe method; set to NO for all other methods/
contact.

7-266 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONTACT-CONTROL Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

NO Compatibility of velocities and accelerations of contactor and target

surfaces during contact is not enforced.
YES Compatibility of velocities and accelerations of contactor and target
surfaces (only in the normal contact direction) during contact is enforced.

MOD Newmark time integration parameter ALPHA is modified to 0.5.

RT-SUBD [MAGNITUDE]
Selects the subdivision scheme used in the rigid-target algorithm when the tensile contact
force (and penetration if selected) is too large. Used only for the rigid-target contact algo-
rithm of version 8.3. {MAGNITUDE/ATS}

MAGNITUDE Subdivision is based on the magnitude of the tensile contact force (and
penetration), i.e., the larger the magnitude, the smaller will be the
subdivided time step size.

ATS Subdivision is based on the global automatic time stepping (ATS)

subdivsion settings.

SEGMENT-INNER-ITERATION [YES]
Indicates whether the inner iteration loop is to be performed for the segment method contact
algorithm. {YES/NO}

RT-ALGORITHM [CURRENT]
Selects the rigid-target contact algorithm. Details are in Chapter 4 of the ADINA Theory and
Modeling Guide. {V83/CURRENT}

V83 Use the rigid-target contact algorithm of ADINA version 8.3 and earlier

CURRENT Use the rigid-target contact algorithm of the current ADINA version.

ORIENTATION [INPUT]
When parameter is set to AUTOMATIC ADINA will try to determine the contact surface
orientations automatically. That is important in contact analysis involving shells or rigid
contact surfaces. In these cases the user had the burden to determine which is the proper
contact side. The automatic determination will be based on individual contact pairs. {AUTO-
MATIC/INPUT}

PRESSURE-CONTROL [NO]
If PRESSURE-CONTROL=NO, then prescribed pressure loads applied to contactor contact
surfaces are always applied.
If PRESSURE-CONTROL=V89, then prescribed pressure loads applied to contactor contact
surfaces are applied only if the contact pressure is less than a critical value.
If PRESSURE-CONTROL=YES, then prescribed pressure loads applied to contactor contact

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-267

Chap. 7 Model definition CONTACT-CONTROL

surfaces are applied using the criterion given in the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide,
Section 5.3.6. {NO/V89/YES}

PRESSURE-CONTROL=V89 is intended for use only for backwards compatibility with

versions 8.9 and earlier.

CRITICAL-PRESSURE [0.0]
The critical contact pressure used to control how prescribed pressure loads are applied to
contactor contact surfaces, used if PRESSURE-CONTROL= V89 or YES. { 0.0 }

If CRITICAL-PRESSURE = 0.0, then prescribed pressure loads are applied to contactor

contact surfaces only when there is no contact.

TIME-PENETRATION [0.0]
The time interval during which a prescribed pressure load is ramped up to its full value, when
the contact pressure becomes less than the critical contact pressure. This parameter is used
only if PRESSURE-CONTROL= V89 or YES. { 0.0 }

If TIME-PENETRATION=0.0, then as soon as the contact pressure becomes less than the
critical contact pressure, the entire prescribed pressure load is applied.

TIME-EVACUATION [0.0]
The time interval during which a prescribed pressure load is reduced to zero, when the
contact pressurebecomes greater than the critical contact pressure. This parameter is used
only if PRESSURE-CONTROL= V89 or YES. { 0.0 }

If TIME-PENETRATION=0.0, then as soon as the contact pressure becomes greater than

the critical contact pressure, none of the prescribed pressure load is applied.

3D-SEARCH [STANDARD]
Selects the search algorithm for contactor-target pairs in 3D contact problems in explicit
analysis. {STANDARD/FAST}

STANDARD The default contact search algorithm, available for all types of
contact.

FAST The algorithm based on the bucket sort, available only for 3D
contact with single-sided surfaces in explicit analysis. It is
suitable for contact pairs with a large number of contactors and
targets.

TRACT-CALC [CURRENT]
TRACT-CALC controls the calculation of contact tractions, when new contact surfaces are

7-268 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONTACT-CONTROL Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

used. {CURRENT/V89}

CURRENT The traction calculation is based on the equivalent area concept.

V89 The traction calculation uses the version 8.9 algorithms.

TRACT-ANGLE [45.0]
An angle tolerance used in the calculation of contact tractions, when new contact surfaces
are used and when TRACT-CALC=CURRENT. TRACT-ANGLE is entered in degrees. See the
Theory and Modeling Guide for details.

TRACT-QUADRATIC [EDGEAVERAGE]
TRACT-QUADRATIC controls the calculations of contact tractions at higher-order corner
nodes, when new contact surfaces are used and when TRACT-CALC=CURRENT.
{EDGEAVERAGE/AVERAGE/MAXIMUM}

EDGEAVERAGE The traction at a higher-order corner node is the average of the

tractions from two of the surrounding mid-side and mid-face
nodes.

AVERAGE The traction at a higher-order corner node is the average of the

tractions from the surrounding Mid-side and mid-face nodes.

MAXIMUM The traction at a higher-order corner node is the maximum of the

tractions from the surrounding mid-side and mid-face nodes.

Auxiliary commands
LIST CONTACT-CONTROL

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-269

Chap. 7 Model definition

This page intentionally left blank

7-270 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT2 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

CGROUP CONTACT2

This command is split, for better readability, based on the contact algorithm. There are 6
possibilities:

Implicit analysis
1. Constraint Function Algorithm
- ALGORITHM=CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION
- ALGORITHM=DEFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)=CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION
2. Segment Method Algorithm
- ALGORITHM=SEGMENT
- ALGORITHM=DEFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)=SEGMENT
3. Rigid Target Algorithm
- ALGORITHM=RIGID-TARGET
- ALGORITHM=DEFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)=RIGID-TARGET

Explicit analysis
4. Kinematic Constraint Algorithm
- XALGORITHM=KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT
- XALGORITHM=DEFAULT & XCONT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)= KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT
5. Penalty Algorithm
- XALGORITHM=PENALTY
- XALGORITHM=DEFAULT & XCONT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)=PENALTY
6. Rigid Target Algorithm
- XALGORITHM=EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET
- XALGORITHM=DEFAULT & XCONT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)=EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET

Note that:
- Algorithms #1, #2, #4 support node-to-node contact (the default is node-to-
segment) via parameter NODETONODE=YES.
- Algorithms #1, #2 support tied contact via parameter TIED=SMALL

Auxiliary Commands

LIST CGROUP2 FIRST LAST

DELETE CGROUP2 FIRST LAST NODES

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-271

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT2

NODES = YES (the default) will remove nodes which were only attached to contact
segments in the deleted contact group.

The summary of parameters applicable for each contact algorithm is presented in two tables
following the command descriptions for the 3D contact command (CGROUP CONTACT3).
One table is for implicit analysis and the other for explicit analysis.

7-272 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT2 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

Case 1: Implicit Constraint Function Algorithm

CGROUP CONTACT2 NAME ALGORITHM NODETONODE DISPLACEMENT

FRICTION CFACTOR1 DEPTH TIED TIED-OFFSET
OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE FORCES TRACTIONS
CONTINUOUS-NORMAL DIRECTION

TBIRTH TDEATH INITIAL-PENETRATION TIME-

PENETRATION GAP-VALUE CS-EXTENSION EPSN
EPST CONSISTENT-STIFF FRIC-DELAY USER-FRICTION
SUBTYPE

HHATTMC FCTMC FTTMC EKTMC GAP-CONDUCTANCE

Activated when:
- ALGORITHM=CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION
- ALGORITHM=DEFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)=CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION

The following superscripts are used for some of the parameters:

1. Only applicable to (the default) node-to-segment contact

2. Only applicable to node-to-node contact

The absence of a superscript indicates general applicability.

The CGROUP parameters are divided into 3 subgroups: Basic, Advanced, and Multiphysics:

Basic parameters

NAME [(current highest contact group label number) + 1]

Label number of the contact group to be defined.

ALGORITHM [DEFAULT]
Selects the contact algorithm for current group if the analysis is implicit. If DEFAULT is
selected the algorithm type is determined based on the CONTACT-ALGORITHM parameter
of the MASTER command. See comment above for activating the current contact algorithm.
{DEFAULT/ CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION/ SEGMENT-METHOD/ RIGID-TARGET}

NODETONODE [NO]
Indicates whether node-to-segment or node-to-node contact algorithm is used by the contact
group. {YES/NO}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-273

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT2

NO - Use node-to-segment contact

YES - Use node-to-node contact

DISPLACEMENT 1 [DEFAULT]
Specifies the displacement formulation used for this contact group. {DEFAULT/LARGE/
SMALL}

DEFAULT - The displacement formulation specified in the CONTACT-CONTROL

command is used.
LARGE - Large displacement is assumed for contact where the contact search is
performed in each iteration to generate new contact constraints.
SMALL - Small displacement is assumed for contact. The contact constraints are
generated once in the beginning of the analysis and kept constant
throughout the analysis.

FRICTION [0.0]
Default coefficient of Coulomb friction. FRICTION = 0.0 indicates frictionless contact.
Contact pairs can set their own friction coefficient.

CFACTOR1 [0.0]
Compliance factor for all contact surfaces in this contact group. { 0.0}

DEPTH 1 [0.0]
If DEPTH > 0.0, then penetration is detected when the penetration depth is less than or
equal to DEPTH, and if the penetration distance is greater than DEPTH, penetration is
deemed not to occur.

TIED1 [NO]
Indicates the type of TIED contact. {NO/SMALL}

NO - No TIED contact.
SMALL - Small displacement is used in TIED contact.

TIED-OFFSET 1 [0.0]
If TIED = SMALL, contactor nodes are tied to target if the gap between them is less than or
equal to this parameter. This parameter is ignored when TIED = NO.

OFFSET [0.001]
Two contact surfaces are constructed for each defined contact surface, each contact surface
placed a distance OFFSET from the defined contact surface. { 0.0}

Note: The OFFSET parameter specifies the default offset distance. For each individual

7-274 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT2 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

contact surface, a different offset distance can be specified using the command
CS-OFFSET.

OFFSET-TYPE [CONSTANT]
Specifies the type of offset to be used for contact surfaces belonging to this group.
{CONSTANT/TRUE/NONE}

CONSTANT - Constant offset as specified by the parameter OFFSET is used.

See note under OFFSET.
TRUE - The actual shell half thickness is used as the offset distance even for
large strains.
NONE - No offset is used (regardless of the value of the parameter OFFSET).

FORCES 1 [YES]
Indicates whether or not concentrated contact nodal forces are calculated for every contact
surface node of this contact group. The contact forces are evaluated with respect to the
global Cartesian coordinate system. {YES/NO}

Note: - If NODETONODE = YES, nodal forces are always calculated and this parameter is
ignored.
- The combination FORCES = NO, TRACTIONS = NO is not permitted.

TRACTIONS 1 [YES]
Indicates whether or not contactor segment tractions (and concentrated contact nodal forces
at solitary nodes in contact) are calculated for every contactor surface of this contact group.
{YES/NO}

Note: The combination FORCES = NO, TRACTIONS = NO is not permitted.

CONTINUOUS-NORMAL 1 [YES]
Indicates whether or not a continuous (interpolated) contact segment normal is to be used for
contact surfaces in the contact group. {YES/NO}

DIRECTION 2 [NORMAL]
Specifies the vector used to describe the normal direction for a nodal pair in node-to-node
contact. {NORMAL/VECTOR}

NORMAL - Use the normal vector inside the target body.

VECTOR - Use the vector connecting target and contactor nodes.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-275

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT2

Advanced parameters

TBIRTH 1 [0.0]
TDEATH 1 [0.0]
The default birth and death times for the contact group. If TBIRTH=0.0 and TDEATH=0.0,
the birth and death feature is not used.

INITIAL-PENETRATION1 [ALLOWED]
Initial contactor node penetration flag.
{ALLOWED/PRINT/DISCARDED/GAP-OVERRIDE}

ALLOWED - Any initial penetration of a contactor node into a target surface is

eliminated either in the first solution step or over a specified time
interval (see TIME-PENETRATION parameter). In successive steps
each contactor node cannot penetrate.
PRINT - Same as ALLOWED, but a printout of the penetrating contactor nodes
is produced.
DISCARDED - Any initial penetration of a contactor node into a target surface is not
eliminated in the first solution step. In successive steps each
contactor node is allowed to penetrate up to the initial penetration.
GAP-OVERRIDE - Initial penetrations or gaps are overridden by user-specified GAP-
VALUE parameter either in the first solution step or over a specified
time interval either in the first solution step or over a specified
time interval (see TIME-PENETRATION parameter).

TIME-PENETRATION 1 [0.0]
Specifies the time used to eliminate or override any initial penetration. { 0.0}

If INITIAL-PENETRATION = ALLOWED or PRINT or GAP-OVERRIDE, and TIME-

PENETRATION=0.0, then the initial penetration is eliminated or overriden in the first time
step. By specifying TIME-PENETRATION > 0.0, initial penetration can be eliminated or
overridden gradually. This may help in the convergence of the solution.

GAP-VALUE 1 [0.0]
Specifies a constant gap distance between the contactor and target surfaces when INITIAL-
PENETRATION = GAP-OVERRIDE. This value overrides the value measured from the
contact surfaces. A negative GAP-VALUE means initial penetrations which will be eliminated.

CS-EXTENSION 1 [0.001]
The maximum non-dimensional extension of target contact surfaces.
{0.0 < CS-EXTENSION < 0.1}

EPSN [1.0E-12]
The normal contact w-function parameter. Guidelines for choosing this parameter are

7-276 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT2 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

provided in the ADINA-AUI Online Help. When EPSN = 0.0, ADINA automatically deter-
mines this parameter.

EPST [0.0]
The friction contact v-function T parameter. Guidelines for choosing this parameter are
provided in the ADINA-AUI Online Help. When EPST = 0.0, ADINA automatically sets it to
0.001.

CONSISTENT-STIFF 1 [DEFAULT]
Indicates whether consistent contact stiffness is used. {DEFAULT/OFF/ON}

When CONSISTENT-STIFF = DEFAULT, consistent contact stiffness is used if the following

conditions are all satisfied:
- the skyline direct equation solver is not used, i.e., SOLVER is not set to SKYLINE in the
MASTER command,
- CONTINUOUS-NORMAL = NO is specified.
- Old contact surfaces are used (CSTYPE=OLD in CONTACT-CONTROL command).
Otherwise, the default is set to off.

Note that this option is not used in small displacement analysis (DISPLACEMENT=SMALL in
the KINEMATICS command). It is also not used if small displacements are selected in the
contact group (DISPLACEMENT parameter).

The use of consistent contact stiffness increases the size of the stiffness matrix. However, it
can improve the convergence rate in contact problems, especially in cases where the normal
vector between the contacting surfaces frequently changes direction during the analysis.

FRIC-DELAY [NO]
Indicates whether the application of friction is delayed, i.e., applied one time step after
contact is established. {NO/YES}

USER-FRICTION 1 [NO]
Indicates whether a user-supplied friction law is used for this contact group. If USER-
FRICTION=YES is specified, additional parameters for defining the user-supplied friction law
can be input using the USER-FRICTION command. {YES/NO}

SUBTYPE [DEFAULT]
Indicates the type of CONTACT2 contact-surfaces, all defined in the global YZ plane.
{DEFAULT/AXISYMMETRIC/STRAIN/STRESS}

DEFAULT - Subtype automatically determined based on underlying elements.

AXISYMMETRIC - Axisymmetric contact-surfaces. The global Z axis is that of
rotational symmetry, and Y is the radial direction (Y 0).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-277

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT2

STRAIN - Planar contact-surfaces.

STRESS - Planar contact-surfaces (identical to STRAIN).

Multiphysics parameters

HHATTMC1 [0.0]
Default contact heat transfer coefficient used for thermo-mechanical coupling (TMC) analy-
sis. { 0.0}

FCTMC 1 [0.5]
Default friction heat distribution fraction for contactor surface used for thermo-mechanical
coupling (TMC) analysis. {0.0 FCTMC 1.0}

FTTMC 1 [0.5]
Default friction heat distribution fraction for target surface used for thermo-mechanical
coupling (TMC) analysis. {0.0 FTTMC 1.0}

EKTMC1 [0.0]
Default electrical conductivity for current flow through contact surfaces in a thermo-mechani-
cal coupling (TMC) analysis. (Units: electrical conductance/length, e.g., Siemens/m) {
0.0}

GAP-CONDUCTANCE [0]
The label number of GAP-CONDUCTANCE.

7-278 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT2 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

Case 2: Implicit Segment Method Algorithm

CGROUP CONTACT2 NAME ALGORITHM NODETONODE DISPLACEMENT

FRICTION DEPTH TIED TIED-OFFSET OFFSET
OFFSET-TYPE FORCES TRACTIONS CONTINUOUS-
NORMAL DIRECTION

TBIRTH TDEATH INITIAL-PENETRATION TIME-

PENETRATION GAP-VALUE CS-EXTENSION
CONSISTENT-STIFF FRIC-DELAY USER-FRICTION
SUBTYPE

Activated when:
- ALGORITHM=SEGMENT-METHOD
- ALGORITHM=DEFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)=SEGMENT-METHOD

All the parameters for the Segment Method Algorithm are described in Case 1: Implicit -
Constraint Function Algorithm

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-279

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT2

Case 3: Implicit - Rigid Target Algorithm

CGROUP CONTACT2 NAME ALGORITHM FRICTION DEPTH TBIRTH

TDEATH NORMAL-STIFFNESS TANGENTIAL-STIFFNESS
PTOLERANCE OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE RESIDUAL-FORCE
LIMIT-FORCE ITERATION-LIMIT RTP-CHECK RTP-MAX
SUBTYPE RIGID-TARGET

Activated when:
- ALGORITHM=RIGID-TARGET
- ALGORITHM=DEFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=
RIGID-TARGET

Note: This algorithm is equivalent to the Old 3D Implicit Rigid Target Algorithm.

For the following parameters, see description for Case 1: Implicit - Constraint Function
Algorithm

NAME
ALGORITHM
FRICTION
DEPTH
TBIRTH
TDEATH
SUBTYPE

NORMAL-STIFFNESS [1.0E11]
Contact stiffness in direction normal to the contact surface.

TANGENTIAL-STIFFNESS [0.0]
Contact stiffness in direction tangential to the contact surface.

PTOLERANCE [1.0E-8]
Maximum allowable penetration of target surface. If penetration is less than PTOLERANCE,
contact is assumed to be not yet established for the node in consideration.

OFFSET [0.0]
The actual contact surface is raised a distance OFFSET away from the surface defined by the
nodes. { 0.0}

OFFSET-TYPE [CONSTANT]
Specifies the type of offset to be used for contact surfaces belonging to this group.
{CONSTANT/TRUE}

7-280 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT2 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

CONSTANT - Constant offset as specified by the parameter OFFSET is used.

TRUE - The actual shell half thickness is used as the offset distance even for
large strains.

RESIDUAL-FORCE [0.001]
Minimum tensile contact force required to change state of a contact node from "node in
contact" to "free node". If the normal component of a tensile contact force is less than
RESIDUAL-FORCE, a "node in contact" remains in contact. If the normal tensile force is
greater than RESIDUAL-FORCE, a "node in contact" becomes a "free node".

LIMIT-FORCE [1.0]
Limit (maximum) for the sum of all contact forces for nodes changing from the state of "node
in contact" to "free node". If the absolute value of the sum of the forces is bigger than
LIMIT-FORCE, then the automatic time stepping (ATS) method will be activated to subdivide
the current time step into smaller time increments.

ITERATION-LIMIT [2]
Maximum number of ATS time step subdivisions due to LIMIT-FORCE criterion described
above.

RTP-CHECK [NO]
Specifies whether penetration is checked (in addition to checking the tensile contact force)
against the maximum allowable penetration when the rigid-target algorithm is used. {NO/
RELATIVE/ABSOLUTE}

NO - Penetration is not checked. Note that with this setting, there is a

possibility that the rigid target surface may excessively penetrate the
contactor surface.
RELATIVE - Penetration is checked and RTP-MAX is specified as a factor of the
overall model size.
ABSOLUTE - Penetration is checked and RTP-MAX is the absolute value of
penetration allowed.

Note that if penetration check is selected, the program will perform subdivision of time steps
if the penetration exceeds the maximum allowable penetration. The subdivision scheme is
specified in the RT-SUBD parameter in the CONTACT-CONTROL command.

RTP-MAX [0.001]
Specifies the maximum allowable penetration when the rigid target algorithm is used.
RTP-MAX is either a factor of the model size or an absolute value depending on the
RTP-CHECK parameter. {> 0.0}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-281

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT2

SUBTYPE [DEFAULT]
Indicates the type of CONTACT2 contact-surfaces, all defined in the global YZ plane.
{DEFAULT/AXISYMMETRIC/STRAIN/STRESS}

DEFAULT - Subtype automatically determined based on underlying elements.

AXISYMMETRIC - Axisymmetric contact-surfaces. The global Z axis is that of
rotational symmetry, and Y is the radial direction (Y 0).
STRAIN - Planar contact-surfaces.
STRESS - Planar contact-surfaces (identical to STRAIN).

RIGID-TARGET (obsolete) [NO]

Indicates whether rigid target contact algorithm is used for current contact group. It is
preferable to set ALGORITHM instead. {NO/YES}

7-282 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT2 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

Case 4: Explicit - Kinematic Constraint Algorithm

CGROUP CONTACT2 NAME XALGORITHM NODETONODE DISPLACEMENT

FRICTION DEPTH OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE FORCES
TRACTIONS DIRECTION

TBIRTH TDEATH INITIAL-PENETRATION

TIME-PENETRATION GAP-VALUE CS-EXTENSION
SUBTYPE

Activated when:
- XALGORITHM=KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT
- XALGORITHM=DEFAULT & XCONT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CON-
TROL)= KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT

The following superscripts are used for some of the parameters:

1. Only applicable to (the default) node-to-segment contact

2. Only applicable to node-to-node contact

The absence of a superscript indicates general applicability.

The CGROUP parameters are divided into 2 subgroups: Basic and Advanced.

Basic parameters

NAME [(current highest contact group label number) + 1]

Label number of the contact group to be defined.

XALGORITHM [DEFAULT]
Selects the contact algorithm for current group if the analysis is explicit. If DEFAULT is
selected the algorithm type is determined based on XCONT-ALGORITHM variable of the
CONTACT-CONTROL command. See comment above for activating the current contact
algorithm.
{DEFAULT/KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT/PENALTY/EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET}

NODETONODE [NO]
Indicates whether node-to-segment or node-to-node contact algorithm is used by the contact
group. {YES/NO}

NO - Use node-to-segment contact

YES - Use node-to-node contact

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-283

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT2

DISPLACEMENT 1 [DEFAULT]
Specifies the displacement formulation used for this contact group. {DEFAULT/LARGE/
SMALL}

DEFAULT - The displacement formulation specified in the CONTACT-CONTROL

command is used.
LARGE - Large displacement is assumed for contact where the contact search is
performed in each iteration to generate new contact constraints.
SMALL - Small displacement is assumed for contact. The contact constraints are
generated once in the beginning of the analysis and kept constant
throughout the analysis.

FRICTION [0.0]
Default coefficient of Coulomb friction. FRICTION = 0.0 indicates frictionless contact.
Contact pairs can set their own friction coefficients.

DEPTH 1 [0.0]
If DEPTH > 0.0, then penetration is detected when the penetration depth is less than or
equal to DEPTH, and if the penetration distance is greater than DEPTH, penetration is
deemed not to occur.

OFFSET [0.001]
Two contact surfaces are constructed for each defined contact surface, each contact surface
placed a distance OFFSET from the defined contact surface. { 0.0}

Note: The OFFSET parameter specifies the default offset distance. For each individual
contact surface, a different offset distance can be specified using the command
CS-OFFSET.

OFFSET-TYPE [CONSTANT]
Specifies the type of offset to be used for contact surfaces belonging to this group.
{CONSTANT/TRUE/NONE}

CONSTANT - Constant offset as specified by the parameter OFFSET is used.

See note under OFFSET.
TRUE - The actual shell half thickness is used as the offset distance even for
large strains.
NONE - No offset is used (regardless of the value of the parameter OFFSET).

FORCES 1 [YES]
Indicates whether or not concentrated contact nodal forces are calculated for every contact
surface node of this contact group. The contact forces are evaluated with respect to the
global Cartesian coordinate system. {YES/NO}

7-284 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT2 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

Note: - If NODETONODE = YES, nodal forces are always calculated and this parameter is
ignored.
- The combination FORCES = NO, TRACTIONS = NO is not permitted.

TRACTIONS 1 [YES]
Indicates whether or not contactor segment tractions (and concentrated contact nodal forces
at solitary nodes in contact) are calculated for every contactor surface of this contact group.
{YES/NO}

Note: The combination FORCES = NO, TRACTIONS = NO is not permitted.

DIRECTION 2 [NORMAL]
Specifies the vector used to describe the normal direction for a nodal pair in node-to-node
contact. {NORMAL/VECTOR}

NORMAL - Use the normal vector inside the target body.

VECTOR - Use the vector connecting target and contactor nodes.

Advanced parameters

TBIRTH 1 [0.0]
TDEATH 1 [0.0]
The default birth and death times for the contact group. If TBIRTH=0.0 and TDEATH=0.0,
the birth and death feature is not used.

INITIAL-PENETRATION1 [ALLOWED]
Initial contactor node penetration flag.
{ALLOWED/PRINT/DISCARDED/GAP-OVERRIDE}

ALLOWED - Any initial penetration of a contactor node into a target surface is

eliminated either in the first solution step or over a specified time
interval (see TIME-PENETRATION parameter). In successive steps
each contactor node cannot penetrate.
PRINT - Same as ALLOWED, but a printout of the penetrating contactor nodes
is produced.
DISCARDED - Any initial penetration of a contactor node into a target surface is not
eliminated in the first solution step. In successive steps each
contactor node is allowed to penetrate up to the initial penetration.
GAP-OVERRIDE - Initial penetrations or gaps are overridden by user-specified GAP-
VALUE parameter either in the first solution step or over a specified
time interval (see TIME-PENETRATION parameter).

TIME-PENETRATION 1 [0.0]
Specifies the time used to eliminate or override any initial penetration. { 0.0}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-285

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT2

If INITIAL-PENETRATION = ALLOWED or PRINT or GAP-OVERRIDE, and TIME-PEN-

ETRATION=0.0, then the initial penetration is eliminated or overriden in the first time step.
By specifying TIME-PENETRATION > 0.0, initial penetration can be eliminated or overriden
gradually. This may help in the convergence of the solution.

GAP-VALUE 1 [0.0]
Specifies a constant gap distance between the contactor and target surfaces when INITIAL-
PENETRATION = GAP-OVERRIDE. This value overrides the value measured from the
contact surfaces. A negative GAP-VALUE means initial penetrations which will be eliminated.

CS-EXTENSION 1 [0.001]
The maximum non-dimensional extension of target contact surfaces.
{0.0 < CS-EXTENSION < 0.1}

SUBTYPE [DEFAULT]
Indicates the type of CONTACT2 contact-surfaces, all defined in the global YZ plane.
{DEFAULT/AXISYMMETRIC/STRAIN/STRESS}

DEFAULT - Subtype automatically determined based on underlying elements.

AXISYMMETRIC - Axisymmetric contact-surfaces. The global Z axis is that of
rotational symmetry, and Y is the radial direction (Y 0).
STRAIN - Planar contact-surfaces.
STRESS - Planar contact-surfaces (identical to STRAIN).

7-286 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT2 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

Case 5: Explicit Penalty Algorithm

CGROUP CONTACT2 NAME XALGORITHM DISPLACEMENT FRICTION

DEPTH OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE FORCES TRACTIONS
XKN-CRIT XK-NORMAL XKT-CRIT XK-TANGENT
XDAMP XNDAMP

TBIRTH TDEATH INITIAL-PENETRATION

TIME-PENETRATION GAP-VALUE CS-EXTENSION
SUBTYPE

Activated when:

- XALGORITHM=PENALTY
- XALGORITHM=DEFAULT & XCONT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=
PENALTY

For the following parameters, see description for Case 4: Explicit - Kinematic constraint
algorithm

NAME
XALGORITHM
DISPLACEMENT
FRICTION
DEPTH
OFFSET
OFFSET-TYPE
FORCES
TRACTIONS
TBIRTH
TDEATH
INITIAL-PENETRATION
TIME-PENETRATION
GAP-VALUE
CS-EXTENSION
SUBTYPE

XKN-CRIT [GLOBAL]
Criterion for evaluation of normal penalty stiffness.
{GLOBAL/USER}

GLOBAL - Penalty stiffness will be determined globally for the whole contact group.
USER - The user sets the penalty stiffness.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-287

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT2

XK-NORMAL [0.0]
The normal stiffness. It must be greater than 0.0. It is only used for XKN-CRIT=USER.

XKT-CRIT [GLOBAL]
Criterion for evaluation of tangential penalty stiffness. {GLOBAL/USER}

GLOBAL - Penalty stiffness will be determined globally for the whole contact group.
USER - The user sets the penalty stiffness.

XK-TANGENT [0.0]
The tangetial stiffness. It must be greater than 0.0. It is only used for XKT-CRIT=USER.

XDAMP [NO]
Indicates whether normal damping (proportional to the rate of penetration) is used.{NO/
RELATIVE/ABSOLUTE}

NO - Damping is not used, i.e., XNDAMP parameter is ignored.

RELATIVE - Damping is used and XNDAMP is a factor of the critical damping, i.e., the
normal contact damping coefficient is given by XNDAMP multiplied by
the critical damping. This is the recommended choice if damping is used.
ABSOLUTE - Damping is included and the normal contact damping coefficient is
specified directly by XNDAMP.

XNDAMP [0.1]
Specifies the relative or absolute normal damping coefficient (for normal penalty stiffness).
{ 0.0}

7-288 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT2 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

Case 6: Explicit Rigid Target Algorithm

CGROUP CONTACT2 NAME XALGORITHM FRICTION DEPTH TBIRTH

TDEATH NORMAL-STIFFNESS TANGENTIAL-
STIFFNESS PTOLERANCE OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE
SUBTYPE RIGID-TARGET

Activated when:
- XALGORITHM=EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET
- XALGORITHM=DEFAULT & XCONT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=
EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET

Note: This algorithm is equivalent to the old 3D Rigid Target Algorithm.

For the following parameters, see description for Case 5: Explicit - Kinematic constraint
algorithm

NAME
XALGORITHM
FRICTION
DEPTH
TBIRTH
TDEATH
SUBTYPE

NORMAL-STIFFNESS [1.0E11]
Contact stiffness in direction normal to the contact surface.

TANGENTIAL-STIFFNESS [0.0]
Contact stiffness in direction tangential to the contact surface.

PTOLERANCE [1.0E-8]
Maximum allowable penetration of target surface. If penetration is less than PTOLERANCE,
contact is assumed to be not yet established for the node in consideration.

OFFSET [0.0]
The actual contact surface is raised a distance OFFSET away from the surface defined by the
nodes. { 0.0}

OFFSET-TYPE [CONSTANT]
Specifies the type of offset to be used for contact surfaces belonging to this group.
{CONSTANT/TRUE}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-289

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT2

CONSTANT - Constant offset as specified by the parameter OFFSET is used.

See note under OFFSET.
TRUE - The actual shell half thickness is used as the offset distance even for
large strains.

SUBTYPE [DEFAULT]
Indicates the type of CONTACT2 contact-surfaces, all defined in the global YZ plane.
{DEFAULT/AXISYMMETRIC/STRAIN/STRESS}

DEFAULT - Subtype automatically determined based on underlying elements.

AXISYMMETRIC - Axisymmetric contact-surfaces. The global Z axis is that of
rotational symmetry, and Y is the radial direction (Y 0).
STRAIN - Planar contact-surfaces.
STRESS - Planar contact-surfaces (identical to STRAIN).

RIGID-TARGET (obsolete) [NO]

Indicates whether rigid target contact algorithm is used for current contact group. It is
preferable to set XALGORITHM instead. {NO/YES}

7-290 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-291

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT3

CGROUP CONTACT3

This command is split, for better readability, based on the contact algorithm. There are 8
possibilities:

Implicit analysis
1. Constraint Function Algorithm
- ALGORITHM=CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION
- ALGORITHM=DEFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)=CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION
2. Segment Method Algorithm
- ALGORITHM=SEGMENT
- ALGORITHM=DEFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)=SEGMENT
3. Rigid Target Algorithm
- ALGORITHM=RIGID-TARGET
- ALGORITHM=DEFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)=RIGID-TARGET
4. Old Rigid Target Algorithm (version 8.3 now obsolete)
- Same as Case #3 with RT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=V83

Explicit analysis
5. Kinematic Constraint Algorithm
- XALGORITHM=KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT
- XALGORITHM=DEFAULT & XCONT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)= KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT
6. Penalty Algorithm
- XALGORITHM=PENALTY
- XALGORITHM=DEFAULT & XCONT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)=PENALTY
7. Rigid Target Algorithm
- XALGORITHM=EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET
- XALGORITHM=DEFAULT & XCONT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)=EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET
8. Old Rigid Target Algorithm (version 8.3 now obsolete)
- Same as Case #7 with RT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=V83

Note that:
- Algorithms #1, #2, #5 support node-to-node contact (the default is node-to-
segment) via parameter NODETONODE=YES.
- Algorithms #1, #2 support tied contact via parameter TIED=SMALL
- Algorithms #1, #2, #5, #6 support double-sided contact via parameter
PENETRATION-ALGORITHM=TWO

7-292 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT3 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

Auxiliary Commands

LIST CGROUP3 FIRST LAST

DELETE CGROUP3 FIRST LAST NODES

NODES = YES (the default) will remove nodes which were only attached to contact
segments in the deleted contact group.

The summary of parameters applicable for each contact algorithm is presented in two tables
following the command descriptions, one for implicit analysis and one for explicit analysis.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-293

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT3

Case 1: Implicit Constraint Function Algorithm

CGROUP CONTACT3 NAME ALGORITHM NODETONODE DISPLACEMENT

FRICTION CFACTOR1 PENETRATION-ALGORITHM
DEPTH TIED TIED-OFFSET OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE
FORCES TRACTIONS CONTINUOUS-NORMAL
DIRECTION

TBIRTH TDEATH INITIAL-PENETRATION TIME-

PENETRATION GAP-VALUE CS-EXTENSION EPSN
EPST CONSISTENT-STIFF FRIC-DELAY USER-FRICTION

HHATTMC FCTMC FTTMC EKTMC GAP-CONDUCTANCE

Activated when:
- ALGORITHM=CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION
- ALGORITHM=EFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)=CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION

The following superscripts are used for some of the parameters:

1. Only applicable to (the default) node-to-segment contact

2. Only applicable to node-to-node contact

The absence of a superscript indicates general applicability.

The CGROUP parameters are divided into 3 subgroups: Basic, Advanced, and Multiphysics:

Basic parameters

NAME [(current highest contact group label number) + 1]

Label number of the contact group to be defined.

ALGORITHM [DEFAULT]
Selects the contact algorithm for current group if the analysis is implicit. If DEFAULT is
selected the algorithm type is determined based on the CONTACT-ALGORITHM parameter
of the MASTER command. See comment above for activating the current contact algorithm.
{DEFAULT/ CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION/ SEGMENT-METHOD/ RIGID-TARGET}

NODETONODE [NO]
Indicates whether node-to-segment or node-to-node contact algorithm is used by the contact
group. {YES/NO}

7-294 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT3 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

NO - Use node-to-segment contact

YES - Use node-to-node contact

DISPLACEMENT 1 [DEFAULT]
Specifies the displacement formulation used for this contact group. {DEFAULT/LARGE/
SMALL}

DEFAULT - The displacement formulation specified in the CONTACT-CONTROL

command is used.
LARGE - Large displacement is assumed for contact where the contact search is
performed in each iteration to generate new contact constraints.
SMALL - Small displacement is assumed for contact. The contact constraints are
generated once in the beginning of the analysis and kept constant
throughout the analysis.

FRICTION [0.0]
Default coefficient of Coulomb friction. FRICTION = 0.0 indicates frictionless contact.
Contact pairs can set their own friction coefficient.

CFACTOR1 [0.0]
Compliance factor for all contact surfaces in this contact group. { 0.0}

PENETRATION-ALGORITHM1 [ONE]
The penetration algorithm can be chosen as follows:

ONE - Each contact surface is single-sided. You must insure that each contact surface
has proper orientation.
TWO - Each contact surface is double-sided. The contact surface orientation does not
matter. It is recommended that the nodal offset be greater than zero in this case.

DEPTH 1 [0.0]
This parameter is used when PENETRATION-ALGORITHM=ONE. If DEPTH > 0.0, then
penetration is detected when the penetration depth is less than or equal to DEPTH, and if the
penetration distance is greater than DEPTH, penetration is deemed not to occur.

TIED1 [NO]
Indicates the type of TIED contact. This parameter is ignored when PENETRATION-
ALGORITHM = TWO. {NO/SMALL}

NO - No TIED contact.
SMALL - Small displacement is used in TIED contact.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-295

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT3

TIED-OFFSET 1 [0.0]
If TIED = SMALL, contactor nodes are tied to target if the gap between them is less than or
equal to this parameter. This parameter is ignored when TIED = NO.

OFFSET [0.0 if PENETRATION-ALGORITHM = ONE]

[0.001 if PENETRATION-ALGORITHM = TWO]
For PENETRATION-ALGORITHM=ONE, the actual contact surface is raised a distance
OFFSET away from the surface defined by the nodes. { 0.0}

For PENETRATION-ALGORITHM=TWO, two contact surfaces are constructed for each

defined contact surface, each contact surface placed a distance OFFSET from the defined
contact surface. { 0.0}

Note: The OFFSET parameter specifies the default offset distance. For each individual
contact surface, a different offset distance can be specified using the command
CS-OFFSET.

OFFSET-TYPE [CONSTANT]
Specifies the type of offset to be used for contact surfaces belonging to this group.
{CONSTANT/TRUE/NONE}

CONSTANT - Constant offset as specified by the parameter OFFSET is used.

See note under OFFSET.
TRUE - The actual shell half thickness is used as the offset distance even for
large strains.
NONE - No offset is used (regardless of the value of the parameter OFFSET).

FORCES 1 [YES]
Indicates whether or not concentrated contact nodal forces are calculated for every contact
surface node of this contact group. The contact forces are evaluated with respect to the
global Cartesian coordinate system. {YES/NO}

Note: - If NODETONODE = YES, nodal forces are always calculated and this parameter is
ignored.
- The combination FORCES = NO, TRACTIONS = NO is not permitted.

TRACTIONS 1 [YES]
Indicates whether or not contactor segment tractions (and concentrated contact nodal forces
at solitary nodes in contact) are calculated for every contactor surface of this contact group.
{YES/NO}

Note: The combination FORCES = NO, TRACTIONS = NO is not permitted.

7-296 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT3 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

CONTINUOUS-NORMAL 1 [YES]
Indicates whether or not a continuous (interpolated) contact segment normal is to be used for
contact surfaces in the contact group. {YES/NO}

DIRECTION 2 [NORMAL]
Specifies the vector used to describe the normal direction for a nodal pair in node-to-node
contact. {NORMAL/VECTOR}

NORMAL - Use the normal vector inside the target body.

VECTOR - Use the vector connecting target and contactor nodes.

Advanced parameters

TBIRTH 1 [0.0]
TDEATH 1 [0.0]
The default birth and death times for the contact group. If TBIRTH=0.0 and TDEATH=0.0,
the birth and death feature is not used.

INITIAL-PENETRATION1 [ALLOWED]
Initial contactor node penetration flag.
{ALLOWED/PRINT/DISCARDED/GAP-OVERRIDE}

ALLOWED - Any initial penetration of a contactor node into a target surface is

eliminated either in the first solution step or over a specified time
interval (see TIME-PENETRATION parameter). In successive steps
each contactor node cannot penetrate.
PRINT - Same as ALLOWED, but a printout of the penetrating contactor nodes
is produced.
DISCARDED - Any initial penetration of a contactor node into a target surface is not
eliminated in the first solution step. In successive steps each
contactor node is allowed to penetrate up to the initial penetration.
GAP-OVERRIDE - Initial penetrations or gaps are overridden by user-specified GAP-
VALUE parameter either in the first solution step or over a specified
time interval (see TIME-PENETRATION parameter).

TIME-PENETRATION 1 [0.0]
Specifies the time used to eliminate or override any initial penetration. { 0.0}

If INITIAL-PENETRATION = ALLOWED or PRINT or GAP-OVERRIDE, and TIME-PEN-

ETRATION=0.0, then the initial penetration is eliminated or overridden in the first time step.
By specifying TIME-PENETRATION > 0.0, initial penetration can be eliminated or overrid-
den gradually. This may help in the convergence of the solution.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-297

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT3

GAP-VALUE 1 [0.0]
Specifies a constant gap distance between the contactor and target surfaces when INITIAL-
PENETRATION = GAP-OVERRIDE. This value overrides the value measured from the
contact surfaces. A negative GAP-VALUE means initial penetrations which will be eliminated.

CS-EXTENSION 1 [0.001]
The maximum non-dimensional extension of target contact surfaces.
{0.0 < CS-EXTENSION < 0.1}

EPSN [1.0E-12]
The normal contact w-function parameter. Guidelines for choosing this parameter are
provided in the ADINA-AUI Online Help. When EPSN = 0.0, ADINA automatically deter-
mines this parameter.

EPST [0.0]
The friction contact v-function T parameter. Guidelines for choosing this parameter are
provided in the ADINA-AUI Online Help. When EPST = 0.0, ADINA automatically sets it to
0.001.

CONSISTENT-STIFF 1 [DEFAULT]
Indicates whether consistent contact stiffness is used. {DEFAULT/OFF/ON}

When CONSISTENT-STIFF = DEFAULT, consistent contact stiffness is used if the following

conditions are all satisfied:
- the skyline direct equation solver is not used, i.e., SOLVER is not set to SKYLINE in the
MASTER command,
- CONTINUOUS-NORMAL = NO is specified.
- Old contact surfaces are used (CSTYPE=OLD in CONTACT-CONTROL command).
Otherwise, the default is set to off.

Note that this option is not used in small displacement analysis (DISPLACEMENT=SMALL in
the KINEMATICS command). It is also not used if small displacements are selected in the
contact group (DISPLACEMENT parameter).

The use of consistent contact stiffness increases the size of the stiffness matrix. However, it
can improve the convergence rate in contact problems, especially in cases where the normal
vector between the contacting surfaces frequently changes direction during the analysis.

FRIC-DELAY [NO]
Indicates whether the application of friction is delayed, i.e., applied one time step after
contact is established. {NO/YES}

7-298 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT3 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

USER-FRICTION 1 [NO]
Indicates whether a user-supplied friction law is used for this contact group. If USER-
FRICTION=YES is specified, additional parameters for defining the user-supplied friction law
can be input using the USER-FRICTION command. {YES/NO}

Multiphysics parameters

HHATTMC1 [0.0]
Default contact heat transfer coefficient used for thermo-mechanical coupling (TMC) analy-
sis. { 0.0}

FCTMC 1 [0.5]
Default friction heat distribution fraction for contactor surface used for thermo-mechanical
coupling (TMC) analysis. {0.0 FCTMC 1.0}

FTTMC 1 [0.5]
Default friction heat distribution fraction for target surface used for thermo-mechanical
coupling (TMC) analysis. {0.0 FTTMC 1.0}

EKTMC1 [0.0]
Default electrical conductivity for current flow through contact surfaces in a thermo-mechani-
cal coupling (TMC) analysis. (Units: electrical conductance/length, e.g., Siemens/m) {
0.0}

GAP-CONDUCTANCE [0]
The label number of GAP-CONDUCTANCE.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-299

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT3

Case 2: Implicit Segment Method Algorithm

CGROUP CONTACT3 NAME ALGORITHM NODETONODE DISPLACEMENT

FRICTION PENETRATION-ALGORITHM DEPTH TIED
TIED-OFFSET OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE FORCES
TRACTIONS CONTINUOUS-NORMAL DIRECTION

TBIRTH TDEATH INITIAL-PENETRATION TIME-

PENETRATION GAP-VALUE CS-EXTENSION
CONSISTENT-STIFF FRIC-DELAY USER-FRICTION

Activated when:
- ALGORITHM=SEGMENT-METHOD
- ALGORITHM=DEFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)=SEGMENT-METHOD

All the parameters for the Segment Method Algorithm are described in Case 1: Implicit -
Constraint Function Algorithm

7-300 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT3 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

Case 3: Implicit - Rigid Target Algorithm

CGROUP CONTACT3 NAME ALGORITHM FRICTION DEPTH TBIRTH

TDEATH NORMAL-STIFFNESS TENSILE-FORCE
SLIDING-VELOCITY OSCILLATION-CHECKING GAP-BIAS
OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE OFFSET-DETECT TENS-CONTACT
FREE-OVERLAP GAP-PUSH RIGID-TARGET

Activated when:
- ALGORITHM=RIGID-TARGET
- ALGORITHM=DEFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CON-
TROL)= RIGID-TARGET

For the following parameters, see description for Case 1: Implicit - Constraint Function
Algorithm

NAME
ALGORITHM
FRICTION
DEPTH
TBIRTH
TDEATH

NORMAL-STIFFNESS [1.0E11]
Contact stiffness in direction normal to the contact surface.

TENSILE-FORCE [0.001]
The maximum tensile contact force allowed for a converged solution.
{ 0.0}

SLIDING-VELOCITY [1E-10]
The maximum sliding velocity used in modeling sticking friction. When the velocity is smaller
than SLIDING-VELOCITY, sticking is assumed; when the velocity is larger than SLIDING-
VELOCITY, sliding is assumed. {>0.0}

OSCILLATION-CHECKING [5]
The intent of this parameter is to increase the likelihood of convergence during the equilib-
rium iterations. { 0.0}

OSCILLATION-CHECKING=0 turns off oscillation checking.

OSCILLATION-CHECKING>0 signals oscillation checking after equilibrium iteration OSCIL-

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-301

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT3

LATION-CHECKING. For example, when OSCILLATION-CHECKING=5, then oscillation

checking is activated after equilibrium iteration 5.

Oscillation checking consists of two checks:

a) If a contactor node oscillates between two neighboring target segments during the
equilibrium iterations, oscillation checking puts the contactor node into contact with the
boundary edge between the target segments.

b) In analysis with friction, if the sliding velocity of a contactor node oscillates during the
equilibrium iterations, oscillation checking puts the contactor node into sticking contact.

The oscillation check is only applied for the iteration in which the oscillation is detected.

GAP-BIAS [0.0]
Contact is detected when the distance between the target and contactor (accounting for any
offsets) is less than GAP-BIAS.
GAP-BIAS can be positive, negative or zero.

OFFSET [0.0]
The actual contact surface is raised a distance OFFSET away from the surface defined by the
nodes. { 0.0}

OFFSET-TYPE [CONSTANT]
Specifies the type of offset to be used for contact surfaces belonging to this group.
{CONSTANT/TRUE}

CONSTANT - Constant offset as specified by the parameter OFFSET is used.

TRUE - The actual shell half thickness is used as the offset distance even for
large strains.

OFFSET-DETECT [AUTOMATIC]
This parameter determines the implementation of offsets for the current rigid-target contact
algorithm. {NORMALS/SPHERES/AUTOMATIC}

NORMALS - Two surfaces are constructed for each contactor surface: an upper
surface and a lower surface. These surface are constructed using the
offsets and the averaged contactor normals. Contact is then detected
between points on the constructed contactor surfaces and target
surfaces.
SPHERES - A sphere with a radius equal to the offset is placed around each
contactor node, and contact is detected between the spheres and the
target surfaces.

7-302 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT3 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

AUTOMATIC - ADINA chooses the implementation based upon the shape of the
target surfaces; if a target surface is flat or convex, spheres are used,
otherwise normals are used.

TENS-CONTACT [NO]
This parameter controls the use of the tensile contact feature. {NO/YES}

FREE-OVERLAP [NO]
This parameter controls the use of the free overlap feature. {NO/YES}

GAP-PUSH [0.0]
This parameter controls the gap-push feature. { 0.0}

RIGID-TARGET (obsolete) [NO]

Indicates whether rigid target contact algorithm is used for current contact group. It is
preferable to set ALGORITHM instead. {NO/YES}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-303

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT3

Case 4: Implicit - Old Rigid Target Algorithm (version 8.3 - now obsolete)

Note: This is an obsolete algorithm that should only be used for backward compatibility.

CGROUP CONTACT3 NAME ALGORITHM FRICTION DEPTH TBIRTH

TDEATH NORMAL-STIFFNESS TANGENTIAL-STIFFNESS
PTOLERANCE OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE RESIDUAL-FORCE
LIMIT-FORCE ITERATION-LIMIT RTP-CHECK RTP-MAX
RIGID-TARGET

Activated when:
- ALGORITHM=RIGID-TARGET
- ALGORITHM=DEFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=
RIGID-TARGET
&
- RT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=V83

For the following parameters, see description for Case 1: Implicit - Constraint Function
Algorithm

NAME
ALGORITHM
FRICTION
DEPTH
TBIRTH
TDEATH

NORMAL-STIFFNESS [1.0E11]
Contact stiffness in direction normal to the contact surface.

TANGENTIAL-STIFFNESS [0.0]
Contact stiffness in direction tangential to the contact surface.

PTOLERANCE [1.0E-8]
Maximum allowable penetration of target surface. If penetration is less than PTOLERANCE,
contact is assumed to be not yet established for the node in consideration.

OFFSET [0.0]
The actual contact surface is raised a distance OFFSET away from the surface defined by the
nodes. { 0.0}

7-304 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT3 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

OFFSET-TYPE [CONSTANT]
Specifies the type of offset to be used for contact surfaces belonging to this group.
{CONSTANT/TRUE}

CONSTANT - Constant offset as specified by the parameter OFFSET is used.

TRUE - The actual shell half thickness is used as the offset distance even for
large strains.

RESIDUAL-FORCE [0.001]
Minimum tensile contact force required to change state of a contact node from "node in
contact" to "free node". If the normal component of a tensile contact force is less than
RESIDUAL-FORCE, a "node in contact" remains in contact. If the normal tensile force is
greater than RESIDUAL-FORCE, a "node in contact" becomes a "free node".

LIMIT-FORCE [1.0]
Limit (maximum) for the sum of all contact forces for nodes changing from the state of "node
in contact" to "free node". If the absolute value of the sum of the forces is bigger than
LIMIT-FORCE, then the automatic time stepping (ATS) method will be activated to subdivide
the current time step into smaller time increments.

ITERATION-LIMIT [2]
Maximum number of ATS time step subdivisions due to LIMIT-FORCE criterion described
above.

RTP-CHECK [NO]
Specifies whether penetration is checked (in addition to checking the tensile contact force)
against the maximum allowable penetration when the rigid-target algorithm is used. {NO/
RELATIVE/ABSOLUTE}

NO - Penetration is not checked. Note that with this setting, there is a

possibility that the rigid target surface may excessively penetrate the
contactor surface.
RELATIVE - Penetration is checked and RTP-MAX is specified as a factor of the
overall model size.
ABSOLUTE - Penetration is checked and RTP-MAX is the absolute value of
penetration allowed.

Note that if penetration check is selected, the program will perform subdivision of time steps
if the penetration exceeds the maximum allowable penetration. The subdivision scheme is
specified in the RT-SUBD parameter in the CONTACT-CONTROL command.

RTP-MAX [0.001]
Specifies the maximum allowable penetration when the rigid target algorithm is used.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-305

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT3

RTP-MAX is either a factor of the model size or an absolute value depending on the
RTP-CHECK parameter. {> 0.0}

RIGID-TARGET (obsolete) [NO]

Indicates whether rigid target contact algorithm is used for current contact group. It is
preferable to set ALGORITHM instead. {NO/YES}

7-306 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT3 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

Case 5: Explicit - Kinematic Constraint Algorithm

CGROUP CONTACT3 NAME XALGORITHM NODETONODE DISPLACEMENT

FRICTION PENETRATION-ALGORITHM DEPTH
OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE FORCES TRACTIONS
DIRECTION

TBIRTH TDEATH INITIAL-PENETRATION

TIME-PENETRATION GAP-VALUE CS-EXTENSION

Activated when:
- XALGORITHM=KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT
- XALGORITHM=DEFAULT & XCONT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CON-
TROL)= KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT

The following superscripts are used for some of the parameters:

1. Only applicable to (the default) node-to-segment contact

2. Only applicable to node-to-node contact

The absence of a superscript indicates general applicability.

The CGROUP parameters are divided into 2 subgroups: Basic and Advanced.

Basic parameters

NAME [(current highest contact group label number) + 1]

Label number of the contact group to be defined.

XALGORITHM [DEFAULT]
Selects the contact algorithm for current group if the analysis is explicit. If DEFAULT is
selected the algorithm type is determined based on XCONT-ALGORITHM variable of the
CONTACT-CONTROL command. See comment above for activating the current contact
algorithm.
{DEFAULT/KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT/PENALTY/EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET}

NODETONODE [NO]
Indicates whether node-to-segment or node-to-node contact algorithm is used by the contact
group. {YES/NO}

NO - Use node-to-segment contact

YES - Use node-to-node contact

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-307

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT3

DISPLACEMENT 1 [DEFAULT]
Specifies the displacement formulation used for this contact group. {DEFAULT/LARGE/
SMALL}

DEFAULT - The displacement formulation specified in the CONTACT-CONTROL

command is used.
LARGE - Large displacement is assumed for contact where the contact search is
performed in each iteration to generate new contact constraints.
SMALL - Small displacement is assumed for contact. The contact constraints are
generated once in the beginning of the analysis and kept constant
throughout the analysis.

FRICTION [0.0]
Default coefficient of Coulomb friction. FRICTION = 0.0 indicates frictionless contact.
Contact pairs can set their own friction coefficients.

PENETRATION-ALGORITHM1 [ONE]
The penetration algorithm can be chosen as follows:

ONE - Each contact surface is single-sided. You must insure that each
contact surface has proper orientation.
TWO - Each contact surface is double-sided. The contact surface orientation does not
matter. It is recommended that the nodal offset be greater than zero in this case.

DEPTH 1 [0.0]
This parameter is used when PENETRATION-ALGORITHM=ONE. If DEPTH > 0.0, then
penetration is detected when the penetration depth is less than or equal to DEPTH, and if the
penetration distance is greater than DEPTH, penetration is deemed not to occur.

OFFSET [0.0 if PENETRATION-ALGORITHM = ONE]

[0.001 if PENETRATION-ALGORITHM = TWO]
For PENETRATION-ALGORITHM=ONE, the actual contact surface is raised a distance
OFFSET away from the surface defined by the nodes. { 0.0}

For PENETRATION-ALGORITHM=TWO, two contact surfaces are constructed for each

defined contact surface, each contact surface placed a distance OFFSET from the defined
contact surface. { 0.0}

Note: The OFFSET parameter specifies the default offset distance. For each individual
contact surface, a different offset distance can be specified using the command
CS-OFFSET.

7-308 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT3 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

OFFSET-TYPE [CONSTANT]
Specifies the type of offset to be used for contact surfaces belonging to this group.
{CONSTANT/TRUE/NONE}

CONSTANT - Constant offset as specified by the parameter OFFSET is used.

See note under OFFSET.
TRUE - The actual shell half thickness is used as the offset distance even for
large strains.
NONE - No offset is used (regardless of the value of the parameter OFFSET).

FORCES 1 [YES]
Indicates whether or not concentrated contact nodal forces are calculated for every contact
surface node of this contact group. The contact forces are evaluated with respect to the
global Cartesian coordinate system. {YES/NO}

Note: - If NODETONODE = YES, nodal forces are always calculated and this parameter is
ignored.
- The combination FORCES = NO, TRACTIONS = NO is not permitted.

TRACTIONS 1 [YES]
Indicates whether or not contactor segment tractions (and concentrated contact nodal forces
at solitary nodes in contact) are calculated for every contactor surface of this contact group.
{YES/NO}

Note: The combination FORCES = NO, TRACTIONS = NO is not permitted.

DIRECTION 2 [NORMAL]
Specifies the vector used to describe the normal direction for a nodal pair in node-to-node
contact. {NORMAL/VECTOR}

NORMAL - Use the normal vector inside the target body.

VECTOR - Use the vector connecting target and contactor nodes.

Advanced parameters

TBIRTH 1 [0.0]
TDEATH 1 [0.0]
The default birth and death times for the contact group. If TBIRTH=0.0 and TDEATH=0.0,
the birth and death feature is not used.

INITIAL-PENETRATION1 [ALLOWED]
Initial contactor node penetration flag.
{ALLOWED/PRINT/DISCARDED/GAP-OVERRIDE}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-309

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT3

ALLOWED - Any initial penetration of a contactor node into a target surface is

eliminated either in the first solution step or over a specified time
interval (see TIME-PENETRATION parameter). In successive steps
each contactor node cannot penetrate.
PRINT - Same as ALLOWED, but a printout of the penetrating contactor nodes
is produced.
DISCARDED - Any initial penetration of a contactor node into a target surface is not
eliminated in the first solution step. In successive steps each
contactor node is allowed to penetrate up to the initial penetration.
GAP-OVERRIDE - Initial penetrations or gaps are overridden by user-specified GAP-
VALUE parameter either in the first solution step or over a specified
time interval (see TIME-PENETRATION parameter).

TIME-PENETRATION 1 [0.0]
Specifies the time used to eliminate or override any initial penetration. { 0.0}

If INITIAL-PENETRATION = ALLOWED or PRINT or GAP-OVERRIDE, and TIME-PEN-

ETRATION=0.0, then the initial penetration is eliminated or overridden in the first time step.
By specifying TIME-PENETRATION > 0.0, initial penetration can be eliminated or overrid-
den gradually. This may help in the convergence of the solution.

GAP-VALUE 1 [0.0]
Specifies a constant gap distance between the contactor and target surfaces when INITIAL-
PENETRATION = GAP-OVERRIDE. This value overrides the value measured from the
contact surfaces. A negative GAP-VALUE means initial penetrations which will be eliminated.

CS-EXTENSION 1 [0.001]
The maximum non-dimensional extension of target contact surfaces.
{0.0 < CS-EXTENSION < 0.1}

7-310 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT3 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

Case 6: Explicit Penalty Algorithm

CGROUP CONTACT3 NAME XALGORITHM DISPLACEMENT FRICTION

PENETRATION-ALGORITHM DEPTH OFFSET
OFFSET-TYPE FORCES TRACTIONS XKN-CRIT
XK-NORMAL XKT-CRIT XK-TANGENT XDAMP
XNDAMP

TBIRTH TDEATH INITIAL-PENETRATION

TIME-PENETRATION GAP-VALUE CS-EXTENSION

Activated when:

- XALGORITHM=PENALTY
- XALGORITHM=DEFAULT & XCONT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=
PENALTY

For the following parameters, see description for Case 5: Explicit - Kinematic constraint
algorithm

NAME
XALGORITHM
DISPLACEMENT
FRICTION
PENETRATION-ALGORITHM
DEPTH
OFFSET
OFFSET-TYPE
FORCES
TRACTIONS
TBIRTH
TDEATH
INITIAL-PENETRATION
TIME-PENETRATION
GAP-VALUE
CS-EXTENSION

XKN-CRIT [GLOBAL]
Criterion for evaluation of normal penalty stiffness.
{GLOBAL/USER}

GLOBAL - Penalty stiffness will be determined globally for the whole contact group.
USER - The user sets the penalty stiffness.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-311

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT3

XK-NORMAL [0.0]
The normal stiffness. It must be greater than 0.0. It is only used for XKN-CRIT=USER.

XKT-CRIT [GLOBAL]
Criterion for evaluation of tangential penalty stiffness. {GLOBAL/USER}

GLOBAL - Penalty stiffness will be determined globally for the whole contact group.
USER - The user sets the penalty stiffness.

XK-TANGENT [0.0]
The tangetial stiffness. It must be greater than 0.0. It is only used for XKT-CRIT=USER.

XDAMP [NO]
Indicates whether normal damping (proportional to the rate of penetration) is used.{NO/
RELATIVE/ABSOLUTE}

NO - Damping is not used, i.e., XNDAMP parameter is ignored.

RELATIVE - Damping is used and XNDAMP is a factor of the critical damping, i.e., the
normal contact damping coefficient is given by XNDAMP multiplied by
the critical damping. This is the recommended choice if damping is used.
ABSOLUTE - Damping is included and the normal contact damping coefficient is
specified directly by XNDAMP.

XNDAMP [0.1]
Specifies the relative or absolute normal damping coefficient (for normal penalty stiffness).
{ 0.0}

7-312 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT3 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

Case 7: Explicit - Rigid Target Algorithm

CGROUP CONTACT3 NAME XALGORITHM FRICTION DEPTH TBIRTH

TDEATH NORMAL-STIFFNESS SLIDING-VELOCITY
GAP-BIAS OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE OFFSET-DETECT
RIGID-TARGET

Activated when:
- XALGORITHM=EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET
- XALGORITHM=DEFAULT & XCONT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)= EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET

For the following parameters, see description for Case 5: Explicit - Kinematic constraint
algorithm

NAME
XALGORITHM
FRICTION
DEPTH
TBIRTH
TDEATH

NORMAL-STIFFNESS [1.0E11]
Contact stiffness in direction normal to the contact surface.

SLIDING-VELOCITY [1E-10]
The maximum sliding velocity used in modeling sticking friction, used only when friction is
included. When the velocity is smaller than SLIDING-VELOCITY, sticking is assumed; when
the velocity is larger than SLIDING-VELOCITY, sliding is assumed. {>0.0}

GAP-BIAS [0.0]
Contact is detected when the distance between the target and contactor (accounting for any
offsets) is less than GAP-BIAS. GAP-BIAS can be positive, negative or zero.

OFFSET [0.0]
The actual contact surface is raised a distance OFFSET away from the surface defined by the
nodes. { 0.0}

OFFSET-TYPE [CONSTANT]
Specifies the type of offset to be used for contact surfaces belonging to this group.
{CONSTANT/TRUE}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-313

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT3

CONSTANT - Constant offset as specified by the parameter OFFSET is used.

See note under OFFSET.
TRUE - The actual shell half thickness is used as the offset distance even for
large strains.

OFFSET-DETECT [AUTOMATIC]
This parameter determines the implementation of offsets for the current rigid-target contact
algorithm. {NORMALS/SPHERES/AUTOMATIC}

NORMALS - Two surfaces are constructed for each contactor surface: an upper
surface and a lower surface. These surface are constructed using the
offsets and the averaged contactor normals. Contact is then detected
between points on the constructed contactor surfaces and target
surfaces.
SPHERES - A sphere with a radius equal to the offset is placed around each
contactor node, and contact is detected between the spheres and the
target surfaces.
AUTOMATIC - ADINA chooses the implementation based upon the shape of the
target surfaces; if a target surface is flat or convex, spheres are used,
otherwise normals are used.

RIGID-TARGET (obsolete) [NO]

Indicates whether rigid target contact algorithm is used for current contact group. It is
preferable to set XALGORITHM instead. {NO/YES}

7-314 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CGROUP CONTACT3 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

Case 8: Explicit Old Rigid Target Algorithm (version 8.3 now obsolete)

Note: This is an obsolete algorithm that should only be used for backward compatibility

CGROUP CONTACT3 NAME XALGORITHM FRICTION DEPTH TBIRTH

TDEATH NORMAL-STIFFNESS TANGENTIAL-
STIFFNESS PTOLERANCE OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE
RIGID-TARGET

Activated when:
- XALGORITHM=EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET
- XALGORITHM=DEFAULT & XCONT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=
EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET
&
- RT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=V83

For the following parameters, see description for Case 5: Explicit - Kinematic constraint
algorithm

NAME
XALGORITHM
FRICTION
DEPTH
TBIRTH
TDEATH

NORMAL-STIFFNESS [1.0E11]
Contact stiffness in direction normal to the contact surface.

TANGENTIAL-STIFFNESS [0.0]
Contact stiffness in direction tangential to the contact surface.

PTOLERANCE [1.0E-8]
Maximum allowable penetration of target surface. If penetration is less than PTOLERANCE,
contact is assumed to be not yet established for the node in consideration.

OFFSET [0.0]
The actual contact surface is raised a distance OFFSET away from the surface defined by the
nodes. { 0.0}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-315

Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT3

OFFSET-TYPE [CONSTANT]
Specifies the type of offset to be used for contact surfaces belonging to this group.
{CONSTANT/TRUE}

CONSTANT - Constant offset as specified by the parameter OFFSET is used.

See note under OFFSET.
TRUE - The actual shell half thickness is used as the offset distance even for
large strains.

RIGID-TARGET (obsolete) [NO]

Indicates whether rigid target contact algorithm is used for current contact group. It is
preferable to set XALGORITHM instead. {NO/YES}

7-316 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

Summary of parameters applicable for each contact algorithm

(Implicit analysis)

* in the case of 3D contact, denotes only applicable to the old Rigid Target Algorithm
1 only applicable to 2D contact
2 only applicable to 3D contact

C O N TAC T A LGO RITHM

C O N S TR AIN T- F U N C TIO N S EGM EN T- M ETHO D RIG ID- TA RGET

N AM E N AM E N AM E
A LGO RITHM ALGO RITH M A LGO RITHM
F RIC TIO N F RIC TIO N F RIC TIO N
C FA C TO R1 O F F S ET DEP TH
O F F S ET O F F S ET- TYP E TBIRTH, TDEATH
O F F S ET- TYP E N O RM AL- S TIF F N ES S
F RIC - DELAY TEN S ILE- F O RC E
EP S N S UBTY P E 1 O F F S ET
EP S T O F F S ET- TYP E
F RIC - D ELAY S UBTY P E 1
S UBTYP E 1
S LIDIN G - VELO C ITY 2
N O D ETO N O DE = N O O S C ILLATIO N - C HEC K IN G 2
GA P BIAS 2
DIS P LAC EM EN T DIS P LAC EM EN T O F F S ET- DETEC T 2
P EN ETRATIO N - A LGO RITHM 2
P EN ETRATIO N - A LGO RITHM 2
TEN S - C O N TA C T 2
DEP TH D EP TH F REE- O V ERLA P 2
TIED TIED GA P - P U S H 2
TIED- O F F S ET TIED- O F F S ET
F O RC ES F O RC ES TAN GEN TIAL- S TIF F N ES S *
TRAC TIO N S TRA C TIO N S P TO LERAN C E*
C O N TIN UO US - N O RM AL C O N TIN UO US - N O RM A L RES IDUA L- F O RC E*
LIM IT- F O RC E*
TBIRTH, TDEATH TBIRTH, TDEATH ITERATIO N - LIM IT*
IN ITIAL- P EN ETRATIO N IN ITIAL- P EN ETRATIO N RTP - C HEC K *
TIM E- P EN ETRATIO N TIM E- P EN ETRATIO N RTP - M AX*
GA P - VA LUE GA P - VA LUE
C S - EX TEN S IO N C S - EX TEN S IO N
C O N S IS TEN T- S TIF F C O N S IS TEN T- S TIF F
US ER- F RIC TIO N US ER- F RIC TIO N

HH ATTM C
F C TM C
F TTM C
EK TM C
GA P - C O N DU C TA N C E

N O D ETO N O DE = Y ES

D IREC TIO N DIREC TIO N

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-317

Chap. 7 Model definition

Summary of parameters applicable for each contact algorithm

(Explicit analysis)

* in the case of 3D contact, denotes only applicable to the old Rigid Target Algorithm
1 only applicable to 2D contact
2 only applicable to 3D contact

C O N TAC T ALGO RITHM

K IN EM ATIC C O N STRAIN T PEN ALTY EXPLIC IT RIGID-TARGET

N AM E N AM E N AM E
XALGO RITHM XALGO RITHM XALGO RITHM
FRIC TIO N DISPLAC EM EN T FRIC TIO N
O FFSET FRIC TIO N DEPTH
O FFS ET-TYPE PEN ETRATIO N -ALGO RITHM 2
TBIRTH, TDEATH
S UBTYPE 1 DEPTH N O RM AL-STIFFN ESS
O FFSET O FFSET
O FFSET- TYPE O FFSET-TYPE
FO RC ES S UBTYPE 1
TRAC TIO N S
XK N -C RIT SLIDIN G-VELO C ITY 2
XK -N O RM AL GAPBIAS 2
XK T-C RIT O FFSET-DETEC T 2
XK -TAN GEN T
N O DETO N O DE = N O XDAM P TAN GEN TIAL-STIFFN ESS*
XN DAM P PTO LERAN C E*
DISPLAC EM EN T
PEN ETRATIO N -ALGO RITHM 2
TBIRTH, TDEATH
DEPTH IN ITIAL-PEN ETRATIO N
FO RC ES TIM E- PEN ETRATIO N
TRAC TIO N S GAP-VALUE
C S-EXTEN S IO N
TBIRTH, TDEATH S UBTYPE 1
IN ITIAL-PEN ETRATIO N
TIM E-PEN ETRATIO N
GAP-VALUE
C S -EXTEN SIO N

N O DETO N O DE = YES

DIREC TIO N

7-318 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONTACTBODY Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

CONTACTBODY NAME PRINT SAVE SOLID BODY

operationi typei labeli

Command CONTACTBODY defines a contact body, i.e. a geometry surface in 2D

analysis or a geometry volume in 3D analysis, which is expected to be in contact with a
defined contactsurface (from the command CONTACTSURFACE). This allows all the nodes
in the volume to potentially be in contact with a target surface. The target surface should still
be defined using the CONTACTSURFACE command.

Each data input line specifies an operation, entity type and entity label. For example, you can
create a contactbody composed of a geometry volume excluding a geometry point by
specifying two data input lines, the first line adding the volume and the second line subtract-
ing the point.

NAME [(current highest contactbody/surface number) + 1]

Label number of the contactbody to be defined. Note that the contactbody names are unique
only within a contact group, i.e. two different contact groups may each define its own
contactbody 1. Note also that the name must be distinguished from that in the
CONTACTSURFACE command, because a contactpair can be formed between a geometry
defined by the CONTACTBODY and a geometry defined by the CONTACTSURFACE.

PRINT [DEFAULT]
Flag controlling printout of the results of the contact analysis as determined by the FORCES
and TRACTIONS parameters of the CGROUP command. Choices are NO, YES and DE-
FAULT; when PRINT=DEFAULT, printout is controlled by the PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT
parameter.

SAVE [DEFAULT]
Flag controlling saving (to the porthole file) of the results of the contact analysis as
determined by the FORCES and TRACTIONS parameters of the CGROUP command. Choices
are NO, YES and DEFAULT; when SAVE=DEFAULT, saving is controlled by the PORTHOLE
SAVEDEFAULT parameter.

SOLID [NO]
Flag indicating whether the contact body is defined on a B-Rep solid model body. {NO/YES}

BODY
Geometry body label number of a B-Rep solid model. This parameter is required if
SOLID=YES.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-319

Chap. 7 Model definition CONTACTBODY

operationi [ADD]
The entity specified in this data line is either added to or subtracted from the contactbody.
{ADD/SUBTRACT}

typei
The type of the entity specified in this data line. The entity can either be a geometry entity
(POINT, LINE, SURFACE, VOLUME, EDGE, FACE, BODY) or a finite element entity (NODE).
Command line parameter SOLID must be YES if the type is EDGE, FACE or BODY and the
command line parameter BODY must be specified if the type is EDGE or FACE.

labeli
The label number of the entity.

Auxilary commands

LIST CONTACTBODY FIRST LAST

DELETE CONTACTBODY FIRST LAST

7-320 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONTACTSURFACE Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

CONTACTSURFACE NAME PRINT SAVE SOLID BODY ORIENTATION

SENSE

namei sensei bodyi

CONTACTSURFACE defines a contact-surface, i.e., a set of boundary entities which are

expected to be in contact either initially or during analysis with another similarly defined
contact-surface.

NAME [(current highest contactsurface label number) + 1]

Label number of the contact surface to be defined. Note that the contact-surface names are
unique only within a contact group, i.e., two different contact groups may each define its own
contact-surface 1.

PRINT [DEFAULT]
Flag controlling printout of the results of the contact analysis as determined by the FORCES
and TRACTIONS parameters of CGROUP. If DEFAULT is specified, printout is controlled by
PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

SAVE [DEFAULT]
Flag controlling saving (to the porthole file) of the results of the contact analysis as deter-
mined by the FORCES and TRACTIONS parameters of CGROUP. If DEFAULT is specified,
saving is controlled by the PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT parameter. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

SOLID [NO]
Indicates whether the contact surface is defined on solid body (or bodies). {NO/YES/
MULTI/BODY}

NO Contact surface is defined on native AUI geometry. Enter lines or surfaces in

the data input lines.

YES Contact surface is defined on a single solid body (specified by parameter

BODY). Enter edges or faces in the data input lines.

MULTI Contact surface is defined on surfaces/faces (3-D) or lines/edges (2-D) of

multiple bodies. Enter surfaces/faces or lines/edges in the data input lines.
For surfaces and lines, specify bodyi=0.

BODY Contact surface is defined on all faces of the specified bodies. If parameter
BODY = 0, the bodies are specified using data input lines. If parameter
BODY > 0, the body is specified bythe BODY parameter. Only for 3-D
contact.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-321

Chap. 7 Model definition CONTACTSURFACE

BODY [currently active body]

Geometry body label number.

ORIENTATION [AUTOMATIC]
Indicates contact surface orientation.

AUTOMATIC The sense flag for each component of the contact-surface is

determined automatically.

INPUT The sense flag for contact-surface components is input in the

following data lines.

SENSE [+1]
Default for the data line entry for contact-surface orientation. {+1/-1}

namei
Label of geometric entities used to define this contact surface. The type of geometric entity
depends on the contact group and the parameter SOLID as indicated below.

Contact Group SOLID namei

2-D NO line label

2-D YES edge label
3-D NO surface label
3-D YES face label
3-D MULTI surface or face label

sensei [SENSE]
Orientation flag for geometry component:

+1 contact-surface uses same orientation as geometry.

-1 contact-surface uses opposite orientation to geometry.

bodyi
Label of the parent solid body when namei is an edge label or a face label.

Note: The label numbers for contact-surface definitions include those defined by
commands CONTACTSURFACE, CONTACTPOINT and
CONTACT-FACENODES. Thus you cannot define CONTACTSURFACE 1 and
CONTACTPOINT 1, one would overwrite the prior definition.

7-322 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONTACTSURFACE Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

Auxiliary commands

LIST CONTACTSURFACE FIRST LAST

DELETE CONTACTSURFACE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-323

Chap. 7 Model definition CONTACTPOINT

CONTACTPOINT NAME PRINT SAVE POINT-TYPE

pointi tnxi tnyi tnzi

Defines a contact-point, i.e., a contact-surface defined as a set of geometry points or nodes

(in 2-D or 3-D analysis) which are expected to be in contact, either initially or during analysis,
with another similarly defined contact-point or contact-surface (see CONTACTSURFACE ).

Note:
This command is only available for node-to-node contact (i.e., NODETONODE=YES in the
CGROUP CONTACT... command).

NAME [(current highest contact point label number) + 1]

Label number of the contact-point to be defined. Note that the contact-point names are
unique only within a contact group, i.e., two different contact groups may each define its own
contact-point 1.

PRINT [DEFAULT]
Flag controlling printout of the results of the contact analysis as determined by the FORCES
and TRACTIONS parameters of CGROUP. If DEFAULT is specified, printout is controlled by
PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

SAVE [DEFAULT]
Flag controlling saving (to the porthole file) of the results of the contact analysis as
determined by the FORCES and TRACTIONS parameters of CGROUP. If DEFAULT is
specified, saving is controlled by PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

POINT-TYPE [GEOMETRY]
Specify whether geometry points or nodal points are used to define the contact surface.
{GEOMETRY/NODAL/NODESET}

pointi
Geometry point, nodal point, or node set label.

tnxi
X-component of normal vector directed inside target body.

tnyi
Y-component of normal vector directed inside target body.

tnzi
Z-component of normal vector directed inside target body.

7-324 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONTACTPOINT Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

Note: The label numbers for contact-surface definitions include those defined by
commands CONTACTSURFACE , CONTACTPOINT and
CONTACT-FACENODES. Thus you cannot define CONTACTSURFACE 1 and
CONTACTPOINT 1, one would overwrite the prior definition.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CONTACTPOINT FIRST LAST

DELETE CONTACTPOINT FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-325

Chap. 7 Model definition DRAWBEAD

DRAWBEAD NAME CONTACTOR TARGET1 TARGET2 HEIGHT R-FORCE

U-FORCE PRINT SAVE DF-PRINT TBIRTH TDEATH GTYPE
SLIDING-VELOCITY

namei

Defines a drawbead for metal forming analysis. This command is only active if the current
contact group is a rigid-target 3-D contact group.

NAME [(current highest DRAWBEAD label number) + 1 ]

Label number of the drawbead to be defined.

CONTACTOR
Specifies the contactor surface for the drawbead. A contactor surface is a contact surface that
is assigned as a contactor in a contact
pair definition.

TARGET1
Specifies the first target surface for the drawbead. A target surface is a contact surface that is
assigned as a target in a contact pair definition.

TARGET2
Specifies the second target surface for the drawbead.

HEIGHT
Specifies the drawbead height. {HEIGHT>0.0}

R-FORCE
Specifies the restraining force per unit length of the drawbead. {R-FORCE>0.0}

U-FORCE [0.0]
Specifies the uplifting force per unit length of the drawbead. {U-FORCE>=0.0}

PRINT [NO]
Indicates whether drawbead segment nodal forces are printed.

NO - do not print drawbead forces

R-FORCE - print only restraining forces
RU-FORCE - print restraining and uplifting forces

SAVE [NO]

7-326 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DRAWBEAD Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

Indicates whether drawbead segment nodal forces are saved.

NO - do not save drawbead forces
R-FORCE - save only restraining forces
RU-FORCE - save restraining and uplifting forces

DF-PRINT [NO]
Indicates whether drawbead segment distributed forces (traction) are printed and/or saved to
the porthole file.

NO - do not print/save distributed forces

YES - print/save distributed forces

Option DF-PRINT = YES takes effect only if drawbead segment nodal forces are printed/
saved (parameter PRINT or SAVE is set to R-FORCE or RU-FORCE).

TBIRTH [TBIRTH of contact group]

Specifies the birth time of the drawbead.

TDEATH [TDEATH of contact group]

Specifies the death time of the drawbead.

GTYPE [LINE]
Specifies the entity type used to define the drawbead. {LINE/NODE}

SLIDING-VELOCITY [1E-8]
The minimum velocity of the contactor surface through the drawbead for which the drawbead
develops the full restraining traction. {>0}

This parameter is used only by the current rigid-target algorithm.

namei
Specifies the geometry lines or nodes that defines the drawbead.

Auxiliary commands

LIST DRAWBEAD FIRST LAST

DELETE DRAWBEAD FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-327

Chap. 7 Model definition

This page intentionally left blank.

7-328 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
COULOMB-FRICTION Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

COULOMB-FRICTION

cpairi modeli A1i A2i A3i

Specifies variable Coulomb friction coefficient for each contact pair under the current contact
group. Note that this command is not available for rigid target contact (i.e., the parameter
RIGID-TARGET=YES is specified in the CGROUP command).

cpairi
Contact pair label number. If zero is specified, the parameter specified in the other fields of
this row will apply to all contact pairs.

modeli
Specifies the formula to define Coulomb friction coefficient . {LAW1/LAW2}

LAW1 = A1 [1.0 exp ( A2 Tn )] Tn

LAW2 = A2 + ( A1 A2 ) exp ( A3 Tn )

where Tn is normal contact pressure and A1, A2, A3 are constants.

A1i
Constant A1.

A2i
Constant A2.

A3i
Constant A3. This constant is only applicable if LAW2 is used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST COULOMB-FRICTION
DELETE COULOMB-FRICTION

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-329

Chap. 7 Model definition USER-FRICTION

USER-FRICTION

integeri reali

Specifies the integer and real parameters passed to the user-supplied friction subroutine
(FUSER) for the current contact group. Note that this feature cannot be used with the rigid
target contact option (i.e., RIGID-TARGET=YES is specified in the CGROUP command).

In the current implementation of FUSER, the first integer parameter is used to select a friction
model. Each friction model requires a number of real integer parameters as explained in
Section 4.3.2 of the Theory and Modeling Guide, Volume I (ADINA).

integeri
Integer number.

reali
Real number.

Auxiliary commands

LIST USER-FRICTION
DELETE USER-FRICTION

7-330 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CS-OFFSET Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

CS-OFFSET

csurfi offseti

Specifies offset distances for individual contact-surfaces under the current contact group. If
an individual contact surface is not specified here, the contact surface will use the default
offset distance specified by the OFFSET parameter in the CGROUP command.

csurfi
Contact surface label number.

offseti
Offset distance. { 0.0}

Note: This feature is not available for rigid target contact (i.e the parameter
RIGID-TARGET=YES is specified in the CGROUP command).

Auxiliary commands

LIST CS-OFFSET
DELETE CS-OFFSET

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-331

Chap. 7 Model definition CONTACTPAIR

CONTACTPAIR NAME TARGET CONTACTOR FRICTION

TBIRTH TDEATH HHATTMC FCTMC FTTMC
NX NY NZ OFFSET-CONTACT EKTMC
GAP-CONDUCTANCE

Defines a contact pair, i.e., two contact-surfaces (see CONTACTSURFACE ) which are
either initially in contact or are anticipated to come into contact during analysis. One contact
surface is termed the contactor contact-surface and must be deformable, i.e., has contact
segments associated with the boundary surfaces of deformable finite elements (i.e., with
nodes with free displacement degrees of freedom) within the model. The other contact-
surface which makes up the contact pair is termed the target contact-surface. The target
contact-surface may be deformable or have prescribed displacement.

Target surface
top surface
Body III of Body I
Contactor surface
top surface
of Body I
Contact Pair 2
Contact Pair 1

Contactor surface
Body II bottom surface
Target surface of Body III
bottom surface
of Body II

Body I

Three contact surfaces forming 2 contact pairs

7-332 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONTACTPAIR Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

NAME [(current highest contactpair label number) + 1]

Label number of the contact pair to be defined. The contactpair numbering is independent for
each contact group.

TARGET
Target contact-surface.

CONTACTOR
Contactor contact-surface.

Note: To specify self-contact, you may specify TARGET and CONTACTOR to be the
same contact surface.

FRICTION [CGROUP FRICTION]

Coefficient of friction between the target and contactor surfaces. FRICTION = 0.0 implies
the default friction specified by CGROUP command is used.

Note: Not applicable to node-to-node contact (NODETONODE=YES). Default contact

group parameter is used instead.

TBIRTH [0.0]
TDEATH [0.0]
The birth and death times for current contact pair. If TBIRTH=0.0 and TDEATH=0.0, the
default contact group birth and death times are used instead.

Note: Not applicable to node-to-node contact (parameter NODETONODE=YES) and

double-sided contact (PENETRATION=TWO). Default group parameters used
instead.

HHATTMC [0.0]
Contact heat transfer coefficient; used only when thermo-mechanical coupling is active.

FCTMC [0.5]
Friction contact heat distribution fraction coef. for contactor; used only when thermo-
mechanical coupling is active. {0.0 FCTMC 1.0}

FTTMC [0.5]
Friction contact heat distribution fraction coef. for target; used only when thermo-mechanical
coupling is active. {0.0 FTTMC 1.0}

NX [0]
NY
NZ
Number of sorting buckets in X, Y, Z direction. For 2D contact groups (CGROUP CONTACT2)

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-333

Chap. 7 Model definition CONTACTPAIR

parameter NX is ignored. { 0}

For rigid-target algorithm of version 8.3, 0 = 1 (set when writing data file).

For current rigid-target algorithm, 0 = automatically calculated by ADINA.

OFFSETCONTACT [BOTH]
This parameter is used only in the following special cases {LOWER/UPPER/BOTH}:

1) Current rigid-target algorithm, and

2a) CGROUP OFFSET-DETECT=NORMALS, or
2b) CGROUP OFFSET-DETECT=AUTOMATIC and ADINA chooses an offset implementation
using normals.

Then the contactor surface is split into two surfaces, an upper surface and a lower surface:

LOWER Only the lower surface can be in contact with the target.

UPPER Only the upper surface can be in contact with the target.

BOTH Both surfaces can be in contact with the target.

Note that OFFSETCONTACT is only used to provide a hint to the contact algorithm, to speed
up the searching.

EKTMC [0.0]
Electrical conductivity for current flow through contact surfaces in a thermo-mechanical
coupling (TMC) analysis. Applicable only if the constraint function algorithm is used in
implicit analysis, i.e., ALGORITHM = CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION in CGROUP CONTACT2/
3. (Units: electrical conductance/length, e.g., Siemens/m) { 0.0}

GAP-CONDUCTANCE [0]
The label number of GAP-CONDUCTANCE.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CONTACTPAIR FIRST LAST

DELETE CONTACTPAIR FIRST LAST

7-334 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONTACT3-SEARCH Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

CONTACT3-SEARCH BODY1 BODY2 CGROUP CSURFACE CPAIR DIST-TYPE

DIST-MAX DIST-MIN EXISTING

CONTACT3-SEARCH creates 3D contact surfaces and contact pairs between two bodies
within the given distance range.

BODY1
Label number of the first body. The contact surfaces defined by the faces of BODY1 will be
used as target surfaces in contact pair.

BODY2
Label number of the second body. The contact surfaces defined by the faces of BODY2 will
be used as contactor surfaces in contact pair. Please note that BODY1 and BODY2 cannot be
the same.

CGROUP [current 3D contact group label number]

3D contact group label number. The given 3D contact group needs to be defined before this
command is used.

CSURFACE [(current contact surface label number) + 1]

Contact surface label number. If the contact surface label number exists, it will be overwritten.

CPAIR [(current contact pair label number) + 1]

Contact pair label number. If the contact pair label number exists, it will be overwritten.

DIST-TYPE [CLOSEST]
Selects the type of distance that will be used to measure the distance between faces.

CLOSEST The shortest distance between faces

FACE-CENTER The distance between face centers

DIST-MAX
DIST-MIN [0.0]
Faces between BODY1 and BODY2 will be used to define contact surfaces and contact pairs
if the distance is between DIST-MIN and DIST-MAX.

EXISTING [OVERWRITE]
Indicates how existing contact surfaces and pairs in the contact group CGROUP are handled.
{OVERWRITE/REMOVE/KEEP}

OVERWRITE Existing contact surfaces and pairs are overwritten if their label
numbers are the same as the new contact surfaces and pairs
specified by CSURFACE and CPAIR parameters

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-335

Chap. 7 Model definition CONTACT3-SEARCH

REMOVE All existing contact surfaces and pairs are removed

KEEP Existing contact surface and pairs are kept. Hence, if the label numbers
specified in CSURFACE or CPAIR already exist, this command will give an
error.

7-336 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GAP-CONDUCTANCE Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions

GAP-CONDUCTANCE NAME OPTION MAX-GAP MAX-PRESS GAP0-COND

VARIATION TIME-FUNCTION

Controls the amount of heat transfer between closely adjacent (or contacting) surfaces using
either the clearance gap, contact pressure, or time function.

The gap conductance is referenced by the CONTACTPAIR and CGROUP commands.

NAME [(current gap conductance label number) + 1]

Label number of the gap conductance to be defined.

OPTION [GAP]
Defines the gap conductance option to be used. {GAP/PRESSURE/GAP-PRESSURE/
TIME}

GAP The gap conductance is a function of the clearance gap.

PRESSURE The gap conductance is a function of the contact pressure.

GAP-PRESSURE The gap conductance is a function of the clearance gap before

contact is established, and is a function of the contact pressure
after initial contact.

TIME The gap conductance is specified by the time function,

TIME-FUNCTION, after initial contact.

MAX-GAP [0.0]
Specifies the gap distance where heat conductance becomes zero. Used when OPTION=GAP
or GAP-PRESSURE. {> 0.0}

MAX-PRESS [OVERWRITE]
Specifies the contact pressure where full heat conductance occurs. Used when OPTION =
PRESSURE or GAP-PRESSURE. {> 0.0}

GAP0-COND [0.5]
Specifies the fraction of heat conductance at initial contact (i.e., gap equals zero) when
OPTION = GAP-PRESSURE {0.0 GAP0-COND 1.0 }

VARIATION [LINEAR]
Indicates how the conductance varies from zero to full value. Not used for OPTION=TIME.
{LINEAR/QUADRATIC}

TIME-FUNCTION [1]
Label number of the time function used when OPTION=TIME.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-337

Chap. 7 Model definition FRACTURE

FRACTURE TECHNIQUE METHOD DIMENSION TYPE PRESSURE

TEMPERATURE DYNAMIC LVUS3

FRACTURE defines the controlling data for analysis of fracture mechanics problems.

TECHNIQUE [STANDARD]
Defines whether standard or user-supplied fracture criteria / propagation models are used in
the analysis.

STANDARD Standard analysis model.

METHOD [VIRTUAL-CRACK-EXTENSION]
The method used for the fracture mechanics calculations. When METHOD=CONTOUR-
INTEGRAL, the domain integration method is used.{VIRTUAL-CRACK-EXTEN-
SION/LINE-CONTOUR/BOTH/SVS}

VIRTUAL-CRACK-EXTENSION
Virtual crack extension using the NVS method.

LINE-CONTOUR J-integral calculations using line contours.

BOTH Both VIRTUAL-CRACK-EXTENSION and LINE-CONTOUR.

SVS Virtual crack extension using the SVS method.

DIMENSION [2]
Dimension of fracture analysis. {2/3}

2 2-D crack.

3 3-D crack.

TYPE [STATIONARY]
Type of crack. {STATIONARY/PROPAGATION}

STATIONARY Analysis of a stationary crack.

PROPAGATION Analysis of a propagating crack.

PRESSURE [YES]
Pressure correction for virtual crack extension method. {YES/NO}

YES Pressure correction applied.

7-338 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FRACTURE Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

NO No correction.

TEMPERATURE [YES]
Temperature correction for virtual crack extension method. {YES/NO}

YES Temperature correction applied.

NO No correction.

DYNAMIC [YES]
Dynamic correction for virtual crack extension method. {YES/NO}

YES Dynamic correction applied.

NO No correction.

LVUS3 [0]
This parameter is obsolete.

Notes for METHOD:

NVS = nodal point virtual shift technique

SVS = station virtual shift technique

NVS selects the virtual crack extension method used in 9.0 and earlier. G is computed for 2D
or 3D cracks for virtual crack extension, for mapped meshes around the crack tip.

SVS is the method introduced in 9.1. G, KI, KII, KIII are computed for 3D cracks in mapped or
free-form meshes around the crack tip.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FRACTURE

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-339

Chap. 7 Model definition CRACK-GROWTH

CRACK-GROWTH CONTROL-TYPE J-VERSION FACTOR R-CURVE

LOCTYPE DOF SHIFT-RELEASE POINT NODE

CRACK-GROWTH specifies parameters which govern the growth of a propagating crack.

This command should be used whenever the FRACTURE command indicates a 2-D propagat-
ing crack.

CONTROL-TYPE [FIXED]
The type of crack growth control:

FIXED A fixed virtual material shift.

MOVING A moving virtual material shift.

NODAL A nodal degree of freedom.

J-VERSION [CORRECTIONS]
The version of the J-parameter used in crack growth control.

CORRECTIONS J-parameter with thermal, pressure and dynamic corrections.

NONE J-parameter without thermal, pressure and dynamic corrections.

FACTOR [1.0]
This parameter is not used any more, and is permanently set to 1.0 by the program.

R-CURVE [1]
The identifying number of a resistance curve used in crack growth control (see command R-
CURVE ). {POINT/NODE}

LOCTYPE [POINT]
The type of location where a specified degree of freedom is used to control the crack propa-
gation. {POINT/NODE}

DOF
The degree of freedom at the point (or node) used to control the crack propagation.

1 X-translation.

2 Y-translation.

3 Z-translation.

7-340 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CRACK-GROWTH Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

SHIFT-RELEASE [SHIFT-RELEASE]
Indicates the mesh updating method used for a propagating crack. See the Theory and
Modeling Guide for details.

SHIFT-RELEASE The node shift & release technique is used to model

the propagation of the crack tip through the finite
element mesh.

RELEASE Only the node release technique is applied, when the

crack opens.

POINT
The label number of a point where a specified degree of freedom is used to control the crack
propagation.

NODE
The label number of a node where a specified degree of freedom is used to control the crack
propagation.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CRACK-GROWTH

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-341

Chap. 7 Model definition CRACK-PROPAGATION

CRACK-PROPAGATION POINTS NAME

pointi nvshfti factori

CRACK-PROPAGATION LINES NAME

linei front-pointi nvshfti factori

CRACK-PROPAGATION SURFACES NAME

surfacei front-linei nvshfti factori

LINE
POINT

generator lines

initial crack front general direction of

crack propagation

CRACK-PROPAGATION defines the initial crack front position, or the virtual/actual crack
propagation path along which a crack would propagate.

This command should always be used in a fracture mechanics analysis, whether it is a

7-342 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CRACK-PROPAGATION Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

stationary or a propagating crack analysis. Note that in 2-D analysis, the crack front corre-
sponds to a single node the crack tip node. The virtual propagation path corresponds to a
single point or line of nodes starting at the crack tip node. The crack propagation line must
be parallel to the Y axis in 2D mode. In 3-D analysis, the crack front corresponds to a line of
nodes. The virtual/actual crack propagation path corresponds to a surface developed from
the crack front line along generator lines originating from the crack front nodes.

NAME [1]
The label number of the crack propagation surface. (At present only one crack is allowed.)

pointi
The label number of a geometry point.

linei
The label number of a geometry line.

surfacei
The label number of a geometry surface.

front-linei
The label number of a line which defines initial crack front.

front-pointi
The label number of a point which defines the initial crack front.

nvshfti
In the case of fixed virtual material shift (CRACK-GROWTH CONTROL-TYPE = FIXED) this
specifies the label number of virtual shift (defined by J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT command).

In the case of moving virtual material shift (CRACK-GROWTH CONTROL-TYPE = MOVING)

this specifies the number of rings of elements about the (moving) crack tip on the generator
line.

Parameter nvshfti is used only in crack propagation analysis (FRACTURE TYPE =PROPAGA-
TION).

factori
Resistance factor. This parameter is no longer used.

Auxiliary commands
LIST CRACK-PROPAGATION FIRST LAST
DELETE CRACK-PROPAGATION FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-343

Chap. 7 Model definition J-LINE POINT

J-LINE POINT NAME POINT RADIUS PRINT SAVE START-FACE

END-FACE

J-LINE POINT defines a line contour by using a circle defined by its center and radius.

The line contour is defined by a series of elements intersected by the circle.

elements in J-LINE contour

S
IU

POINT
D
RA

NAME [(current highest label number) + 1]

Label number of the line contour to be defined. If the label number of an existing line contour
is given, then the previous line contour definition is overwritten.

POINT [0]
The point label number; the center of the circle.

RADIUS [0.0]
The radius of the circle.

PRINT <not currently active>

SAVE <not currently active>

START-FACE [0]
If the first element of the contour does not have a unique face on the mesh boundary then
this parameter determines which face is selected to start the contour. START-FACE should

7-344 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
J-LINE POINT Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

be an integer in the range 0 - 4, inclusive. A zero value (the default) will cause the program to
select the face opposite that of the second element in the contour definition.

1 face N1-N2.

2 face N2-N3.

3 face N3-N4.

4 face N4-N1.

(Where N1, N2, N3, N4 are the element vertex nodes.)

END-FACE [0]
If the last element of the contour does not have a unique face on the mesh boundary then this
parameter determines which face is selected to terminate the contour. END-FACE should be an
integer in the range 0 - 4, inclusive. A zero value (the default) will cause the program to select
the face opposite that of the penultimate element in the contour definition.

1 face N1-N2.

2 face N2-N3.

3 face N3-N4.

4 face N4-N1.

(Where N1, N2, N3, N4 are the element vertex nodes.)

Auxiliary commands

LIST J-LINE POINT FIRST LAST

DELETE J-LINE POINT FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-345

Chap. 7 Model definition J-LINE RING

J-LINE RING NAME NRING POINT PRINT SAVE START-FACE END-

FACE

J-LINE RING defines a line contour by using a ring number. A ring of elements is defined
as follows. Given an origin node, ring number 1 consists of those elements connected at that
node. Ring number 2 then consists of all elements connected to (and including) the elements
in ring number 1, and so on. The line contour is defined by a series of elements. The origin
node of the ring is taken to be the one coincident with a given geometry point.

element in J-LINE contour

NRING=3

NAME [(current highest label number) + 1]

Label number of the line contour to be defined. If the label number of an existing line contour
is given, then the previous line contour definition is overwritten.

NRING [0]
Determines the number of rings of elements around the origin node.

POINT [0]
The point label number. The node at this point is at the ring origin.

PRINT <not currently active>

SAVE <not currently active>

START-FACE [0]
If the first element of the contour does not have a unique face on the mesh boundary then
this parameter determines which face is selected to start the contour. START-FACE should

7-346 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
J-LINE RING Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

be an integer in the range 0 - 4, inclusive. A zero value (the default) will cause the program to
select the face opposite that of the second element in the contour definition.

1 face N1-N2.

2 face N2-N3.

3 face N3-N4.

4 face N4-N1.

(Where N1, N2, N3, N4 are the element vertex nodes.)

END-FACE [0]
If the last element of the contour does not have a unique face on the mesh boundary then
this parameter determines which face is selected to terminate the contour. END-FACE should
be an integer in the range 0 - 4, inclusive. A zero value (the default) will cause the program to
select the face opposite that of the penultimate element in the contour defini- tion.

1 face N1-N2.

2 face N2-N3.

3 face N3-N4.

4 face N4-N1.

(Where N1, N2, N3, N4 are the element vertex nodes.)

Auxiliary commands

LIST J-LINE RING FIRST LAST

DELETE J-LINE RING FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-347

Chap. 7 Model definition J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT CRACK-M

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT CRACK-M NAME VSSCALE

The J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT CRACK-M command creates the virtual shifts and crack propagation
surface for a fracture mechanics analysis in which the CRACK-M commands were used to
create a 3D crack mesh.

NAME [(highest CRACK-M name]

Name (label number) of the CRACK-M crack front body.

VSSCALE [0.01]
Scale factor used to obtain the length of the virtual shift vector. The scale factor is relative to
the radius of ring 1 of the crack mesh, so a scale factor of 0.01 means that the virtual shift
vector has a length of 0.01 times the radius of ring 1 of the crack mesh.

Auxiliary command

LIST J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT CRACK-M

The LIST J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT CRACK-M command lists information about the virtual
shifts created by the last issued J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT CRACK-M command.

7-348 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT POINT Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT POINT NAME VECTOR VX VY VZ N3DSH

NORMAL NX NY NZ THICKNESS
POINT RADIUS

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT POINT defines a virtual material shift by using a sphere defined by its
center and radius.

POINT
US

nodes in
DI

virtual shift
RA

NAME [(current highest label number) + 1]

Label number of the virtual shift to be defined. If the label number of an existing virtual shift
is given, then the previous virtual shift definition is overwritten.

VECTOR [AUTOMATIC]
Controls whether the actual material shift vector is calculated internally by ADINA, or is
input via the global component values VX, VY, VZ below.

AUTOMATIC The shift vector is calculated automatically by ADINA, from the

crack surface definition (see CRACK-PROPAGATION ). In the
case of a 3-D crack, N3DSH is used to explicitly select a
generator line associated with the automatic shift vector
calculation.

INPUT The shift vector is input directly via VX, VY, VZ.

VX [0.0]
VY [0.0]
VZ [0.0]
The global components of the material shift vector.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-349

Chap. 7 Model definition J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT POINT

N3DSH [0]
Identifies a generator line of the crack surface with automatic shift vector calculation for a 3-D
crack. A zero value causes ADINA to calculate the shift vector based on the generator line
whose crack tip node appears first in the list of nodes which comprises the virtual shift
definition.

NORMAL [NONE]
Controls (for 3-D virtual material shift) whether or not the nodes of the shift are required to lie
in a disk of given thickness.

NONE The nodes of the shift are not required to lie in a disk.

AUTOMATIC The central plane of the disk is determined automatically from

the crack surface definition. The plane is taken to be perpendicu
lar to the crack tip node for the generator line associated with
parameter N3DSH.

INPUT The normal vector to the central plane of the disk is input via
NX, NY, NZ. The central plane of the disk passes through the
crack tip node for the generator line associated with parameter
N3DSH.

NX [0.0]
NY [0.0]
NZ [0.0]
The global components of the normal to the central plane of the disk in which shift nodes
must lie.

THICKNESS [1.0E-5]
The thickness of the disk containing the shift nodes. If NORMAL NONE then a positive
value for THICKNESS must be given.

POINT [0]
The label number of the point which is the center of the sphere.

RADIUS [0.0]
The radius of the sphere.

Auxiliary commands

LIST J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT POINT FIRST LAST

DELETE J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT POINT FIRST LAST

7-350 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT LINE Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT LINE NAME VECTOR VX VY VZ N3DSH

linei

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT LINE defines a virtual material shift. The shift is defined by those nodes
lying on any of a given set of lines.

NAME [(current highest label number) + 1]

Label number of the virtual shift to be defined. If the label number of an existing virtual shift
is given, then the previous virtual shift definition is overwritten.

VECTOR [AUTOMATIC]
Controls whether the actual material shift vector is calculated internally by ADINA, or is
input via the global component values VX, VY, VZ below.

AUTOMATIC The shift vector is calculated automatically by ADINA, from the

crack surface definition (see CRACK-PROPAGATION ). In the
case of a 3-D crack, parameter N3DSH may be used to explicitly
select a generator line associated with the automatic shift vector
calculation.

INPUT The shift vector is input directly via VX, VY, VZ.

VX [0.0]
VY [0.0]
VZ [0.0]
The global components of the material shift vector.

N3DSH [0]
Identifies a generator line of the crack surface with automatic shift vector calculation for a 3-D
crack. A zero value causes ADINA to calculate the shift vector based on the generator line
whose crack tip node appears first in the list of nodes which comprises the virtual shift
definition.

linei
Label number of a geometry line.

Auxiliary commands

LIST J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT LINE FIRST LAST

DELETE J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT LINE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-351

Chap. 7 Model definition J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT SURFACE

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT SURFACE NAME VECTOR VX VY VZ N3DSH

surfacei

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT SURFACE defines a virtual material shift. The shift is defined by those
nodes lying on any of a given set of surfaces.

NAME [(current highest label number) + 1]

Label number of the virtual shift to be defined. If the label number of an existing virtual shift
is given, then the previous virtual shift definition is overwritten.

VECTOR [AUTOMATIC]
Controls whether the actual material shift vector is calculated internally by ADINA, or is
input via the global component values VX, VY, VZ below.

AUTOMATIC The shift vector is calculated automatically by ADINA, from the

crack surface definition (see CRACK-PROPAGATION ). In the
case of a 3-D crack, parameter N3DSH may be used to explicitly
select a generator line associated with the automatic shift vector
calculation.

INPUT The shift vector is input directly via VX, VY, VZ.

VX [0.0]
VY [0.0]
VZ [0.0]
The global components of the material shift vector.

N3DSH [0]
Identifies a generator line of the crack surface with automatic shift vector calculation for a 3-D
crack. A zero value causes ADINA to calculate the shift vector based on the generator line
whose crack tip node appears first in the list of nodes which comprises the virtual shift
definition.

surfacei
Label number of a geometry surface.

Auxiliary commands

LIST J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT SURFACE FIRST LAST

DELETE J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT SURFACE FIRST LAST

7-352 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING NAME VECTOR VX VY VZ N3DSH NORMAL

NX NY NZ THICKNESS RING-TYPE
RING-NUMBER

namei

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING defines a virtual material shift by using a number of rings of

elements around the crack front points.

elements subject to
shifted elements virtual distortions

NRING = 3

nodes in virtual shift

NAME [(current highest label number) + 1]

Label number of the virtual shift to be defined. If the label number of an existing virtual shift
is given, then the previous virtual shift definition is overwritten.

VECTOR [AUTOMATIC]
Controls whether the actual material shift vector is calculated internally by ADINA, or is
input via the global component values VX, VY, VZ below.

AUTOMATIC The shift vector is calculated automatically by ADINA, from the

crack surface definition (see CRACK-PROPAGATION ). In the
case of a 3-D crack, parameter N3DSH may be used to explicitly
select a generator line associated with the automatic shift vector
calculation.

INPUT The shift vector is input directly via VX, VY, VZ.

VX [0.0]
VY [0.0]
VZ [0.0]
The global components of the material shift vector.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-353

Chap. 7 Model definition J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING

N3DSH [0]
Identifies a generator line of the crack surface with automatic shift vector calculation for a 3-D
crack. A zero value causes ADINA to calculate the shift vector based on the generator line
whose crack tip node appears first in the list of nodes which comprises the virtual shift
definition.

NORMAL [NONE]
Controls (for 3-D virtual material shift) whether or not the nodes of the shift are required to lie
in a disk of given thickness. {NONE/AUTOMATIC/INPUT}

NONE The nodes of the shift are not required to lie in a disk.

AUTOMATIC The central plane of the disk is determined automatically from

the crack surface definition. The plane is taken to be
perpendicular to the crack tip node for the generator line
associated with parameter N3DSH.

INPUT The normal vector to the central plane of the disk is input via
NX, NY, NZ. The central plane of the disk passes through the
crack tip node for the generator line associated with parameter
N3DSH.

NX [0.0]
NY [0.0]
NZ [0.0]
The global components of the normal to the central plane of the disk in which shift nodes
must lie.

THICKNESS [1.0E-5]
The thickness of the disk containing the shift nodes. If NORMAL NONE, a positive value
for THICKNESS must be given.

RING-TYPE [POINT]
The type of geometry on which the origin nodes lie. {POINT/LINE/SURFACE/NODE/
AUTOMATIC}

POINT The origin nodes are taken to be those at a set of points.

LINE The origin nodes are taken to be those lying on a set of lines.

SURFACE The origin nodes are taken to be those lying on a set of surfaces.

NODE The origin nodes are directly specified in the data input lines.

7-354 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

AUTOMATIC The origin nodes are automatically taken from all vertex nodes,
see notes at the end of this command description. See the
following note.

Note: When RING-TYPE=AUTOMATIC, the J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING command

creates one virtual shift for each vertex node on the crack generator line. This
generation is done by the ADINA command (creation of the .dat file).

RING-NUMBER [0]
Controls the number of rings of elements around the origin nodes.

0 Corresponds to a shift comprised of the origin nodes alone.

1 Includes the nodes of elements connected to the origin nodes.

Higher values of RING-NUMBER recursively define the shift such that RING-NUMBER = (n +
1) gives a shift including the nodes of elements containing any of the nodes defined in the
shift given by RING-NUMBER = n.

namei
Label number of the geometry entries (point, line or surface) or nodes according to the param-
eter RING-TYPE. For 3-D material virtual shifts, if the geometry entities are points, these points
must be vertices of elements, i.e. no points located at mid-side nodes should be specified.

Auxiliary commands

LIST J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING FIRST LAST

DELETE J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-355

Chap. 7 Model definition CRACK-M DEFINE

CRACK-M DEFINE NAME CFBODY1 CFFACE1 CFEDGE1 CFBODY2

CFFACE2 CFEDGE2 CSBODY1 CSFACE1 CSBODY2
CSFACE2

Defines a crack front. The crack front can be made up of 1 or 2 prismatic bodies. A crack front
is not allowed to form a closed loop (see CRACK-M COMBINE for 360 degree cracks).

NAME [(current highest label number) + 1]

Label of crack front.

CFBODY1
Crack front body 1.

CFFACE1
Crack front face 1.

CFEDGE1
Crack front edge 1.

CFBODY2 [0]
Crack front body 2. 0 if the crack front is single-bodied.

CFFACE2 [0]
Crack front face 2. 0 if the crack front is single-bodied.

CFEDGE2 [0]
Crack front edge 2. 0 if the crack front is single-bodied.

CSBODY1
Cracked surface body 1. Must be on the same side as the crack front body 1.

CSFACE1
Cracked surface face 1.

CSBODY2 [0]
Cracked surface body 2. Must be on the same side as the crack front body 2. 0 if the crack
front is single-bodied.

CSFACE2 [0]
Cracked surface face 2. 0 if the crack front is single-bodied.

7-356 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CRACK-M COMBINE Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

CRACK-M COMBINE NAME CRACKA CRACKB

Defines a crack front. The crack front can be made up of 1 or 2 prismatic bodies. A crack front
is not allowed to form a closed loop (see CRACK-M COMBINE for 360 degree cracks).

NAME [(current highest label number) + 1]

Label of crack front.

CRACKA
Crack A (see CRACK-M DEFINE command).

CRACKB
Crack B (see CRACK-M DEFINE command).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-357

Chap. 7 Model definition CRACK-M SUBDIVIDE

CRACK-M SUBDIVIDE NAME NDIVCF NDIVTAN1 NDIVTAN2 NDIVRAD

Subdivides a crack front.

NAME [(current highest label number) + 1]

Label of crack front.

NDIVCF
Number of subdivisions along the crack front.

NDIVTAN1
Number of subdivisions in the tangential direction for crack front body 1.

NDIVTAN2 [0]
Number of subdivisions in the tangential direction for crack front body 2.

NDIVRAD
Number of subdivisions in the radial direction.

7-358 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CRACK-M MESH Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

CRACK-M MESH NAME NODES NCTOLERA SUBSTRUC GROUP

MIDNODES

Meshes the crack front using mapped meshing.

NAME [(current highest label number) + 1]

Label of crack front.

NODES [8]
Number of element nodes. {8/20/27}

NCTOLERA
Tolerance used for nodal coincidence checking.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure label number]

Substructure label.

GROUP
Element group label.

MIDNODES [STRAIGHT]
Positioning of higher order nodes. {STRAIGHT/CURVED/PROJECT}

STRAIGHT Nodes are placed on the straight line between the relevant vertex nodes.

CURVED Nodes are placed on the underlying curved geometry.

PROJECT Nodes are projected from their straight positions onto the geometric
entities (body edge or face) they are associated with.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-359

Chap. 7 Model definition CRACK-M GBODY

CRACK-M GBODY NAME NODES NCTOLERA SUBSTRUC GROUP

MIDNODES

Meshes the crack front surface body using free-form meshing (pyramids are placed on the
boundary and tetrahedra fill the interior).

NAME [(current highest label number) + 1]

Label of body.

NODES [8]
Number of element nodes. {8/20/27}

NCTOLERA
Tolerance used for nodal coincidence checking.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure label number]

Substructure label.

GROUP
Element group label.

MIDNODES [STRAIGHT]
Positioning of higher order nodes. {STRAIGHT/CURVED/PROJECT}

STRAIGHT Nodes are placed on the straight line between the relevant vertex nodes.

CURVED Nodes are placed on the underlying curved geometry.

PROJECT Nodes are projected from their straight positions onto the geometric
entities (body edge or face) they are associated with.

7-360 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CRACK-M Q-POINT Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

CRACK-M Q-POINT POSITION

Places the higher order nodes at the quarter node or mid positions. This command may be
called after all the crack front bodies and crack front surface bodies have been meshed.

POSITION [QUARTER]
When QUARTER is selected, places the higher order nodes at the quarter node position.
When MID is selected, places the higher order nodes at the original middle positions.
{QUARTER/MID}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-361

Chap. 7 Model definition CRACK-SVS

CRACK-SVS
NAME ADV-OPTION ADV-NUMBER ADV-DISTANCE,
RADIUS-INNER RADIUS-MAXIMUM RADIUS-NUMBER RADIUS-RATIO,
BINORMAL-DIRECTION,
START-OPTION START-NODE START-POINT,
START-X START-Y START-Z START-SYSTEM,
SHIFT-OPTION SHIFT-VALUE,
GTYPE

namei bodyi sidei

This command defines a crack used in fracture mechanics analysis, when the SVS method is
used for calculation of stress intensity factors in 3-D analysis.

This command is active if FRACTURE METHOD=SVS.

See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Chapter 10, for more details concerning the SVS
method.

The crack is defined using element faces. Either the element faces are chosen using geometry
(surfaces or faces), or chosen using element face-sets.

NAME [highest existing name + 1]

Number assigned to this crack. There can be more than one crack defined in the model.

ADV-OPTION [NODES]
Controls the placement of the crack advance stations on the crack front.

NODES The crack advance stations are on the corner nodes of the crack front.

ADV-NUMBER The crack advance stations are equally spaced, and there are ADV-
NUMBER crack advance stations.

ADV-DISTANCE The crack advance stations are equally spaced, and the distance
between crack advance stations is approximately ADV-DISTANCE.

ADV-NUMBER [0]
The number of crack advance stations along the crack front, used when ADV-OPTION=ADV-
NUMBER. ADV-NUMBER must be equal to or greater than 2 for an open crack front, and
ADV-NUMBER must be equal to or greater than 3 for a closed crack front.

ADV-DISTANCE [0.0]
The approximate distance between crack advance stations, used when ADV-OPTION=ADV-
DISTANCE

7-362 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CRACK-SVS Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

RADIUS-INNER [0.0]
Inner radius for defining radial domains.

RADIUS-MAXIMUM
Maximum outer radius for defining radial domains. This parameter must be specified.

RADIUS-NUMBER [1]
Number of radial domains. {1}

RADIUS-RATIO [1.0]
Progression ratio for defining radial domains. {> 0}

BINORMAL-DIRECTION [UP]
The direction of the crack front binormal coordinate relative to the top cracked surface for an
enclosed crack, or relative to the cracked surface for a boundary crack, see Figure 8.
{UP/DOWN}

START-OPTION [LOWNUMBER]
The START-OPTION controls which node corresponds to the start of a closed crack front.
START-OPTION is not used for an open crack front.

LOWNUMBER The closed crack front starts at the node with lowest number

START-NODE The closed crack front starts at the node closest to the given
node.

START-POINT The closed crack front starts at the node closest to the given
geometry point

START-COORDINATES The closed crack front starts at the node closest to the given
coordinate.

See Figure 9. In all cases, the starting node of a closed crack front is an element corner node,
that is, the starting node of a closed crack front cannot be a mid-side node.

START-NODE [0]
When START-OPTION=START-NODE, the closed crack front starts at the node closest to
node START-NODE.

START-POINT [0]
When START-OPTION=START-POINT, the closed crack front starts at the node closest to
geometry point START-POINT.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-363

Chap. 7 Model definition CRACK-SVS

START-X [0.0]
START-Y [0.0]
START-Z [0.0]
When START-OPTION=START-COORDINATES, the closed crack front starts at the node
closest to coordinate START-X, START-Y, START-Z. START-X, START-Y, START-Z are
measured in the coordinate system START-SYSTEM.

START-SYSTEM [0]
The coordinate system used to define the coordinates START-X, START-Y, START-Z, used
when START-OPTION=START-COORDINATES. This coordinate system is defined using
the SYSTEM command.

SHIFT-OPTION [NO]
The mid-side, mid-face and mid-volume nodes for all higher-order elements adjacent to the
crack front can optionally be shifted towards the crack front, using parameter SHIFT-VALUE
{YES / NO}.

SHIFT-VALUE [0.25]
The shift value used when SHIFT-OPTION=YES. 0.5 corresponds to the mid-side nodes
place halfway between the corner nodes, 0.25 corresponds to the mid-side nodes shifted to
the quarter-points. However, any shift value between 0.25 and .0.75 can be used.

GTYPE [THREE-D]

THREE-D Crack specified with geometry surfaces and/or faces

ELFACESET Crack specified with element face-sets.

namei
Site label number. If GTYPE=THREE-D, then namei is either a geometry surface (body=0) or
a geometry face (body>0). If GTYPE=ELFACESET, then namei is an element face-set.

bodyi
Body label number, used only when GTYPE=THREE-D.

sidei

TOP: The element faces are on the top surface of the crack (used for enclosed cracks)

BOTTOM: The element faces are on the bottom surface of the crack (used for enclosed
cracks)

CRACKED The element faces are on the cracked surface (used for boundary cracks)

7-364 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CRACK-SVS Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

UNCRACKED The element faces are on the uncracked ligament (used for boundary
cracks)

Notes:

(1) The crack advance stations need not be coincident with the nodes on the crack front. See
Figure 6.

(2) When ADV-OPTION=ADV-DISTANCE, the number of crack advance stations is

N = NINT(crack-length / ADV-DISTANCE) + 1

and the distance between crack stations is

crack-length/(N - 1)

(3) The unit for RADIUS-INNER and RADIUS-MAXIMUM is the length unit of the model
(e.g., mm).

(4) Examples for radial domains are shown in Figures 3 and 4. The outer radius for radial
domain L is denoted rL . The following formulas apply:

rL rL 1
= RADIUS-RATIO .
rL 1 rL 2

rL RADIUS-INNER (RADIUS-RATIO) L 1
= ,
RADIUS-MAXIMUM RADIUS-INNER (RADIUS-RATIO) RADIUS-NUMBER 1
for RADIUS-RATIO not equal to 1.

r RADIUS-INNER I
= ,
RADIUS-MAXIMUM RADIUS-INNER RADIUS-NUMBER
for RADIUS-RATIO equal to 1.

(5) It is allowed to set RADIUS-INNER to zero.

(6) As a guideline, the outer radius of the domain of integration should fit within the "singu-
larity zone" corresponding to the crack tip. In other words, the FE field should have the
1/sqrt r singularity within the domain of integration.

(7) Mid-side nodes are shifted to the positions indicated by SHIFT-VALUE. Mid-face and

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-365

Chap. 7 Model definition CRACK-SVS

mid-volume nodes are also shifted correspondingly. Notice that mid-side nodes between
two nodes on the crack front are not shifted. See Figure 7.

(8) The crack and crack front are defined using data input lines namei, bodyi, sidei, as follows:

Enclosed crack:
Element faces on the top and bottom surfaces of the crack are chosen using namei,
bodyi, sidei. sidei must equal TOP or BOTTOM. The crack front is defined by those
element edges that are on both the specified top and bottom surfaces. See Figure 1.

Boundary crack:
Element faces on the cracked surface and uncracked ligament of the crack are chosen
using namei, bodyi, sidei. sidei must equal CRACKED or UNCRACKED. The crack front is
defined by those element edges that are on both the specified cracked and uncracked
surfaces. See Figure 2.

All side types must be either a combination of TOP and BOTTOM, or a combination of
CRACKED and UNCRACKED.

(9) The crack front can be either open or closed, as shown in Figure 5.

(10) The CRACK-SVS definition is automatically updated:

When the ADINA command is run.

When the GVOLUME or GBODY commands are run.
When the CRACK-M MESH or CRACK-M GBODY commands are run.
When the REBUILD-MODEL command is run.

This automatic updating is especially useful if the crack is defined using geometry, since the
updated FE mesh is used in the updating of the CRACK-SVS definition.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CRACK-SVS NAME

Lists information about the SVS crack.

DELETE CRACK-SVS NAME

Deletes the SVS crack.
.

7-366 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CRACK-SVS Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

Figure 1

Element faces on top

surface of enclosed crack

Element edges
on crack front

Element faces on bottom

surface of enclosed crack

Figure 2

Element edges
on crack front
Element faces on
uncracked surface
of boundary crack

Element faces on
cracked surface
of boundary crack

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-367

Chap. 7 Model definition CRACK-SVS

Figure 3

General case

Maximum outer radius (RADIUS-MAXIMUM)

Outer radius of domain L

Inner radius (RADIUS-INNER)

Domain L is shaded

One radial domain (RADIUS-NUMBER = 1), inner radius is non-zero

Maximum outer radius (RADIUS-MAXIMUM)

Inner radius (RADIUS-INNER)

One radial domain (RADIUS-NUMBER = 1), inner radius is zero

Maximum outer radius (RADIUS-MAXIMUM)

7-368 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CRACK-SVS Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

Figure 4

Two radial domains (RADIUS-NUMBER = 2), inner radius is non-zero, RADIUS-RATIO = 1.

Domain 1 Domain 2

Two radial domains (RADIUS-NUMBER = 2), inner radius is non-zero, RADIUS-RATIO > 1.

Domain 1 Domain 2

Two radial domains (RADIUS-NUMBER = 2), inner radius is zero, RADIUS-RATIO = 1.

Domain 1 Domain 2

Two radial domains (RADIUS-NUMBER = 2), inner radius is zero, RADIUS-RATIO > 1.
Domain 1 Domain 2

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-369

Chap. 7 Model definition CRACK-SVS

Figure 5

Open crack front Crack front Adjacent

coordinate element edge

Node

Crack front Element edge

coordinate = 0 on crack front

Closed crack front

Crack front
coordinate

7-370 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CRACK-SVS Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

Figure 6
Open crack front, crack advance stations at element corner nodes
Crack front coordinate

Crack advance
station 2
Crack advance Last crack
station 1 advance station

Closed crack front, crack advance stations at element corner nodes

Crack front coordinate
Crack advance
station 2

Crack advance
station 1

Last crack
advance station

Open crack front, equally spaced crack advance stations

Crack front coordinate

Crack advance
Crack advance station 2 Last crack
station 1 advance station

Closed crack front, equally spaced crack advance stations

Crack front coordinate
Crack advance
station 2

Crack advance
station 1
Last crack
advance station

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-371

Chap. 7 Model definition CRACK-SVS

Figure 7

SHIFT-OPTION=YES
Mid-side node,
Corner node at other end unshifted Mid-side node,
of adjacent element edge shifted Node on
crack front

L
SHIFT-VALUE  L

Typical elements with shifted nodes

7-372 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CRACK-SVS Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

Figure 8

Enclosed crack, Enclosed crack,

BINORMAL-DIRECTION = UP BINORMAL-DIRECTION = DOWN

Top surface b Top surface

a c
c a
Crack front
b Crack front

Bottom surface Bottom surface

Boundary crack, Boundary crack,

BINORMAL-DIRECTION = UP BINORMAL-DIRECTION = DOWN
Uncracked surface Uncracked surface
Cracked surface b Cracked surface
a c
a
c
b

Crack front Crack front

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-373

Chap. 7 Model definition CRACK-SVS

Figure 9

Position of
START-NODE,
START-POINT or
START-XYZ

Start of
closed crack
front

7-374 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CRACK-SVS Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-375

Chap. 7 Model definition R-CURVE

R-CURVE NAME MPOINT

thetai x1i y1i x2i y2i . . . xmi ymi

R-CURVE defines a resistance curve set which can be referenced by a crack growth analysis
(see CRACK-GROWTH ). Note that (xji, yji) comprises a data point on the resistance curve
associated with temperature thetai. The curve data is first sorted by increasing temperature
thetai, then by increasing crack increment xji.

If more than one data input line is entered, the values of xji must be the same for each data
input line.

NAME [(current highest R-CURVE label number) + 1]

Label number of the resistance curve set to be defined. If the label number of an existing
curve set is given, then the previous curve set definition is overwritten.

MPOINT
The maximum number of data points in any single resistance curve, defined in the subsequent
data lines.

thetai
Reference temperature for resistance curve i.

xji
Crack increment value at data point j on resistance curve i.

yji
Resistance value at crack-increment j on resistance curve i.

Auxiliary commands

LIST R-CURVE FIRST LAST

DELETE R-CURVE FIRST LAST

7-376 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-377

Chap. 7 Model definition SINGULAR POINT

SINGULAR POINT Q-POINT

pointi

SINGULAR LINE Q-POINT

linei

SINGULAR defines a set of singular nodes on geometry points/lines. These are element
vertex nodes whose adjacent non-vertex nodes are moved to the 1/4 point giving a singu-
larity at the required nodes.

node at point

singular node
singular node

node at point

Singular vertex on TWODSOLID and THREEDSOLID elements

Q-POINT [QUARTER]
Controls whether non-vertex nodes adjacent to the desired vertex nodes are moved to the 1/
4 point, or the opposite action is taken.

QUARTER Nodes are moved to the 1/4 point.

MID Nodes are moved from the 1/4 point back to the relevant mid-
side/face position.

pointi
Label number of a singular geometry point.

7-378 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SINGULAR POINT Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

linei
Label number of a geometry line defining a sequence of singular nodes, i.e., all element vertex
nodes associated with the geometry line.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SINGULAR
DELETE SINGULAR

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-379

Chap. 7 Model definition

This page intentionally left blank

7-380 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
USER-RUPTURE Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics

USER-RUPTURE NAME NR NI

reali integeri

Specifies user-defined rupture data.

NAME [(current highest USER-RUPTURE label number) + 1]

USER-RUPTURE label name {> 0}.

NR [0]
Total number of user-defined real data. Note that NR + NI must be greater than zero. { 0.0}

NI [0]
Total number of user-defined integer data. Note that NR + NI must be greater than zero.
{ 0.0}

reali [0]
User-defined real data.

integeri [0]
User-defined integer data.

Auxiliary commands

LIST USER-RUPTURE FIRST LAST

DELETE USER-RUPTURE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-381

Chap. 7 Model definition RIGIDLINK

RIGIDLINK NAME SLAVETYPE SLAVENAME MASTERTYPE

MASTERNAME DISPLACEMENTS OPTION SLAVEBODY
MASTERBODY DOF DOFSI GPOINT NCOINCIDE
NCTOLERANCE

slavenamei slavebodyi

Specifies rigid links between pairs of nodes on entities. As the nodes move under model
deformation, the slave node is constrained to translate and rotate such that the distance
between the master node and the slave node remains constant and the rotations at the
slave node are the same as the corresponding rotations at the master node.

A rigid link can be specified only between nodes in the main structure. The displacement
degrees of freedom at the master node must all be independent, i.e., they cannot be con-
strained to other degrees of freedom. Fixity conditions may, however, be specified for the
master node.

Different skew degree-of-freedom systems may be assigned for the master and slave nodes.
If either the master or slave node is a shell midsurface node, then six degrees of freedom is
uesd for both nodes.

Only the displacement degrees of freedom (translations and rotations) are constrained by a
rigid link. Other degrees of freedom, e.g., pipe ovalization, warping, and fluid potential, are
not constrained by a rigid link.

NAME [(highest rigid link label number) + 1]

The label number of the rigid link.

SLAVETYPE [POINT]
Indicates the type of entity used to specify slave nodes. {POINT/LINE/SURFACE/
EDGE/FACE/NODESET/VOLUME/BODY}

SLAVENAME
The label number of the slave entity (point, line, etc. as directed by parameter SLAVETYPE).

MASTERTYPE [POINT]
Indicates the type of the entity used to specify master nodes. {POINT/LINE/SURFACE/
EDGE/FACE/NODESET}

MASTERNAME
The label number of the master entity (point, line, etc. as directed by parameter
MASTERTYPE).

7-382 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RIGIDLINK Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

OPTION = 0

slave surface u
master line v
u
rigid
u rigid links
links
v
u

slave line master surface

u

OPTION = 1

slave line u rigid

rigid links
u links u
v v

slave surface
master line u

master surface

DISPLACEMENTS [DEFAULT]
Specifies whether the constraint equations in ADINA are for kinematically linear (infinitesi-
mal displacements), or large displacements. DISPLACEMENTS = DEFAULT indicates that
displacements are controlled by the KINEMATICS command. {SMALL/LARGE/DE-
FAULT}

OPTION [0]
{0/1/2/3/4}
When multiple nodes exist on both the slave and master geometry entities, OPTION indicates

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-383

Chap. 7 Model definition RIGIDLINK

how the rigid link between nodes on each entity is defined.

0 A rigid link is constructed between nodes at the corresponding parametric order on
each entity. Parametric order is in the increasing u-parameter direction for lines,
increasing u- then v-parameter for surfaces. In this case the number of nodes on
the slave and master geometry entities must be the same.

1 A rigid link is constructed for each node on the slave geometry entity to the closest
node on the master geometry entity. In this case, the number of nodes need not be
the same for the slave and master geometry entities.

2 A rigid link is constructed between slave node to master node using reverse u
parametric order. Applies to line/edge and surface/face.

3 A rigid link is constructed between slave node to master node using reverse v
parametric order. Applies to surface/face.

4 A rigid link is constructed between slave node to master node using reverse u and v
parametric order. Applies to surface/face.

SLAVEBODY [currently active BODY]

Indicates the solid geometry body used to reference a slave edge or face when SLAVETYPE
= EDGE or FACE, respectively.

MASTERBODY [currently active BODY]

Indicates the solid geometry body used to reference a master edge or face when
MASTERTYPE = EDGE or FACE, respectively.

Note: Only the following SLAVETYPE, MASTERTYPE combinations are allowed:

SLAVETYPE MASTERTYPE
POINT POINT
LINE POINT
LINE LINE
SURFACE POINT
SURFACE SURFACE
EDGE POINT
EDGE EDGE
FACE POINT
FACE FACE
NODESET any
any NODESET

DOF [ALL]
Indicates whether all relevant slave DOFs are constrained to the master node.

7-384 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RIGIDLINK Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

{ALL/MASTER}

ALL All relevant slave DOFs are constrained to the master node.

MASTER The slave DOF is only constrained where the corresponding master DOF is
not fixed. Note that DOF = MASTER is only used if DISPLACEMENTS =
SMALL and all rotational degrees of freedom on the master node is fixed.

GPOINT [YES]
Creates a node at the geometry point when SLAVETYPE=POINT or MASTERTYPE=POINT.
{YES/NO}

NCOINCIDE [ALL]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking. {ALL/NO}

ALL The global coordinates of the generated node is compared against those of
existing nodes. If there is coincidence, then no new node is created at that
location, and the constraint is applied to the existing node.

NO No nodal coincidence checking is carried out. A new node is always created

and the constraint is applied to this node.

NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCE GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

slavenamei
Slave geometry label (TYPE = SLAVETYPE). If SLAVETYPE = EDGE or FACE , all Slave
geometry belongs to SLAVEBODY.

slavebodyi
Geometry body label for slavename if SLAVETYPE=EDGE or FACE

DOFSI [123456]
Specifies the slave degrees of freedom (dof) to be constrained to the master node. DOFSI
must contain 1 to 6 digits ranging from 1 to 6. Dofs 1, 2, 3 indicate X, Y, Z translations and 4,
5, 6 indicate X, Y, Z rotations.

Auxiliary commands
LIST RIGIDLINK FIRST LAST
DELETE RIGIDLINK FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-385

Chap. 7 Model definition CONSTRAINT

CONSTRAINT NAME SLAVETYPE SLAVENAME SLAVEDOF MASTERTYPE

SBODY OPTION GENERALIZED-CONSTRAINT TRANSFORMATION
GPOINT NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE

masternamei masterdofi betai mbodyi

Specifies a constraint set which expresses a slave (dependent) degree of freedom as a linear
combination of a set of master (independent) degrees of freedom. The slave and master
degrees of freedom are input by reference to geometry entities or node sets.

A constraint equation can only reference nodes in the main structure.

A constraint equation at a slave degree of freedom is unique. Therefore, if several constraint

equations are input for the same slave degree of freedom, then only that for the highest label
number will be used.

A fluid potential slave degree of freedom can have only fluid potential master degrees of
freedom, and a displacement (translation, rotation) slave degree of freedom can have only
displacement master degrees of freedom. Constraint equations cannot refer to pipe
ovalization or warping degrees of freedom.

Note that constraint equations necessary to enforce a rigid link between two geometry
entities can be defined using the RIGIDLINK command.

NAME [(highest constraint set label number) + 1]

The label number of the constraint set.

SLAVETYPE [POINT]
Indicates the type of entity used to specify slave nodes. {POINT/LINE/SURFACE/
VOLUME/EDGE/FACE/BODY/NODESET}

SLAVENAME
The label number of the slave entity as directed by SLAVETYPE.

SLAVEDOF
The degree of freedom associated with the slave geometry entity. {X-TRANSLATION/ Y-
TRANSLATION/Z-TRANSLATION/X-ROTATION/Y-ROTATION/Z-ROTATION/
ALL-TRANSLATION/ALL-ROTATION/FLUID-POTENTIAL/TEMPERATURE/
VOLTAGE}

SLAVEDOF = TEMPERATURE is only available when MASTER TMC = YES.

7-386 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONSTRAINT Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

MASTERTYPE [POINT]
Indicates the type of entity used to specify master nodes. {POINT/LINE/ SURFACE/
EDGE/FACE/NODESET}

Note: Only the following SLAVETYPE, MASTERTYPE combinations are allowed:

SLAVETYPE MASTERTYPE
POINT POINT,NODESET
LINE POINT,LINE,NODESET
SURFACE POINT,SURFACE,NODESET
EDGE POINT,EDGE,NODESET
FACE POINT,FACE,NODESET
NODESET any
VOLUME any
BODY any

SBODY [currently active body]

The label number of the geometry slave body (used when SLAVETYPE=EDGE or FACE).

OPTION [0]
When multiple nodes exist on both the slave and master geometry entities, OPTION indicates
how the constraint between nodes on each entity are defined. OPTION is only applicable
when constraining line to line, edge to edge, surface to surface, and face to face. OPTION= 1
or 5 is used for all other cases. {0/1/2/3/4/5}

0 A constraint is constructed between nodes at the corresponding parametric order

on each entity. Parametric order is in the increasing u-parameter direction for
lines, increasing u- then v-parameter for surfaces. In this case the number of
nodes on the slave and master geometry entities must be the same.

1 A constraint is constructed for each node on the slave entity to the

closest node on the master entity. In this case, the number of nodes need
not be the same for the slave and master entities.

2 Constrain slave node to master node using reverse u parametric order. Applies to
line/edge and surface/face.

3 Constrain slave node to master node using reverse v parametric order. Applies to
surface/face.

4 Constrain slave node to master node using reverse u and v parametric order.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-387

Chap. 7 Model definition CONSTRAINT

5 A constraint is constructed for a single node on the slave POINT entity to all nodes
on the master NODESET entity.

GENERALIZED-CONSTRAINT [NO]
Generate generalized constraints instead of standard constraints.
{NO/YES}

TRANSFORMATION [0]
Transformation label number which is applied to slave geometry entity when OPTION = 1.

GPOINT [YES]
Creates a node at the geometry point when SLAVETYPE=POINT or MASTERTYPE=POINT.
{YES/NO}

NCOINCIDE [ALL]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking. {ALL/NO}

ALL The global coordinates of the generated node is compared against those of
existing nodes. If there is coincidence, then no new node is created at that
location, and the constraint is applied to the existing node.

NO No nodal coincidence checking is carried out. A new node is always created

and the constraint is applied to this node.

NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCE GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

masternamei
The label number of the master entity as directed by MASTERTYPE for the ith independent
term of the constraint.

masterdofi
The degree of freedom of the master entity for the ith independent term of the constraint.
Possible values are the same as for SLAVEDOF.

betai [1.0]
The coefficient of the ith independent term of the constraint. Note that this value remains
constant throughout the time history of the response. A zero value is not accepted since it
implies no contribution to the linear combination of independent master degrees of freedom.

mbodyi [currently active body]

The label number of the geometry master body (used when MASTERTYPE = EDGE or
FACE).

7-388 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONSTRAINT Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

Note: For a cyclic symmetric analysis, constraint equations may be applied to degrees of
freedom within the fundamental part, but in this case similar constraint equations
for corresponding degrees of freedom in all other cyclic parts of the structure will
be applied.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CONSTRAINT FIRST LAST

DELETE CONSTRAINT FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-389

Chap. 7 Model definition

This page intentionally left blank

7-390 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONSTRAINT-MS Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

CONSTRAINT-MS NAME MASTERTYPE MASTERNAME MASTERDOF

SLAVETYPE MBODY OPTION GENERALIZED-CONSTRAINT
GPOINT NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE

slavenamei slavedofi betai sbodyi

This command is similar to the CONSTRAINT command. The difference between the CON-
STRAINT-MS and CONSTRAINT commands is that CONSTRAINT-MS allows the specifica-
tion of multiple slave entities for a single master entity.

Note that constraint equations that are necessary to enforce a rigid link between two geom-
etry entities can be defined using the RIGIDLINK command.

NAME [(highest constraint-ms set label number) + 1]

The label number of the constraint-ms set.

MASTERTYPE [POINT]
Indicates the type of the geometry entity used to specify master nodes.
{POINT/LINE/SURFACE/VOLUME/EDGE/FACE/BODY/NODESET}

MASTERNAME
The label number of the master entity as directed by MASTERTYPE.

MASTERDOF
The degree of freedom associated with the master entity.
{X-TRANSLATION/Y-TRANSLATION/Z-TRANSLATION/X-ROTATION/
Y-ROTATION/Z-ROTATION/ALL-TRANSLATION/ALL-ROTATION/
FLUID-POTENTIAL/TEMPERATURE/VOLTAGE}

SLAVEDOF = TEMPERATURE is only available when MASTER TMC = YES.

SLAVETYPE [POINT]
Indicates the type of entity used to specify slave nodes.
{POINT/LINE/SURFACE/VOLUME/EDGE/FACE/BODY/NODESET}

MBODY [currently active body]

The label number of the geometry master body (used when MASTERTYPE=EDGE or FACE).

OPTION [0]
When multiple nodes exist on both the slave and master geometry entities, OPTION indicates
how the constraint between nodes on each entity is defined.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-391

Chap. 7 Model definition CONSTRAINT-MS

OPTION is only applicable when constraining line to line, edge to edge, surface to surface,
and face to face. OPTION= 1 is used for all other cases.{0/1/2/3/4}

0 A constraint is constructed between nodes at the corresponding parametric order

on each entity. Parametric order is in the increasing u-parameter direction for
lines, increasing u- then v-parameter for surfaces. In this case the number of
nodes on the slave and master geometry entities must be the same.

1 A constraint is constructed for each node on the slave geometry entity to the
closest node on the master geometry entity. In this case, the number of nodes need
not be the same for the slave and master entities.

2 Constrain slave node to master node using reverse u parametric order.

3 Constrain slave node to master node using reverse v parametric order. Applies to
surface/face.

4 Constrain slave node to master node using reverse u and v parametric order. Applies
to surface/face.

GENERALIZED-CONSTRAINT [NO]
Generate generalized constraints instead of standard constraints. {NO/YES}

GPOINT [YES]
Creates a node at the geometry point when SLAVETYPE=POINT or MASTERTYPE=POINT.
{YES/NO}

NCOINCIDE [ALL]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking. {ALL/NO}

ALL The global coordinates of the generated node is compared against those of
existing nodes. If there is coincidence, then no new node is created at that
location, and the constraint is applied to the existing node.

NO No nodal coincidence checking is carried out. A new node is always created

and the constraint is applied to this node.

NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCE GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

7-392 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONSTRAINT-MS Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

slavenamei
The label number of the slave entity as directed by SLAVETYPE for the ith independent
term of the constraint.

slavedofi
The degree of freedom of the slave geometry entity for the ith independent term of the
constraint. Possible values are the same as for MASTERDOF.

betai [1.0]
The coefficient of the ith independent term of the constraint. Note that this value remains
constant throughout the time history of the response. A zero value is not accepted since it
implies no contribution to the linear combination of independent master degrees of freedom.

sbodyi [currently active body]

The label number of the geometry slave body (used when SLAVETYPE = EDGE
or FACE).

Auxiliary commands

LIST CONSTRAINT-MS FIRST LAST

DELETE CONSTRAINT-MS FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-393

Chap. 7 Model definition CONSTRAINT-G

CONSTRAINT-G NAME

nodei dofi betai

Defines a generalized linear constraint equation between specified degrees of freedom.

None of the degrees of freedom are made dependent (there are no slave degrees of freedom).
The generalized constraints are imposed using Lagrange Multipliers, and can only be applied
to nodes and not geometric entities.

Note that GLUEMESH automatically creates generalized constraint equations that enforce
glueing.

NAME [(highest generalized constraint label number) + 1]

Label number of the generalized constraint.

nodei
Node label associated with the ith term (degree of freedom) in the generalized constraint
equation.

dofi
Degree of freedom (global or skew direction) at nodei.{X-TRANSLATION /
Y-TRANSLATION / Z-TRANSLATION / X-ROTATION / Y-ROTATION /
Z-ROTATION / VOLTAGE / FLUID-POTENTIAL}

betai
Coefficient for the ith term.

7-394 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FIXITY Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

FIXITY NAME

dofi

FIXITY defines a fixity boundary condition which is referenced by FIXBOUNDARY, which

assigns the fixity to a given geometry entity. All degrees of freedom are assumed free unless
fixed by this command (subject to the overall control of active degrees of freedom as deter-
mined by MASTER ).

NAME
The identifying name of the fixity condition (1 to 30 alphanumeric characters).

Note: The following predefined fixities exist (and cannot be updated):

ALL All degrees of freedom are fixed.

NONE No degrees of freedom are fixed.

dofi
Degree(s) of freedom to be fixed. {X-TRANSLATION/Y-TRANSLATION/
Z-TRANSLATION/X-ROTATION/Y-ROTATION/Z-ROTATION/OVALIZATION/
FLUID-POTENTIAL/PORE-FLUID-PRESSURE/BEAM-WARP/TEMPERATURE/
VOLTAGE}

Note: The fixity conditions will be applied to the nodes of the model, albeit indirectly,
via the model geometry. The translations and rotations of the fixity thus refer to
the degree-of-freedom system at each node, which may be the global coordinate
system or a skewsystem. (See SKEWSYSTEM, DOF-SYSTEM ).

Auxiliary commands

LIST FIXITY NAME

DELETE FIXITY NAME

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-395

Chap. 7 Model definition

This page intentionally left blank

7-396 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FIXBOUNDARY Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

FIXBOUNDARY POINTS FIXITY

pointi fixityi

FIXBOUNDARY LINES FIXITY

linei fixityi

FIXBOUNDARY SURFACES FIXITY

surfacei fixityi

FIXBOUNDARY VOLUMES FIXITY

volumei fixityi

FIXBOUNDARY EDGES FIXITY BODY

edgei fixityi

FIXBOUNDARY FACES FIXITY BODY

facei fixityi

FIXBOUNDARY BODIES FIXITY

bodyi fixityi

FIXBOUNDARY NODE-SETS FIXITY

node-seti fixityi

FIXBOUNDARY ELFACE FIXITY

elfaceseti fixityi

FIXBOUNDARY ELEDGE FIXITY

eledgeseti fixityi

FIXBOUNDARY TWO-D FIXITY

namei bodyi fixityi

FIXBOUNDARY THREE-D FIXITY

namei bodyi fixityi

FIXBOUNDARY assigns fixity conditions to a set of nodes through geometric entities, node
sets, element-face sets or element-edge sets.

FIXITY [ALL]
Default fixity condition (see command FIXITY ) for geometry entities given in the subsequent
data lines.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-397

Chap. 7 Model definition FIXBOUNDARY

BODY [currently active BODY]

Body label number.

pointi
Label number of a geometry point.

linei
Label number of a geometry line.

surfacei
Label number of a geometry surface.

volumei
Label number of a geometry volume.

edgei
Label number of a geometry edge (for BODY).

facei
Label number of a geometry face (for BODY).

bodyi
Label number of a geometry body.
For FIXBOUNDARY TWO-D, when body i = 0, the geometry name is LINE.
For FIXBOUNDARY THREE-D, when body i = 0, the geometry name is SURFACE.

node-seti
Label number of a node-set.

fixityi [FIXITY]
Fixity condition to be applied at the geometry entity.

elfaceseti
Label number of an element-face set as defined by the ELFACESET command. The nodes
associated with the element-face sets are assigned the fixity condition.

eledgeseti
Label number of an element-edge set as defined by the ELEDGESET command. The nodes
associated with the element-edge sets are assigned the fixity condition.

namei
For FIXBOUNDARY TWO-D:
Label number of LINE (bodyi = 0) or EDGE (bodyi > 0).

7-398 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FIXBOUNDARY Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

For FIXBOUNDARY THREE-D:

Label number of SURFACE (bodyi = 0) or FACE (bodyi > 0).

Auxiliary commands

LIST FIXBOUNDARY POINTS FIRST LAST

DELETE FIXBOUNDARY POINTS FIRST LAST

LIST FIXBOUNDARY LINES FIRST LAST

DELETE FIXBOUNDARY LINES FIRST LAST

LIST FIXBOUNDARY SURFACES FIRST LAST

DELETE FIXBOUNDARY SURFACES FIRST LAST

LIST FIXBOUNDARY VOLUMES FIRST LAST

DELETE FIXBOUNDARY VOLUMES FIRST LAST

LIST FIXBOUNDARY EDGES FIRST LAST

DELETE FIXBOUNDARY EDGES FIRST LAST

LIST FIXBOUNDARY FACES FIRST LAST

DELETE FIXBOUNDARY FACES FIRST LAST

LIST FIXBOUNDARY BODIES FIRST LAST

DELETE FIXBOUNDARY BODIES FIRST LAST

LIST FIXBOUNDARY NODE-SETS FIRST LAST

DELETE FIXBOUNDARY NODE-SETS FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-399

Chap. 7 Model definition ZOOM-BOUNDARY

ZOOM-BOUNDARY NAME GTYPE

namei bodyi

Specifies the boundary of a mesh overlay model that is inside (internal to) the coarse model
(see Figure A). Note that if no zoom boundary is defined, all the boundary of the mesh
overlay model will be treated as being inside the coarse model (see Figure B, next page).

This part of the boundary of

the mesh overlay needs to be
specified as internal boundary

Mesh overlay model Coarse model

Figure A: Internal boundary must be defined

NAME [current highest ZOOM-BOUNDARY label number + 1]

Label number of the ZOOM-BOUNDARY to be defined.

GTYPE [TWO-D]
{TWO-D / THREE-D / NODESET}

The geometry type used to define ZOOM-BOUNDARY.

TWO-D line or edge

THREE-D surface or face
NODESET node set

7-400 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ZOOM-BOUNDARY Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

Since the mesh overlay model

is completely inside the coarse
model, there is no need to identify
the internal boundary.

Mesh Overlay Model Coarse Model

Figure B: No need to define internal boundary

namei
List of geometry label numbers or node set numbers.

bodyi
Geometry body label of edges and faces.

Auxiliary commands

LIST ZOOM-BOUNDARY FIRST LAST

DELETE ZOOM-BOUNDARY FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-401

Chap. 7 Model definition ENDRELEASE

ENDRELEASE NAME MOMENT1 MOMENT2 MOMENT3 MOMENT4

MOMENT5 MOMENT6

Defines an endrelease condition for elements of type BEAM, which may be used to
prescribe that selected end forces and/or moments of the elements are zero. The endrelease
may be referenced (e.g. by LINE-ELEMDATA ) to assign the endrelease to the elements (on a
given geometry line).

node AUX lies in

AUX r-s plane
s

r S8

t S11
S7
S10
S2
S5 S12 S9

S4 node 2
S1 neutral axis
S6 S3 Z
node 1

X Y

NAME [(current highest endrelease label number) + 1]

The label number of the endrelease condition to be defined.

MOMENTi [0]
List of up to six identifiers (i = 1,...,6) indicating which of the element end forces on moments
are prescribed to be zero. See Figure.

1 Force in r-direction at local node 1 = 0.0.

2 Force in s-direction at local node 1 = 0.0.

3 Force in t-direction at local node 1 = 0.0.

7-402 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ENDRELEASE Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

4 Moment about r-axis at local node 1 = 0.0.

5 Moment about s-axis at local node 1 = 0.0.

6 Moment about t-axis at local node 1 = 0.0.

7 Force in r-direction at local node 2 = 0.0.

8 Force in s-direction at local node 2 = 0.0.

9 Force in t-direction at local node 2 = 0.0.

10 Moment about r-axis at local node 2 = 0.0.

11 Moment about s-axis at local node 2 = 0.0.

12 Moment about t-axis at local node 2 = 0.0.

13 Bimoment at local node 1 = 0.0 (applicable only for the warping beam).

14 Bimoment at local node 2 = 0.0 (applicable only for the warping beam).

0 No selection.

Auxiliary commands

LIST ENDRELEASE FIRST LAST

DELETE ENDRELEASE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-403

Chap. 7 Model definition FSBOUNDARY

FSBOUNDARY LINES NAME

linei
FSBOUNDARY SURFACES NAME
surfacei
FSBOUNDARY EDGES NAME BODY
edgei
FSBOUNDARY FACES NAME BODY
facei
FSBOUNDARY ELFACE NAME BODY
elfaceseti
FSBOUNDARY ELEDGE NAME BODY
eledgeseti

Defines a fluid-structure boundary using geometric lines, edges, surfaces, faces, element-
edge sets or element-face sets. A fluid-structure boundary is the region of the structure that
interacts with an ADINA CFD model. It is referenced by the FSBOUNDARY parameter of the
BOUNDARY-CONDITION FLUID-STRUCTURE command in the ADINA CFD model input.

NAME [(current highest fsboundary label number) + 1]

Label number of the fluid-structure-boundary to be defined.

BODY
Body label number.

linei
Geometry line label number.

surfacei
Geometry surface label number.

edgei
Geometry edge label number (for BODY).

facei
Geometry face label number (for BODY).

7-404 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FSBOUNDARY Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

facei
Geometry face label number (for BODY).

elfaceseti
Element-face set label number as defined by the command ELFACESET.

eledgeseti
Element-edge set label number as defined by the command ELEDGESET.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FSBOUNDARY FIRST LAST

DELETE FSBOUNDARY FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-405

Chap. 7 Model definition FSBOUNDARY TWO-D

FSBOUNDARY TWO-D NAME

namei bodyi

Defines a fluid-structure-interaction boundary, as a set of geometry lines/edges (2D analysis)

that establish those areas of the structure to be analysed using ADINA. This boundary may
interact with a fluid flow analysed by ADINA-F.

Note that the FSBOUNDARY defined is not referenced by another ADINA-IN for ADINA
command, but rather may be referenced by the BOUNDARY-CONDITION FLUID-STRUC-
TURE command for ADINA-F.

NAME [(current highest fsboundary label number) + 1]

Label number of the fluid-structure-boundary to be defined.

namei
Geometry line/edge label number.

bodyi
Geometry body label number.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FSBOUNDARY FIRST LAST

DELETE FSBOUNDARY FIRST LAST

7-406 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FSBOUNDARY THREE-D Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

FSBOUNDARY THREE-D NAME

namei bodyi

Defines a fluid-structure-interaction boundary, as a set of geometry surfaces/faces (3D

analysis) that establish those areas of the structure to be analysed using ADINA. This
boundary may interact with a fluid flow analysed by ADINA-F.

Note that the FSBOUNDARY defined is not referenced by another ADINA-IN for ADINA
command, but rather may be referenced by the BOUNDARY-CONDITION FLUID-STRUC-
TURE command for ADINA-F.

NAME [(current highest fsboundary label number) + 1]

Label number of the fluid-structure-boundary to be defined.

namei
Geometry line/edge label number.

bodyi
Geometry body label number.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FSBOUNDARY FIRST LAST

DELETE FSBOUNDARY FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-407

Chap. 7 Model definition POTENTIAL-INTERFACE

POTENTIAL-INTERFACE ADINA-F NAME GTYPE BODY

POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FLUID-FLUID NAME GTYPE BODY

POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FLUID-STRUCTURE NAME GTYPE BODY

POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FREE-SURFACE NAME GTYPE BODY

POTENTIAL-INTERFACE INLET-OUTLET NAME GTYPE BODY

POTENTIAL-INTERFACE RIGID-WALL NAME GTYPE BODY

namei bodyi

Defines an interface between potential-based fluid elements and structural elements.

NAME [(current potential-interface label number) + 1]

Label number of the potential-interface to be defined.

GTYPE [LINES]
The type of geometry used to define the potential-interface.
{LINES/SURFACES/EDGES/FACES/THREE-D/NODES/NODESETS/ELEMENT-
EDGE/ELEMENT-FACE}

BODY [1]
Label number of a solid geometry body. Must be specified when GTYPE=EDGES or FACES.

namei
Label number of a geometry entity or node.

bodyi [0]
Label number of a solid geometry body. Used when GTYPE=THREE-D and namei is a face.
bodyi=0 means that namei is a surface.
Auxiliary commands

LIST POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FIRST LAST

DELETE POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FIRST LAST

7-408 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE INFINITE Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

POTENTIAL-INTERFACE INFINITE NAME GTYPE BODY INFTYPE RADIUS

PRESSURE VELOCITY ALL-EXT

namei bodyi

Defines an interface between potential-based fluid elements and an infinite boundary.

NAME [(current potential-interface label number) + 1]

Label number of the potential-interface to be defined.

GTYPE [LINES]
The type of geometry used to define the infinite potential-interface.
{LINES/SURFACES/EDGES/FACES/THREE-D/NODESETS}

BODY [1]
Label number of a solid geometry body. Must be specified when GTYPE=EDGES or FACES.

INFTYPE [PLANAR]
The type of infinite boundary.
{PLANAR/CYLINDRICAL/SPHERICAL}

RADIUS [1.0]
The radius of cylinder or sphere.

PRESSURE [0.0]
The pressure at infinity, used only for a planar infinite boundary in conjunction with the
subsonic formulation for the potential-based fluid elements.

VELOCITY [0.0]
The velocity at infinity, used only for a planar infinite boundary in conjunction with the
subsonic formulation for the potential-based fluid elements. The velocity is assumed to be
normal to the planar boundary and is positive for flow out of the planar boundary.

ALL-EXT

namei
Label number of a geometry entity or node.

bodyi [0]
Label number of a solid geometry body. Used when GTYPE=THREE-D and namei is a face.
bodyi=0 means that namei is a surface.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-409

Chap. 7 Model definition POTENTIAL-INTERFACE INFINITE

Auxiliary commands

LIST POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FIRST LAST

DELETE POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FIRST LAST

7-410 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BOUNDARY-SURFACE SURFACE-TENSION Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

BOUNDARY-SURFACE SURFACE-TENSION NAME GTYPE ALL-EXT NODES

SUBTYPE SIGMAT

namei bodyi

Defines a surface tension boundary for ADINA.

NAME [(current highest surface-tension label number) + 1]

Label number of the surface-tension to be defined.

GTYPE [TWO-D]
The type of geometry used to define the surface boundary condition.
{TWO-D/THREE-D/ELEMENT-EDGESET/ELEMENT-FACESET}

ALL-EXT
(Currently not used)

NODES [0]
Number of nodes for each element. Only used if the surface tension
boundary is not attached to any finite elements. {0/2/3/4/8/9}

SUBTYPE [PLANE]
The type of 2-D surface tension boundary. Only used if the boundary is not attached to any
finite elements. If the boundary is attached to finite elements, the subtype of the 2-D finite
elements will be used. {AXISYMMETRIC/PLANE}

SIGMAT [0.0]
Surface tension value.

namei
Label number of a geometry entity or element edge/face set.

bodyi [0]
Label number of a solid geometry body. Used when GTYPE=TWO-D/THREE-D and namei
is a face or edge. bodyi=0 means that namei is a surface or line.

Auxiliary commands

LIST BOUNDARY-SURFACE ALL FIRST LAST

DELETE BOUNDARY-SURFACE ALL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-411

Chap. 7 Model definition OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT POINT

OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT POINT TYPE

pointi

Enforces the zero-slope-of-skin in the longitudinal direction for pipe element nodes.

TYPE

FLANGE The flange condition is applied at the specified points. Both

ovalization and warping at these points are suppressed.

SYMMETRY The symmetry condition is applied to the specified points. The

ovalization at these points is left free but the warping suppressed.

pointi
A point label number where the constraint of the ovalization derivative is enforced.

Auxiliary commands

LIST OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT POINT FIRST LAST

DELETE OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT POINT FIRST LAST

7-412 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
FREESURFACE Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

FREESURFACE

linei (for FLUID2 element groups)

or

surfacei (for FLUID3 element groups)

Defines the free surface on the boundary lines (2-D) or surface (3-D) of previously-defined
surfaces (2-D) or volumes (3-D) consisting of potential-based elements.

linei
Geometry line label number.

surfacei
Geometry surface label number.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-413

Chap. 7 Model definition

This page intentionally left blank.

7-414 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BCELL Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

BCELL NAME REVERSE

celli n1i n2i n3i n4i

Defines a boundary cell using 4-node or 3-node cells. A boundary cell must be defined by all
3-node cells or all 4-node cells. It cannot be defined by a mixture of 3-node and 4-node cells.

NAME [(current highest bcell label number) + 1]

Label number of the boundary cell to be defined.

REVERSE [NO]
{NO/YES}
Normal direction reverse flag.

celli
Cell label number.

n1i n2i n3i n4i

Node labels for celli .

Auxiliary commands

LIST BCELL FIRST LAST

DELETE BCELL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-415

Chap. 7 Model definition COHESIVE-INTERFACE

COHESIVE-INTERFACE NAME GTYPE PSET NONLINEAR PRINT SAVE

CONTACT

namei bodyi

Defines a cohesive interface. The command splits the mesh only during datafile generation or
when rebuilding the model.

NAME [(current highest cohesive-interface label number) + 1]

Label number of the cohesive interface to be defined.

GTYPE [TWOD]
The geometry type. {TWOD/THREED/ELEDGE/ELFACE}

TWOD Line or edge

THREED Surface or face

ELEDGE Element-edge set

ELFACE Element-face set

PSET [1]
Label number of cohesive property set.

NONLINEAR [NO]
Specifies whether springs in this group has nonlinear effects. {NO/GEOM}

NO Spring is linear

GEOM Spring properties may be nonlinear and geometric nonlinearities are taken into
account

PRINT [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the PRINTDEFAULT
parameter of the PRINTOUT command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

SAVE [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the SAVEDEFAULT
parameter of the PORTHOLE command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

7-416 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
COHESIVE-INTERFACE Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

CONTACT [NO]
Determines whether a contact surface is created along the cohesive interface. {NO/YES}
NO No contact surface will be created along the cohesive interface

YES A contact surface will be created along the cohesive interface

namei
Geometry label number.

bodyi
Geometry body label number.

Note that if a fixity, initial condition or skew system is applied on cohesive-interface

node, the same value is applied to the duplicated node.
If a force, moment, temperature or displacement loading is applied on geometry or a
nodeset, the location and value of loading is dependent on whether shellnodei is set to TOP,
BOTTOM or MID in the APPLY-LOAD command.
If shellnodei = TOP, the loading is only applied to original node. If shellnodei = BOTTOM,
the loading is only applied to duplicated node. If shellnodei = MID, both the original and
duplicated node have the loading applied to them, but for force, moment and displacement
loading, the loading is applied in the opposite direction to the duplicated node.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-417

Chap. 7 Model definition COHESIVE-PROPERTY

COHESIVE-PROPERTY NAME GIC GIIC TN TT TS K N ETA CRITERION

Defines a cohesive property for use in the command COHESIVE-INTERFACE.

NAME [(current highest cohesive-property label number) + 1]

Label number of the cohesive property to be defined.

GIC
Fracture toughness of mode I.

GIIC
Fracture toughness of mode II.

TN
Cohesive strength in normal direction of the interface.

TT
Cohesive strength in 1st shear direction of the interface.

TS
Cohesive strength in 2nd shear direction of the interface.

KN
Penalty stiffness.

ETA
Mixed-mode interaction parameter.

CRITERION [POWER]
Criterion for prediction of delamination in mixed-mode loading. {POWER/BK}

POWER Power law criterion

BK Benzeggagh-Kenane criterion

7-418 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SPLIT-INTERFACE Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions

SPLIT-INTERFACE NAME GTYPE CONTACT

namei bodyi

Defines a mesh-split interface. The command splits the mesh only during datafile generation
or when rebuilding the model.

NAME [(current highest mesh-split label number) + 1]

Label number of the mesh-split interface to be defined.

GTYPE [TWOD]
The geometry type. {TWOD/THREED/ELEDGE/ELFACE}

TWOD Line or edge

THREED Surface or face

ELEDGE Element-edge set

ELFACE Element-face set

CONTACT [NO]
Determines whether a contact surface is created along the mesh-split interface. {NO/YES}

NO No contact surface will be created along the mesh-split interface

YES A contact surface will be created along the mesh-split interface

namei
Geometry label number.

bodyi
Geometry body label number.

Note that if a fixity, initial condition or skew system is applied on cohesive-interface

node, the same value is applied to the duplicated node.
If a force, moment, temperature or displacement loading is applied on geometry or a
nodeset, the location and value of loading is dependent on whether shellnodei is set to TOP,
BOTTOM or MID in the APPLY-LOAD command.
If shellnodei = TOP, the loading is only applied to original node. If shellnodei = BOTTOM,
the loading is only applied to duplicated node. If shellnodei = MID, both the original and
duplicated node have the loading applied to them, but for force, moment and displacement
loading, the loading is applied in the opposite direction to the duplicated node.
Note that there cannot be any tetrahedra element attached to the split interface.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-419

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD ACCELERATION

LOAD ACCELERATION NAME ACX ACY ACZ ARX ARY ARZ

Defines a prescribed acceleration load. This command defines prescribed accelerations which
may be assigned to certain degrees of freedom (global or skew) of the model. Note that this
command only defines a acceleration load, to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-
LOAD.

NAME [(current highest acceleration load label number) + 1]

Label number of the acceleration load to be defined.

ACX [FREE]
Prescribed acceleration for the X-translation (or a-translation for a skew dof-system) degree
of freedom.

ACY [FREE]
Prescribed acceleration for the Y-translation (or b-translation for a skew dof-system) degree of
freedom.

ACZ [FREE]
Prescribed acceleration for the Z-translation (or c-translation for a skew dof-system) degree
of freedom.

ARX [FREE]
Prescribed angular acceleration for the X-rotation (or a-rotation for a skew dof-system)
degree of freedom, in radians/second2.

ARY [FREE]
Prescribed angular acceleration for the Y-rotation (or b-rotation for a skew dof-system) degree
of freedom, in radians/second2.

ARZ [FREE]
Prescribed angular acceleration for the Z-rotation (or c-rotation for a skew dof-system) degree
of freedom, in radians/second2.

Note: For parameters ACX, ACY, ACZ, ARX, ARY, ARZ the value FREE may be specified,
indicating that the corresponding degree of freedom has no prescribed acceleration.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD ACCELERATION FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD ACCELERATION FIRST LAST

7-420 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD CCHARGE Sec. 7.8 Loading

LOAD CCCHARGE NAME MAGNITUDE

Defines a concentrated charge load. Note that the command only defines a concentrated
charge load; to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.

Note: Concentrated charge loads may be applied to:

Points, Lines/Edges, Surfaces/Faces, Volumes/Bodies, Nodeset, for THREEDSOLID and
TWODSOLID elements.

NAME [(current highest acceleration load label number) + 1]

Label number of the concentrated charge load to be defined.

MAGNITUDE
Charge magnitude in Coulombs.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD CCHARGE FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD CCHARGE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-421

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD CENTRIFUGAL

LOAD CENTRIFUGAL NAME OMEGA FACTOR AX AY AZ

BX BY BZ ALPHA

Defines a combination of a centrifugal load and a tangential load.

The centrifugal load vector is calculated as

(mass) OMEGA2 FACTOR f(t) (radius)

and the tangential load vector is calculated as

(mass) ALPHA FACTOR f(t) (radius)

when ALPHA is non-zero.

ALPHA
(a)

OMEGA
(w) tangential forces
(// a x ri )

(BX, BY, BZ)

Z
centrifugal
forces
ri
Y

(AX, AY, AZ) structure

where mass is a concentrated nodal point mass or a differential mass element at a distance
radius from the axis of revolution. The load may be applied to the model or an element
group via APPLY-LOAD whereby it may also be assigned a time function, specifying how its
magnitude varies in time. Only one centrifugal load may currently be applied to the model or
an element group.

7-422 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD CENTRIFUGAL Sec. 7.8 Loading

NAME [(current highest centrifugal

load label number) + 1]
Label number of the centrifugal load to be defined.

OMEGA
Angular velocity.

FACTOR
Multiplying factor.

AX [0.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Position vector (in global coordinate system) of one end of axis of revolution, see Figure.

BX [1.0]
BY [0.0]
BZ [0.0]
Position vector (in global coordinate system) of other end of axis of revolution. See Figure.

ALPHA [0.0]
Angular acceleration.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD CENTRIFUGAL FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD CENTRIFUGAL FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-423

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD CONTACT-SLIP

LOAD CONTACT-SLIP NAME OMEGA FACTOR AX AY AZ BX BY BZ

Defines a contact-slip load. The actual tangential slip of a contact surface is calculated as

OMEGA * FACTOR * (RADIUS) * F(t)

The load may be applied to a contact surface via command APPLY-LOAD whereby it may also
be assigned a time function F(t), specifying how its magnitude varies with time.

NAME [(current highest contact-slip load label number) + 1]

Label number of the contact-slip load to be defined. If the label number of an existing contact-
slip load is given, then the previous contact-slip load definition is overwritten.

OMEGA
Angular velocity.

FACTOR
Multiplying factor.

AX [0.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Position vector (in global coordinate system) of one end of axis of revolution.

BX [1.0]
BY [0.0]
BZ [0.0]
Position vector (in global coordinate system) of other end of axis of revolution.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD CONTACT-SLIP FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD CONTACT-SLIP FIRST LAST

7-424 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD CONVECTION Sec. 7.8 Loading

LOAD CONVECTION NAME MAGNITUDE C-PROP

Defines a convection load, i.e., prescribed environmental temperatures for convection

element nodes. Note that the command only defines a convection load, to apply it to the
model you must use APPLY-LOAD.

NAME [(current highest convection load label number) + 1]

Label number of the convection load to be defined.

MAGNITUDE
Environmental temperature (in chosen units).

C-PROP [0]
The label number of convection property command C-PROP. It is only used for ADINA TMC
analysis. In TMC analysis, if C-PROP = 0 means parameters TYPE = CONSTANT and H = 0.0
in the C-PROP command.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD CONVECTION FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD CONVECTION FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-425

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD DCHARGE

LOAD DCCHARGE NAME MAGNITUDE

Defines a distributed charge load. Note that the command only defines a distributed charge
load; to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.

Note: Distributed charge loads may be applied to:

Points, Lines/Edges, Surfaces/Faces, Volumes/Bodies, Nodeset, for THREEDSOLID and
TWODSOLID elements.

NAME [(current highest acceleration load label number) + 1]

Label number of the distributed charge load to be defined.

MAGNITUDE [0.0]
Charge magnitude [charge / unit length: for 3D line, edge, eledgeset].
Charge magnitude [charge / unit area: for 2D line, edge, eledgeset].
Charge magnitude [charge / unit area: for surface,face, elfaceset].

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD DCHARGE FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD DCHARGE FIRST LAST

7-426 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD DISPLACEMENT Sec. 7.8 Loading

LOAD DISPLACEMENT NAME DX DY DZ AX AY AZ

Defines a prescribed displacement load. This command defines prescribed displacements

which may be assigned to certain degrees of freedom (global or skew) of the model. Note that
this command only defines a displacement load, to apply it to the model you must use
APPLY-LOAD.

NAME [(current highest displacement load label number) + 1]

Label number of the displacement load to be defined.

DX [FREE]
Prescribed value for the X-translation (or a-translation for a skew dof-system) degree of
freedom.

DY [FREE]
Prescribed value for the Y-translation (or b-translation for a skew dof-system) degree of
freedom.

DZ [FREE]
Prescribed value for the Z-translation (or c-translation for a skew dof-system) degree of
freedom.

AX [FREE]
Prescribed value for the X-rotation (or a-rotation for a skew dof-system) degree of freedom, in
radians.

AY [FREE]
Prescribed value for the Y-rotation (or b-rotation for a skew dof-system) degree of freedom, in
radians.

AZ [FREE]
Prescribed value for the Z-rotation (or c-rotation for a skew dof-system) degree of freedom, in
radians.

Note: For parameters DX, DY, DZ, AX, AY, AZ the value FREE may be specified,
indicating that the corresponding degree of freedom is not prescribed.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD DISPLACEMENT FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD DISPLACEMENT FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-427

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD ELECTROMAGNETIC

LOAD ELECTROMAGNETIC NAME

Defines an electromagnetic load. Note that the command only defines a electromagnetic load,
to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.

NAME [(current highest electromagnetic

load label number)+ 1]
Label number of the electromagnetic load to be defined.

Note: The magnitude of the load is governed by the currents specified by the
timefunction parameter of APPLY-LOAD.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD ELECTROMAGNETIC FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD ELECTROMAGNETIC FIRST LAST

7-428 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD FORCE Sec. 7.8 Loading

LOAD FORCE NAME MAGNITUDE FX FY FZ

Defines a force load. Note that the command only defines a force load, to apply it to the
model you must use APPLY-LOAD.

NAME [(current highest force

load label number) + 1]
Label number of the force load to be defined.

MAGNITUDE
Force magnitude.

FX [1.0]
FY [0.0]
FZ [0.0]
Force direction.

Note: The vector (FX, FY, FZ) specifies only the direction of the force.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD FORCE FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD FORCE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-429

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD HEATFLUX

LOAD HEATFLUX NAME MAGNITUDE

Defines a distributed heat-flux load. Note that the command only defines a heat-flux load. To
apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.

NAME [(current highest heatflux load label number) + 1]

Label number of the heat-flux load to be defined.

MAGNITUDE
Heat flux magnitude (in chosen units, e.g, W/m2).

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD HEATFLUX FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD HEATFLUX FIRST LAST

7-430 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD INTERNALHEAT Sec. 7.8 Loading

LOAD INTERNALHEAT
NAME MAGNITUDE TEMPDEP X-TGRAD Y-TGRAD Z-TGRAD
TEMPERATURE AX BX CX DX EX AY BY CY DY EY AZ BZ CZ DZ
EZ A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 TIMEDEP

thetai iheati

Defines an internal heat generation load. Note that the command only defines an internal
heat load; to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.
The internal heat generation may be constant or calculated from a table of temperature
vs. heat generation.

NAME [(current highest internalheat load label number) + 1]

Label number of the internal heat load to be defined.

MAGNITUDE
Internal heat generation magnitude (in chosen units, e.g., W/m3). [TEMPDEP = NO]

TEMPDEP [NO]
Indicates whether the internal heat generation load is temperature dependent. TEMPDEP
must be set to YES or EQUATION in order to apply an INTERNALHEAT loading to a GROUP
using APPLY-LOAD. {YES/NO}

X-TGRAD Y-TGRAD Z-TGRAD [NO]

When TEMPDEP=EQUATION, these flags indicate whether the equation has terms involving
temperature gradients. {NO/YES}

TEMPERATURE [NO]
When TEMPDEP=EQUATION, this flag indicates whether the equation has terms involving
temperature.{NO/YES}

AX BX CX DX EX AY BY CY DY EY AZ BZ CZ DZ EZ A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 [0]
Coeffiencients used in the equation for internal heat generation if TEMPDEP = EQUATION.

TIMEDEP [NO]
Indicates whether the internal heat generation load is timedependent. {NO/YES}

thetai
The temperature at data point i. [TEMPDEP = YES]

iheati
The internal heat generation per unit volume at temperature thetai. [TEMPDEP = YES]

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-431

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD INTERNALHEAT

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD INTERNALHEAT FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD INTERNALHEAT FIRST LAST

7-432 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD LATENT Sec. 7.8 Loading

LOAD LATENT NAME PRINT

thetai deltali latenti phflagi

Defines a latent heat load; i.e., the phase transition temperature, the phase transition tempera-
ture increment, latent heat, and the phase transition indicator for each (solid-liquid) interface.
The load may be applied to an element group via APPLY-LOAD.

NAME [(current highest latent load label number) + 1]

Label number of the latent heat load to be defined.

PRINT [NO]
Indicates whether ADINA-T is to print out nodal latent heat vectors. {YES / NO}

thetai [0]
The phase transition temperature at phase i.

deltali [0]
The phase transition temperature increment at phase i.

latenti [0]
The latent heat per unit volume at phase i.

phflagi [SOLID]
The transition indicator at phase i. {SOLID/LIQUID}

SOLID Initially solid.

LIQUID Initially liquid.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD LATENT FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD LATENT FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-433

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD LINE

LOAD LINE NAME MAGNITUDE

Defines a line load, i.e., a distributed load in terms of force / unit length. Note that the
command only defines a line load, to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.

Note that line loads may be applied to geometry lines or edges, in order to specify distributed
loading to BEAM, ISOBEAM, and PIPE elements, and to edges of SHELL elements.

NAME [(current highest line

load label number) + 1]
Label number of the line load to be defined.

MAGNITUDE
Distributed load magnitude [force / unit length].

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD FORCE FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD FORCE FIRST LAST

7-434 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD MASS-PROPORTIONAL Sec. 7.8 Loading

LOAD MASS-PROPORTIONAL NAME MAGNITUDE AX AY AZ

INTERPRETATION

Defines a mass-proportional load. Such loads may be used to model gravity loading
(including static analysis) or ground acceleration. The load acts uniformly on the entire
structure. APPLY-LOAD is used to apply a mass-proportional load to the model, at which
time it may be assigned a time function specifying how its magnitude varies in time. More
than one mass-proportional load may be applied to the model.

NAME [(current highest mass-proportional

load label number) + 1]
Label number of the mass-proportional load to be defined.

MAGNITUDE
Magnitude of mass-proportional loading.

AX [0.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [-1.0]
Vector giving direction of mass-proportional load. Note the components of the mass-
proportional loading are:

MAGNITUDE AX
MAGNITUDE AY
MAGNITUDE AZ

i.e., the magnitude of vector (AX, AY, AZ) is used together with MAGNITUDE to give the
total load vector.

INTERPRETATION [BODY-FORCE]
Flag indicating static or dynamic effect for potential-based fluid elements:

BODY-FORCE The load is interpreted as a physical body force

GROUND-ACCELERATION The load is interpreted as a ground motion acceleration,

and is numerically integrated to obtain ground motion
velocities and displacements.

This parameter is used only by potential-based fluid elements and is not used by any of the
other element types.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-435

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD MASS-PROPORTIONAL

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD MASS-PROPORTIONAL FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD MASS-PROPORTIONAL FIRST LAST

7-436 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD MOMENT Sec. 7.8 Loading

LOAD MOMENT NAME MAGNITUDE MX MY MZ

Defines a moment load. Note that the command only defines a moment load, to apply it to the
model you must use APPLY-LOAD.

NAME [(current highest moment load label number) + 1]

Label number of the moment load to be defined.

MAGNITUDE
Moment magnitude.

MX [1.0]
MY [0.0]
MZ [0.0]
Components of moment vector.

Note: The vector (MX, MY, MZ) specifies only the direction of the moment axis.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD MOMENT FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD MOMENT FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-437

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD NODAL-HEATFLOW

LOAD NODAL-HEATFLOW NAME MAGNITUDE

Defines a nodal-heatflow, i.e., a concentrated heat-flux load. Note that this command only
defines the load, to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.

NAME [(current highest nodal-heatflow load label number) + 1]

Label number of the nodal-heatflow load to be defined.

MAGNITUDE
Heat flux magnitude.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD NODAL-HEATFLOW FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD NODAL-HEATFLOW FIRST LAST

7-438 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 7.8 Loading

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-439

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD NODAL-PHIFLUX

LOAD NODAL-PHIFLUX NAME MAGNITUDE

Defines a nodal-phiflux load. This command defines a prescribed nodal-phiflux which may be
assigned to certain degrees of freedom of the model. Note that this command only defines a
nodal-phiflux load to apply it to the model you must use command APPLY-LOAD.

NAME [(current highest nodal-phiflux load label number) + 1]

Label number of the nodal-phiflux load to be defined. If the label number of an existing nodal-
phiflux load is given, then the previous nodal-phiflux load definition is overwritten.

MAGNITUDE
Prescribed value for the fluid potential degree of freedom.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD NODAL-PHIFLUX FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD NODAL-PHIFLUX FIRST LAST

7-440 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD PHIFLUX Sec. 7.8 Loading

LOAD PHIFLUX NAME MAGNITUDE

Defines a phiflux load. Note that this command only defines a phiflux load to apply it to
the model you must use command APPLY-LOAD.

NAME [(current highest phiflux load label number) + 1]

Label number of the phiflux load to be defined. If the label number of an existing phiflux load
is given, then the previous phiflux load definition is overwritten.

MAGNITUDE
Prescribed value for the fluid potential degree of freedom.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD PHIFLUX FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD PHIFLUX FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-441

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE

LOAD PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE NAME MAGNITUDE

Defines a pipe-internal-pressure load. Note that the command only defines a pipe-internal-
pressure load, to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.

NAME [(current highest pipe-internal-pressure

load label number) + 1]
Label number of the pipe-internal-pressure load to be defined.

MAGNITUDE
Pipe internal pressure magnitude (force / unit area).

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE FIRST LAST

7-442 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD POREFLOW Sec. 7.8 Loading

LOAD POREFLOW NAME MAGNITUDE

Defines a poreflow load. Poreflow loads may be applied ( command APPLY-LOAD ) to

surfaces (element groups THREEDSOLID, TWODSOLID- subtype STRESS3 ) or lines
( TWODSOLID element edges ).

NAME [(current highest poreflow load label number) + 1]

Label number of the poreflow load to be defined. If the label number of an existing poreflow
load is given, then the previous poreflow load definition is overwritten.

MAGNITUDE
Flux magnitude (velocity).

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD POREFLOW FIRST LAST

The command LIST LOAD POREFLOW lists the loads of type POREFLOW with label
numbers in a given range. If no range is specified, then a list of all the label numbers of
loads of type POREFLOW is given.

DELETE LOAD POREFLOW FIRST LAST

The command DELETE LOAD POREFLOW deletes all loads of type POREFLOW with
label numbers in a given range.

Note: A load will not be deleted if it is referenced by the command APPLY-LOAD

(i.e. the load has been applied to the model).

Note: For command DELETE LOAD POREFLOW, one of the parameters FIRST,
LAST must be specified.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-443

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD PORE-PRESSURE

LOAD PORE-PRESSURE NAME MAGNITUDE

Defines a pore-pressure load, which may be assigned to certain degrees of freedom (global or
skew) of the model. To apply a pore-pressure load to the model command APPLY-LOAD
should be used.

NAME [(current highest pore-pressure

load label number) + 1]
Label number of the pore-pressure load to be defined. If the label number of an existing pore-
pressure load is given, then the previous pore-pressure load definition is overwritten.

MAGNITUDE
Prescribed value for the pore pressure degree of freedom.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD PORE-PRESSURE FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD PORE-PRESSURE FIRST LAST

7-444 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD PRESSURE Sec. 7.8 Loading

LOAD PRESSURE NAME MAGNITUDE BETA LINE SYSTEM

Defines a pressure load. Note that the command only defines a pressure load; to apply it to
the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.
Pressure loads may be applied to:
Surfaces/Faces SHELL, THREEDSOLID, TWODSOLID (subtype STRESS3),
THREEDFLUID elements.
Lines/Edges TWODSOLID, TWODFLUID element edges.

To apply distributed loads to uni-dimensional elements (e.g., beams) or to edges of shell

elements, command LOAD LINE should be used to define such a load in terms of force/unit
length.

Note that for potential-based elements, pressure loads may be applied only on the boundary
of fluid-structure, free-surface, inlet-outlet or fluid-fluid interface elements.

NAME [(current highest pressure load label number) + 1]

Label number of the pressure load to be defined.

MAGNITUDE
Pressure magnitude [force / unit area].

BETA [0.0]
Specifies the angle to the reference line (LINE) that will determine the direction of the tangen-
tial traction. (in degrees)

LINE [0]
Reference line for tangential traction direction. If LINE=0, the reference direction for the
tangential traction will be the parametric u-dir of the surface or face.

Note: The parameters BETA and LINE are only applicable when applying pressure loading
on surface/face and the tangential pressure loading is specified (i.e., idirn=4 in
command APPLY-LOAD).

SYSTEM [0]
Specifies a Cartesian or cylindrical coordinate system which defines the X, Y and Z directions
of the load application. This parameter is used for idirn = 11, 12 or 13 in the APPLY-LOAD
command..

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD PRESSURE FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD PRESSURE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-445

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD RADIATION

LOAD RADIATION NAME MAGNITUDE R-PROP

Defines a radiation load, i.e., prescribed radiative source/sink temperatures, at radiation

element nodes. Note that the command only defines a radiation load, to apply it to the model
you must use APPLY-LOAD.

NAME [(current highest radiation load label number) + 1]

Label number of the radiation load to be defined.

MAGNITUDE
Radiative source/sink temperature (in chosen units).

R-PROP [0]
The label number of convection property command R-PROP. It is only used for ADINA TMC
analysis. In TMC analysis, if R-PROP = 0 means parameters TYPE = CONSTANT and E = 0.0
in the R-PROP command.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD RADIATION FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD RADIATION FIRST LAST

7-446 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD ROTATION Sec. 7.8 Loading

LOAD ROTATION NAME OMEGA TFUNC-OMEGA ALPHA TFUNC-ALPHA

CX CY CZ DX DY DZ REF-FRAME

Defines the centrifugal, Coriolis, and angular acceleration inertia forces that arise when a
structure rotates about two axes of revolution, at a particular snapshot in time.

A reference frame is used to describe the motion of the structure. The angular velocity frame
and angular acceleration frame of the reference frame is defined using the REF-FRAME
command.

The structure rotates with angular velocity rel and angular acceleration rel relative to his
reference frame. Points C and D define the unit vector parallel to the axis of revolution of rel
and rel at the snapshot of time considered (see the Figure). These points remain fixed
throughout the analysis.

Z axis rotates with

reference frame
ALPHA
Y frame ( | rel| )
X
frame )
(DX, DY, DZ
OMEGA
( | rel | )
(CX, CY, CZ)

reference frame
(defined using REF-FRAME) structure

NAME [(current highest rotation load label number) + 1]

Label number of the rotation load to be defined.

OMEGA [1.0]
Magnitude of rel (in rad/s).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-447

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD ROTATION

TFUNC-OMEGA [1]
Label number of the time function applied to rel, as defined by TIMEFUNCTION.

ALPHA [0.0]
Magnitude of rel (in rad/s2).

TFUNC-ALPHA [1]
Label number of the time function applied to rel, as defined by TIMEFUNCTION.

CX [0.0]
CY [0.0]
CZ [0.0]
Position vector (in the global coordinate system) of one end of the vector parallel to the axis
of revolution of rel and re (see the Figure)l.

DX [0.0]
DY [0.0]
DZ [0.0]
Position vector (in the global coordinate system) of the other end of the vector parallel to the
axis of revolution of rel and rel(see the Figure).

REF-FRAME
Label number of the reference frame, as defined by REF-FRAME. This parameter must be
entered.

If REF-FRAME=0, the reference frame is assumed stationary, and the LOAD ROTATION
command applies the same consistent load vector as LOAD CENTRIFUGAL.

Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD PRESSURE FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD PRESSURE FIRST LAST

7-448 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD TEMPERATURE Sec. 7.8 Loading

LOAD TEMPERATURE NAME MAGNITUDE

Defines a prescribed temperature load. Note that the command only defines a temperature
load, to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.

NAME [(current highest temperature

load label number) + 1]
Label number of the temperature load to be defined.

MAGNITUDE
Temperature (in chosen units).

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD TEMPERATURE FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD TEMPERATURE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-449

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD TGRADIENT

LOAD TGRADIENT NAME MAGNITUDE

Defines a prescribed temperature gradient load to specify the temperature gradient in the
thickness direction of a surface (when applied to shell elements). Note that the command only
defines a temperature gradient load, to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.

NAME [(current highest temperature gradient

load label number) + 1]
Label number of the temperature gradient load to be defined.

MAGNITUDE
Temperature gradient (degrees / unit length).

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD TGRADIENT

DELETE LOAD TGRADIENT

7-450 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD VELOCITY Sec. 7.8 Loading

LOAD VELOCITY NAME VX VY VZ VRX VRY VRZ

Defines a prescribed velocity load. This command defines prescribed velocities which may be
assigned to certain degrees of freedom (global or skew) of the model. Note that this command
only defines a velocity load, to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.

NAME [(current highest acceleration load label number) + 1]

Label number of the velocity load to be defined.

VX [FREE]
Prescribed velocity for the X-translation (or a-translation for a skew dof-system) degree of
freedom.

VY [FREE]
Prescribed velocity for the Y-translation (or b-translation for a skew dof-system) degree of
freedom.

VZ [FREE]
Prescribed velocity for the Z-translation (or c-translation for a skew dof-system) degree of
freedom.

VRX [FREE]
Prescribed angular velocity for the X-rotation (or a-rotation for a skew dof-system) degree of
freedom, in radians/second.

VRY [FREE]
Prescribed angular velocity for the Y-rotation (or b-rotation for a skew dof-system) degree of
freedom, in radians/second.

VRZ [FREE]
Prescribed angular velocity for the Z-rotation (or c-rotation for a skew dof-system) degree of
freedom, in radians/second.

Note: For parameters VX, VY, VZ, VRX, VRY, VRZ the value FREE may be specified, indicating
that the corresponding degree of freedom has no prescribed velocity.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD VELOCITY FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD VELOCITY FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-451

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD VOLTAGE

LOAD VOLTAGE NAME MAGNITUDE

Defines a prescribed voltage load. Note that the command only defines a prescribed voltage
load; to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.

NAME [(current highest acceleration load label number) + 1]

Label number of the prescribed voltage load to be defined.

MAGNITUDE [0.0]
Voltage magnitude (in volts).

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD VOLTAGE FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD VOLTAGE FIRST LAST

7-452 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 7.8 Loading

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-453

Chap. 7 Model definition REF-FRAME

REF-FRAME NAME OMEGA TFUNC-OMEGA ALPHA TFUNC-ALPHA

AX AY AZ BX BY BZ

Defines the angular velocity rame and angular acceleration frame of a reference frame, to be
used in the LOAD ROTATION command.

Points A and B define the unit vector parallel to the axis of revolution (see the Figure). These
points remain fixed throughout the analysis.

Y ALPHA
( | frame| )
X
OMEGA
(BX, BY, BZ) ( | frame| )

(AX, AY, AZ)

reference frame

NAME [(current highest reference frame label number) + 1]

Label number of the rotation load to be defined.

OMEGA [1.0]
Magnitude of frame (in rad/s).

TFUNC-OMEGA [1]
Label number of the time function applied to rame, as defined by TIMEFUNCTION.

ALPHA [0.0]
Magnitude of frame (in rad/s2).

TFUNC-ALPHA [1]
Label number of the time function applied to rame , as defined by TIMEFUNCTION.

7-454 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
REF-FRAME Sec. 7.8 Loading

AX [0.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Position vector (in the global coordinate system) of one end of the vector parallel to the axis
of revolution (see the Figure).

BX [0.0]
BY [0.0]
BZ [0.0]
Position vector (in the global coordinate system) of the other end of the vector parallel to the
axis of revolution (see the Figure).

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD PRESSURE FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD PRESSURE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-455

Chap. 7 Model definition CPROP

C-PROP NAME TYPE H ITHETA TBIRTH TDEATH

ti hi

Defines convection properties for convection loading.

NAME [(Current highest label) + 1]

The label number of the C-PROP to be defined.

TYPE [CONSTANT]
The type of convection property. {CONSTANT/TEMP-DEP/TIME-DEP}
CONSTANT Property is constant
TEMP-DEP Property is temperature dependent

TIME-DEP Property is time dependent

H [0.0]
Convection coefficient. Used for TYPE = CONSTANT only. { 0.0}

ITHETA [TEMPERATURE]
Indicates the dependence of the convection coefficient. Used for TYPE = TEMP-DEP only.
{TEMPERATURE/DIFFERENCE}
TEMPERATURE Convection coefficient is a function of surface temperature

DIFFERENCE Convection coefficient is a function of temperature difference

TBIRTH [0.0]
Birth time for convection boundary, i.e., time at which the convection boundary becomes
active.

TDEATH [0.0]
Death time for convection boundary, i.e. time at which the convection boundary becomes
inactive. Note that TDEATH=0.0 has no effect.

ti
Temperature at data point i for ITHETA = TEMPERATURE
Temperature difference at data point i for ITHETA = DIFFERENCE
Time at data point i for TYPE = TIME-DEP

hi
Convection coefficient at ti

7-456 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
R-PROP Sec. 7.8 Loading

R-PROP NAME TYPE E ISIGMA SIGMA TBIRTH TDEATH SHAPE

t i ei

Define radiation properties for radiation loading.

NAME [(Current highest label) + 1]

The label number of the R-PROP to be defined.

TYPE [CONSTANT]
The type of radiation property. {CONSTANT/TEMP-DEP}

CONSTANT Property is constant

TEMP-DEP Property is temperature dependent

E [0.0]
Emissivity coefficient Used for TYPE = CONSTANT only. { 0.0}

ISIGMA [FAHRENHEIT]
Unit of temperature. {FAHRENHEIT/CENTIGRADE/KELVIN/RANKINE}

SIGMA [0.0]
Stefan-Boltzmann constant. { 0.0}

TBIRTH [0.0]
Birth time for radiation boundary, i.e., time at which the convection boundary becomes active.

TDEATH [0.0]
Death time for radiation boundary, i.e. time at which the convection boundary becomes
inactive. Note that TDEATH=0.0 has no effect.

SHAPE [0.0]
Shape factor.

ti
temperature at data point i

ei
Emissivity coefficient at ti

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-457

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD-CASE

LOAD-CASE NAME

LOAD-CASE may be used in a linear static analysis to identify the current load case.

LOAD-CASE cannot be used in the analysis of a cyclic symmetric structure.

If load cases are specified, no reference to, or specification of, time functions can be made.
Therefore, use of the commands TIMEFUNCTION, TIMESTEP, or any timefunction reference
by any APPLY-LOAD command, is not allowed.

NAME [(current highest load-case

label number) + 1]
Label number of the load-case to be defined.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD-CASE FIRST LAST

DELETE LOAD-CASE FIRST LAST

7-458 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LCOMBINATION Sec. 7.8 Loading

LCOMBINATION NAME

lcasei factori

May be used in a linear static analysis to define a new load case as a linear combination of
load cases previously defined by LOAD-CASE. The combination is performed so that
(combined load-case results) = (results for lcase ) factor
i i

i=1

NAME [(highest lcombination label number) + 1]

The label number of the load-combination.

lcasei
The label number of a load case previously defined by command LOAD-CASE.

factori [1.0]
The factor associated with lcasei.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LCOMBINATION FIRST LAST

DELETE LCOMBINATION FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-459

Chap. 7 Model definition APPLY-LOAD

APPLY-LOAD BODY LCASE

namei ltypei lnamei stypei snamei idvari ncuri artmi idirn iddli pfocusi bodyi psensei
i
unloadi timeui forceui ncurui cgroupi shintnodei
(no load cases)
or

namei ltypei lnamei stypei snamei idvari lcasei idirni iddli pfocusi bodyi psensei
unloadi timeui forceui ncurui cgroupi shintnodei
(load cases)

Command APPLY-LOAD specifies the loads applied to a model. This command is used to apply
named loads (see commands LOAD FORCE, LOAD MOMENT, LOAD PRESSURE, etc.) to the
model geometry. The spatial variation of the load may be specified by reference to a data-line,
data-surface, or data-volume as appropriate (see command LINE-FUNCTION,
SURFACE-FUNCTION, VOLUME-FUNCTION ). The time dependence of the load may be
specified by reference to a time function (see command TIMEFUNCTION ).

BODY [currently active BODY]

Solid geometry body label number.

LCASE [1]
Load-case number (see LOAD-CASE, LCOMBINATION ).

namei
Label number of a load application.

ltypei
The type of load to be applied. {FORCE/MOMENT/PRESSURE/LINE/CENTRIFUGAL/
ROTATIONAL/MASS-PROPORTIONAL/DISPLACEMENT/TEMPERATURE/
TGRADIENT/PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE/ELECTROMAGETIC/POREFLOW/
POREPRESSURE/CONTACT-SLIP/PHIFLUX/NODAL-PHIFLUX/VELOCITY/
ACCELERATION/CCHARGE/DCHARGE/VOLTAGE}

In addition, for TMC analysis only, the following choices are available:

CONVECTION RADIATION NODAL-HEATFLOW

HEATFLUX INTERNALHEAT LATENT

A table of load types and the corresponding allowed application site types is given below.

lnamei
Label number of the load (defined by LOAD FORCE, etc.).

7-460 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
APPLY-LOAD Sec. 7.8 Loading

stypei
The type of site where the load is to be applied. {POINT/LINE/SURFACE/VOLUME/
EDGE/FACE/BODY/MODEL/NODE-SET/ELEMENT-EDGE-SET/ELEMENT-FACE-
SET/CONTACT-SURFACE/GROUP}

snamei
The label number of the application site, e.g., point label number, line label number, etc.

idvari [0]
The label number of the spatial function (defined by LINE-FUNCTION, SURFACE- FUNC-
TION, VOLUME-FUNCTION as appropriate). Enter 0 for the load to be considered constant
in space (but not necessarily in time). If load ltypei=PRESSURE and stypei=FACE, idvari is
the surface spatial function for the reference surface (pfocusi).

Note:
The spatial variation along the reference line is used to determine the spatial variation of the
load on the face. For a point on the face, the closest point on the line is determined and the
spatial value at that point is used.

ncuri [1]
The label number of a time function, as defined by command TIMEFUNCTION.
Note: For rotational loading, the label of the time function is defined in commands REF-
FRAME and LOAD ROTATION.

artmi [0.0]
The arrival time associated with time dependent loads. The load is considered zero for
t artmi, and is governed by the time function ncuri for t > artmi. The time function is
effectively shifted along in the time direction. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

idirni [0]
Specifies the load direction for pressure load or distributed line load.
{0/1/2/3/4/11/12/13}

0 total (normal) pressure load is applied.

1 only the X-component of the load is applied.
2 only the Y-component of the load is applied.
3 only the Z-component of the load is applied.
4 tangential traction.
11 load acts in the global X-direction.
12 load acts in the global Y-direction.
13 load acts in the global Z-direction.

The following table lists the allows load types and application site types:

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-461

Chap. 7 Model definition APPLY-LOAD

Table: Allowed load type / application site types

Point Line Surface Volume Edge Face Body Others

CCharge1
DCharge1
Force1
Moment 1
Pressure2
Line
Centrifugal4 Model, Group
Rotational Model, Group
Mass Model, Group
proportional
Displacement1
Velocity1
Acceleration1
Temperature1
Temperature
gradient1
Pipe-Internal
pressure1
Electro-
magnetic
Pore flow2
Pore
pressure1
Contact slip Contact surface
Phiflux 2

Nodal phiflux 1

Convection 1,3

Radiation 1,3

Nodal-heatflow 1,3

Heatflux 2,3

Internalheat 1,3
Group
Latent 3
Group

7-462 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
APPLY-LOAD Sec. 7.8 Loading

Notes:
1. Can also be applied to Node Sets.
2. Can also be applied to Element-Edge Sets and Element-Face Sets.
3. Can only be applied in TMC analysis.
4. Can also be applied to Element Sets.

iddli [-1]
If ltypei={PRESSURE/LINE/CENTRIFUGAL/ROTATIONAL/ELECTROMAGNETIC/
PORE FLOW}, this specifies whether the load is deformation-dependent, i.e. the direction of
the load changes in response to the (large displacement) deformation of the structure. {0/1/
-1}

0 the load is independent of structural deformation.

1 the load is deformation-dependent.
-1 the load is deformation-dependent for large displacement or large strain
formulation, otherwise the load is deformation independent.

iddli [0]
If ltypei=DISPLACEMENT, this specifies whether the prescribed displacement is measured
relative to the original configuration or to the deformed configuration {0/1}.

The deformed configuration is the configuration at the arrival time of the prescribed
displacement (if the arrival time is not equal to zero), or the configuration at the start time of
the current analysis (which can be a restart analysis).

0 Original configuration
1 Deformed configuration

pfocusi [0]
Specifies a point which determines the plane of load application for loads of type LINE. It
may also be used to specify a follower force or moment, in which case the direction of the
load application is determined by the relative positions of the point of application and the
focus point pfocusi. If point pfocusi is input, then a unique node must be defined at the
same location as the focus point. If load ltypei=PRESSURE and stypei=FACE, pfocusi means
the reference surface for spatial function of surface. If load ltypei=PRESSURE and stypei=
ELEMENT-FACE, pfocusi means the reference line or surface for spatial function of line or
surface dependent on control parameter GEOM-REF of the LOAD-OPTION command.

bodyi [BODY]
Body label number, used when stypei = FACE or EDGE.

psensei [0]
Qualifies the direction of the distributed line load controlled by the point pfocusi. If
psensei=0 then the plane of action of the load is determined by the focal point and the end

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-463

Chap. 7 Model definition APPLY-LOAD

nodes of each element edge along the application line; in this case a single auxiliary node will
be generated at the focal point. If psensei=1 the load will act perpendicular to the plane
defined by the focal point and the element edge end nodes; in this case an auxiliary node will
be generated for each element edge along the line (positioned above the plane defined by
the vertex nodes and the focal point). Furthermore, for psensei=0 (in-plane) a positive load
acts toward the element from the focal point. The convention for load direction when
psensei=1 can be understood as follows: imagine walking along the line in its positive
parametric direction (i.e. from the start point to the end point) such that the focal point is
always above you - a positive load is then assumed to act from your left.

unloadi [NO]
Specifies the type of unloadng for prescribed displacement. {TIME/FORCE/NO}

timeui [0.0]
If unloadi=TIME, this specifies the time at which unloading of prescribed displacement starts.

forceui [0.0]
If unloadi=TIME and forceui = 0.0, then the prescribed force for time > timeui is equal to the
reaction force multiplied by the value of time function ncurui.

If unloadi=TIME and forceui 0.0, then the prescribed force for time > timeui is equal to
forceui multiplied by the value of time function ncurui.

If unloadi=FORCE, then the prescribed displacement becomes a prescribed force for the
solution step after the step in which the reaction force exceeds forceui. The value of the
prescribed force is equal to forceui multiplied by the value of time function ncurui. forceui
cannot equal 0.0 if unloadi=FORCE.

ncurui [1]
Label number of a time function for the unloading of prescribed displacement.

cgroupi [0]
Contact group label number.

shintnodei [MID/BOTH]
Specifies whether the load is applied to the top, bottom or both surfaces of shell or interface
elements. This option may be used for ltypei=TEMPERATURE/CONVECTION/RADIA-
TION/HEATFLUX on shell elements or ltypei=FORCE/MOMENT/DISPLACEMENT/
TEMPERATURE on cohesive and split interfaces. {TOP/BOTTOM/MID/BOTH}
TOP The load is applied to top nodes.
BOTTOM The load is applied to bottom nodes.

7-464 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
APPLY-LOAD Sec. 7.8 Loading

MID This option is only used for temperature loading. The load is applied on the
mid-surface. In effect, both top and bottom surfaces of the shell element or
interface will have the same temperature except when a temperature gradient
load is applied on the shell element also.

BOTH This option is used for force, moment and displacement loads on the
cohesive or split interface. Note that the load is applied as prescribed on
the top side and in the opposite direction on the bottom side.

Auxiliary commands
LIST APPLY-LOAD
DELETE APPLY-LOAD

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-465

Chap. 7 Model definition APPLY INTERNAL-HEAT

APPLY INTERNAL-HEAT SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP LNAME

eli factori ncuri artmi

Prescribes time-dependent internal heat generation for elements in a specified element group.
The magnitude of the internal heat generation is given by factori, which may be modified by a
time function given by entry ncuri.

SUBSTRUCTURE
Substructure label.

REUSE
Reuse label.

GROUP [Current element group]

The element group number for all elements referenced by this command.
.
LNAME [0]
Label number of LOAD INTERNALHEAT.

eli
Label number of an element to which the internal heat generation is applied.

factori [1.0]
Factor giving the heat generation magnitude.

ncuri [1]
The label number of a time function, as defined by command TIMEFUNCTION.

artmi [0.0]
The arrival time associated with time dependent loads.

Auxiliary commands

LIST APPLY INTERNAL-HEAT

DELETE APPLYINTERNAL-HEAT

7-466 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOAD -OPTION Sec. 7.8 Loading

LOAD-OPTION DISPLACEMENT TEMPERATURE TGRADIENT

PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE PORE-PRESSURE NODAL-HEATFLOW
GEOM-REF

Specifies the effect when the same type of load is applied multiple times on the same node.
The loads may be applied directly on the node or through geometric entities.

The type of load is set via the following self-descriptive parameters.

DISPLACEMENT
TEMPERATURE
TGRADIENT
PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE
PORE-PRESSURE
NODAL-HEATFLOW [AVERAGE]
Specifies whether the load is averaged or added when applied more than once on a node.
{AVERAGE/ADD}

GEOM-REF [SURFACE]
Determines whether a line-function or surface-function will be used for applying pressure on
an Element-Face Set. {LINE/SURFACE}
LINE Line-function will be used
SURFACE Surface-function will be used

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD-OPTION
DELETE LOAD-OPTION

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-467

Chap. 7 Model definition LOAD-PENETRATION

LOAD-PENETRATION

groupi

Defines a region in terms of element groups where an initial pressure load can penetrate; i.e. if
an element in the region, to which a pressure load is applied ruptures or dies, the pressure
load is distributed to its neighboring element faces. This command is only active if
MASTER LOAD-PENETRATION = YES.

Note: A pressure load must already be applied to the penetration region, see
APPLY-LOAD or LOADS-ELEMENT.

groupi
Element group label number.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOAD-PENETRATION
DELETE LOAD-PENETRATION

7-468 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
INITIAL-CONDITION Sec. 7.9 Initial conditions

INITIAL-CONDITION NAME INITIALSTRESS

variablei valuei

Defines an initial condition that can be referenced by SET-INITCONDITION to assign the

initial condition to geometry entities. All variables are assumed initially zero unless set by
this command in conjunction with SET-INITCONDITION.

NAME
The identifying name of the initial condition (1 to 30 alphanumeric characters).

INITIALSTRESS [NO]
Controls whether the initial strain input is interpreted as initial stresses. This parameter
applies to ALL initial strain input in the model, not just the current initial condition strain.
This parameter has the same effect as the MASTER INITIALSTRESS parameter

NO No change to initial strain input.

YES Initial strains are to be interpreted as initial stresses.
DEFORMATION Initial strains are to be interpreted as initial stresses
which result in deformations.

variablei
Degree(s) of freedom or their time derivatives to be set initially. Possible values (strings) are:
X-TRANSLATION XROT-VELOCITY TEMPERATURE
Y-TRANSLATION YROT-VELOCITY TGRADIENT
Z-TRANSLATION ZROT-VELOCITY PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE
X-ROTATION X-ACCELERATION STRAIN-11
Y-ROTATION Y-ACCELERATION STRAIN-22
Z-ROTATION Z-ACCELERATION STRAIN-33
X-VELOCITY XROT-ACCELERATION STRAIN-12
Y-VELOCITY YROT-ACCELERATION STRAIN-13
Z-VELOCITY ZROT-ACCELERATION STRAIN-23

OVALIZATION-1 WARPING-1 FLUID-DOF

OVALIZATION-2 WARPING-2 FPOT-VELOCITY
OVALIZATION-3 WARPING-3 FPOT-ACCELERATION
OVALIZATION-4 WARPING-4 STRAIN-GRADIENT-11
OVALIZATION-5 WARPING-5 STRAIN-GRADIENT-22
OVALIZATION-6 WARPING-6 STRAIN-GRADIENT-12
STRAIN-GRADIENT-13
STRAIN-GRADIENT-23
FLEXURAL-STRAIN-11
FLEXURAL-STRAIN-22
FLEXURAL-STRAIN-12

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-469

Chap. 7 Model definition INITIAL-CONDITION

valuei
The value to be assigned to variablei.

Note: The initial conditions will be applied to the nodes of the model, albeit indirectly via
the model geometry. The variables of the initial condition thus refer to the degree-of-
freedom system at each node, which may be the global coordinate system or a
skewsystem. See SKEWSYSTEM, DOF-SYSTEM.

Auxiliary commands

LIST INITIAL-CONDITION NAME

DELETE INITIAL-CONDITION NAME

7-470 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SET-INITCONDITION Sec. 7.9 Initial conditions

SET-INITCONDITION POINTS CONDITION

pointi conditioni

SET-INITCONDITION LINES CONDITION

linei conditioni idvari

SET-INITCONDITION SURFACES CONDITION

surfacei conditioni idvari

SET-INITCONDITION VOLUMES CONDITION

volumei conditioni idvari

SET-INITCONDITION EDGES CONDITION BODY

edgei conditioni idvari

SET-INITCONDITION FACES CONDITION BODY

facei conditioni idvari

SET-INITCONDITION BODIES CONDITION BODY

bodyi conditioni

SET-INITCONDITION NODE-SET CONDITION

node-seti conditioni

SET-INITCONDITION ELFACE CONDITION

elfaceseti conditioni

SET-INITCONDITION ELEDGE CONDITION

eledgeseti conditioni

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-471

Chap. 7 Model definition SET-INITCONDITION

SET-INITCONDITION POINTS assigns initial conditions to a set of geometry points.

SET-INITCONDITION LINES assigns initial conditions to a set of geometry lines.

SET-INITCONDITION SURFACES assigns initial conditions to a set of geometry surfaces.

SET-INITCONDITION VOLUMES assigns initial conditions to a set of geometry volumes.

SET-INITCONDITION EDGES assigns initial conditions to a set of solid geometry edges.

SET-INITCONDITION FACES assigns initial conditions to a set of solid geometry faces.

SET-INITCONDITION BODIES assigns initial conditions to a set of solid geometry bodies.

SET-INITCONDITION NODE-SET assigns initial conditions to sets of nodes.

SET-INITCONDITION ELFACE assigns initial conditions to a set of element faces.

SET-INITCONDITION ELEDGE assigns initial conditions to a set of element edges.

CONDITION [lowest (alphabetically) INITIAL-CONDITION]

Default initial condition ( see command INITIAL-CONDITION ) for subsequent data lines.

BODY [currently active body]

Label number of a solid geometry body.

pointi
Label number of a geometry point.

linei
Label number of a geometry line.

surfacei
Label number of a geometry surface.

volumei
Label number of a geometry volume.

edgei
Label number of a solid geometry edge (for BODY).

facei
Label number of a solid geometry face (for BODY).

7-472 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SET-INITCONDITION Sec. 7.9 Initial conditions

bodyi
Label number of a solid geometry body.

conditioni [CONDITION]
Initial condition to be applied at point pointi.

idvari [0]
Label number of a spatial data variation, defined by LINE-FUNCTION, SURFACE-FUNCTION
or VOLUME-FUNCTION, as appropriate. A 0 value indicates the initial condition is assumed
constant over the geometry entity.

elfaceseti
Label number of an element-face set as defined by the ELFACESET command. The nodes
associated with the element-face sets are assigned the initial condition.

eledgeseti
Label number of an element-edge set as defined by the ELEDGESET command. The nodes
associated with the element-edge sets are assigned the initial condition.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SET-INITCONDITION POINTS FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-INITCONDITION POINTS FIRST LAST

LIST SET-INITCONDITION LINES FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-INITCONDITION LINES FIRST LAST

LIST SET-INITCONDITION SURFACES FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-INITCONDITION SURFACES FIRST LAST

LIST SET-INITCONDITION VOLUMES FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-INITCONDITION VOLUMES FIRST LAST

LIST SET-INITCONDITION EDGES FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-INITCONDITION EDGES FIRST LAST

LIST SET-INITCONDITION FACES FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-INITCONDITION FACES FIRST LAST

LIST SET-INITCONDITION BODIES FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-INITCONDITION BODIES FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-473

Chap. 7 Model definition SET-INITCONDITION

LIST SET-INITCONDITION NODESET FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-INITCONDITION NODESET FIRST LAST

LIST SET-INITCONDITION ELFACE FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-INITCONDITION ELFACE FIRST LAST

LIST SET-INITCONDITION ELEDGE FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-INITCONDITION ELEDGE FIRST LAST

7-474 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
INITIAL-ROTATION Sec. 7.9 Initial conditions

INITIAL-ROTATION NAME GTYPE MODE XORIGIN YORIGIN ZORIGIN

XAXIS YAXIS ZAXIS P1 P2 OMEGA

namei bodyi

Apply rotational velocity initial condition, with a given angular velocity and axis of rotation.
Note that applied velocity initial condition from this command will overwrite other initial
condition commands.

NAME [(current highest rotation initial condition label number) + 1]

Label number of the rotational velocity initial condition to be defined.

GTYPE [TWO-D]
The geometry type. {TWO-D/THREE-D/NODESET}

TWO-D Line or edge.

THREE-D Surface or face.

NODESET Node set.

MODE [VECTOR]
Indicates the method of defining the axis of rotation for the initial condition. {VECTOR/
POINTS}

VECTOR The axis of rotation is defined by an origin and a direction vector.

POINTS The axis of rotation is defined to be between two geometry points.

XORIGIN [0.0]
YORIGIN [0.0]
ZORIGIN [0.0]
The global coordinates of the origin of the axis of rotation (MODE=VECTOR).

XAXIS [1.0]
YAXIS [0.0]
ZAXIS [0.0]
Global system components of the direction vector for the axis of rotation (MODE=VECTOR).

P1 [0]
P2 [0]
Label numbers of geometry points defining the axis of rotation. P1 is the origin of the vector,
with the axis direction being from P1 to P2 (MODE=POINTS).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-475

Chap. 7 Model definition INITIAL-ROTATION

OMEGA [1.0]
Angular velocity.

namei
Line label if GTYPE=TWO-D and bodyi=0
Edge label if GTYPE=TWO-D and bodyi>0
Surface label if GTYPE=THREE-D and bodyi=0
Face label if GTYPE=THREE-D and bodyi>0
Node set label if GTYPE=NODESET

bodyi
Body label.

Auxiliary commands

LIST INITIAL-ROTATION FIRST LAST

DELETE INITIAL-ROTATION FIRST LAST

7-476 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
STRAIN-FIELD Sec. 7.9 Initial conditions

STRAIN-FIELD NAME A B C D E F

Defines an initial strain field which can vary in the global z-direction for 2-D and 3-D solid
elements. This strain-field may be referenced by element groups using commands EGROUP
TWODSOLID and EGROUP THREEDSOLID (Section 8.1) in order to give initial element
strains.

NAME [(current highest strain-field label number) + 1]

Label number of the strain-field to be defined.

A [0.0]
B [0.0]
C [0.0]
D [0.0]
E [0.0]
F [0.0]
Parameters used to evaluate an initial strain field as follows:

TWODSOLID elements:
e zz = A + B z
eyy = C e zz + D
e xx = E e zz + F (axisymmetric analysis only)

THREEDSOLID elements:
e zz = A + B z
exx = C e zz + D
e yy = E e zz + F

where eij are the normal components of initial strain, and z is the global z-coordinate, therefore
calculated initial strains or stresses are referred to the global coordinate system X, Y, Z.
Note that in the case of initial stresses, we have xx, yy and zz instead of exx, eyy and ezz
respectively.

Auxiliary commands

LIST STRAIN-FIELD FIRST LAST

DELETE STRAIN-FIELD FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-477

Chap. 7 Model definition IMPERFECTION POINTS

IMPERFECTION POINTS

bucklingmodei pointi directioni displacementi

Specifies imperfections based on the buckling mode shapes, which have been calculated and
stored in a previous run. The total imperfection applied is a superposition of the imperfec-
tions from each specified buckling mode. List of buckling modes has to be continous - all
buckling modes between the first and last mode have to be specified. For modes which are
not significant, displacementi should be set to 0.

bucklingmodei
The number of the buckling mode-shape.

pointi
Point label number where the magnitude of imperfection is specified.

directioni
Translational degree of freedom for displacementi.

1 X-translation (a-translation if skew system).

2 Y-translation (b-translation if skew system).

3 Z-translation (c-translation if skew system).

displacementi
Magnitude of imperfection in the same length unit as the global coordinates. ADINA scales
the buckling mode shape indicated by bucklingmodei to have this value for the node at the
point and in the direction specified.

Auxiliary commands

LIST IMPERFECTION POINTS

DELETE IMPERFECTION POINTS

7-478 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
IMPERFECTION SHAPE Sec. 7.9 Initial conditions

IMPERFECTION SHAPE OPTION

Indicates when initial nodal displacements should be read for initial shape calculations (but
not for initial load vector or stress calculations) (OPTION = READ), or when ADINA should
write out all nodal displacements (OPTION = WRITE).

Note: IMPERFECTION SHAPE can only be used in nonlinear analysis (i.e., at least one
element group must be nonlinear).

OPTION [NONE]
Specifies whether initial imperfection data is to be read from or written to the .mds file.
{NONE/READ/WRITE}

NONE Initial imperfection data is neither read from nor written to the .mds file.

READ Initial imperfection data is read from the .mds file.

WRITE Initial imperfection data is written to the .mds file.

Auxiliary commands

LIST IMPERFECTION SHAPE

DELETE IMPERFECTION SHAPE

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-479

Chap. 7 Model definition INITIAL-MAPPING

INITIAL-MAPPING FILENAME EXTERNAL-NODE DISTANCE TIME ORDER

TOLERANCE

variablei

Loads an initial mapping-file and interpolates variable values at existing model nodes using
variable values at another set of nodes for a mesh which is stored in the initial mapping file.

FILENAME
The mapping file that contains the variable values to be mapped. If the mapping file is from
ADINA CFD, the mapping file is the restart (.res) file. Otherwise, the mapping file has a .map
extension.

EXTERNAL-NODE [ALL]
The option for the treatment of external nodes (i.e., outside the boundary of the mesh
contained in the mapping-file).

ALL Interpolation for all external nodes.

NONE No interpolation (extrapolation).

DISTANCE Interpolation for nodes which are within a maximum

specified distance from the mapping-file mesh.

DISTANCE [0.0]
Maximum allowed distance from the mapping-file mesh (used when EXTERNAL-NODE =
DISTANCE).

TIME [0.0]
Selects the solution time to be mapped.

Note that this parameter is used when the mapping file is from ADINA-F.

ORDER [2]
Order of interpolation. {2/1}

TOLERANCE [1.0E-12]
Sets the lower limit used in interpolation. Changing this setting may be useful for some
machine configurations, but it is recommended to leave this setting alone. {>0}

variablei
Degree(s) of freedom or their time derivatives to be interpolated for as nodal initial conditions.

7-480 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
INITIAL-MAPPING Sec. 7.9 Initial conditions

These include the following:

X-TRANSLATION Y-TRANSLATION Z-TRANSLATION

X-VELOCITY Y-VELOCITY Z-VELOCITY
X-ACCELERATION Y-ACCELERATION Z-ACCELERATION

X-ROTATION Y-ROTATION Z-ROTATION

XROT-VELOCITY YROT-VELOCITY ZROT-VELOCITY
XROT-ACCELERATION YROT-ACCELERATION ZROT-ACCELERATION

TEMPERATURE TGRADIENT

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-481

Chap. 7 Model definition

This page intentionally left blank.

7-482 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
THERMAL-MAPPING Sec. 7.9 Initial conditions

THERMAL-MAPPING FILENAME EXTERNAL-NODE DISTANCE TIME

Creates a nodal temperature and temperature gradient file for the current finite element model
by interpolation from a mapping-file which contains a finite element mesh with nodal
temperatures / gradients for a range of solution times.

This command is useful for prescribing temperatures for the ADINA model from a temperature
solution obtained from an independent mesh, e.g. from an ADINA-T model.

FILENAME
The mapping file that contains the variable values to be mapped. If the mapping file is from
ADINA CFD, the mapping file is the restart (.res) file. Otherwise, the mapping file has a .map
extension.

EXTERNAL-NODE [ALL]
The option for the treatment of external nodes, i.e. those which lie outside the mesh con-
tained within the mapping-file:

ALL Interpolation (extrapolation) for all external nodes.

NONE No interpolation (zero value assigned).

DISTANCE Interpolation for nodes which are within a maximum

specified distance from the mapping-file mesh.

DISTANCE [0.0]
Maximum distance for external node interpolation.

TIME [0.0]
Selects the solution time to be mapped.

Note that this parameter is used when the mapping file is from ADINA-F.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-483

Chap. 7 Model definition SKEWSYSTEMS CYLINDRICAL

SKEWSYSTEMS CYLINDRICAL

ni xorigini yorigini zorigini xaxisi yaxisi zaxisi normali

Command SKEWSYSTEMS CYLINDRICAL defines a skew Cartesian coordinate system in

terms of a cylinder origin and axis direction. Skew systems can be referenced (via command
DOF-SYSTEM ) by geometry and nodes to indicate the local orientation of the nodal degrees
of freedom.

Note that skew system definitions are distinct from coordinate systems defined via command
SYSTEM, which are used to indicate point and node locations.

ni
Label number for the desired skew system.

xorigini [0.0]
yorigini [0.0]
zorigini [0.0]
The global coordinates of the origin of the axis of the cylinder.

Axis vector

Origin

ez, C

er, A
eq , B

Cylindrical skew system (axis A aligned with radial direction)

xaxisi [0.0]
yaxisi [1.0]
zaxisi [0.0]
Global system components of the direction axis of the cylinder.

7-484 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SKEWSYSTEMS CYLINDRICAL Sec. 7.10 Systems

normali [B]
normali indicates which of the skew system axes is to be aligned with the er (radial) direction.
Valid choices are A, B. If normal = A, skew system axis C is aligned with the ez (axis)
direction of the cylinder. If normal = B, skew system axis A is aligned with the ez direction of
the cylinder.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SKEWSYSTEM FIRST LAST

DELETE SKEWSYSTEM FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-485

Chap. 7 Model definition

This page intentionally left blank

7-486 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SKEWSYSTEMS EULERANGLES Sec. 7.10 Systems

SKEWSYSTEMS EULERANGLES

ni phii thetai xsii

Defines skew Cartesian coordinate systems in terms of Euler angles. Skew systems can be
referenced, via DOF-SYSTEM, to indicate the local orientation of the nodal degrees of
freedom.

Note that skew system definitions are distinct from coordinate systems defined via command
SYSTEM, which are used to indicate point and node locations.

ni
Label number for the desired skew system.

phii [0.0]
thetai [0.0]
xsii [0.0]
Rotations, in degrees, about the global Cartesian system axes, required to orient the local
directions of the skew system, see SYSTEM for Euler-angle definition.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SKEWSYSTEM FIRST LAST

DELETE SKEWSYSTEM FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-487

Chap. 7 Model definition SKEWSYSTEMS NORMAL

SKEWSYSTEMS NORMAL NAME

Defines a skew Cartesian coordinate system to be such that one of its directions is normal to
a given line or surface. Note that no other parameters are required to define this skewsystem.

When assigned via DOF-SYSTEM, each node referenced has a skew system defined such
that a selected local axis is normal to the underlying geometry.

Note that skew system definitions are distinct from coordinate systems defined via command
SYSTEM, which are used to indicate point and node locations.

NAME
Label number of the skew coordinate system, which may be referenced by commands DOF-
SYSTEM.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SKEWSYSTEM FIRST LAST

DELETE SKEWSYSTEM FIRST LAST

7-488 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SKEWSYSTEMS POINTS Sec. 7.10 Systems

SKEWSYSTEMS POINTS

ni p1i p2i p3i

Defines skew Cartesian coordinate systems in terms of geometry points. Skew systems can
be referenced, via DOF-SYSTEM, to indicate the local orientation of the nodal degrees of
freedom.

Note that skew system definitions are distinct from coordinate systems defined via command
SYSTEM, which are used to indicate point and node locations.

Zs

Ys
P1

Xs P3
Z
Zs
P2

Y Ys

X node
Xs

ni
Label number for the desired skew system.

p1i p2i p3i

Geometry point label numbers. The vector from point p1i to point p2i defines the direction of
the local X-axis of the skew system. The vector from p1i to p3i is taken to lie in the local XY-
plane of the skew system. Note that points p1i, p2i, p3i must not be collinear.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SKEWSYSTEM FIRST LAST

DELETE SKEWSYSTEM FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-489

Chap. 7 Model definition SKEWSYSTEMS SPHERICAL

SKEWSYSTEMS SPHERICAL

ni xorigini yorigini zorigini

Command SKEWSYSTEMS SPHERICAL defines a skew Cartesian coordinate system in

terms of a sphere origin. Skew systems can be referenced (via command DOF-SYSTEM ) by
geometry and nodes to indicate the local orientation of the nodal degrees of freedom.

Note that skew system definitions are distinct from coordinate systems defined via command
SYSTEM, which are used to indicate point and node locations. The skew system axis A is
aligned with the er direction of the sphere, axis B is aligned with the e direction and axis C is
chosen to create a right-handed orthogonal coordinate system.

A Direction A is the radial direction.

Direction C is chosen so that the coordinate

C system I-J-C is a right-handed orthogonal
system. Direction I is parallel to the Z axis.
J Direction J is the projection of direction A
Origin B
on the X-Y plane.
Direction B is chosen so that the coordinate
system A-B-C is a right-handed orthogonal
system.

Spherical skew system

ni
Label number for the desired skew system.

xorigini [0.0]
yorigini [0.0]
zorigini [0.0]
The global coordinates of the origin of the sphere.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SKEWSYSTEM FIRST LAST

DELETE SKEWSYSTEM FIRST LAST

7-490 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SKEWSYSTEMS VECTORS Sec. 7.10 Systems

SKEWSYSTEMS VECTORS

ni axi ayi azi bxi byi bzi

Defines skew Cartesian coordinate systems in terms of direction vectors. Skew systems
can be referenced, via DOF-SYSTEM, to indicate the local orientation of the nodal degrees of
freedom.

Note that skew system definitions are distinct from coordinate systems defined via command
SYSTEM, which are used to indicate point and node locations.

Zs

Ys

Z (bx,by,bz)
node
Xs

Y (ax,ay,az)
X
ni
Label number for the desired skew system.

axi [1.0]
ayi [0.0]
azi [0.0]
Vector aligned with the local X-axis of the skew system, defined with respect to the global
Cartesian system. Note that for two-dimensional problems vector (axi,ayi,azi) must be parallel
to the global Cartesian X-axis.

bxi [0.0]
byi [1.0]
bzi [0.0]
Vector lying in the local XY-plane of the skew system, defined with respect to the global
Cartesian system. Note that vector (bxi,byi,bzi) must not be parallel to vector (axi,ayi,azi).

Auxiliary commands

LIST SKEWSYSTEM FIRST LAST

DELETE SKEWSYSTEM FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-491

Chap. 7 Model definition

This page intentionally left blank.

7-492 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DOF-SYSTEM Sec. 7.10 Systems

DOF-SYSTEM POINTS

namei skewsystemi

DOF-SYSTEM LINES

linei skewsystemi normali tangenti pfocusi nsensei tsensei

DOF-SYSTEM EDGES BODY

edgei skewsystemi normali tangenti pfocusi nsensei tsensei

DOF-SYSTEM SURFACES

namei skewsystemi normali tangenti pfocusi nsensei tsensei

DOF-SYSTEM FACES BODY

namei skewsystemi normali tangenti pfocusi nsensei tsensei

DOF-SYSTEM VOLUMES

namei skewsystemi

DOF-SYSTEM BODIES

namei skewsystemi

DOF-SYSTEM NODESETS

namei skewsystemi

DOF-SYSTEM POINTS assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom associated
with a set of geometry points.

DOF-SYSTEM LINES assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom associated
with a set of geometry lines. Furthermore, for skew coordinate systems defined to be of type
NORMAL, the local skew system axes to be aligned with the normal and tangent directions to
the line are specified. The normal vector may also be directed such that it points toward or

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-493

Chap. 7 Model definition DOF-SYSTEM

away from a given focal point, and the sense of the tangent vector may be similarly
assigned.

DOF-SYSTEM EDGES assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom associ-
ated with a set of solid geometry edges. Furthermore, for skew coordinate systems defined to
be of type NORMAL, the local skew system axes to be aligned with the normal and tangent
directions to the edge are specified. The normal vector may also be directed such that it
points toward or away from a given focal point, and the sense of the tangent vector may be
similarly assigned.

DOF-SYSTEM SURFACES assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom

associated with a set of geometry surfaces. Furthermore, for skew coordinate systems
defined to be of type NORMAL, the local skew system axis to be aligned with the normal
direction to the surface is specified along with the axis to be aligned with the surface tangent
parallel to the local surface parametric u-coordinate direction. The normal vector may also be
directed such that it points toward or away from a given focal point, and the sense of the
tangent vector may be similarly assigned.

DOF-SYSTEM FACES assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom associ-
ated with a set of solid geometry faces. Furthermore, for skew coordinate systems defined to
be of type NORMAL, the local skew system axis to be aligned with the normal direction to
the face is specified along with the axis to be aligned with the face tangent parallel to the local
face parametric u-coordinate direction. The normal vector may also be directed such that it
points toward or away from a given focal point, and the sense of the tangent vector may be
similarly assigned.

DOF-SYSTEM VOLUMES assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom

associated with a set of geometry volumes.

DOF-SYSTEM BODIES assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom associ-
ated with a set of geometry bodies.

DOF-SYSTEM NODESETS assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom

associated with a node set.

BODY [currently active body]

Label number of a solid geometry body.

namei / linei / edgei

Label number of a geometry entity or nodeset. All nodes associated with the geometry or
contained in the nodeset are assigned the specified skew system.

7-494 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DOF-SYSTEM Sec. 7.10 Systems

skewsystemi
Label number of a skew coordinate system, as defined by SKEWSYSTEM. Setting
skewsystemi = 0 assigns the global Cartesian system to the nodal degrees of freedom.

The following parameters are applicable only to skew systems of type NORMAL applied to
geometry lines, edges, surfaces and faces.

normali
Indicates which of the skew system axes is to be aligned with the normal direction of the
geometry. The default is C when applied to lines or edges, and A when applied to surfaces or
faces. {A/B/C}

tangenti [B]
Indicates which of the skew system axes is to be aligned with the tangential direction of the
geometry. {A/B/C}

pfocusi
Label number of a geometry point which is the focal point for directing the normal vector,
when skewsystemi is of type NORMAL. The principal normal vector at a point on the line is
determined to point away from the local center of curvature. The opposite direction is also
normal to the line, and thus a focal point may be used so that the actual normal direction used
points toward or away from this point, the selection of which is made by nsensei. If input as 0,
then no focus is specified, and the principal normal direction is used.

Note:

For straight lines, straight line segments, or points of inflection on a curve, for
which the curvature is zero, the normal vector is taken to be either:

(a) when pfocusi = 0, or when pfocusi >0 and the tangent points directly toward or away
from point pfocusi; the cross product of the tangential direction with the global X-
direction (or Y-direction if the tangent is parallel to the X-direction)

(b) otherwise, a binormal vector is calculated as the cross product of the tangent vector and
the vector directed from the point on the curve to the focal point (the focal vector).
The normal vector is then taken as the cross product of the binormal and the tangent
vectors. In this way the normal vector lies in the plane formed by the tangent and focal
vectors, and is directed toward the focal point (or away from the focal point, as
controlled by nsensei).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-495

Chap. 7 Model definition DOF-SYSTEM

nsensei [+1]
Indicates the direction of the normal vector with reference to the focal point. It is used in
conjunction with the pfocusi to orient the normal direction.

+1 Normal direction points toward point pfocusi.

-1 Normal direction points away from point pfocusi.

tsensei [+1]
Indicates the direction of the tangent vector. It is used in conjunction with tangenti to orient
the skew system tangent direction.

+1 Follow tangent direction of the geometry.

-1 Opposite to tangent direction of the geometry.

Auxiliary commands

LIST DOF-SYSTEM POINTS FIRST LAST

DELETE DOF-SYSTEM POINTS FIRST LAST

LIST DOF-SYSTEM LINES FIRST LAST

DELETE DOF-SYSTEM LINES FIRST LAST

LIST DOF-SYSTEM EDGES FIRST LAST

DELETE DOF-SYSTEM EDGES FIRST LAST

LIST DOF-SYSTEM SURFACES FIRST LAST

DELETE DOF-SYSTEM SURFACES FIRST LAST

LIST DOF-SYSTEM FACES FIRST LAST

DELETE DOF-SYSTEM FACES FIRST LAST

LIST DOF-SYSTEM VOLUMES FIRST LAST

DELETE DOF-SYSTEM VOLUMES FIRST LAST

LIST DOF-SYSTEM NODESETS FIRST LAST

DELETE DOF-SYSTEM NODESETS FIRST LAST

7-496 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DOF-SYSTEM Sec. 7.10 Systems

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-497

Chap. 7 Model definition SHELLNODESDOF

SHELLNODESDOF POINTS

pointi nsdofi

SHELLNODESDOF LINES

linei nsdofi

SHELLNODESDOF SURFACES

surfacei nsdofi

SHELLNODESDOF NODESETS

nodeseti nsdofi

SHELLNODESDOF EDGES BODY

edgei nsdofi

SHELLNODESDOF FACES BODY

facei nsdofi

SHELLNODESDOF POINTS specifies the number of degrees of freedom for shell midsurface
nodes associated with a set of geometry points.

SHELLNODESDOF LINES specifies the number of degrees of freedom for shell midsurface
nodes associated with a set of geometry lines.

SHELLNODESDOF SURFACES specifies the number of degrees of freedom for shell

midsurface nodes associated with a set of geometry surfaces.

SHELLNODESDOF NODESETS specifies the number of degrees of freedom for shell

midsurface nodes associated with a node set.

SHELLNODESDOF EDGES specifies the number of degrees of freedom for shell midsurface
nodes associated with a set of solid geometry edges.

7-498 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SHELLNODESDOF Sec. 7.10 Systems

SHELLNODESDOF FACES specifies the number of degrees of freedom for shell midsurface
nodes associated with a set of solid geometry faces.

BODY [currently active body]

Solid geometry body label number.

pointi
Geometry point label number.

linei
Line label number.

surfacei
Surface label number.

nodeseti
Nodeset label number.

edgei
Edge label number (for BODY).

facei
Face label number (for BODY).

nsdofi [AUTOMATIC]
Number of degrees of freedom for shell midsurface nodes at the geometry entity.

FIVE Three translation, and two rotation degrees of freedom (in local
midsurface system). See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

SIX Three translation and three rotation (global or skew) degrees of

freedom.

AUTOMATIC The program automatically decides on the number of degrees of

freedom to be assigned to shell nodes based on certain modeling
considerations. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SHELLNODESDOF
POINTS/LINES/SURFACES/NODESETS/EDGES/FACES FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-499

Chap. 7 Model definition

DELETE SHELLNODESDOF
POINTS/LINES/SURFACES/NODESETS/EDGES/FACES FIRST LAST

7-500 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
AXES CONSTANT Sec. 7.10 Systems

AXES CONSTANT NAME AX AY AZ BX BY BZ

Defines an axes-system in terms of constant direction vectors. Axes-systems can be

referenced by SET-AXES-MATERIAL, SET-AXES-STRAIN to indicate the local orientation
of the orthotropic material properties and/or initial strain, respectively.

NAME
Label number for the axes-system to be defined.

AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Vector aligned with the local x-axis of the axes-system, defined with respect to the global
Cartesian coordinate system.

BX [0.0]
BY [1.0]
BZ [0.0]
Vector lying in the local xy-plane of the axes-system, defined with respect to the global
Cartesian coordinate system. Note that vector (BX, BY, BZ) must not be parallel to vector
(AX, AY, AZ).

Auxiliary commands

LIST AXES FIRST LAST

DELETEAXES FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-501

Chap. 7 Model definition AXES LINE1

AXES LINE1 NAME LINE

Defines an axes-system via a geometry line. Axes-systems can be referenced by

SET-AXES-MATERIAL, SET-AXES-STRAIN to indicate the local orientation of the
orthotropic material properties and/or initial strain, respectively.

LINE

P
t

z y

element

C x (|| t)

centroid

NAME
Label number for the axes-system to be defined.

LINE
Label number of the geometry line defining the axes-system.

Note: The axes-system at an element centroid C is determined by calculating the tangent

vector at the nearest point P on the geometry line. This gives the local x-direction
of the axes-system. The local xy-plane of the axes-system is calculated to include
both the tangent vector to the line and the vector from the element centroid to the
nearest point on the line. See Figure.

Auxiliary commands

LIST AXES FIRST LAST

DELETEAXES FIRST LAST

7-502 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
AXES LINE2 Sec. 7.10 Systems

AXES LINE2 NAME LINE1 LINE2

Defines an axes-system via two geometry lines. Axes-systems can be referenced by

SET-AXES-MATERIAL, SET-AXES-STRAIN to indicate the local orientation of the
orthotropic material properties and/or initial strain, respectively.

LINE 1
P1
z ( || t1 x t2) t1

element (t2)

C x ( || t1)

centroid

t2

LINE 2

P2

NAME
Label number for the axes-system to be defined.

LINE1
Label number of the first geometry line defining the axes-system.

LINE2
Label number of the second geometry line defining the axes-system.

Note: The axes-system at an element centroid C is determined by calculating the tangent

vector at the nearest point P1 on the first geometry line. This gives the local x-
direction of the axes-system. The local xy-plane of the axes-system is determined
to include this tangent vector and the tangent vector at the nearest point P2 on the
second geometry line. See Figure.

Auxiliary commands

LIST AXES FIRST LAST

DELETEAXES FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-503

Chap. 7 Model definition AXES NODES

AXES NODES NAME NODE1 NODE2 NODE3

Defines an axes-system using three nodes.

Axes-systems can be referenced by commands SET-AXES-MATERIAL, SET-AXES-STRAIN,

by elements to indicate the local orientation of the orthotropic material properties and/or
initial strain, respectively.

NAME
Label number for the desired axes-system.

NODE1
Label number of the first axes-system defining node.

z (a x b) y (a x b) x a (a x b )
NODE3

b
element
C x (a ) NODE2
NODE1 a

centroid

NODE2

Label number of the second axes-system defining node.

NODE3
Label number of the third axes-system defining node.

Note:
The local x-direction of the axes-system is determined by the vector from the first node
NODE1 to the second node NODE2. The local z-direction of the axes-system is determined
as the normal to the plane defined by the three nodes NODE1, NODE2, and NODE3. The local
y-direction of the axes-system is then given by the right-hand rule. See figure.

7-504 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
AXES NODES Sec. 7.10 Systems

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-505

Chap. 7 Model definition AXES POINT2

AXES POINT2 NAME POINT1 POINT2

Defines an axes-system via two geometry points. Axes-systems can be referenced by

SET-AXES-MATERIAL, SET-AXES-STRAIN, to indicate the local orientation of the
orthotropic material properties and/or initial strain, respectively.

POINT2

z ( a x b) y

POINT1
element
x a
C

centroid

NAME
Label number for the axes-system to be defined.

POINT1
Label number of the first geometry point defining the axes-system.

POINT2
Label number of the second geometry point defining the axes-system, which must not be
coincident with point POINT1.

Note The local x-direction of the axes-system at an element centroid C is determined by

the vector from the centroid to POINT1. The local z-direction of the axes-system
is determined as the normal to the plane defined by the centroid, POINT1 and
POINT2. The local y-direction of the axes-system is then given by the right-hand
rule. See Figure.

Auxiliary commands

LIST AXES FIRST LAST

DELETEAXES FIRST LAST

7-506 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
AXES POINT3 Sec. 7.10 Systems

AXES POINT3 NAME POINT1 POINT2 POINT3

Defines an axes-system via three geometry points. Axes-systems can be referenced by

SET-AXES-MATERIAL, SET-AXES-STRAIN, to indicate the local orientation of the
orthotropic material properties and/or initial strain, respectively.

z (a x b) y ( a x b) x a
( a x b) POINT3

element b
C x ( a)
a POINT2

POINT1
centroid

NAME
Label number for the axes-system to be defined.

POINT1
Label number of the first geometry point defining the axes-system.

POINT2
Label number of the second geometry point defining the axes-system.

POINT3
Label number of the third geometry point defining the axes-system.

Note: The local x-direction of the axes-system is determined by the vector from POINT1
to POINT2. The local z-direction of the axes-system is determined as the normal
to the plane defined by the three points POINT1, POINT2, and POINT3. The
local y-direction of the axes-system is then given by the right-hand rule. See Figure.

Auxiliary commands

LIST AXES FIRST LAST

DELETEAXES FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-507

Chap. 7 Model definition AXES POINT-LINE

AXES POINT-LINE NAME LINE POINT

Defines an axes-system via a geometry line and a geometry point. Axes-systems can be
referenced by SET-AXES-MATERIAL, SET-AXES-STRAIN, to indicate the local orientation
of the orthotropic material properties and/or initial strain, respectively.

axb
POINT
b
LINE
u
P1 P a P2
t
z (|| a x b)
y

centroid
element
C x(||t)

NAME
Label number for the axes-system to be defined.

LINE
Label number of the geometry line defining the axes-system. Note that the line must not be
closed, i.e., it must have non-coincident end-points.

POINT
Label number of the geometry point defining the axes-system. The point must not be
collinear with the end-points of line LINE.

Note: The axes-system at an element centroid C is determined by calculating the tangent

vector at the nearest point P on the geometry line. This gives the local x-direction of
the axes-system. The local xy-plane of the axes-system is defined by the end-points
of the geometry line LINE, and the given geometry point POINT. Thus, in order
to determine this plane, the line must have distinct end-points P1 and P2, i.e., it
cannot be closed or degenerate, and the geometry point must not be collinear with
those end-points. See Figure.

Auxiliary commands

LIST AXES FIRST LAST

DELETEAXES FIRST LAST

7-508 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
AXES SURFACE Sec. 7.10 Systems

AXES SURFACE NAME SURFACE

Defines an axes-system via a geometry surface. Axes-systems can be referenced by

SET-AXES-MATERIAL, SET-AXES-STRAIN, to indicate the local orientation of the
orthotropic material properties and/or initial strain, respectively.

z (||n)
y (||n x u)

element
x (||u)
C

centroid n v

u
P

NAME
Label number for the axes-system to be defined.

SURFACE
Label number of the geometry surface defining the axes-system.

Note: The axes-system at an element centroid C is determined by calculating the surface

tangent and normal vectors at the nearest point P on the geometry surface. The
local x-direction of the axes-system is given by the tangent vector in the local
parametric u-direction of the surface. The local z-direction of the axes-system is
given by the surface normal direction and the local y-direction of the axes-system is
then given by the right-hand rule. See Figure.

Auxiliary commands

LIST AXES FIRST LAST

DELETEAXES FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-509

Chap. 7 Model definition AXES EDGE

AXES EDGE NAME EDGE BODY

Defines an axes-system via a geometry edge. Axes-systems can be referenced by

SET-AXES-MATERIAL, SET-AXES-STRAIN, to indicate the local orientation of the
orthotropic material properties and/or initial strain, respectively.

n
u
EDGE
P t

z
y

element
x (||t)
C

centroid

NAME
Label number for the axes-system to be defined.

EDGE
Label number of the geometry edge defining the axes-system.

BODY [currently active body]

Label number of the geometry body containing the edge.

Note: The axes-system at an element centroid C is determined by calculating the edge

tangent and normal vectors at the nearest point P on the geometry edge. The local x-
direction of the axes-system is given by the edge tangent vector (in the local
parametric u-direction of the edge). The local z-direction of the axes-system is given
by the edge normal direction and the local y-direction of the axes-system is then
given by the right-hand rule. See Figure.

Auxiliary commands

LIST AXES FIRST LAST

DELETEAXES FIRST LAST

7-510 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
AXES FACE Sec. 7.10 Systems

AXES FACE NAME FACE BODY

Defines an axes-system via a geometry face. Axes-systems can be referenced by

SET-AXES-MATERIAL, SET-AXES-STRAIN, to indicate the local orientation of the
orthotropic material properties and/or initial strain, respectively.

NAME
Label number for the axes-system to be defined.

FACE
Label number of the geometry face defining the axes-system.

BODY [currently active body]

Label number of the geometry body containing the face.

Note: The axes-system at an element centroid is determined by calculating the face

tangent and normal vectors at the nearest point on the geometry face. The local x-
direction of the axes-system is given by the tangent vector in the local parametric
u-direction of the face. The local z-direction of the axes-system is given by the
face normal direction and the local y-direction of the axes-system is then given by
the right-hand rule. See Figure for AXES SURFACE.

Auxiliary commands

LIST AXES FIRST LAST

DELETEAXES FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-511

Chap. 7 Model definition AXES-CYLINDRICAL

AXES CYLINDRICAL NAME XORIGIN YORIGIN ZORIGIN XAXIS YAXIS

ZAXIS

Defines a cylindrical axes system in terms of an origin and an axis direction. This axes system
can be referenced by SET-AXES-MATERIAL and SET-AXES-STRAIN to indicate the local
orientation of the orthotropic material properties and/or initial strain, respectively.

In this axes system, the local x direction is aligned with the er (radial) direction, the local y
direction is aligned with the e direction, and the local z direction is aligned with the eh
(cylindrical axis) direction.

Z
eh

ZL e
YL

XL er

h
Y
r

NAME
Label number for the axes system to be defined.

XORIGIN, YORIGIN, ZORIGIN [0.0,0.0,0.0]

The global coordinates of the origin of the cylindrical axis.

XAXIS, YAXIS, ZAXIS [0.0,0.0,1.0]

The global components of the direction vector of the cylindrical axis.

Auxiliary commands

LIST AXES FIRST LAST

DELETEAXES FIRST LAST

7-512 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
AXES-SPHERICAL Sec. 7.10 Systems

AXES SPHERICAL NAME XORIGIN YORIGIN ZORIGIN XAXIS YAXIS

ZAXIS

Defines a spherical axes system in terms of an origin. This axes system can be referenced by
SET-AXES-MATERIAL and SET-AXES-STRAIN to indicate the local orientation of the
orthotropic material properties and/or initial strain, respectively.

In this axes system, the local x direction is aligned with the er (radial) direction of the sphere,
the local y direction is aligned with the e direction, and the local z direction is aligned with
the e direction.
Z

er
XL e

ZL

YL
e

NAME
Label number for the axes system to be defined.

XORIGIN, YORIGIN, ZORIGIN [0.0,0.0,0.0]

The global coordinates of the origin of the spherical axis.

XAXIS, YAXIS, ZAXIS [0.0,0.0,1.0]

The global components of the direction vector of the spherical axis.

Auxiliary commands

LIST AXES FIRST LAST

DELETEAXES FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-513

Chap. 7 Model definition SET-AXES-MATERIAL

SET-AXES-MATERIAL SURFACES

surfacei axesi adiri bdiri

SET-AXES-MATERIAL VOLUMES

volumei axesi adiri bdiri

SET-AXES-MATERIAL FACES BODY

facei axesi adiri bdiri

SET-AXES-MATERIAL BODIES

bodyi axesi adiri bdiri

SET-AXES-MATERIALELEMENTSETS

elementseti axesi adiri bdiri

SET-AXES-MATERIAL SURFACES assigns axes-systems, as defined by AXES, to a set of

geometry surfaces.

SET-AXES-MATERIAL VOLUMES assigns axes-systems, as defined by AXES, to a set of

geometry volumes.

SET-AXES-MATERIAL FACES assigns axes-systems, as defined by AXES, to a set of solid

geometry faces.

SET-AXES-MATERIAL BODIES assigns axes-systems, as defined by AXES, to a set of solid

geometry bodies.

SET-AXES-MATERIAL ELEMENTSETS assigns axes-systems, defined by command AXES,

to a set of element sets.

BODY [currently active body]

Label number of a solid geometry body.

surfacei
Label number of a geometry surface.

7-514 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SET-AXES-MATERIAL Sec. 7.10 Systems

volumei
Label number of a geometry volume.

facei
Label number of a solid geometry face (for BODY).

bodyi
Label number for a solid geometry body.

Note: Any elements generated for the referenced geometry will adopt orthotropic
material directories as calculated by the assigned axes-system.

elementseti
Label number of a element set. Any elements generated in this element set will calculate
orthotropic material directions from the assigned the axes-system axesi.

axesi
Label number of an axes-system defined by AXES.

adiri [1]
The material a-direction is selected to be determined from one of the calculated local x-, y-, or
z-directions of the axes-system.

1 a-direction coincides with local x-direction of axis-system.

2 a-direction coincides with local y-direction of axis-system.

3 a-direction coincides with local z-direction of axis-system.

-1 a-direction coincides with local negative x-direction of axis-system.

-2 a-direction coincides with local negative y-direction of axis-system.

-3 a-direction coincides with local negative z-direction of axis-system.

bdiri [2]
The material b-direction is selected to be determined from one of the calculated local x-, y-, or
z-directions of the axes-system.

1 b-direction coincides with local x-direction of axis-system.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-515

Chap. 7 Model definition SET-AXES-MATERIAL

2 b-direction coincides with local y-direction of axis-system.

3 b-direction coincides with local z-direction of axis-system.

-1 b-direction coincides with local negative x-direction of axis-system.

-2 b-direction coincides with local negative y-direction of axis-system.

-3 b-direction coincides with local negative z-direction of axis-system.

Note: abs(adiri) must differ from abs(bdiri).

Auxiliary commands

LIST SET-AXES-MATERIAL SURFACES FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-AXES-MATERIAL SURFACES FIRST LAST

LIST SET-AXES-MATERIALVOLUMES FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-AXES-MATERIALVOLUMES FIRST LAST

LIST SET-AXES-MATERIAL FACES FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-AXES-MATERIALFACES FIRST LAST

LIST SET-AXES-MATERIAL BODIES FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-AXES-MATERIALBODIES FIRST LAST

LIST SET-AXES-MATERIALELEMENTSETS FIRST LAST

DELETE S ET-AXES-MATERIALELEMENTSETS FIRST LAST

7-516 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SET-AXES-STRAIN Sec. 7.10 Systems

SET-AXES-STRAIN SURFACES

surfacei axesi adiri bdiri

SET-AXES-STRAIN VOLUMES

volumei axesi adiri bdiri

SET-AXES-STRAIN FACES BODY

facei axesi adiri bdiri

SET-AXES-STRAIN BODIES

bodyi axesi adiri bdiri

SET-AXES-STRAIN ELEMENTSETS

elementseti axesi adiri bdiri

SET-AXES-STRAIN SURFACES assigns axes-systems, defined by AXES, to a set of geom-

etry surfaces.

SET-AXES-STRAIN VOLUMES assigns axes-systems, defined by AXES, to a set of geometry

volumes.

SET-AXES-STRAIN FACES assigns axes-systems, defined by AXES, to a set of solid

geometry faces.

SET-AXES-STRAIN BODIES assigns axes-system, defined by AXES, to a set of solid

geometry bodies.

SET-AXES-STRAIN ELEMENTSETS assigns axes-systems, defined by command AXES, to a

set of element sets.

BODY [currently active body]

Label number of a solid geometry body.

surfacei
Label number of a geometry surface.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-517

Chap. 7 Model definition SET-AXES-STRAIN

volumei
Label number of a geometry volume.

facei
Label number of a solid geometry face (for BODY).

bodyi
Label number of a solid geometry body.

Note: Any elements generated for the referenced geometry will adopt initial-strain
directions as calculated by the assigned axes-system.

elementseti
Label number of a element set. Any elements generated in this element set will calculate
orthotropic strain directions from the assigned the axes-system axesi.

axesi
Label number of an axes-system defined by AXES.

adiri [1]
The strain a-direction is selected to be determined from one of the calculated local x-, y- or z-
directions of the axes-system.

1 a-direction coincides with local x-direction of axis-system.

2 a-direction coincides with local y-direction of axis-system.

3 a-direction coincides with local z-direction of axis-system.

-1 a-direction coincides with local negative x-direction of axis-system.

-2 a-direction coincides with local negative y-direction of axis-system.

-3 a-direction coincides with local negative z-direction of axis-system.

bdiri [2]
The strain b-direction is selected to be determined from one of the calculated local x-, y- or z-
directions of the axes-system.

1 b-direction coincides with local x-direction of axis-system.

7-518 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SET-AXES-STRAIN Sec. 7.10 Systems

2 b-direction coincides with local y-direction of axis-system.

3 b-direction coincides with local z-direction of axis-system.

-1 b-direction coincides with local negative x-direction of axis-system.

-2 b-direction coincides with local negative y-direction of axis-system.

-3 b-direction coincides with local negative z-direction of axis-system.

Note: abs(adiri) must differ from abs(bdiri).

Auxiliary commands

LIST SET-AXES-STRAIN SURFACES FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-AXES-STRAIN SURFACES FIRST LAST

LIST SET-AXES-STRAIN VOLUMES FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-AXES-STRAIN VOLUMES FIRST LAST

LIST SET-AXES-STRAIN FACES FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-AXES-STRAIN FACES FIRST LAST

LIST SET-AXES-STRAIN BODIES FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-AXES-STRAIN BODIES FIRST LAST

LIST SET-AXES-STRAIN ELEMENTSETS FIRST LAST

DELETE SET-AXES-STRAIN ELEMENTSETS FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-519

Chap. 7 Model definition ALIGN-TRANSLATION

ALIGN-TRANSLATION NAME KTC1 KTC2 KTC3 KTC1TFUNC KTC2TFUNC

KTC3TFUNC

timei optioni xcpi ycpi zcpi tbfactori

This command is used to define the translational alignment data for alignment elements. This
data includes the stiffnesses used for translational alignment, and also the prescribed
translational alignment as a function of solution time.

NAME
Number assigned to this ALIGN-TRANSLATION definition.

KTC1, KTC2, KTC3 [1E10,1E10,1E10]

The stiffness used for translational alignment in the c1, c2, c3 directions of local node 1.

KTC1TFUNC, KTC2TFUNC, KTC3TFUNC [0,0,0]

The time functions multiplying KTC1, KTC2, KTC3. If 0 is entered, then no time function is
used.

timei
Time at which the prescribed alignment is to occur. This time may or may not actually
correspond to a solution time.

optioni [ALIGNED]
optioni =ALIGNED, the prescribed alignment is set to zero.

optioni =COMPONENTS: the prescribed alignment is directly specified using xcpi, ycpi, zcpi

optioni =TBFACTOR: the prescribed alignment is equal to the alignment at time TB multiplied
by tbfactori

optioni =SAME: the prescribed alignment is the same as the prescribed alignment for the
previous row of these data input lines.

xcpi, ycpi, zcpi [0.0,0.0,0.0]

The components of the prescribed alignment in the c triad coordinate system of local node 1,
used when optioni=COMPONENTS.

tbfactori [1.0]
The multiplying factor used when optioni=TBFACTOR

7-520 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ALIGN-TRANSLATION Sec. 7.11 Alignment properties

Notes:

Let TBEGIN be the lowest time of the data input lines, TEND be the highest time of the data
input lines. Note that TBEGIN and TEND need not be times at which the solution is actually
obtained.

Let TB be the solution time immediately preceding TBEGIN. For example, if the time step size
is 0.1, and TBEGIN=1.0, then TB=0.9. If TBEGIN is the time at solution start, then TB is also
the time of solution start.

This is analogous to element birth for other element types, where TBEGIN is similar to
TBIRTH.

1) For solution times less than TBEGIN, the translation alignment is not active.

2) When using optioni =TBFACTOR, and tbfactori =1.0, then the prescribed alignment at time
timei is equal to the alignment at time TB. In this way, the element has zero translational
forces when the element configuration corresponds to the configuration at time TB.

3) Linear interpolation is used for solution times between times given in this command.

4) For solution times greater than TEND, the prescribed translational alignment is unchanged
from the prescribed translational alignment at TEND.

5) The c1, c2, c3 directions are the directions of the c coordinate axes of alignment element
local node 1.

6) xcpi, ycpi, zcpi are measured in the c1, c2, c3 directions.

7) optioni =SAME cannot be used in the first row of the data input lines (timei=TBEGIN)

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-521

Chap. 7 Model definition ALIGN-DISTANCE

ALIGN-DISTANCE NAME KD KDTFUNC

timei optioni dpi tbfactori

This command is used to define the distance alignment data for alignment elements. This data
includes the stiffness used for distance alignment, and also the prescribed alignment distance
as a function of solution time.

NAME
Number assigned to this ALIGN-DISTANCE definition.

KD [1E10]
The stiffness used for distance alignment.

KDTFUNC [0]
The time function multiplying KD. If KDTFUNC=0, then no time function is used.

timei
Time at which the prescribed alignment distance is to occur. This time may or may not
actually correspond to a solution time.

optioni [ALIGNED]
optioni =ALIGNED, the prescribed alignment distance is set to zero.

optioni = DISTANCE: the prescribed alignment distance is directly specified using dpi

optioni =TBFACTOR: the prescribed alignment distance is equal to the alignment distance at
time TB multiplied by tbfactori

optioni =SAME: the prescribed alignment is the same as the prescribed alignment for the
previous row of these data input lines.

dpi [0.0]
The value of the prescribed alignment distance, used when optioni=DISTANCE. dpi must be
greater than or equal to zero.

tbfactori [1.0]
The multiplying factor used when optioni=TBFACTOR

Notes:

Let TBEGIN be the lowest time of the data input lines, TEND be the highest time of the data
input lines. Note that TBEGIN and TEND need not be times at which the solution is actually

7-522 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ALIGN-DISTANCE Sec. 7.11 Alignment properties

obtained.

Let TB be the solution time immediately preceding TBEGIN. For example, if the time step size
is 0.1, and TBEGIN=1.0, then TB=0.9. If TBEGIN is the time at solution start, then TB is also
the time of solution start.

This is analogous to element birth for other element types, where TBEGIN is similar to
TBIRTH.

1) For solution times less than TBEGIN, the distance alignment is not active.

2) When using optioni =TBFACTOR, and tbfactori =1.0, then the prescribed alignment
distance at time timei is equal to the alignment distance at time TB. In this way, the element
has zero forces when the element configuration corresponds to the configuration at time TB.

3) Linear interpolation is used for solution times between times given in this command.

4) For solution times greater than TEND, the prescribed alignment distance is unchanged
from the prescribed alignment distance at TEND.

5) optioni =SAME cannot be used in the first row of the data input lines (timei=TBEGIN)

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-523

Chap. 7 Model definition ALIGN-ROTATION

ALIGN-ROTATION NAME KRC1 KRC2 KRC3 KRC1TYPE KRC2TYPE

KRC3TYPE KRC1TFUNC KRC2TFUNC KRC3TFUNC
UNITANGLE

timei optioni anglei axisc1i axisc2i axisc3i tbfactori

This command is used to define the rotational alignment data for alignment elements. This
data includes the rotational stiffnesses associated with alignment elements, and also the
prescribed rotational alignment as a function of solution time.

NAME
Number assigned to this ALIGN-ROTATION definition.

KRC1, KRC2, KRC3 [1E10,1E10,1E10]

The stiffnesses used for rotational alignment, in the c1, c2, c3 directions of local node 1. The
unit of the rotational stiffnesses is [moment unit]/radian, regardless of the value of
UNITANGLE.

KRC1TYPE, KRC2TYPE, KRC3TYPE [CONSTANT,CONSTANT,CONSTANT]

If KRC1TYPE=CONSTANT, the stiffness for the c1 direction is constant, so the moment in the
c1 direction, as a function of the angle in the c1 direction, is linear.

If KRC1TYPE=SAWTOOTH, the moment for the c1 direction has a sawtooth shape with
period 2*pi radians.

Similar comments hold for KRC2TYPE, KRC3TYPE.

KRC1TFUNC, KRC2TFUNC, KRC3TFUNC [0,0,0]

The time functions multiplying KRC1, KRC2, KRC3. If 0 is entered, then no time function is
used.

UNITANGLE [RADIANS]
The unit used for measuring angles, both angles as entered in the data input lines of this
command, and also angles output by the element. {RADIANS/DEGREES}.

timei
Time at which the prescribed alignment is to occur. This time may or may not actually
correspond to a solution time.

optioni [ALIGNED]
optioni =ALIGNED, the prescribed alignment is equal to zero. That is, the misalignment is
zero when the b1, b2, b3 directions of the b triad of local node 1 are the same as the b1, b2, b3
directions of the b triad of local node 2.

7-524 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ALIGN-ROTATION Sec. 7.11 Alignment properties

optioni =ANGLE: the prescribed alignment is directly specified using anglei axisc1i axisc2i
axisc3i.

optioni =INCREMENTAL: the incremental prescribed alignment is directly specified using

anglei axisc1i axisc2i axisc3i.

optioni =TBFACTOR: the prescribed alignment is equal to the alignment at time TB multiplied
by tbfactori.

optioni =SAME: the prescribed alignment is the same as the prescribed alignment for the
previous row of these data input lines.

anglei axisc1i axisc2i axisc3i

For optioni=ANGLE:
The value of the prescribed alignment. That is, the prescribed rotation that rotates the b triad
of local node 1 into the b triad of local node 2 is given by anglei axisc1i axisc2i axisc3i.

For optioni=INCREMENTAL:
The value of the prescribed incremental alignment. That is, the prescribed rotation that
rotates the b triad of local node 1 into the b triad of local node 2 is given by the alignment in
the previous row of the data
input lines, multiplied by the rotation given by anglei axisc1i axisc2i axisc3i.

For both options:

anglei is measured in radians or degrees, as specified by parameter UNITANGLE. axisc1i
axisc2i axisc3i is the axis of the rotation, with components given in the c coordinate system at
local node 1. If axisc1i axisc2i axisc3i are not normalized, the AUI will normalize them.

tbfactori
The multiplying factor used when optioni =TBFACTOR.

Notes:

Let TBEGIN be the lowest time of the data input lines, TEND be the highest time of the data
input lines. Note that TBEGIN and TEND need not be times at which the solution is actually
obtained.

Let TB be the solution time immediately preceding TBEGIN. For example, if the time step size
is 0.1, and TBEGIN=1.0, then TB=0.9. If TBEGIN is the time at solution start, then TB is also
the time of solution start.

This is analogous to element birth for other element types, where TBEGIN is similar to
TBIRTH.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-525

Chap. 7 Model definition ALIGN-ROTATION

1) The prescribed alignment is the rotation that must be applied to the b triad at local node 1
to obtain the b triad at local node 2, assuming no misalignment.

2) For solution times less than TBEGIN, the rotation alignment is not active.

3) When using optioni =TBFACTOR, and tbfactori =1.0, then the prescribed alignment at time
timei is equal to the alignment at time TB. In this way, the element has zero rotational forces
when the element configuration corresponds to the configuration at time TB.

4) Linear interpolation is used for solution times between times given in this command.

5) For solution times greater than TEND, the prescribed rotation alignment is the same as the
prescribed rotation alignment at TEND.

6) The prescribed alignment rotation should not change by more than about 120 degrees (2.1
radians) per time step.

7) optioni =SAME cannot be used in the first row of the data input lines (timei=TBEGIN)

8) optioni =INCREMENTAL cannot immediately follow optioni =TBFACTOR.

9) If optioni =INCREMENTAL is used, all elements in the group that reference this align-
rotation must have the same transformation VCB.

10) If optioni =INCREMENTAL is used in the first data input line, the effect is the same as if
optioni =ANGLE for that line. In other words, the previous alignment for the first data input
line is the identity alignment.

11) Several optioni =INCREMENTAL data input lines can be used in succession.

7-526 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 7.11 Alignment properties

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-527

Chap. 7 Model definition TRIADSETS

TRIADSETS
triadseti aoptioni a1xi a1yi a1zi a2xi a2yi a2zi
boptioni b0a1i b0a2i b0a3i b1a1i b1a2i b1a3i b2a1i b2a2i b2a3i
coptioni c1b1i c1b2i c1b3i c2b1i c2b2i c2b3i

Specifies the initial orientations of triadsets. Triadsets are used by alignment elements.

triadseti
The triadset number.

aoptioni [ELEMENTS]
aoptioni =ELEMENTS: The a triad is obtained by averaging the triads from the attached
elements to the node. Currently triads can only be obtained from Hermitian beam elements.

aoptioni =VECTORS: The a triad is obtained from the given a1xi a1yi a1zi a2xi a2yi a2zi

a1xi a1yi a1zi a2xi a2yi a2zi [1.0,0.0,0.0,0.0,1.0,0.0]

Initial orientation of a1 and a2 axes, used if aoptioni =VECTORS. The components of vectors
a1 and a2 are given in the global coordinate system.

boptioni [ATRIAD]
boptioni =ATRIAD: The b triad is coincident with the a triad.

boptioni =VECTORS: The b triad is obtained from the given b0a1i b0a2i b0a3i b1a1i b1a2i
b1a3zi b2a1i b2a2i b2a3zi

b0a1i b0a2i b0a3i [0.0,0.0,0.0]

The origin of the b triad, with components given in the coordinate system of the a triad, used
if boption = VECTORS.

b1a1i b1a2i b1a3i b2a1i b2a2i b2a3i [1.0,0.0,0.0,0.0,1.0,0.0]

Initial orientation of b1 and b2 axes, used if boptioni =VECTORS. The components of vectors
b1 and b2 are given in the coordinate system of the a triad.

coptioni [BTRIAD]
coptioni =BTRIAD: The c triad is coincident with the b triad.

coptioni =VECTORS: The c triad is obtained from the given c1b1i c1b2i c1b3zi c2b1i c2b2i
c2b3zi

c1b1i c1b2i c1b3i c2b1i c2b2i c2b3i [1.0,0.0,0.0,0.0,1.0,0.0]

Initial orientation of c1 and c2 axes, used if coptioni =VECTORS. The components of vectors
c1 and c2 are given in the coordinate system of the b triad.

7-528 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TRIADSETS Sec. 7.11 Alignment properties

Notes:

1) The triadset consists of three coordinate systems (triads), see figure.

2) Parameters aoptioni a1xi a1yi a1zi a2xi a2yi a2zi are used to define the a triad of the
triadset. Parameters boptioni b0a1i b0a2i b0a3i b1a1i b1a2i b1a3i b2a1i b2a2i b2a3i are
used to define the b triad. Parameters coptioni c1b1i c1b2i c1b3i c2b1i c2b2i c2b3i are
used to define the c triad.

3) For aoptioni =VECTORS, the a triad is computed as follows:

a1=(a1x,a1y,a1z), normalized to unit length
a3=a1 x (a2x,a2y,a2z), normalized to unit length
a2=a3 x a1

b1 c3
c1

b2
c2
a3 Nodal triad: a1, a2, a3
a2 Offset triad: b1, b2, b3
Coordinate triad: c1, c2, c3
b3
b0

Node
a1

4) For boptioni =VECTORS, the b triad is computed as follows:

b1=(b1a1,b1a2,b1a3), normalized to unit length
b3=b1 x (b2a1,b2a2,b2a3), normalized to unit length
b2=b3 x b1

5) For coptioni =VECTORS, the c triad is computed as follows:

c1=(c1b1,c1b2,c1b3), normalized to unit length
c3=c1 x (c2b1,c2b2,c2b3), normalized to unit length
c2=c3 x c1

ADINA R & D, Inc. 7-529

Chap. 7 Model definition SET-TRIADSET NODES

SET-TRIADSET NODES

nodei triadseti

Assigns triadsets to nodes. Triadsets are used by alignment elements.

nodei
The node number.

triadseti
The triadset number, defined using the TRIADSETS command.

Notes:

1) It is allowed to have more than one triadset at a node. It is allowed to assign the same
triadset to several nodes.

2) For nodes without any triadsets assigned, the a triad is computed as the average of all
triads from attached beam elements. If there are no attached beam elements, or if this average
is zero, the a triad is the global coordinate system triad. The b triad and the c triad are set
equal to the a triad.

7-530 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Chapter 8

Finite element representation

EGROUP TRUSS Sec. 8.1 Element groups

EGROUPTRUSS NAME SUBTYPE DISPLACEMENTS MATERIAL INT

GAPS INITIALSTRAIN CMASS TIME-OFFSET OPTION
RB-LINE AREA PRINT SAVE TBIRTH TDEATH
TMC-MATERIAL GAPWIDTH

Defines an element group consisting of truss elements.

NAME [(current highest element group label number) + 1]

Label number of the element group to be defined. The label number of an existing element
group can only be given if it is of type TRUSS. Hence, to re-define the type of a named
element group you must first delete that group using command DELETE EGROUP TRUSS.

SUBTYPE [GENERAL]
Indicates the type of TRUSS element.
GENERAL General 3-D truss elements with 2-4 nodes.

AXISYMMETRIC Axisymmetric truss (ring) elements with 1 node in the

global YZ plane. Z is the axis of rotational symmetry
and Y is the radial direction (Y 0).

DISPLACEMENTS [DEFAULT]
Indicates whether large displacements are assumed for the kinematic formulation for the
element group.
SMALL Small displacements only.
LARGE Effects of large displacements are included.

DEFAULT Formulation for element group defaults to that specified

by KINEMATICS.

MATERIAL [1]
The label number of the default material for an element group. Elements within the group may
use a different material as specified by an element data command, but each material specified
must be of the same model type as that of the material given by this parameter.

Note: Elements of type TRUSS can use materials of the following types:

ELASTIC THERMO-PLASTIC
THERMO-ISOTROPIC CREEP
PLASTIC-BILINEAR PLASTIC-CREEP
PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR NONLINEAR-ELASTIC
USER-SUPPLIED

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-3

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP TRUSS

INT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order. {1 INT 4}

DEFAULT =1 when SUBTYPE = AXISYMMETRIC, or maximum number of

element nodes is 2.
2 when maximum number of nodes per element is 3.
3 when maximum number of nodes per element is 4.

GAPS [NO]

YES All elements in this (nonlinear) group have gaps, i.e., no element
in the group can resist tensile force. The gap width for elements
may be specified via the element data commands. This option
may only be used when material models PLASTIC- BILINEAR or
PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR are employed, in conjunction with
2-node general truss elements.

NO The gap element option is inactive for this element group, and all
elements can resist tensile as well as compressive forces.

INITIALSTRAIN [NONE]
Indicates whether initial strains are to be applied to this element group.

NONE No initial strains for elements of this group.

NODAL Only the nodal strains input via INITIAL-CONDITION are

accounted for.

ELEMENT Only the element strains input via the element data commands
are accounted for.

BOTH Both nodal and element strains are taken into consideration.

CMASS [MASTER CMASS]

Requests the calculation of the following mass properties for the element group: total mass,
total volume, moments and products of inertia, centroid, and center of mass. {YES/NO}

TIME-OFFSET [0.0]
With this parameter, a creep law can be modified as follows (example given for creep law
number 1) :
e c = a 0 a1 ( t t 0 )
a2

8-4 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP TRUSS Sec. 8.1 Element groups

where t is the absolute time and t0=TIME-OFFSET represents a shift in the time scale.

Note: When TIME-OFFSET is used, the same shift is applied to all time dependent terms.
The TIME-OFFSET value can be negative or positive and can be modified for a
restart run.

OPTION [NONE]
Special option for this element group.

NONE - No special option. Elements are regular truss elements.

REBAR - Elements are used as rebar elements.

RB-LINE [1]
Rebar label number as defined by the command REBAR-LINE. Only used if OPTION=REBAR.

AREA [1.0]
Specifies the default cross-section area for elements in the group.

PRINT [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the PRINTDEFAULT
parameter of the PRINTOUT command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

SAVE [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the SAVEDEFAULT
parameter of the PORTHOLE command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

TBIRTH [0.0]
Default element birth time.

TDEATH [0.0]
Default element birth time.

TMC-MATERIAL [1]
Label number of ADINA-T material used for thermal coupling.

GAPWIDTH [0.0]
Specifies the default gap width for truss element.

Auxiliary commands

LIST EGROUPTRUSS FIRST LAST

DELETE EGROUPTRUSS FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-5

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP TWODSOLID

EGROUP TWODSOLID NAME SUBTYPE DISPLACEMENTS STRAINS

MATERIAL INT RESULTS DEGEN FORMULATION
STRESSREFERENCE INITIALSTRAIN FRACTURE CMASS
STRAIN-FIELD PNTGPS NODGPS LVUS1 LVUS2 SED
RUPTURE INCOMPATIBLE-MODES TIME-OFFSET
POROUS WTMC OPTION THICKNESS PRINT SAVE
TBIRTH TDEATH TMC-MATERIAL RUPTURE-LABEL
EM JOULE

Defines an element group consisting of planar or axisymmetric elements.

NAME [(current highest element group label number) + 1]

Label number of the element group to be defined. The label number on an existing element
group can only be given if it is of type TWODSOLID. Hence, to re-define the type of a
named element group, you must first delete that group using command DELETE EGROUP
TWODSOLID.

SUBTYPE
Indicates the type of TWODSOLID element. (See the Theory and Modeling Guide).

AXISYMMETRIC Axisymmetric elements.

STRAIN Plane strain elements.

STRESS2 Plane stress elements.

STRESS3 3-D plane stress (membrane) elements.

STRAIN3 Generalized plane strain.

DISPLACEMENTS [DEFAULT]
Indicates whether large displacements are assumed for the kinematic formulation for the
element group.

SMALL Small displacements only.

LARGE Effects of large displacements are included.

DEFAULT Formulation for element group defaults to that specified by

KINEMATICS.

STRAINS [DEFAULT]
Indicates whether large strains are assumed for the kinematic formulation for the element
group.

8-6 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP TWODSOLID Sec. 8.1 Element groups

SMALL Small strains only.

LARGE Effects of large strains are included.

DEFAULT Formulation for element group defaults to that specified by

KINEMATICS.

Note: DISPLACEMENTS = LARGE is automatically set if STRAINS = LARGE is input.

MATERIAL [1]
The label number of the default material for an element group. Elements within the group may
use a different material as specified by an element data command, but each material specified
must be of the same model type as that of the material given by this parameter.

Note: Elements of type TWODSOLID can use materials of the following types. Only
materials marked with an asterisk (*) can be used with large strains.

ELASTIC *EIGHT-CHAIN
THERMO-ISOTROPIC ORTHOTROPIC
THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC *PLASTIC-BILINEAR
*PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR *THERMO-PLASTIC
*PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC DRUCKER-PRAGER
*MROZ-BILINEAR GURSON
*CREEP *CREEP-VARIABLE
*PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE *PLASTIC-CREEP
CURVE-DESCRIPTION *MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP
CONCRETE *MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
*ARRUDA-BOYCE CAM-CLAY
*OGDEN *MOONEY-RIVLIN
*USER-SUPPLIED *SUSSMAN-BATHE
*THREE-NETWORK MOHR-COULOMB
*ANAND *PLASTIC-CYCLIC
DF-CONCRETE

INT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order. {1 INT 6}

DEFAULT Full Gauss integration order, dependent on the polynomial order

of the elements, i.e., the number of nodes per element side.

RESULTS [STRESSES]
The calculated element response from the ADINA analysis.

FORCES Element nodal forces are calculated, but stresses are not. These

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-7

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP TWODSOLID

forces are equivalent, in the virtual work sense, to the internal

element stresses. The reference system is that of the degree-of-
freedom system associated with the node (global or skew).

STRESSES Element stresses and strains are calculated at all integration

points, but forces are not.

DEGEN [DEFAULT]
Indicator for spatial isotropy correction for degenerate (triangular) 8-node elements. When
true 6-node triangular elements are defined in this element group through ENODES command,
DEGEN = UNUSED should be specified. The DEFAULT option means that the default is taken
from the parameter DEGEN of the MASTER command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES/UNUSED}

FORMULATION [DEFAULT]
Indicates use of displacement or mixed interpolation formulation.

DISPLACEMENT [1] Displacement interpolation only.

MIXED [2] Mixed pressure-displacement interpolation.

DEFAULT [0] See note below.

-N N is the number of pressure degrees of freedom for each

element.

Note: The mixed formulation cannot be used for material models CAM-CLAY, GURSON,
CURVE-DESCRIPTION, CONCRETE, DRUCKER-PRAGER, MOHR-COULOMB and
HYPER-FOAM. Furthermore, it is only applicable for plane strain, generalized plane
strain and axisymmetric analyses.

Note: The value DEFAULT assumes a MIXED formulation for those materials that either
have a fully incompressible response (e.g., rubber-like materials) or have an
incompressible plastic response (e.g., elastic-plastic materials). For all other material
models the value assumed for DEFAULT is that of the DISPLACEMENT formulation.

Note: Table 2.2-1 of the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide gives the default number of
pressure degrees of freedom for each element type.

STRESSREFERENCE [GLOBAL]
Indicates the reference system for calculated stresses.

GLOBAL The global Cartesian coordinate system (X, Y, Z).

MATERIAL The element material system, for orthotropic materials.

8-8 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP TWODSOLID Sec. 8.1 Element groups

INITIALSTRAIN [NONE]
Indicates whether initial strains are to be applied to this element group.

NONE No initial strains for elements of this group.

NODAL Only the nodal strains input via INITIAL-CONDITION are

accounted for.

ELEMENT Only the element strains input via the STRAIN-FIELD parameter
are accounted for.

BOTH Both nodal and element strains are taken into consideration.

FRACTURE [NO]
This parameter is obsolete.

CMASS [MASTER CMASS]

Requests the calculation of the following mass properties for the element group: total mass,
total volume, moments and products of inertia, centroid, and center of mass. {YES/NO}

STRAIN-FIELD [0]
Label number of a strain-field defined by STRAIN-FIELD command (Section7.9). A 0 value
indicates no initial element strains, and any initial element strains selected by input of
STRAIN-FIELD > 0 will only be considered if INITIALSTRAIN = ELEMENT or BOTH.

PNTGPS [0]
Label number of a geometry point at which the auxiliary node for generalized plane strain
elements (SUBTYPE = STRAIN3) is located.

NODGPS [0]
Label number of the auxiliary node for generalized plane strain elements.

Note: For SUBTYPE = STRAIN3, PNTGPS = NODGPS = 0 is not allowed (an auxiliary
node must be specified). If PNTGPS and NODGPS are both > 0, then the input for
PNTGPS is used.

LVUS1 [0]
This parameter is obsolete.

LVUS2 [0]
This parameter is obsolete.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-9

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP TWODSOLID

SED [NO]
Indicate whether or not to compute, and output, the strain energy density at all integration
points of elements within the group. {NO/YES}

RUPTURE [ADINA]
Indicates whether the program rupture criteria or user-supplied rupture criteria to be applied
to the material used in this element group.

ADINA Use the program criteria.

USER User must provide Fortran-coded subroutine CURUP2 to decide

the element rupture.

Note that material models available for this option are:

PLASTIC-BILINEAR, PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR, MROZ-BILINEAR,
PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC, THERMO-PLASTIC, CREEP, PLASTIC-CREEP,
MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP, USER-SUPPLIED

INCOMPATIBLE-MODES [DEFAULT]
Specifies whether incompatible modes are included in the formulation of 4-node 2D solid
elements.

NO Incompatible modes are not included.

YES Incompatible modes are included.

DEFAULT Choice of formulation is controled by the KINEMATICS command.

TIME-OFFSET [0.0]
With this parameter, a creep law can be modified as follows (example given for creep law
number 1) :
e c = a 0 a1 ( t t 0 )
a2

where t is the absolute time and t0=TIME-OFFSET represents a shift in the time scale.

Note: When TIME-OFFSET is used, the same shift is applied to all time dependent terms.
The TIME-OFFSET value can be negative or positive and can be modified for a
restart run.

POROUS
This parameter is now obsolete. It is replaced by the parameter OPTION.

8-10 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP TWODSOLID Sec. 8.1 Element groups

WTMC [1.0]
Plastic work to heat factor for thermo-mechanical coupling. Must be in the range<0.0,1.0>

OPTION [NONE]
{NONE/POROUS/USER-CODED/GASKET-SIMPLE/GASKET-GENERAL/PIEZO-
ELECTRIC}

NONE No special option.

POROUS This element group is used with porous media properties.

USER-CODED User-supplied code is used for this element group.

GASKET-SIMPLE This element group is used with a simple gasket material.

GASKET-GENERAL This element group is used with a general gasket material.

PIEZOELECTRIC This element group is a piezoelectric element group.

THICKNESS [1.0]
Defines the default element thickness.

PRINT [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the PRINTDEFAULT
parameter of the PRINTOUT command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

SAVE [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the SAVEDEFAULT
parameter of the PORTHOLE command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

TBIRTH [0.0]
Default element birth time.

TDEATH [0.0]
Default element birth time.

TMC-MATERIAL [1]
Label number of ADINA-T material used for thermal coupling.

RUPTURE-LABEL [0]
User-rupture label number which is defined by the USER-RUPTURE command.
Used only for RUPTURE = USER.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-11

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP TWODSOLID

EM [NO]
This flag indicates whether the group involves EM analysis. {NO/YES}

JOULE [NO]
This flag indicates whether the group involves Joule-heat analysis. {NO/YES}

Auxiliary commands

LIST EGROUP TWODSOLID FIRST LAST

DELETE EGROUP TWODSOLID FIRST LAST

8-12 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 8.1 Element groups

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-13

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP THREEDSOLID

EGROUP THREEDSOLID NAME DISPLACEMENTS STRAINS MATERIAL

RSINT TINT RESULTS DEGEN FORMULATION
STRESSREFERENCE INITIALSTRAIN FRACTURE
CMASS STRAIN-FIELD LVUS1 LVUS2 SED
RUPTURE INCOMPATIBLE-MODES TIME-OFFSET
POROUS WTMC OPTION PRINT SAVE TBIRTH
TDEATH TMC-MATERIAL RUPTURE-LABEL
EM JOULE BOLT-NUMBER BOLT-PLANE
BOLT-LOAD BOLT-TOL TETINT

Defines an element group consisting of three-dimensional solid elements.

NAME [(current highest element group label number )+ 1]

Label number of the element group to be defined. The label number of an existing element
group can only be given if it is of type THREEDSOLID. Hence, to re-define the type of a
named element group you must first delete that group using command DELETE EGROUP
THREEDSOLID.

DISPLACEMENTS [DEFAULT]
Indicates whether large displacements are assumed for the kinematic formulation for the
element group.

SMALL Small displacements only.

LARGE Effects of large displacements are included.

DEFAULT Formulation for element group defaults to that specified by

KINEMATICS.

STRAINS [DEFAULT]
Indicates whether large strains are assumed for the kinematic formulation for the element
group.

SMALL Small strains only.

LARGE Effects of large strains are included.

DEFAULT Formulation for element group defaults to that specified by

KINEMATICS.

Note: DISPLACEMENTS = LARGE is automatically set if STRAINS = LARGE is input.

MATERIAL [1]
The label number of the default material for an element group. Elements within the group may

8-14 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP THREEDSOLID Sec. 8.1 Element groups

use a different material, as specified by an element data command, but each material specified
must be of the same model type as that of the material given by this parameter.

Note: Elements of type THREEDSOLID can use materials of the following types. Only
materials marked with an asterisk (*) can be used with large strains.

ELASTIC *EIGHT-CHAIN
ORTHOTROPIC THERMO-ISOTROPIC
*PLASTIC-BILINEAR THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC
*THERMO-PLASTIC *PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR
DRUCKER-PRAGER *PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC
GURSON *MROZ-BILINEAR
*CREEP-VARIABLE *CREEP
*PLASTIC-CREEP *PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
CURVE-DESCRIPTION *MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP
CONCRETE *MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
*ARRUDA-BOYCE CAM-CLAY
*OGDEN *MOONEY-RIVLIN
*USER-SUPPLIED *SUSSMAN-BATHE
*THREE-NETWORK MOHR-COULOMB
*ANAND *PLASTIC-CYCLIC
DF-CONCRETE

RSINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for the r- and s- element coordinate directions. {2 RSINT 6}

DEFAULT Full Gauss integration order, dependent on the polynomial order

of the elements, i.e., the number of nodes per element side.

TINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for the t-element coordinate direction. {2 TINT 6}

DEFAULT Full Gauss integration order, dependent on the polynomial order

of the elements, i.e., the number of nodes per element side.

RESULTS [STRESSES]
The calculated element response from the ADINA analysis.

FORCES Element nodal forces are calculated, but stresses are not. These
forces are equivalent, in the virtual work sense, to the internal
element stresses. The reference system is that of the degree-of-
freedom system associated with the node (global or skew).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-15

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP THREEDSOLID

STRESSES Element stresses and strains are calculated at all integration

points, but forces are not.

DEGEN [DEFAULT]
Indicator for spatial isotropy correction of degenerate 20-node elements. When true 10-node
tetrahedral elments are defined in this element group through ENODES command, DEGEN =
UNUSED should be specified. The DEFAULT option means that the default is taken from the
parameter DEGEN of the MASTER command.{DEFAULT/NO/YES/UNUSED}

FORMULATION [DEFAULT]
Indicates use of displacement or mixed interpolation formulation.
DISPLACEMENT [1] Displacement interpolation only.

MIXED [2] Mixed pressure-displacement interpolation.

DEFAULT [0] See note below.

-N N is the number of pressure degrees of freedom for each

element.

Note: The mixed formulation cannot be used for material models CAM-CLAY, GURSON,
CURVE-DESCRIPTION, CONCRETE, DRUCKER-PRAGER, MOHR-COULOMB, and
HYPER-FOAM.

Note: The value DEFAULT assumes a MIXED formulation for those materials that either
have a fully incompressible response (e.g., rubber-like materials) or have an
incompressible plastic response (e.g., elastic-plastic materials). For all other material
models the value assumed for DEFAULT is that of the DISPLACEMENT formulation.

Note: Table 2.3-1 of the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide gives the default number of
pressure degrees of freedom for each element type.

STRESSREFERENCE [GLOBAL]
Indicates the reference system for calculated stresses.

GLOBAL The global Cartesian coordinate system (X, Y, Z).

MATERIAL The element material system, for orthotropic materials.

INITIALSTRAIN [NONE]
Indicates initial strains applied to this element group.

8-16 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP THREEDSOLID Sec. 8.1 Element groups

NONE No initial strains for elements of this group.

NODAL Only the nodal strains input via INITIAL-CONDITION

are accounted for.

ELEMENT Only the element strains input via the STRAIN-FIELD

parameter are accounted for.

BOTH Nodal and element strains are taken into consideration.

FRACTURE [NO]
This parameter is obsolete.

CMASS [MASTER CMASS]

Requests the calculation of the following mass properties for the element group: total mass,
total volume, moments and products of inertia, centroid, and center of mass. {YES/NO}

STRAIN-FIELD [0]
Label number of a strain-field defined by STRAIN-FIELD command (Section7.9). A 0 value
indicates no initial element strains, and any initial element strains selected by input of
STRAIN-FIELD > 0 will only be considered if INITIALSTRAIN = ELEMENT or BOTH.

LVUS1 [0]
This parameter is obsolete.

LVUS2 [0]
This parameter is obsolete.

SED [NO]
Indicate whether or not to compute, and output, the strain energy density at all integration
points of elements within the group. {YES/NO}

RUPTURE [ADINA]
Indicates whether the program rupture criteria or user-supplied rupture criteria to be applied
to the material used in this element group.

ADINA Use the program criteria.

USER User must provide fortran-coded subroutine CURUP3 to decide

the element rupture.

Note: Material models available for this option are:

PLASTIC-BILINEAR, PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR, MROZ-BILINEAR,
PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC, THERMO-PLASTIC, CREEP, PLASTIC-CREEP,

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-17

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP THREEDSOLID

MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP, USER-SUPPLIED

INCOMPATIBLE-MODES [DEFAULT]
Specifies whether incompatible modes are included in the formulation of 8-node 3D solid
elements.

NO Incompatible modes are not included.

YES Incompatible modes are included.
DEFAULT Choice of formulation is controled by the KINEMATICS command

TIME-OFFSET [0.0]
With this parameter, a creep law can be modified as follows (example given for creep law
number 1) :
ec = a0.a .(t-t0)a2
1

where t is the absolute time and t0=TIME-OFFSET represents a shift in the time scale.

Note: When TIME-OFFSET is used, the same shift is applied to all time dependent terms.
The TIME-OFFSET value can be negative or positive and can be modified for a
restart run.

POROUS [NO]
Indicates whether porous media properties are used for elements in this group. {NO/YES}

WTMC [1.0]
Plastic work to heat fator for thermo-mechanical coupling. Must be in the range <0.0,1.0>

OPTION [NONE]
{NONE/POROUS/USER-CODED/GASKET-SIMPLE/GASKET-GENERAL/BOLT/
PIEZOELECTRIC}

NONE No special option.

USER-CODED User-supplied code is used for this element group.
GASKET-SIMPLE This element group is used with a simple gasket material.
GASKET-GENERAL This element group is used with a general gasket material.
BOLT This 3D element group is a bolt element group.
PIEZOELECTRIC This element group is a piezoelectric element group.

PRINT [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the PRINTDEFAULT

8-18 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP THREEDSOLID Sec. 8.1 Element groups

parameter of the PRINTOUT command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

SAVE [DEFAULT]
Save element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the SAVEDEFAULT
parameter of the PORTHOLE command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

TBIRTH [0.0]
Default element birth time.

TDEATH [0.0]
Default element birth time.

TMC-MATERIAL [1]
Label number of ADINA-T material used for thermal coupling.

RUPTURE-LABEL [0]
User-rupture label number which is defined by the USER-RUPTURE command.
Used only for RUPTURE = USER.

EM [NO]
This flag indicates whether the group involves EM analysis. {NO/YES}

JOULE [NO]
This flag indicates whether the group involves Joule-heat analysis. {NO/YES}

BOLT-NUMBER [0]
BOLT-NUMBER is used if OPTION=BOLT. BOLT-NUMBER specifies the bolt number for this
element group. The bolt number can be used in the BOLT-TABLE command.

BOLT-PLANE [0]
BOLT-PLANE is used if OPTION=BOLT. BOLT-PLANE specifies the bolt-plane for this
element group. The bolt-plane gives the bolt direction (direction of the bolt force and bolt-
shortening), and the bolt-plane also gives the approximate location of the bolt split. It is
allowed to set BOLT-PLANE=0 if OPTION=BOLT. In this case the AUI automatically deter-
mines the bolt direction and bolt split, see the Theory and Modeling Guide.

BOLT-LOAD [0.0]
BOLT-LOAD is used if OPTION=BOLT. BOLT-LOAD gives the magnitude of the bolt loading
(either the bolt force or the bolt shortening, depending upon whether bolt force loading or
bolt shortening loading is specified).

BOLT-TOL [0.0]
BOLT-TOL is used if OPTION=BOLT. BOLT-TOL gives the tolerance used to determine if the

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-19

Chap. 8 Finite element representation

bolt equation is converged. BOLT-TOL=0.0 means that the default bolt tolerance from the
BOLT-OPTIONS command is used.

TETINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for tetrahedral elements. {1/4/5/17}

DEFAULT Full Gauss integration order, dependent on the number of nodes in the
tetrahedral element

Auxiliary commands

LIST GROUP THREEDSOLID FIRST LAST

DELETE EGROUP THREEDSOLID FIRST LAST

8-20 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP BEAM Sec. 8.1 Element groups

EGROUP BEAM NAME SUBTYPE DISPLACEMENTS MATERIAL

RINT SINT TINT RESULTS INITIALSTRAIN CMASS
RIGIDENDTYPE MOMENT-CURVATURE RIGIDITY
MULTIPLY BOLT RUPTURE OPTION BOLT-TOL
SECTION PRINT SAVE TBIRTH TDEATH SPOINT
BOLTFORCE BOLTNCUR TMC-MATERIAL
BOLT-NUMBER BOLT-LOAD WARP ENDRELEASE

Defines an element group consisting of Hermitian beam elements.

NAME [(current highest element group label number) + 1]

Label number of the element group to be defined. The label number of an existing element
group can be given only if it is of type BEAM. Hence, to re-define the type of a named
element group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP BEAM.

SUBTYPE [THREE-D]
Indicates the type of BEAM element.

TWO-D Two-dimensional action beam elements, defined parallel to one of the X-Y,
Y-Z, or X-Z global coordinate planes.

THREE-D Three-dimensional action beam elements.

DISPLACEMENTS [DEFAULT]
Indicates whether large displacements are assumed for the kinematic formulation for the
element group.

SMALL Small displacements only.

LARGE Effects of large displacements are included.

DEFAULT Formulation for element group defaults to that specified by KINEMATICS.

MATERIAL [1]
The label number of the default material for an element group. Elements within the group may
use a different material, as specified by an element data command, but each material specified
must be of the same model type as that of the material given by this parameter.

Note: Elements of type BEAM can use materials of the following types:
ELASTIC
PLASTIC-BILINEAR

RINT [5]
Numerical integration order along the centroidal axis of each element, the local element r-
direction. {1 RINT 9}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-21

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP BEAM

SINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for the local s-direction of each element, which lies in the element
plane defined by the element nodes including the auxiliary node. {1 SINT 7}

DEFAULT = 7 for 3-D action elements of rectangular cross-section, 3 otherwise.

TINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for the local t-direction of each general 3-D beam element, normal
to the plane of the element. {1 TINT 8}

DEFAULT = 1 for 2-D action elements of rectangular cross-section.

7 for 3-D action elements of rectangular cross-section.
5 for 2-D action elements of pipe cross-section.
8 for 3-D action elements of pipe cross-section.

Note: The element matrices are integrated exactly when used in conjunction with a linear
elastic material, and, therefore, parameters RINT, SINT, TINT are not considered.

RESULTS [STRESSES]
The calculated element response from the ADINA analysis. {STRESSES/FORCES/
SFORCES}

FORCES Element nodal forces are calculated, but stresses are not. These
forces are equivalent, in the virtual work sense, to the internal
element stresses.

STRESSES Element stresses and strains are calculated at all integration points, but
forces are not.

SFORCES Element forces and moments are calculated at equidistant section

points along the length of the element. The number of section points is
set by the parameter SPOINT.

Note: When an elastic material model is used, the choice STRESSES is not considered
since no integration point data are available. In this case, the default ouput choice is
FORCES.
Note: For the moment-curvature beams (MOMENT-CURVATURE=YES), the choice of
STRESSES is not considered since no integration point data are available. In this
case, the default ouput choice is FORCES.

INITIALSTRAIN [NONE]
Indicates initial strains applied to this element group.
NONE No initial strains for elements of this group.

8-22 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP BEAM Sec. 8.1 Element groups

NODAL Only the nodal strains input via INITIAL-CONDITION are

accounted for.
ELEMENT Only the element strains input via the EDATA command
are accounted for.

BOTH Both nodal and element strains are taken into consideration.

CMASS [MASTER CMASS]

Requests the calculation of the following mass properties for the element group: total mass,
total volume, moments and products of inertia, centroid, and center of mass. {YES/NO}

RIGIDENDTYPE [NONE]
Specifies whether rigid end-zones exist for elements of the group. See the Theory and
Modeling Guide.

NONE No rigid end-zones are defined.

ABSOLUTE Rigid end-zones are defined in terms of dimensions in length units.

INFINITE Rigid end-zones with infinite stiffness are defined in terms of

dimensions in length units.

MOMENT-CURVATURE [NO]
Specifies whether or not moment-curvature properties are to be utilized by elements in the
group. {YES/NO}

RIGIDITY [0]
Label number of a rigidity moment-curvature property set to be used for elements of the
group. See RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE. Used when MOMENT-CURVATURE = YES.

MULTIPLY [1.0E6]
This parameter is only applicable if RIGIDENDTYPE=ABSOLUTE. It specifies a multiplier to
the stiffness properties of the element in case of rigid ends. The multiplier is used to compute
the stiffness of the rigid ends. {>=0.0}

BOLT [NO]
This parameter in now obsolete. It is replaced by the parameter OPTION.

RUPTURE [ADINA]
Indicates whether the program rupture criteria or user-supplied rupture criteria to be applied
to the material used in this element group.
ADINA Use the program criteria.
USER User must provide fortran-coded subroutine CURUP4 to decide
the element rupture.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-23

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP BEAM

Note that the only material model available for this option is:

RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR

OPTION [NONE]
Option for the behaviour of beam elements in this group. {NONE/BOLT}

BOLT-TOL [0.0]
Bolt force tolerance used to determine convergence. BOLT-TOL=0.0 means the default bolt
tolerance specified in BOLT-OPTIONS command will be used.

SECTION [1]
Specifies the default cross section label for elements in the group.

PRINT [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the PRINTDEFAULT
parameter of the PRINTOUT command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

SAVE [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the SAVEDEFAULT
parameter of the PORTHOLE command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

TBIRTH [0.0]
Default element birth time.

TDEATH [0.0]
Default element birth time.

SPOINT [2]
Specifies the number of section points for output of section forces when RESULTS =
SFORCES. The points are located equidistant along length of the element.
{ 2 SPOINT 9 }

Note: SPOINT is only considered when the option SFORCES is used in the parameter
RESULTS.

BOLTFORCE [0.0]
This parameter is obsolete.

BOLTNCUR [0]
This parameter is obsolete.

TMC-MATERIAL [1]
Label number of ADINA-T material used for thermal coupling.

8-24 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP BEAM Sec. 8.1 Element groups

BOLT-NUMBER [0]
Specifies the bolt number for the current group. It can be used in the command BOLT-TABLE.

BOLT-LOAD [0.0]
The parameter BOLTFORCE is obsolete. BOLT-LOAD takes it place, and specifies the default
bold load for each element. A bolt can be either be of the type force-tensioning or length-
reducing.

WARP [NO]
Specifies whether warping degress of freedom are active. {NO/YES}

NO No warping DOF
YES Warping DOF is active.
ENDRELEASE [ACCURATE]
This option is used for large displacement beam elements when there are end releases, in
static or implicit dynamics. {ACCURATE/APPROX1/APPROX2}

If ENDRELEASE=ACCURATE, the end releases are evaluated in a local coordinate system

corresponding to the current configuation of the beam.

If ENDRELEASE=APPROX1 or APPROX2, the end releases are evaluated in a local coordi-

nate system corresponding to the configuration of the beam in the previous time step.

If ENDRELEASE=APPROX1 or APPROX2, the "released" forces/moments will not be exactly

zero, but these "released" forces/moments should be small, especially if the time step size is
small.

Compared to APPROX1, APPROX2 includes an additional approximation that reduces

accuracy, but improves convergence.

Thus ACCURATE is more accurate than APPROX1, and APPROX1 is more accurate than
APPROX2. However, APPROX2 converges better than APPROX1 and APPROX1 converges
better than ACCURATE.

So if convergence difficulties are encountered when using large displacement beam elements
with end releases, use ENDRELEASE=APPROX1 or APPROX2.

Auxiliary commands

LIST EGROUP BEAM FIRST LAST

DELETE EGROUP BEAM FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-25

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP ISOBEAM

EGROUP ISOBEAM NAME SUBTYPE DISPLACEMENTS MATERIAL RINT

SINT TINT RESULTS INITIALSTRAIN CMASS
RUPTURE TIME-OFFSET OPTION SECTION THICKNESS
PRINT SAVE TBIRTH TDEATH TMC-MATERIAL

Defines an element group consisting of isoparametric beam elements.

NAME [(current highest element group label number) + 1]

Label number of the element group to be defined. The label number of an existing element
group can be given only if it is of type ISOBEAM. Hence, to re-define the type of a named
element group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP ISOBEAM.

SUBTYPE [GENERAL]
Indicates the type of ISOBEAM element.

GENERAL General three-dimensional beam elements.

PLSTRAIN Plane strain elements in the global YZ plane.

PLSTRESS Plane stress elements in the global YZ plane.

AXISYMMETRIC Axisymmetric elements in the global YZ plane. Z is the

axis of rotational symmetry and Y is the radial direction
(Y 0).

DISPLACEMENTS [DEFAULT]
Indicates whether large displacements are assumed for the kinematic formulation for the
element group.

SMALL Small displacements only.

LARGE Effects of large displacements are included.

DEFAULT Formulation for element group defaults to that specified

by KINEMATICS.

MATERIAL [1]
The label number of the default material for an element group. Elements within the group may
use a different material as specified by an element data command, but each material specified
must be of the same model type as that of the material given by this parameter.

Note: Elements of type ISOBEAM can use materials of the following types:

8-26 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP ISOBEAM Sec. 8.1 Element groups

ELASTIC THERMO-ISOTROPIC
PLASTIC-BILINEAR PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR
THERMO-PLASTIC CREEP
PLASTIC-CREEP MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP
CREEP-VARIABLE PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE

RINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order along the centroidal axis of each element (the local element r-
direction). Negative values imply the closed Newton-Cotes integration method, and zero or
positive values the Gauss integration method. Possible values/orders include:

RINT Method No. of integration points

-1 Newton-Cotes 3
-2 Newton-Cotes 3
-3 Newton-Cotes 3
-4 Newton-Cotes 5
-5 Newton-Cotes 5
-6 Newton-Cotes 7
-7 Newton-Cotes 7
0 Gauss DEFAULT (see below)
1 Gauss 1
2 Gauss 2
3 Gauss 3
4 Gauss 4

DEFAULT The Gauss integration order such that the element matrix obtained is
equivalent to the mixed formulation for this element. With this integration
order, the elements do not contain any spurious zero energy modes, do not
lock and are efficient in general nonlinear analysis.

SINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for the local s-direction of each element, which lies in the element
plane defined by the element nodes (including the auxiliary node). The same input conven-
tion for RINT is assumed. (Note, however, that ADINA will currently employ the 4-point
Gauss or the 7-point Newton-Cotes method for general 3-D isobeam elements, overriding
your input value).

For plane stress/strain beams or axisymmetric shell elements, we have:

2 SINT 4 Gauss method.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-27

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP ISOBEAM

-7 SINT -3 Newton-Cotes method.

DEFAULT = 4 for general 3-D elements.

2 for plane stress/strain, axisymmetric elements.

TINT [4]
Numerical integration order for the local t-direction of each general 3-D beam element, normal
to the plane of the element. The same input convention for RINT, SINT is used, but note that
ADINA employs either the 4-point Gauss or the 7-point Newton-Cotes method, overriding
the input value.

RESULTS [STRESSES]
The calculated element response from the ADINA analysis.

FORCES Element nodal forces are calculated, but stresses are not. These
forces are equivalent, in the virtual work sense, to the internal
element stresses.

STRESSES Element stresses and strains are calculated at all integration

points, but forces are not.

INITIALSTRAIN [NONE]
Indicates initial strains applied to this element group.

NONE No initial strains for elements of this group.

NODAL Only the nodal strains are accounted for; these can be input
with the INITIAL-CONDITION or ELEMENT-DATA commands.

ELEMENT Only the element strains are accounted for; these can be input
with the INITIAL-CONDITION or ELEMENT-DATA commands.

BOTH Both nodal and element strains are taken into consideration.

CMASS [MASTER CMASS]

Requests the calculation of the following mass properties for the element group: total mass,
total volume, moments and products of inertia, centroid, and center of mass. {YES/NO}

RUPTURE [ADINA]
Indicates whether the program rupture criteria or user-supplied rupture criteria to be applied
to the material used in this element group.

ADINA Use the program criteria.

8-28 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP ISOBEAM Sec. 8.1 Element groups

USER User must provide fortran-coded subroutine CURUP5 to decide

the element rupture.

Note that material models available for this option are:

PLASTIC-BILINEAR, PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR, THERMO-PLASTIC,

CREEP, PLASTIC-CREEP, MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP

TIME-OFFSET [0.0]
With this parameter, a creep law can be modified as follows (example given for creep law
number 1) :
e c = a 0 a1 ( t t 0 )
a2

where t is the absolute time and t0=TIME-OFFSET represents a shift in the time scale.

Note: When TIME-OFFSET is used, the same shift is applied to all time dependent terms.
The TIME-OFFSET value can be negative or positive and can be modified for a
restart run.

OPTION [NONE]
Indicates whether user-supplied code is used for this element group.
{NONE / USER-CODED}

If OPTION = USER-CODED, then {SUBTYPE, INITIALSTRAIN, CMASS, RUPTURE} are

not applicable

SECTION [1]
Specifies the default cross-section label for elements (excluding axisymmetric shell) in the
group.

THICKNESS [1.0]
Specifies the default thickness of axisymmetric shell elements in the group.

PRINT [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the PRINTDEFAULT
parameter of the PRINTOUT command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

SAVE [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the SAVEDEFAULT
parameter of the PORTHOLE command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

TBIRTH [0.0]
Default element birth time.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-29

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP ISOBEAM

TDEATH [0.0]
Default element birth time.

TMC-MATERIAL [1]
Label number of ADINA-T material used for thermal coupling.

Auxiliary commands

LIST EGROUP ISOBEAM FIRST LAST

DELETE EGROUP ISOBEAM FIRST LAST

8-30 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP PLATE Sec. 8.1 Element groups

EGROUP PLATE NAME DISPLACEMENTS MATERIAL INT

RESULTS INITIALSTRAIN CMASS THICKNESS PRINT
SAVE TBIRTH TDEATH

It is recommended to use EGROUP shell for flat shells (i.e., for plates).

This command is used for backwards compatibility.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-31

Chap. 8 Finite element representation

This page intentionally left blank.

8-32 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP SHELL Sec. 8.1 Element groups

EGROUP SHELL NAME DISPLACEMENTS MATERIAL RINT SINT

TINT RESULTS STRESSREFERENCE PRINTVECTORS
NLAYERS INITIALSTRAIN FAILURE SECTIONRESULT
CMASS STRAINS RUPTURE TIME-OFFSET OPTION
THICKNESS INCOMPATIBLE-MODES PRINT SAVE
TBIRTH TDEATH TINT-TYPE TMC-MATERIAL WTMC
RUPTURE-LABEL SHELLTYPE WARPING-ROTATIONS
NELPRS NELPT TYING

Defines an element group consisting of shell elements. Refer to Section 2.7.11 of the ADINA
Theory and Modeling Guide for more information. The interaction between incompatible
modes, u/p formulation and the material models for each material are found in the tables at the
end of that section.

NAME [(current highest element group label number) + 1]

Label number of the element group to be defined. The label number of an existing element
group can be given only if it is of type SHELL. Hence, to re-define the type of a named
element group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP SHELL.

DISPLACEMENTS [DEFAULT]
Indicates whether large displacements are assumed for the kinematic formulation for the
element group.

SMALL Small displacements only.

LARGE Effects of large displacements are included.

DEFAULT Formulation for element group defaults to that specified by KINEMATICS.

MATERIAL [1]
The label number of the default material for the element group. Elements within the group
may use a different material, but each material specified must be of the same model type as
that of the material given by this parameter.

Note: Elements of type SHELL, SHELLTYPE=STANDARD can use materials of the follow-
ing types. Only materials marked with an asterisk (*) can be used with large strains,
but are restricted to 3-, 4-, 9-, or 16-node single layer shell elements, in which the
shell geometry is described in terms of midsurface nodes.

ELASTIC *PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR
ORTHOTROPIC CREEP
THERMO-ISOTROPIC THERMO-PLASTIC
*PLASTIC-BILINEAR PLASTIC-CREEP

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-33

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP SHELL

*PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP
CREEP-VARIABLE PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
*PLASTIC-CYCLIC DF-CONCRETE
MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE

Note: Elements of type SHELL, SHELLTYPE=3DSHELL can use materials of the following
types. Only materialsmarked with an asterisk (*) can be used with large strains.

ELASTIC *PLASTIC-CYCLIC
*PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC *OGDEN
*MOONEY-RIVLIN *ARRUDA-BOYCE
*HYPER-FOAM *SUSSMAN-BATHE
*EIGHT-CHAIN *THREE-NETWORK
*DF-CONCRETE

RINT [DEFAULT]
Integration order for the local r-direction of the elements. {1 RINT 6}
DEFAULT Full Gauss integration order, the reliable integration order,
dependent on the polynomial order of the elements, i.e., the
number of nodes per element side.

SINT [DEFAULT]
Integration order for the local s-direction of the elements. {1 SINT 6}

DEFAULT same as RINT.

Note: For a triangular shell element, the integration scheme uses the following number
of sampling points. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

NRS = RINT SINT No. of integration points

1 1
1 < NRS 4 4 (3 for MITC3 elements)
4 < NRS 9 7
9 < NRS 36 13

TINT [DEFAULT]
Integration order for the local t-direction (through thickness) of the elements.

TINT=DEFAULT The AUI chooses TINT according to the shell element type:

8-34 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP SHELL Sec. 8.1 Element groups

TINT-TYPE Default TINT

GAUSS 2 (3 if 3DSHELL and WARPING-ROTATIONS = YES)
NEWTON-COTES 3
TRAPEZOIDAL 2 (3 if 3DSHELL and WARPING-ROTATIONS = YES)

TINT > 0 Gauss, Newton-Cotes or trapezoidal rule integration, see parameter

TINT-TYPE

-7 TINT -3 Newton-Cotes integration (for backwards compatibility with

previous versions of the AUI)

Note: For multilayer shell elements this integration order is applied to each layer.

RESULTS [STRESSES]
The calculated element response from the ADINA analysis.

FORCES Element nodal forces and moments are calculated, but stresses are
not. These forces/moments are equivalent, in the virtual work
sense, to the internal element stresses. The reference system is
that of the degree-of-freedom system associated with the node
(global or skew).

STRESSES Element stresses and strains are calculated at all integration

points, but forces are not.

STRESSREFERENCE [GLOBAL]
Indicates the reference system for calculated stresses. {GLOBAL/LOCAL/MATERIAL/
MIDSURFACE }

GLOBAL The global Cartesian coordinate system (X, Y, Z).

LOCAL The local element system (r, s, t).

MATERIAL The element material system, for orthotropic materials.

MIDSURFACE The mid-surface coordinate system ( r, s, t ). See Theory and

Modeling Guide.

PRINTVECTORS [0]
Indicator for printing, by ADINA, of the direction cosines of the element midsurface vectors

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-35

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP SHELL

(at the nodal points).

0 No printing.

1 Initial direction cosines printed.

2 Initial and updated direction cosines printed.

NLAYERS [1]
The number of layers for elements of the group. See LAYER.

INITIALSTRAIN [NONE]
Indicates initial strains applied to this element group.

NONE No initial strains for elements of this group.

NODAL Only the nodal strains input via INITIAL-CONDITION are

accounted for.

ELEMENT Only the element strains input via element data commands are
accounted for.

BOTH Both nodal and element strains are taken into consideration.

FAILURE [0]
Label number of the default failure criterion assigned to elements of this group. Elements
within the group may use a different failure criterion, but each failure criterion specified must
be of the same type as that of the failure criterion given by this parameter, see FAILURE. A 0
value indicates no failure criterion to be used.

Note that material models available for this option are:

ISOTROPIC ORTHOTROPIC
THERMO-ISOTROPIC THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC

SECTIONRESULT [0]
Indicates which of the following are calculated at integration point midsurface locations:
element force and moment resultants (per unit length), membrane strains and curvatures and
positions of the neutral axes. Printing and saving of this data for each element may be
specified by the element data commands.

-2 Calculation of force/moment resultants, strains/curvatures,

neutral axes.

8-36 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP SHELL Sec. 8.1 Element groups

-1 Calculation of force/moment resultants, strains/curvatures.

0 No calculation.

1 Calculation of force/moment resultants.

2 Calculation of force/moment resultants, neutral axes.

Note: Parameter SECTIONRESULT takes effect only if parameter RESULTS =

STRESSES, and if the calculated data refers to the local element (r, s, t) system.

CMASS [MASTER CMASS]

Requests the calculation of the following mass properties for the element group: total mass,
total volume, moments and products of inertia, centroid, and center of mass. {YES/NO}

STRAINS [DEFAULT]
Indicates whether large strains are assumed for the kinematic formulation for the element
group.

SMALL Small strains only.

LARGE Effects of large strains are included. For details of restrictions,

please refer to the note under the parameter MATERIAL.

DEFAULT Formulation for element group defaults to that specified by

KINEMATICS.

Note: DISPLACEMENTS = LARGE is automatically set if STRAINS = LARGE is input.

RUPTURE [ADINA]
Indicates whether the program rupture criteria or user-supplied rupture criteria to be applied to
the material used in this element group.

ADINA Use the program criteria.

USER User must provide fortran-coded subroutine CURUP7 to decide

the element rupture.

Note that material models available for this option are:

PLASTIC-BILINEAR, PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR, PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC,

THERMO-PLASTIC, CREEP, PLASTIC-CREEP, MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-37

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP SHELL

TIME-OFFSET [0.0]
With this parameter, a creep law can be modified as follows (example given for creep law
number 1) :
e c = a 0 a1 ( t t 0 )
a2

where t is the absolute time and t0=TIME-OFFSET represents a shift in the time scale.

Note: When TIME-OFFSET is used, the same shift is applied to all time dependent terms.
The TIME-OFFSET value can be negative or positive and can be modified for a
restart run.

OPTION [NONE]
Indicates whether user-supplied code is used for this element group.
{NONE / USER-CODED}

If OPTION = USER-CODED, then {STRESSREFERENCE, PRINTVECTORS, NLAYERS,

INITIALSTRAIN, FAILURE, SECTIONRESULT, CMASS, STRAINS, RUPTURE} are not
applicable

THICKNESS [1.0]
Specifies the default thickness of elements in the group.

INCOMPATIBLE-MODES [DEFAULT]
Specifies whether incompatible modes are included in the formulation of 4-node shell ele-
ments. {NO/YES/DEFAULT}

NO Incompatible modes are not included

YES Incompatible modes are included

DEFAULT Choice of formulation is set by the KINEMATICS command

Incompatible modes are only applicable to quadrilateral MITC4 elements. They are not
applicable to triangular collapsed MITC4 elements.

PRINT [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the PRINTDEFAULT
parameter of the PRINTOUT command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

SAVE [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the SAVEDEFAULT
parameter of the PORTHOLE command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

8-38 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP SHELL Sec. 8.1 Element groups

TBIRTH [0.0]
Default element birth time.

TDEATH [0.0]
Default element birth time.

TINT-TYPE [GAUSS]
Parameter TINT-TYPE controls the type of numerical integration through the shell thickness.

GAUSS Gauss integration is used with TINT points. (2 TINT 6)

NEWTON-COTES Newton-Cotes integration is used with TINT points. (TINT =

3,5,7)

TRAPEZOIDAL Trapezoidal rule integration is used with TINT points. Can only be
used with MITC3, MITC4, MITC6, MITC9, MITC16 single layer shell
elements. ( 2 TINT 20)

If TINT < 0, then Newton-Cotes integration is always used regardless of the value of TINT-
TYPE (for backwards compatibility with previous versions of the AUI).

TMC-MATERIAL [1]
Label number of ADINA-T material used for thermal coupling.

WTMC [1.0]
Plastic work to heat factor for the thermo-mechanical coupling. ( 0.0 WTMC 1.0)

RUPTURE-LABEL [0]
User-rupture label number which is defined by the USER-RUPTURE command.
Used only for RUPTURE = USER.

SHELLTYPE [STANDARD]
If SHELLTYPE = STANDARD, then the 3D-shell element is not used and the usual shell
elements are used. If SHELLTYPE = 3DSHELL, then the 3D-shell element is used.
{STANDARD/3DSHELL}

WARPING_ROTATIONS [NO]
If WARPING_ROTATIONS=YES, then the 3D-shell element includes warping rotation
degrees of freedom; if WARPING_ROTATIONS=NO, then the 3D-shell element does not
include warping rotation degrees of freedom. {NO/YES}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-39

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP SHELL

NELPRS [AUTOMATIC]
NELPT [AUTOMATIC]
NELPRS and NELPT specify the number of pressure degrees of freedom used in the u/p
formulation (3D-shell element only). NELPRS= number of u/p dofs in r-s plane (0 to 9, or
automatic). NELPT = number of u/p dofs in t direction (0 to 3, or automatic)
If NELPRS = 0 or NELPT=0, then the u/p formulation is not used.

TYING [YES]
This parameter is used only for the 3D-shell element; for other shell elements, tying is always
used. {NO/YES}

If TYING=NO, tying is not used; if TYING=YES, tying is used for locking prevention.

Auxiliary commands

LIST EGROUP SHELL FIRST LAST

DELETE EGROUP SHELL FIRST LAST

8-40 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 8.1 Element groups

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-41

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP PIPE

EGROUP PIPE NAME DISPLACEMENTS MATERIAL RINT SINT

TINT RESULTS OVALIZATION INITIALSTRAIN
ICALRA RADTOL CMASS RUPTURE TIME-OFFSET
OPTION BOLT-TOL SECTION PRINT SAVE TBIRTH
TDEATH BOLTFORCE BOLTNCUR TMC-MATERIAL

Defines an element group consisting of pipe elements. See the Theory and Modeling Guide
for a complete description of pipe elements.

NAME [(current highest element group label number) + 1]

Label number of the element group to be defined. The label number of an existing element
group can only be given if it is of type PIPE. Hence, to re-define the type of a named element
group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP PIPE.

DISPLACEMENTS [DEFAULT]
Indicates whether large displacements are assumed for the kinematic formulation for the
element group.

SMALL Small displacements only.

LARGE Effects of large displacements are included.

DEFAULT Formulation for element group defaults to that specified by

KINEMATICS.

MATERIAL [1]
The label number of the default material for an element group. Elements within the group may
use a different material, as specified by element data command, but each material specified
must be of the same model type as that of the material given by this parameter.

Note: Elements of type PIPE can use materials of the following types:
ELASTIC, THERMO-ISOTROPIC, PLASTIC, PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR, THERMO-
PLASTIC, CREEP, PLASTIC-CREEP, CREEP-VARIABLE, MULTILINEAR-PLAS-
TIC-CREEP, PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE, MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-
VARIABLE

RINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order along the centroidal axis of each element (the local element r-
direction). Negative values imply the closed Newton-Cotes integration method, and zero or
positive values the Gauss integration method.

DEFAULT Full Gauss integration order the reliable integration order,

dependent on the polynomial order of the elements, i.e., the
maximum number of nodes per element.

8-42 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP PIPE Sec. 8.1 Element groups

RINT Method No. of integration points

-1 Newton-Cotes 3
-2 Newton-Cotes 3
-3 Newton-Cotes 3
-4 Newton-Cotes 5
-5 Newton-Cotes 5
-6 Newton-Cotes 7
-7 Newton-Cotes 7
0 Gauss DEFAULT (see above)
1 Gauss 1
2 Gauss 2
3 Gauss 3
4 Gauss 4

SINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for the local s-direction of each element, which is the radial
direction of the pipe). The same input convention for RINT is assumed.

TINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for the local t-direction or circumferential direction used in the
composite trapezoidal rule. Only 4, 8, 12 or 24 integration points can be employed and the
following default values are used by ADINA when other values of TINT are specified.

4 < TINT 7 8
8 < TINT 11 12
12 < TINT 24 24

If element warping/ovalization is enabled then

TINT 12 must be used for MASTER OVALIZATION = IN-PLANE.

TINT = 24 must be used for MASTER OVALIZATION = OUT-OF-PLANE or ALL.

DEFAULT = 8 when MASTER OVALIZATION = NO.

= 12 when MASTER OVALIZATION = IN-PLANE.
= 24 when MASTER OVALIZATION = OUT-OF-PLANE or ALL.

RESULTS [STRESSES]
The calculated element response from the ADINA analysis.

FORCES Element nodal forces are calculated, stresses are not. These forces
are equivalent, in the virtual work sense, to the internal element
stresses.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-43

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP PIPE

STRESSES Element stresses and strains are calculated at all integration

points, but no forces.

OVALIZATION [DEFAULT]
Flag that indicates whether or not the pipe nodes in this element group have ovalization/
warping degrees of freedom.

NO Pipe element nodes do not have ovalization/warping degrees of

freedom.

DEFAULT Warping/Ovalization based on MASTER command.

NO if MASTER OVALIZATION = NO
YES if MASTER OVALIZATION = IN-PLANE,
OUT-OF-PLANE
or ALL.

INITIALSTRAIN [NONE]
Indicates initial strains applied to this element group.

NONE No initial strains for elements of this group.

NODAL Only the nodal strains input via INITIAL-CONDITION are

accounted for.

ELEMENT Only the element strains input via element data commands are
accounted for.

BOTH Both nodal and element strains are taken into consideration.

ICALRA [0]
Flag for the calculation of internal radii and internal areas at pipe nodes.

0 Internal radii and internal areas are not calculated.

1 Internal radii and internal areas are calculated and stored on the
porthole file.

2 Internal radii and internal areas are calculated, stored on the

porthole file and printed out.

RADTOL [0.001]
For 4-node, circular bend pipe elements, the nodes should lie on a circular arc with the auxiliary
node at the center of that arc. RADTOL provides a relative tolerance for checking this.

8-44 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP PIPE Sec. 8.1 Element groups

CMASS [MASTER CMASS]

Requests the calculation of the following mass properties for the element group: total mass,
total volume, moments and products of inertia, centroid, and center of mass.{YES/NO}

RUPTURE [ADINA]
Indicates whether the program rupture criteria or user-supplied rupture criteria to be applied
to the material used in this element group.

ADINA Use the program criteria.

USER User must provide fortran-coded subroutine CURUP8 to decide

the element rupture.

Note: Material models available for this option are:

PLASTIC-BILINEAR, PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR, THERMO-PLASTIC,
CREEP, PLASTIC-CREEP, MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP

TIME-OFFSET [0.0]
With this parameter, a creep law can be modified as follows (example given for creep law
number 1) :
e c = a 0 a1 ( t t 0 )
a2

where t is the absolute time and t0=TIME-OFFSET represents a shift in the time scale.

Note: When TIME-OFFSET is used, the same shift is applied to all time dependent terms.
The TIME-OFFSET value can be negative or positive and can be modified for a
restart run.

OPTION [NONE]
This parameter is obsolete.

BOLT-TOL [0.01]
This parameter is obsolete.

SECTION [1]
Specifies the default cross-section label for elements in the group.

PRINT [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the PRINTDEFAULT
parameter of the PRINTOUT command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

SAVE [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the SAVEDEFAULT

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-45

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP PIPE

parameter of the PORTHOLE command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

TBIRTH [0.0]
Default element birth time.

TDEATH [0.0]
Default element birth time.

BOLTFORCE [0.0]
This parameter is obsolete.

BOLTNCUR [0]
This parameter is obsolete.

TMC-MATERIAL [1]
Label number of ADINA-T material used for thermal coupling.

Auxiliary commands

LIST EGROUP PIPE FIRST LAST

DELETE EGROUP PIPE FIRST LAST

8-46 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP SPRING Sec. 8.1 Element groups

EGROUP SPRING NAME PROPERTYSET RESULTS NONLINEAR

SKEWSYSTEM OPTION PRINT SAVE TBIRTH
TDEATH 6DOF-SPRING

Defines an element group consisting of spring elements.

NAME [(current highest element group label number) + 1]

Label number of the element group to be defined. The label number of an existing element
group can be given only if it is of type SPRING. Hence, to re-define the type of a named
element group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP SPRING.

PROPERTYSET [1]
The label number of the default property set (giving the stiffness, mass, damping properties)
for the element group, defined via command PROPERTYSET or PSET-6DOF (for a 6DOF
spring). Elements within the group may use a different property set, as specified, e.g., by
SPRING-POINTS or EDATA.

RESULTS [FORCES]
The calculated element response from the ADINA analysis.

FORCES Element nodal forces are calculated. The reference system is that
of the degree-of-freedom system associated with the node (global
or skew).

STRESSES Element stresses are calculated using the specified stress

transformation (see command PROPERTYSET).

NONLINEAR [NO]
Specifies whether springs in this group has nonlinear effects. This parameter is not applicable
to the 6DOF spring. {NO/MNO/GEOM/MNO-G}

NO Spring is linear

MNO Spring properties may be nonlinear but geometric nonlinearities

are not taken into account

GEOM Spring properties may be nonlinear and geometric nonlinearities

are taken into account

MNO-G Spring with general nonlinear spring properties, with option of

using skewsystem at the spring nodes

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-47

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP SPRING

SKEWSYSTEM [NO]
Indicates whether spring properties are with respect to skew systems at the nodes. Appli-
cable only to non-6DOF springs with option NONLINEAR = NO or MNO-G.

NO All property sets are assumed to be with respect to the global

Cartesian system. ADINA performs all necessary
transformations for any skewsystems at spring element nodes.

YES Property sets are assumed to be with respect to the coordinate

systems at the element nodes. Thus, in this case, ADINA does
not perform any transformation between global and skew system.

OPTION [NONE]
Specifies special options for springs in this group. Not applicable to the 6DOF spring.
{NONE/TRANSVERSE}

NONE No special options

TRANSVERSE Spring may act in the transverse direction (instead of axial). Only
applicable when NONLINEAR=MNO

PRINT [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the PRINTDEFAULT
parameter of the PRINTOUT command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

SAVE [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the SAVEDEFAULT
parameter of the PORTHOLE command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

TBIRTH [0.0]
Default element birth time.

TDEATH [0.0]
Default element birth time.

6DOF-SPRING [NO]
Indicates whether elements in this group are 6DOF springs. {NO/YES}

Auxiliary commands

LIST EGROUP SPRING FIRST LAST

DELETE EGROUP SPRING FIRST LAST

8-48 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP GENERAL Sec. 8.1 Element groups

EGROUP GENERAL NAME MATRIXSET RESULTS SKEWSYSTEMS

USER-SUPPLIED PRINT SAVE

Defines an element group consisting of linear general elements.

NAME [(current highest element group label number) + 1]

Label number of the element group to be defined. The label number of an existing element
group can only be given if it is of type GENERAL. Hence to re-define the type of a named
element group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP GENERAL.

MATRIXSET [1]
The label number of the default matrix set giving element stiffness, mass, damping and stress
matrices for an element group, defined via command MATRIXSET. Elements within the group
may use a different matrix set, as specified by element data commands.

RESULTS [STRESSES]
The calculated element response from the ADINA analysis.

FORCES Element nodal forces are calculated, but stresses are not. These
forces are equivalent, in the virtual work sense, to the internal
element stresses. The reference system is that of the degree-of-
freedom system associated with the node (global or skew).

STRESSES Element stresses and strains are calculated at all integration

points, but forces are not calculated.

SKEWSYSTEM [NO]

NO All matrix sets are assumed to be with respect to the global

Cartesian system. ADINA performs all necessary
transformations for any skewsystems at general element nodes.

YES Matrix sets are assumed to be with respect to the coordinate

systems at the element nodes. Thus, in this case, ADINA does
not perform any transformation between global and skewsystems.

USER-SUPPLIED [NO]
If USER-SUPPLIED=YES, then use the MATRIX USER-SUPPLIED command to input the
required information, which will be used in the ADINA subroutine CUSERG for calculating
the element stiffness, mass and damping matrices, and nodal forces. Note that if the stiffness,
mass or damping matrices are constants, then they can instead be provided by the MATRIX
STIFFNESS, MATRIX MASS or MATRIX DAMPING commands, respectively. If the
MATRIX STIFFNESS command is used, then obviously USER-SUPPLIED=NO. Only one

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-49

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP GENERAL

matrix set (specified by MATRIXSET) is allowed when USER-SUPPLIED=YES.

NO Element stiffness is directly input through the commands

MATRIX STIFFNESS and MATRIXSET.

YES Element stiffness is to be provided by the user from ADINA

subroutine CUSERG, and the element nodal forces is to be
calculated too. The command MATRIX USER-SUPPLIED must
be input and the MATRIXSET command is used to combine the
stiffness, mass and damping effects.

PRINT [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the PRINTDEFAULT
parameter of the PRINTOUT command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

SAVE [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the SAVEDEFAULT
parameter of the PORTHOLE command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}

Auxiliary commands

LIST EGROUP GENERAL FIRST LAST

DELETEEGROUPGENERAL FIRST LAST

8-50 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP FLUID2 Sec. 8.1 Element groups

EGROUP FLUID2 NAME SUBTYPE DISPLACEMENTS IPO

MATERIAL INT RESULTS DEGEN
FORMULATION CMASS

Defines an element group consisting of 2-D planar or axisymmetric fluid elements.

NAME [(current highest element group label number) + 1]

Label number of the element group to be defined. The label number of an existing element
group can only be given if it is of type FLUID2. Hence to re-define the type of a named
element group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP FLUID2.

SUBTYPE [AXISYMMETRIC]
Indicates the type of FLUID2 element.

AXISYMMETRIC Axisymmetric elements (which cannot be used in a cyclic

symmetric analysis).

PLANE 2-D Planar elements.

DISPLACEMENTS [DEFAULT]
Indicates whether large displacements are assumed for the kinematic formulation for the
element group. Only applicable for FORMULATION = 0 or 1.

SMALL Small displacements only.

LARGE Effects of large displacements are included.

DEFAULT Formulation for element group defaults to that specified

by KINEMATICS.

IPO [0]
Each fluid region may required one point at which a hydrostatic pressure degree of freedom is
specified. See the Theory and Modeling Guide. If required, IPO specifies the appropriate
geometry point. IPO = 0 indicates no such requirement.

MATERIAL [1]
The label number of the default material for an element group. Elements within the group may
use a different material, as specified by element data commands, but each material specified
must be of the same model type as that of the material given by this parameter.

Note: Elements of type FLUID2 can only use a material of the type: FLUID.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-51

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP FLUID2

INT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order. {1 INT 4}

DEFAULT Full Gauss integration order, the reliable integration order,

dependent on the polynomial order of the elements, i.e., the
number of nodes per element side.

RESULTS [PRESSURES]
The calculated element response from the ADINA analysis.

FORCES Element nodal forces are calculated, but pressures are not. These
forces are equivalent, in the virtual work sense, to the internal
element pressures. The reference system is that of the degree-of-
freedom system associated with the node (global or skew).

PRESSURES Element pressures are calculated at all integration points, but

forces are not.

Note: RESULTS=FORCES can not be applied to the potential based fluids.

DEGEN [DEFAULT]
Indicator for spatial isotropy correction for degenerate (triangular) 8-node elements. When
true tetrahedral elements are defined in this element group, DEGEN = UNUSED should be
specified. The DEFAULT option means that the default is taken from the parameter DEGEN of
the MASTER command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES/UNUSED}

FORMULATION [DEFAULT]
Indicates which fluid element to use:

0 Displacement-based element without rotation penalty.

1 Displacement-based element with rotation penalty.
2 Potential-based element, acoustic formulation.
3 Potential-based infinite element
4 Potential-based element, subsonic formulation

Notes on the formulations:

The potential-based formulations can only be used in conjunction with small displacements
(DISPLACEMENTS=SMALL).

Formulation 3 is obsolete and is maintained only for backwards compatibility with ADINA 7.5
and lower.

8-52 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP FLUID2 Sec. 8.1 Element groups

Formulation 4 is allowed only when MASTER FLUIDPOTENTIAL=AUTOMATIC.

DEFAULT = 2
= 1 (cyclic symmetric analysis)

CMASS [MASTER CMASS]

Requires the calculation of the following mass properties for the element group: total mass,
total volume, moments and products of inertia, centroid, and center of mass. {YES/NO}

Auxiliary commands

LIST EGROUP FLUID2 FIRST LAST

DELETE EGROUP FLUID2 FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-53

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP FLUID3

EGROUP FLUID3 NAME DISPLACEMENTS IPO MATERIAL RSINT

TINT RESULTS DEGEN FORMULATION CMASS

Defines an element group consisting of three-dimensional fluid elements.

NAME [(current highest element group label number) + 1]

Label number of the element group to be defined. The label number of an existing element
group can only be given if it is of type FLUID3. Hence, to re-define the type of a named
element group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP FLUID3.

DISPLACEMENTS [DEFAULT]
Indicates whether large displacements are assumed for the kinematic formulation for the
element group. Only applicable for FORMULATION = 0 or 1.

SMALL Small displacements only.

LARGE Effects of large displacements are included.

DEFAULT Formulation for element group defaults to that specified

by KINEMATICS.

IPO [0]
Each fluid region may required one point at which a hydrostatic pressure degree of freedom is
specified. See the Theory and Modeling Guide. If required, IPO specifies the appropriate
geometry point. IPO = 0 indicates no such requirement.

MATERIAL [1]
The label number of the default material for an element group. Elements within the group may
use a different material, as specified by element data commands, but each material specified
must be of the same model type as that of the material given by this parameter.

Note: Elements of type FLUID3 can only use a material of type: FLUID.

RSINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for the element r-, s-directions. {1 INT 6}

DEFAULT Full Gauss integration order, the reliable integration order,

dependent on the polynomial order of the elements, i.e. the
number of nodes per element side.

TINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order in the element t-direction. Same input convention as RSINT.

8-54 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP FLUID3 Sec. 8.1 Element groups

RESULTS [PRESSURES]
The calculated element response from the ADINA analysis.

FORCES Element nodal forces are calculated, but pressures are not. These
forces are equivalent, in the virtual work sense, to the internal
element pressures. The reference system is that of the degree-of-
freedom system associated with the node (global or skew).

PRESSURES Element pressures are calculated at all integration points, but

forces are not.The calculated element response from the ADINA
analysis.

Note: RESULTS=FORCES can not be applied to the potential based fluids.

DEGEN [DEFAULT]
Indicator for spatial isotropy correction for degenerate 20-node elements. When
true 10-node tetrahedral elements are defined in this element group through ENODES
command, DEGEN = UNUSED should be specified. The DEFAULT option means that the
default is taken from the parameter DEGEN of the MASTER command. {DEFAULT/NO/
YES/UNUSED}

FORMULATION [DEFAULT]
Indicates which fluid element to use:

0 Displacement-based element without rotation penalty.

1 Displacement-based element with rotation penalty.
2 Potential-based element, acoustic formulation.
3 Potential-based infinite element
4 Potential-based element, subsonic formulation

Notes on the formulations:

The potential-based formulations can only be used in conjunction with small displacements
(DISPLACEMENTS=SMALL).

Formulation 3 is obsolete and is maintained only for backwards compatibility with ADINA 7.5
and lower.

Formulation 4 is allowed only when MASTER FLUIDPOTENTIAL=AUTOMATIC.

DEFAULT = 2
= 1 (cyclic symmetric analysis)

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-55

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGROUP FLUID3

CMASS [MASTER CMASS]

Requests the calculation of the following mass properties for the element group; total mass,
total volume, moments and products of inertia, centroid, and center of mass. {YES/NO}

Auxiliary commands

LIST EGROUP FLUID3 FIRST LAST

DELETE EGROUP FLUID3 FIRST LAST

8-56 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGROUP ALIGNMENT Sec. 8.1 Element groups

EGROUP ALIGNMENT NAME RESULTS PRINT SAVE TDEATH

ALIGN-TRANSLATION ALIGN-DISTANCE
ALIGN-ROTATION TRIADST1 TRIADST2

Defines an element group of alignment elements.

RESULTS [ALIGNMENTS]
The type of results output by the alignment elements. {ALIGNMENTS/FORCES}

ALIGNMENTS Information about the current alignments

FORCES Nodal point forces

PRINT [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the PRINTDEFAULT
parameter of the PRINTOUT command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES/VERBOSE}
If PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT=STRAINS and PRINT=DEFAULT, then the effect is the same
as if PRINT=VERBOSE.

SAVE [DEFAULT]
Save element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the SAVEDEFAULT
parameter of the PORTHOLE command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES/VERBOSE}

TDEATH [0.0]
Default element death time.

ALIGN-TRANSLATION [0]
The number of the translational alignment definition used by elements in this group, by
default, defined by command ALIGN-TRANSLATION.

ALIGN-DISTANCE [0]
The number of the distance alignment definition used by elements in this group, by default,
defined by command ALIGN- DISTANCE.

ALIGN-ROTATION [0]
The number of the rotational alignment definition used by elements in this group, by default,
defined by command ALIGN-ROTATION.

TRIADST1, TRIADST2 [0,0]

The label number of the triadsets used in local nodes 1 and 2, by default, defined by com-
mand TRIADSETS.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-57

Chap. 8 Finite element representation EGCONTROL

EGCONTROL NSUBG MINEL MAXEL

EGCONTROL specifies the splitting of element groups into smaller subgroups. This can be
used to partition the model for distributed solution; see additional notes below and the figure
on the next page.

NSUBG [8]
The number of subgroups generated for each element group.

MINEL [0]
Each element group with MINEL or more elements can be split into subgroups. Element
groups with fewer than MINEL elements are not split. (MINEL=0 is equivalent to MINEL=10
NSUBG).

MAXEL [999999]
Maximum number of elements in a single element subgroup. If the number of elements in a
group is greater than MAXEL it will be split into subgroups such that each subgroup has
MAXEL or fewer elements.

Notes
The parallelization of the assembly of the global system matrices is implemented as follows.
Each element group is divided into subgroups by the AUI and, in the ADINA execution,
subgroups are assigned to processors as shown in the figure on the next page. Ideally the
number of subgroups is proportional to the number of processors, and each subgroup has
the same number of elements.
To divide element groups into subgroups the EGCONTROL command can be used. The
number of processors that you specify when you run ADINA can be different than the
number of subgroups that you specify within the AUI.

Auxiliary commands

LIST EGCONTROL

8-58 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EGCONTROL Sec. 8.1 Element groups

Element 1 Element 1

Group 1,
Processor 1
subgroup 1

Element 2000 Element 2000

Element 2001 Element 2001

Group 1,
Processor 2
subgroup 2

Element 4000 Element 4000

Group 1
Element 4001 Element 4001

Group 1,
subgroup 3 Processor 3

Element 6000 Element 6000

Element 6001 Element 6001

Group 1,
subgroup 4 Processor 4

Element 8000 Element 8000

Element 1 Element 1
Group 2,
Processor 1
subgroup 1
Element 500 Element 500
Element 501 Element 501
Group 2,
Processor 2
subgroup 2
Element 1000 Element 1000
Group 2
Element 1001 Element 1001
Group 2,
Processor 3
subgroup 3
Element 1500 Element 1500
Element 1501 Element 1501
Group 2, Processor 4
subgroup 4
Element 2000 Element 2000

a) Model definition in the AUI b) Element groups, subgroups and processors

used in ADINA (4 subgroups specified
in the AUI, 4 processors used in ADINA)
Example of assignment of processors to elements
in parallel processing, simple scheduling

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-59

Chap. 8 Finite element representation BOLT-OPTIONS

BOLT-OPTIONS TYPE TABLES STEPS TIME TOLERANCE DAMPING

FACTOR1 FACTOR2 FACTOR3

Defines bolt options for use with the beam-bolt and 3D-bolt.

TYPE [FORCE]
Specifies the type of bolt. {FORCE/LENGTH}

FORCE Force-tensioning bolt

LENGTH Length-reducing bolt

TYPE can be overwritten by the BOLT-TABLE command.

TABLES [NO]
Indicates whether bolt tables (BOLT-TABLE command) are used to specify the bolt loading
sequence. If TABLES=YES, at least one BOLT-TABLE command must be specified in the
model. {NO/YES}

STEPS [1]
Specifies number of bolt steps used to apply the full bolt load. Not used if TABLES=YES is
specified.

TIME [0]
Specifies bolt time. Not used if TABLES=YES is specified.

TOLERANCE [0.01]
Specifies the default bolt convergence tolerance. A different tolerance value may be specified
for a group of bolts with the BOLT-TOL parameter in EGROUP BEAM command.

DAMPING [0.0]
Specifies bolt damping.

FACTOR1 [1E-6]
For a beam-bolt element group, FACTOR1 is used to decrease the axial bolt stiffness during
bolt-force iterations. FACTOR1 can be set to zero if both ends of the bolt are supported
independently of the bolt (that is, if both ends of the bolt are supported when the bolt is
removed).

FACTOR2 [1E6]
For a beam-bolt element group, FACTOR2 is used to increase the axial bolt stiffness during
bolt-shortening iterations.

FACTOR3 [0.0]
For a 3D-bolt element group, FACTOR3 is the factor k that stabilizes the bolt when either end
of the bolt is unsupported.

8-60 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BOLT-PLANE Sec. 8.1 Element groups

BOLT-PLANE NAME OPTION POINT1 POINT2 NODE1 NODE2

COORDINATE FACTOR NX NY NZ

The BOLT-PLANE command defines a bolt-plane. A bolt-plane is used by a 3D solid element

group of type BOLT, in order to define the bolt plane for the element group.

NAME [(current highest bolt-plane label number) + 1]

Label number of the bolt-plane to be defined.

OPTION [XPLANE]
The option used to define the bolt-plane. {TWOPOINT/TWONODE/XPLANE/YPLANE/
ZPLANE/NODENORMAL/POINTNORMAL/NODEAUTO/POINTAUTO}
TWOPOINT The bolt-plane is defined by two geometry points and a factor, see figure.
TWONODE The bolt-plane is defined by two nodes and a factor, see figure.
XPLANE The bolt-plane is parallel to the x plane, at x = COORDINATE.
YPLANE The bolt-plane is parallel to the y plane, at y = COORDINATE.
ZPLANE The bolt-plane is parallel to the z plane, at z = COORDINATE.

NODENORMAL The bolt-plane is defined by a node and normal vector. The bolt-plane
passes through the node and the bolt direction is given by the normal
vector.

POINTNORMAL The bolt-plane is defined by a geometry point and normal vector. The bolt-
plane passes through the geometry point and the bolt direction is given by
the normal vector.

NODEAUTO The bolt-plane is defined by a node. The bolt-plane passes through the
node and the bolt direction is determined automatically.

POINTAUTO The bolt-plane is defined by a geometry point. The bolt-plane passes

through the geometry point and the bolt direction is determined
automatically.

POINT1
When OPTION=TWOPOINT, POINT1 is the first geometry point used to define the bolt-
plane. When OPTION=POINTNORMAL or POINTAUTO, POINT1 is the geometry point
used to define the bolt-plane.

POINT2
When OPTION=TWOPOINT, POINT2 is the second geometry point used to define the bolt-
plane. The bolt direction is parallel to the vector from POINT1 to POINT2.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-61

Chap. 8 Finite element representation

Option=ZPLANE
x=(0,0,COORDINATE)

x=xP1 + FACTOR(xP2 - xP1) z

P2

Bolt direction

x
P1

Option=XPLANE Option=YPLANE
x=(COORDINATE,0,0) x=(0,COORDINATE,0)

a) Option TWOPOINT b) Options XPLANE,YPLANE,ZPLANE

(TWONODE is similar)
NODE1
When OPTION=TWONODE, NODE1 is the first node used to define the bolt-plane. When
OPTION=NODENORMAL or NODEAUTO, NODE1 is the node used to define the bolt-plane.

NODE2
When OPTION=TWONODE, NODE2 is the second node used to define the bolt-plane. The
bolt direction is parallel to the vector from NODE1 to NODE2.

COORDINATE [0.0]
The coordinate value of the plane when OPTION=XPLANE/YPLANE/ZPLANE.

FACTOR [0.5]
The factor used when OPTION=TWOPOINT or TWONODE. When FACTOR=0.0, the bolt-
plane goes through point or node 1; when FACTOR=1.0, the bolt-plane goes through point
or node 2.

NX [1.0]
NY [0.0]
NZ [0.0]
When OPTION=NODENORMAL or POINTNORMAL, NX, NY, NZ are the components of the
vector normal to the bolt plane (the bolt direction).

Auxiliary commands
LIST BOLT-PLANE FIRST LAST
DELETE BOLT-PLANE FIRST LAST

8-62 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BOLT-TABLE Sec. 8.1 Element groups

BOLT-TABLE NAME TYPE TIME

sequencei bolt-numberi factori savei

Specifies the bolt loading sequence.

NAME [current highest label + 1]

Bolt-table label number.

TYPE [FORCE]
Specifies the type of bolt. {FORCE/LENGTH}

FORCE Force-tensioning bolt

LENGTH Length-reducing bolt

The specification of TYPE in this command overwrites any from the BOLT-OPTIONS com-
mand.

TIME [0]
Specifies bolt time.

sequencei
Bolt sequence number.

bolt-numberi
Bolt number assigned in the EGROUP BEAM or EGROUP THREEDSOLID commands.

Note that if bolt-number=0, it means all bolts are loaded in same sequence.

factori
Bolt factor.

savei [DEFAULT]
Save flag. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}
When the setting is DEFAULT, the save flag is NO, except for last bolt in the table, for which
the save flag = YES.

Note that the same sequence with different bolt numbers must have the same save flag. If
multiple entries have the same sequence and the same bolt number, only the last one will be
taken. Sequence numbers must start at number 1 and have no gaps. Bolt time must be
different for each bolt-table. The same sequence must have the same save flags.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-63

Chap. 8 Finite element representation ELMOVE

ELMOVE FROM TO OPTION

Moves (2D, 3D and shell) elements from one group to another. If the source element group
has no elements left, the element group will be deleted.

Note that:
1. No element can be from a mesh created from geometry.
2. If source element is from an element-set, all the element types in element-set must be the
same.
3. Only following cases are allowed to move:
- 3D to 3D
- 2D to 2D
- 2D to Shell
- Shell to Shell
- Shell to 3D plane stress

FROM [0]
The label number of the source element-set or element group.

TO [0]
The label number of the target element-set or element group.

OPTION [GROUP]
Determines whether an element-set or element group will be moved.
{GROUP/ ELEMENT-SET}

8-64 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 8.1 Element groups

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-65

Chap. 8 Finite element representation TRANSITION-ELEMENT

TRANSITION-ELEMENT BODY1 FACE1 EDGE GROUP1 BODY2 FACE2

GROUP2 SUBSTRUCTURE

Converts a set of shell elements along an edge of a face/surface into shell transition elements.

BODY1 [0]
Label number of the body of FACE1 that has a shell mesh.

FACE1 [1]
Label number of the face on BODY1. If BODY1 is 0, FACE1 is a surface label number.

EDGE
Label number of the edge where the shell transition elements are to be created. If BODY1 is 0,
EDGE is a line label number.

GROUP1 [Highest shell element group number of mesh on FACE1]

Element group number of the shell mesh on FACE1.

BODY2 [0]
Label number of the body that has a 3-D solid mesh.

FACE2 [1]
Label number of face on BODY2 where the shell transition elements are to be created. If
BODY2 is 0, FACE2 is a surface label number.

GROUP2 [Highest 3-D solid element group number of mesh on

BODY2]
Element group number of the 3-D solid mesh on BODY2.

SUBSTRUCTURE [Currently active substructure]

Substructure number for the nodes created by this command.

8-66 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BLAYER Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

BLAYER SUBSTRUC GROUP GEOM

bodyi facei edgei ptypei thick0i nlayeri thickti

The BLAYER command is obsolete. In order to generate boundary layers, a boundary layer
table should be defined and used while meshing the body (command GBODY).

Command BLAYER generates boundary layers on specified body faces for the specified
(substructure, group). In 3D, boundary layers are grown normal to body faces. In 2D,
boundary layers are grown normal to body edges along body faces.

Notes for 3D models:

1 BLAYER is active only if: number of bodies > 0 and number of volumes = 0
and all bodies have been meshed.
2 BLAYER executes only if number of nodes per element is 4.
3 In case of multiple bodies, "interface" body faces must be linked.
4 Linked body faces cannot have boundary layers on both sides.
5 Once boundary layers have been generated and in case of multiple bodies,
do not delete body meshes unless you intend to delete all of them.
6 There can be only one element group.
7 As a rule of thumb, the total thickness should be less than the element size on
the body face.

Notes for 2D models:

1 BLAYER is active only if number of body faces > 0 and number of surfaces = 0
and all body faces have been meshed.
2 BLAYER executes only if number of nodes per element is 3.
3 In case of multiple bodies, "interface" body edges must have same nodes.
4 Interface body edges cannot have boundary layers on both sides.
5 Once boundary layers have been generated and in case of multiple bodies,
do not delete body meshes unless you intend to delete all of them.
6 There can be only one element group.
7 As a rule of thumb, the total thickness should be less than the element size on the
body edge.

SUBSTRUC [current substructure label number]

Element substructure.

GROUP [current group label number]

Element group.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-67

Chap. 8 Finite element representation BLAYER

GEOM [YES]
Option to use the geometric modeler for placement of nodes on body faces/edges. {YES/
NO}

YES The geometric modeler (parasolid) is used to place nodes on body faces/edges.

NO The mesh is used to place nodes on body faces/edges.

bodyi
Label number of the body.

facei
Label number of the face.

edgei
Label number of the edge. In 3D, this is a dummy argument.

ptypei
Progression type for boundary layers. {GEOMETRIC/ARITHMETIC}

thick0i
Thickness of first layer (off face).

nlayeri
Number of layers.

thickti
Total thickness.

8-68 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
COPY-TRIANGULATION Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

COPY-TRIANGULATION BODY1 FACE1 BODY2 FACE2

TRANSFORMATION PCTOLERANCE

Copies face triangulation which can be later be used by meshing commands like GFACE or
GBODY. Enables the creation of identical meshes on similar faces.

BODY1 [NONE]
Label number of body where the face triangulation(s) is to be copied from. {> 0}

FACE1 [0]
Label number of face on BODY1 where the triangulation is to be copied from. See notes below
if FACE1=0. { 0}

BODY2 [NONE]
Label number of body where the face triangulation(s) is to be copied to. {> 0}

FACE2 [0]
Label number of face on BODY2 where the triangulation is to be copied from. See notes below
if FACE2=0. { 0}

TRANSFORMATION [0]
Label number of the transformation from BODY1 (FACE1) to BODY2 (FACE2).

PCTOLERANCE [as set in TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

Relative tolerance to be used to check if faces are matched using the provided transforma-
tion.

Notes:
If FACE1>0 and FACE2>0, it is assumed FACE1 transforms into FACE2 and the triangulation
stored internally for FACE1 is copied onto FACE2 if they match.

If FACE1=0 and FACE2=0, any face of BODY1 is checked against any face of BODY2 for a
match using the provided transformation. The face triangulations are copied for all matching
faces.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-69

Chap. 8 Finite element representation DELETE-TRIANGULATION
DELETE-TRIANGULATION OPTION BODY FACE

Deletes face triangulations created by the COPY-TRIANGULATION command.

OPTION [ALL]
Indicates whether triangulation is deleted for all relevant faces on all bodies or for selected
faces on a body. {ALL/SELECT}

BODY
Body label where triangulation is to be deleted. {>0}

FACE [0]
Face label where triangulation is to be deleted. If FACE=0, then triangulation on all relevant
faces of BODY will be deleted. {0}

8-70 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LIST-TRIANGULATION Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

LIST-TRIANGULATION

Lists all faces (body and face labels) which have triangulation created by the COPY-TRIAN-
GULATION command.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-71

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SUBDIVIDE DEFAULT

SUBDIVIDE DEFAULT MODE PROGRESSION SIZE NDIV PSIZE MINCUR

Defines default mesh subdivision data for subsequent model geometry definitions. Model
geometry created or imported will initially have the subdivision data given by this command.
Note that this command does not update any current geometry subdivision data, it only
specifies defaults for subsequent geometry definitions.

SUBDIVIDE DEFAULT has a similar syntax, but quite distinct action, to SUBDIVIDE MODEL,
which assigns a given subdivision data to all currently defined geometry.

MODE [NONE]
Selects the method of model subdivision data specification.

NONE no default mode. Subdivision mode will depend on the

SUBDIVIDE commands for each individual geometry type

LENGTH An element size is input corresponding to the length of

an element edge.

DIVISIONS A geometry line or edge is assigned a number of equal

subdivisions.

POINTWISE A geometry line or edge is subdivided according to the

desired element size at its end-points.

PROGRESSION [GEOMETRIC]
Sets the method of element edge length distribution along a line or edge of the geometry model.

ARITHMETIC The difference in length of each element edge from its

adjacent edges is constant.

GEOMETRIC The ratio of lengths of adjacent element edges is

constant.

APPROXIMATE The distribution of edge lengths is made such that a

given ratio of end-lengths is only approximately satisfied.

Note: PROGRESSION = APPROXIMATE is only provided for compatibility with earlier

versions of ADINA-IN. It is recommended that ARITHMETIC or GEOMETRIC
normally be used.

SIZE [0.0]
If MODE=LENGTH, this parameter specifies the element edge length. Then SIZE=0.0 means

8-72 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SUBDIVIDE DEFAULT Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

that the element edge length is the length of the edge (i.e. every edge will have 1 subdivsion).
If MODE=POINTWISE, this parameter specifies the maximum element edge length.

NDIV [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to a geometry line/edge.

PSIZE [0.0]
Element size at geometry points.

MINCUR [1]
Minimum number of subdivisions for curved lines and edges used when
MODE=POINTWISE.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SUBDIVIDE DEFAULT

Lists the current default subdivision data.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-73

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SUBDIVIDE MODEL

SUBDIVIDE MODEL MODE SIZE NDIV PROGRESSION MINCUR

Assigns mesh subdivision data to the entire current model geometry. The data can be in the
form of a specified element size, or the number of subdivisions along each line.

MODE [POINTWISE]
Selects the method of model subdivision data specification.

LENGTH An element size is input corresponding to the length of

an element edge.

DIVISIONS Each model geometry line or edge is assigned the same

number of equal subdivisions.

POINTWISE Each model geometry line or edge is subdivided

according to the element size at its end-points.

SIZE [0.0]
If MODE=LENGTH, this parameter specifies the element edge length. Then SIZE=0.0 means
that the element edge length is the length of the edge (i.e. every edge will have 1 subdivsion).
If MODE=POINTWISE, this parameter specifies the maximum element edge length.

NDIV [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to each geometry line or edge.

PROGRESSION [GEOMETRIC]
Sets the method of element edge length distribution along each line or edge of the geometry
model
.
ARITHMETIC The difference in length of each element edge from its
adjacent edges is constant.

GEOMETRIC The ratio of lengths of adjacent element edges is

constant.

APPROXIMATE The distribution of edge lengths is made such that a

given ratio of end-lengths is only approximately satisfied.

Note: PROGRESSION = APPROXIMATE is only provided for compatibility with earlier

versions of ADINA-IN. It is recommended that ARITHMETIC or GEOMETRIC
normally be used.

MINCUR [1]
Minimum number of subdivisions for curved lines and edges used when MODE =
POINTWISE.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SUBDIVIDE MODEL

8-74 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SUBDIVIDE POINT Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

SUBDIVIDE POINT NAME SIZE

pointi

Assigns mesh subdivision data (element sizes) to a set of geometry points.

NAME
Label number of a geometry point. Other points may be specified in subsequent accompany-
ing data lines.

SIZE
Requested element size. The size of an element is defined to be the maximum length of an
edge of that element. { 0.0}

Note: The element size at a geometry point may be used to determine the subdivision
data of geometry entities: lines and edges, and thereby that of surfaces, volumes,
faces and bodies.

pointi
Label number of a geometry point.

Note: A zero element size at a point indicates that any line or edge for which the point is
a vertex (end-point) will have only a single element edge if the mode of that line/
edge is POINTWISE.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SUBDIVIDE POINT FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-75

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SUBDIVIDE LINE

SUBDIVIDE LINE NAME MODE SIZE NDIV RATIO PROGRESSION

CBIAS

linei

Assigns mesh subdivision data to a set of geometry lines. The data can be in the form of a
specified element size, or the number of subdivisions along the line.

P1 Line length = L u P2

MODE = DIVISIONS
NDIV = 5
RATIO = 2
PROGRESSION = GEOMETRIC

MODE = LENGTH
SIZE = L/10

MODE = POINTWISE
SIZE @ P1 = 0.4L, @ P2 = 0.1L
PROGRESSION = ARITHMETIC

NAME
Label number of a geometry line. Other geometry lines to have the same subdivision data
may be given on accompanying data-lines.

MODE [DIVISIONS]
Selects the method of mesh subdivision data specification. This controls the actual param-
eters used, other parameters are ignored.

DIVISIONS The geometry lines are assigned a number of subdivisions which

can be graded in size according to the selected progression rule
(NDIV, RATIO, PROGRESSION).

LENGTH An element size is input corresponding to the length of an

element edge (SIZE).

POINTWISE The number of subdivisions, and any necessary grading, for the
geometry line is calculated from the element size specified at the
end points of the geometry line. See SUBDIVIDE POINT,
POINT-SIZE (SIZE, PROGRESSION).

8-76 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SUBDIVIDE LINE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

COMBINED For lines of type COMBINED (COUPLED=YES), the subdivision

data assigned to the parent lines (which are combined to define
the line) are transferred to the combined line, overwriting any
existing subdivision for the combined line. This mode guarantees
that the junctions where parent lines meet is assigned a subdivi-
sion location, i.e. a node will be generated at these positions
during mesh generation.

SIZE [0.0]
If MODE=LENGTH, this parameter specifies the element edge length. Then SIZE=0.0 means
that the element edge length is the length of the edge (i.e. every edge will have 1 subdivsion).
If MODE=POINTWISE, this parameter specifies the maximum element edge length.

NDIV [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the geometry lines.

RATIO [1.0]
Ratio of lengths of the last to the first element edges along the geometry line. The grading of
element lengths is governed by PROGRESSION. Last refers to the end of the line corre-
sponding to parametric coordinate u = 1.0, whilst first refers to the end of the line corre-
sponding to parametric coordinate u = 0.0.

PROGRESSION [GEOMETRIC]
When element edges are to be graded along a geometry line, i.e., when RATIO 1.0, the
distribution of element edge lengths can be selected from:

ARITHMETIC The difference in length of each element edge from its adjacent
edges is constant.

GEOMETRIC The ratio of lengths of adjacent element edges is constant.

APPROXIMATE The distribution of edge lengths is made such that RATIO is only
approximately satisfied.

Note: PROGRESSION = APPROXIMATE is only provided for compatibility with earlier

versions of ADINA-IN. It is recommended that ARITHMETIC or GEOMETRIC
normally be used.

CBIAS [NO]
Indicates if central bias is used. {NO/YES}

linei
Label number of a geometry line.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-77

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SUBDIVIDE LINE

Auxiliary commands

LIST SUBDIVIDE LINE FIRST LAST

8-78 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SUBDIVIDE SURFACE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

SUBDIVIDE SURFACE NAME MODE SIZE NDIV1 NDIV2 RATIO1

RATIO2 PROGRESSION CBIAS1 CBIAS2

surfacei

Assigns mesh subdivision data to a set of geometry surfaces. The data can be in the form of
a specified element size, or the number of divisions along the edges of the geometry surface.
The subdivision data is actually assigned to the geometry lines which comprise the edges of
the geometry surfaces.
P2

P1

v NDIV2, RATIO2

P3 u

P4
NDIV1, RATIO1

NAME
Label number of a geometry surface. Other geometry surfaces to have the same subdivision
data may be given on accompanying data-lines.

MODE [DIVISIONS]
Selects the method of mesh subdivision data specification. This controls the actual param-
eters used, other parameters are ignored.

LENGTH An element size is input corresponding to the length of an

element edge. Each edge of the geometry surfaces is subdivided
separately so as to give element edges which are approximately of
length SIZE (SIZE).

DIVISIONS Each parametric direction of the geometry surfaces is assigned a

number of subdivisions which can be graded in size according to
the selected progression rule (NDIV1, NDIV2, RATIO1, RATIO2,
PROGRESSION).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-79

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SUBDIVIDE SURFACE

POINTWISE Each edge of the geometry surfaces is assigned a number of

sub-divisions which is calculated, along with any necessary
grading, from the element size specified at the end points of the
edge. See SUBDIVIDE POINT, POINT-SIZE (SIZE, PROGRES
SION).

SIZE [0.0]
If MODE=LENGTH, this parameter specifies the element edge length. Then SIZE=0.0 means
that the element edge length is the length of the edge (i.e. every edge will have 1 subdivsion).
If MODE=POINTWISE, this parameter specifies the maximum element edge length.

NDIV1 [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the first parametric direction, u, of the geometry surfaces.

NDIV2 [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the second parametric direction, v, of the geometry surfaces

RATIO1 [1.0]
Ratio of lengths of the last to the first element edges along the edges corresponding to the
first parametric direction, u, of the geometry surfaces. The grading of element edge lengths is
governed by PROGRESSION.

RATIO2 [1.0]
Ratio of lengths of the last to the first element edges along the edges corresponding to the
second parametric direction, v, of the geometry surfaces. The grading of element edge
lengths is governed by PROGRESSION.

PROGRESSION [GEOMETRIC]
When element edges are to be graded, the distribution of element edge lengths can be
selected from:

ARITHMETIC The difference in length of each element edge from its adjacent
edges is constant.

GEOMETRIC The ratio of lengths of adjacent element edges is constant.

APPROXIMATE The distribution of edge lengths is made such that RATIO is only
approximately satisfied.

Note: PROGRESSION = APPROXIMATE is only provided for compatibility with earlier

versions of ADINA-IN. It is recommended that ARITHMETIC or GEOMETRIC
normally be used.

8-80 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SUBDIVIDE SURFACE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

CBIAS1 [NO]
Indicates if central bias is used along the parametric u direction. {NO/YES}

CBIAS2 [NO]
Indicates if central bias is used along the parametric v direction. {NO/YES}

surfacei
Label number of a geometry surface.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SUBDIVIDE SURFACE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-81

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SUBDIVIDE VOLUME

SUBDIVIDE VOLUME NAME MODE SIZE NDIV1 NDIV2 NDIV3 RATIO1

RATIO2 RATIO3 PROGRESSION CBIAS1 CBIAS2
CBIAS3

volumei

Assigns mesh subdivision data to a set of geometry volumes. The data can be in the form of
a specified element size, or the number of divisions along the edges of the geometry volume.
The subdivision data is actually assigned to the geometry lines which comprise the edges of
the geometry volumes.

NDIV1, RATIO1
P2 P1

NDIV2,
RATIO2
NDIV3,
v RATIO3
P4
P3 u
P5
P6

P7 P8

NAME
Label number of a geometry volume. Other volumes to have the same subdivision data may
be given on accompanying data-lines.

MODE [DIVISIONS]
Selects the method of mesh subdivision data specification. This controls the actual param-
eters used, other parameters are ignored.

LENGTH An element size is input corresponding to the length of an

element edge. Each edge of the geometry volumes is subdivided
separately so as to give element edges which are approximately of
length SIZE (SIZE).

8-82 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SUBDIVIDE VOLUME Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

DIVISIONS Each parametric direction of the geometry volumes is assigned a

number of subdivisions, which can be graded in size according to
the selected progression rule (NDIV1, NDIV2, NDIV3,
RATIO1, RATIO2, RATIO3, PROGRESSION).

POINTWISE Each edge of the geometry volumes is assigned a number of

subdivisions, which is calculated, along with any necessary
grading, from the element size specified at the end points of the
edge. See SUBDIVIDE POINT, POINT-SIZE (SIZE,
PROGRESSION).

SIZE [0.0]
If MODE=LENGTH, this parameter specifies the element edge length. Then SIZE=0.0 means
that the element edge length is the length of the edge (i.e. every edge will have 1 subdivsion).
If MODE=POINTWISE, this parameter specifies the maximum element edge length.

NDIV1 [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the first parametric direction, u, of the geometry vol-
umes.

NDIV2 [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the second parametric direction, v, of the geometry
volumes.

NDIV3 [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the third parametric direction, w, of the geometry
volumes.

RATIO1 [1.0]
Ratio of lengths of the last to the first element edges along the edges corresponding to the
first parametric direction, u, of the geometry volumes. The grading of element edge lengths is
governed by PROGRESSION.

RATIO2 [1.0]
Ratio of lengths of the last to the first element edges along the edges corresponding to the
second parametric direction, v, of the geometry volumes. The grading of element edge
lengths is governed by PROGRESSION.

RATIO3 [1.0]
Ratio of lengths of the last to the first element edges along the edges corresponding to the
third parametric direction, w, of the geometry volumes. The grading of element edge lengths
is governed by PROGRESSION.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-83

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SUBDIVIDE VOLUME

PROGRESSION [GEOMETRIC]
When element edges are to be graded the distribution of element edge lengths can be
selected from:

ARITHMETIC The difference in length of each element edge from its

adjacent edges is constant.

GEOMETRIC The ratio of lengths of adjacent element edges is

constant.

APPROXIMATE The distribution of edge lengths is made such that the

ratio of first to last edge lengths (RATIO1, RATIO2, or
RATIO3) is only approximately satisfied.

Note: PROGRESSION = APPROXIMATE is only provided for compatibility with

earlier versions of ADINA-IN. It is recommended that ARITHMETIC or
GEOMETRIC normally be used.

CBIAS1 [NO]
Indicates if central bias is used along the parametric u direction. {NO/YES}

CBIAS2 [NO]
Indicates if central bias is used along the parametric v direction. {NO/YES}

CBIAS3 [NO]
Indicates if central bias is used along the parametric w direction. {NO/YES}

volumei
Label number of a geometry volume.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SUBDIVIDE VOLUME FIRST LAST

8-84 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SUBDIVIDE EDGE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

SUBDIVIDE EDGE NAME BODY MODE SIZE NDIV RATIO

PROGRESSION CBIAS

edgei bodyi

Assigns mesh subdivision data to edges of a solid geometry body. The data can be in the
form of a specified element size, or the number of subdivisions along the edge.

NAME
Label number of a geometry edge of BODY. Other edges (of BODY) to have the same
subdivision data may be given in accompanying data-lines.

BODY [currently active body]

Label number of the solid geometry body.

MODE [LENGTH]
Selects the method of mesh subdivision data specification. This controls the actual param-
eters used, other parameters are ignored.

DIVISIONS The geometry edge is assigned a number of subdivisions, which

can be graded in size according to the selected progression rule
(NDIV, RATIO, PROGRESSION).

LENGTH An element size is input corresponding to the length of an

element edge (SIZE).

POINTWISE The number of subdivisions, and any necessary grading, for the
geometry edges is calculated from the element size specified at
the end points of the geometry edge. See SUBDIVIDE POINT,
POINT-SIZE (SIZE, PROGRESSION).

SIZE [0.0]
If MODE=LENGTH, this parameter specifies the element edge length. Then SIZE=0.0 means
that the element edge length is the length of the edge (i.e. every edge will have 1 subdivsion).
If MODE=POINTWISE, this parameter specifies the maximum element edge length.

NDIV [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to a geometry edges.

RATIO [1.0]
Ratio of lengths of the last to the first element edges along the geometry edges. The grading
of element lengths is governed by PROGRESSION.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-85

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SUBDIVIDE EDGE

PROGRESSION [GEOMETRIC]
When element edges are to be graded along the geometry edges (i.e., when RATIO 1.0),
then the distribution of element edge lengths can be selected from the following.

ARITHMETIC The difference in length of each element edge from its adjacent
edges is constant.

GEOMETRIC The ratio of lengths of adjacent element edges is constant.

CBIAS [NO]
Indicates whether central biasing is used or not. {NO/YES}

edgei
Label number of a geometry edge (of BODY).

bodyi
Label number of the geometry body corresponding to edgei.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SUBDIVIDE EDGE FIRST LAST

8-86 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SUBDIVIDE FACE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

SUBDIVIDE FACE NAME BODY MODE SIZE NDIV PROGRESSION

MAX-SIZE

facei bodyi

Assigns mesh subdivision data to faces of a solid geometry body. The data can be in the
form of a specified element size, or the number of divisions along the edges of the geometry
faces.

NAME
Label number of the geometry face (of BODY). Other faces (of BODY) to have the same
subdivision data may be given on accompanying data lines.

BODY [currently active body]

Label number of the solid geometry body.

MODE [LENGTH]
Selects the method of mesh subdivision data specification. This controls the actual param-
eters used, other parameters are ignored.

DIVISIONS The edges of the geometry faces are assigned a number of

subdivisions (NDIV).

LENGTH An element size is input corresponding to the length of an

element face. Each edge of the geometry face is subdivided
separately so as to give element edges approximately the length
of SIZE (SIZE).

POINTWISE The number of subdivisions, and any necessary grading, for the
edges of geometry faces calculated from the element size specified
at the end points of the geometry edges. See SUBDIVIDE POINT,
POINT-SIZE (SIZE, PROGRESSION).

SIZE [0.0]
If MODE=LENGTH, this parameter specifies the element edge length. Then SIZE=0.0 means
that the element edge length is the length of the edge (i.e. every edge will have 1 subdivsion).
If MODE=POINTWISE, this parameter specifies the maximum element edge length.

NDIV [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the edges of the geometry faces.

PROGRESSION [GEOMETRIC]
When element edges are to be graded, the distribution of element edge lengths can be

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-87

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SUBDIVIDE FACE

selected from the following:

ARITHMETIC The difference in length of each element edge from its adjacent
edges is constant.

GEOMETRIC The ratio of lengths of adjacent element edges is constant.

MAX-SIZE [0.0]
If set to a value greater than 0.0, free-form meshing will be allowed to create elements greater
in size than the max size on the faces boundary. Free-form meshing will however not be
allowed to create elements with a size greater than MAX-SIZE. Relevant only with
MESHING=FREE-FORM and METHOD=DELAUNAY in the GFACE command. { 0.0}

facei
Label number of a geometry face (of BODY).

bodyi
Label number of the geometry body corresponding to facei.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SUBDIVIDE FACE FIRST LAST

8-88 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SUBDIVIDE BODY Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

SUBDIVIDE BODY NAME MODE SIZE NDIV PROGRESSION MAX-SIZE

bodyi

Assigns mesh subdivision data to a set of solid geometry bodies. The data can be in the form
of a specified element size or the number of divisions along the edges of the geometry
bodies. The subdivision data is assigned to the edges of the geometry bodies.

NAME
Label number of a solid geometry body. Other geometry bodies to have the same subdivision
data may be given in accompanying data lines.

MODE [LENGTH]
Selects the method of mesh subdivision data specification. This controls the actual param-
eters used, other parameters are ignored.

DIVISIONS Each edge of the geometry bodies is assigned a number of

subdivisions (NDIV).

LENGTH An element size is input corresponding to the length of an

element edge. Each edge of the geometry bodies is subdivided
separately so as to give element edges which are approximately of
length SIZE (SIZE).

POINTWISE Each edge of the geometry bodies is assigned a number of

subdivisions, which are calculated, along with any necessary
grading, from the element size specified at the end points of the
edge. See SUBDIVIDE POINT, POINT-SIZE (SIZE,
PROGRESSION).

SIZE [0.0]
If MODE=LENGTH, this parameter specifies the element edge length. Then SIZE=0.0 means
that the element edge length is the length of the edge (i.e. every edge will have 1 subdivsion).
If MODE=POINTWISE, this parameter specifies the maximum element edge length.

NDIV [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the edges of the geometry bodies.

PROGRESSION [GEOMETRIC]
When element edges are to be graded the distribution of element edge lengths can be
selected from the following

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-89

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SUBDIVIDE BODY

ARITHMETIC The difference in length of each element edge from its adjacent
edges is constant.

GEOMETRIC The ratio of lengths of adjacent element edges is constant.

MAX-SIZE [0.0]
If set to a value greater than 0.0, free-form meshing will be allowed to create elements greater
in size than the max size on the faces boundary. Free-form meshing will however not be
allowed to create elements with a size greater than MAX-SIZE. Relevant only with
MESHING=FREE-FORM and METHOD=DELAUNAY in the GBODY command. { 0.0}
Note that MAX-SIZE is passed down to the bounding faces.

bodyi
Label number of a solid geometry body.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SUBDIVIDE BODY FIRST LAST

8-90 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
POINT-SIZE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

POINT-SIZE OPTION INPUT SIZE-FUNCTION MAXSIZE

MINSIZE BODY

namei sizei

Specifies the mesh-size (element edge length) for a set of geometry points, either directly, or
by a size-function, or by evaluation from the lengths of the lines/edges which meet at the
points. The set of points can be given by label or by reference to other geometry entities in
the model.

OPTION [DIRECT]
Indicates how the mesh-size is to be evaluated:

DIRECT The mesh-size is input in the data lines.

ATTACHED The lengths of the lines/edges which meet at a point, together

with input minimum, maximum values are used to determine the
mesh-size at that point.

FUNCTION A pre-defined size-function is used to calculate the mesh size at a

point, dependent on its location.

INPUT [POINT]
Indicates how the set of points is defined:

MODEL All geometry points.

POINT The geometry points will be explicitly identified by label number.

LINE The end-points of a set of geometry lines.

SURFACE The vertices of a set of geometry surfaces.

VOLUME The vertices of a set of geometry volumes.

EDGE The end-points of a set of solid geometry edges.

FACE The vertices of a set of solid geometry faces.

BODY The vertices of a set of solid geometry bodies.

SIZE-FUNCTION [1]
Label number of a size-function, input when OPTION = FUNCTION. See command
SIZE-FUNCTION.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-91

Chap. 8 Finite element representation POINT-SIZE

MAXSIZE [0.0]
The maximum mesh-size for the input points. This is used in two cases:

OPTION = DIRECT, INPUT = MODEL The mesh-size at every geometry point

in the model will be set to MAXSIZE.

OPTION = ATTACHED The mesh-size computed from the

attached lines/edges will be subject to a
maximum value of MAXSIZE.

MINSIZE [0.0]
The minimum mesh-size for the input points, used to provide a lower bound on the computed
mesh-size when OPTION = ATTACHED.

BODY [currently active body]

Label number of a solid geometry body. Used when INPUT = EDGE or FACE.

namei
Entity label number.

sizei
Mesh-size, (element edge length) for entity namei. (Used when OPTION = DIRECT).

Note: If there is any ambiguity in the input, e.g. INPUT = LINE, OPTION = DIRECT
with two different mesh-sizes assigned to two lines which meet at a point, the
mesh size at the point is taken from the entity (line) with the higher label number.

8-92 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SIZE-FUNCTION BOUNDS Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

SIZE-FUNCTION BOUNDS NAME XMIN YMIN ZMIN XMAX

YMAX ZMAX SIZE1 SIZE2 SIZE3
SIZE4 SIZE5 SIZE6 SIZE7 SIZE8

SIZE-FUNCTION BOUNDS defines a mesh-size function in terms of a bounding box with

faces parallel to the global coordinate planes and the mesh-sizes at the vertices of the box.
The mesh-size at any other point is interpolated from this bounding box.

A size-function may be used to set point mesh-sizes, via POINT-SIZE, and may also be used
directly by the free-form mesh generation commands GFACE, GBODY to control the gener-
ated element sizes.

In 8.3 and earlier versions, the size of a point outside the bounding box is given by the size of
the points closest location on the bounding box (that size is interpolated from the sizes at the
8 corners).

In version 8.4, inside the bounding box, the size is interpolated from the sizes at the 8 corners
(same as version 8.3 and earlier). Outside the bounding box, the size follows a geometric
progression (see SIZE-FUNCTION POINT for geometric progression definition) with a fixed
factor of 1.4.

NAME [(current highest size-function label number) + 1]

Label number of the size-function to be defined.

XMIN, YMIN, ZMIN [current minimum coordinates of model]

Minimum coordinates of the bounding box.

XMAX, YMAX, ZMAX [current maximum coordinates of model]

Maximum coordinates of the bounding box.

SIZE1
Mesh-size (element edge length) at (XMAX,YMAX,ZMAX).

SIZE2
Mesh-size (element edge length) at (XMIN,YMAX,ZMAX).

SIZE3
Mesh-size (element edge length) at (XMIN,YMIN,ZMAX).

SIZE4
Mesh-size (element edge length) at (XMAX,YMIN,ZMAX).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-93

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SIZE-FUNCTION BOUNDS

SIZE5
Mesh-size (element edge length) at (XMAX,YMAX,ZMIN).

SIZE6
Mesh-size (element edge length) at (XMIN,YMAX,ZMIN).

SIZE7
Mesh-size (element edge length) at (XMIN,YMIN,ZMIN).

SIZE8
Mesh-size (element edge length) at (XMAX,YMIN,ZMIN).

Auxiliary commands

LIST SIZE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

DELETE SIZE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

8-94 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SIZE-FUNCTION HEX Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

SIZE-FUNCTION HEX NAME X1 Y1 Z1 X2 Y2 Z2 X3 Y3 Z3 X4 Y4

Z4 X5 Y5 Z5 X6 Y6 Z6 X7 Y7 Z7 X8 Y8 Z8
SIZE1 SIZE2 SIZE3 SIZE4 SIZE5 SIZE6 SIZE7
SIZE8

SIZE-FUNCTION HEX defines a mesh-size function in terms of a bounding hexahedral

volume, specified by its vertex coordinates, and the mesh size at those vertices. The mesh-
size at any other point is interpolated from this bounding box.

A size-function may be used to set point mesh-sizes, via POINT-SIZE, and may also be used
directly by the free-form mesh generation commands GFACE, GBODY to control the gener-
ated element sizes.

In 8.3 and earlier versions, the size of a point outside the bounding hexahedral volume is
given by the size of the points closest location on the bounding hexahedral volume (that size
is interpolated from the sizes at the 8 corners).

In version 8.4, inside the bounding hexahedral volume, the size is interpolated from the sizes
at the 8 corners (same as version 8.3 and earlier). Outside the bounding hexahedral volume,
the size follows a geometric progression (see SIZE-FUNCTION POINT for geometric progres-
sion definition) with a fixed factor of 1.4.

NAME [(current highest size-function label number) + 1]

Label number of the size-function to be defined.

X1, Y1, Z1
Global Cartesian coordinates of vertex 1 of the bounding hexahedral volume.

...

X8, Y8, Z8
Global Cartesian coordinates of vertex 8 of the bounding hexahedral volume.

SIZE1
Mesh-size (element edge length) at vertex 1.

SIZE2
Mesh-size (element edge length) at vertex 2.

SIZE3
Mesh-size (element edge length) at vertex 3.

SIZE4

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-95

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SIZE-FUNCTION HEX

Mesh-size (element edge length) at vertex 4.

SIZE5
Mesh-size (element edge length) at vertex 5.

SIZE6
Mesh-size (element edge length) at vertex 6.

SIZE7
Mesh-size (element edge length) at vertex 7.

SIZE8
Mesh-size (element edge length) at vertex 8.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SIZE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

DELETE SIZE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

8-96 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SIZE-FUNCTION POINT Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

SIZE-FUNCTION POINT NAME MODE POINT X Y Z SIZE DISTANCE

SCALE TYPE A1 A2 A3 PROGRESS

Defines a mesh-size function of source type where the element size is dependent on the
distance from a given location.

The size-function may be used to set point mesh-sizes, via command POINT-SIZE, and also
may be used directly by the free-form mesh generation commands GFACE, GBODY to control
element sizes during the meshing process.

NAME [(current highest size-function label) + 1]

The identifying label number of the size-function.

MODE
Indicates how the source location is defined:

POINT The source location is given by a geometry point.

POSITION The source location is given by a position vector (X,Y,Z).

POINT
Label number of a geometry point.

X [0.0]
Y [0.0]
Z [0.0]
Global Cartesian system components of the position vector giving the source location.

SIZE
Constant (minimum) element size. The size function will yield this value within the distance
given by parameter DISTANCE from the specified location. Further away, the element size
gradually increases as determined by this command. {> 0.0}

DISTANCE
Distance from location for which the size function is constant, giving element size SIZE.
{> SIZE}

SCALE [1.0]
Scaling factor for the distance from the source location.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-97

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SIZE-FUNCTION POINT

TYPE [LINEAR]
Indicates the type of growth function for the element size away from the source location. Let
d=distance from source location, R = MAX[ 0.0, ((d-DISTANCE)/SCALE)], = element size, then
the following function types are available:

LINEAR = SIZE [1.0 + A1 R ]

QUADRATIC [
= SIZE 1.0 + A1 R + A2 R 2]
CUBIC = SIZE [1.0 + A1 R + A2 R + A3 R ]
2 3

POWER = SIZE [1.0 + R ] A1

EXPONENTIAL [
= SIZE e ( A1 R ) ]
A1 [0.0]
A2 [0.0]
A3 [0.0]
Function coefficients. { 0.0 for TYPE = LINEAR, QUADRATIC, CUBIC}

PROGRESS [NONE]
This option controls the progression of the meshing from the defined point. {NONE/
ARITHMETIC/GEOMETRIC}

NONE TYPE, A1, A2, A3 are used according to the existing description (8.3 and
earlier versions).

ARITHMETIC Only A1 is used. Sizing follows an arithmetic progression, in other words,

past the sphere of radius DISTANCE, sizes increase (as the distance to
the sphere increases) by a constant value given by A1. Start with
size=SIZE, then next size is the previous size+A1.

GEOMETRIC Only A1 is used. Sizing follows a geometric progression, in other words,

past the sphere of radius DISTANCE, sizes increase (as the distance to
the sphere increases) by a constant factor given by A1. Start with
size=SIZE, then next size is the previous size*A1.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SIZE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

DELETE SIZE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

8-98 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SIZE-FUNCTION AXIS Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

SIZE-FUNCTION AXIS NAME MODE SYSTEM AXIS LINE P1 P2 X0

Y0 Z0 XA YA ZA SIZE DISTANCE SCALE
TYPE A1 A2 A3 PROGRESS

Defines a mesh-size function of source type where the element size is dependent on the
distance from a given axis (an unbounded straight line).

The size-function may be used to set point mesh-sizes, via command POINT-SIZE, and also
may be used directly by the free-form mesh generation commands GFACE, GBODY to control
element sizes during the meshing process.

NAME [(current highest size-function label) + 1]

The identifying label number of the size-function.

MODE
Selects the method of defining the axis. This controls which parameters actually define the
axis - other parameters are ignored.

AXIS - The axis is taken as a coordinate axis of a given coordinate system.

LINE - The axis is taken as the straight line passing through the end
points of a given geometry line (which is not necessarily straight,
but must be open - i.e. have non-coincident end points).
POINTS - The axis is taken as the straight line between two given (non-
coincident) geometry points.
VECTORS - The axis is defined by a position and a direction vector.

SYSTEM [current active coordinate system]

Label number of a coordinate system. One of the axes of this coordinate system may be used
to define the axis, via parameter AXIS, when MODE=AXIS.

AXIS [XL]
Selects which of the basic axes (XL,YL,ZL) of the local coordinate system, given by param-
eter SYSTEM, is used to define the axis. {XL/YL/ZL}

LINE
Label number of a geometry line defining the axis.

P1, P2
Label numbers of geometry points used to define the axis.

X0 [0.0]
Y0 [0.0]
Z0 [0.0]
Global coordinates of the position vector defining the axis when MODE=VECTORS.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-99

Chap. 8 Finite element representation

XA [1.0]
YA [0.0]
ZA [0.0]
Components (with respect to the global coordinate system) of the axis direction when
MODE=VECTORS.

SIZE
Constant (minimum) element size. The size function will yield this value within the distance
given by parameter DISTANCE from the specified axis. Further away, the element size
gradually increases as determined by this command. {> 0.0}

DISTANCE
Distance from the axis for which the size function is constant, giving element size SIZE.
{> SIZE}

SCALE [1.0]
Scaling factor for the distance from the source axis.

TYPE [LINEAR]
Indicates the type of growth function for the element size away from the source axis. Let
d=distance from axis, R = MAX[ 0.0, ((d-DISTANCE)/SCALE)], = element size, then the
following function types are available:

A1 [0.0]
A2 [0.0]
A3 [0.0]
Function coefficients. { 0.0 for TYPE = LINEAR, QUADRATIC, CUBIC}

LINEAR = SIZE [1.0 + A1 R ]

QUADRATIC [
= SIZE 1.0 + A1 R + A 2 R 2]
CUBIC = SIZE [1.0 + A1 R + A 2 R + A3 R ]
2 3

POWER = SIZE [1.0 + R ] A1

EXPONENTIAL [
= SIZE e ( A1 R ) ]
PROGRESS [NONE]
This option controls the progression of the meshing from the defined point. {NONE/
ARITHMETIC/GEOMETRIC}

NONE TYPE, A1, A2, A3 are used according to the existing description (8.3 and
earlier versions).

8-100 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SIZE-FUNCTION AXIS Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

ARITHMETIC Only A1 is used. Sizing follows an arithmetic progression, in other words,

past the cylinder of radius DISTANCE, sizes increase (as the distance to
the cylinder increases) by a constant value given by A1. Start with
size=SIZE, then next size is the previous size+A1.

GEOMETRIC Only A1 is used. Sizing follows a geometric progression, in other words,

past the cylinder of radius DISTANCE (where size is given by SIZE),
sizes increase (as the distance to the cylinder increases) by a constant
factor given by A1. Start with size=SIZE, then next size is the previous
size*A1.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SIZE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

DELETE SIZE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-101

Chap. 8 Finite element representation

This page intentionally left blank.

8-102 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SIZE-FUNCTION PLANE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

SIZE-FUNCTION PLANE NAME MODE X Y Z NX NY NZ P1 P2

P3 SYSTEM COORDINATE SIZE
DISTANCE SCALE TYPE A1 A2 A3 PROGRESS

Defines a mesh-size function of source type where the element size is dependent on the
distance from a given plane.

The size-function may be used to set point mesh-sizes, via command POINT-SIZE, and also
may be used directly by the free-form mesh generation commands GFACE, GBODY to control
element sizes during the meshing process.

NAME [(current highest size-function label) + 1]

The identifying label number of the size-function.

MODE
This controls the origin and direction of the size-function source plane as follows:

POSITION-NORMAL The origin is given by a position vector (X,Y,Z), and the

plane normal by a direction vector (NX,NY,NZ).

POINT-NORMAL The origin is given by a geometry point P1, and the plane
normal by a direction vector (NX,NY,NZ).

THREE-POINT The origin is given by a geometry point P1, and the plane
normal is determined from two other points, P2, P3, lying
in the plane. The points cannot be collinear.

XPLANE The size-function source plane passes through the

YPLANE specified coordinate value (COORDINATE) for a given
ZPLANE coordinate system (SYSTEM).

X [0.0]
Y [0.0]
Z [0.0]
The position vector of a point lying in the source plane. Used when MODE=POSITION-
NORMAL.

NX [1.0]
NY [0.0]
NZ [0.0]
The direction vector of the normal to the source plane. Used when MODE=POSITION-
NORMAL or POINT-NORMAL.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-103

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SIZE-FUNCTION PLANE

P1
P2
P3
Label numbers of three non-collinear geometry points lying in the source plane. P1 is used
when MODE=POINT-NORMAL or THREE-POINT, and P2, P3 are only used when
MODE=THREE-POINT.

SYSTEM [current active coordinate system]

Label number of a coordinate system. The source plane passes through the base Cartesian
coordinate value as determined by parameters MODE and COORDINATE. Used when
MODE=XPLANE, YPLANE, or ZPLANE.

COORDINATE [0.0]
The position of the size-function sourc plane along the specified coordinate direction of
coordinate system SYSTEM. Used when MODE=XPLANE, YPLANE, or ZPLANE.

SIZE
Constant (minimum) element size. The size function will yield this value within the distance
given by parameter DISTANCE from the specified plane. Further away, the element size
gradually increases as determined by this function. {> 0.0}

DISTANCE
Distance from the plane for which the size function is constant, giving element size SIZE.
{> SIZE}

SCALE [1.0]
Scaling factor for the distance from the source plane.

TYPE [LINEAR]
Indicates the type of growth function for the element size away from the source plane. Let
d=distance from plane, R = MAX[ 0.0, ((d-DISTANCE)/SCALE)], = element size, then the
following function types are available:

LINEAR = SIZE [1.0 + A1 R ]

QUADRATIC [
= SIZE 1.0 + A1 R + A 2 R 2]
CUBIC = SIZE [1.0 + A1 R + A 2 R + A3 R ]
2 3

POWER = SIZE [1.0 + R ] A1

EXPONENTIAL [
= SIZE e ( A1 R ) ]

8-104 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SIZE-FUNCTION PLANE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

A1 [0.0]
A2 [0.0]
A3 [0.0]
Function coefficients. { 0.0 for TYPE = LINEAR, QUADRATIC, CUBIC}

PROGRESS [NONE]
This option controls the progression of the meshing from the defined point. {NONE/
ARITHMETIC/GEOMETRIC}

NONE TYPE, A1, A2, A3 are used according to the existing description (8.3 and
earlier versions).

ARITHMETIC Only A1 is used. Sizing follows an arithmetic progression, in other words,

sizes increase (as the DISTANCE to the plane increases) by a constant
value given by A1. Start with size=SIZE, then next size is the previous
size+1.0*A1, etc.

GEOMETRIC Only A1 is used. Sizing follows a geometric progression, in other words,

sizes increase (as the DISTANCE to the plane increases) by a constant
value given by A1. Start with size=SIZE, then next size is the previous
size*A1, etc.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SIZE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

DELETE SIZE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-105

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SIZE-FUNCTION COMBINED

SIZE-FUNCTION COMBINED NAME

szfunci

Defines a mesh-size function as a combination of other size-functions. The element size at

any given location is taken as the minimum of all the size-functions which contribute to this
combination.

The size-function may be used to set point mesh-sizes, via command POINT-SIZE, and also
may be used directly by the free-form mesh generation commands GFACE, GBODY to control
element sizes during the meshing process.

NAME [(current highest size-function label) + 1]

The identifying label number of the size-function.

szfunci
Label number of an existing size-function. This function cannot be the same as NAME, or of
type COMBINED - i.e. recursive combinations are not allowed.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SIZE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

DELETE SIZE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST

8-106 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SIZE-LOCATIONS Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

SIZE-LOCATIONS BODY FACE

loci xi yi zi sizei

Specifies the mesh-size (element edge length) at coordinate locations (i.e. independent of
any geometry point positions). These size-locations may be utilized by the free-meshing
commands GFACE, GBODY to locally set element sizes within the bounds of a solid geometry
face or body.

The points along with the sizes are inserted into a size octree which will be used for mesh
density purposes in GFACE and GBODY.

BODY [currently active body]

Label number of a solid geometry body to which the size-locations are to be associated.

FACE [0]
Label number of a the solid geometry face (of BODY) to which the size-locations are to be
associated. If FACE = 0, the size-locations are to be associated with the solid geometry body
interior and not with any particular one of its faces. Conversely, if FACE > 0, then the size-
locations are only associated with that face alone, and not with the interior of the body or
any other of its faces.

loci
Location identifier.

xi, yi, zi
Global Cartesian coordinates of the size-location loci.

sizei
Mesh-size, element edge length at (xi, yi, zi).

Auxiliary commands

LIST SIZE-LOCATIONS BODY FACE

DELETE SIZE-LOCATIONS BODY FACE

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-107

Chap. 8 Finite element representation NLTABLE

NLTABLE NAME BODY

gtypei ent1i ent2i nlayeri

Creates a table which specifies the minimum number of layers across thin setions in a body or
on a face. Each thin section is specified by 2 opposing faces or edges.
Tables can be used by commands GBODY and GFACE.

NAME
Label number of a table - NLTABLE.

BODY
Geometry body label.

gtypei
Specifies the entity type for entries ent1i and ent2i.

EDGE ent1i and ent2i are edges on face.

FACE ent1i and ent2i are faces.

ent1i
First face or edge label.

ent2i
Second face or edge label.

nlayeri
Minimum number of elements across the 2 faces or edges.

Note: This command allows the user to control where the thin sections should be
considered at the face/face level and also at the edge/edge level for a given face.

8-108 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GPOINT Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

GPOINT NAME NODE NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE SUBSTRUCTURE

pointi

Creates a node at a geometry point.

NAME
The label number of a geometry point at which a node is to be created.

NODE [(highest node label number) + 1]

The label number of node to be created.

NCOINCIDE [NO]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking.

ALL The global coordinates of the generated node is compared against those of
existing nodes of the substructure. If there is coincidence to within

NCTOLERANCE (max. difference in global coordinates between all

current nodes of the substructure)

then no new node is created at that location.

NO No nodal coincidence checking is carried out.

NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure label number]

Label number of the substructure in which the node is created.

pointi
Label number of geometry point.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-109

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GLINE

GLINE NAME NODES AUXPOINT NCOINCIDE NCENDS

NCTOLERANCE SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP NCDOMAIN
MIDNODES XO YO ZO XYZOSYSTEM

linei

Generates elements along a set of geometry lines. Elements can be created within element
groups of type: TRUSS, BEAM, ISOBEAM, PIPE, GENERAL, or FLUID2 (interface).

The number of elements, and the distribution of their lengths, is governed by the subdivision
data assigned to the geometry lines, e.g., via SUBDIVIDE LINE.

Note that either a single line or multiple lines may be specified for generation of elements,
using the same control parameters.

AUXPOINT

NODES = 2

NODES = 3

NODES = 4

NAME
The label number of a geometry line along which elements are to be generated.

NODES [2]
The number of nodes per element.

2, 3, 4 for TRUSS, ISOBEAM and GENERAL elements.

2 for BEAM elements.
2, 4 for PIPE elements.
2, 3 for FLUID2 (interface) elements.

8-110 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GLINE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

AUXPOINT
The label number of the auxiliary geometry point used to orient BEAM, ISOBEAM, and PIPE
elements. A node is generated at this point, unless one already exists at that location, which
becomes the auxiliary node for each element generated on the geometry line.

NCOINCIDE [ALL]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking.

Coincidence checking is used to determine whether to place a new node at a geometric

location when there is already at least one node close to that geometric location.

A node at (XB,YB,ZB) is close to a geometric location (XA,YA,ZA) if

|XB-XA| COINCIDENCE * XLEN
|YB-YA| COINCIDENCE * YLEN
|ZB-ZA| COINCIDENCE * ZLEN

where NCTOLERANCE is a parameter of this command and (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are decided
by the following:

If NCTOL-TYPE = RELATIVE-LOCAL in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, (XLEN,

YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the volume before generation.

If NCTOL-TYPE = RELATIVE-GLOBAL in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, (XLEN,

YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the model before generation.

If NCTOL-TYPE = ABSOLUTE in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC or no bounding box

in the model, (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are taken as (1.0, 1,0, 1.0).

ALL The global coordinates of all generated nodes are compared against
those of existing nodes of the substructure.

ENDS Coincidence checking is carried out only for the nodes generated at
the end points of the geometry lines. The end point(s) participating
in this checking process may be selected via NCENDS.

LINE Coincidence checking is carried out for all generated nodes, but
comparison is made only against those nodes already generated on
the line under consideration.

SELECTED Coincidence checking is carried out at the end points of the

geometry lines, but comparison is made only against the nodes
generated for the input set of lines for the current command
execution and those already generated for the geometry domain
indicated by NCDOMAIN.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-111

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GLINE

NO No nodal coincidence checking is carried out.

NCENDS [12]
Selects which end points of the geometry lines participate in nodal coincidence checking.
NCENDS is an integer of up to two distinct digits, either 1 or 2, indicating which end points
of the geometry line are subject to nodal coincidence checking. NCENDS is only used when
NCOINCIDE = ENDS.

NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure label number]

Label number of the substructure in which the elements and nodes are generated.

GROUP [current element group]

The label number of the element group into which the elements are generated. The group
type must be one of those listed above.

NCDOMAIN [0]
Label number of a geometry domain for which nodal coincidence is checked. See DOMAIN.
Used only when NCOINCIDE = SELECTED. NCDOMAIN = 0 indicates that no domain is to
be used.

MIDNODES [CURVED]
Indicates whether the mid-side nodes for higher order elements are to be placed on the
straight line between the relevant vertex nodes, or on the underlying curved geometry.
{CURVED/STRAIGHT}

XO [0.0]
YO [0.0]
ZO [0.0]
X-, Y- and Z-components of orientation vector for beam element.

XYZOSYSTEM [SKEW]
Speficies the coordinate system for the orientation vector. {SKEW/GLOBAL}

linei
Label number of a geometry line.

Note: Elements are generated in order, in the direction from the starting point P1 to the
ending point P2 of the geometry line.

8-112 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GSURFACE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

GSURFACE NAME NODES PATTERN NCOINCIDE NCEDGE

NCVERTEX NCTOLERANCE SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP
PREFSHAPE MESHING SMOOTHING DEGENERATE
CRACK-TYPE TIP-POINT TIP-OPTION RADIUS
Q-POINT CPOINT1 CPOINT2 COLLAPSED NCDOMAIN
MIDNODES METHOD FLIP

surfacei

Generates elements on a set of geometry surfaces. Elements can be created within element
groups of type: TWODSOLID, PLATE, SHELL, GENERAL, FLUID2, or FLUID3 (interface).

The distribution of elements, including their size, is governed by the subdivision data assigned
to the edges of the geometry surfaces, e.g., via SUBDIVIDE SURFACE.

Note that either a single surface or multiple surfaces may be specified for generation of ele-
ments, with the same control parameters.

Quadrilateral surface

Regular subdivision Irregular subdivision

Triangular surface

DEGENERATE = YES DEGENERATE = NO

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-113

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GSURFACE

NAME
The label number of a geometry surface on which elements are to be generated.

NODES
The number of nodes per element. {3/4/6/7/8/9/16}

PATTERN [AUTOMATIC]
Selects the type of pattern used to further subdivide quadrilateral surface cell subdivisions.
Allowable values for PATTERN are integer numbers 0 through 11, or the string value
AUTOMATIC. PATTERN=1 to 9 is allowed for triangular elements (NODES=3, 6, 7) and
PATTERN=10, 11 is allowed only for NODES=4. See Figure.

PATTERN OPTIONS:

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

10 11

8-114 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GSURFACE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

NCOINCIDE [ALL]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking.

Coincidence checking is used to determine whether to place a new node at a geometric

location when there is already at least one node close to that geometric location.

A node at (XB,YB,ZB) is close to a geometric location (XA,YA,ZA) if

|XB - XA| NCTOLERANCE*XLEN
|YB - YA| NCTOLERANCE*YLEN
|ZB - ZA| NCTOLERANCE*ZLEN

where where NCTOLERANCE is a parameter of this command and (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are
decided by the following:

If NCTOL-TYPE = RELATIVE-LOCAL in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, (XLEN,

YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the body before generation.

If NCTOL-TYPE = RELATIVE-GLOBAL in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, (XLEN,

YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the model before generation.

If NCTOL-TYPE = ABSOLUTE in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC or no bounding box

in the model, (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are taken as (1.0, 1,0, 1.0).

If there are no nodes close to that geometric location, a new node is placed at that geometric
location.

Otherwise, parameter NCOINCIDE governs whether a new node is placed at that geometric
location, or whether a close node is used instead, as shown in the following table:

NCOINCIDE Which nodes to Which nodes to

consider for coincidence check against
ALL all all

BOUNDARIES those on all vertices all

and edges of the face

SELECTED those on all vertices those within the

and edges of the face geometry domain
specified by parameter
NCDOMAIN

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-115

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GSURFACE

GROUP those on all vertices those that are in

and edges of the face the same element
or faces meshed by the group
current command

NO none none

NCEDGE [1234]
Selects which edges of the geometry surfaces participate in nodal coincidence checking.
NCEDGE is an integer of up to four distinct digits in the range 1 through 4. NCEDGE is only
used when NCOINCIDE = BOUNDARIES.

NCVERTEX [1234]
Selects which vertices of the geometry surfaces participate in nodal coincidence checking.
NCVERTEX is an integer of up to four distinct digits in the range 1 through 4. NCVERTEX is
only used when NCOINCIDE = BOUNDARIES.

NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure label number]

Label number of the substructure in which the elements and nodes are generated.

GROUP [current element group]

The label number of the element group into which the generated elements are generated.

PREFSHAPE [AUTOMATIC]
This specifies the preferred shape of the cells created when the surface subdivision is
irregular.

If MESHING=MAPPED,
AUTOMATIC - The command selects the appropriate cell shape depending on
the surface geometry and element (group) type.
QUADRILATERAL - A quadrilateral cell shape is preferred.
TRIANGULAR - A triangular cell shape is preferred.

If MESHING=FREE-FORM,
AUTOMATIC - QUADRILATERAL if METHOD=ADVFRONT,
TRIANGULAR if METHOD=DELAUNAY.
QUADRILATERAL - A quadrilateral cell shape is preferred.
TRIANGULAR - A triangular cell shape is preferred.
QUAD-DIRECT - Quadrilateral only meshing.

8-116 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GSURFACE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

CRACK-TYPE = LINE

CPOINT1 CPOINT2

CPOINT1 CPOINT2

CRACK-TYPE = POINT

TIP-POINT

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-117

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GSURFACE

TIP-OPTION = SINGULAR TIP-OPTION = CIRCULAR-ARC

S
RADIU
TIP-POINT CPOINT1 CPOINT2
TIP-POINT

TIP-OPTION = LEFT-ARC TIP-OPTION = RIGHT-ARC

RA

US
DI
US

DI
RA
CPOINT2 CPOINT1
CPOINT1 CPOINT2
TIP-POINT TIP-POINT

Q-POINT = QUARTER

midside node

MESHING [MAPPED]
Selects the type of mesh generation to be employed.
MAPPED Rule-based mapping of surface edge subdivisions.

FREE-FORM Free-form mesh generation based on advancing front or Delaunay

scheme.
SMOOTHING [NO]
Indicates whether or not Laplacian smoothing is employed to improve mesh quality.
{YES/NO}

8-118 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GSURFACE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

DEGENERATE [NO]
Indicates whether triangular surfaces (with coincident vertices) are to be treated as degener-
ate quadrilaterals or triangles (with a special consideration for the degenerate edge, see
Figure) for irregular rule-based mapped meshing. {YES/NO}

CRACK-TYPE [NONE]
Selects the type of crack propagation on surfaces, which controls mesh generation. See Figures.

NONE No crack propagation.

LINE Crack propagation along line.

POINT Crack is stationary at a point.

Note: When CRACK-TYPE NONE, GSURFACE will adjust the mesh generated for a
set of input surfaces (i.e., more than one surface is typically required) for use in
fracture mechanics problems, as shown in the Figures.

TIP-POINT [1]
The label number of the crack tip point.

TIP-OPTION [SINGULAR]
Allows the crack tip region to be represented as a single point or a circular arc.

SINGULAR The tip region is a single point.

RIGHT-ARC The tip region is a 90 arc quadrant to the right of the tip.

LEFT-ARC The tip region is a 90 arc quadrant to the left of the tip.

CIRCULAR-ARC The tip region is semi-circular.

RADIUS [0.0]
The radius of the circular arc generated about the crack tip.

Q-POINT [QUARTER]
Controls the placement of mid-side nodes in elements adjacent to the crack-tip.

MID The nodes are generated without any special placement.

QUARTER Mid-side nodes are generated at the point adjacent

to crack tip.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-119

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GSURFACE

CPOINT1 [0]
CPOINT2 [0]
Allows for the specification of the points that are to be generated at key positions. This
provides the ability to subsequently refer to these locations and any lines they belong to.
Note that the point label numbers CPOINT1 and CPOINT2 must not have been defined prior
to this command. See Figures.

COLLAPSED [NO]
Selects whether triangular TWODSOLID, FLUID2 or FLUID-3 (interface) elements are to be
treated as collapsed quadrilateral elements by ADINA. {YES/NO}

NCDOMAIN [0]
Label number of a geometry domain for which nodal coincidence is checked. See DOMAIN.
Used only when NCOINCIDE = SELECTED. NCDOMAIN = 0 indicates that no domain is to
be used.

MIDNODES [CURVED]
Indicates whether the mid-side nodes for higher order elements are to be placed on the
straight line between the relevant vertex nodes, or on the underlying curved geometry.
{CURVED/STRAIGHT}

METHOD [ADVFRONT]
Indicates the type of free-form meshing algorithm to be used.
There are two available methods:
ADVFRONT - Based upon advancing front methodology.
DELAUNAY - Based upon Delaunay insertion methodology.

FLIP [NO]
Reverses the orientation of shell elements on the surface. This parameter is only used when
the element type is SHELL for ADINA or SHELL CONDUCTION for ADINA-T. {NO/YES}

surfacei
Label numbers of geometry surfaces.

8-120 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GVOLUME Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

GVOLUME NAME NODES PATTERN NCOINCIDE NCFACE

NCEDGE NCVERTEX NCTOLERANCE SUBSTRUCTURE
GROUP MESHING PREFSHAPE DEGENERATE
NCDOMAIN MIDNODES METHOD BOUNDARY-METHOD

volumei

Generates elements on a set of geometry volumes. Elements can be created within element
groups of type THREEDSOLID or FLUID3.

The distribution of elements, including their size, is governed by the subdivision data
assigned to the edges of the geometry volumes, e.g., via SUBDIVIDE VOLUME.

NAME
The label number of a geometry volume on which elements are to be generated.

NODES
The number of nodes per element. {4/8/10/11/20/27}

PATTERN [0]
Selects the pattern used to subdivide hexahedral volume into tetrahedral elements (used
when NODES=4) - see Figures. PATTERN=0 indicates that one of the patterns 1
through 4 is to be automatically selected so as to match the patterns already used for
adjacent volumes. If no pattern is suitable, for PATTERN=0, then a warning message is given
and no elements are generated in this case existing pattern usage must be examined
carefully to avoid pattern mismatches which would result in incompatible meshes. When
NODES=10 or 11, the pattern is always set to 5. (This parameter is only used when
MESHING=MAPPED.)

NCOINCIDE [BOUNDARIES]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking. {ALL/BOUNDARIES/SELECTED/
BOUNDEXSEL/GROUP/NO}

Coincidence checking is used to determine whether to place a new node at a geometric

location when there is already at least one node close to that geometric location.

A node at (XB,YB,ZB) is close to a geometric location (XA,YA,ZA) if

|XB - XA| NCTOLERANCE*XLEN
|YB - YA| NCTOLERANCE*YLEN
|ZB - ZA| NCTOLERANCE*ZLEN

where where NCTOLERANCE is a parameter of this command and (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are
decided by the following:

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-121

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GVOLUME

V2 V1 V2 V1

V4 V4
V3 V3

V6 V5 V6 V5

V7 V8 V7 V8
PATTERN = 1 PATTERN = 2

V2 V1 V2 V1

V4 V4
V3 V3

V6 V5 V6 V5

V7 V8 V7 V8
PATTERN = 3 PATTERN = 4

V2 V1

V4
V3

V6 V5
PATTERN = 5

V7 V8

8-122 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GVOLUME Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

If NCTOL-TYPE = RELATIVE-LOCAL in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, (XLEN,

YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the body before generation.

If NCTOL-TYPE = RELATIVE-GLOBAL in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, (XLEN,

YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the model before generation.

If NCTOL-TYPE = ABSOLUTE in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC or no bounding box

in the model, (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are taken as (1.0, 1,0, 1.0).

If there are no nodes close to that geometric location, a new node is placed at that geometric
location.

Otherwise parameter NCOINCIDE governs whether a new node is placed at that geometric
location, or whether a close node is used instead, as shown in the following table:

NCOINCIDE Which nodes to Which nodes to

consider for coincidence check against

ALL all all

BOUNDARIES those on the selected all

vertices, edges and faces of
the volume. Vertices,
edges and faces are selected
by parameters NCVERTEX,
NCEDGE and NCFACE

SELECTED those on all vertices, those within

edges and faces of the the geometry domain
volume or volumes meshed selected by parameter
by the current command NCDOMAIN

BOUNDEXSEL those on all vertices, all

edges and faces of the
volume except surfaces
in the domain specified by
NCDOMAIN

GROUP those on all vertices, those that are in

edges and faces of the the same element
volume or volumes meshed group
by the current command

NO none none
ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-123
Chap. 8 Finite element representation GVOLUME

NCFACE [123456]
Selects which faces of the geometry volumes participate in nodal coincidence checking.
NCFACE is an integer of up to six distinct digits in the range 1 through 6. NCFACE is only
used when NCOINCIDE = BOUNDARIES. Refer to the follwoing figure for numbering (F1,
F2, etc.)

NCEDGE [123456789ABC]
Selects which edges of the geometry volumes participate in nodal coincidence checking.
NCEDGE is an alphanumeric string which can include the digits 1-9 and the characters A, B,
C. NCEDGE is only used when NCOINCIDE = BOUNDARIES. Refer to the follwoing figure
for numbering (E1, E2, etc.)
F2
E6 F2
E6 V2 E1 V1
V2 E1 V1
F3 E2 F3
E4 E2
F1 E5 F1 E4
V3 E3 V4 V3 V4 E5
V6 F5 V5 E3
F5 V5
E7 F4 E8 F4 E8
E9 E7
E10 E12 E9
V7 V8
E11 V6
F6

F2
V2 V2 E1 V1
F3 F3
E2 E1 E2 E4
F1 F1 P4
V3 V1 V3
E3 E3

F2 F4 F5
F4 E5
E6 E7
E4 E5
E8
E6

V4 V4

8-124 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GVOLUME Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

NCVERTEX [12345678]
Selects which vertices of the geometry volumes participate in nodal coincidence checking.
NCVERTEX is an integer of up to eight distinct digits in the range 1 through 8. NCVERTEX is
only used when NCOINCIDE = BOUNDARIES. Refer to the follwoing figure for numbering
(V1, V2, etc.)

NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure label number]

Label number of the substructure in which the elements and nodes are generated.

GROUP [current element group]

The label number of the element group in which the generated elements are created.

MESHING [MAPPED]
Selects the type of mesh generation to be employed.

MAPPED Rule-based mapping based on volume edge subdivisions.

FREE-FORM Free-form mesh generation.

When MESHING = MAPPED, and the volume subdivision is regular, the resulting mesh will
consist entirely of hexahedral (brick) cells. If the subvision is irregular, the resulting mesh will
be a mix of hexahedra and prisms, and the parameter PREFSHAPE (following) can be used. If
the subdivision is neither regular nor irregular, an error message will be given.

Example:
In the case of the rectangular volume shown in the figure accompanying the command
NCVERTEX (see preceding page), if we define Ni as the number of subdivisions on edge Ei
(i = 1, 2, ...12), and set

N2 = N4 = N12 = N10; N1 = N3 = N11 = N9; and N5 = N6 = N7 = N8,

we have the volume set up with regular subdivisions, and the resulting mesh will be all-
hexahedral. If, however, we set

N5 = N6 = N7 = N8; N1 = N9; N2 = N10; N3 = N11; and N4 = N12,

the volume is set up with irregular subdivisions.

PREFSHAPE [AUTOMATIC]

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-125

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GVOLUME

Specifies the preferred shape of the cells created when the volume subdivision is irregular,
whereby the command employs a rule-based scheme for mapped meshing.

AUTOMATIC The appropriate cell shape is determined by the program,

depending on the volume geometry and element group type.

HEXAHEDRAL A brick cell shape is preferred.

PRISMATIC A prism cell shape is preferred.

DEGENERATE [YES]
Indicates whether or not volumes of shape PRISM, TETRA or PYRAMID are to be treated as
degenerate hexahedra with special consideration of the degenerate edges. {YES/NO}

NCDOMAIN [0]
Label number of a geometry domain for which nodal coincidence is checked. See DOMAIN.
Used only when NCOINCIDE = SELECTED or NCOINCIDE = BOUNDEXSEL. NCDOMAIN
= 0 indicates that no domain is to be used.

MIDNODES [CURVED]
Indicates whether the mid-side nodes for higher order elements are to be placed on the
straight line between the relevant vertex nodes, or on the underlying curved geometry.
{CURVED/STRAIGHT}

METHOD [DELAUNAY]
Indicates the type of free-form meshing algorithm to be used. There are two available meth-
ods: advancing front and Delaunay. This parameter is used only when MESHING=FREE-
FORM. {ADVFRONT/DELAUNAY}

BOUNDARY-METHOD [ADVFRONT]
Indicates the type of free-form meshing algorithm to be used for triangular elements on
volumes boundary. There are two available methods: advancing front and Delaunay. This
parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM. {ADVFRONT / DELAUNAY}

volumei
Label number of a geometry volume.

8-126 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GEDGE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

GEDGE NAME NODES AUXPOINT NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE

SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP BODY NCDOMAIN
MIDNODES XO YO ZO XYZOSYSTEM

edgei bodyi

Generates elements along a set of solid geometry edges. Elements can be created within
element groups of types TRUSS, BEAM, ISOBEAM, PIPE, GENERAL or FLUID2- interface.

The number of elements, and the distribution of their lengths, is governed by the subdivision
data assigned to the geometry edges, e.g., via SUBDIVIDE EDGE.

Note that either a single edge or multiple edges may be specified for generation of elements.

NAME
3-node isobeam elements

The label number of a geometry edge along which elements are to be generated.

NODES [2]
The number of nodes per element.

2, 3, 4 for TRUSS, ISOBEAM and GENERAL elements.

2 for BEAM elements.
2, 4 for PIPE elements.
2, 3 for FLUID2 (interface) elements.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-127

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GEDGE

AUXPOINT
The label number of the auxiliary geometry point used to orient BEAM, ISOBEAM, and PIPE
elements. A node is generated at this point, unless one already exists at that location, which
becomes the auxiliary node for each element generated on the geometry edge.

NCOINCIDE [ENDS]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking.

Coincidence checking is used to determine whether to place a new node at a geometric

location when there is already at least one node close to that geometric location.

A node at (XB,YB,ZB) is close to a geometric location (XA,YA,ZA) if

|XB-XA| COINCIDENCE * XLEN
|YB-YA| COINCIDENCE * YLEN
|ZB-ZA| COINCIDENCE * ZLEN

where NCTOLERANCE is a parameter of this command and (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are decided
by the following:

If NCTOL-TYPE = RELATIVE-LOCAL in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, (XLEN,

YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the volume before generation.

If NCTOL-TYPE = RELATIVE-GLOBAL in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, (XLEN,

YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the model before generation.

If NCTOL-TYPE = ABSOLUTE in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC or no bounding box

in the model, (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are taken as (1.0, 1,0, 1.0).

ALL The global coordinates of all generated nodes are compared against
those of existing nodes of the substructure.

ENDS Coincidence checking is carried out only for the nodes generated
at the end points of the geometry edges.

SELECTED Coincidence checking is carried out at the end points of the

geometry edges, but comparison is made only against those nodes
generated for the input set of edges for the current command
execution and those already generated for the geometry domain
indicated by NCDOMAIN.

NO No nodal coincidence checking is carried out.

8-128 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GEDGE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure]

Label number of the substructure in which the elements and nodes are generated.

GROUP [current element group]

The label number of the element group into which the elements are generated. The group
type must be one of those listed above.

BODY [currently active body]

The solid geometry part (body) label number.

NCDOMAIN [0]
Label number of a geometry domain for which nodal coincidence is checked. See DOMAIN.
Used only when NCOINCIDE = SELECTED. NCDOMAIN = 0 indicates that no domain is
to be used.

MIDNODES [CURVED]
Indicates whether the mid-side nodes for higher order elements are to be placed on the
straight line between the relevant vertex nodes, or on the underlying curved geometry.
{CURVED/STRAIGHT}

XO [0.0]
YO [0.0]
ZO [0.0]
X-, Y- and Z-components of orientation vector for beam element.

XYZOSYSTEM [SKEW]
Speficies the coordinate system for the orientation vector. {SKEW/GLOBAL}

edgei
Label number of a geometry edge.

bodyi
Label number of the geometry body corresponding to edgei.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-129

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GFACE

GFACE NAME NODES NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE SUBSTRUCTURE

GROUP PREFSHAPE BODY COLLAPSED SIZE-FUNCTION
NCDOMAIN MIDNODES METHOD NLAYER NLTABLE
GEO-ERROR SAMPLING MIN-SIZE AUTO-GRADING SIMULATE
DENSITY-FACTOR EVEN FLIP REFINE BLTABLE MESHING
PATTERN

facei bodyi

Generates elements on a set of solid geometry faces. Elements can be created within element
groups of type TWODSOLID, PLATE, SHELL, FLUID2, FLUID3-interface or GENERAL.

There are two methods for quadrilateral mesh generation (controlled by PREFSHAPE param-
eter). If PREFSHAPE=QUAD-DIRECT,a proprietary algorithm is used to generate an all-
quad mesh. This methodology requires an even number of subdivisions for each bounding
edge (enforced automatically). If PREFSHAPE=QUADRILATERAL, an advancing front
method is used which may leave some triangles in the mesh.

Two triangular free-form meshing methods (controlled by METHOD parameter) are available:
advancing front and Delaunay.

The distribution of elements, including their size, is governed by the subdivision data
assigned to the edges of geometry faces, e.g. via SUBDIVIDE FACE.

NAME
The label number of a solid geometry face on which elements are to be generated.

NODES
Maximum number of nodes per element. {3/4/6/7/8/9/16}

8-130 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GFACE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

NCOINCIDE [BOUNDARIES]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking. {ALL/BOUNDARIES/BOUNDEXSEL/
GROUP/EXSELECTED/NO/SELECTED}

Coincidence checking is used to determine whether to place a new node at a geometric

location when there is already at least one node close to that geometric location.

A node at (XB,YB,ZB) is close to a geometric location (XA,YA,ZA) if

|XB - XA| NCTOLERANCE*XLEN
|YB - YA| NCTOLERANCE*YLEN
|ZB - ZA| NCTOLERANCE*ZLEN

where where NCTOLERANCE is a parameter of this command and (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are
decided by the following:

If NCTOL-TYPE = RELATIVE-LOCAL in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, (XLEN,

YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the body before generation.

If NCTOL-TYPE = RELATIVE-GLOBAL in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, (XLEN,

YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the model before generation.

If NCTOL-TYPE = ABSOLUTE in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC or no bounding box

in the model, (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are taken as (1.0, 1,0, 1.0).

If there are no nodes close to that geometric location, a new node is placed at that geometric
location.

Otherwise, parameter NCOINCIDE governs whether a new node is placed at that geometric
location, or whether a close node is used insted, as shown
in the following table:

NCOINCIDE Which nodes to Which nodes to

consider for coincidence check against

ALL all all

BOUNDARIES those on all vertices all
and edges of the face
BOUNDEXSEL those on all vertices, all
edges and faces of the
geometry body except
edges in the domain specified
by NCDOMAIN
GROUP those on all vertices those that are in
and edges of the face the same element

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-131

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GFACE

or faces meshed by the group

current command

EXSELECTED those on all vertices, all, except those coming

edges and faces of the
geometry body or bodies
meshed by the current
command
from the entities in the
in the DOMAIN provided.
Similar in concept to
BOUNDEXSEL (the DOMAIN
provided contains entities
bounding the body to be
meshed)

NO none none

SELECTED nodes on boundary nodes coming from the

entities
in domain NCDDOMAIN

NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure]

Label number of the substructure in which the elements and nodes are generated.

GROUP [current element group]

The label number of the element group into which the elements are generated.

PREFSHAPE [QUAD-DIRECT]
Specifies the shape or preferred shape of the elements generated.This parameter is only used
when MESHING=FREE-FORM. {QUADRILATERAL/TRIANGULAR/QUAD-DIRECT}

QUADRILATERAL Both triangular and quadrilateral elements are generated, but

quadrilateral elements are preferred.
TRIANGULAR Only triangular elements are generated.
QUAD-DIRECT Only quadrilateral elements are generated.

BODY [currently active solid body]

The solid geometry body label number.

COLLAPSED [NO]
Selects whether triangular TWODSOLID, FLUID2 or FLUID3-interface elements are to be
treated as collapsed quadrilateral elements by ADINA. {YES/NO}

SIZE-FUNCTION [0]
Label number of the size function to be applied (see SIZE-FUNCTION command). Size

8-132 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GFACE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

functions control the mesh density in a local area.

This parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM, METHOD=DELAUNAY, and
PREFSHAPE=TRIANGULAR or QUADRILATERAL.

NCDOMAIN [0]
Label number of a geometry domain for which nodal coincidence is checked (seeDOMAIN
command). This parameter is only used when NCOINCIDE = SELECTED or NCOINCIDE=
BOUNDEXSEL.

MIDNODES [CURVED]
Indicates whether the mid-side nodes for higher order elements are to be placed on the
straight line between the relevant vertex nodes, or on the underlying curved geometry.
{CURVED/STRAIGHT/PROJECT}

CURVED Midside nodes are placed on the underlying curved geometry.

STRAIGHT Midside nodes are placed on the straight line between the relevant
vertex nodes.

PROJECT Midside nodes are first placed on the straight line and then projected onto
the curved surface. The PROJECT option is preferred over the CURVED
option in general.

METHOD [ADVFRONT]
Specifies free-form meshing algorithm to be applied. There are two methods available:
advancing front and Delaunay. This parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM.
{ADVFRONT/DELAUNAY}

NLAYER [1]
Specifies minimum number of element layers across thin sections. This parameter is only used
when MESHING=FREE-FORM, METHOD=DELAUNAY, and PREFSHAPE=TRIANGULAR or
QUADRILATERAL.

If NLAYER > 1 the distribution of elements, including their size, is also governed by the
presence of thin sections on the face.
NLAYER > 1 and NLTABLE = 0 NLAYER is taken as the minimum number of
elements across anywhere in the body.
NLAYER > 1 and NLTABLE > 0 the minimum number of elements across is taken
from the table NLTABLE (see command
NLTABLE).
When NLAYER = 2, the program will make sure that there are NO interior mesh edges
(segments) with both end vertices located on the boundary.
Notes:
1) Only the first face (if more than one) will be affected by NLTABLE.
2) This option works best if a given bounding edge is NOT close to more than one other

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-133

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GFACE

Geometry
d

Mesh
L

d/L = geometrical discretization error

bounding edges within a small area, e.g., case of a small sphere close to the corner of a
square.
3) The number of requested thin layers will be present in the thin sections but there is no
guarantee near side boundaries.

NLTABLE [0]
Label number of the NLTABLE to be applied (see NLTABLE command). This parameter is only
used when NLAYER>1.

GEO-ERROR [0.0]
Maximum relative geometric discretization error allowed for curvature-based meshing (see
figure below). If GEO-ERROR > 0.0, the distribution of elements, including their size, is also
governed by the curvature of the geometry bodys bounding edges and faces.
This parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM, METHOD=DELAUNAY, and
PREFSHAPE=TRIANGULAR or QUADRILATERAL.

SAMPLING [20]
Number of sampling points along the edge where the relative geometric discretization error in
curvature-based meshing is measured. This parameter is only used when GEO-ERROR>0.0.

MIN-SIZE [0]
Minimum size allowed for curvature-based meshing or for automatic grading This parameter is
only used when GEO-ERROR> 0.0 or when AUTO-GRADING= YES.

AUTO-GRADING [NO]
Specifies whether automatic grading is to be applied. In automatic grading, the distribution of
elements, including their size, is also governed by the requirement for smoothly graded mesh
densities. This parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM, METHOD=
DELAUNAY, and PREFSHAPE=TRIANGULAR or QUADRILATERAL.{NO/YES}

SIMULATE [NO]
This parameter can be used (SIMULATE=YES) to see the effect on the body edge subdivi-
sions of the GFACE command without actually meshing. It is relevant for the following cases:
- MESHING= FREE-FORM, and GEO-ERROR > 0.0 or AUTO-GRADING = YES
- MESHING=FREE-FORM and PREFSHAPE=QUAD-DIRECT (will modify body edge

8-134 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GFACE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

subdivisions so that the body face has an even number of subdivisions; necessary
condition for quadrilateral meshing on the body face)

DENSITY-FACTOR [1.8]
Specifies the mesh subdivision growth rate within the domain (i.e. the mesh graduation). The
higher the growth rate, the faster the element subdivision size grows within the domain, and
the fewer elements that are generated.

The DENSITY-FACTOR can range from 1.0 to 3.0, but the meshing algorithms struggle to
converge when DENSITY-FACTOR<1.2. Therefore, it is recommended to use:

1.2 = DENSITY-FACTOR = 3

The DENSITY-FACTOR is ignored when GEO-ERROR>0.0 (curvature-based meshing) and

when AUTO-GRADING=YES.

EVEN [SUM]
Specifies how the subdivisions should be adjusted to ensure that the all-quad mesher
generates an all-quad mesh on the body face. This parameter is only used when
MESHING=FREE-FORM and PREFSHAPE=QUAD-DIRECT. {SUM/ALL}

SUM For each body face, the program forces the sum of the subdivisions of the bounding
edges to be even.

ALL The program forces all edges to have an even number of subdivisions. If an edge
has an odd number of subdivisions, the number of subdivisions is increased by 1 at
that edge.

FLIP [NO]
Reverses the orientation of shell elements on the surface. This parameter is only used when
the element type is SHELL for ADINA or SHELL CONDUCTION for ADINA-T. {NO/YES}

REFINE [EDGE-MIDDLE]
Specifies how the mesh is subdivided within the domain for non-uniform mesh densities. This
parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM, METHOD=DELAUNAY, and
PREFSHAPE=TRIANGULAR or QUADRILATERAL. {EDGE-MIDDLE/ALONG-EDGE}

EDGE-MIDDLE The interior vertices are created by splitting a mesh edge that is too long
into two mesh edges. This leads to fewer elements being generated and
faster meshing times.
ALONG-EDGE A mesh edge is not split into two but into as many mesh edges as required
by the densities. This leads to a better mesh vertex distribution and
gradation.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-135

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GFACE

Note if SIZE-FUNCTION>0, the AUI automatically forces REFINE=EDGE-MIDDLE. Also,

note if GEO-ERROR>0.0 (curvature-based meshing) or if AUTO-GRADING=YES, then the
REFINE parameter is ignored.

BLTABLE [0]
Label number of the boundary layer table to be applied (see BLTABLE command). This
parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM.
The following should be noted:

1/ Since the elements within the boundary layer are always quadrilateral, the NODES param-
eter must be set to 4, 8, or 9. .

2/The PREFSHAPE parameter is used to specify the shape of elements generated outside the
boundary layer. If PREFSHAPE=QUAD-DIRECT, quadrilateral elements are generated
outside the boundary layer. If PREFSHAPE=TRIANGULAR, triangular elements are generated
outside the boundary layer.

3/ The BLTABLE command is preferred to the BLAYER command.

MESHING [FREE-FORM]
Selects the type of mesh generation to be employed. {MAPPED/FREE-FORM/MIXED}

MAPPED Mapped (rule-based meshing) is employed. Mapped meshing can only be

used when the topology of the face is either triangular (3 edges) or quadri-
lateral (4 edges).

FREE-FORM Free-form meshing is employed. When NODES=3, 6, 7, triangular elements

are generated using either the advancing front or Delaunay schemes (see
METHOD parameter). When NODES=4, 8, 9, 16, quadrilateral, triangular, or
a mixture of quadrilateral and triangular elements are generated using the
advancing front scheme (see PREFSHAPE parameter).
MIXED Mixed meshing is employed. In mixed meshing, if the face is a quadrilateral
(4 edges) and the subdivisions are equal on opposite sides the mapped
meshing is employed, otherwise free-form meshing is employed.

PATTERN [AUTOMATIC]
Selects the type of pattern used to further subdivide quadrilateral surface cell subdivisions.
Allowable values for PATTERN are integer numbers 0 through 11, or the string value
AUTOMATIC. PATTERN=1 to 9 is allowed for triangular elements (NODES=3, 6, 7) and
PATTERN=10, 11 is allowed only for NODES=4. See Figure for GSURFACE PATTERN. This
parameter is used only when MESHING = MAPPED.

8-136 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GFACE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

facei
Label number of a geometry face (of BODY).

bodyi
Label number of the geometry body corresponding to facei.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-137

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GBODY

GBODY NAME NODES NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE SUBSTRUCTURE

GROUP PREFSHAPE SIZE-FUNCTION DELETE-SLIVER
ANGLE-MIN MIDNODES METHOD PATTERN MESHING
DEGENERATE BOUNDARY-METHOD DEG-EDGE GEO-ERROR
SAMPLING MIN-SIZE NLAYER NLTABLE AUTO-GRADING
SIMULATE NCDOMAIN PYRAMIDS DANGMAXB DANGMAXC
DANGMAXD HEXALAYER AUTO-REFINE EVEN DENSITY-
FACTOR MIDFACENODES REFINE GRID BREFINE BLTABLE
PREFSHA2 NOPTI

bodyi deg-edgei

Command GBODY creates elements for a solid geometry body. Elements can be created within
element groups of type THREEDSOLID or FLUID3.

There are two tetrahedral free-form meshing METHODs available: advancing front and
Delaunay. There are two triangular free-form meshing BOUNDARY-METHODs available:
advancing front and Delaunay.

Mapped meshing is available only when the body type is a Parasolid body and the geometry

of the body is either tetrahedron, hexahedron, prism or pyramid.

NAME
The label number of a solid geometry body for which elements are to be generated.

8-138 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GBODY Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

NODES
Maximum number of nodes per element. {4/8/10/11/20/27}

NCOINCIDE [BOUNDARIES]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking. {ALL/BOUNDARIES/BOUNDEXSEL/
GROUP/EXSELECTED/NO/SELECTED}

Coincidence checking is used to determine whether to place a new node at a geometric

location when there is already at least one node close to that geometric location.

A node at (XB,YB,ZB) is close to a geometric location (XA,YA,ZA) if

|XB - XA| NCTOLERANCE*XLEN
|YB - YA| NCTOLERANCE*YLEN
|ZB - ZA| NCTOLERANCE*ZLEN

where where NCTOLERANCE is a parameter of this command and (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are
decided by the following:

If NCTOL-TYPE = RELATIVE-LOCAL in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, (XLEN,

YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the body before generation.

If NCTOL-TYPE = RELATIVE-GLOBAL in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, (XLEN,

YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the model before generation.

If NCTOL-TYPE = ABSOLUTE in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC or no bounding box

in the model, (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are taken as (1.0, 1,0, 1.0).

If there are no nodes close to that geometric location, a new node is placed at that geometric
location. Otherwise parameter NCOINCIDE governs whether a new node is placed at that
geometric location, or whether a close node is used instead, as shown in the following table:

NCOINCIDE Which nodes to Which nodes to

consider for coincidence check against

ALL all all

BOUNDARIES those on all vertices, all

edges and faces of the
geometry body

BOUNDEXSEL those on all vertices, all

edges and faces of the
geometry body except faces

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-139

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GBODY

in the domain specified by

NCDOMAIN

GROUP those on all vertices, those that are in

edges and faces of the the same element
geometry body or bodies group
meshed by the current
command

EXSELECTED those on all vertices, all, except those coming

edges and faces of the
geometry body or bodies
meshed by the current
command
from the entities in the
in the DOMAIN provided.
Similar in concept to
BOUNDEXSEL (the DOMAIN
provided contains entities
bounding the body to be
meshed)

NO none none

SELECTED nodes on boundary nodes coming from the entities

in domain NCDDOMAIN

NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure]

Label number of the substructure in which the elements and nodes are created.

GROUP [current element group]

Label number of the element group into which the elements are generated.

PREFSHAPE [AUTOMATIC]
Specifies the preferred shape of the elements generated. This parameter is only used when
MESHING=MAPPED or when BLTABLE > 0. {AUTOMATIC/HEXAHEDRAL/PRIS-
MATIC}

AUTOMATIC The appropriate element shape is determined by the program,

depending on the body geometry and the element group type.

HEXAHEDRAL A hexahedral (brick) element shape is preferred.

8-140 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GBODY Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

PRISMATIC A prismatic (wedge) element shape is preferred.

SIZE-FUNCTION [0]
Label number of the size function to be applied (see SIZE-FUNCTION command). Size
functions control the mesh density in a local area.

This parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM, NODES=4, 10, 11, and METHOD,
BOUNDARY-METHOD=DELAUNAY. Note if the advanced front method is specified and
SIZE-FUNCTION>0, the AUI automatically forces the Delaunay method to be used.

DELETE-SLIVER [NO]
Controls whether triangular sliver element faces are to be removed from the body boundary
before generating volume elements. Such slivers can arise from small geometry features such
as fillets or rounds with small curvature, or by inappropriate edge subdivision data. The
presence of such slivers can result in poor quality elements and a degradation of the meshing
process. Enabling the prior removal of such slivers may result in a mesh which smoothest
over small geometric features - if these features are important then the local subdivision data
should be refined about them. {YES/NO}

Note: This parameter is ignored if METHOD=DELAUNAY.

ANGLE-MIN [5.0]
Provides an angle-tolerance for detecting boundary slivers. A triangular element face is
considered a sliver if one of its internal angles is less than ANGLE-MIN (in degrees). {0.0
ANGLE-MIN 10.0} (The upper bound precludes unrealistic sliver definitions).

MIDNODES [CURVED]
Specifies where the midside nodes are to be placed for higher-order elements.{STRAIGHT/
CURVED/PROJECT}

STRAIGHT Midside nodes are placed on the straight line between the relevant vertex
nodes.

CURVED Midside nodes are placed on the underlying curved geometry.

PROJECT Midside nodes are first placed on the straight line and then projected onto
the curved surface. The PROJECT option is preferred over the CURVED
option in general.

METHOD [DELAUNAY]
Indicates the type of free-form meshing method to be employed. There are three algorithms
available: advancing front, Delaunay, and hybrid advancing front/Delaunay. The hybrid
mesher combines the quality element generation (near the boundary) of the advancing front

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-141

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GBODY

method and the robustness of Delaunay tmethod This parameter is only used when MESH-
ING = FREE-FORM. {ADVFRONT/DELAUNAY/ADVFDELA}

PATTERN [0]
Selects the pattern used to subdivide the hexahedral body cells into tetrahedral elements
(used when NODES=4, 10 or 11) - see figures - GVOLUME command. PATTERN=0 indicates
that one of the patterns 1 through 5 is to be automatically selected so as to match the
patterns already used for adjacent volumes. If no pattern is suitable, for PATTERN=0, then a
warning message is given and no elements are generated - in this case existing pattern usage
must be examined carefully to avoid pattern mismatches which would result in incompatible
meshes. This parameter is only used when MESHING=MAPPED.

MESHING [FREE-FORM]
Selects the type of mesh generation to be employed. {MAPPED/FREE-FORM}

MAPPED Mapped (rule-based) meshing is employed. Mapped meshing is available

only when the body is a Parasolid body (not an Open Cascade body),
and the topology of the body is similar to a tetrahedron (4 faces), prism
(5 faces), pyramid (5 faces), or a hexahedron (6 faces).

FREE-FORM Free-form meshing is employed. When NODES=4,10,11, tetrahedral

elements are generated using either the advancing front, Delaunay, or
hybrid schemes (see METHOD and BOUNDARY-METHOD parameters).
When NODES=8, 20, 27, a mixture of hexahedral, tetrahedral, and pyramid
(see PYRAMIDS parameter) elements are generated using the advancing
front scheme, with hexahedral elements occupying most of the mesh.

DEGENERATE [YES]
Specifies how bodies with triangular faces are to be handled. This parameter is only used
when MESHING=MAPPED. {NO/YES}

NO The triangular face is not given any special consideration for its
degenerate edge.

YES The volume is treated as a degenerate hexahedral shape.

BOUNDARY-METHOD [ADVFRONT]
Specifies the free-form meshing method employed on the boundary of the body to generate
triangular cells. This parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM and NODES=4,
10, 11, or when PREFSHA2=TRIANGULAR. There are two algorithms available: advancing
front and Delaunay. {ADVFRONT/DELAUNAY}

DEG-EDGE [0]

8-142 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GBODY Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

The degenerate edge of the body. This parameter is only used when the body is a prismatic
(wedge) body, MESHING=MAPPED, and DEGENERATE = YES.

GEO-ERROR [0.0]
Maximum relative geometric discretization error allowed for curvature-based meshing (see
figure below). If GEO-ERROR > 0.0, the distribution of elements, including their size, is also
governed by the curvature of the geometry bodys bounding edges and faces.

This parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM, NODES=4, 10, 11, and
METHOD, BOUNDARY-METHOD=DELAUNAY. Note if the advanced front method is
specified and GEO-ERROR>0.0, the AUI automatically forces the Delaunay method to be
used.

Geometry
d

Mesh
L

d/L = geometrical discretization error

SAMPLING [20]
Specifies number of sampling points where the relative geometric discretization error in
curvature-based meshing is measured. This parameter is only used when GEO-ERROR>0.0.

For edges: number of sampling points = SAMPLING

For faces: number of sampling points = SAMPLING x SAMPLING

MIN-SIZE [0]
Minimum size allowed for curvature-based meshing or for automatic grading. This parameter
is only used when GEO-ERROR> 0.0 or when AUTO-GRADING= YES.

NLAYER [1]
Specifies minimum number of element layers across thin sections. This parameter is only used
when MESHING=FREE-FORM, NODES=4, 10, 11, and METHOD, BOUNDARY-
METHOD=DELAUNAY. Note if the advanced front method is specified and NLAYER>2, the
AUI automatically forces the Delaunay method to be used. If no NLTABLE=0 is specified,
NLAYER is used as the minimum number of elements across anywhere in body. When
NLAYER = 2, the program will make sure that there are NO interior mesh edges (segments)
with both end vertices located on the boundary.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-143

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GBODY

NLTABLE [0]
Label number of the NLTABLE to be applied (see NLTABLE command). This parameter is only
used when NLAYER>1.

AUTO-GRADING [NO]
Specifies whether automatic grading is to be applied. In automatic grading, the distribution of
elements, including their size, is also governed by the requirement for smoothly graded mesh
densities.{NO/YES}

This parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM, NODES=4, 10, 11, and METHOD,
BOUNDARY-METHOD=DELAUNAY. Note if the advanced front method is specified and
AUTO-GRADING=YES, the AUI automatically forces the Delaunay method to be used.

SIMULATE [NO]
This parameter can be used (SIMULATE=YES) to see the effect on the body edge subdivi-
sions of the GBODY command without actually meshing. It is relevant for the following cases:

- MESHING= FREE-FORM, and GEO-ERROR>0.0 or AUTO-GRADING=YES

- MESHING=FREE-FORM and NODES=8,20,27 (brick elements)

NCDOMAIN [0]
Label number of the geometry domain for which nodal coincidence is checked (see DOMAIN
command). This parameter is only used when NCOINCIDE=SELECTED or NCOINCIDE=
BOUNDEXSEL.

PYRAMIDS [NO]
Specifies whether pyramid elements are generated to transition from hexahedral to tetrahedral
elements. This parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM and NODES=8, 20, 27.
{NO/YES/ONLY}

NO Hexahedral elements are directly attached to tetrahedral elements. No transi-

tional pyramid elements are generated (default for ADINA-Structures when
NODES=8, 27).

YES Pyramids are generated to transition from hexahedral to tetrahedral elements

(default for ADINA-Structures when NODES=20 and for ADINA-CFD).

ONLY Pyramids are only generated on bounding faces for every quadrilateral cell.
Tetrahedral elements are generated within the domain, no hexahedral or pris-
matic elements are generated.

The following should be noted:

8-144 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GBODY Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

Pyramid elements are

used to transition from
hexa to tetra mesh

GBODY NODES=8, PYRAMIDS=ONLY, PREFSHA2=TRIANGULAR

1/ Consider the example above where two bodies have a coincident bounding face, and a 8-
node hexahedral mesh has been generated one body (see green elements below). In order to
generate a 4-node tetrahedral mesh in the second body with transitional pyramids at the
bounding coincident face (red elements), we must face link the two bodies and use NODES=
8, PYRAMIDS=ONLY, and PREFSHAP2=TRIANGULAR.

2/ When PYRAMIDS=YES, pyramids may be created not only for boundary quadrilateral
facets but also for interior quadrilateral facets (if those facets connect directly to tetrahedra),
meaning that a possibly large number of pyramids may be created. If the program fails to
create all the pyramids that are needed, an error message will be displayed and the command
will be cancelled. In this case, it is recommended to decrease the maximum dihedral angle
allowed for quad facets (see DANGMAXC parameter), use PYRAMIDS=ONLY or change the
mesh density.

DANGMAXB [80]
Max angular deviation (from 90 degrees) for the angle at corners of hex side faces.

DANGMAXC [80]
Max angular deviation (from 180 degrees) for the dihedral angle at diagonals of hex side faces.
If not all pyramids can be created, DANGMAXC should be reduced.

DANGMAXD [80]
Max angular deviation (from 90 degrees) for the dihedral angle at hex edges.

HEXALAYER [NO]
Specifies whether a hexahedral layer is extruded from the quadrilateral boundary cells. This
parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM and NODES=8, 20, 27. {NO/YES}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-145

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GBODY

Note that the BLTABLE parameter is preferred to the HEXALAYER parameter.

AUTO-REFINE [YES]
Determines whether the mesh generator should automatically lower the mesh densities for
edges and/or faces that are too coarse.{NO/YES}

EVEN [SUM]
Specifies how the subdivisions should be adjusted to ensure that the all-quad mesher
generates an all-quad mesh on the body face. This parameter is only used when
MESHING=FREE-FORM and NODES=8, 20, 27. {SUM/LINK/ALL}

SUM For each body face, the program forces the sum of the subdivisions of the bounding
edges to be even.

LINK The program forces any bounding edge of a linked face (FACELINK) to have an
even number of subdivisions. Note that the program also forces the sum of the
subdivisions of the bounding edges of non-linked faces to be even.

ALL The program forces all edges to have an even number of subdivisions. If an edge
has an odd number of subdivisions, the number of subdivisions is increased by 1 at
that edge.

Note that when NODES=8, 20, 27 and MESHING=FREE-FORM, the all-quad mesher is used
to generate the quadrilateral boundary cells (see GFACE PREFSHAPE=QUAD-DIRECT).

DENSITY-FACTOR [1.8]
Specifies the mesh subdivision growth rate within the domain (i.e. the mesh graduation). The
higher the growth rate, the faster the element subdivision size grows within the domain, and
the fewer elements that are generated.

The DENSITY-FACTOR can range from 1.0 to 3.0, but the meshing algorithms struggle to
converge when DENSITY-FACTOR<1.2. Therefore, it is recommended to use:

1.2 = DENSITY-FACTOR = 3

The DENSITY-FACTOR is ignored when GEO-ERROR>0.0 (curvature-based meshing) and

when AUTO-GRADING=YES.

MIDFACENODES [QUAD]
Determines where the mid-face node on a quadrilateral facet (of an hexahedral or pyramid
element) should be placed. TRIA places the mid-face nodes mid-way on the diagonal of the
two triangles making up the facet. QUAD places the mid-face node at the centroid of the four
facet vertices. {TRIA/QUAD}

8-146 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GBODY Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

When elements with quad facets connect with tetrahedral elements, TRIA should be se-
lected. Otherwise, QUAD should be selected. This only concerns free form meshing (higher
order mixed meshing) and quadrilateral facets on linked body faces.

REFINE [EDGE-MIDDLE]
Specifies how the mesh is subdivided within the domain for non-uniform mesh densities. This
parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM, NODES=4, 10, 11, and METHOD,
BOUNDARY-METHOD=DELAUNAY. {EDGE-MIDDLE/ALONG-EDGE}

EDGE-MIDDLE The interior vertices are created by splitting a mesh edge that is
too long into two mesh edges. This leads to fewer elements being
generated and faster meshing times.

ALONG-EDGE A mesh edge is not split into two but into as many mesh edges as
required by the densities. This leads to a better mesh vertex
distribution and gradation.

Note if SIZE-FUNCTION>0, the AUI automatically forces REFINE=EDGE-MIDDLE. Also,

note if GEO-ERROR>0.0 (curvature-based meshing) or if AUTO-GRADING=YES, then the
REFINE parameter is ignored.

GRID [YES]
If GRID=YES, the program will create a uniform background mesh using a uniform grid with a
cell size equal to the largest mesh density on the bounding faces or the maximum density as
set with SUBDIVIDE BODY, whichever is larger. Using a grid speeds up the meshing process
especially when the mesh densities are uniform but it may in some cases be detrimental to the
element quality. This parameter is active only when MESHING=FREE-FORM,
METHOD=DELAUNAY, and REFINE=EDGE-MIDDLE. {YES/NO}

BREFINE [EDGE-MIDDLE]
Specifies how the mesh is subdivided on the bounding faces for non-uniform mesh densities.
This parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM, NODES=4, 10, 11, and METHOD,
BOUNDARY-METHOD=DELAUNAY. {EDGE-MIDDLE/ALONG-EDGE}

EDGE-MIDDLE The interior vertices are created by splitting a mesh edge that is
too long into two mesh edges. This leads to fewer elements being
generated and faster meshing times.

ALONG-EDGE A mesh edge is not split into two but into as many mesh edges as
required by the densities. This leads to a better mesh vertex
distribution and gradation..

Note if SIZE-FUNCTION>0, the AUI automatically forces BREFINE=EDGE-MIDDLE. Also,

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-147

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GBODY

note if GEO-ERROR>0.0 (curvature-based meshing) or if AUTO-GRADING=YES, then the

BREFINE parameter is ignored.

BLTABLE [0]
Label number of the boundary layer table to be used (see BLTABLE command). This param-
eter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM.
The following should be noted:

1/ Since the boundary layer elements are either hexahedral or prismatic, the NODES parameter
must be set to 8, 20, or 27.

2/ If PREFSHAPE=HEXAHEDRAL, the boundary layer elements are hexahedral, and the

elements generated within the rest of the domain (i.e., outside the boundary layer) are a
mixture of a hexahedral, tetrahedral, and pyramid elements (see PYRAMIDS parameter).

3/ If PREFSHAPE=PRISMATIC, the boundary layer elements are prismatic, and tetrahedral

elements are generated within the rest of the domain (i.e., outside the boundary layer).

4/ The BLTABLE command is preferred to the BLAYER command.

PREFSHA2 [QUADRILATERAL]
Specifies the shape of the bounding cells that are generated on the unmeshed bounding faces
of the body (i.e. the faces that have not been face linked). This parameter is only used when
MESHING=FREE-FORM. {QUADRILATERAL/ TRIANGULAR}

QUADRILATERAL Only quadrilateral cells are generated on the unmeshed bounding

faces.

TRIANGULAR Only triangular cells are generated on the unmeshed bounding faces.

When a body has some of its faces already meshed with a mix of quadrilateral and triangles
(using BLTABLE on face linked bodies for instance), no hexahedral elements can be gener-
ated. In this case, only tetrahedral and pyramid elements can be generated using PYRAMIDS
=ONLY and PREFSHA2=QUADRILATERAL.

NOPTI [1]
This parameter controls how many tetrahedral mesh quality optimizations passes are to be
performed. This parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM. {1}

bodyi
Label numbers of geometry bodies. The data line input allows for more than one body to be
meshed via a single GBODY command call.

8-148 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GBODY Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

deg-edgei
The degenerate edge of body . This data is only used if the body is a prism body,
i
MESHING=MAPPED, and DEGENERATE=YES.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-149

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GHEXA

GHEXA NAME NODES NCOINCIDE NCDOMAIN NCTOLERANCE GROUP

MIDNODES SMOOTH SHIFTX SHIFTY SHIFTZ MAX-REF QFCALIM
QFDALIM GEO-ERROR SAMPLING MIN-SIZE AUTO-GRADING
SIMULATE SIMPLIFY BDRYLAYER TETMESH SCALE

Generates brick element (hexahedron) dominant free-form meshes for a given body.

Any body connected (typically via a face) to a body meshed with GHEXA must be meshed
with GBODY in order to produce compatible meshes (at the interface). However, because
GHEXA does not guarantee that nodes classified on the body's boundary are actually on the
body's boundary, it is not always possible to mesh connected bodies. This is because
GBODY (unlike GHEXA) always assumes that nodes classified on the body's boundary are
actually on the body's boundary.

Because GHEXA does not guarantee the creation of an all-quad surface mesh, it may be
necessary to mesh connected bodies with tetrahedral elements only.

It is possible to generate all-hex meshes when the requirement that the topology and geom-
etry of the body should be matched by the mesh is relaxed (see the SIMPLIFY parameter). To
improve the quality of boundary elements, a boundary layer can be placed all around the
body's boundary if desired (see the BDRYLAYER parameter).

cover (cutaway)

gear (cutaway)

pulley

NAME
Label number of geometry body.

8-150 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GHEXA Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

NODES [8]
The number of nodes per element. {8/20/27}

NCOINCIDE [BOUNDARIES]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking.{ALL/BOUNDARIES/BOUNDEXSEL/
GROUP/NO}

Coincidence checking is used to determine whether to place a new node at a geometric

location when there is already at least one node close to that geometric location.

A node at (XB,YB,ZB) is close to a geometric location (XA,YA,ZA) if

|XB - XA| NCTOLERANCE*XLEN

|YB - YA| NCTOLERANCE*YLEN
|ZB - ZA| NCTOLERANCE*ZLEN

where NCTOLERANCE is a parameter of this command and (XLEN,YLEN,ZLEN) are the

lengths of the bounding box for the model before generation. If there is no bounding box,
then XLEN,YLEN,ZLEN are taken as (1.0,1.0,1.0).

If there are no nodes close to that geometric location, a new node is placed at that geometric
location. Otherwise parameter NCOINCIDE governs whether a new node is placed at that
geometric location, or whether a close node is used instead, as shown in the following table:

NCOINCIDE Which nodes to Which nodes to

consider for coincidence check against

ALL all all

BOUNDARIES those on all boundaries all

as defined by the input
boundary cell sets

BOUNDEXSEL those on boundaries all

as defined by the input
boundary cell sets except
those in the domain specified
by NCDOMAIN

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-151

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GHEXA

GROUP those on boundaries those that are in

as defined by the input the same element
boundary cell sets group

NO none none

NCDOMAIN [0]
Label number of a geometry domain for which nodal coincidence is checked. See DOMAIN.
Used only when NCOINCIDE = BOUNDEXSEL. NCDOMAIN = 0 indicates that no domain is
to be used.

NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

GROUP [current element group]

The label number of the element group in which the generated elements are created.

MIDNODES [STRAIGHT]
Indicates whether the mid-side nodes for higher order elements are to be placed on the
straight line between the relevant vertex nodes (STRAIGHT), or on the underlying curved
geometry using either mapping from parameter space to real space (CURVED), or projection
(PROJECT). {CURVED/STRAIGHT/PROJECT}

SMOOTH [NO]
Mesh vertices on the bodys boundary are smoothed. It refers to the mesh obtained after
subdividing the bodys polyhedral representation. {YES/NO}

SHIFTX [0.0]
SHIFTY [0.0]
SHIFTZ [0.0]
Shifts along the X, Y and Z directions the bounding box used for the grid (whose intersection
with the body gives the body's polyhedral representation).

MAX-REF [5]
When problems are detected, the grid can be locally refined to resolve those problems. MAX-
REF indicates how many times the program is allowed to subdivide the problem grid cells and
restart. If the problems can not be resolved, it is suggested to reduce SIZE (uniformly).

QFCALIM [169.0]
Maximum allowed corner angle on a quad face. {0.0 QFCALIM 180.0}

8-152 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GHEXA Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

Geometry
d

Mesh
L

d/L = geometrical discretization error

QFDALIM [11.0]
Minimum allowed diagonal dihedral angle on a quad face. {0.0 QFDALIM 180.0}

GEO-ERROR [0.0]
Relative geometric discretization error (see figure). If GEO-ERROR > 0.0 the distribution of
elements, including their size, is also governed by the curvature of the geometry body's
bounding edges and faces.

SAMPLING
Number of sampling points on edge Meaningful only if GEO-ERROR option turned on.
For edges: number of sampling points = SAMPLING
For faces: number of sampling points = SAMPLINGxSAMPLING

MIN-SIZE
Minimum size allowed. Meaningful only if GEO-ERROR option turned on. It is important to
give a meaningful value to MIN-SIZE to avoid overrefinement and, as a consequence, high
CPU times for this command.

AUTO-GRADING [NO]
Mesh densities required to satisfy smooth gradation. {NO/YES}
If AUTO-GRADING=YES the distribution of elements, including their size, is also governed
by the requirement for smoothly graded mesh densities.

SIMULATE [NO]
When GEO-ERROR and/or AUTO-GRADING is set, update the edge subdivisions without
actually meshing.

SIMPLIFY [NO]
This parameter controls how the mesh entities conform to the body's topology. In general,
given a body edge, there should be a set of mesh edges in the mesh that discretizes that edge
exactly. Similarly, given a body face, there should be a set of mesh faces that discretizes that
face exactly. When SIMPLIFY=NO, the mesh conforms to the body's topology exactly. When

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-153

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GHEXA

SIMPLIFY=YES, the mesh may not conform to the body's topology exactly but all elements
generated are hexahedral.{NO/YES}

BDRLAYER [NO]
This parameter, when set to YES or ALL, builds up a boundary layer off the body's faces by
extruding the surface mesh. BDRYLAYER=ALL, valid only when SIMPLIFY=ALL, forces the
command to split hexahedral elements in order to better conform to the body's topology (all
elements generated are still hexahedral). {NO/YES/ALL}

TETMESH [NO]
When the body to mesh is of the STL type, setting TETMESH=NO instructs the command not
to build a tetrahedral mesh of the body (for in/out tests) prior to hexahedral meshing. If the
STL surface mesh is relatively fine, it is recommended to set TETMESH=NO. {NO/YES}

SCALE [1.0]
Scales the bounding box used for the grid (whose intersection with the body gives the
bodys polyhedral representation). { 1.0}

8-154 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GADAPT Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

GADAPT NAME NODES NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE SUBSTRUCTURE

GROUP MIDNODES NCDOMAIN COLLAPSED

bodyi facei

Functionality of this command is as follows:

In 3D, facei =0
Takes a finite element mesh attached to a body or set of bodies, deletes it (keeping the
boundary mesh intact), adapts the boundary mesh based on the provided mesh densities and
remeshes the interior(s).

In 2D, facei 0
Takes a finite element mesh attached to a body face or set of body faces, deletes it (keeping
the boundary mesh intact), adapts the boundary mesh based on the provided mesh densities
and remeshes the interior(s).

Desired (new) mesh densities are provided to the program using the SIZE-LOCATIONS
command. The SIZE-LOCATIONS entries would typically correspond to node locations along
with mesh densities. Note that they do not have to be as long as they are inside the geomet-
ric entity given in the argument. If there are no SIZE-LOCATIONS entries, the quality of the
boundary mesh is optimized without changing the mesh density.

NAME
The label number of a solid geometry body for which elements are to be generated.

NODES [4]
The number of nodes per element. {4/8/10/11/20/27}

NCOINCIDE [BOUNDARIES]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking.

Coincidence checking is used to determine whether to place a new node at a geometric

location when there is already at least one node close to that geometric location.

A node at (XB,YB,ZB) is close to a geometric location (XA,YA,ZA) if

|XB - XA| NCTOLERANCE*XLEN
|YB - YA| NCTOLERANCE*YLEN
|ZB - ZA| NCTOLERANCE*ZLEN

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-155

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GADAPT

where NCTOLERANCE is a parameter of this command and (XLEN,YLEN,ZLEN) are the

lengths of the bounding box for the body before generation. If there is no bounding box,
then XLEN,YLEN,ZLEN are taken as (1.0,1.0,1.0).

If there are no nodes close to that geometric location, a new node is placed at that geometric
location. Otherwise parameter NCOINCIDE governs whether a new node is placed at that
geometric location, or whether a close node is used instead, as shown in the following table:

NCOINCIDE Which nodes to Which nodes to

consider for coincidence check against

ALL all all

BOUNDARIES those on all vertices, all

edges and faces of the
geometry body

BOUNDEXSEL those on all vertices, all

edges and faces of the
geometry body except
faces in the domain
specified by NCDOMAIN

GROUP those on all vertices, those that are in

edges and faces of the the same element
geometry body or bodies group
meshed by the current
command

NO none none

NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.then XLEN,YLEN,ZLEN are taken as
(1.0,1.0,1.0).

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure]

Label number of the substructure in which the elements and nodes are created.

GROUP [current element group]

The label number of the element group into which the elements are generated.

8-156 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GADAPT Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

MIDNODES [CURVED]
Indicates whether the mid-side nodes for higher order elements are to be placed on the
straight line between the relevant vertex nodes, or on the underlying curved geometry.
{CURVED/STRAIGHT}

NCDOMAIN [0]
Label number of a geometry domain for which nodal coincidence is checked. See DOMAIN.
Used only when NCOINCIDE=SELECTED or NCOINCIDE=BOUNDEXSEL.
NCDOMAIN=0 indicates that no domain is to be used.

COLLAPSED [NO]
Selects whether tetrahedral THREEDSOLID, or FLUID3 elements are to be treated as col-
lapsed hexahedral elements by ADINA. {NO/YES}

bodyi
Label numbers of geometry bodies. The data line input allows for more than one body to be
meshed via a single GADAPT command call.

facei
Label number of a geometry face (of BODY).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-157

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GBCELL

GBCELL SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP NODES NCOINCIDE

NCTOLERANCE NCDOMAIN COLLAPSED PYRAMIDS BCELL

bcelli
Creates 3D elements from boundary cells. Boundary cells are grouped into sets using the
BCELL command. The boundary cells must form a water-tight domain and
must be oriented towards the domain. This command creates node sets and element face sets
corresponding to each boundary cell set.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure label number]

Label number of the substructure in which the elements and nodes are created. The default
value is defined by the last preceding SUBSTRUCTURE command.

GROUP [current element group number]

The label number of the element group in which the generated elements are created. The
default value is determined by the last preceding SET EGROUP command. The group type
must be one of those listed above.

NODES [4]
The number of nodes per element. Allowable values for each analysis program are

ADINA - 4, 8, 10, 11, 20, 27

ADINA-T - 4, 8, 10, 11, 20, 27
ADINA-F - 4, 8, 27

Note that if NODES=8, 20, or 27, boundary cells must be made up of all 4-node quadrilateral
cells.

NCOINCIDE [BOUNDARIES]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking. {ALL/BOUNDARIES/GROUP/NO}

Coincidence checking is used to determine whether to place a new node at a geometric

location when there is already at least one node close to that geometric location.

A node at (XB,YB,ZB) is close to a geometric location (XA,YA,ZA) if

|XB - XA| NCTOLERANCE * XLEN

|YB - YA| NCTOLERANCE * YLEN
|ZB - ZA| NCTOLERANCE * ZLEN

where NCTOLERANCE is a parameter of this command and (XLEN,YLEN,ZLEN) are the

lengths of the bounding box for the model before generation. If there is no bounding box,
then XLEN,YLEN,ZLEN are taken as (1.0,1.0,1.0).

8-158 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GBCELL Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

If there are no nodes close to that geometric location, a new node is placed at that geometric
location. Otherwise parameter NCOINCIDE governs whether a new node is placed at that
geometric location, or whether a close node is used instead, as shown in the following table:

NCOINCIDE Which nodes to consider Which nodes to

for coincidence check against

ALL all all

BOUNDARIES those on all boundaries all

as defined by the input
boundary cell sets

GROUP those on boundaries those that are in

as defined by the input the same element
boundary cell sets group

NO none none

NCTOLERANCE [value set by parameter COINCIDENCE of

command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]
Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

NCDOMAIN [0]
Label number of a geometry domain for which nodal coincidence is checked. See DOMAIN.
Used only when NCOINCIDE = SELECTED or NCOINCIDE = BOUNDEXSEL.
NCDOMAIN = 0 indicates that no domain is to be used.

COLLAPSED [NO]
Selects whether tetrahedral THREEDSOLID, or FLUID3 elements are to be treated as col-
lapsed hexahedral elements by ADINA.

NO - Tetrahedral elements are not collapsed

YES - Tetrahedral elements are treated as collapsed hexahedra

PYRAMIDS [NO]
When NODES = 8,20,27, this parameter indicates whether pyramid elements should be used
to transition from hexahedral to tetrahedral elements. If PYRAMIDS = ONLY, no hexahedral
elements are created and pyramid elements are created for each boundary quadrilateral cell.
{NO/YES/ONLY}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-159

Chap. 8 Finite element representation GBCELL

BCELL [ALL]
Indicates whether all boundary cells are used to create the 3-D mesh. {ALL/SELECT}

ALL All boundary cells are used.

SELECT Selected boundary cells as specified by bcelli are used.

bcelli
Label number of boundary cell. Boundary cells specified in the list are used to create the 3-D
mesh.

8-160 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BHEXA Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

BHEXA NAME NODES NCOINCIDE NCDOMAIN NCTOLERANCE GROUP

MIDNODES SIZE

This command meshes a STL body (see the command CONVERT-STL to convert a Parasolid
body into an STL body) with hexahedral elements only.

Before using this command, the STL body must be discretized with the BODY-DISCREP
command.

It is possible some nodes on the body's boundary may not actually be placed on the body's
boundary, especially if the geometry is challenging (acute angle between body faces at a
body edge, for instance).

Prior to using this command, the STL body can be modified using the STL family of com-
mands.

Note that a body with acute angles, thin faces, small features, and/or points that connect to
more than 3 faces may be difficult to mesh with this command.

Meshing is performed from the inside out, which means that meshes on body faces (coming
from meshing of facelinked bodies, for example) cannot and are not used by this command.

NAME
Label number of geometry body.

NODES
[8]
The number of nodes per element. {8/20/27}

NCOINCIDE
[BOUNDARIES]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking.{ALL/BOUNDARIES/BOUNDEXSEL/
GROUP/NO}

Coincidence checking is used to determine whether to place a new node at a geometric

location when there is already at least one node close to that geometric location.

A node at (XB,YB,ZB) is close to a geometric location (XA,YA,ZA) if

|XB - XA| NCTOLERANCE*XLEN

|YB - YA| NCTOLERANCE*YLEN
|ZB - ZA| NCTOLERANCE*ZLEN

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-161

Chap. 8 Finite element representation BHEXA

where NCTOLERANCE is a parameter of this command and (XLEN,YLEN,ZLEN) are the

lengths of the bounding box for the model before generation. If there is no bounding box,
then XLEN,YLEN,ZLEN are taken as (1.0,1.0,1.0).

If there are no nodes close to that geometric location, a new node is placed at that geometric
location. Otherwise parameter NCOINCIDE governs whether a new node is placed at that
geometric location, or whether a close node is used instead, as shown in the following table:

NCOINCIDE Which nodes to Which nodes to

consider for coincidence check against

ALL all all

BOUNDARIES those on all boundaries all

as defined by the input
boundary cell sets

BOUNDEXSEL those on boundaries all

as defined by the input
boundary cell sets except
those in the domain specified
by NCDOMAIN

GROUP those on boundaries those that are in

as defined by the input the same element
boundary cell sets group

NO none none

NCDOMAIN [0]
Label number of a geometry domain for which nodal coincidence is checked. See DOMAIN.
Used only when NCOINCIDE = BOUNDEXSEL. NCDOMAIN = 0 indicates that no domain is
to be used.

NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

GROUP [current element group]

The label number of the element group in which the generated elements are created.

8-162 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BHEXA Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

MIDNODES [STRAIGHT]
Indicates whether the mid-side nodes for higher order elements are to be placed on the
straight line between the relevant vertex nodes (STRAIGHT), or on the underlying curved
geometry using either mapping from parameter space to real space (CURVED), or projection
(PROJECT). {CURVED/STRAIGHT/PROJECT}

SIZE [0]
Mesh density at which the body should be meshed at. If size is not set to 0, the command
assumes that mesh sizes have been set with the subdivide body, subdivide face and/or
subdivide edge commands for a non-uniform mesh.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-163

Chap. 8 Finite element representation ELDELETE

ELDELETE LINE NAME GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE NODE-DELETE

linei
ELDELETE SURFACE NAME GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE NODE-DELETE
surfacei
ELDELETE VOLUME NAME GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE NODE-DELETE
volumei
ELDELETE EDGE NAME GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE NODE-DELETE BODY
edgei bodyi
ELDELETE FACE NAME GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE NODE-DELETE BODY
facei bodyi
ELDELETE BODY NAME GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE NODE-DELETE

bodyi

ELDELETE ELEM (deletes the listed elements)

elemi egroupi

ELDELETE ELSET (deletes the listed element set)

elseti

ELDELETE EGROUP (deletes the listed element groups)

egroupi

ELDELETE deletes elements generated on a given geometry entity for a specific element
group. The nodes connected to the deleted elements may also be optionally deleted (pro-
vided they are not connected to other elements or define other model features).

It is not allowed to use ELDELETE ELEM, ELDELETE ELSET, ELDELETE EGROUP to delete a
few elements on a face and then reference that partially deleted mesh in subsequent meshing
commands such as BODY SWEEP and BODY REVOLVED.

NAME
Label number of the geometry entity for which generated elements are to be deleted.

GROUP [current group number]

8-164 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ELDELETE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

Element group label number. If GROUP=0, the elements are deleted from the selected geom-
etry, irrespective of the element group label associated with that element.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure number]

Substructure label number.

NODE-DELETE [YES]
Node deletion option. {YES/NO}

BODY [currently active body]

Label number of a solid geometry body. Used for edge/face references in ELDELETE EDGE/
FACE

linei /surfacei /volumei /edgei /facei /bodyi/elemi/egroupi/elseti

Line/Surface/Volume/Edge/Face/Body/Element/Element group/Element set label number.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-165

Chap. 8 Finite element representation COPY-MESH-BODY

COPY-MESH-BODY BODY1 BODY2 SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP NCOINCIDE

NCDOMAIN NCTOLERANCE TRANSFORMATION

Copies a mesh from one body to another body via affine transformation.

BODY1
Body whose mesh is to be copied. {>0}

BODY2
Target body. {>0}

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure]

Label number of the substructure in which the elements and nodes are created.

GROUP [current element group]

The label number of the element group into which the elements are generated.

NCOINCIDE [BOUNDARIES]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking.

Coincidence checking is used to determine whether to place a new node at a geometric

location when there is already at least one node close to that geometric location.

A node at (XB,YB,ZB) is close to a geometric location (XA,YA,ZA) if

|XB - XA| NCTOLERANCE*XLEN
|YB - YA| NCTOLERANCE*YLEN
|ZB - ZA| NCTOLERANCE*ZLEN
where where NCTOLERANCE is a parameter of this command and (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are
decided by the following:

If NCTOL-TYPE = RELATIVE-LOCAL in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, (XLEN,

YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the body before generation.

If NCTOL-TYPE = RELATIVE-GLOBAL in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, (XLEN,

YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the model before generation.

If NCTOL-TYPE = ABSOLUTE in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC or no bounding box

in the model, (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are taken as (1.0, 1,0, 1.0).

If there are no nodes close to that geometric location, a new node is placed at that geometric
location. Otherwise parameter NCOINCIDE governs whether a new node is placed at that
geometric location, or whether a close node is used instead, as shown in the following table:

8-166 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
COPY-MESH-BODY Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

NCOINCIDE Which nodes to Which nodes to

consider for coincidence check against

ALL all all

BOUNDARIES those on all vertices, all

edges and faces of the
geometry body

BOUNDEXSEL those on all vertices, all

edges and faces of the
geometry body except
those in the domain specified
by NCDOMAIN

GROUP those on all vertices, those that are in

edges and faces of the the same element
geometry body or bodies group
meshed by the current
command

NO none none

NCDOMAIN [0]
Label number of a geometry domain for which nodal coincidence is checked. See DOMAIN.
Used only when NCOINCIDE=SELECTED or NCOINCIDE=BOUNDEXSEL.
NCDOMAIN=0 indicates that no domain is to be used.

NCTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

TRANSFORMATION
Transformation used to match BODY1 to BODY2. Using this transformation, all faces on
BODY1 must match all faces on BODY2. {>0}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-167

Chap. 8 Finite element representation

This page intentionally left blank.

8-168 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CSURFACE Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation

CSURFACE NAME NODES PATTERN NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE

SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP

Generates a set of contact segments on a contact-surface, see CONTACTSURFACE. Contact

segments are normally created by default from associated finite elements defined on the
geometry of the contact-surface. However, a target contact-surface which is rigid (or has a
completely known displacement), may be defined to consist of contact segments with no
associated finite elements.
The distribution of segments, including their size, is governed by the subdivision data
assigned to the geometry components of the contact-surface, e.g., via SUBDIVIDE LINE,
SUBDIVIDE SURFACE.

NAME
The label number of a contact-surface on which contact segments are to be generated.
NODES [2 (2-D); 4 (3-D)]1
[3 (2-D); 9 (3-D)]2
The number of nodes per contact segment.

The default value is indicated by the superscripts 1 or 2 as follows:

1. CONTACT-CONTROL CSTYPE=OLD
2. CONTACT-CONTROL CSTYPE=NEW

The permitted values depend on whether the contact-surface is 2-D or 3-D:

2-D contact-surface {2/3}.

3-D contact-surface {3/4/6/9}.

PATTERN [1]
Selects the type of triangulation pattern used to further subdivide the quadrilateral surface
subdivisions into triangular segments, only used when NODES = 3, i.e., for 3-D contact
segments. (See GSURFACE for PATTERN options). {1 PATTERN 9}

NCOINCIDE [SURFACE]
Controls nodal coincidence checking. If SURFACE is selected, nodal coincidence is carried
out, but comparison is made against only those nodes already generated on the contact-
surface. {YES/NO/SURFACE}

NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure number]

Label number of the substructure in which the contact segments and nodes are generated.

GROUP [current contact group number]

The label number of the contact group into which the contact segments are generated.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-169

Chap. 8 Finite element representation CSDELETE

CSDELETE LINE

CSDELETE SURFACE

CSDELETE EDGE

CSDELETE FACE

These commands are superseded by commands CSDELETE TWO-D and CSDELETE THREE-
D. Please use the new commands to delete contact meshes on geometry entities.

8-170 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CSDELETE TWO-D Sec. 8.3 Elements

CSDELETE TWO-D GROUP CONTACTSURFACE NODE-DELETE

namei bodyi

Deletes contact meshes generated on selected 2D geometry entities. Nodes connected to the
contact meshes may be optionally deleted (provided they do not connect to other elements or
define other model features).

GROUP [0]
Contact group label. If GROUP = 0, the contact mesh is deleted from the selected geometry,
irrespective of the contact group label number associated with that contact mesh. The
CONTACTSURFACE parameter is ignored when GROUP=0.

CONTACTSURFACE [0]
Contactsurface label. If CONTACTSURFACE = 0, the contact mesh in contact group GROUP
is deleted from the selected geometry, irrespective of the contact surface label number
associated with that contact mesh.

NODE-DELETE [YES]
Node deletion option. {YES/NO}

YES Nodes which are only connected with the contact meshes on the selected
geometry entities will be deleted.

NO No nodes are deleted as a result of this command

namei
Geometry label number.

bodyi
Body label number.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-171

Chap. 8 Finite element representation CSDELETE THREE-D

CSDELETE THREE-D GROUP CONTACTSURFACE NODE-DELETE

namei bodyi

Deletes contact meshes generated on selected 3D geometry entities. Nodes connected to the
contact meshes may be optionally deleted (provided they do not connect to other elements or
define other model features).

GROUP [0]
Contact group label. If GROUP = 0, the contact mesh is deleted from the selected geometry,
irrespective of the contact group label number associated with that contact mesh. The
CONTACTSURFACE parameter is ignored when GROUP=0.

CONTACTSURFACE [0]
Contactsurface label. If CONTACTSURFACE = 0, the contact mesh in contact group GROUP
is deleted from the selected geometry, irrespective of the contact surface label number
associated with that contact mesh.

NODE-DELETE [YES]
Node deletion option. {YES/NO}

YES Nodes which are only connected with the contact meshes on the selected
geometry entities will be deleted.

NO No nodes are deleted as a result of this command

namei
Geometry label number.

bodyi
Body label number.

8-172 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
GLUEMESH Sec. 8.3 Elements

GLUEMESH NAME EXTENSION TBIRTH T DEATH

stypei namei bodyi sidei

Glues two dissimilar meshes together. The mesh on each side (master or slave) may span over
several sites.

NAME
Label number of GLUEMESH.

EXTENSION [0.01]
Extension for the master surface (as a ratio of element length). {0.00 < EXTENSION
0.25 }
This extension is only applied to glueing of 3-D meshes.

TBIRTH [0.0]
Time at which the gluemesh becomes active. Note that the constraints created for the glued
meshes are based on the undeformed mesh. Hence, TBIRTH > 0.0 should only be used
when there is little relative movement between the glued meshes.

TDEATH [0.0]
Time at which the gluemesh becomes inactive. TDEATH=0.0 means death time is not used.

stypei
Type of site the gluing is applied to. Sites must be either all 2-D types (line, edge, element-
edge) or all 3-D types (surface, face, element-face).
{LINE/SURFACE/EDGE/FACE/ELEMENT-EDGE/ELEMENT-FACE}

For example,

GLUEMESH NAME=1
SURFACE 1 0 SLAVE
SURFACE 5 0 MASTER

namei
Site label number.

bodyi
Body label number when stypei = EDGE or FACE.

sidei
Indicates whether site is on the master or slave side. {SLAVE/MASTER}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-173

Chap. 8 Finite element representation MESH-DETACH

MESH-DETACH GTYPE ACTION SEARCH

namei bodyi

Detaches parts of the model by splitting any node that is shared between the parts. The
shared nodes are split after the command is executed. MESH-DETACH can also be used to
find shared nodes between parts of the model, without splitting them. Each row in the list is
considered a separate part.

GTYPE [LINE-EDGE]
Geometry type of the parts. All elements associated with these parts are selected.
{LINE-EDGE/SURFACE-FACE/VOLUME/BODY/EGROUP/ELSET/ELEDGESET/
ELFACESET}

LINE-EDGE Defined from geometry lines or edges of bodies.

SURFACE-FACE Defined from geometry surfaces or faces of bodies.

VOLUME Defined from geometry volumes.

BODY Defined from geometry bodies.

EGROUP Defined from element groups.

ELSET Defined from element sets.

ELEDGESET Defined from element edge-sets.

ELFACESET Defined from element face-sets.

Note that when GTYPE=LINE-EDGE, SURFACE-FACE and VOLUME-BODY, the part is

defined by the elements that are directly attached to selected geometry. For example, for a 3D-
solid mesh, when GTYPE=SURFACE-FACE, the part is defined by all 3D-solid elements
directly attached to the selected surface or face.

ACTION [SPLIT-SAVE]
Specifies whether the shared nodes are split or just found. {FIND/SPLIT/SPLIT-SAVE}

FIND Creates a node set of all shared nodes between the parts.

SPLIT Splits the shared nodes between the parts.

SPLIT-SAVE Splits the shared nodes between the parts, and creates a node set of all

8-174 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MESH-DETACH Sec. 8.3 Elements

the nodes that have been split and all duplicated nodes created after the
split.

Note that the created node set is labelled as: [highest existing label + 1].

SEARCH [BOUNDARY]
Specifies which nodes of the parts are to be included in the search. This parameter is only
used for 3D-solids when GTYPE=VOLUME, BODY, EGROUP, and ELSET. {BOUNDARY/
ALL}

BOUNDARY Only include those nodes on the boundary of the parts.

ALL Include all nodes of the parts. Note this option can be expensive, espe-
cially for large 3D-solid parts.

namei
Geometry label number.

bodyi
Geometry body label number.

The following should be noted:

1. The split and duplicated nodes are associated with the respective underlying geometry
after the parts are detached. Therefore, if fixities, loads, initial conditions, skew systems, etc.
are applied on the geometry, these values will be assigned to the correct nodes for the
detached parts. If the underlying surfaces (or volumes) share the same line (or surface) at the
interface, then the split and duplicated nodes are associated with this shared line (or surface).

2. If a fixities, loads, initial conditions, or skew systems are applied directly to the nodes
that are shared between the parts, the same values are applied to the duplicated nodes after
the nodes are split.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-175

Chap. 8 Finite element representation MESH-JOIN

MESH-JOIN GTYPE ZONE ACTION SEARCH TOLERANCE

namei bodyi

Joins parts of the model by equivalencing coincident nodes. The coincident nodes are
equivalenced after the command is executed. MESH-JOIN can also be used to find coincident
nodes between parts of the model, without joining them. In essence, MESH-JOIN performs a
coincidence check on all nodes associated with the parts, and then joins those nodes that are
within a specified distance from each other.

GTYPE [LINE-EDGE]
Geometry type of the parts. All nodes associated with these parts are selected.
{NODE/ELEMENT/ADJACENT/ATTACHED/LINE-EDGE/SURFACE-FACE/VOLUME/
BODY/EGROUP/ELSET/ELEDGESET/ELFACESET/NODESET/ZONE}

NODE Defined from nodes listed in the table.

ELEMENT Defined from elements listed in the table.

ADJACENT Defined from elements listed in the table. The elements that share nodes
with the listed elements are also selected.

ATTACHED Defined from elements listed in the table. The elements attached to listed
elements are also selected. That is, the elements that share nodes with the
listed elements are found. Then, the elements that share nodes with all
these elements are found. This is recursively repeated until no more
elements are found. All elements found are then selected.

LINE-EDGE Defined from geometry lines or edges of bodies.

SURFACE-FACE Defined from geometry surfaces or faces of bodies.

VOLUME Defined from geometry volumes.

BODY Defined from geometry bodies.

EGROUP Defined from element groups.

ELSET Defined from element sets.

ELEDGESET Defined from element edge-sets.

ELFACESET Defined from element face-sets.

8-176 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MESH-JOIN Sec. 8.3 Elements

NODESET Defined from node sets.

ZONE Defined from elements in the zone specified in the ZONE parameter.

Note that when GTYPE=LINE-EDGE, SURFACE-FACE and VOLUME-BODY, the part is

defined by the elements that are directly attached to selected geometry. For example, for a 3D-
solid mesh, when GTYPE=SURFACE-FACE, the part is defined by all 3D-solid elements directly
attached to the selected surface or face.

ZONE
Specifies the zone name. This parameter is only used when GTYPE=ZONE. This parameter
must be entered.

ACTION [JOIN-SAVE]
Specifies whether the coincident nodes are joined or just found. {FIND/JOIN/JOIN-
SAVE}

FIND Creates a node set of all coincident nodes between the parts.

JOIN Equivalences the coincident nodes between the parts.

JOIN-SAVE Equivalences the coincident nodes between the parts, and creates a node
set of all nodes that have been equivalenced.

Note that the created node set is labelled as: [highest existing label + 1].

SEARCH [BOUNDARY]
Specifies which nodes of the parts are to be included in the search. This parameter is only
used for 3D-solids when GTYPE=ATTACHED,VOLUME, BODY, EGROUP, and ELSET.
{BOUNDARY/ALL}

BOUNDARY Only include those nodes on the boundary of the parts.

ALL Include all nodes of the parts. Note this option can be expensive, espe-
cially for large 3D-solid parts.

TOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]

Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence. If TOLERANCE = 0.0, TOLERANCES
GEOMETRIC will be used.

namei
Geometry label number (element label if GTYPE=ELEMENT, ADJACENT, ATTACHED).

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-177

Chap. 8 Finite element representation MESH-JOIN

bodyi
Geometry body label number (egroup label if GTYPE=ELEMENT, ADJACENT, ATTACHED).

The following should be noted:

1. The split and duplicated nodes are associated with the respective underlying geometry
after the parts are detached. Therefore, if fixities, loads, initial conditions, skew systems, etc.
are applied on the geometry, these values will be assigned to the correct nodes for the
detached parts. If the underlying surfaces (or volumes) share the same line (or surface) at the
interface, then the split and duplicated nodes are associated with this shared line (or surface).

2. If a fixities, loads, initial conditions, or skew systems are applied directly to the nodes
that are shared between the parts, the same values are applied to the duplicated nodes after
the nodes are split.

3. Defining the parts using a zone (GTYPE=ZONE) is inefficient for 3D-solid elements
because the SEARCH=BOUNDARY parameter is not supported in this case.

8-178 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MESH-JOIN Sec. 8.3 Elements

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-179

Chap. 8 Finite element representation MESH-SPLIT

MESH-SPLIT GTYPE BOUNDARY-SPLIT ZONE NODESET

namei bodyi

Splits the mesh about an interface. Several options are available for splitting the nodes that lie
on the boundary of the interface. The mesh is split after the command is executed.

GTYPE [LINE-EDGE]
Geometry type of the parts. All elements associated with these parts are selected.
{LINE-EDGE/SURFACE-FACE/ELEDGESET/ELFACESET}

LINE-EDGE Geometry lines or edges of bodies.

SURFACE-FACE Geometry surfaces or faces of bodies.

ELEDGESET Element edge-sets.

ELFACESET Element face-sets.

BOUNDARY-SPLIT [EXTERNAL]
Specifies whether the nodes that lie on the boundary of the interface should be split (see
examples below). {NONE/ALL/EXTERNAL}

NONE None of the nodes that lie on the boundary of the interface is split.

ALL All the nodes that lie on the boundary of the interface are split. When this
option is used, the elements on one side of the interface must be placed in
a zone.

EXTERNAL Only the nodes that lie on the external mesh boundaries are split. Note that
in 3D the corner nodes where the internal and external boundaries meet are
not split. This option is useful when defining a crack face.

ZONE [BOUNDARY]
The zone in which elements on one side of the interface are placed. This parameter is only
used when BOUNDARY-SPLIT=ALL. This parameter must be entered.

NODESET [YES]
Creates a node set of all the nodes that have been split and the duplicated nodes that are
created after the interface is split. The node set is labelled as: [highest existing
label + 1]. {YES/NO}

8-180 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MESH-SPLIT Sec. 8.3 Elements

namei
Geometry label number.

bodyi
Geometry body label number.

Example
Consider that MESH-SPLIT is applied to the red interface shown below, where all coincident
nodes are equivalenced before MESH-SPLIT is applied.

MESH-SPLIT applied
to the red interface

The figures below show the results for the various BOUNDARY-SPLIT options. In these
figures, the split interface is separated for clarity and the split nodes are shown in red.

BOUNDARY-SPLIT=NONE BOUNDARY-SPLIT=ALL BOUNDARY-SPLIT=EXTERNAL

The following should be noted:

When BOUNDARY-SPLIT=ALL, the elements on one side of the interface must be

placed in a zone. This is needed such that the AUI knows which elements should be above
the interface and which elements should be below. For example,

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-181

Chap. 8 Finite element representation MESH-SPLIT

ABOVE zone

BOUNDARY-SPLIT=ALL, ZONE=ABOVE

In 3D, when BOUNDARY-SPLIT=EXTERNAL, the corner nodes where the internal and
external boundaries meet are not split as illustrated below.

Nodes that
MESH-SPLIT applied are split
to the red interface

Corner node
is not split
Top view of interface to be BOUNDARY-SPLIT=EXTERNAL
split

If a fixity, load, initial condition, or skew system is applied on an interface node before the
interface is split, the same value is applied to the duplicated node after the interface is split.

If GTYPE=LINE-EDGE or GTYPE=SURFACE-FACE the duplicated nodes after the interface

is split are associated with the respective underlying geometry. Therefore, if a fixity, load, initial
condition, skew system, etc. is applied on the geometry, these values will be applied to the
correct nodes on the correct side of the interface.

Note, if GTYPE=LINE-EDGE and the line is shared between two surfaces, then the dupli-
cated nodes are associated with this shared line. Similarly, if GTYPE=SURFACE-FACE and the
surface is shared between two volumes, then the duplicated nodes are associated with this
shared surface.

The SPLITZONE command can be useful to define an element-edge or an element-face set

for MESH-SPLIT when GTYPE=ELEDGESET or GTYPE=ELFACESET, respectively.

Note that only connected elements are split.

8-182 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
MESH-SPLIT Sec. 8.3 Elements

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-183

Chap. 8 Finite element representation STL ELIM-EDGE

STL ELIM-EDGE BODY

edgei

Eliminates edges from an STL body (see command CONVERT-STL to convert a Parasolid body
into an STL body).

BODY
Label of body of interest.

edgei
Label of edge to eliminate.

8-184 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
STL ELIM-EDGES-ANGLE Sec. 8.3 Elements

STL ELIM-EDGES-ANGLE BODY ANGLE

Eliminates edges from an STL body (see command CONVERT-STL to convert a Parasolid body
into an STL body) based on the angle between the connected body faces. A body edge will be
eliminated if the angle between the normals of the connected body faces is within the parameter
ANGLE.

BODY
Label of body of interest.

ANGLE
Angle threshold. {0 ANGLE 180 }

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-185

Chap. 8 Finite element representation TRUSS-POINTS

TRUSS-POINTS

namei pointi materiali areai printi savei tbirthi tdeathi epsini

Defines axisymmetric truss elements at geometry points. Coincidence checking is used when
generating nodes at the geometry points, with tolerance adjusted by the command
TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC. Note: The current element group must be of type TRUSS, with
axisymmetric subtype, for this command to be active.

namei
Label number of an axisymmetric truss element.

pointi
Label number of the geometry point associated with the axisymmetric truss element.

materiali [0]
Label number for the material to be used with element namei. A zero value indicates that the
element group default material is to be used.

areai [1.0]
The cross-sectional area of the element.

printi [DEFAULT]
Printing flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, printout is controlled by PRINTOUT
PRINTDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

savei [DEFAULT]
Saving (to the porthole file) flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, saving is con-
trolled by PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

tbirthi [0.0]
Time of element birth.

tdeathi [0.0]
Time of element death.

epsini [0.0]
Element initial strain.

Auxiliary commands

LIST TRUSS-POINTS FIRST LAST

DELETE TRUSS-POINTS FIRST LAST

8-186 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
PSET-6DOF Sec. 8.3 Elements

PSET-6DOF NAME K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 NK1 NK2 NK3 NK4 NK5 NK6

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

Defines properties for a 6DOF spring.

NAME
Label number of PSET-6DOF.

K1 [0.0]
...
K6 [0.0]
Linear spring element stiffness.

NK1 [0]
...
NK6 [0]
Label number of a nonlinear stiffness property (see PROPERTY NONLINEAR-K ).

C1 [0.0]
...
C6 [0.0]
Linear spring element damping coefficient.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-187

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SPRING-6DOF LINES

SPRING-6DOF LINES

namei line1i line2i axi ayi azi g0i cidi printi savei tbirthi tdeathi optioni pseti

Defines a 6DOF spring, i.e., a set of spring elements, between two geometry lines.

namei
Label number of a 6DOF spring-line.

line1i
Label number of the first (or only) geometry line at one end of the spring-line.

line2i
Label number of the second geometry line at the opposite end of the spring-line from line1i.

axi, ayi, azi [0.0]

Global coordinate system components of the spring-line direction.

g0 i [0]
Geometry label used to define spring element direction (NOT used for 6DOF spring-lines).

cidi [0]
Coordinate system used to define spring element coordinate system.

-1 No coordinate system used

0 Global coordinate system used

>0 Coordinate system used

printi [DEFAULT]
Printing flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, printout is controlled by PRINTOUT
PRINTDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

savei [DEFAULT]
Saving (to the porthole file) flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, saving is con-
trolled by PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

tbirthi [0.0]
Element birth time.

tdeathi [0.0]
Element death time.

8-188 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SPRING-6DOF LINES Sec. 8.3 Elements

Note: tbirthi < tdeathi, or tbirthi = tdeathi = 0.0

optioni [SAME]
When multiple nodes exist on the line1 and line2, this flags how the spring element between
nodes on each entity is defined. {SAME/REVERSE}

SAME A spring is constructed between nodes at the corresponding parametric

order on each line. Parametric order is in the increasing u-parameter
direction for lines.

REVERSE A spring is constructed between nodes at the corresponding parametric

order on each line, but for line2 the parametric order is reversed.

pseti [0]
6DOF propertyset label defined by PSET-6DOF command.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SPRING-6DOF LINES FIRST LAST

DELETE SPRING-6DOF LINES FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-189

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SPRING-6DOF NODESETS

SPRING-6DOF NODESETS

namei nodeset1i nodeset2i axi ayi azi g0i cidi printi savei tbirthi tdeathi pseti

Defines a 6DOF spring, i.e., a set of spring elements, between two nodesets.

namei
Label number of a 6DOF spring-nodeset.

nodeset1i
Label number of the first (or only) nodeset at one end of the spring-nodeset.

nodeset2i
Label number of the second nodeset at the opposite end of the spring-nodeset from
nodeset1i.

axi, ayi, azi [0.0]

Global coordinate system components of the spring-nodeset direction.

g0 i [0]
Geometry label used to define spring element direction (NOT used for 6DOF spring-nodeset).

cidi [0]
Coordinate system used to define spring element coordinate system.

-1 No coordinate system used

0 Global coordinate system used

>0 Coordinate system used

printi [DEFAULT]
Printing flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, printout is controlled by PRINTOUT
PRINTDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

savei [DEFAULT]
Saving (to the porthole file) flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, saving is con-
trolled by PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

tbirthi [0.0]
Element birth time.

8-190 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SPRING-6DOF NODESETS Sec. 8.3 Elements

tdeathi [0.0]
Element death time.

Note: tbirthi < tdeathi, or tbirthi = tdeathi = 0.0

pseti [0]
6DOF propertyset label defined by PSET-6DOF command.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SPRING-6DOF NODESETS FIRST LAST

DELETE SPRING-6DOF NODESETS FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-191

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SPRING-6DOF POINTS

SPRING-6DOF POINTS

namei point1i point2i axi ayi azi g0i cidi printi savei tbirthi tdeathi pseti

Defines a 6DOF spring, i.e., a set of spring elements, between two points.

namei
Label number of a 6DOF spring-point.

point1i
Label number of the first (or only) point at one end of the spring-point.

point2i
Label number of the second point at the opposite end of the spring-point from point1i.

axi, ayi, azi [0.0]

Global coordinate system components of the spring-point direction.

g0i [0]
Geometry label used to define spring element direction, from point1.

cidi [0]
Coordinate system used to define spring element coordinate system.

-1 No coordinate system used

0 Global coordinate system used

>0 Coordinate system used

printi [DEFAULT]
Printing flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, printout is controlled by PRINTOUT
PRINTDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

savei [DEFAULT]
Saving (to the porthole file) flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, saving is con-
trolled by PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

tbirthi [0.0]
Element birth time.

tdeathi [0.0]

8-192 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SPRING-6DOF POINTS Sec. 8.3 Elements

Element death time.

Note: tbirthi < tdeathi, or tbirthi = tdeathi = 0.0

pseti [0]
6DOF propertyset label defined by PSET-6DOF command.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SPRING-6DOF POINTS FIRST LAST

DELETE SPRING-6DOF POINTS FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-193

Chap. 8 Finite element representation

This page intentionally left blank

8-194 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SPRING NODESETS Sec. 8.3 Elements

SPRING NODESETS

namei nodeset1i dof1i nodeset2i dof2i pseti printi savei axi ayi azi tbirthi tdeathi

Defines a set of spring elements either between two degrees of freedom on distinct nodesets,
or a grounded degree of freedom on a single nodeset.

namei
Label number of a spring-nodeset.

nodeset1i
Label number of the first (or only) nodeset.

dof1i
The degree of freedom selected for the spring elements along the first nodeset nodeset1i.
{1/2/3/4/5/6}

1 - X translation.
2 - Y translation.
3 - Z translation.
4 - X rotation.
5 - Y rotation.
6 - Z rotation.

nodeset2i
Label number of the second nodeset at the opposite end of the spring-nodeset from
nodeset1i. Input of nodeset2i = 0 implies that the degree of freedom dof1i at nodeset
nodeset1i is connected to ground.

dof2i
The degree of freedom selected for the spring elements along the second nodeset nodeset2i.
If nodeset2i = 0, then input for dof2i is ignored.

pseti [1]
Label number of the spring property set for spring-nodeset namei. See PROPERTYSET.

printi [DEFAULT]
Printing flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, printout is controlled by PRINTOUT
PRINTDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

savei [DEFAULT]
Saving (to the porthole file) flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, saving is controlled
by PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-195

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SPRING NODESETS

axi [0.0]
ayi [0.0]
azi [0.0]
Global coordinate system components of the spring-nodeset direction, used if the spring-
nodeset connects two coincident nodes, or one node to ground.

tbirthi [0.0]
Element birth time.

tdeathi [0.0]
Element death time.
Note: tbirthi < tdeathi, or tbirthi = tdeathi = 0.0

Auxiliary commands

LIST SPRING NODESETS FIRST LAST

DELETE SPRING NODESETS FIRST LAST

8-196 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 8.3 Elements

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-197

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SPRING POINTS

SPRING POINTS

namei p1i dof1i p2i dof2i pseti printi savei axi ayi azi tbirthi tdeathi

Defines spring elements either between two degrees of freedom at distinct geometry points,
or a grounded degree of freedom at a single geometry point. Coincidence checking is used
when generating nodes at the geometry points, with tolerance adjusted by the command
TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC.

Note: The current element group must be of type SPRING for this command to be active.

namei
Label number of a spring element.

p1i
Label number of the first (or only) geometry point at one end of the spring element.

dof1i
The degree of freedom selected for the spring element at the first point p1i.

1 X translation.
2 Y translation.
3 Z translation.
4 X rotation.
5 Y rotation.
6 Z rotation.

p2i
Label number of the second geometry point at the opposite end of the spring element from
point p1i. Input of p2i = 0 implies that the degree of freedom dof1i at point p1i is
connected to ground.

dof2i
The degree of freedom for the spring element at point p2i. The choice of input values is the
same as for entry dof1i. If p2i = 0, then input for dof2i is ignored.

pseti [1]
Label number of the spring property set for element springi. See PROPERTYSET.

printi [DEFAULT]
Printing flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, printout is controlled by PRINTOUT
PRINTDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

8-198 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SPRING POINTS Sec. 8.3 Elements

savei [DEFAULT]
Saving (to the porthole file) flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, saving is con-
trolled by PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

axi, ayi, azi [0.0]

Global coordinate system components of the spring element direction, used if the spring
connects two coincident points, or one point to ground. Note that this vector is only used for
nonlinear spring elements.

tbirthi [0.0]
Element birth time.

tdeathi [0.0]
Element death time.

Note: tbirthi < tdeathi, or tbirthi = tdeathi = 0.0

Auxiliary commands

LIST SPRING POINTS FIRST LAST

DELETE SPRING POINTS FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-199

Chap. 8 Finite element representation

This page intentionally left blank

8-200 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SPRING LINES Sec. 8.3 Elements

SPRING LINES

namei line1i dof1i line2i dof2i pseti printi savei axi ayi azi tbirthi tdeathi optioni

Defines spring-lines, i.e. a set of spring elements either between two degrees of freedom
along distinct geometry lines, or a grounded degree of freedom along a single geometry
line.

namei
Label number of a spring-line.

line1i
Label number of the first (or only) geometry line at one end of the spring-line.

dof1i
The degree of freedom selected for the spring elements along the first line line1i.

1 X translation.
2 Y translation.
3 Z translation.
4 X rotation.
5 Y rotation.
6 Z rotation.

line2i
Label number of the second geometry line at the opposite end of the spring-line from line1i.
Input of line2i = 0 implies that the degree of freedom dof1i at line line1i is connected to
ground.

dof2i
The degree of freedom selected for the spring elements along the second line line2i.
If line2i = 0, then input for dof2i is ignored.

pseti [1]
Label number of the spring property set for spring-line namei. See PROPERTYSET.

printi [DEFAULT]
Printing flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, printout is controlled by PRINTOUT
PRINTDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

savei [DEFAULT]
Saving (to the porthole file) flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, saving is con-
trolled by PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-201

Chap. 8 Finite element representation SPRING LINES

axi, ayi, azi [0.0]

Global coordinate system components of the spring-line direction, used if the spring-line
connects two coincident nodes, or one node to ground.

tbirthi [0.0]
Element birth time.

tdeathi [0.0]
Element death time.

Note: tbirthi < tdeathi, or tbirthi = tdeathi = 0.0

optioni [SAME]
{SAME / REVERSE}
When multiple nodes exist on the line1 and line2, this flags how the spring element between
nodes on each entity is defined.

SAME - A spring is constructed between nodes at the corresponding parametric

order on each line. Parametric order is in the increasing u-parameter
direction for lines.

REVERSE - A spring is constructed between nodes at the corresponding parametric

order on each line, but for line2 the parametric order is reversed.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SPRING LINES FIRST LAST

DELETE SPRING LINES FIRST LAST

8-202 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
REBAR-LINE Sec. 8.3 Elements

REBAR-LINE NAME NCOINCIDE

linei

Defines a rebar using lines. The rebar defined is then referenced in the EGROUP TRUSS
command to model rebar elements.

NAME [(current highest rebar-line label number) + 1]

Label number of the rebar-line to be defined. This label is referenced in the EGROUP TRUSS
command.

NCOINCIDE [NO]
Coincidence checking is used to determine whether to place a new node at end point of
geometry line. {NO/YES}

linei
List of geometry line label numbers used for defining the rebar.

Auxiliary commands

LIST REBAR-LINE FIRST LAST

DELETE REBAR-LINE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-203

Chap. 8 Finite element representation TRUSS-LINE

TRUSS-LINE

name line1 line2 material area print save tbirth tdeath gapwidth intloc epsin
option

Creates 2-node general truss elements between line1 and line2 or 1-node axisymmetric truss
elements on line1 at the line subdivision locations.

name
Label number of a truss-line

line1
Line1 label number

line2
Line2 label number. Specify line2=0 for axisymmetric truss element.

material [0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the line will
take the default material for the host element group.

area [1.0]
Cross-sectional area for each TRUSS element on the line.

print [DEFAULT]
Printing flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, printout is controlled by PRINTOUT
PRINTDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

YES Print element results as requested by parameter RESULTS of the relevant

EGROUP command.

NO No results are printed for TRUSS elements on the line.

DEFAULT Element printing is governed by parameter PRINTDEFAULT of the

PRINTOUT command.

save [DEFAULT]
Saving (to the porthole file) flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, saving is con-
trolled by PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

YES Save, on the porthole file, element results as requested by parameter

RESULTS of the relevant EGROUP command.

8-204 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
TRUSS-LINE Sec. 8.3 Elements

NO No saving of results for TRUSS elements on the line.

DEFAULT Saving of element results is governed by parameter SAVEDEFAULT of

the PORTHOLE command.

tbirth [0.0]
The time of element birth.

tdeath [0.0]
The time of element death.

Note: tbirth < tdeath, or tbirth = tdeath = 0.0

gapwidth [0.0]
Gap width for each TRUSS element on the line.

intloc [NO]
Option to print the location of the integration point. {YES/NO}

YES Print the element integration point (global) coordinates, in the undeformed
configuration.
NO No printing of integration point data for TRUSS elements on the line.

epsin [0.0]
Initial strain for each TRUSS element on the line.

option [SAME]
{SAME/REVERSE}

When multiple nodes exist on the line1 and line2, this flags how the truss element between
nodes on each entity is defined.

SAME A truss is constructed between nodes at the corresponding parametric

order on each line. Parametric order is in the increasing u-parameter
direction for lines.

REVERSE A truss is constructed between nodes at the corresponding parametric

order on each line. For line2 the parametric order is reversed.

Auxiliary commands

LIST TRUSS-LINE FIRST LAST

DELETE TRUSS-LINE FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-205

Chap. 8 Finite element representation ELTHICKNESS

ELTHICKNESS

namei thick1i thick2i thick3i ... thick16i

Defines thickness for shell elements (EGROUP SHELL) and axisymmetric shell elements
(EGROUP ISOBEAM SUBTYPE =AXISYMMETRIC).

namei
The element label number, in the current element group.

thick1i [0.0]
Thickness of shell element i at local node number 1.

thick2i [thick1i]
Thickness of shell element i at local node number 2.

.
.
.

thick16i [thick1i]
Thickness of shell element i at local node number 16.

Note: Thickness is measured in the direction of the director/normal vector at the node.

Note: The thicknesses thickni are defined for midsurface nodes, ignoring top/bottom
nodes of transition elements.

Auxiliary commands

LIST ELTHICKNESS FIRST LAST

DELETE ELTHICKNESS FIRST LAST

8-206 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 8.3 Elements

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-207

Chap. 8 Finite element representation BLTABLE

BLTABLE NAME BODY

facei edgei pointi ptypei thick0i nlayeri thickti

Command to specify where boundary layers should be built. The boundary layers are actually
built when the BLTABLE=NAME is given to the GBODY (in 3D) or GFACE (in 2D) command.

facei
Label number of face off of which a boundary layer is to be built.

edgei
Label number of edge off of which a boundary layer is to be built (requires the specification
of a face).

pointi
Label number of point off of which a boundary layer is to be built (requires the specification
of an edge).

ptypei
Progression type for boundary layers. {GEOMETRIC/ARITHMETIC}

thick0i
Thickness of first layer.

nlayeri
Number of layers.

thickti
Total thickness.

In 3D, faces should be specified (edgei=0 and pointi=0). In 2D, faces and edges should be
specified (pointi=0). In 1D, edges and points should be specified (facei=0). The command
automatically adds the proper boundary layers to be built on the lower dimension entities,
and updates the subdivisions on edges involved with the boundary layers.

8-208 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BLTABLE-2D Sec. 8.3 Elements

BLTABLE-2D NAME PROGRESSION N-LAYER APPLY-DEFAULT

THICK-FIRST THICK-TOTAL

edgei bodyi thick-firsti thick-totali

Specifies the two-dimensional boundary layers that should be generated when the GFACE
command is executed.

NAME [(current highest label number) + 1]

Label number of the boundary layers definition.

PROGRESSION [ARITHMETIC]
Progression type for the boundary layers.{ARITHMETIC/GEOMETRIC}

ARITHMETIC Difference in element length between adjacent elements is constant.

GEOMETRIC Ratio of element lengths between adjacent elements is constant.

Geometric progression gives rise to a steeper variation of element sizes as illustrated below.

Arithmetic Progression

a d d d

Geometric Progression (r = 2)

a 2a 4a
N-LAYER [1]
Number of boundary layers.

APPLY-DEFAULT [EXTERNAL]
Specifies where the default boundary layers are generated. The default boundary layer is
defined by THICK-FIRST and THICK-TOTAL.{ALL/EXTERNAL}

ALL The default boundary layers are generated on all edges of all bodies, except
for those edges listed in the input table. The boundary layer on the edges
listed in the input table is defined by thick-firsti and thick-totali.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-209

Chap. 8 Finite element representation

EXTERNAL The default boundary layers are generated on all external edges of all
bodies, except those listed in the input table. The boundary layer on the
edges listed in the input table is defined by thick-firsti and thick-totali. Note
that external edges are those edges that are only associated with one face
and are not coincident with any other edge in the model, for example, see
the figure below. In this figure, the black edges are external and the red
edges are internal.

THICK-FIRST [0]
Default thickness of the first boundary layer. If THICK-FIRST=0, no boundary layer is
generated by default.

THICK-TOTAL [0]
Default total thickness of the boundary layer. If THICK-TOTAL=0, no boundary layer is
generated by default. If N-LAYER=1, then the AUI automatically forces THICK-
TOTAL=THICK-FIRST.

edgei , bodyi
Label number of the edges that have a different boundary layer thickness to the default
boundary layer.

thick-firsti
Thickness of the first boundary layer for edgei of bodyi. If thick-firsti=0, no boundary layer is
generated for edgei of bodyi.

thick-totali
Total thickness of the boundary layer for edgei of bodyi. If thick-totali=0, no boundary layer
is generated for edgei of bodyi.

Internal as edge is
shared by face 1 and
face 2 of body 1

E1 E6 E1

E2 B1, F1 E7 B1, F2 E5 E2 B2, F1 E4

E3 E4 E3

Internal as edge 5 of
body 1 is coincident with
edge 2 of body 2

8-210 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 8.3 Elements

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-211

Chap. 8 Finite element representation BLTABLE-3D

BLTABLE-3D NAME PROGRESSION N-LAYER APPLY-DEFAULT

THICK-FIRST THICK-TOTAL

facei bodyi thick-firsti thick-totali

Specifies the two-dimensional boundary layers that should be generated when the GBODY
command is executed.

NAME [(current highest label number) + 1]

Label number of the boundary layers definition.

PROGRESSION [ARITHMETIC]
Progression type for the boundary layers.{ARITHMETIC/GEOMETRIC}

ARITHMETIC Difference in element length between adjacent elements is constant.

GEOMETRIC Ratio of element lengths between adjacent elements is constant.

Geometric progression gives rise to a steeper variation of element sizes as illustrated below.

Arithmetic Progression

a d d d

Geometric Progression (r = 2)

a 2a 4a

N-LAYER [1]
Number of boundary layers.

APPLY-DEFAULT [EXTERNAL]
Specifies where the default boundary layers are generated. The default boundary layer is
defined by THICK-FIRST and THICK-TOTAL.{ALL/EXTERNAL}

ALL The default boundary layers are generated on all faces of all bodies, except
for those faces listed in the input table. The boundary layer on the faces
listed in the input table is defined by thick-firsti and thick-totali.

8-212 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BLTABLE-3D Sec. 8.3 Elements

EXTERNAL The default boundary layers are generated on all external faces of all
bodies, except those listed in the input table. The boundary layer on the
faces listed in the input table is defined by thick-firsti and thick-totali.Note
that external edges are those edges that are only associated with one face
and are not coincident with any other edge in the model, for example, see
the figure below. In this figure, the black edges are external and the red
edges are internal.

THICK-FIRST [0]
Default thickness of the first boundary layer. If THICK-FIRST=0, no boundary layer is
generated by default.

THICK-TOTAL [0]
Default total thickness of the boundary layer. If THICK-TOTAL=0, no boundary layer is
generated by default. If N-LAYER=1, then the AUI automatically forces THICK-
TOTAL=THICK-FIRST.

facei , bodyi
Label number of the faces that have a different boundary layer thickness to the default
boundary layer.

thick-firsti
Thickness of the first boundary layer for facei of bodyi. If thick-firsti=0, no boundary layer is
generated for facei of bodyi.

thick-totali
Total thickness of the boundary layer for facei of bodyi. If thick-totali=0, no boundary layer is
generated for facei of bodyi.

Internal as edge is
shared by face 1 and
face 2 of body 1

E1 E6 E1

E2 B1, F1 E7 B1, F2 E5 E2 B2, F1 E4

E3 E4 E3

Internal as edge 5 of
body 1 is coincident with
edge 2 of body 2

ADINA R & D, Inc. 8-213

Chap. 8 Finite element representation

This page intentionally left blank

8-214 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Chapter 9

Direct finite element data input

COORDINATES NODE Sec. 9.1 Nodal data

COORDINATES NODE SYSTEM

(ENTRIES NAME X Y Z SYSTEM) (SYSTEM = global Cartesian (0))

(ENTRIES NAME XL YL ZL SYSTEM) (SYSTEM = Cartesian)
(ENTRIES NAME R THETA XL SYSTEM) (SYSTEM = cylindrical)
(ENTRIES NAME R THETA PHI SYSTEM) (SYSTEM = spherical)

ni xi yi zi sysi

Defines coordinates for current substructure nodes. The coordinates given refer to the local
system specified by parameter SYSTEM.

SYSTEM [currently active system]

Label number of the required local coordinate system. This specifies the coordinate system
to which any appended data line coordinates refer and determines which column heading
names are allowed by any ENTRIES data line.

ENTRIES
Defines, as column headings, the input for the subsequent tabular entries. The heading
names depend on the type of local coordinate system specified by SYSTEM.

Note: Less than five entry column headings may be given e.g., to specify nodes in a
coordinate plane, but the column heading NAME must always be specified.

ni
Label number for the desired current substructure node, input under the column heading
NAME.

xi [0.0]
yi [0.0]
zi [0.0]
Coordinate values in local coordinate system sysi.

sysi [SYSTEM]
Local coordinate system label number. Note sysi defaults to the system specified by
SYSTEM, which in turn defaults to the currently active coordinate system.

Auxiliary commands

LIST COORDINATES NODE FIRST LAST SYSTEM GLOBAL

DELETE COORDINATES NODE FIRST LAST
If GLOBAL = YES the coordinates are listed in terms of the global Cartesian system.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-3

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input SKEWSYSTEM NODES

SKEWSYSTEMS NODES

ni node1i node2i node3i

Defines skew Cartesian coordinate systems in terms of nodes. Skew systems can be
referenced via DOF-SYSTEM to indicate the local orientation of nodal degrees of freedom.

ni
Label number for the skew system to be defined.

node1i
node2i
node3i
Node label numbers. The vector from node1i to node2i defines the direction of the local X-axis
of the skew system. The vector from node1i to node3i is taken to lie in the local XY-plane of
the skew system. Note that the three nodes must not be collinear.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SKEWSYSTEM FIRST LAST

DELETE SKEWSYSTEM FIRST LAST

9-4 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DOF-SYSTEM NODES Sec. 9.1 Nodal data

DOF-SYSTEM NODES SUBSTRUCTURE

nodei skewsystemi

Assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom associated with a set of nodes in
the current substructure.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure]

Label number of the substructure for the nodes referenced in the accompanying data lines.

nodei
Label number of a node in the current substructure given by SUBSTRUCTURE.

skewsystemi
Label number of a skew coordinate system, as defined by SKEWSYSTEM. Setting
skewsystemi = 0 assigns the global Cartesian system to the nodal degrees of freedom.

Auxiliary commands

LIST DOF-SYSTEM NODES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE

DELETE DOF-SYSTEM NODES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-5

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input MASSES NODES

MASSES NODES

nodei mass1i mass2i mass3i mass4i mass5i mass6i

Assigns concentrated masses to a set of nodes in the current substructure.

nodei
Label number of a node.

mass1i [0.0]
The mass assigned to nodei for the x-translational degree of freedom (global or skew).

mass2i [0.0]
The mass assigned to nodei for the y-translational degree of freedom (global or skew).

mass3i [0.0]
The mass assigned to nodei for the z-translational degree of freedom (global or skew).

mass4i [0.0]
The mass moment of inertia assigned to nodei for the x-rotational degree of freedom (global or
skew).

mass5i [0.0]
The massmoment of inertia assigned to nodei for the y-rotational degree of freedom (global or
skew).

mass6i [0.0]
The mass moment of inertia assigned to nodei for the z-rotational degree of freedom (global or
skew).

Auxiliary commands

LIST MASSES NODES FIRST LAST

DELETE MASSES NODES FIRST LAST

9-6 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DAMPERS NODES Sec. 9.1 Nodal data

DAMPERS NODES

nodei damp1i damp2i damp3i damp4i damp5i damp6i

Assigns concentrated dampers to a set of nodes in the current substructure.

nodei
Label number of a node.

damp1i [0.0]
The damper assigned to nodei for the x-translational degree of freedom (global or skew).

damp2i [0.0]
The damper assigned to nodei for the y-translational degree of freedom (global or skew).

damp3i [0.0]
The damper assigned to nodei for the z-translational degree of freedom (global or skew).

damp4i [0.0]
The rotational damper assigned to nodei for the x-rotational degree of freedom (global or
skew).

damp5i [0.0]
The rotational damper assigned to nodei for the y-rotational degree of freedom (global or
skew).

damp6i [0.0]
The rotational damper assigned to nodei for the z-rotational degree of freedom (global or
skew).

Auxiliary commands

LIST DAMPERS NODES FIRST LAST

DELETE DAMPERS NODES FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-7

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input SHELLNODESDOF NODES

SHELLNODESDOF NODES SUBSTRUCTURE

nodei nsdofi ndirvi

Specifies the number of degrees of freedom and the director vector number, if applicable, for
midsurface shell element nodes. This specification overrides the global default set by
MASTER SHELLNDOF.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure]

The substructure for each node specified in this command.

nodei
The node number.

nsdofi [MASTER SHELLNDOF]

Number of degrees of freedom for nodei, if the node is a shell node.

FIVE Shell midsurface rotational degrees of freedom are used.

SIX Global or skew degrees of freedom are used.

AUTOMATIC The program chooses the number of degrees of freedom to be

used based on certain modeling considerations. See Theory and
Modeling Guide.

ndirvi
Number of a director vector defined by the SHELLDIRECTORVECTOR.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SHELLNODESDOF NODES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE

DELETE SHELLNODESDOF NODES FIRST LAST

9-8 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SHELLDIRECTORVECTOR Sec. 9.1 Nodal data

SHELLDIRECTORVECTOR OPTION SUBSTRUCTURE

ni vxi vyi vzi (OPTION = COMPONENTS)

or

ni phii thetai (OPTION = EULERANGLES)

Defines director vectors that can be applied to shell element nodes in the model via command
SHELLNODESDOF NODES. Director vectors are used in shell analysis to define the shell
director vectors for those nodes with five (5) degrees of freedom. It is not necessary to
specify director vectors for these nodes, however, as the program will automatically compute
director vectors for those nodes for which you do not assign director vectors.

OPTION [COMPONENTS]

COMPONENTS Director vectors are input in the form of vector components in

the global coordinate system. Input vx, vy and vz in the data lines.

EULERANGLES Director vectors are input in the form of Euler rotation angles in
the global coordinate system. Input phi and theta in the data lines.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure]

The substructure for the director vector specified by this command.

ni
Director vector number.

vxi [0.0]
vyi [0.0]
vzi [0.0]
Components of the director vector. This vector need not be normalized.

phii [0.0]
thetai [0.0]
Euler rotation angles measured in degrees.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SHELLDIRECTORVECTOR FIRST LAST OPTION SUBSTRUCTURE

DELETE SHELLDIRECTORVECTOR FIRST LAST OPTION SUBSTRUCTURE

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-9

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input NODESET

NODESET NAME ALL-EXT OPTION GROUP ZONE ELSET TARGET ANGLE

DISTANCE APPEND

nodei substructurei reusei (OPTION = NODE/NEARBY)

namei (OPTION = MERGE/SUBTRACT/INTERSECT)

namei bodyi (OPTION = LINE-EDGE/SURFACE-FACE)

namei (OPTION = GROUP)

Defines a collection of nodes by label number. The NODESET may be referenced by other
commands such as CONSTRAINT and RIGIDLINK.

NAME [(current highest nodeset label number) + 1]

Label number of NODESET.

ALL-EXT [NO]
Indicates whether this node set includes all nodes on the external boundary of the model. If
ALL-EXT=YES, and there are no data input lines, the node set includes all nodes that are on
the external boundary of the model. If ALL-EXT=YES and there are data input lines, the node
set includes only those nodes that are on the external boundary of the model, that are not
listed in the data input lines. Note that parameter ALL-EXT is used only for OPTION =NODE.
{YES/NO}

OPTION [NODE]
The option to define the NODESET. {NODE/GROUP/ZONE/ELEDGESET/ELFACESET/
MERGE/SUBTRACT/INTERSECT/LINE-EDGE/SURFACE-FACE/CHAIN/NEARBY/
ELSET}

NODE Defined from table input.

GROUP Defined from given Element Group.

ZONE Defined from given Zone name. Note that all nodes are added only from
zone entities that contain element information.

ELEDGESET Defined from given element edge set in parameter ELSET.

ELFACESET Defined from given element face set in parameter ELSET.

MERGE Defined by merging nodesets specified in the table.

SUBTRACT Defined by subtracting from the TARGET nodeset the nodesets specified in
the table.

INTERSECT Defined as the intersection of all nodesets specified in the table.

9-10 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
NODESET Sec. 9.1 Nodal data

LINE-EDGE Defined from nodes currently on geometry lines and edges.

SURFACE-FACE Defined from nodes currently on geometry surfaces and faces.

CHAIN Defined according to the normal direction of the first element face in the
table. All element faces of continuous normal direction with the same
element type will be selected. All nodes on these element faces will be filled
in the table.

NEARBY Defined from nodes within a search DISTANCE from nodei with lowest label
number.

ELSET Defined using an element set.

Note: If OPTION=GROUP and parameter GROUP > 0, table input namei will be ignored
(consistent with older versions).
If OPTION=GROUP and a multiple element group is input in table namei, parameter
GROUP must equal 0 (it is a new case).

GROUP [0]
If GROUP > 0 all element nodes of this group will be included in this NODESET. Used only
for OPTION = GROUP.

ZONE
Zone name. Used only for OPTION = ZONE.

ELSET [0]
Label number of element edge set if OPTION = ELEDGESET. Label number of elfaceset if
OPTION = ELFACESET. Ignored for other values of OPTION.

TARGET [0]
Label number of target nodeset for OPTION = SUBTRACT.

ANGLE [0.0]
Angle (in degrees) used to determine all continuous normal directions.

DISTANCE [0.0]
Search distance used to find nodes when OPTION = NEARBY.

APPEND [NO]
Specifies whether the selection is appended to the existing list. {NO/YES}
The APPEND parameter will be ignored if OPTION is directly input or consists entirely of
boolean operations.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-11

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input NODESET

NO The selection overwrites the existing list.

YES The selection is appended to the existing list. If the OPTION is switched
e.g., "From Geometry Surface/Face", the original list will be appended to the
new selection.

nodei
Node label number. Used only for OPTION = NODE or NEARBY. If OPTION = NEARBY and
more than one node is specified, the lowest node label is used for the search.

substructurei [current substructure]

Substructure label number for nodei. Used only for OPTION = NODE.

reusei [current reuse]

Reuse label number for nodei. Used only for OPTION = NODE.

namei
Label number of a nodeset for OPTION=MERGE/SUBTRACT/INTERSECT or label number of
a line, edge, surface or face for OPTION = LINE-EDGE/SURFACE-FACE. When OPTION=
GROUP, this is the element group label.

bodyi
Label number of the body when namei is an edge or face. If bodyi = 0, then namei is a line or
surface.
Auxiliary commands
LIST NODESET FIRST LAST
DELETE NODESET FIRST LAST

9-12 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 9.1 Nodal data

This page intentionally left blank

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-13

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input DMIG-DEFINE

DMIG-DEFINE NAME

nodei dofi valuei colrowi

The command is used to define a direct input matrix.

NAME
Name of direct matrix input.

nodei
Row nodal label number.

dofi
Row degree of freedom.
{X-TRANSLATION/ Y-TRANSLATION/ Z-TRANSLATION/ X-ROTATION/
Y-ROTATION/ Z-ROTATION}

valuei
Real value.

colrowi
Indicates whether current row is COLUMN or ROW of the direct matrix. {COLUMN / ROW}

9-14 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DMIG-APPLY Sec. 9.1 Nodal data

DMIG-APPLY K2GG FACTOR (to input stiffness)

DMIG-APPLY B2GG FACTOR (to input damping)

DMIG-APPLY M2GG FACTOR (to input mass)

namei factori

The command is used to assign a direct input matrix for stiffness, damping, or mass.

FACTOR [1.0]
The global matrix factor that is applied to individual whole matrix.

namei
Name of direct input matrix defined by DMIG-DEFINE.

factori
Factor that is applied to this matrix.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-15

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input RIGIDNODES SHELL

RIGIDNODES SHELL

nodei

Specifies shell midsurface nodes for which the rotation normal to the shell is constrained to
the perpendicular translations of neighboring shell midsurface nodes. This effectively
removes the usual singularity associated with the lack of stiffness for the shell normal
rotation degree of freedom.

This condition may be used, for example, in conjunction with beam or spring elements to
connect two or more offset shell surfaces.

Note that any node specified cannot have 5 or 6 degrees-of-freedom explicitly assigned
(either directly or to any attached geometry); i.e. they must have an automatic number of
degrees-of-freedom assignment. Thereafter, if the automatic calculation otherwise results in 5
degrees-of-freedom, the actual number of degree-of-freedom will be output as 6 and the
required constraint will be applied.

nodei
The label number of a shell midsurface node. The node must belong to the main structure (not
any substructure).

Auxiliary commands

LIST RIGIDNODES SHELL

9-16 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
NODE-SNAP Sec. 9.1 Nodal data

NODE-SNAP GROUP BOUNDARY

pi

The NODE-SNAP command moves (snaps) a node to a point. The user specifies the point (or
points), and the element group number. The node in the element group closest to the point is
moved. This node is then associated with the point, such that any load, BC, spring element,
etc. on the point is applied to the node.

For 3D meshes, the command gives the option to only move those nodes on the mesh
boundary. This prevents the wrong nodes from being moved which can often happen,
especially for free meshes. For example, internal nodes might be closer to the point, even
though the intention is to only move the boundary node.

GROUP [0]
Specifies the element group number of the nodes that can be moved. If GROUP=0 (default),
then all nodes in the model can be moved.

BOUNDARY [YES]
For 3D meshes, specifies which nodes can be moved. {YES/NO}

YES Only those nodes on the boundary of the 3D mesh can be moved

NO All nodes in the 3D mesh can be moved

pi
List of point numbers

Note:

This command works for all element types, but it is recommended to only use this command
for first-order elements.

We recommend only using first-order elements because it is not correct to apply a point force
to just one node in a second-order element. For a second-order elements, the forces should
be applied both to the corner and midside nodes in a manner that is consistent with the
principle of virtual work. This complication does not exist for first-order elements as there is
no midside node.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-17

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input NODE-DELETE

NODE-DELETE OPTION

nodei

Deletes nodes that are not referenced by any other entity in the database such as elements,
rigid links, rigid contact surfaces, etc.

OPTION [LIST]
Specifies the nodes that are to be deleted. {LIST/ALL}

LIST All nodes listed by nodei that are not referenced by any other entity in the
database are deleted.

ALL All nodes in the model that are not referenced by any other entity in the
database are deleted.

nodei
Label number of node to be deleted when OPTION=LIST.

9-18 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
NODE-RENUMBER Sec. 9.1 Nodal data

NODE-RENUMBER OPTION START

namei

Renumbers nodes.

OPTION [LIST]
Specifies the nodes that are to be deleted. {LIST/NODESET/GROUP/ELEMSET}

LIST All nodes listed are renumbered.

NODESET All nodes in the list node sets are renumbered.

GROUP All nodes attached to the elements in the list element groups are renum
bered.

ELEMSET All nodes attached to the elements in the list element sets are renumbered.

START [1]
The start number for the renumbered nodes. If a node in the database already exists with this
number, the next available number is used.

namei
Label number of the list.

Note:
The nodes are sequentially renumbered from the number specified in START. If a node in the
database already exists with the requested number, the next available number is used.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-19

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input

This page intentionally left blank

9-20 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
AXES-NODES Sec. 9.2 Element data

AXES-NODES NAME NODE1 NODE2 NODE3

Defines an axes-system via three model nodes. Axes-systems can be referenced by

element data commands (e.g., EDATA) to indicate the local orientation of the orthotropic
material properties and/or initial strain.

NAME
Label number for the desired axes-system. This is numbered independently for each element
group.

NODE1
Label number of the first node defining the axes-system.

NODE2
Label number of the second node defining the axes-system.

NODE3
Label number of the third node defining the axes-system.

Note: The local x-direction of the axes-system is determined by the vector from NODE1
to NODE2. The local z-direction of the axes-system is determined as the normal
to the plane defined by the three nodes NODE1, NODE2, and NODE3. The local
y-direction of the axes-system is then given by the right-hand rule.

Auxiliary commands

LIST AXES-NODES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP

DELETEAXES-NODES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-21

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input AXES-INITIALSTRAIN

AXES-INITIALSTRAIN NAME LINE ALFA GROUP

elei

This command defines sets of axes to be used with the definition of the directions of the
initial strains in each element. Elements are input in the data lines. A geometry line labeled
LINE and an angle ALFA (in degrees) are used to define the initial strain axes orientations.
The elements can belong to the current element group or an element group input through the
GROUP parameter.
Axes initial strain system can be referenced by commands INITIAL STRAINS and INITIAL
SGRADIENTS to specify initial strains or initial strain gradients.
This command is applicable to 2D, 3D, plate and shell elements.

NAME [(current highest defined label) + 1]

Label number for the desired axes-initial strain system to apply to the specified elements..

LINE
Label number of the defined geometry line. The geometry line must either be a straight line or
an arc line.

ALFA [0.0]
An angle (in degrees) is used together with the geometry line.

GROUP [current element group]

Element group number which this axes-initial strain system is applied to.

elei
Element number which this axes-initial strain system is applied to.

Auxiliary commands

LISTAXES-INITIALSTRAIN FIRST LAST

DELETEAXES-INITIALSTRAIN FIRST LAST

9-22 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
AXES-ORTHOTROPIC Sec. 9.2 Element data

AXES-ORTHOTROPIC NAME LINE ALFA GROUP

elei

This command defines sets of principal material axes orientations for the elements used with
the orthotropic material model. Elements are input in the data input lines. A geometry line
labeled LINE and an angle ALFA (in degrees) are used to define the principal material axes
orientations. The elements can belong to the current element group or an element group input
through the GROUP parameter.
This command is applicable for 2D, plate and shell elements.

NAME [(highest axes-orthotropic system) + 1]

Label number for the desired axes-orthotropic system.

LINE
Label number of the defined geometry line. The geometry line must be a straight line or an arc
line.

ALFA [0.0]
An angle (in degrees) is used together with the geometry line.

GROUP [current element group]

Element group number which this axes-orthotropic system is applied to.

elei
Element number which this axes-orthotropic system is applied to.

Auxiliary commands

LIST AXES-ORTHOTROPIC FIRST LAST

DELETE AXES-ORTHOTROPIC FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-23

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input ELEDGESET

ELEDGESET NAME ALL-EXT OPTION TARGET APPEND

edgei eli groupi (OPTION = ELEDGE)

namei (OPTION = MERGE/SUBTRACT/INTERSECT)

namei bodyi (OPTION = LINE-EDGE)

Defines an element edge set containing edges of 2-D elements. An element edge set can be
used for load application (APPLY-LOAD command) such as pressure, normal traction and
heat flux. It can also be used in the definition of a 2-D contact surface (see command CON-
TACT-ELEMSET ).

NAME [(current highest eledgeset label number) + 1]

Label number of the element edge set.

ALL-EXT [NO]
Indicates whether this element edge set includes all external boundary element edges. If
ALL-EXT=YES, then edgei is a list of element edges which will be excluded in this element
edge set. Note that parameter ALL-EXT is used only for OPTION = ELEDGE. {YES/NO}

OPTION [ELEDGE]
The option to define the element edge set.{ELEDGE/LINE-EDGE/MERGE/SUBTRACT/
INTERSECT}

ELEDGE Define an element edge set by specifying element edges in the table

LINE-EDGE Define an element edge set from geometry lines or edges

MERGE Merge element edge sets specified in the table

SUBTRACT Subtract from the TARGET element edge set the element edge sets specified
in the table

INTERSECT Obtain the intersection of all element edge sets specified in the table

TARGET [0]
Label number of target element face set for OPTION = SUBTRACT .

APPEND [NO]
Specifies whether the selection is appended to the existing list. {NO/YES}
The APPEND parameter will be ignored if OPTION is directly input or consists entirely of
boolean operations.

9-24 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ELEDGESET Sec. 9.2 Element data

NO The selection overwrites the existing list.

YES The selection is appended to the existing list. If the OPTION is switched
e.g., "From Geometry Surface/Face", the original list will be appended to the
new selection.
edgei
Edge number of the element. Used only for OPTION = ELEDGE.

eli
Label number of the element. Used only for OPTION = ELEDGE.

groupi
Label number of the element group. Used only for OPTION = ELEDGE.

namei
Label number of element edge set. Used only for OPTION = MERGE/SUBTRACT/INTER-
SECT (without bodyi) or OPTION = LINE-EDGE (with bodyi).

bodyi
Label number of body; if bodyi = 0 , this means that the geometry is a line. Used only for
OPTION = LINE-EDGE.

Auxiliary commands

LIST ELEDGESET FIRST LAST

DELETE ELEDGESET FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-25

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input ELEMENTSET

ELEMENTSET NAME GROUP OPTION ZONE TARGET APPEND

eli groupi

Defines an element set containing elements specified in the parameter GROUP and in the table
entries.

Element sets containing beam or truss elements can be referenced in the SWEEP and RE-
VOLVE commands to generate reinforcement beam or truss elements.

Element sets containing 3-D solid, 2-D solid, and shell elements can be referenced in the SET-
AXES-MATERIAL and SET-AXES-STRAIN commands to specify the orientation of
orthotropic material properties or initial strains for the elements.

NAME
Label number of ELEMENTSET.

GROUP [0]
Specifies an element group to be included in this element set. If GROUP > 0 is specified, all
elements in the group will be included in this element set.

OPTION [DIRECT]
Specifies the method of defining ELEMENTSET. {DIRECT/GROUP/ZONE/NODES/
ADJACENT/ATTACHED/LINE-EDGE/SURFACE-FACE/VOLUME/BODY/MERGE/
SUBTRACT/INTERSECT}

DIRECT Element set is defined from direct table input.

GROUP Element set is defined from the element groups listed in the table.

ZONE Element set is defined from the given zone.

NODES Element set is defined from nodes listed in the table. The elements
attached to the listed nodes are selected.

ADJACENT Element set is defined from elements listed in the table. The elements
that share nodes with the listed elements are selected.

ATTACHED Element set is defined from elements listed in the table. First, the
elements that share nodes with the listed elements are found. Then, the
elements that share nodes with all these elements are found. This is
recursively repeated until no more elements are found.

9-26 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ELEMENTSET Sec. 9.2 Element data

LINE-EDGE Element set is defined from the geometry lines or body edges listed in
the table. The elements whose element-edges lie on the geometry line or
body edge are selected.

SURFACE-FACE Element set is defined from the geometry surfaces or body faces listed in
the table. The elements whose element-faces lie on the geometry surface
or body face are selected.

VOLUME Element set is defined from the geometry volumes listed in the table. The
elements associated with the geometry volume are selected.

BODY Element set is defined from the geometry bodies listed in the table. The
elements associated with the geometry body are selected.

MERGE Element set is defined by merging element sets listed in the table.

SUBTRACT Element set is defined by subtracting from the TARGET element set the
element sets listed in the table.

INTERSECT Element set is defined by obtaining the intersection of all element sets
listed in the table.

ZONE
Specifies the zone name. This parameter is only used when OPTION=ZONE. This parameter
must be entered.

TARGET [0]
Label number of target element set. This parameter is only used when OPTION =SUBTRACT.

Note: If OPTION is not DIRECT, parameter GROUP will be ignored.

APPEND [NO]
Specifies whether the selection is appended to the existing list. {NO/YES}
The APPEND parameter will be ignored if OPTION is directly input or consists entirely of
boolean operations.

NO The selection overwrites the existing list.

YES The selection is appended to the existing list. If the OPTION is switched
e.g., "From Geometry Surface/Face", the original list will be appended to the
new selection.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-27

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input ELEMENTSET

eli
Label number of the element.

groupi
Label number of the element group for element eli.

Auxiliary commands

LIST ELEMENTSET FIRST LAST

DELETE ELEMENTSET FIRST LAST

Example

ELEMENTSET NAME=2 GROUP=5

3 2
TO
10 2
@

The above command will create an element set 2 which contains all elements in element group
5 and elements 3 to 10 in element group 2.

9-28 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ELFACESET Sec. 9.2 Element data

ELFACESET NAME ALL-EXT OPTION GROUP ZONE ANGLE TARGET

APPEND

facei eli groupi (OPTION = ELFACE)

namei (OPTION = MERGE/SUBTRACT/INTERSECT)
namei bodyi (OPTION = SURFACE-FACE)
namei (OPTION = GROUP)

Defines an element face set containing faces of 3-D and shell elements. An element face set
can be used for load application ( APPLY-LOAD command) such as pressure, normal traction
and heat flux. It can also be used in the definition of a 3-D contact surface (see command
CONTACT-ELEMSET ).

NAME [(current highest elfaceset label number + 1)]

Label number of the element face set.

ALL-EXT [NO]
Indicates whether this element face set includes all external boundary element faces. If ALL-
EXT=YES, then facei is a list of element faces which will be excluded in this element face set.
Note that parameter ALL-EXT is used only for OPTION = ELFACE.{YES/NO}

OPTION [ELFACE]
The option to define the ELFACESET. {ELFACE/GROUP/ZONE-3D/ZONE-SHELL/
CHAIN/SURFACE-FACE/MERGE/SUBTRACT/INTERSECT}

ELFACE ELFACESET is defined from table input.

GROUP ELFACESET is defined from given Element Group.

ZONE-3D ELFACESET is defined from given ZONE name and only external 3D
element faces are selected.

ZONE-SHELL ELFACESET is defined from given ZONE name and only SHELL
element faces are selected.

CHAIN ELFACESET is defined according to the normal direction of first

element face in the table. All element faces of continuous normal
direction with same element type will be filled in table.

SURFACE-FACE ELFACESET is defined from geometry sufaces or faces.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-29

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input ELFACESET

MERGE ELFACESET is defined by merging element face sets specified in the

table.

SUBTRACT ELFACESET is defined by subtracting from the TARGET element face

set the element face sets specified in the table.

INTERSECT ELFACESET defined by obtaining the intersection of all element face

sets specified in the table.

Note: If OPTION=GROUP and parameter GROUP > 0, table input namei will be ignored
(consistent with older versions).
If OPTION=GROUP and a multiple element group is input in table namei, parameter
GROUP must equal 0 (it is a new case).

GROUP [0]
If GROUP > 0 and the GROUP is a SHELL element group, all element faces of this group will
be included in this ELFACESET. Used only for OPTION = GROUP.

ZONE
Zone name. Used only for OPTION = ZONE-3D/ZONE-SHELL.

ANGLE [20.0]
Angle (in degrees) used to determine all continuous normal directions.
{0.0 ANGLE 90.0}

TARGET [0]
Label number of target element face set for OPTION = SUBTRACT .

APPEND [NO]
Specifies whether the selection is appended to the existing list. {NO/YES}
The APPEND parameter will be ignored if OPTION is directly input or consists entirely of
boolean operations.

NO The selection overwrites the existing list.

YES The selection is appended to the existing list. If the OPTION is switched
e.g., "From Geometry Surface/Face", the original list will be appended to the
new selection.

facei
Face number of the element. Used only for OPTION = ELFACE.

eli
Label number of the element. Used only for OPTION = ELFACE.

9-30 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ELFACESET Sec. 9.2 Element data

groupi
Label number of the element group. Used only for OPTION = ELFACE.

namei
Label number of element face set. Used only for OPTION = MERGE/SUBTRACT/INTER-
SECT (without bodyi) or OPTION = SURFACE-FACE (with bodyi). When OPTION=
GROUP, this is the element group label.

bodyi
Label number of body; if bodyi = 0 , this means that the geometry is a surface. Used only for
OPTION = SURFACE-FACE.

Auxiliary commands
LIST ELFACESET FIRST LAST
DELETE ELFACESET FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-31

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input

This page intentionally left blank.

9-32 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ENODES Sec. 9.2 Element data

ENODES SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP NNODES

(ENTRIES EL AUX N1 N2 ... NK)

eli auxi n1i n2i n3i n4i ... nki

ENODES defines element nodal connectivity for the substructure and element group speci-
fied. The defaults are the currently active substructure and element group. NNODES is only
used for specifying maximum number of nodes allowed for ADINA GENERAL elements

SUBSTRUCTURE [currently active substructure]

Label number for the substructure to which subsequent nodal and element data refer.

GROUP [currently active element group]

Element group label number.

NNODES [32]
Maximum number of nodes allowed for ADINA GENERAL elements. (command line input
only).

ENTRIES
Defines, as column headings, the input for the subsequent tabular entries. Specifies the
element nodes for which the global node numbers shall be input. The column heading EL
must always be specified first, and the essential and optional nodal headings for each type of
element are:

eli n1i ... n4i TRUSS elements.

eli n1i ... n9i TWODSOLID elements.
eli n1i ... n9i FLUID2 elements.
eli n1i ... n27i THREEDSOLID elements.
eli n1i ... n27i FLUID3 elements.
eli auxi n1i n2i BEAM elements.
eli auxi n1i ... n4i ISOBEAM elements.
eli auxi n1i ... n4i PIPE elements.
eli n1i ... n3i PLATE elements.
eli n1i ... n32i SHELL elements.
eli n1i ... n32i GENERAL elements.
eli n1i id1i n2i id2i SPRING elements.
eli n1i n2i ALIGNMENT elements.

eli
Element number within the current substructure and element group.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-33

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input ENODES

auxi
n1i , n2i , n3i ,... , nki
The global node numbers defining the element in the order given by ENTRIES.
Note: Node auxi is required by the BEAM, ISOBEAM and PIPE elements.

Note: The spring element is defined by n1i, id1i, n2i and id2i, where id1i and id2i are the
global degrees of freedom. Parameter id2i is ignored when n2i=0

Node numbering

The node numbering convention and other pertinent information for the truss, beam,
isobeam, pipe, plate and general elements are described in the corresponding sections in the
Theory and Modeling Guide, Volume I: ADINA, as follows:

Element Section
TRUSS 2.1
BEAM 2.4
ISOBEAM 2.5
PIPE 2.8
PLATE 2.6
GENERAL 2.9.1

The node numbering for the TWODSOLID/FLUID2, THREEDSOLID/FLUID3, SHELL and

SPRING elements is explained in the following sections.

1. TWODSOLID/FLUID2 elements

The TWODSOLID/FLUID2 elements are triangles and quadrilaterals. Their nodes are
numbered as shown in Fig. ENODES-1.

2. THREEDSOLID/FLUID3 elements
The THREEDSOLID/FLUID3 elements fall into two categories based on node numbering:

(a) the brick elements (4-, 8-, 20-, 21- and 27-node) and degenerate elements formed by
collapsing the 8-, 20- and 27-node brick elements, and
(b) the tetrahedral elements (4-, 10- and 11-node).

Fig. ENODES-2 shows the node numbering convention of the 27-node brick element. Note
that node 21 is in the center of the element. The elements that are based on the 27-node brick
must be numbered according to the convention shown in the figure, e.g., a node number that
is reserved for a vertex cannot be used to number a node on an edge.

Fig. ENODES-3 shows the node numbering for elements based on the 27-node brick.

9-34 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ENODES Sec. 9.2 Element data

The 21-, 20-, and 8-node bricks (Fig. ENODES-3(f), (d) and (a) respectively) result when
the nodes on the element faces, the node at the element center, and the nodes on the
element edges are progressively left out.
The 6-node prism (Fig. ENODES-3(b)) and its corresponding numbering are obtained by
collapsing one face (1-4-8-5) of the 8-node brick.
The 15-node prism (Fig. ENODES-3(c)) and its corresponding numbering are obtained by
collapsing one face (1-4-8-5) of the 20-node brick.
The 13-node pyramid (Fig. ENODES-3(e)) and its corresponding numbering are obtained
from the 20-node brick by collapsing one face (1-2-3-4), and then collapsing the edge so
formed into the apex of the pyramid.
The 14-node pyramid (Fig. ENODES-3(g)) and its corresponding numbering are obtained
from the 27-node brick by collapsing one face (1-2-3-4), and then collapsing the edge so
formed into the apex of the pyramid; nodes 21 26 are not used, leaving only the last
node (27) on the base of the pyramid.

The 4-, 10- and 11-node tetrahedral elements are numbered as shown in Fig. ENODES-4.

3. SHELL elements
Fig. ENODES-5 shows the node numbering conventions for SHELL elements.

In midsurface nodes representation (Fig. ENODES-5(a)), node numbers 13 16 are

always reserved for element interior nodes. Therefore, in the case of a 9-node shell
element defined using midsurface nodes, the nodes defined are the 1 4 at the vertices, 5
8 on the edges and 13 in the center of the element. The center node is defined by
nodes 13 and 29 if the 9-node shell element is defined using top-bottom nodes represen-
tation.
In top-bottom nodes representation (Fig. ENODES-5(b)), the element interior nodes are
numbered 13 16 on the top surface and 29 32 on the bottom surface. Each top surface
node has a dual bottom surface node. Nodes 1 16 are on the top surface, or on the
middle surface if the dual node on the bottom surface is not present. Nodes 17 32 are
on the bottom surface.
Triangular shell elements are obtained by degeneration of these quadrilateral shell
elements, that is, by assigning nodes 1 and 4 (also nodes 17 and 20 if applicable) to the
same global number. Note that for triangular shell elements, nodes 8 and 12 (also nodes
24 and 28 if applicable) are not used. Further, interior nodes are not allowed. Some
examples of triangular shell elements using midsurface node representation are shown in
Fig. ENODES-6.

4. Nonlinear SPRING elements

For nonlinear springs, the stiffness of the spring can change as functions of the displacement

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-35

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input ENODES

between 2 nodes (or node to ground). The 2 categories of nonlinear spring are
-- material nonlinear only (MNO) spring (specify NONLINEAR=MNO in EGROUP
SPRING command)
-- geometric nonlinear spring (specify NONLINEAR=GEOM in EGROUP SPRING com-
mand)

Option 1 (MNO):

The 2 nodes of the spring are initially coincident. The spring action is assumed to act always
in the global directions regardless of the current relative positions of the 2 nodes. Figure
ENODES-7 illustrates the use, where n1 and n2 have moved apart but the spring stiffness
continues to act into the global directions.
To use this spring option, specify

ENODES
el n1 id1 n2

where id1 = 1, 2 and 3 indicates global X, Y and Z directions respectively. id1 = 4, 5, and 6
for torsional springs.

If n2 = 0, then a grounded spring is defined.

Option 2 (MNO):

The 2 nodes of the spring are initially coincident. The spring action is assumed to act always
in an arbitrary direction specified by the user. Figure ENODES-8 illustrates the use of this
option.
To use this spring option, the EDATA command is used to specify the spring action direction.

ENODES
el n1 id1 n2 id2

EDATA
el ax ay az
ax, ay, az are vector components in the global X, Y, Z directions.
If n2 = 0, then a grounded spring is defined.
For translational spring, specify id1 = 0 and id2 = 0. For torsional spring, specify id1 = 0 and
id2 = 1.

9-36 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ENODES Sec. 9.2 Element data

Option 3 (MNO):

The 2 nodes of the spring are initially not coincident. The spring action is assumed to act
always in the direction connecting the original positions of the two nodes. Figure ENODES-9
illustrates the use of this option.
To use this spring option, specify

ENODES
el n1 id1 n2

id1 = 1 for translational spring and id1 = 4 for torsional spring. If OPTION=TRANSVERSE is
specified in EGROUP SPRING command, then the spring action acts in the transverse
directions to n1 to n2 direction.

Option 4 (Geometric Nonlinear):

The 2 nodes of the spring are initially not coincident. The spring action is assumed to act in
the direction connecting the current positions of the two nodes. Hence, the spring direction
changes as the position of the two nodes changes. Figure ENODES-10 illustrates the use of
this option.
To use this spring option, specify

ENODES
el n1 id1 n2
id1 = 1 for translational spring and id1 = 4 for torsional spring.

Examples of input for options 1 to 3 are given in the following tables. Table ENODES-1 covers
the translational spring elements, and the Table ENODES-2 covers the torsional spring
elements.

Auxiliary commands

LIST ENODES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP

DELETE ENODES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP
NODE-DELETE

NODE-DELETE {YES/NO} allows for the deletion of unattached nodes along with the
element deletion. The default is YES.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-37

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input ENODES

3 3
l l
3
l

6l l
l 5 6l 7 l
l 5
l
l l
1l l
l 2 l 2
2 1l 4 l
4
1

(a) 3-, 6- & 7-node triangles

2l 1 2 5 1 2 5 1

l
l

l
l

l
l
8 9

l
6 6 8

l
l

l
l
l

l
l

l
4 3

l
3 7 4 3 7 4

(b) 4-, 8- & 9-node quadrilaterals

Fig. ENODES-1: Node numbering of 2-D elements

3l
10
l
11l 10
26 2 3l l
l 2
l l
19l
4l 23 11 26l
12 l 9l 19 l l l
9
24 l l 23l
l 18
7 21l 1 l 18 24 l l 21
l l l
20 l 14 22 7l 14 l 22
l l
15l l l
l l 6
25 1, 4, 12 l
l 27
l l 6 l
27 17l 15 13
l
8 l
l
13 l
5, 8, 16 17, 20, 25
16
l
5
Nodes 1 to 8 are at element vertices.
Nodes 9 to 20 are on element edges.
Node 21 is at the center of the element.
Nodes 22 to 27 are on the element faces.

Figure ENODES-2: Node numbering convention for

the 27-node brick element

9-38 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ENODES Sec. 9.2 Element data

3l 2 3 2 l1,2,3,4
l l l

1
4l l
l
1, 4
7l
7l l 7 6
6 l l l
6
8l
l l l
5, 8 8 5 l
5
(a) 6-node prism (b) 8-node brick (c) 5-node pyramid

10 1,2,3,4,
l 2 3 10 2 l 9,10,11,12
3l l l l l
11l 9l
l 11 9l 12 1
4 l l l 19 l 18
19 l l l 18 l
1, 4, 12 19l l 18 20 l
7l 14
17, 20l 20 l 17l 15 l l
7l l
l 7 14 l 17 6
l
14 6 l l l 6
l l 15
15 13 l l 8l l
l
13 l
13
l l l
5, 8, 16 16 l
8 16 5 5

(d) 15-node prism (e) 20-node brick (f) 13-node pyramid

1,2,3,4,
3 10 2 l 9,10,11,12
l l l
11l 9l
12 1
4l l l 19 l 18
l
19l l 18 20 l
21 l 7l 14
20 l 17l 15 l l
l 17 6
7 14 6 l
l
l
15 l l 27
l l
13 8l l
13
l l l l
16 l
8 16 5 5

(g) 21-node brick (h) 14-node pyramid

Figure ENODES-3: Node numbering of the elements derived from the 27-node brick

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-39

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input ENODES

4 4 4
l
l l

9 l
9
l
10l 10l 11
l 8 l
l 8
l 3 l l 3
3
7l l 7l l
6 6
1l l
2 1l l l
2 1l l l
5 5 2

(a) 4-node tetrahedron (b) 10-node tetrahedron (c) 11-node tetrahedron

Figure ENODES-4: Node numbering of tetrahedral elements

2 For the 9-node shell, the

6 midsurface center node
9
is local node number 13.
10 14 5

15 1
13
3
12
16
7
8
11

a) Midsurface nodes 4
2 For the 9-node shell, the
6 top-bottom center nodes
18 9 are local node numbers
22 14 13 and 29.
10 25 5

26 15 30 21 1
13
3 31
29 12 17
16
19 7
32 28
8
23 11
24
27 4

b) Top-bottom nodes 20

Figure ENODES-5: Node numbering conventions for the shell element

9-40 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 ENODES Sec. 9.2 Element data

2 2
2 l l
l
6l
5 10 l
9
6l l l
l 5
l
l 3l l
3 l 1, 4 7 l
7 11 l
l 1, 4 3l 1, 4
(a) 3-node triangular shell (b) 6-node triangular shell (c) 9-node triangular shell

Figure ENODES-6: Node numbering for some triangular shell elements, midsurface nodes

Z, w n1 and n2 initially coincident

kx = f1(u), ky = f2(v), kz = f3(w) and always
acting in global directions X, Y, Z.
Here, 3 spring elements are defined for
kz spring action in X, Y and Z directions.
n2
n1(0) n1 ky

n2(0) kx
Y, v

X, u
Figure ENODES-7: Nonlinear Spring, Option 1

Z, w

ax, ay, az
d direction n1 and n2 initially coincident
k k = f(d)
n1 spring stiffness between nodes always act
n1(0) n2
in the specified direction ax, ay, az.

n2(0) Y, v

X, u
Figure ENODES-8: Nonlinear Spring, Option 2

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-41

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input ENODES

Z, w n1(0) and n2(0) indicate the original

positions of the two spring nodes.
spring stiffness always acts in direction
n1(0) to n2(0).
line joining n1 to n2(p) is parallel to line
n2(0) joining n1(0) to n2(0).

n1(0)

n2(p) Y, v

n1 k
X, u n2

Figure ENODES-9: Nonlinear Spring, Option 3

Z, w

n2(0)

n1(0)
Y, v
n2
n1 k
X, u

Figure ENODES-10: Nonlinear Spring, Option 4

9-42 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ENODES Sec. 9.2 Element data

Different Different node

node numbers numbers and Grounded
and noncoincident initially coincident node
coordinates coordinates
Z Z
Global Global
Y direction Y direction
X X
1
n2 n1,n2 U n1 1
U
2
U
2
id1 = 1 U id1 = 1
n1
n2
2 U1
n1,n2 U1 U
id1 = 2 id1 = 2
n1 n1
U
1 n1 n2

ENODES U2 U1
n2
el n1 1 n2 U
1 id1 = 3 id1 = 3
(id2 not used) n1 n1
n1,n2

ENODES ENODES
el n1 id1 n2 el n1 id1 0
(id2 not used) (id2 not used)

Arbitrary direction Arbitrary direction

a n2 U2 n1
1 a
n1,n2 n1 U 1
U
ENODES ENODES
el n1 0 n2 0 el n1 0 0 0
EDATA EDATA
el ax ay az el ax ay az

Table ENODES-1: Input cases for translational nonlinear spring elements

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-43

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input ENODES

Different Different node

node numbers numbers and Grounded
and noncoincident initially coincident node
coordinates coordinates
Z Z
Global Global
Y direction Y direction
X X
n2 n1,n2 U1 n1 U
1

U
2
U
2
id1 = 4 id1 = 4
n1
n2
U1
n1,n2 U
1
U2
id1 = 5 id1 = 5
n1 n1
U
1 n1 n2

ENODES U2 U1
n2
el n1 4 n2 U
1 id1 = 6 id1 = 6
(id2 not used) n1 n1
n1,n2

ENODES ENODES
el n1 id1 n2 el n1 id1 0
(id2 not used) (id2 not used)

Arbitrary direction Arbitrary direction

a n2 U2 n1
1 a
n1,n2 n1 U 1
U
ENODES ENODES
el n1 0 n2 0 el n1 0 0 1
EDATA EDATA
el ax ay az el ax ay az

Table ENODES-2: Input cases for torsional nonlinear spring elements

9-44 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 9.2 Element data

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-45

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input MESH-CONVERT

MESH-CONVERT IN OUT ELEMENT-TYPE GROUP SKEW LOAD-INIT

NCOINCIDE

Converts 2-D solid, 3-D solid or shell elements by changing the number of nodes of the
element.
Element Type Original Element Converted Element
2-D Solid 8-node quadrilateral 9-node quadrilateral
6-node triangular 7-node triangular
Shell 8-node quadrilateral 9-node quadrilateral
3-D Solid 20-node brick 27-node brick
10-node tetrahedral 11-node tetrahedral

IN
OUT
These parameters are currently not used.

ELEMENT-TYPE [TWODSOLID]
Selects the type of element to be converted. {TWODSOLID/THREEDSOLID/SHELL/
ALL}

GROUP [ALL]
Selects the element group to be converted. GROUP = ALL means all element groups will be
converted. {ALL/>0}

SKEW [NO]
Indicates whether skew system is assigned to newly created nodes if all other nodes on the
element face are assigned a skew system.{NO/YES}

LOAD-INIT [NO]
Indicates whether existing nodal-based prescribed loads (e.g., displacement, temperature,
velocity) and initial conditions are applied on the newly created nodes.{NO/YES}
Note: - Load or initial condition will only be applied on a created mid-surface node if all
the eight nodes on the element face have the load or initial condition applied.
- If a load or initial condition is applied after this command, it will not be applied on
the newly created nodes. Hence, this command should normally be used at the
end of model creation.

NCOINCIDE [NEW]
Indicates whether nodal coincidence is checked with newly generated nodes or all existing
nodes. When a node already exists at a location, no new node will be created. {NEW/ALL}
NEW Check only with newly generated nodes.
ALL Check with all existing nodes.

9-46 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
ENODES-INTERFACE Sec. 9.2 Element data

ENODES-INTERFACE SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP

(ENTRIES EL N1 N2 N3 ... NK)

eli n1i n2i n3i ... nki

Defines fluid-structure interface elements when potential-based fluid elements are connected
to solid elements.

SUBSTRUCTURE [currently active substructure]

Label number for the substructure to which subsequent nodal and element data refer.

GROUP [currently active element group]

Element group label number.

ENTRIES
Defines, as column headings, the input for the subsequent tabular entries. Specifies the
element nodes for which the global node numbers shall be input. The column heading EL
must always be specified first, and the essential and optional nodal headings for each type of
element are:

eli n1i ... n3i FLUID2-interface elements

eli n1i ... n9i FLUID3-interface elements

eli
Element number within the current substructure and element group.

n1i
n2i
n3i...
nki
The global node numbers defining the element in the order given by ENTRIES.

Auxiliary commands

LIST ENODES-INTERFACE FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP

DELETE ENODES-INTERFACE FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-47

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input EDATA

EDATA SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP UNDEFINED

eli materiali areai printi savei tbirthi tdeathi epsini gapwidthi intloci
(for TRUSS elements)

eli materiali thicki beti printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci betii itrii
(for TWODSOLID elements)

eli materiali ielxi printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci maxesi maxesii itrii
(for THREEDSOLID elements)

eli materiali sectioni endreleasei printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci epsini
rigid1i rigid2i xoi yoi zoi xyzosystemi
(for BEAM elements)

eli materiali sectioni printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci epaxli ephoopi
(for ISOBEAM elements)

eli materiali thicki beti printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci betii meps11i meps22i
meps12i flex11i flex22i flex12i
(for PLATE elements)

eli materiali beti printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci betii ithsi eps11i eps22i
eps12i eps13i eps23i geps11i geps22i geps12i geps13i geps23i failurei
(for SHELL elements)

eli materiali sectioni printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci epsini

(for PIPE elements)

eli matrixseti printi savei

(for GENERAL elements)

eli propertyseti printi savei axi ayi azi tbirthi tdeathi g0i cidi
(for 6DOF-SPRING elements; propertyseti is ignored before version 8.8.3)

eli propertyseti printi savei axi ayi azi tbirthi tdeathi

(for SPRING elements)

eli materiali printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci ifrei itrii

(for FLUID2 elements)

eli materiali ielxi printi savei tbirthi tdeathi intloci ifrei itrii
(for FLUID3 elements)

9-48 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EDATA Sec. 9.2 Element data

eli printi savei tdeathi align-translationi align-distancei align-rotationi

triadst1i triadst2i
(for ALIGNMENT elements)

Specifies property data associated with individual elements in a group.

SUBSTRUCTURE [currently active substructure]

Label number for the substructure to which subsequent element data refer.

GROUP [currently active group]

Element group label number.

UNDEFINED [IGNORE]
Indicates what action is taken if element specified in data line is not defined.
{IGNORE/ERROR}

IGNORE - Program ignores any undefined element specified.

ERROR - Program issues input error for undefined element and continues.

eli
Element label number.

materiali [element group default]

Material number. The material type must be the same as the default material type for the
element group.

printi [DEFAULT]
Controls printout of element results. The value DEFAULT corresponds to that given for
PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

savei [DEFAULT]
Controls saving of element results to porthole file. The value DEFAULT corresponds to that
given for PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT.

tbirthi [0.0]
tdeathi [0.0]
Element birth and death times, respectively.

intloci [0]
Integration point coordinates printout flag.

0 No printing of integration point coordinates.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-49

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input EDATA

1 Print integration point global coordinates.

areai [0.0]
Cross-sectional area. A 0.0 value indicates the element has the same cross-sectional area as
the element with the lowest label number in the group.

thicki [0.0]
Element thickness. A 0.0 value indicates the element has the same thickness as the element
with the lowest label number in the group.

Note: To define shell element thickness command ELTHICKNESS should be used.

ielxi
This parameter is obsolete.

ithsi [0]
Indicates whether the transverse shear adjustment feature is used (1) or not (0). This feature
is only available for elastic shells. {0/1}

maxesi [0]
Material axes label number. See AXES-NODES.

beti [0.0]
Material angle for orthotropic materials.

sectioni [0]
Cross-section label number. See CROSS-SECTION.

endreleasei [0]
End release label number. See ENDRELEASE.

propertyseti [element group default]

Propertyset label number. For SPRING element, see PROPERTYSET. For 6DOF-SPRING
element, see PSET-6DOF.

matrixseti [element group default]

Matrix set label number. See MATRIXSET.

maxesii [0]
Initial strain axes label number. See AXES-NODES.

betii [0.0]
Initial strain angle.

9-50 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EDATA Sec. 9.2 Element data

epsini [0.0]
Initial axial strain (TRUSS, BEAM, PIPE elements), or initial force if BEAM OPTION=BOLT
is used.

epaxli [0.0]
Initial axial strain (ISOBEAM elements).

ephoopi [0.0]
Initial hoop strain.

meps11i [0.0]
meps22i [0.0]
meps12i [0.0]
Initial membrane strains.

flex11i [0.0]
flex22i [0.0]
flex12i [0.0]
Initial flexural strains.

eps11i [0.0]
eps22i [0.0]
eps12i [0.0]
eps13i [0.0]
eps23i [0.0]
Initial strains.

geps11i [0.0]
geps22i [0.0]
geps12i [0.0]
geps13i [0.0]
geps23i [0.0]
Initial strain gradients.

gapwidthi [0.0]
Initial gap width of element. The gap option is used only for the 2-node TRUSS element with
a PLASTIC-BILINEAR or PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR material model.

failurei [0]
Label number of failure model.

ifrei [0]
This option is not supported from Version 8.0 onwards.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-51

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input EDATA

itrii [0]
Collapsed element indicator.

0 Collapsed quadrilateral or hexahedral element.

-1 True triangular or tetrahedral element.

axi [0.0]
ayi [0.0]
azi [0.0]
Direction of grounded spring element.

rigid1i [0.0]
rigid2i [0.0]
Length of rigid end zones at the start (rigid1) and/or end (rigid2) of a BEAM element. See
EGROUP BEAM.

g0 i [0]
Geometry label used to define spring element direction (NOT used for 6DOF spring-nodeset).

cidi [0]
Coordinate system (defined by the SYSTEM command) used to define spring element
coordinate system.

-1 No coordinate system used

0 Global coordinate system used

>0 Coordinate system used

xoi [0.0]
yoi [0.0]
zoi [0.0]
Components of orientation vector for beam element i.

xyzosystemi [SKEW]
Specifies whether the orientation vector is based on the skew system of node 1 of beam i.
{GLOBAL/SKEW}

printi [element group default]

If printi = DEFAULT, the value of printi is taken from EGROUP ALIGNMENT PRINT; if printi =
NO, element results are not printed; if printi =YES, some element results are printed, if printi
=VERBOSE, all element results are printed.

9-52 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
EDATA Sec. 9.2 Element data

savei [element group default]

If savei = DEFAULT, the value of savei is taken from EGROUP ALIGNMENT SAVE; if savei =
NO, element results are not saved; if savei =YES, either some element results are saved (if
EGROUP ALIGNMENT SAVE is not equal to VERBOSE) or all element results are saved (if
EGROUP ALIGNMENT SAVE is equal to VERBOSE).

align-translationi [element group default]

The number of an ALIGN-TRANSLATION definition. If align-translationi is set to zero, then
the alignment element does not align the translations.

align-distancei [element group default]

The number of an ALIGN-DISTANCE definition. If align-distancei is set to zero, then the
alignment element does not align the distance.

align-rotationi [element group default]

The number of an ALIGN-ROTATION definition. If align-rotationi is set to zero, then the
alignment element does not align the triads.

triadst1i triadst2i [element group default]

The label number of the triadsets used in local nodes 1 and 2, defined using the TRIADSETS
command.

Notes:

1) If EGROUP ALIGNMENT RESULTS=FORCES, printi =YES and VERBOSE are identical;

both choices print the local forces. (Similar for savei)

2 If EGROUP ALIGNMENT RESULTS=ALIGNMENTS, printi =YES prints the actual transla-

tional, distance and rotational alignments. printi =VERBOSE prints, in addition, the pre-
scribed translational, distance and rotational alignments, the translational, distance and
rotational misalignments, and also the translational, distance and rotational forces. (Similar for
savei)

This same information is saved to the porthole file when savei=YES. However, for saving,
there is no savei =VERBOSE option. To save all information to the porthole file, use EGROUP
ALIGNMENT SAVE=VERBOSE.

3) If triadst1i is equal to zero, then the triadset is taken from the triadset assigned to local
node 1. It is only necessary to set triadst1i if there is more than one triadset assigned to local
node 1. Similar comments hold for triadst2i.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-53

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input EDATA

This page intentionally left blank.

9-54 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
COPY-ELEMENT-NODES Sec. 9.2 Element data

COPY-ELEMENT-NODES FROM TO

Copies over all elements and nodes from one finite element analysis program to another finite
element analysis program, creating new element groups for the destination program. If, for a
particular element group type, there is no equivalent group type available in the destination
program the source group will not be copied.

FROM [ADINA]
The source finite element analysis program. {ADINA/ADINA-T/ADINA-F}

TO
The destination finite element analysis program. {ADINA/ADINA-T/ADINA-F}

The following table indicates the source-destination element type mapping used by this
command:

SOURCE DESTINATION

ADINA ADINA-T ADINA-F

TRUSS ONEDCONDUCTION <not copied>

TWODSOLID TWODCONDUCTION TWODFLUID
THREEDSOLID THREEDCONDUCTION THREEDFLUID
BEAM ONEDCONDUCTION <not copied>
ISOBEAM ONEDCONDUCTION <not copied>
PLATE SHELLDCONDUCTION <not copied>
SHELL SHELLCONDUCTION <not copied>
PIPE ONEDCONDUCTION <not copied>
SPRING <not copied> <not copied>
GENERAL <not copied> <not copied>
FLUID2 TWODCONDUCTION TWODFLUID
FLUID3 THREEDCONDUCTION THREEDFLUID

ADINA-T ADINA ADINA-F

ONEDCONDUCTION TRUSS <not copied>

TWODCONDUCTION TWODSOLID TWODFLUID
THREEDCONDUCTION THREEDSOLID THREEDFLUID
CONVECTION <not copied> CONVECTION
RADIATION <not copied> RADIATION
SHELLCONDUCTION SHELL <not copied>

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-55

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input COPY-ELEMENT-NODES

ADINA-F ADINA ADINA-T

TWODFLUID TWODSOLID TWODCONDUCTION

THREEDFLUID THREEDSOLID THREEDCONDUCTION
CONVECTION <not copied> CONVECTION
RADIATION <not copied> RADIATION

9-56 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
DELETE-FE-MODEL Sec. 9.2 Element data

DELETE-FE-MODEL PROGRAM

Deletes all finite element data associated with a particular analysis program from the model
database - including element groups, elements, nodes, contact groups, contact-surfaces, and
contact segments.

PROGRAM [ADINA]
The finite element analysis program for which all data is to be deleted. {ADINA/
ADINA-T/ADINA-F}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-57

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input REVOLVE

REVOLVE NAME EGROUP XA YA ZA X0 Y0 Z0 ANGLE NEREV

NODES NFIRST EFIRST NCOINCIDE NTOLERANCE
DELETE-EGROUP LOADS-ELEMENT AXES-ORTHOTROPIC
AXES-INITIAL BC-FIXITY RBAR-NODESET
RBAR-ELEMSET RBAR-EGROUP RBAR-TYPE
RBAR-SECTION RBAR-MATERIAL CGROUP CNAME
DELETE-CGROUP RBAR-AREA ALL-GROUP

Generates THREEDSOLID or FLUID3 elements by revolving 2D elements about an axis.

The rule for generating a new element group type is

TWODSOLID > THREEDSOLID

FLUID2 > FLUID3

NAME [current highest element group label + 1]

Element group label number of the volume elements. If NAME already exists, it must be a
THREEDSOLID or FLUID3 element group.

EGROUP
Previously defined 2D element group label.

XA [0.0]
YA [0.0]
ZA [0.0]
Components of the rotation axis direction.

X0 [0.0]
Y0 [0.0]
Z0 [0.0]
Global coordinates of the origin of the axis of rotation.

ANGLE
Angle of rotation (in degrees).
Note: ANGLE must be in the range <-360,360>. The sign of the angle is given by
considering the right hand rule.

NEREV [1]
The number of elements in the direction of rotation.

NODES [0]
Number of nodes for the revolved 3D elements. {0/8/20/27}

9-58 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
REVOLVE Sec. 9.2 Element data

If NODES=0, then the following rule applies:

Max. number of nodes Number of nodes

in 2D element group in 3D element group

4 8
8 20
9 27

If NODES is non-zero, then CGROUP is not applicable.

NFIRST [1]
The starting node label for the generated nodes.

EFIRST [1]
The starting element label for the generated elements.

NCOINCIDE [NO]
Indicates whether the locations of new nodes generated are compared with existing nodes. If
NCOINCIDE=YES, then the location of generated generated nodes will be checked against
existing nodes. For each generated node, if it lies within the tolerance (specified by
NTOLERANCE) of an existing node, no new node will be created. {YES/NO}

NTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If NCOINCIDE=YES parameter provides a tolerance for checking the global coordinates of a
location againts existing nodes.

DELETE-EGROUP [YES]
Allows to preserve or delete original 2D element group, after the volume element group is
generated. {YES/NO}

LOADS-ELEMENT [NO]
Indicates whether element loading acting on the edges of the 2D elements will be converted
to element loadings on the faces of the 3D elements. {NO/YES}

AXES-ORTHOTROPIC [NO]
Indicates whether the material axis systems of the 2D elements will be converted to material
strain axis systems for 3D elements. {NO/YES}

AXES-INITIALSTRAIN [NO]
Indicates whether the initial strain axis systems of the 2D elements to 3D elements will be
converted to initial strain axis systems for the 3D elements. {NO/YES}

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-59

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input REVOLVE

BC-FIXITY [NO]
Indicates whether fixity boundary conditions will be assigned to the generated nodes
corresponding to the fixity conditions on the original nodes. {NO/YES}

RBAR-NODESET [0]
Label number of a node set defined by the command NODESET. If this parameter references a
node set that is defined, truss or beam elements (as specified by parameter RBAR-TYPE) will
be generated by connecting the nodes along the revolved direction.

RBAR-ELEMSET [0]
Label number of an element set defined by the command ELEMENTSET. If this parameter
references an element set that is defined, the elements in the element set will be duplicated in
the revolved direction.

RBAR-EGROUP [(current highest element group label number) + 1]

Label number of an element group for the elements generated from parameter RBAR-
NODESET. Note that elements generated from parameter RBAR-ELEMSET are appended to
the existing element group.

RBAR-TYPE [TRUSS]
Specifies the type of element to be generated from parameter RBAR-NODESET. {TRUSS/
BEAM}

RBAR-SECTION [1]
Label number of a cross section to be assigned to beam elements generated from parameter
RBAR-NODESET. Note that cross sections can be defined by the command CROSS-SEC-
TION.

RBAR-MATERIAL [1]
Label number of a material to be assigned to elements generated from parameter RBAR-
NODESET.

CGROUP
Specifies a 2-D contact group to be used for generating 3-D contact surfaces. Note that only
2-D contact surface elements which are attached to the mesh to be revolved will be used for
generating 3-D contact surface elements.

CNAME [(current highest contact group label number) + 1]

Label number of 3-D contact group that will contain the generated 3-D contact surface
elements. If CNAME already exists (it must be a 3-D contact group), the generated
contact surface elements will be added to the existing contact group.

9-60 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
REVOLVE Sec. 9.2 Element data

DELETE-CGROUP [NO]
Indicates whether the 2-D contact group will be deleted after the 3-D contact surface ele-
ments are generated. When all the contact surfaces in the 2-D contact group has been used
to generate the necessary 3-D contact surfaces, the parameter should be set to YES. {YES/
NO}

RBAR-AREA [1.0]
Specifies the cross-section area for truss elements generated from parameter RBAR-
NODESET.

ALL-GROUP [NO]
Defines whether all groups are acted upon by this command.
{NO/YES}

NO Revolve only the specified group

YES Revolve all applicable element groups and contact groups. Parameters NAME,
EGROUP, CGROUP and CNAME are ignored.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-61

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input SWEEP

SWEEP NAME EGROUP DX DY DZ NESWP NODES NFIRST EFIRST

NCOINCIDE NTOLERANCE DELETE-EGROUP
LOADS-ELEMENT AXES-ORTHOTROPIC AXES-INITIAL
BC-FIXITY RBAR-NODESET RBAR-ELEMSET
RBAR-EGROUP RBAR-TYPE RBAR-SECTION
RBAR-MATERIAL CGROUP CNAME
DELETE-CGROUP RBAR-AREA LINE ALIGNMENT ALL-GROUP

Generates a volume of 3D elements by extruding 2D elements along a vector or a line.

The rule for generating a new element group type is

TWODSOLID > THREEDSOLID

FLUID2 > FLUID3

NAME [current highest element group label + 1]

Element group label number of the volume elements. If NAME already exists, it must be a
THREEDSOLID or FLUID3 element group.

EGROUP
Previously defined 2D element group label.

DX [0.0]
DY [0.0]
DZ [0.0]
Vector components defining the direction of extrusion.

NESWP [1]
The number of elements in the direction of extrusion.

NODES [0]
Number of nodes for the extruded 3D elements. {0/8/20/27}
If NODES=0, then the following rule applies

Max. number of nodes Number of nodes

in 2D element group in 3D element group

4 8
8 20
9 27
If NODES is non-zero, then CGROUP is not applicable.

9-62 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SWEEP Sec. 9.2 Element data

NFIRST [1]
The starting node label for the generated nodes.

EFIRST [1]
The starting element label for the generated elements.

NCOINCIDE [NO]
Indicates whether the locations of new nodes generated are compared with existing nodes. If
NCOINCIDE=YES, then the location of generated generated nodes will be checked against
existing nodes. For each generated node, if it lies within the tolerance (specified by
NTOLERANCE) of an existing node, no new node will be created. {YES/NO}

NTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If NCOINCIDE=YES parameter provides a tolerance for checking the global coordinates of a
location againts existing nodes.

DELETE-EGROUP [YES]
Allows to preserve or delete original 2D element group, after the volume element group is
generated. {YES/NO}

LOADS-ELEMENT [NO]
Indicates whether element loading acting on the edges of the 2D elements will be converted
to element loadings on the faces of the 3D elements. {NO/YES}

AXES-ORTHOTROPIC [NO]
Indicates whether the material axis systems of the 2D elements will be converted to material
axis systems for 3D elements. {NO/YES}

AXES-INITIALSTRAIN [NO]
Indicates whether the initial strain axis systems of the 2D elements to 3D elements will be
converted to initial strain axis systems for the 3D elements. {NO/YES}

Note: We use the command SWEEP to be consistent with BODY SWEEP command for
extrusion along a vector or sweeping along a line. Using the more general term
SWEEP allows this command to be extended for sweeping 2D elements along a line
to form 3D elements.

BC-FIXITY [NO]
Indicates whether fixity boundary conditions will be assigned to the generated nodes
corresponding to the fixity conditions on the original nodes. {NO/YES}

RBAR-NODESET [0]
Label number of a node set defined by the command NODESET. If this parameter references a

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-63

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input SWEEP

node set that is defined, truss or beam elements (as specified by parameter RBAR-TYPE) will
be generated by connecting the nodes along the swept direction.

RBAR-ELEMSET [0]
Label number of an element set defined by the command ELEMENTSET. If this parameter
references an element set that is defined, the elements in the element set will be duplicated in
the swept direction.

RBAR-EGROUP [(current highest element group label number) + 1]

Label number of an element group for the elements generated from parameter RBAR-
NODESET. Note that elements generated from parameter RBAR-ELEMSET are appended to
the existing element group.

RBAR-TYPE [TRUSS]
Specifies the type of element to be generated from parameter RBAR-NODESET. {TRUSS/
BEAM}

RBAR-SECTION [1]
Label number of a cross section to be assigned to beam elements generated from parameter
RBAR-NODESET. Note that cross sections can be defined by the command CROSS-SEC-
TION.

RBAR-MATERIAL [1]
Label number of a material to be assigned to elements generated from parameter RBAR-
NODESET.

CGROUP
Specifies a 2-D contact group to be used for generating 3-D contact surfaces. Note that only
2-D contact surface elements which are attached to the mesh to be swept will be used for
generating 3-D contact surface elements.

CNAME [(current highest contact group label number) + 1]

Label number of 3-D contact group that will contain the generated 3-D contact surface
elements. If CNAME already exists (it must be a 3-D contact group), the generated contact
surface elements will be added to the existing contact group.

DELETE-CGROUP [NO]
Indicates whether the 2-D contact group will be deleted after the 3-D contact surface ele-
ments are generated. When all the contact surfaces in the 2-D contact group has been used
to generate the necessary 3-D contact surfaces, the parameter should be set to YES. {NO/
YES}

9-64 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
SWEEP Sec. 9.3 Boundary conditions

RBAR-AREA [1.0]
Specifies the cross-section area for truss elements generated from parameter RBAR-
NODESET.

LINE
Line label of the line used for sweeping.

ALIGNMENT [NORMAL]
Specifies the alignment of the 2D meshed face during sweeping.

NORMAL : 2D face normal is at fixed angle to line tangent.

PARALLEL : 2D face normal always points to the same direction.

ALL-GROUP [NO]
Defines whether all groups are acted upon by this command.
{NO/YES}

NO Revolve only the specified group

YES Revolve all applicable element groups and contact groups. Parameters NAME,
EGROUP, CGROUP and CNAME are ignored.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-65

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input BOUNDARIES

BOUNDARIES SUBSTRUCTURE

nodei uxi uyi uzi rxi ryi rzi phii ovalizationi warpingi porei temperaturei beam-warpi

Assigns fixed/free boundary conditions to nodes. All of the nodes belong to the specified
substructure.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure]

Substructure label number.

nodei
Node label number.

uxi [FREE]
uyi [FREE]
uzi [FREE]
Boundary conditions applied to displacement degrees of freedom. {FIXED/FREE}

rxi [FREE]
ryi [FREE]
rzi [FREE]
Boundary conditions applied to rotation degrees of freedom. {FIXED/FREE}

phii [FREE]
Boundary conditions applied to the fluid potential degree of freedom. {FIXED/FREE}

ovalizationi [FREE]
warpingi [FREE]
Boundary conditions applied to the pipe ovalization and warping degrees of freedom.
{FIXED/FREE}

porei [FREE]
Boundary conditions applied to pore pressure degree of freedom. {FIXED/FREE}

temperaturei [FREE]
Boundary conditions applied to temperature degree of freedom. Temperature degree of
freedom applies only to heat transfer or thermo-mechanical coupled analysis. {FIXED/
FREE}

9-66 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
BOUNDARIES Sec. 9.3 Boundary conditions

beam-warpi [FREE]
Boundary conditions applied to beam-warp degree of freedom. {FIXED/FREE}

Auxiliary commands

LIST BOUNDARIES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE OPTION

Option defines listing nodes: input nodes or all model nodes. {INPUT/MODEL}

DELETE BOUNDARIES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-67

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input

This page intentionally left blank.

9-68 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONSTRAINT-NODE Sec. 9.3 Boundary conditions

CONSTRAINT-NODE NAME SLAVENODE SLAVEDOF GENERALIZED-

CONSTRAINT

masternodei masterdofi betai slavenodei slavedofi

Specifies a constraint equation which expresses a slave (dependent) degree of freedom

(SLAVENODE + SLAVEDOF) as a linear combination of a set of master (independent) degrees
of freedom (masternodei + masterdofi). Alternatively, this command specifies multiple con-
straint equations between slave degrees of freedom (slavenodei + slavedofi) and master
degrees of freedom (masternodei + masterdofi).

NAME [(highest constraint equation label number) + 1]

The label number of the constraint equation.

SLAVENODE
The label number of the slave node.

SLAVEDOF
The degree of freedom associated with the slave node.
{X-TRANSLATION/Y-TRANSLATION/Z-TRANSLATION/X-ROTATION/
Y-ROTATION/Z-ROTATION/FLUID-POTENTIAL/TEMPERATURE/VOLTAGE}

SLAVEDOF = TEMPERATURE is only available when MASTER TMC = YES.

GENERALIZED-CONSTRAINT [NO]
Generate generalized constraints instead of standard constraints. {NO/YES}

masternodei
The label number of the master node for the ith independent term of the constraint equation.

masterdofi
The degree of freedom of the master node for the ith independent term of the constraint
equation. Allowable values are the same as for SLAVEDOF.

betai [1.0]
The coefficient of the ith independent term of the constraint equation.

slavenodei
The label number of the slave node.

slavedofi
The degree of freedom associated with the slave node.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-69

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input CONSTRAINT-NODE

Auxiliary commands

LIST CONSTRAINT-NODE FIRST LAST

DELETE CONSTRAINT-NODE FIRST LAST

9-70 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
RIGIDLINK-NODE Sec. 9.3 Boundary conditions

RIGIDLINK-NODE NAME SLAVENODE MASTERNODE DISPLACEMENTS

DOFSI

slavenodei masternodei displacementsi

Specifies a rigid link between two nodes. A rigid link can only be specified between nodes in
the main structure.Note that if more than one command is specified with the same
SLAVENODE and MASTERNODE, the command with the highest label number (NAME) will
be used.

NAME [(highest rigid link label number) + 1]

The label number of the rigid link.

SLAVENODE
The label number of the slave node.

MASTERNODE
The label number of the master node.

DISPLACEMENTS [DEFAULT]
Selects kinematic formulation for rigid link. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
SMALL Small displacement formulation.
LARGE Large displacement formulation.
DEFAULT As set by KINEMATICS.

slavenodei
The label number of the slave node.

masternodei
The label number of the master node.

displacementsi [DEFAULT]
Selects kinematic formulation for rigid link. Note that displacementi = DEFAULT means that
the formulation specified in the KINEMATICS command is used. See the Theory and
Modeling Guide. {DEFAULT/SMALL/LARGE}

DOFSI [123456]
Specifies the slave degrees of freedom (dof) to be constrained to the master node. DOFSI
must contain 1 to 6 digits ranging from 1 to 6. Dofs 1, 2, 3 indicate X, Y, Z translations and 4,
5, 6 indicate X, Y, Z rotations.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-71

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input RIGIDLINK-NODE

Auxiliary commands

LIST RIGIDLINK-NODE FIRST LAST

DELETE RIGIDLINK-NODE FIRST LAST

9-72 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT NODE Sec. 9.3 Boundary conditions

OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT NODE TYPE GROUP

nodei elementi

Enforces the zero-slope-of-pipe-skin condition in the longitudinal direction for pipe element
nodes. This condition is applicable in the case of a rigid flange (TYPE = FLANGE) or when
symmetry is to be enforced (TYPE = SYMMETRY). These conditions apply to pipe element
nodes for the element group specified. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

TYPE [FLANGE]

FLANGE The flange condition is applied at the specified nodes. Both

ovalization and warping at these nodes are suppressed.

SYMMETRY The symmetry condition is applied at the specified nodes. The

ovalization at these nodes is left free but the warping is suppressed.

GROUP [currently active group]

The element group for each pipe element node specified in this command.

nodei
Label number of a node.

elementi
Label number of the element that contains the node.

Auxiliary commands

LIST OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT NODE FIRST LAST TYPE

GROUP
DELETE OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT NODE FIRST LAST TYPE
GROUP

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-73

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input FSI-FACE

FSI-FACE NAME DIMENSION

celli n1i n2i n16i

Defines fsi boundary using element face node for ADINA.

NAME [(current highest fsi boundary label number) + 1]

Label number of the fluid-structure-boundary to be defined.

DIMENSION [3]
Dimension of FSI boundary. {3/2}

celli
Label of a cell on FSI boundary.

n1in16i
Cells node numbers.

Auxiliary commands

LIST FSI-FACE FIRST LAST

DELETE FSI-FACE FIRST LAST

9-74 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 9.3 Boundary conditions

This page intentionally left blank.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-75

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input APPLY CONCENTRATED-LOADS

APPLY CONCENTRATED-LOADS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

nodei directioni factori ncuri artmi nodauxi

Applies concentrated loads to nodes.

The magnitude of the load is given by entry factori, which may be modified (except when
load cases are employed) via a timefunction given by entry ncuri.

Several concentrated loads can be defined for the same node and direction. In this case the
loads are added.

SUBSTRUCTURE [currently active substructure]

Identifying number for the substructure to which subsequent nodes refer.

REUSE [currently active reuse]

Identifying number for the reuse to which subsequent nodes refer.

nodei
The label number of a node to which the load is to be applied.

directioni
The direction in which the load acts.

1 x-translation force (global or skew).

2 y-translation force (global or skew).
3 z-translation force (global or skew).
4 x-rotation moment (global or skew).
5 y-rotation moment (global or skew).
6 z-rotation moment (global or skew).
7 Follower force acting from nodauxi to nodei.
8 Follower moment about the direction from nodauxi to nodei.

factori [1.0]
Multiplying factor, giving load intensity.

ncuri [1]
The label number of a time function.

artmi [0.0]
The arrival time associated with time dependent loads. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

9-76 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
APPLY CONCENTRATED-LOADS Sec. 9.4 Loads

nodauxi [0]
Auxiliary node used to control follower loads. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

Auxiliary Commands

LISTAPPLY CONCENTRATED-LOADS SUBSTRUCTURE RESUSE

DELETEAPPLY CONCENTRATED-LOADS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-77

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input APPLY DISPLACEMENTS

APPLY DISPLACEMENTS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

nodei directioni factori ncuri artmi iddli unloadi timeui forceui ncurui

Specifies prescribed displacements applied to nodes.

The magnitude of the displacement is given by entry factori, which may be modified (except
when load cases are employed) via a timefunction given by entry ncuri.

Several prescribed displacements can be defined for the same node and direction; in this case
the displacements are averaged.

SUBSTRUCTURE [currently active substructure]

Identifying number for the substructure to which subsequent nodes refer.

REUSE [currently active reuse]

Identifying number for the reuse to which subsequent nodes refer.

nodei
The label number of the node for which the displacement is to be prescribed.

directioni
The direction in which the displacement is prescribed. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

1 x-translation (global or skew).

2 y-translation (global or skew).
3 z-translation (global or skew).
4 x-rotation (global or skew).
5 y-rotation (global or skew).
6 z-rotation (global or skew).
11 - 16 Ovalization degrees of freedom.
21 - 26 Warping degrees of freedom.
31 x-velocity (global or skew).
32 y-velocity (global or skew).
33 z-velocity (global or skew).
34 x-rotational velocity (global or skew).
35 y-rotational velocity (global or skew).
36 z-rotational velocity (global or skew).
41 x-acceleration (global or skew).
42 y-acceleration (global or skew).
43 z-acceleration (global or skew).
44 x-rotational acceleration (global or skew).

9-78 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
APPLY DISPLACEMENTS Sec. 9.4 Loads

45 y-rotational acceleration (global or skew).

46 z-rotational acceleration (global or skew).

factori [1.0]
Multiplying factor, giving displacement magnitude.

ncuri [1]
The label number of a time function.

artmi [0.0]
The arrival time associated with time dependent prescribed displacements.

iddli [0]
Specifies whether the prescribed displacement is applied to the original configuration or the
deformed configuration for a restart analysis.

0 original configuration
1 deformed configuration

unloadi [NO]
Specifies the type of unloadng for prescribed displacement.{TIME/FORCE/NO}

timeui [0.0]
If unloadi=TIME, this specifies the time at which unloading of prescribed displacement
starts.

forceui
If unloadi=FORCE, this specifies the force (or reaction) value at the prescribed displacement
at which unloading starts.

ncurui [1]
Label number of a time function for the unloading of prescribed displacement.

Auxiliary commands

LISTAPPLY DISPLACEMENTS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

DELETEAPPLY DISPLACEMENTS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-79

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input APPLY ELECTROMAGNETIC-LOADS

APPLY ELECTROMAGNETIC-LOADS

node1i node2i ncuri artmi iddli

Applies electromagnetic loads to nodes.

The nodes must be part of the main structure. The load corresponds to electromagnetic
forces induced by short-circuit currents flowing between pairs of nodes. The magnitude of
the short-circuit current is governed by a timefunction given by entry ncuri.

node1i
node2i
A pair of nodes between which a short-circuit current flows.

ncuri [1]
The label number of a time function, giving the time dependent value of the short-circuit
current.

artmi [0.0]
The arrival time associated with time dependent loads.

iddli [0]
Indicator for deformation-dependent loading. {0/1}

0 Deformation-independent.

1 Deformation-dependent.

Auxiliary commands

LIST APPLY ELECTROMAGNETIC-LOADS

DELETE APPLY ELECTROMAGNETIC-LOADS

9-80 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
APPLY PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURES Sec. 9.4 Loads

APPLY PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURES

nodei factori ncuri artmi

Applies internal pressures to pipe element nodes. The nodes must be part of the main
structure.

The magnitude of the pipe internal pressure is given by entry factori, which may be
modified by a time function given by entry ncuri. Pipe internal pressure loading cannot be
used in a load case, nor when automatic load displacement control is employed.

Several pipe internal pressure loads can be defined for the same node; in this case the loads
are averaged.

nodei
The label number of the node to which the load is to be applied.

factori [1.0]
Multiplying factor giving the internal pressure magnitude.

ncuri [1]
The label number of a time function.

artmi [0.0]
The arrival time associated with time dependent loads.

Auxiliary commands

LIST APPLY PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURES

DELETE APPLY PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURES

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-81

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input APPLY TEMPERATURES

APPLY TEMPERATURES

nodei factori ncuri artmi ishelni

This command defines temperatures applied to nodes. The actual applied temperature is the
reference temperature plus the temperature applied in this command. The reference tempera-
ture is defined in command TEMPERATURE-REFERENCE..

Several temperatures can be defined for the same node; in this case the temperatures are
averaged.

nodei
The label number of the node at which the temperature is to be prescribed.

factori [1.0]
Multiplying factor.

ncuri [1]
The label number of a time function.

artmi [0.0]
The arrival time associated with time dependent temperatures.

ishelni [0]
Indicates where the prescribed temperature is applied for a shell midsurface nodes.
0 Not shell midsurface node
1 Top location
2 Bottom location
3 Both top and bottom location

Auxiliary commands

LIST APPLY TEMPERATURES

DELETE APPLY TEMPERATURES

9-82 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
APPLY TGRADIENTS Sec. 9.4 Loads

APPLY TGRADIENTS

nodei factori ncuri artmi

Prescribes temperature gradients at shell element midsurface nodes of the main structure.

The magnitude of the temperature gradient (degrees/unit length) is given by entry factori,
and may be modified by a time function given by entry ncuri. Shell midsurface nodes
which have no temperature gradient specified will take the value given by TEMPERATURE-
REFERENCE.

Several temperature gradients can be defined for the same node; in this case the temperature
gradients are averaged.

nodei
The label number of a shell midsurface node at which the temperature gradient is prescribed.

factori [1.0]
Multiplying factor, giving the temperature gradient at the node.

ncuri [1]
The label number of a time function.

artmi [0.0]
The arrival time associated with time dependent temperature gradients.

Auxiliary commands

LIST APPLY TGRADIENTS

DELETE APPLY TGRADIENTS

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-83

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input APPLY USER-SUPPLIED-LOADS

APPLY USER-SUPPLIED-LOADS NODE-DEPENDENCE NICONS NRCONS

iconsi rconsi

Establishes the presence of user-supplied loads, which are computed using the user-supplied
subroutines USERSL and IUSER. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for details regarding
these subroutines.

NODE-DEPENDENCE [1]

1 Load contribution calculated in the user-supplied load subroutine for a node

depends only on nodal quantities at that node.

2 Load contribution calculated in the user-supplied load subroutine may depend on

nodal quantities at other nodes.

NICONS [0]
Number of integer constants to be input in the accompanying data lines.

NRCONS [0]
Number of real constants to be input in the accompanying data lines.

iconsi [0]
Integer constant passed to user-supplied subroutine USERSL.

rconsi [0.0]
Real constant passed to user-supplied subroutine USERSL.

Auxiliary commands

LIST APPLY USER-SUPPLIED-LOADS

DELETE APPLY USER-SUPPLIED-LOADS

9-84 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOADS-ELEMENT Sec. 9.4 Loads

LOADS-ELEMENT SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP LOAD-TYPE

eli facei p1i p2i ncuri artmi idirni iddli

(TWODSOLID elements, LOAD-TYPE = IN-PLANE)

eli facei p1i p2i p3i p4i ncuri artmi idirni iddli
(TWODSOLID elements, LOAD-TYPE = OUT-PLANE)

eli facei p1i p2i p3i p4i ncuri artmi idirni iddli
(THREEDSOLID elements)

eli facei p1i p2i ncuri artmi idirni iddli

(BEAM elements)

eli facei p1i p2i p3i p4i ncuri artmi idirni iddli
(ISOBEAM elements)

eli facei p1i p2i p3i ncuri artmi idirni iddli

(PLATE elements)

eli facei p1i p2i p3i p4i ncuri artmi idirni iddli
(SHELL elements, LOAD-TYPE = SURFACE)

eli facei p1i p2i p3i p4i ncuri artmi idirni iddli nodauxi
(SHELL elements, LOAD-TYPE = LINE)

eli facei p1i p2i p3i p4i ncuri artmi idirni iddli
(PIPE elements)

eli facei p1i p2i ncuri artmi idirni iddli

(FLUID2 elements)

eli facei p1i p2i p3i p4i ncuri artmi idirni iddli
(FLUID3 elements)

Applies distributed loads onto elements, either line loads or pressure loads.

SUBSTRUCTURE [currently active substructure]

The substructure number for all elements referenced by this command.

REUSE [currently active reuse]

The reuse number for all elements referenced by this command.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-85

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input LOADS-ELEMENT

GROUP [currently active element group]

The element group number for all elements referenced by this command.

LOAD-TYPE [IN-PLANE (TWODSOLID elements)]

[SURFACE (SHELL elements)]
A subtype load indicator for TWODSOLID elements and SHELL elements.
{IN-PLANE/OUT-PLANE/SURFACE/LINE}

IN-PLANE In-plane line loads for TWODSOLID elements edges.

OUT-PLANE Out-of-plane surface loads for TWODSOLID elements.

SURFACE Surface loads for SHELL elements.

LINE Line loads for SHELL element edges.

eli
The label number of the element to which the load is applied.

facei
A number giving the location onto which the load is applied. See Tables 1 and 2 below.

p1i [0.0]
p2i [0.0]
p3i [0.0]
p4i [0.0]
Load magnitude at element vertex nodes. The sign convention used is such that the load is
positive if directed into/toward the element. See notes at the end of this command for loading
conventions.

ncuri [1]
The label number of a time function.

artmi [0.0]
The arrival time associated with time dependent loads.

idirni [0]
Load direction filter. {0/1/2/3/4/11/12/13}

0 Total load is applied.

1 x-component of load is applied.
2 y-component of load is applied.
3 z-component of load is applied.

9-86 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
LOADS-ELEMENT Sec. 9.4 Loads

4 tangential traction.
11 load acts in the global X-direction.
12 load acts in the global Y-direction.
13 load acts in the global Z-direction.

iddli [0]
Deformation dependent loading flag. {0/1}

0 Load is independent of structural deformation.

1 Load depends on structural deformation.

nodauxi [0]
An auxiliary node used when a line load is applied to shell elements, giving the plane of line
load application.

Auxiliary commands

LIST LOADS-ELEMENT SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP

LOAD-TYPE
DELETE LOADS-ELEMENT SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP
LOAD-TYPE

Face parameter conventions:

Table 1: True triangular and tetrahedral elements

Face Applicable element types Location

1 TWODSOLID, THREEDSOLID opposite node 1

2 TWODSOLID, THREEDSOLID opposite node 2
3 TWODSOLID, THREEDSOLID opposite node 3
4 THREEDSOLID opposite node 4

See next page for Table 2.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-87

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input LOADS-ELEMENT

Table 2: Elements including degenerated elements, but excluding true triangular and true
hexahedron elements (r, s, t refer to local element coordinates)

Face Applicable element types Location

1 TWODSOLID, THREEDSOLID r = 1 side/face

FLUID2, FLUID3
BEAM, ISOBEAM, PIPE r-s plane load
2 TWODSOLID, THREEDSOLID s = 1 side/face
FLUID2, FLUID3
BEAM, ISOBEAM, PIPE r-t plane load
-1 TWODSOLID, THREEDSOLID r = -1 side/face
FLUID2, FLUID3
-2 TWODSOLID, THREEDSOLID s = -1 side/face
FLUID2, FLUID3
3 TWODSOLID, THREEDSOLID t = 1 side/face
FLUID3, PLATE, SHELL
-3 TWODSOLID, THREEDSOLID t = -1 side/face
FLUID3, PLATE, SHELL
4 SHELL line load, N4-N1 side,
r-s plane load
5 SHELL line load, N1-N2 side,
r-s plane load
-4 SHELL line load, N2-N3 side,
r-s plane load
-5 SHELL line load, N3-N4 side,
r-s plane load
6 SHELL line load, N4-N1 side,
r-t plane load
7 SHELL line load, N1-N2 side,
r-t plane load
-6 SHELL line load, N2-N3 side,
r-t plane load
-7 SHELL line load, N3-N4 side,
r-t plane load

9-88 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Sec. 9.4 Loads

Loading conventions for surface loads

The following figures show how the loads intensities P1 to P4 are applied onto the elements. For
example, load intensities P1 to P4 on face 2 of a brick element are applied to local nodes 1, 5, 6, 2. The
arrows indicate the direction of load application for positive load intensities.

Brick elements (3D SOLID and 3D FLUID)

3 2 3 4
P3 P2 P2 P1
Face 3 P4 P4
P4 P1 1 2 Face -2
4
P2 P1 P1 P1
Face 2 Face -1
P3 P4
Face 1 P3 P3 7
6 P3 P2 8
P2 P2 Face -3
P3 P4 P4 P1
8 5 6 5

Tetrahedral elements (3D SOLID and 3D FLUID)

4 4

P2
P3 P3

Face 2
Face 3 Face 1
1 P1 P2 P3 P1
3 3 1
P2 P1
Face 4
P2 P1
P3
2 2

Shell elements

2 1 4 1
P2 P1 P1 P4
Face 3 Face -3
P3 P4 P2 P3
3 4 3 2

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-89

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input

This page intentionally left blank

9-90 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
INITIAL ACCELERATIONS Sec. 9.5 Initial conditions

INITIAL ACCELERATIONS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

nodei uxi uyi uzi rxi ryi rzi fi

Specifies initial accelerations at nodes. Only nonzero initial accelerations need be assigned.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure]

The substructure for each node specified in this command.

REUSE [current reuse]

The reuse for each node specified in this command.

nodei
Label number of a node at which initial accelerations are given.

uxi [0.0]
uyi [0.0]
uzi [0.0]
The initial accelerations for the displacement degrees of freedom at nodei.

rxi [0.0]
ryi [0.0]
rzi [0.0]
The initial accelerations for the rotational degrees of freedom at nodei.

fi [0.0]
The initial 2nd time derivative of fluid potential or hydrostatic pressure at nodei.

Auxiliary commands

LIST INITIAL ACCELERATIONS

DELETE INITIAL ACCELERATIONS

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-91

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input INITIAL DISPLACEMENTS

INITIAL DISPLACEMENTS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

nodei uxi uyi uzi rxi ryi rzi fi

Specifies initial displacements to nodes. Only nonzero initial displacements need be as-
signed.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure]

The substructure for each node specified in this command.

REUSE [current reuse]

The reuse for each node specified in this command.

nodei
Label number of a node at which initial displacements are given.

uxi [0.0]
uyi [0.0]
uzi [0.0]
The initial displacements for the translational degrees of freedom at nodei.

rxi [0.0]
ryi [0.0]
rzi [0.0]
The initial displacements for the rotational degrees of freedom at nodei.

fi [0.0]
The initial fluid potential or hydrostatic pressure at nodei.

Auxiliary commands

LIST INITIAL DISPLACEMENTS

DELETE INITIAL DISPLACEMENTS

9-92 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
INITIAL FLEXURALSTRAINS Sec. 9.5 Initial conditions

INITIAL FLEXURALSTRAINS

nodei kappa-11i kappa-22i kappa-12i

Specifies initial flexural strains at plate element nodes. Only nonzero flexural strains need be
assigned.

nodei
Label number of a plate element at which initial flexural strains are given.

kappa-11i [0.0]
kappa-22i [0.0]
kappa-12i [0.0]
Flexural strain components kappa11, kappa22, kappa12. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

Auxiliary commands

LIST INITIAL FLEXURALSTRAINS

DELETE INITIAL FLEXURALSTRAINS

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-93

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input INITIAL OVALIZATIONS

INITIAL OVALIZATIONS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

nodei ov1i ov2i ov3i ov4i ov5i ov6i

Specifies initial ovalizations at pipe element nodes. Only nonzero ovalizations need be
assigned.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure]

The substructure for each node specified in this command.

REUSE [current reuse]

The reuse for each node specified in this command.

nodei
Label number of a pipe element node at which initial ovalizations are given.

ov1i [0.0]
ov2i [0.0]
ov3i [0.0]
ov4i [0.0]
ov5i [0.0]
ov6i [0.0]
The initial ovalization magnitudes at nodei. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

Auxiliary commands

LIST INITIAL OVALIZATIONS

DELETE INITIAL OVALIZATIONS

9-94 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
INITIAL PINTERNALPRESSURES Sec. 9.5 Initial conditions

INITIAL PINTERNALPRESSURES

nodei pini

Specifies initial pipe internal pressures at pipe element nodes. Only nonzero pipe internal
pressures need be assigned.

nodei
Label number of a pipe element node at which initial internal pressure is given.

pini [0.0]
The initial pipe internal pressure at nodei.

Auxiliary commands

LIST INITIAL PINTERNALPRESSURES

DELETE INITIAL PINTERNALPRESSURES

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-95

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input INITIAL STRAINS

INITIAL STRAINS

nodei stran-11i stran-22i stran-33i stran-12i stran-13i stran-23i

Specifies initial strains at nodes. Only nonzero initial strains need be assigned.
Orientation of initial strain axes is defined by command AXES-INITIALSTRAIN.

nodei
Label number of a node at which initial strains are given.

stran-11i [0.0]
stran-22i [0.0]
stran-33i [0.0]
stran-12i [0.0]
stran-13i [0.0]
stran-23i [0.0]
The strain components at nodei, in the coordinate system of the element(s) to which nodei is
attached. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

Auxiliary commands

LIST INITIAL STRAINS

DELETE INITIAL STRAINS

9-96 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
INITIAL SGRADIENTS Sec. 9.5 Initial conditions

INITIAL SGRADIENTS

nodei sgrad-11i sgrad-22i sgrad-12i sgrad-13i sgrad-23i

Specifies initial strain gradients at shell element midsurface nodes. Only nonzero strain
gradients need be assigned. Orientation of initial strain gradient axes is defined by command
AXES-INITIALSTRAIN.

nodei
Label number of a shell element midsurface node at which initial strain gradients are given.

sgrad-11i [0.0]
sgrad-22i [0.0]
sgrad-12i [0.0]
sgrad-13i [0.0]
sgrad-23i [0.0]
The strain gradient components at nodei. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

Auxiliary commands

LIST INITIAL SGRADIENTS

DELETE INITIAL SGRADIENTS

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-97

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input INITIAL TEMPERATURES

INITIAL TEMPERATURES

nodei tempi

Specifies initial temperatures at nodes. Only temperatures that are different from the initial
reference temperature, defined by TEMPERATURE REFERENCE, need be assigned.

nodei
Label number of a node at which initial temperature is given.

tempi [0.0]
The initial temperature at nodei.

Auxiliary commands

LIST INITIAL TEMPERATURES

DELETE INITIAL TEMPERATURES

9-98 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
INITIAL TGRADIENTS Sec. 9.5 Initial conditions

INITIAL TGRADIENTS

nodei tgradienti

Specifies initial temperature gradients at shell element midsurface nodes. Only initial tempera-
ture gradients that are different than the reference temperature gradient, defined by TEM-
PERATURE-REFERENCE, need be assigned.

nodei
Label number of a shell element midsurface node at which initial temperature gradient is
given.

tgradienti [0.0]
The initial temperature gradient at nodei, measured in degrees/unit length in the shell normal
direction.

Auxiliary commands

LIST INITIAL TGRADIENTS

DELETE INITIAL TGRADIENTS

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-99

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input INITIAL VELOCITIES

INITIALVELOCITIES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

nodei uxi uyi uzi rxi ryi rzi fi

Specifies initial velocities at nodes. Only nonzero initial velocities need be assigned.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure]

The substructure for each node specified in this command.

REUSE [current reuse]

The reuse for each node specified in this command.

nodei
Label number of a node at which initial velocities are given.

uxi [0.0]
uyi [0.0]
uzi [0.0]
The initial velocities for the displacement degrees of freedom at nodei.

rxi [0.0]
ryi [0.0]
rzi [0.0]
The initial velocities for the rotational degrees of freedom at nodei.

fi [0.0]
The initial 1st time derivative of fluid potential or hydrostatic pressure at nodei.

Auxiliary commands

LIST INITIAL VELOCITIES

DELETE INITIAL VELOCITIES

9-100 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
INITIAL WARPINGS Sec. 9.5 Initial conditions

INITIAL WARPINGS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

nodei warp1i warp2i warp3i warp4i warp5i warp6i

Specifies initial warpings at pipe element nodes. Only nonzero warpings need be assigned.

SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure]

The substructure for each node specified in this command.

REUSE [current reuse]

The reuse for each node specified in this command.

nodei
Label number of a pipe element node at which initial warpings are given.

warp1i [0.0]
warp2i [0.0]
warp3i [0.0]
warp4i [0.0]
warp5i [0.0]
warp6i [0.0]
The initial warping magnitudes at nodei. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

Auxiliary commands

LIST INITIAL WARPINGS

DELETE INITIAL WARPINGS

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-101

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input IMPERFECTION NODES

IMPERFECTION NODES

bucklingmodei nodei directioni displacementi

Specifies imperfections based on buckling mode shapes which have been calculated in a
previous run. The total imperfection applied to the nodal coordinates is a superposition of
the imperfections from each specified buckling mode. List of buckling modes has to be
continuous - all buckling modes between the first and last mode have to be specified. For
modes which are not significant, displacementi should be set to 0.

bucklingmodei
The number of the buckling mode shape.

nodei
Node label number where the magnitude of the imperfection associated with bucklingmodei is
specified.

directioni
Translational degree of freedom for nodei.

1 X-translation (global or skew).

2 Y-translation (global or skew).

3 Z-translation (global or skew).

displacementi [0.0]
Magnitude of imperfection in the same length unit as the global coordinates. ADINA scales
bucklingmodei to have this value at the node and in the direction specified.

Auxiliary commands

LIST IMPERFECTION NODES

DELETE IMPERFECTION NODES

9-102 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONTACT-ELEMSET Sec. 9.6 Contact

CONTACT-ELEMSET NAME PRINT SAVE

eledgeseti sensei (2-D contact groups)

elfaceseti sensei (3-D contact groups)

Defines a contact surface using element edge or face set defined by the ELEDGESET or
ELFACESET command.

NAME [(current highest contact surface label number) + 1]

Label number of the contact surface to be defined. Note that the contact surface names are
unique only within a contact group, i.e. two different contact groups may each define its own
contact surface "1".

PRINT [DEFAULT]
Flag controlling printout of the results of the contact analysis as determined by the FORCES
and TRACTIONS parameters of the CGROUP command. If DEFAULT is specified, printout is
controlled by PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

SAVE [DEFAULT]
Flag controlling saving (to the porthole file) of the results of the contact analysis as deter-
mined by the FORCES and TRACTIONS parameters of the CGROUP command. If DEFAULT
is specified, saving is controlled by the PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT parameter. {YES/NO/
DEFAULT}

eledgeseti
Element edge set label number.

elfaceseti
Element face set label number.

sensei [+1]
Orientation flag.

+1 contact surface follows the orientation of the element edges or faces.

-1 contact surface uses opposite orientation to the element edges or faces.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CONTACT-EELEMSET FIRST LAST

DELETE CONTACT-EELEMSET FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-103

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input CONTACT-FACENODES

CONTACT-FACENODES NAME PRINT SAVE

segi n1i n2i n3i n4i n5i n6i n7i n8i n9i

Defines a contact surface within the current contact group. The contact surface is defined as
a set of contact segments, with each segment defined by its node numbers. This command
can be applied only to 3-D contact.

NAME
Label number of the contact surface to be defined.

PRINT
Flag controlling printout of the results, see command CONTACTSURFACE.

SAVE
Flag controlling saving of the results, see command CONTACTSURFACE.

segi
Label number of segment i.

n1i...n9i
Label number of nodes forming the segment i. n1i to n3i must be greater than 0.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CONTACT-FACENODES FIRST LAST GROUP

DELETE CONTACT-FACENODES FIRST LAST GROUP

9-104 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CONTACT-NODES Sec. 9.6 Contact

CONTACT-NODES NAME PRINT SAVE MODE MASTER

ni (2-D contact groups)

segi n1i n2i n3i n4i (3-D contact groups)

Defines a contact surface within the current contact group. Contact surfaces are defined by
the end-nodes of the segments.

Note: In order to define higher-order contact segments for 3D contact, use the CONTACT-
FACENODES command.

NAME [(current highest contact-surface label number) + 1]

Label number of the contact-surface to be defined. Contact-surface numbering is shared with
CONTACTSURFACE, CONTACTPOINT and CONTACT-FACENODES.

PRINT [DEFAULT]
Controls printout of results for the contact-surface. Input of DEFAULT implies the setting of
PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT is used. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

SAVE [DEFAULT]
Controls saving of results (to the porthole file) for the contact-surface. Input of DEFAULT
implies the setting of PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT is used. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}

MODE [INPUT]

INPUT The contact segments are defined exactly as input.

REVERSE The contact segments are reversed.

ALIGN The contact segments are aligned to have the same sense as the
first segment.

MASTER [0]
Master Point Label used for creating rigid link between this Master Point and all these
contact nodes.

ni
Label numbers of nodes on a 2-D contact-surface, see the Theory and Modeling Guide for the
orientation convention used. Segments are defined by successive node numbers; that is,
segment 1 is defined by the first two nodes, segment 2 is defined by the second and third node,
etc.

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-105

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input CONTACT-NODES

segi
Label number of an area-segment on a 3-D contact surface. Each data input line defines a new
segment.

n1i,...,n4i
Label numbers of nodes defining the area segment, see the Theory and Modeling Guide for
the orientation convention used.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CONTACT-NODES FIRST LAST GROUP

LIST CONTACT-NODES lists the definitions of contactsurfaces with label numbers in a
given range. If no range is specified a list of all contactsurfaces label numbers within the
given contact group is listed. GROUP is set to the current active contact group if no
value is input for this parameter.

DELETE CONTACT-NODES FIRST LAST GROUP

DELETE CONTACT-NODES deletes the contactsurfaces with label numbers in a given
range. Note that a contactsurface will not be deleted if it is referenced by a contactpair
definition (see command CONTACTPAIR ). GROUP is set to the current active contact
group if no value is input for this parameter.

9-106 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
CRACK-PROPAGATION NODES Sec. 9.7 Fracture

CRACK-PROPAGATION NODES NAME NCRACK

node-1i ... node-NCRACKi nvshfti factori

Defines the initial crack front position and/or the virtual/actual crack propagation path along
which a crack would propagate.

For 2-D analysis, the crack front corresponds to a single node - the crack tip node. the virtual
crack propagation path corresponds to a single line of nodes starting at the crack tip node.

For 3-D analysis, the crack front corresponds to a line of nodes - the first node given for each
generator line of nodes. The virtual/actual crack propagation path corresponds to a
surface developed from the crack front along generator lines originating at the crack front
nodes.

NAME [1]
The label number of the crack propagation surface. At present only one crack surface is
allowed.

NCRACK [1]
The number of vertex nodes along the generator lines. {1 NCRACK 999}

node-1i ... node-NCRACKi

Label numbers of nodes along generator line i of the crack propagation surface.

nvshfti [0]
Virtual material shift associated with generator line i of the crack propagation surface:
For a fixed virtual material shift, this is the label number of a virtual shift defined by command
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT.

For a moving virtual material shift, this is the number of rings of elements about the
(moving) crack tip on the generator line.

Parameter nvshfti is used only in crack propagation analysis (FRACTURE TYPE =PROPAGA-
TION).

factori [0.0]
Resistance factor. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

Auxiliary commands

LIST CRACK-PROPAGATION FIRST LAST

DELETE CRACK-PROPAGATION FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-107

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT NODE

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT NODE NAME VECTOR VX VY VZ N3DSH

nodei

Defines a fixed virtual-crack-extension material shift via a set of nodes.

NAME [(current highest virtual shift label number) + 1]

Label number of the virtual shift to be defined.

VECTOR [AUTOMATIC]

AUTOMATIC The shift vector is calculated automatically, from the crack

surface definition (see CRACK-PROPAGATION). In the case of
a 3-D crack, N3DSH is used to select a generator line associated
with the automatic shift vector calculation.

INPUT The shift vector is input directly via VX, VY and VZ.

VX [0.0]
VY [0.0]
VZ [0.0]
The global components of the material shift vector.

N3DSH [0]
Generator line number of the crack surface for automatic shift vector calculation (for a 3-D
crack).

nodei
The label number of a node contained within the virtual material shift.

Auxiliary commands

LIST J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT NODE FIRST LAST

DELETE J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT NODE FIRST LAST

9-108 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT ELEMENT Sec. 9.7 Fracture

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT ELEMENT NAME GROUP VECTOR VX VY VZ

N3DSH

elementi groupi

Defines a fixed virtual-crack-extension material shift via a set of elements.

NAME [(current highest virtual shift label number) + 1]

Label number of the virtual shift to be defined.

GROUP [current active group]

Element group label number.

VECTOR [AUTOMATIC]

AUTOMATIC The shift vector is calculated automatically, from the crack

surface definition (see CRACK-PROPAGATION ). In the case of
a 3-D crack, N3DSH is used to select a generator line associated
with the automatic shift vector calculation.

INPUT The shift vector is input directly via VX, VY and VZ.

VX [0.0]
VY [0.0]
VZ [0.0]
The global components of the material shift vector.

N3DSH [0]
Generator line number of the crack surface for automatic shift vector calculation, (for a
3-D crack).

elementi
The label number of an element contained in the virtual material shift.

groupi [GROUP]
The label number of the element group, containing elementi.

Auxiliary commands

LIST J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT ELEMENT FIRST LAST

DELETE J-VIRTUAL-SHIFTELEMENT FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-109

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input J-LINE ELEMENT

J-LINE ELEMENT NAME GROUP PRINT SAVE START-FACE END-FACE

elementi groupi

Defines a line contour connected by a series of element faces.

NAME [(current highest line contour label number) + 1]

Label number of the line contour to be defined.

GROUP [currently active group]

Element group label number.

PRINT <not currently active>

SAVE <not currently active>

START-FACE [0]
Determines which face of the first element is selected to start the contour, if the element has
more than one boundary face.

0 Face number automatically selected.

1 Face N1-N2.
2 Face N2-N3.
3 Face N3-N4.
4 Face N4-N1.

where N1, N2, N3, N4 are the element vertex nodes.

END-FACE [0]
Determines which face of the last element is selected to terminate the contour, if the element
has more than one boundary face.

0 Face number automatically selected.

1 Face N1-N2.
2 Face N2-N3.
3 Face N3-N4.
4 Face N4-N1.

elementi
The label number of an element which forms the line contour.

groupi [GROUP]
The label number of the element group, containing elementi.

9-110 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
J-LINE ELEMENT Sec. 9.7 Fracture

Auxiliary commands

LIST J-LINE ELEMENT FIRST LAST

DELETE J-LINE ELEMENT FIRST LAST

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-111

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input SINGULAR NODES

SINGULAR NODES Q-POINT

nodei

Defines a set of vertex nodes whose adjacent non-vertex nodes are to be moved to form
singularities. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.

Q-POINT [QUARTER]
Selects whether non-vertex nodes adjacent to the desired vertex nodes are moved to the 1/4
point, or the opposite action is taken.

QUARTER Nodes are moved to the 1/4 point.

MID Nodes are moved from the 1/4 point back to the relevant mid-
side/face position.

nodei
Label number of a singular node.

Auxiliary commands

LIST SINGULAR NODES FIRST LAST

DELETE SINGULAR NODES FIRST LAST

9-112 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
REUSE-NODES Sec. 9.8 Substructures and cyclic symmetry

REUSE-NODES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE LOAD-REUSE

iconai iretni

Defines the nodal connectivity between a substructure and the main structure. Each sub-
structure can be used several times and this command sets the current reuse label identify-
ing number for the active substructure.

SUBSTRUCTURE [currently active substructure]

Identifying number for the substructure to which subsequent reuse data refer.

REUSE [currently active reuse]

Label number of the reuse to be defined.

LOAD-REUSE [SAME]
Reuse loading indicator.

SAME The loading for this reuse is the same as for the previous reuse,
REUSE-1, of the same substructure.

DIFFERENT The loading for this reuse is specified by subsequent loading

commands, e.g., APPLY-LOAD.

iconai
The main structure connection node for the substructure reuse. Note that the same number
of data input lines must be entered for each reuse of the substructure.

iretni [0]
The substructure connection node for the substructure reuse.

Auxiliary commands

LIST REUSE-NODES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

DELETE REUSE-NODES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE

ADINA R & D, Inc. 9-113

Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input CYCLICBOUNDARIES NODES

CYCLICBOUNDARIES NODES

sbnodei mbnodei

Specifies the cyclic boundary nodes of the fundamental part of a cyclic symmetric structure.
The cyclic boundaries of the fundamental part consist of two boundaries, namely, the master
and slave cyclic boundaries.

When the nodes on the master cyclic boundary are rotated 360/M (where M is the number of
cyclic parts) degrees counter clockwise about the cyclic symmetry axis, they should coincide
with the nodes on the slave cyclic boundary.

sbnodei
Label number of a node on the slave cyclic boundary.

mbnodei
Label number of the corresponding node on the master cyclic boundary.

Auxilary commands

LIST CYCLICBOUNDARIES NODES FIRST LAST

DELETE CYCLICBOUNDARIES NODES FIRST LAST

9-114 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Command index

Command index

A AXES CONSTANT, 7-501

AXES EDGE, 7-510
ADINA, 3-9
AXES FACE, 7-511
ALIGN-DISTANCE, 7-522
AXES LINE1, 7-502
ALIGN-ROTATION, 7-524
AXES LINE2, 7-503
ALIGN-TRANSLATION, 7-520
AXES NODES, 7-504
ANALYSIS DYNAMIC-DIRECT-INTEGRA-
AXES POINT-LINE, 7-508
TION, 5-24
AXES POINT2, 7-506
ANALYSIS MODAL-PARTICIPATION-
AXES POINT3, 7-507
FACTORS, 5-35
AXES SURFACE, 7-509
ANALYSIS MODAL-STRESSES, 5-36
AXES-CYLINDRICAL, 7-512
ANALYSIS MODAL-TRANSIENT, 5-34
AXES-INITIALSTRAIN, 9-22
ANALYSIS-SWITCH, 5-37
AXES-NODES, 9-21
ANALYTICAL-RIGID-TARGET, 7-264
AXES-ORTHOTROPIC, 9-23
APPLY CONCENTRATED-LOADS, 9-76
AXES-SPHERICAL, 7-513
APPLY DISPLACEMENTS, 9-78
AXIS-ROTATION, 7-261
APPLY ELECTROMAGNETIC-LOADS, 9-80
APPLY INTERNAL-HEAT, 7-466 B
APPLY PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURES, 9-81
BCELL, 7-415
APPLY TEMPERATURES, 9-82
BHEXA, 8-161
APPLY TGRADIENTS, 9-83
BLAYER, 8-67
APPLY USER-SUPPLIED-LOADS, 9-84
BLTABLE, 8-208
APPLY-LOAD, 7-460
BLTABLE-2D, 8-209
AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT, 5-61
BLTABLE-3D, 8-212
AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING, 5-65
BODY BLEND, 6-114
AUTOMATIC TOTAL-LOAD-APPLICATION,
BODY BLOCK, 6-116
5-69
BODY CHAMFER, 6-119

ADINA R & D, Inc. Index-1

Command index

BODY CONE, 6-121 BODY-ELEMDATA FLUID3, 7-237

BODY CYLINDER, 6-124 BODY-ELEMDATA GENERAL, 7-232
BODY DEFEATURE, 6-127 BODY-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID, 7-218
BODY DUPLICATE, 6-128 BODY-RESTORE, 6-88
BODY HOLLOW, 6-130 BOLT-OPTIONS, 8-60
BODY INTERSECT, 6-131 BOLT-PLANE, 8-61
BODY LOFTED, 6-132 BOLT-TABLE, 8-63
BODY MERGE, 6-133 BOUNDARIES, 9-66
BODY MID-SURFACE, 6-135 BOUNDARY-SURFACE SURFACE-TENSION,
BODY OFFSET, 6-136 7-411
BODY OPTION, 6-138 BUCKLING-LOADS, 5-32
BODY PARTITION, 6-139
C
BODY PIPE, 6-140
BODY PRISM, 6-143 CGROUP CONTACT2, 7-271

BODY PROJECT, 6-146 CGROUP CONTACT3, 7-292

BODY REMOVE-ENTITY, 6-147 CHECK-SURFACES, 6-61

BODY REVOLVED, 6-149 COEFFICIENTS-TABLE, 7-147

BODY SECTION, 6-154 COHESIVE-INTERFACE, 7-416

BODY SEW, 6-155 COHESIVE-PROPERTY, 7-418

BODY SHEET, 6-156 COMMANDFILE, 3-38

BODY SPHERE, 6-160 CONSTRAINT, 7-386

BODY SUBTRACT, 6-162 CONSTRAINT-G, 7-394

BODY SWEEP, 6-163 CONSTRAINT-MS, 7-391

BODY TORUS, 6-168 CONSTRAINT-NODE, 9-69

BODY TRANSFORMED, 6-170 CONTACT-CONTROL, 7-265

BODY-CLEANUP, 6-86 CONTACT-ELEMSET, 9-103

BODY-DEFEATURE, 6-83 CONTACT-FACENODES, 9-104

BODY-DISCREP, 6-82 CONTACT-NODES, 9-105

BODY-DSCADAP, 6-89 CONTACT-OUTPUT-NODES, 5-103

Index-2 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition

CONTACT3-SEARCH, 7-335
CONTACTBODY, 7-319
CONTACTPAIR, 7-332
CONTACTPOINT, 7-324
CONTACTSURFACE, 7-321
CONTROL, 4-3
CONVERT-STL, 6-177
COORDINATES NODE, 9-3
COORDINATES POINT, 6-6
COPY-ELEMENT-NODES, 9-55
COPY-MESH-BODY, 8-166
COPY-TRIANGULATION, 8-69
COULOMB-FRICTION, 7-329
CPROP, 7-456
CRACK-GROWTH, 7-340
CRACK-M COMBINE, 7-357
CRACK-M DEFINE, 7-356
CRACK-M GBODY, 7-360
CRACK-M MESH, 7-359
CRACK-M Q-POINT, 7-361
CRACK-M SUBDIVIDE, 7-358
CRACK-PROPAGATION, 7-342
CRACK-PROPAGATION NODES, 9-107
CRACK-SVS, 7-362
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS LUBBY2, 7-148
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR,
7-149
ADINA R & D, Inc.
Command index
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-
ONLY, 7-150
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS USER-SUPPLIED,
7-152
CROSS-SECTION BOX, 7-188
CROSS-SECTION I, 7-192
CROSS-SECTION L, 7-196
CROSS-SECTION PIPE, 7-200
CROSS-SECTION PROPERTIES, 7-207
CROSS-SECTION RECTANGULAR, 7-202
CROSS-SECTION U, 7-204
CS-OFFSET, 7-331
CSDELETE, 8-170
CSDELETE THREE-D, 8-172
CSDELETE TWO-D, 8-171
CSURFACE, 8-169
CURVATURE-MOMENT, 7-153
CURVE-FITTING, 7-114
CYCLIC-CONTROL, 7-254
CYCLICBOUNDARIES NODES, 9-114
CYCLICBOUNDARY, 7-258
CYCLICBOUNDARY THREE-D, 7-260
CYCLICBOUNDARY TWO-D, 7-259
CYCLICLOADS, 7-257
D
DAMPERS, 7-248
DAMPERS NODES, 9-7
DATABASE ATTACH, 3-7
Index-3
Command index

DATABASE DETACH, 3-8 EGROUPALIGNMENT, 8-57

DATABASE NEW, 3-3 EGROUP BEAM, 8-21
DATABASE OPEN, 3-4 EGROUP FLUID2, 8-51
DATABASE SAVE, 3-6 EGROUP FLUID3, 8-54
DATABASE WRITE, 3-5 EGROUP GENERAL, 8-49
DELETE-FE-MODEL, 9-57 EGROUP ISOBEAM, 8-26
DELETE-TRIANGULATION, 8-70 EGROUP PIPE, 8-42
DFC-CREEPACI209R-92, 7-154 EGROUP PLATE, 8-31
DFC-CREEP ADINA, 7-156 EGROUP SHELL, 8-33
DFC-CREEP CEB-FIP, 7-157 EGROUP SPRING, 8-47
DIAGNOSTICS, 5-115 EGROUP THREEDSOLID, 8-14
DISK-STORAGE, 5-109 EGROUP TRUSS, 8-3
DMIG-APPLY, 9-15 EGROUP TWODSOLID, 8-6
DMIG-DEFINE, 9-14 ELAYER, 7-228
DOF-ACTIVE, 5-19 ELDELETE, 8-164
DOF-SYSTEM, 7-493 ELEDGESET, 9-24
DOF-SYSTEM NODES, 9-5 ELEMENTSET, 9-26
DOMAIN, 6-107 ELEMSAVE-STEPS, 5-99
DRAWBEAD, 7-326 ELFACESET, 9-29
ELMOVE, 8-64
E
ELTHICKNESS, 8-206
EDATA, 9-48 END, 3-41
EDGE-ELEMDATA BEAM, 7-220 ENDRELEASE, 7-402
EDGE-ELEMDATA GENERAL, 7-232 ENERGY, 5-116
EDGE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM, 7-222 ENODES, 9-33
EDGE-ELEMDATA PIPE, 7-230 ENODES-INTERFACE, 9-47
EDGE-ELEMDATA TRUSS, 7-214 EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS, 5-79
EG-SUBSTRUCTURE, 7-263 EXECUTE, 3-45
EGCONTROL, 8-58 EXPORT NASTRAN, 3-30

Index-4 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Command index

EXPORT UNIVERSAL, 3-31 FSBOUNDARY THREE-D, 7-407

FSBOUNDARY TWO-D, 7-406
F
FSI-FACE, 9-74
FACE-ELEMDATA FLUID2, 7-235 FTABLE, 7-158
FACE-ELEMDATA GENERAL, 7-232
G
FACE-ELEMDATA PLATE, 7-224
FACE-ELEMDATA SHELL, 7-226 GADAPT, 8-155
FACE-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID, 7-216 GAP-CONDUCTANCE, 7-337
FACE-THICKNESS, 6-77 GBCELL, 8-158
FACELINK, 6-78 GBODY, 8-138
FAILURE HASHIN, 5-54 GEDGE, 8-127
FAILURE MAXSTRAIN, 5-49 GET-EDGE-FACES, 6-110
FAILURE MAXSTRESS, 5-47 GET-EDGE-POINTS, 6-110
FAILURE TSAI-HILL, 5-51 GET-FACE-EDGES, 6-111
FAILURE TSAI-WU, 5-52 GFACE, 8-130
FAILURE USERSUPPLIED, 5-55 GHEXA, 8-150
FEPROGRAM, 5-3 GLINE, 8-110
FILEECHO, 3-36 GLUEMESH, 8-173
FILELIST, 3-35 GPOINT, 8-109
FILELOG, 3-37 GSURFACE, 8-113
FILEREAD, 3-33 GVOLUME, 8-121
FILESESSION, 3-34
H
FIXBOUNDARY, 7-397
FIXITY, 7-395 HEADING, 5-4

FORCE-STRAIN, 7-160 I
FRACTURE, 7-338
IMPERFECTION NODES, 9-102
FREESURFACE, 7-413
IMPERFECTION POINTS, 7-478
FREQUENCIES, 5-28
IMPERFECTION SHAPE, 7-479
FSBOUNDARY, 7-404

ADINA R & D, Inc. Index-5

Command index

IMPORT-EXTERNAL, 3-22 J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT SURFACE, 7-352

IMPORT-STEP, 3-26
K
INITIAL ACCELERATIONS, 9-91
INITIAL DISPLACEMENTS, 9-92 KINEMATICS, 5-39

INITIAL FLEXURALSTRAINS, 9-93 KNOTS, 6-27

INITIAL OVALIZATIONS, 9-94 L

INITIAL PINTERNALPRESSURES, 9-95
LAYER, 7-210
INITIAL SGRADIENTS, 9-97
LCOMBINATION, 7-459
INITIAL STRAINS, 9-96
LCURVE, 7-184
INITIAL TEMPERATURES, 9-98
LINE ARC, 6-17
INITIAL TGRADIENTS, 9-99
LINE CIRCLE, 6-22
INITIAL VELOCITIES, 9-100
LINE COMBINED, 6-33
INITIAL WARPINGS, 9-101
LINE CURVILINEAR, 6-25
INITIAL-CONDITION, 7-469
LINE EDGE, 6-41
INITIAL-MAPPING, 7-480
LINE EXTRUDED, 6-37
INITIAL-ROTATION, 7-475
LINE POLYLINE, 6-28
IRRADIATION_CREEP-TABLE, 7-161
LINE REVOLVED, 6-34
ITERATION, 5-74
LINE SECTION, 6-31
J LINE STRAIGHT, 6-16

J-LINE ELEMENT, 9-110 LINE TRANSFORMED, 6-39

J-LINE POINT, 7-344 LINE-ELEMDATA BEAM, 7-220

J-LINE RING, 7-346 LINE-ELEMDATA GENERAL, 7-232

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT CRACK-M, 7-348 LINE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM, 7-222

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT ELEMENT, 9-109 LINE-ELEMDATA PIPE, 7-230

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT LINE, 7-351 LINE-ELEMDATA TRUSS, 7-214

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT NODE, 9-108 LINE-FUNCTION, 6-90

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT POINT, 7-349 LIST-TRIANGULATION, 8-71

J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING, 7-353 LNTHICKNESS, 6-44

Index-6 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Command index

LOAD -OPTION, 7-467 LOAD-CASE, 7-458

LOAD ACCELERATION, 7-420 LOAD-CLOUD, 3-18
LOAD CCHARGE, 7-421 LOAD-PENETRATION, 7-468
LOAD CENTRIFUGAL, 7-422 LOAD-STL, 3-19
LOAD CONTACT-SLIP, 7-424 LOADDXF, 3-12
LOAD CONVECTION, 7-425 LOADIGES, 3-13
LOAD DCHARGE, 7-426 LOADOCC, 3-15
LOAD DISPLACEMENT, 7-427 LOADS-ELEMENT, 9-85
LOAD ELECTROMAGNETIC, 7-428 LOADSOLID, 3-16
LOAD FORCE, 7-429
M
LOAD HEATFLUX, 7-430
LOAD INTERNALHEAT, 7-431 MASS-MATRIX, 5-42

LOAD LATENT, 7-433 MASSES, 7-245

LOAD LINE, 7-434 MASSES NODES, 9-6

LOAD MASS-PROPORTIONAL, 7-435 MASTER, 5-6

LOAD MOMENT, 7-437 MATERIAL ANAND, 7-3

LOAD NODAL-HEATFLOW, 7-438 MATERIAL ARRUDA-BOYCE, 7-5

LOAD NODAL-PHIFLUX, 7-440 MATERIAL CAM-CLAY, 7-8

LOAD PHIFLUX, 7-441 MATERIAL CONCRETE, 7-9

LOAD PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE, 7-442 MATERIAL CREEP, 7-13

LOAD PORE-PRESSURE, 7-444 MATERIAL CREEP-IRRADIATION, 7-15

LOAD POREFLOW, 7-443 MATERIAL CREEP-VARIABLE, 7-17

LOAD PRESSURE, 7-445 MATERIAL CURVE-DESCRIPTION, 7-19

LOAD RADIATION, 7-446 MATERIAL DF-CONCRETE, 7-21

LOAD ROTATION, 7-447 MATERIAL DRUCKER-PRAGER, 7-24

LOAD TEMPERATURE, 7-449 MATERIAL EIGHT-CHAIN, 7-25

LOAD TGRADIENT, 7-450 MATERIAL ELASTIC, 7-28

LOAD VELOCITY, 7-451 MATERIAL FLUID, 7-29

LOAD VOLTAGE, 7-452 MATERIAL GASKET, 7-30

ADINA R & D, Inc. Index-7

Command index

MATERIAL GURSON-PLASTIC, 7-32 MATERIAL THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC, 7-92

MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM, 7-38 MATERIAL THERMO-PLASTIC, 7-94
MATERIAL HYPERELASTIC, 7-34 MATERIAL THREE-NETWORK, 7-96
MATERIAL ISOTROPIC, 7-104 MATERIAL TIMEDEP-K, 7-111
MATERIAL MOHR-COULOMB, 7-42 MATERIAL USER-SUPPLIED, 7-112
MATERIAL MOONEY-RIVLIN, 7-44 MATERIAL USER-SUPPLIED, 7-99
MATERIAL MROZ-BILINEAR, 7-47 MATERIAL VISCOELASTIC, 7-102
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC- MATRIX DAMPING, 7-241
CREEP, 7-48 MATRIX MASS, 7-240
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC- MATRIX STIFFNESS, 7-239
CREEP-VARIABLE, 7-53 MATRIX STRESS, 7-242
MATERIAL NONLINEAR-ELASTIC, 7-56 MATRIX USER-SUPPLIED, 7-244
MATERIAL OGDEN, 7-58 MATRIXSET, 7-243
MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC, 7-61 MEASURE, 6-108
MATERIAL PIEZOELECTRIC, 7-63 MESH-CONVERT, 9-46
MATERIAL PLASTIC-BILINEAR, 7-65 MESH-DETACH, 8-174
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP, 7-68 MESH-JOIN, 8-176
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE, MESH-SPLIT, 8-180
7-72 MODAL-DAMPING, 5-45
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC, 7-75 MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE, 7-163
MATERIAL PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR, 7-78 MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE, 7-164
MATERIAL PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC, 7-81 MONITOR, 5-112
MATERIAL SMA, 7-85 MONITOR-CONTROL, 5-114
MATERIAL SUSSMAN-BATHE, 7-87
N
MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ISOTROPIC, 7-107
MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ORTHOTROPIC, NASTRAN-ADINA, 3-27

7-108 NEUTRON-DOSE, 7-165

MATERIAL TEMPDEP-K, 7-106 NEUTRON-TABLE, 7-166

MATERIAL THERMO-ISOTROPIC, 7-91 NLTABLE, 8-108

Index-8 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Command index

NODE-DELETE, 9-18 PORE-FLUID-PROPERTY, 7-167

NODE-RENUMBER, 9-19
NODE-SNAP, 9-17
NODESAVE-STEPS, 5-97
NODESET, 9-10
O
OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT NODE, 9-73
OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT POINT, 7-412
PORTHOLE, 5-92
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FLUID-STRUC-
TURE, 7-408
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE ADINA-F, 7-408
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FLUID-FLUID,
7-408
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FREE-SURFACE,
7-408

P POTENTIAL-INTERFACE INFINITE, 7-409

POTENTIAL-INTERFACE INLET-OUTLET,
PARAMETER, 3-42
7-408
PAUSE, 3-40
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE RIGID-WALL,
PHI-MODEL-COMPLETION, 7-120
7-408
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC BILINEAR, 7-121
PPROCESS, 5-58
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC EXPONENTIAL, 7-123
PRINT-STEPS, 5-90
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC MEMORY-EXPONEN-
PRINTNODES, 5-101
TIAL, 7-124
PRINTOUT, 5-87
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC MULTILINEAR, 7-122
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-C, 7-168
PLCYCL-KINEMATIC ARMSTRONG-
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-K, 7-169
FREDRICK, 7-125
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-M, 7-170
PLCYCL-RUPTURE AEPS, 7-126
PROPERTYSET, 7-171
PLY-DATA, 7-213
PSET-6DOF, 8-187
POINT BETWEEN, 6-8
POINT CENTER, 6-10 R
POINT EDGE, 6-14 R-CURVE, 7-376
POINT LINE, 6-12 R-PROP, 7-457
POINT NODE, 6-11 RAYLEIGH-DAMPING, 5-43
POINT-SIZE, 8-91 REACTION-NODES, 5-104

ADINA R & D, Inc. Index-9

Command index

READ, 3-32 RUBBER-TABLE TRS, 7-139

REBAR-LINE, 8-203 RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC BERGSTROM-
REBUILD-MODEL, 3-10 BOYCE, 7-142
REDO, 4-10 RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC HOLZAPFEL,
REF-FRAME, 7-454 7-143
REM-EDGE, 6-112 RUPTURE MULTILINEAR, 7-178
REM-FACE, 6-113 RUPTURE THREE-PARAMETER, 7-179
RESULTS-ELEMENT, 5-105 RUPTURE-CURVE, 7-180
REUSE, 7-252
S
REUSE-NODES, 9-113
REVOLVE, 9-58 SAVENODES, 5-107

RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE NONLIN- SCURVE, 7-181

EAR-ELASTIC, 7-173 SET-AXES-MATERIAL, 7-514

RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE PLASTIC- SET-AXES-STRAIN, 7-517

MULTILINEAR, 7-175 SET-INITCONDITION, 7-471

RIGIDLINK, 7-382 SET-TRIADSET NODES, 7-530

RIGIDLINK-NODE, 9-71 SFTHICKNESS, 6-60

RIGIDNODES SHELL, 9-16 SHEET PLANE, 6-172

RTOFILE, 3-39 SHELLDIRECTORVECTOR, 9-9

RUBBER-MULLINS OGDEN-ROXBURGH, SHELLNODESDOF, 7-498

7-141 SHELLNODESDOF NODES, 9-8

RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC HOLZAPFEL, SINGULAR, 7-378

7-145 SINGULAR NODES, 9-112

RUBBER-TABLE ARRUDA-BOYCE, 7-127 SIZE-FUNCTION AXIS, 8-99

RUBBER-TABLE EIGHT-CHAIN, 7-129 SIZE-FUNCTION BOUNDS, 8-93

RUBBER-TABLE HYPER-FOAM, 7-135 SIZE-FUNCTION COMBINED, 8-106

RUBBER-TABLE MOONEY-RIVLIN, 7-131 SIZE-FUNCTION HEX, 8-95

RUBBER-TABLE OGDEN, 7-133 SIZE-FUNCTION PLANE, 8-103

RUBBER-TABLE SUSSMAN-BATHE, 7-137 SIZE-FUNCTION POINT, 8-97

Index-10 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition

SIZE-LOCATIONS, 8-107
SKEWSYSTEM NODES, 9-4
SKEWSYSTEMS CYLINDRICAL, 7-484
SKEWSYSTEMS EULERANGLES, 7-487
SKEWSYSTEMS NORMAL, 7-488
SKEWSYSTEMS POINTS, 7-489
SKEWSYSTEMS SPHERICAL, 7-490
SKEWSYSTEMS VECTORS, 7-491
SOLVER ITERATIVE, 5-57
SPLIT-EDGE, 6-80
SPLIT-FACE, 6-81
SPLIT-INTERFACE, 7-419
SPLIT-LINE, 6-43
SPRING LINES, 8-201
SPRING NODESETS, 8-195
SPRING POINTS, 8-198
SPRING-6DOF LINES, 8-188
SPRING-6DOF NODESETS, 8-190
SPRING-6DOF POINTS, 8-192
SSCURVE, 7-182
STIFFNESS-STEPS, 5-77
STL ELIM-EDGE, 8-184
STL ELIM-EDGES-ANGLE, 8-185
STRAIN-FIELD, 7-477
STRAINRATE-FIT, 7-186
SUBDIVIDE BODY, 8-89
SUBDIVIDE DEFAULT, 8-72
SUBDIVIDE EDGE, 8-85
SUBDIVIDE FACE, 8-87
ADINA R & D, Inc.
Command index
SUBDIVIDE LINE, 8-76
SUBDIVIDE MODEL, 8-74
SUBDIVIDE POINT, 8-75
SUBDIVIDE SURFACE, 8-79
SUBDIVIDE VOLUME, 8-82
SUBSTRUCTURE, 7-251
SURF-ELEMDATA FLUID2, 7-235
SURF-ELEMDATA GENERAL, 7-232
SURF-ELEMDATA PLATE, 7-224
SURF-ELEMDATA SHELL, 7-226
SURF-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID, 7-216
SURFACE EXTRUDED, 6-52
SURFACE FACE, 6-175
SURFACE GRID, 6-49
SURFACE PATCH, 6-45
SURFACE REVOLVED, 6-54
SURFACE TRANSFORMED, 6-57
SURFACE VERTEX, 6-47
SURFACE-FUNCTION, 6-92
SWEEP, 9-62
SYSTEM, 6-3
T
TEMPERATURE-REFERENCE, 5-56
THERMAL-MAPPING, 7-483
TIMEFUNCTION, 5-72
TIMESTEP, 5-71
TMATERIAL TEMPDEP-K, 7-106
TMC-CONTROL, 5-20
Index-11
Command index

TMC-ITERATION, 5-81 U
TMC-MATERIAL ISOTROPIC, 7-104
UNDO, 4-9
TMC-MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC, 7-105
USER-FRICTION, 7-330
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ISOTROPIC,
USER-RUPTURE, 7-381
7-107
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-K, 7-110 V
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C- VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS, 7-119
ORTHOTROPIC, 7-108 VOL-ELEMDATA FLUID3, 7-237
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-K, 7-106 VOL-ELEMDATA GENERAL, 7-232
TMC-MATERIAL TIMEDEP-K, 7-111 VOL-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID, 7-218
TMC-MATERIAL USER-SUPPLIED, 7-112 VOLUME BODY, 6-174
TMC-SOLVER ITERATIVE, 5-59 VOLUME EXTRUDED, 6-69
TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, 5-82 VOLUME PATCH, 6-62
TOLERANCES ITERATION, 5-84 VOLUME REVOLVED, 6-66
TRANSFORMATION COMBINED, 6-97 VOLUME SWEEP, 6-72
TRANSFORMATION DIRECT, 6-99 VOLUME TRANSFORMED, 6-74
TRANSFORMATION INVERSE, 6-106 VOLUME VERTEX, 6-64
TRANSFORMATION POINTS, 6-100 VOLUME-FUNCTION, 6-95
TRANSFORMATION REFLECTION, 6-101
Z
TRANSFORMATION ROTATION, 6-102
TRANSFORMATION SCALE, 6-104 ZOOM-BOUNDARY, 7-400
TRANSFORMATION TRANSLATION, 6-105
TRANSITION-ELEMENT, 8-66
TRIADSETS, 7-528
TRUSS-LINE, 8-204
TRUSS-POINTS, 8-186
TWIST-MOMENT, 7-187

Index-12 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

Appendix 1

Error Messages
General errors

Error
Description
Number
1002 Stiffness matrix not positive definite, boundary conditions or model collapsed
1003 Either the ADINA input file (*.dat) is missing or is incorrect
1004 Program not able to open the restart file, please check your input
1005 Not enough memory on the system to be allocated for the ADINA program
1006 Not enough memory allocated, sparse matrix indexes cannot fit into memory
1007 Node label cannot be zero or larger that the maximum label number
1008 Wrong input data, this is ADINA-F input data
1009 Wrong input data, this is ADINA-T input data
1010 Input data from an unsupported program version
1011 Restart from static to dynamic cannot be used if factorized K is reused
1012 Restart from dynamic analysis to static cannot be used if LDC is used
1013 Number of time functions in restart cannot be smaller than in the previous run
1014 Temperature loading used in a previous run but not in restart
1015 Model contains features not available in explicit time integrations
1016 Number of nonlinear element groups changed in the restart run
1017 Number of substructures changed in restart analysis
1018 Incorrect number of substructure stiffness blocks in the restart run
1019 Errors in reading restart file
1020 Element group data is changed in restart analysis
1021 Material model is changed in restart analysis
1022 Substructure reused different number of times in restart analysis
1023 The total number of DOFs changed for restart and substructure analysis
1024 Zero effective mass input in explicit time integration
1025 Restart time mismatch, please check your input data
1026 Temperature file cannot be opened
1027 Temperature gradient file cannot be opened

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-1

Appendix 1

1028 External force file (IT58) cannot be opened

1029 Automatic time stepping not available for options used
1030 Program cannot find a license file or is not allowed to run on this platform
1031 Density cannot be set to zero in explicit time integration
1032 ISOBEAM, only 2-node elements can be used in explicit time integration
1033 Pipe elements cannot be used in explicit time integration
1034 Explicit time integration, material model cannot be used in this element group
1035 Potential based fluid elements cannot be used in explicit time integration
1036 User-supplied material model cannot be used in explicit time integration
1037 Material model in this element group cannot be used with initial stresses
1038 Number of nodal points equal to zero is not allowed
1039 The restricted number of nodes exceeded - 900 nodes maximum allowed
1040 Incorrect entry for temperatures, pipe pressure or forces read from a file
1041 Nodal forces provided on an external file cannot be used with substructures
1042 Wrong input for extended results printout for large strains
1043 Wrong input data for file provided forces, see DISK-STORAGE
1044 Fracture flag out of range, please check your input data
1045 Rigid beam-bolts cannot be used with cyclic symmetry
1046 Static correction for response spectrum can be used in linear analysis only
1047 Wrong formulation used, fluid potential and response spectrum
1048 Wrong formulation used, fluid potential and mode- superposition
1049 Solution (iteration) method is out of range, please see ITERATION METHOD
1050 Wrong flag for the automatic time-stepping method
1051 Input for number of subdivisions is wrong (negative!), see AUTOMATIC
TIME-ST
1052 Large strains extended printing flag is wrong see PRINTOUT LARGE-
STRAINS
1053 Automatic load displacement (LDC) method cannot be used in crack
propagation
1054 Incorrect main fracture input flags (see FRACTURE...)
1055 Frequency calculation cannot be done in static analysis
1056 Determinant search cannot be used to calculate frequencies within interval
1057 Frequency file is missing, it is required to perform modal analysis

A-2 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

1058 Number of frequencies and mode shapes stored on file is smaller than
requested
1059 Response spectrum analysis cannot be used with cyclic symmetry
1060 Number of frequencies requested is larger than number frequencies calculated
1061 Response spectrum analysis cannot be performed without translational DOFs
1062 Automatic load-displacement (LDC) method can only be used in static
analysis
1063 Automatic load-displacement (LDC) method can only be used in nonlinear
analysis
1064 Automatic load-displacement (LDC) method cannot be used in linearized
buckling
1065 LDC method, wrong node label used in the first step loading
1066 LDC method DOF used for the prescribed first step displacement is incorrect
1067 LDC method maximum allowable displacement(DISPMAX) cannot be
negative
1068 Incorrect input data for fluid-structure analysis (FSI)
1069 Error in STIFFNESS-STEPS or EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS input data
1070 Error in printing or saving block input data
1071 Number of linear, nonlinear and substructure element groups is equal to zero
1072 Potential based fluid element flag is incorrect
1073 Potential based fluid elements cannot be used with substructures
1074 Potential based fluid elements cannot be used with lumped damping
1075 Potential based fluids cannot be used with the subspace iteration method.
Only determinant search or Lanczos method can be used.
Note: For large problems or mid-size problems with a large number of
frequencies requested, the Lanczos method should be used.
1076 Potential based fluid elements can not be used with lumped mass matrix
1077 Input error, time step cannot be equal to or smaller than zero
1078 Flag to request reaction calculations is incorrect
1079 Damping can only be included in dynamic analysis
1080 Wilson method cannot be used with the automatic time stepping (ATS) method
1081 Lumped mass has to be used for the explicit time integration
1082 Frequency calculation cannot be used with explicit time integration
1083 Damping flag is incorrect

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-3

Appendix 1

1084 Only lumped damping can be used in explicit time integration

1085 Consistent mass matrix cannot be used with substructures
1086 Damping cannot be used with substructuring
1087 Mode superposition analysis cannot be used with substructuring
1088 Linearized buckling cannot be used in dynamic analysis
1089 Frequency calculation cannot be requested when substructuring is used
1090 Initial imperfections cannot be used with substructures
1091 Explicit time integration cannot be used with substructures
1092 Mode superposition can be performed if mass matrix assemblage is requested
1093 Automatic load-displacement (LDC) method cannot be used with thermal
loading
1094 User-supplied loading cannot be used with automatic load-displacement
method
1095 Contact surfaces cannot be present in mode superposition analysis
1096 Factorized stiffness matrix cannot be stored, explicit time integration used
1097 Displacements cannot be prescribed in mode superposition analysis
1098 Linearized buckling cannot be performed in linear analysis
1099 Centrifugal loading cannot be used with substructures
1101 Mesh too distorted, Jacobian determinant not positive
1102 Contact conditions inadmissible (either wrong contact orientation or
divergence)
1103 No convergence, concrete material model, stresses outside the failure curve
1104 Mixed (u/p) formulation an internal matrix cannot be inverted
1105 No convergence in the iterative solver
1106 No convergence in plasticity (bisection algorithm)
1107 No convergence in the Drucker-Prager material model
1108 No convergence in the creep material model
1109 No convergence in orthotropic plasticity (bisection)
1110 No convergence in rubber-like material model
1111 Green-Lagrange strains beyond theoretical limit
1112 No convergence in the moment-curvature material model
1113 Strains out-of-range nonlinear elastic material model
1114 No stress convergence in the Gurson material model

A-4 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

1115 FSI load calculation problem, time step reduced

1116 Insufficient memory for double-sided contact (could be due to divergence)
1117 Mesh too distorted BEAM distributed load calculation
1118 Zero pivot probably wrong boundary conditions
1119 No convergence in Mohr-Coulomb material model
1120 Divergence, energy greater than 1.E30, model crushed, time step probably too
large
1121 Rigid contact, time step reduced due to tensile contact
1122 BEAM elements, program stopped in material model calculations
1123 Solution is diverging, time step reduced, solution continues
1124 No convergence in the concrete material model
1125 Invalid energy value (either NaN or Inf) in the convergence check
1126 A division by zero in the BEAM element, program might be diverging
1127 3-D solid elements, ULH eigenvector cannot be calculated
1128 Incompatible mode elements an internal matrix cannot be inverted
1130 No convergence in the foam material model (bisection algorithm)
1131 No convergence in element pressure calculations, mixed u/p elements
1132 SHELL elements mesh too distorted
1133 Rigid target contact algorithm, time step reduced due to excessive penetration
1135 Not enough memory for contact equations in the sparse solver
1136 Zero pivot in stress-strain matrix for SMA material
1137 No convergence in Mroz bilinear model
1138 No convergence in the 3D-ITE solver
1139 Non-positive temperature in Anand model
1140 Incorrect initial pressure in the Cam-Clay material model
1141 No convergence in Anand model
1142 Invalid contact force norm (either NaN or Inf)
1143 Radiation load calculation, temperature is too high
1144 No convergence in the iterative solver for temperature solution vector
1145 No convegence in the plastic-cyclic material model
1146 3D shell, an internal matrix cannot be inverted
1147 No convergence in the data fitted concrete model

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-5

Appendix 1

1197 Probably too many nodes suddenly in contact, program takes a smaller step
1198 Rigid contact internal error, non-unique contact surface definition
1199 Program internal error
1201 Not enough memory to store nodal coordinates, probably gaps in node
numbering
1202 Total number of constraint equations is incorrect
1203 Constraint equations are out of order
1204 Node numbers input for constraints is incorrect
1205 Constraint equations Incorrect number of degrees of freedom
1206 Constraint equations incorrect number of independent degrees of freedom
1207 An independent degree of freedom is used as a dependent in constraints
1208 Fluid DOF can only be constrained to another fluid DOF
1209 An independent DOF has to be an active DOF, i.e., cannot be a "fixed" DOF
1210 Rigid links must be input in ascending order
1211 Incorrect input for a rigid link number
1212 Flag indicating type of rigid link (linear or nonlinear) is incorrect
1213 Nonlinear rigid links cannot be used in linear analysis
1214 Linear rigid links must be input before nonlinear links
1215 Rigid links cannot be used with SHELL having 5 DOFs
1216 Independent DOFs are not allowed on slave rigid links nodes
1217 Master rigid link nodes must have all independent DOFs
1218 Number of constraint equations with bolts is incorrect
1219 Rigid bolts cannot be connected to shell elements with 5 DOFs
1220 Slave nodes of rigid bolts must have all DOFs constrained
1221 A constrained degree of freedom (DOF) by a rigid bolt must be free
1222 Bolt constraints cannot be generated, independent DOFs are missing
1223 There are no potential fluid degrees of freedom for marked structural DOFs
1224 Allocated memory too small to store stiffness matrix
1225 Insufficient allocated memory
1226 Insufficient allocated memory. More than 1000 blocks need to be created.
1227 Rigid bolt, translational DOFs are constrained
1228 SHELL elements, an averaged director vector has zero magnitude

A-6 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

1229 Rigid bolt, translational DOFs are constrained

1230 Incorrect flag for convergence criteria, see TOLERANCES ITERATION
CONVERGENCE
1231 Incorrect convergence criteria in mode superposition, only energy can be used
1232 Reference force in force convergence criteria must be greater than zero
1233 Reference translation in displacement convergence must be greater than zero
1234 Reference moment in force convergence criteria must be greater than zero
1235 Reference rotation in displacement convergence must be greater than zero
1236 Reference value of initial imperfections cannot be specified on constrained
DOF
1237 Initial strain flag is incorrect
1238 Time on temperature tape does not match solution starting time
1239 Temperature tape steps do not match steps in ADINA, use DISK-S
TEMP=INTERPOLATE
1240 Director vectors can only be generated if Euler angles are used
1241 Incorrect input for SHELL director vectors
1242 Skew system number in nodal input data is incorrect
1243 Coordinate system type is incorrect
1244 Mid-surface vector number is greater than total number of director vectors
1245 Number of degrees of freedom allowed in analysis is incorrect
1246 The fluid DOF is incorrect, it can be free, fixed or constrained
1247 SHELL 5/6 DOF indicator is incorrect. It should be 0 or 1.
1248 End-of-file when reading, temperature or pipe pressure external file
1249 No fluid (PHI) DOF for marked structural degrees of freedom
1250 Total number of equations is zero. At least one equation is required.
1251 Incorrect element type input, please check your data
1252 Contact element groups must be input after ALL element group data
1253 Specified number of element groups is different than the number read from
input
1254 Specified number of contact groups is different than the number read from
input
1255 Crack growth, stiffness must be reformed every step
1256 A node with assigned pressure DOF has not been used in any element group
1257 Incorrect input data for rigid-bolt element

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-7

Appendix 1

1258 Number of elements connected to 1 node exceeds the value specified in input
1259 LDC-initial displacement imposed on a deleted or constrained DOF
1260 Substructure identification number incorrect
1261 Substructures local X vector has zero length, please check your input
1262 Substructures local Y vector has zero length, please check your input
1263 Substructures local X&Y vectors are not orthogonal, please check your input
1264 Substructures incorrect connectivity array, please check your input
1265 Substructures error in printing or saving block input data
1266 Time integration method incorrect, can be implicit or explicit
1267 Wilson-theta method, theta incorrect, see ANALYSIS DYNAMIC METHOD
1268 Newmark method, incorrect parameters, see ANALYSIS DYNAMIC
METHOD
1269 Dynamic analysis, time step too small
1270 An unsuccessful attempt has been made to read a direct access file
1271 An unsuccessful attempt has been made to write into a direct access file
1272 Incorrect maximum number of DOF per node, input probably is not correct
1273 Mode superposition analysis requires number of modes greater than zero
1274 Program internal error, very likely memory corrupted
1275 Slave DOFs cannot be connected to multiple rigid links
1276 Incompatible options for centrifugal force calculation
Element-based centrifugal force calculation option cannot be used if a lumped
mass matrix is specified for the problem.
1277 Incompatible options for centrifugal force calculation.
Deformation-dependent centrifugal loading cannot be used with element-based
centrifugal force calculation option.
1278 PHI massflux loads can only be used with potential-based elements
1279 The number of elements in the restart run is different than in the previous run
1280 Explicit analysis TOTALTIME option, can only be used with one time step
block
1281 Explicit time integration method cannot be used with potential fluid elements
1282 Constraint equation cannot be defined along prescribed direction
1283 Incompatibility between time functions in the fluid and structural models
1284 Rigid target, different number of processors used in restart than in a previous
run

A-8 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

1285 No active degrees of freedom (DOF) are present

1286 The number of time step blocks limit has been exceeded
1287 Error in the reading of time function input data. Please check your input.
1288 Error in the skew coordinate system input (inadmissible direction cosines)
1289 Incorrect input data for substructures
1290 Substructure no. of condensed and retained nodes is not equal to total no. of
nodes
1291 No convergence. Invalid energy value (either NaN or Inf) in the convergence
check
1292 Incorrect displacement vector, invalid displacement values (either NaN or Inf
entries)
1293 Error in closing a porthole file (porthole splitting option)
1294 Explicit time integration cannot be used with thermal loading provided via tape
1295 Damping elements can only be used if damping is requested in the master
input
1296 TMC, different meshes for heat transfer and structure analysis cannot be used
1297 Nodal mass input, non-existing node numbers(labels) are used
1298 Nodal damping input, non-existing node numbers(labels) are used
1299 Incorrect domain decomposition, contact nodes belong to a wrong subdomain

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-9

Appendix 1

Element error messages (during element group input)

Error
Description
Number
1301 Incorrect kinematic formulation used for element group
1302 Element death/birth option flag is out of range
1303 Truss element type out-of-range
1304 Truss-gap element flag is incorrect
1305 Incorrect maximum number of nodes per element
1306 Incorrect number of element integration points
1307 Incorrect material model number for an element group
1308 Incorrect number of material constants
1309 The total number of elements in an element group is ZERO
1310 Element death/birth cannot be used with linear elements
1311 Gap elements cannot be used as linear elements
1312 Material model used requires nonlinear element groups
1313 Truss-ring element cannot have more than 1 node
1314 Truss-ring element cannot be used with skew systems
1315 Truss-ring element cannot have gap options
1316 Incompatible (bubble function) elements cannot be defined as mixed (u/p)
elements
1317 No skew system defined, elements cannot have nodes referred to a skew
systems
1318 Temperature is required for the specified material model
1319 The gap option can only be used with 2-node elements
1320 Input error in element group control parameters
1321 Youngs modulus must be greater than zero
1322 Youngs modulus must be greater than zero for all temperatures
1323 Incorrect material properties, nonlinear elastic model
1324 Incorrect material constants for a plastic material model
1325 Incorrect input data for plastic-multilinear material
1326 Incorrect input for strain rate effects
1327 Incorrect input for creep material model
1328 Material type number is out of range

A-10 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

1329 Element birth time must be smaller than death time

1330 Incorrect flag for spatial isotropy correction
1331 Energy release rate cannot be performed with fracture mechanics
1332 Mixed formulation cannot be used for some material models
1333 Wrong number of pressure points for mixed elements
1334 Incorrect number of temperature points-creep/plasticity
1335 Stress table flag out of range
1336 Soil material models cannot be used in plane stress analysis
1337 Incorrect number of curve points- user-supplied material
1338 Large strain analysis is not allowed for material model used
1339 Energy release rate can only be calculated in linear analysis
1340 Fabric material model can only be used in plane stress analysis
1341 Mixed elements cannot be used for plane stress analysis
1342 Temperature flag incorrect for concrete material model
1343 Stress tables cannot be used with the specified material
1344 Initial strains/stresses cannot be used in linear analysis or flags are incorrect
1345 Incorrect flags for user-supplied creep coefficients
1346 Incorrect flag to calculate strain energy densities
1347 Incorrect number (negative) of axes of orthotropy sets
1348 SHELLs - incorrect number of nodes in the surface direction
1349 Incorrect number of integration points through the thickness
1350 Total number of nodes must be greater or equal than number of midsurface
nodes
1351 Multi-layer SHELL can only have mid-surface nodes
1352 Improper section type specified for a BEAM element group
1353 Incorrect flag for stress output tables
1354 Moment-curvature law cannot be used with this material model
1355 Incorrect ISOBEAM element cross section type
1356 Incorrect thickness table number for ISOBEAM elements
1357 PLATE element requested material model is not available
1358 PLATE element initial flexural strains input is required
1359 Elements require nodal initial strain/stress input which is not provided

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-11

Appendix 1

1360 PIPE internal pressure cannot be used with linear pipe elements
1361 PIPE with ovalization is requested but ovalization DOFs are specified
1362 Improper input for a PIPE element
1363 Flange conditions used, which requires Newton-Cotes integration along PIPE
axis
1364 Only 4-node PIPE element can be used with warping/ovalization DOFs
1365 Full Newton iteration must be used in contact analysis
1366 CONTACT at least three contact surface nodes must be specified
1367 CONTACT at least one contact surface must be specified
1368 CONTACT at least one contact surface pair must be specified
1369 Total number of contact nodes must be GT or EQ to the number of contactor
nodes
1370 2-D CONTACT can only be: plane stress, plane strain or axisymmetric
1371 No skew system defined, contact surface nodes cannot refer to skew systems
1372 CONTACT model out-of-range, can be: frictionless or with friction
1373 Friction in explicit analysis cannot be used with selected contact algorithm
1374 3-D CONTACT number of contactor nodes must be greater or equal to 1
1375 3-D CONTACT total number of contact nodes must be greater or equal to 5
1376 3-D CONTACT at least one segment must be attached to a contact surface
node
1377 Generalized plane strain-skew system cannot allow rotations around the
X-axis
1378 Incorrect number of material data sets, please check your material input data
1379 Incorrect node number input for strain energy release calculation
1380 Triangular elements can only have 3 or 6 or 7 nodes
1381 Maximum number of nodes exceeded for a 2-D element
1382 Incorrect material data set number, please check your input data
1383 Element birth time must be smaller than element death time
1384 Porous solid elements cannot be used with explicit time integration
1385 SHELL maximum number of nodes per element exceeded
1386 Nonsymmetric moment-curvature cannot be used with this beam model
1387 Cyclic elastic rigidity not permitted for this beam model
1388 Cannot use more than one pressure DOF in 3-node triangular elements

A-12 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

1389 Cannot use more than one pressure DOF in 4-node tetrahedral elements
1390 Rigid target contact can only be used with ATS method
1391 Errors in contact segment definitions
1392 Consistent contact linearization cannot be used with direct solver
1392 Tied contact is not available in explicit time integration
1394 Large strain formulation cannot be used with multilayered shell element
1395 Incompatible modes elements: integration order must be greater than 1
1396 Error in the shell element group data, please see the *.out file for details
1397 Error in the element group control parameters, skew systems not indicated
1398 One (or more) of the element node numbers is either negative or undefined
1399 Incorrect number of nodes in a TRUSS element, program stops

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-13

Appendix 1

Temperature error messages, rigid links, loadings, etc.

Error
Description
Number
1401 Time mismatch between temperature file and program, use option interpolate
1402 Time mismatch between temperature gradient file and the program, use option
interpolate
1403 Time mismatch, pipe internal pressure file, use option interpolate
1404 Time mismatch between nodal force file and the program, use option
interpolate
1405 Rigid links fixities applied to a slave node conflicts with a motion of a
master node
1406 Pipe internal pressure is either missing or should not be present in the restart
file
Note: if pipe internal pressure is present in the first run, the it has to be present
in subsequent restart runs. The opposite also holds. I f there is no pipe internal
pressure in the first rune, then the pipe internal pressure cannot be applied in
subsequent runs.
1407 Empty
1408 Program internal error true cyclic symmetry and computing nonlinear
constraints
1409 Rigid links one rotation free and different skew systems used for M&S
nodes
1410 Rigid links only 2 translations free and different skew systems for M&S
nodes
1411 Rigid links only 1 translation free and different skew systems for M&S
nodes
1412 Temperature outside range of material property temperatures
1413 BEAM pressure loading input error, incorrect component indicator
1414 Concentrated load input data, loading cannot be generated
1415 BEAM pressure loading input error, zero length between nodes
1416 FSI, temperature file incorrect. Time span for structure is smaller than for
fluid.
The time span is equal to the total number of time steps multiplied by the time
step value.
1417 FSI, temperature gradient file incorrect. Time span for structure is smaller
than for fluid
1418 FSI, pipe int. pr. file incorrect. Time span for structure is smaller than for fluid

A-14 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

1419 Fracture, ratio of J-integral/(nodal displacement) is larger than the resistant

curve
1420 Fracture, the crack increment is negative, program stops
1421 Fracture, the J-integral number is out of range, program stops
1422 Fracture internal error, please see *.out file for more information
1423 Fracture, the number of crack nodes or rings is negative
1424 Fracture, the flag for virtual vector calculation is out of range
1425 Fracture, a crack node cannot be smaller or equal to zero
1426 Fracture, a crack node degree of freedom cannot be smaller or equal to zero
1427 Fracture, no J-integral specified for crack growth control
1428 Fracture, the number of nodes in the material shift is too small
1429 Fracture, no temperature input for temperature-dependent resistance curves
1430 Fracture, temperature at crack tip node out-of-range of resistance curves
1431 Fracture, nodes on the crack propagation surface cannot be constrained
1432 Fracture, a negative crack increment, please check the resistance curve
1433 Fracture, the end of propagation surface has been reached
1434 Fracture, crack increment is zero, please check your input
1435 Mixed-interpolated (u/p) elements cannot be used with incompatible modes
1436 Shells - element temperatures are outside material property parameters
1437 Initial temperature is outside the range of material property temperatures
1438 Fracture mechanics, incorrect crack front node number
1439 Concrete model, initial temperature must be equal to reference temperature
1440 Curve description material, gravitational strain is outside the material curve
1441 Curve description material, error in pressure-volumetric strain calculations
1442 Curve description material model cannot be used with plane stress elements
1443 Crack front node number is out of range, please check your input data
1444 Zooming, incorrect solution starting time for the zoomed model
1445 Unit containing pipe internal pressure can not be opened as requested by input
1446 Input error in temperature loading data
1447 A file unit could not be opened as requested by the input
1448 Temperature gradients can only be specified on SHELL midsurface nodes
1449 BEAM pressure load cannot be generated. Incorrect input.

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-15

Appendix 1

1450 Deformation dependent loading cannot be imposed on substructures

1451 Pressure (distributed) load is applied on non-existing nodes
1452 Pressure (distributed) loading, illegal face number
1453 Incorrect time function number specified for a load
1454 A distance between points defining an axis of rotation is zero or too small
1455 Contact slip load, contact surface, on which load is applied, does not exist
1456 Incorrectly applied contact slip load
1457 Input error in contact slip load
1458 Input error in concentrated load data
1459 Follower concentrated loading, incorrect input data
1460 Input error in electromagnetic load
1461 Ground motion loading is used with conflicting options
1462 Incorrectly applied load on a generalized plane strain element
1463 Prescribed displacements cannot be generated between two load sets
1464 A prescribed displacement is applied on a non-existing node
1465 Isobeam pressure load, incompatibility between face and auxiliary node
numbers
1466 Incorrect pressure load data
1467 Pressure loading, incorrect load direction (x-axis) for y-z plane elements
1468 Input error in pipe internal pressure loading data
1469 Input error in pressure loading data
1470 FSI stress loading FSI boundaries cannot be applied on substructures
1471 FSI (Fluid-Structure-Interaction) cannot be used with cyclic symmetry
1472 Input error in FSI boundaries (structural model)
1473 FSI forces, incorrect FSI boundaries in the structural model
1474 Potential-based fluid elements, loading used with conflicting options
1475 Potential-based fluids, error in load calculations due to mass fluxes
1476 Potential fluids, error in load calculations due to element face pressure
1477 Constrain equations cannot be applied to non-existing nodes
1478 Constrain equations, degree of freedom not marked as constrained
1479 Constrains, the independent degree of freedom is either fixed or constrained
1480 Rigid links cannot be applied to non-existing nodes

A-16 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

1481 A potential-based fluid interface element is not attached to a fluid element

1482 Incorrect input for 2-D flow load data
1483 Incorrect input for 3-D flow load data
1484 Input error in user-supplied loading data
1485 Incorrect input for fracture mechanics data
1486 A temperature file is requested but is either missing or not correct
1487 Error in shell element stress calculations
1488 Error in TMC analysis, only 2D and 3D elements are allowed
1489 Some of the master nodes used in constraints should be retained (shared)
nodes
1490 DMP can only be used with explicit analysis (in this version)
1491 Duplicate prescribed displacements are used with conflicting options
1492 The composite method cannot be used with substructures (in this version)
1493 Auxiliary node in isobeam line loading cannot be same as one of isobeam
nodes
1494 Time function specified does not cover solution time span
1495 Degrees of freedom for initial imperfection different from valuees in .mds
files
1496 Error in reading initial imperfections from .mds file
1497 Error in reading nodal displacement initial imperfections from .mds file
1498 Error in scaling initial imperfections generated from modes
1499 Program internal error in Solution Diagnostics

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-17

Appendix 1

Initial stress & element group error messages

Error
Description
Number
1501 TRUSS-initial stresses can be used for linear elastic material only
1502 2-D SOLID initial stresses can only be used for elastic & soil materials
1503 3-D SOLID initial stresses can only be used for elastic & soil materials
1504 BEAM initial stresses can only be used for linear elastic material model
1505 ISOBEAM initial stresses can only be used for linear elastic material model
1506 PLATE initial stresses can only be used for linear elastic material model
1507 SHELL initial stresses can only be used for linear (iso & ortho) materials
1508 PIPE initial stresses can only be used for linear elastic material model
1509 2-D POROUS initial stresses can only be used with elastic and soil
materials
1510 3-D POROUS initial stresses can only be used with elastic and soil
materials
1511 PLATE initial strains cannot be used with the Ilyushin material model
1512 Material model used is not permitted in CDM with mixed u/p elements
1513 Program internal error, KPP matrix is not invertible, mixed u/p elements
1514 Program internal error, a matrix is not invertible, mixed nonlinear u/p
elements
1515 2-D solid elements, incorrectly collapsed nodes, numbering sequence should
be changed
1516 Plane stress elements have to have thickness provided via input(positive
value)
1517 Energy release rate cannot be requested for more than three nodes
1518 Node numbers cannot be negative, please check your input data
1519 Incorrect 3-D transition element, nodes 22 & 27 can only be used in 27-node
bricks
1520 Incorrect 3-D transition element, node 21 can only be used in 21-node bricks
1521 Axes of orthotropy and initial strains axes have to be orthogonal
1522 Maximum number of nodes exceeded for a 3-D solid (or fluid) element
1523 Incorrect number of nodes describing a 3-D solid (or fluid) element
1524 A transition elements cannot be a true tetrahedral element
1525 BEAM elements incorrect input for a stress table

A-18 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

1526 BEAM elements incorrect input for rigid end offsets

1527 BEAM (or ISOBEAM or PIPE) elements- incorrect auxiliary node number
1528 BEAM elements zero cross-sectional area
1529 BEAM elements-negative rigidity input, the value must be greater or equal
zero
1530 BEAM elements incorrect input in the nonlinear elastic material data
1531 3-D solid elements, ULH eigenvector cannot be computed
1532 Curve-description material, gravitational strain is too large
1533 Incompatible mode elements a matrix is not invertible
1534 Ogden material model, initial strains are too large
1535 Mooney-Rivlin model, initial strains are larger than a maximum allowable
value
1536 Foam material model, initial strains are larger than a maximum allowable
value
1537 Invalid contact algorithm type
1538 Curve-description material model, incorrect volumetric pressure
1539 Curve-description material, current volumetric strain is outside the table input
1540 2D contact surface offsets cannot be based on shell thickness
1541 Layered shell elements, incorrect input for a layer number
1542 Layered shells, incorrect input data, pleas see the *.out file for details
1543 Specified material model or failure criterion is not used by any layered shell
1544 Error in the layered-shell input data, please see the *.out file for details
1545 Incorrect number of shell thickness tables for layered-shell elements
1546 Truss elements with gap, gap width cannot be negative
1547 Initial strains are too large
1548 BEAM element, error in the end release, very likely rigid body motion
1549 Incorrect thickness for isobeam axisymmetric or plane stress or strain
elements
1550 Incorrect number of nodes describing an ISOBEAM (or PIPE) element
1551 ISOBEAM or PIPE elements incorrect input for a stress table
1552 Stress printing or saving flag is incorrect
1553 isobeam(axisymmetric, plane stress/strain) elements must lie in the y-z plane
1554 Incorrect element configuration, the length cannot be smaller than zero

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-19

Appendix 1

1555 ISOBEAM, both section dimensions have to have values greater than zero
1556 BEAM, ISOBEAM or PIPE elements auxiliary node is not specified
1557 Element is not in a plane as required
1558 Auxiliary node cannot coincide or lie on a straight line with element nodes
1559 BEAM, ISOBEAM or PIPE element nodes cannot have the same
coordinates
1560 Incorrect number of nodes describing PIPE element
1561 Incorrect kinematic formulation requested for surface tension elements
1562 Surface tension elements, zero distance between nodes
1563 Incorrect number of composite shell failure sets
1564 SHELL elements, incorrect stress table input data
1565 Incorrect composite shell failure criterion number
1566 Incorrect number of nodes specified for a SHELL element
1567 Incorrect thickness table number for a SHELL element
1568 Incorrect transition SHELL element
1569 Error in the pressure-load shell-stiffness option
1570 Input error in shell stress resultant calculations
1571 Incorrect node definition for a SHELL element
1572 SHELL director vectors cannot be created, incorrect element nodal data
1573 Incorrect bend radius for a PIPE element
1574 Incorrect input for a PIPE flange data
1575 Incorrect PIPE cross section dimensions
1576 Incorrect input data for 2-D contact elements
1577 Variable contact friction requested for contact pair & not specified for
CGROUP
1578 Contact nodes refer to skew systems which is not indicated in control input
1579 Node-to-node cont, prescribed displacements cannot be applied to contactor
nodes
1580 Zero mass on contact nodes is not allowed in explicit time integration
1581 Post-impact calculation, zero mass on contact nodes is not allowed
1582 Incorrect input data for 2-D rigid target contact
1583 Incorrect input data for 3-D contact elements
1584 3-D contact, incorrect contact segment number

A-20 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

1585 3-D contact, program internal error

1586 Incorrect input data for 3-D rigid-target contact
1587 General spring elements input data errors
1588 Input error in 2-D fluid elements, please see *.out for details
1589 Input error in 3-D fluid elements, please see *.out for details
1590 Memory corrupted in 2-D fluid elements
1591 Memory corrupted in 3-D fluid elements
1592 Incorrect number of nodes for a spring element
1593 Potential-based infinite elements cannot be triangular
1594 Potential-based interface elements, incorrect number of nodes in an element
1595 Potential-based fluid elements, input error in material data
1596 General (spring, damping or mass) elements, incorrect property set number
1597 Incorrect input data for general (spring, damping or mass) elements
1598 Incorrect input data for a user-supplied general element
1599 Incorrect input data for a CGAP element

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-21

Appendix 1

Frequency solution and element group error messages

Error
Description
Number
1601 Frequency negative/zero diagonal element before decomposition. Incorrect
model.
1602 Frequency too many negative diagonal elements, please check your model
1603 Number of mass DOFs is smaller than the number of requested frequencies
1604 Frequency rigid body shift input must be negative
(FREQUENCIES...RSHIFT=-...)
1605 Frequency zero pivot after decomposition, rigid body shift should be applied
1606 Frequency cannot be calculated for a single DOF, mass is not greater than
zero.
1607 Frequency, determinant search method rigid body mode found
1608 Determinant search method lower bound of the first frequency not found,
incorrect model
1609 Determinant search method non-positive calculated shift, probably incorrect
model
1610 Frequency calculation no eigenvalue computed, please check your model
1611 Frequency-no eigenvalue computed, check for rigid body without fluid effects
1612 Determinant search method upper bound of current eigenvalue not found,
incorrect model
1613 Frequency non-positive or too small calculated shift, probably incorrect
model
1614 Frequency, potential based fluids no convergence to rigid body mode
1615 Multi-block solution cannot be used if mass/stiffness are imported from file
1616 Could not factorize A*F=B frequency and potential based fluid elements
1617 No convergence in eigensolver, please check your model or solution
parameters
1618 Solution for linearized buckling failed, please check your model
1619 No convergence, subspace iteration, increase no. of iterations/starting vectors
1620 Upper bound for the first critical buckling load not found
1621 FREQUENCIES, interval too narrow, use higher value for FMAX or lower
for FMIN
1622 Sturm sequence failed, no eigenvalue found, please check your model
1623 Frequencies, matrices not positive and no shift applied

A-22 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

1624 Frequency calculations failed, matrices not positive

1625 Frequencies, matrices not positive after a sweep or no shift applied
1626 Frequencies, JACOBI iteration could not converge, please check your model
1627 Lanczos method, stiffness matrix not positive definite, please check your
model
1628 Lanczos method, not enough memory, please increase allocation for ADINA
1629 Lanczos method internal error, please check your model
1630 Mode superposition, potential based fluid elements- program internal error
1631 Sturm sequence shows that incorrect number of frequencies has been
calculated
1632 Mode superposition cannot be done with rigid body motions and potential
fluids
1633 Subspace method, end of file while reading user-provided starting vectors
1634 Bolt elements can only be used with linear elastic material model
1635 Memory corruption in 3D rigid-target contact group
1636 Frequency option used is not allowed in this program version
1645 Error when reading restart file for 3D rigid-target contact group
1650 Estimated storage less than actual storage for element group - internal error
1656 Internal error during initializatoin of 3D rigid-target contact group
1658 Zero area contactor segment in 3D rigid-target contact group
1663 Internal error during processing of drawbeads in 3D rigid-target contact group
1664 Porous element cannot have elastic material with temper. in linear analysis
1665 Material/element combination used not compatible with nonlinear cyclic
symmetry
1666 Program internal error. See output file for more details
1667 Negative el. volume, stresses cannot be calculated in Nastran element system
1668 Mismatch of contact parameters in restart analysis
1669 No convergence in the Lanczos method, changing shifting value might help
1670 Internal error in 3D fracture, pressure corr, FRC3CA
1671 3D fracture pressure correction does not support this IDIRN
1672 2D fracture pressure correction does not support this IDIRN
1673 Fracture line contours cannot be used with triang integration
1674 Fracture line contours cannot be used with el numbers > 99999

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-23

Appendix 1

1675 Crack propagation with pressure load correction and deform-independent

pressure
1676 Crack propagation cannot be performed in linear analysis
1677 Error in solution monitoring input data. See output file for more details.
1678 Insufficient displacement at prescribed LDC degree of freedom
1679 Incorrect input data for cohesive elements

A-24 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

Material data errors

Error
Description
Number
1701 BEAM bending table (R-T plane) input data cannot have negative values
1702 BEAM bending table (R-T plane) input data cannot have zero values
1703 BEAM multiplier used to compute stiffness of rigid end zones is negative
1704 BEAM axial force table input data cannot have negative values
1705 BEAM axial force table input data cannot have zero values
1706 BEAM torsion table input data cannot have negative values
1706 BEAM torsion table input data cannot have zero values
1708 BEAM bending table (R-T plane) input data is not in ascending order
1709 BEAM axial force table input data is not in ascending order
1710 BEAM torsion table input data is not in ascending order
1711 BEAM bending table (R-S plane) input data cannot have negative values
1712 BEAM bending table (R-S plane) input data cannot have zero values
1713 BEAM bending table (R-S plane) input data is not in ascending order
1714 BEAM axial, bending, torsional cyclic factors must be greater or equal to
1.0
1715 Isotropic elastic material, Young's modulus and/or Poisson ratio is incorrect
1716 BEAM, rigidity, FORCE-AXIAL table, curve n-th slope is larger than the n-1
slope
1717 BEAM, rigidity, MOMENT-R (twist) table, n-th slope is larger than the n-1
slope
1718 BEAM, rigidity, MOMENT-S table, curve n-th slope is larger than the n-1
slope
1719 BEAM, rigidity, MOMENT-T table, curve n-th slope is larger than the n-1
slope
1720 Material creep-variable, effective stress is out of the stress range input
1721 Material creep-variable, yield curve cannot be interpolated, incorrect input
1722 Integration point temperature is outside material temperature range
1723 Material creep, integration point initial temperature is outside material
temperature
1724 Material concrete, cut-off tensile stress SIGMAT has to be greater than zero

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-25

Appendix 1

1725 Material concrete, incorrect input for SIGMAC, SIGMAU and/or EPSC,
EPSU
1726 Zero point in axial force table not found
1727 Zero point in torsion table not found
1728 Position of zero point in torsion table varies with axial force
1729 Zero point in bending (R-T plane) table not found
1730 Position of zero point in bending (R-T) table varies with axial force
1731 Zero point in bending (R-S plane) table not found
1732 Position of zero point in bending (R-S) table varies with axial force
1733 Insufficient data points in axial force table (positive side)
1734 Insufficient data points in axial force table (negative side)
1735 Insufficient data points in torsion table (positive side)
1736 Insufficient data points in torsion table (negative side)
1737 Insufficient data points in bending (R-T plane) table (positive side)
1738 Insufficient data points in bending (R-T plane) table (negative side)
1739 Insufficient data points in bending (R-S plane) table (positive side)
1740 Insufficient data points in bending (R-S plane) table (negative side)
1741 Visco-elastic shear model, decay constants in Prony series cannot be equal to
zero
1742 Visco-elastic shear model, number of terms in Prony series cannot be greater
than 5
1743 Visco-elastic bulk mass, decay constants in Prony series cannot be equal to
zero
1744 Visco-elastic bulk mass, number of terms in Prony series cannot be greater
than 5
1745 User-supplied material, no convergence in effective plastic strain
1746 No convergence in plasticity. Using automatic time stepping might help.
1747 No convergence in the creep model. Using automatic time stepping might
help.
1748 Strains outside input data, nonlinear elastic material model, truss elements
1749 Input error in irradiation creep property table input
1750 Input of mixed hardening parameters for von-Mises plasticity is incorrect
1751 Error in the optional printing for the large strain (ULH) formulation
1752 Input error in the material property data for 2-D solid elements

A-26 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

1753 Input error in the gasket material property data set

1754 Input error in the material property data for 3-D solid elements
1755 BEAM elements error in the elasto-plastic moment- curvature input
1756 BEAM elements error in the user-supplied material data
1757 BEAM elements incorrect cross-section input data
1758 Orthotropic material model, incorrect material data
1759 Error in the truss material data input
1760 Fabric material model, material axis angle larger than 2*PI
1761 Incorrect material data input for the fabric model
1762 Incorrect material properties for a thermo-orthotropic material model
1763 BEAM element, plasticity, shear reduction factor must be smaller than 1.0
1764 Isotropic elastic material, coefficient of thermal expansion is negative
1765 Input error in the material property data for isobeam elements
1766 Input error in the material property data for plate elements
1767 Input error in the material property data for SHELL elements
1768 Input error in (composite) shell failure criteria
1769 Input error in the material property data for pipe elements
1770 Input error, SHELL orthotropic plasticity, constituent matrix not positive
definite
1771 User-supplied material model, material axis angle larger than 2*PI
1772 thermo-orthotropic material model, material axis angle larger than 2*PI
1773 Orthotropic material model, material axis angle larger than 2*PI
1774 Porous elements, porous properties not available for material model used
1775 Input error in the material property data for 2-D porous elements
1776 Input error in the material property data for 3-D porous elements
1777 Incorrect material model for the gap element
1778 No initial stress input for Cam-Clay material model
1779 Non-positive stretch in Sussman-Bathe material
1780 Orthotropic material, at least one coefficient of thermal expansion is negative
1781 Area & area moments of moment-curv. beams must be non-zero in explicit
analysis
1782 Invalid elastic Finger tensor
1783 Invalid plastic Cauchy tensor

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-27

Appendix 1

1784 Invalid total Cauchy tensor

1785 No positive root of strain memory equation
1786 Invalid isotropic model number
1787 Invalid kinematic model number
1788 Accum eff pl str too big in isotr model table
1789 No conv in plastic strain iterations
1790 Could not solve for increment in plastic strain
1791 Could not invert matrix used for const. matrix
1792 No real root of strain memory equation
1793 Negative plastic strain norm increment
1794 Could not solve for initial pl strain norm incr
1795 Error in plastic-cyclic material properties
1796 Invalid rupture model number
1797 Intermediate yield surface has zero radius

A-28 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

General errors, messages

Error
Description
Number
1801 No convergence, iteration limit reached, automatic time stepping might help
1802 No convergence, out-of-balance load too large, automatic time stepping might
help
1803 Zero (or almost zero) length between element nodes
1804 Zero (or almost zero) length of the orthotropic material axes vector
1805 Number of nodes exceeds the limit (900)
1806 Mapping Interface error, please contact ADINA R&D, Inc.
1807 Mapping program internal error, please contact ADINA R&D, Inc.
1808 Incorrect displacement boundary conditions for cyclic symmetry
1809 Incorrectly prescribed displacements on cyclic parts
1810 the number of prescribed displacements is greater than requested in the input
1811 Prescribed displacement unloading option cannot be used in linear analysis
1812 Incorrect degree of freedom (DOF) entry in the prescribed displacement input
1813 Arrival time cannot be negative. This holds for all load cases.
1814 Incorrectly prescribed displacements in cyclic symmetry analysis
1815 Internal error in cyclic symmetry, program stops
1816 A shell node on the cyclic boundary cannot have 5 degrees of freedom
1817 Cyclic symmetry, Y direction for nodes on the center line is not constrained
1818 Error(s) in cyclic symmetry
1819 Number of prescribed displacements is changed from one cyclic part to
another
1820 Skyline solver (COLSOL) cannot be used with consistent contact algorithm
1821 Periodic symmetry cannot be used with explicit dynamic analysis
1822 Insufficient memory for double-sided contact algorithm
1823 Insufficient memory - FSI analysis. Use -R option (maximum memory for
solution).
1824 Internal error in GASKET material, program stops
1825 Master degrees of freedom are modified in the restart run, which cannot be
done
1826 Error in user-supplied friction model calculations

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-29

Appendix 1

1827 Internal error in surface tension boundary, program stops

1828 Bad key in NASTRAN-OP2 stress output, program stops
1829 Error in NASTRAN-OP2 principal stress calculations, program stops
1830 EXP( ) is too large in Mooney-Rivlin material
1831 Non-positiveitive stretch in Ogden material
1832 Non-positiveitive stretch in hyper-foam material
1833 Bad isotropic model number in rubber
1834 Non-positive volume in 3-D rubber
1835 Bad orthotropic model number in rubber
1836 Zero pivot in stress-strain matrix for viscoelastic rubber
1837 Could not determine eigenvalues for viscoelastic rubber
1838 Could not determine actual J3 for Arruda-Boyce material
1839 Actual J3 out of range for Arruda-Boyce material
1840 Cannot use U/P formulation with hyper-foam material
1841 Bad isotropic model number in rubber
1842 Thermal strain less than -1.0 in rubber
1843 Too many orthotropic directions for orthotropic viscoelastic rubber
1844 EXP( ) is too large in orthotropic rubber
1845 Non-positive in-plane area in compressive plane stress rubber
1846 Bad isotropic model number in rubber
1847 Bad orthotropic model number in rubber
1848 Cannot find bounding out-of-plane stretches in rubber
1849 Cannot begin Newton iterations in rubber
1850 Zero slope in Newton iterations in rubber
1851 No convergence in Newton iterations in rubber
1852 Bad isotropic model number in rubber
1853 Non-positive stretch in compressive plane stress rubber
1854 Zero denominator in WLF shift function in rubber
1855 Bad isotropic model number in rubber
1856 Bad isotropic model number in rubber
1857 Bad isotropic model number in rubber
1858 Bad isotropic model number in rubber

A-30 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

1859 Non-positive in-plane area in incompressible plane stress rubber

1860 Invalid value for element STYPE in axisymmetric/plane strain rubber
1861 Non-positive volume in axisymmetric/plane strain rubber
1862 Non-positive stretch in incompressible plane stress rubber
1863 Non-positive in-plane area in incompressible plane stress rubber
1864 Invalid value for element STYPE in axisymmetric/plane strain rubber
1865 Non-positive stretch in axisymmetric/plane strain rubber
1866 Non-positive in-plane area in axisymmetric/plane strain rubber
1867 Non-positive volume in axisymmetric/plane strain rubber
1868 Non-positive in-plane area in orthotropic compressible plane stress rubber
1869 Excessive penetration in rigid target contact algorithm
1870 Fracture mechanics cannot be used in a distributed memory parallel
processing
1871 ADINA trap error, program stops
1872 Excessive displacements in explicit analysis, probably due to unstable time
step
1873 Material model not allowed in explicit analysis
1874 Mismatch of element parameters in 3-D restart analysis
1875 Mismatch of element parameters in 2-D restart analysis
1876 Mismatch of element parameters in shell restart analysis
1877 General constrains (or mesh gluing) cannot be used in explicit time
integration
1878 Number of components in a general constraint equation is larger than the
maximum specified value by the input
1879 Non-positive elastic Finger tensor in ULH shells
1880 Non-positive Finger tensor in ULH shells
1881 Invalid deformation tensor (from displacements) in ULH shells
1882 Invalid deformation tensor in ULH shells
1883 Non-positive volume in ULH shells
1884 Non-positive updated Jacobian determinant in ULH shells
1885 Wrong input data, this input is for FSI analysis, not for solids only
1886 Incorrect node number or DOF for a general constraint equation
1887 Skyline solver (COLSOL) with blocking solution cannot be used for this case

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-31

Appendix 1

1888 Estimated number of time steps for explicit analysis is excessive

1889 Total number of elements is smaller than the number of subdomains
1890 Program internal error. A subdomain cannot have zero elements.
1891 Program internal errror, incorrect node flags for the iterative solver
1892 Program internal error in data preparation for the iterative solver
1893 Incorrect input data for TLA or TLA-S restart analysis
1894 No porous media in TP-FSI analysis, incorrect solid model
1895 3D-iterative solver cannot be used for this model
1896 Program internal error in DMP contact
1897 Restart from explicit to linear implicit time integration is not allowed
1898 Error in reading .dat file in domain decomposition
1899 Modal analysis cannot be used with nonlinear incom.mode (or u/p) elements

A-32 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

Sparse solver messages

Error
Description
Number
1901 Problem too large for the 32-bit version, no. of matrix elements larger than
2E31
1902 Sparse solver could not open a file, please check your write permission
1903 Sparse solver, write file failed, please check your disk space
1904 Reading the L-matrix failed, please check the disk space the file size
1905 Sparse solver, write file failed, please check the disk space
1906 Sparse solver, write file failed, please check the disk space
1907 Sparse solver, read file failed, please check the disk space
1908 Sparse solver, read file failed, please check the disk space
1909 Not enough memory for in-core analysis, solver switches to out-of-core
1910 Not enough memory for renumbering (pre-processing) in the sparse solver
1911 Sparse solver internal error, please contact ADINA R&D, Inc.
1940 Not enough memory on the system to be allocated for the solver
1941 Error in the multi-grid solver, program stops
1942 AMG iterative solver failed, please check your model or use another solver
1950 3D-ITE solver internal error, please contact ADINA R&D, Inc.

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-33

Appendix 1

Errors with specific information

Error
Description
Number
2001 BEAM: group= element=, nodes 1 and 2 are too close to each other
2002 BEAM: group= element=, auxiliary node is not positioned correctly
2003 Error in closing a file (file probably does not exist), file=
2004 No convergence in Gurson model, element group=, element number=
2005 Input ERROR, element group number=, material property set number=
2009 Stiffness matrix not positive definite, eqn=, pivot=
2010 Duplicate input in electromagnetic loading, nodes
2011 Restart from cyclic symmetry analysis is not allowed
2012 Incorrect ADINA internal input (*.dat) file, maximum model size is zero
2013 Element has zero stable time step in explicit analysis
2014 Non-positive temp in Arrhenius shift function in rubber
2015 Restart, explicit to implicit or implicit to explicit not allowed in DMP version
2016 Incorrect number of subdivisions used in a restart run
2017 Error in user-supplied material model calculations
2018 Fracture mechanics must use .dat file of 8.5 and higher.
2019 Shell relative rotation penalty, initial mids is overdist
2020 Shell relative rotation penalty, current mids is overdist
2021 Shell relative rotation penalty, invalid initial dir vector
2022 Shell relative rotation penalty, invalid current dir vector
2023 Shell relative rotation penalty, initial angle > 90 degrees
2024 Shell relative rotation penalty, current angle > 90 degrees
2025 Shell relative rotation penalty, initial angle > max angle
2026 Shell relative rotation penalty, current angle > max angle
2027 Element (or contact) group ID number has been changed in restart
2028 The number of contact surfaces has been changed in restart
2029 Contact surface ID numbers have been changed in restart
2030 Non-zero initial temperature gradients are not allowed in this version
2031 Memory corruption at start of 3D shell element group
2032 Memory corruption at end of 3D shell element group

A-34 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

2033 Error when reading restart file for 3D shell element group
...

2042
2043 Error in 3D shell element group data, see the out file for details
2044 3D shell element group initial stresses cannot be used
2045 3D shell element group with icm or u/p an internal matrix cannot be
inverted
2046 Invalid deformation tensor (from disp) in 3D shell
2047 Invalid deformation tensor in 3D shell
2048 Non-positive updated Jacobian determinant in 3D shell
2049 Number of tying points is larger than max in 3D shell
2050 No data saved on the restart file, the file is empty
2051 ADINA-T/ADINA-TMC analysis model is incorrect
2052 Not enough memory allocated for the DMP program
2053 Maximum available memory need to be specified for the DMP program
2054 Direct FSI coupling cannot be used with ADINA-TMC options
2055 Prescribed accelerations or velocities cannot be used in direct FSI coupling
2056 Material model used requires temperature data
2057 Matrix direct input cannot be used with explicit time integration
2058 Matrix direct input cannot be used with lumped mass matrix
2059 Matrix direct input cannot be used with lumped damping matrix
2060 Thickness table given for non plane stress element group
2061 Element uses invalid row in thickness table
2062 Varying thickness plane stress element cannot be used in 2-model TMC
analysis
2063 Varying thickness plane stress element cannot be used in FSI analysis
2064 Element group not found for 2D load
2065 Element group not 2D for 2D load
2066 Element not found for 2D load
2067 Element side not found for 2D load
2068 Mid-side node not found for 2D load
2069 Number of nodes in 2D element less than 4.
2070 Number of nodes in 3D element less than 8.
2071 Both quad and tri plane stress elements use same entry of thickness table

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-35

Appendix 1

Heat transfer related errors

Error
Description
Number
3001 Number of latent heats specified is above a limit value set for this version
3002 Latent heat requires transient analysis with lumped heat capacity matrix
3003 Program internal error in TMC calculations
3004 Only Euler backward method can be used with the phase change options
3005 Incorrect input data for latent heat
3006 Time step for heat transfer solutions is too small
3007 Thermal constraint equations are out of order
3008 Not a valid node number in thermal constraint equations
3009 Incorrect number of independent parameters in thermal constraints
3010 Node not marked as thermally constrained in the input deck
3011 A master DOF in a thermal constraints is not an active degree of freedom
3012 Heat transfer analysis cannot be performed for loadig solution options used
3013 Incorrect time function number for a temperature load
3014 Temperatures cannot be prescribed on an inactive degree of freedom
3015 Temperatures cannot be prescribed on non-existing nodes
3016 Nodal heat flow applied to a non-existing node
3017 Incorrect time function number for a nodal heat flow load
3018 D heat flux is applied to an element edge defined by non-existing nodes
3019 Incorrect time function number for a heat flux load
3020 Incorrect thermostat heat flux input data
3021 Non-existing node numbers in a 3-D heat flux input
3022 Time function number specified for internal heat generation is not valid
3023 Heat flow analysis cannot be done if zero time steps is specified for displ.
3024 Not enough memory to factorize the effective heat flow conductivity matrix
3025 Conductivity matrix is not positive definite
3026 Temperature value outside of a specified range in the input data
3027 Incorrect element node input, zero length between nodes
3028 Element birth time is not smaller than element death time - boundary el. group
3029 Incorrect input for a heat flow boundary element group

A-36 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
 Error messages

3030 Heat flow calculations, program internal error

3031 Incorrect node number specified in a nodal convection input data
3032 Material property set number outside of a specified range in the input data
3033 Incorrect node number specified in a nodal radiation input data
3034 Radiation temperature calculation - temperature is too high
3035 Material model set number is outside of the total number of material sets
3036 Element number not found in calculating a heat generation load
3037 Time is outside range of times specified in a conduction-time curve
3038 Integration point temperature is outside range of temperatures in heat generat.
3039 Program internal error in TMC analysis
3040 No convergence in Newton-Raphson iterations for temperatures
3041 Corner contact option cannot be used with TMC
3042 Only constraint function contact algorithm can be used with TMC
3043 Explicit time integration cannot be used with TMC
3044 Heat flow analysis cannot be performed in explicit displacement analysis
3045 Program is not allowed to run heat transfer or thermo-mechanical (TMC)
problems
3046 Requested material model cannot be used for SHELL heat flow elements
3047 Radiation or convection boundary nodes are not connected to any element.
3048 Seepage model is not available for shell element
3049 Incorrect material axes orientation for heat flow orthotropic material
3050 Top & bottom layered shell cannot be used with heat flow solutions
3051 Only 2-node heat flow 1-D elements can be used in this program version
3052 No temperature DOFs specified for a heat flow solution
3053 Isobeam axisymmetric and plane strain elements cannot be used with TMC
3054 Piezoelectric analysis can only be used with TMC iterative coupling
3055 Element group not found for boundary element
3056 Element group not 2D for boundary element
3057 Element not found for boundary element
3058 Element side not found for boundary element
3059 Mid-side node not found for boundary element
3060 Mismatch of boundary element group and attached element group

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-37

Appendix 1

Interface output related errors

Error
Description
Number
4001 Title record is wrong in the Femap neutral file
4002 Load set record is wrong in the Femap neutral file
4003 Each record is not begun or ended properly in the Femap neutral file
4004 Displacement record is wrong in the Femap neutral file
4005 Reaction record is wrong in the Femap neutral file
4006 Threedsolid stress/strain record is wrong in the Femap neutral file
4007 Beam force_moment record is wrong in the Femap neutral file
4008 Shell stress/strain record is wrong in the Femap neutral file
4009 Twod planar stress/strain record is wrong in the Femap neutral file
4010 Spring result record is wrong in the Femap neutral file
4011 Truss result record is wrong in the Femap neutral file
4012 Threedsolid gasket element result record is wrong in the Femap neutral file
4013 Contact traction result record is wrong in the Femap neutral file
4014 Contact force result record is wrong in the Femap neutral file
4015 Nodal coordinate record is wrong in the Femap neutral file
4016 Element connectivity record is wrong in the Femap neutral file
4017 Eigenvector record is wrong in the Femap neutral file

A-38 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition